THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS ’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND

CHARLESWORTH'’S ‘MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. ’)

CONDUCTED BY

CHARLES C. BABINGTON, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S.,

JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., V.P.Z.8. &c.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S.

aero

VOL. XX.—THIRD SERIES ——Y_

PE ED CO I saniat

1 Ins ~

USUity x

‘Wf

( 2F2VO5

tional Museums,

LONDON:

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER} SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.;

KENT AND CO.3; BAILLIERE, REGENT STREET, AND PARIS:

MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH ;

HODGES AND SMITH, DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1867.

“Qmnes res create sunt divine sapientie et potentie testes, divitiz felicitatis

humane :—ex harum usu donitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini;

ex ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis elucet.

Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibirelictis semper estimata; a veré eruditis

et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper inimica fuit.”—

LINNEUS.

“ Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour voir

qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rapportent

toutes ses opérations.” BRUCKNER, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden, 1767.

SMten elif lila -meme ne sylvanenowers

Obey our summons; from their deepest dells

The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild

And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs

That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme

And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,

But scatter round ten thousand forms minute

Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock

Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too

Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face

They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush

That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,

Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,

The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,

All, all to us unlock their secret stores

And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818.

CONTENTS OF VOL. XX.

[THIRD SERIES. ]

NUMBER CXV.

I. Onthe Annelid Genus Spherodorum, CErsted, and a new Repre-

sentative of it, S. Claparedii. By Dr. RicHArD GREErFF. (Plate IL.)

II. On the Menispermacee. By Joun Miers, F.R.S., F.L.S.,

PSIG, 6 SG SS oppLoCeor cen coddaco: HEnSbdrnosennosnocesbecdoasiog Aepoaoacceneconcae sec

III. List of Coleoptera received from Old Calabar, on the West

Coast of Africa. By ANDREW MURRAY, F.L.S. ..........ccseesecsenees

IV. Remarks on the Potton Sands, in reply to Mr. Walker’s Paper

in the ‘Annals of Natural History’ for November 1866. By Harry

Govier SEELEY, F.G.S., of the Woodwardian Museum in the Uni-

EET) CES 0) 0 1G FE ee penonS cchectindoescucncocnteder csdennbuneneduannceccbosnoas

V. Remarks on Pyrula (Fulgur) carica (Lamarck) and Pyrula

(Fulgur) perversa (Lamarck). By T. GRAHAM PONTON....++...e0000.

VI. On the Tunnelling Coleopterous Genera Bledius, Heterocerus,

Dyschirius, and their Danish Species. By Professor J. C. ScHIODTE

VII. Description of a new Australian Tortoise (Elseya latisternum).

By Dr. J. E. GRAy, F.R.S. &e. ...2.000000. APpdecr” Sen enpgonee neenoacoodn

VIII. Additions to the knowledge of Australian Reptiles and

Fishes. By ALBERT GinTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S. .........

IX. On the Shell-structure of Spirifer cuspidatus, and of certain

allied Spiriferide. By Wiuu1AM B, Carpenter, M.D., F.R.S. ...

New Books:—1. A List of the Flowering Plants, Ferns, and Mosses

collected in the immediate neighbourhood of Andover, by C. B.

Clarke.—2. Flora of Devon and Cornwall, by J. W. N. Keys.

(Ranunculaceze—Geraniacez.)—3. The Bath Flora: a Lecture

delivered to the Members of the Bath Natural History and Anti-

quarian Field Club, by the Rev. L. Jenyns.—4. Flora of Norfolk :

a Catalogue of Plants found in the County of Norfolk, by the

Rev. K.: Trimmer:...s..3 Maslemaieciceiicrisesteescinciceestsenedilnesieiecieresiiscte sete

Page

iv CONTENTS.

Page

On the actual state of our Information relative to the ‘ Leporide,’ or

Hybrid between Hare and Rabbit, by Dr. Pigeaux ; Megaceros

hibernicus in the Cambridgeshire Fens, by Norman Moore, Esq.;

Note on Assiminea Francesie, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.; On

the Species of the Genera Latiavis, Faunus, and Melanatria, by

Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; Descriptions of new Fishes, by Dr.

F. Steindachner; Supplement to ‘ English Botany’ ......... 75—80

NUMBER CXVI.

X. On Waldheimia venosa, Solander, sp. By THomas Davipson,

BOP Mone Sas BaCaca cas venescernsscencesecenserenenesreeceans cece aaswender aren: 81

XI. List of Coleoptera received from Old Calabar, on the West

Coast of Africa. By ANDREW MURRAY, FLAS. ......sssececcseececsees 83

XII. On the Occurrence of Diplommatina Huttoni in Trinidad.

By R. J. LecHMERE Guppy, F.G.S., F.L.S. ...-......seeeeceeeee aeceua ego

XIII. Conchological Gleanings. By Dr. E. von MarTENs ...... 97

XIV. Notule Lichenologice. No. XVI. By the Rev. W. A.

Lereuron, B.A., F.L.S.—Prof. Santo Garovaglio on the Species of

Verrucaria found in Lombardy .......scccccescsescsescscscececscscsesoeases 106

XV. New Fishes from the Gaboon and Gold Coast. By ALBERT

GintTuer, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S. (Plates II. & IIT.) ......... 110

XVI. Description of a new cee of Apocryptes. By Dr. ALBERT

SGU NUPELIOH Gren oss ebasaesnnecnsscaciebieessnnameerssseyeacer: casreaeme.t oneeeeartne 117

XVII. A Reply to Mr. H. G. Seeley’s Remarks on my Account of

the Phosphatic Deposit at Potton in Bedfordshire. By J. F. WALKER,

B.A., F.C.P.S., F.C.S., F.G.S, Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge... 118

XVIII. Note on the Species of the Genus Tribonyz. By P. L.

SciaTer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Zoological Society

Gl MN GGN 45525205005 ssas5cij0. 50s onenddepeentibe song doe soaRseatustmeeeeemene arena 122

XIX. On. Hyalonema lusitanicum. By J. V. BArBoza bu Bo-

CAGE sescccccesccsvessvacencessanaseccnesssoncsssaseoesereseccendes decescedens sec 123

Eroceeamps of the Royal Society c-2c2<0.00-s=s0--s0sne-aesennaceuse 127—140

Cases of Monstrosities becoming the starting-point of New Races in

Plants, by C. Naudin; The Theory of the Skeleton, by Harry

Seeley, Esq.; Note on the Phenomena of Muscular Contraction

in the Vorticelle, by C. Rouget; On the Regeneration of the

Limbs in the Axolotl (Siren pisciformis), by J. M. Philipeaux ;

On the Development of the brown Aphis of the Maple, by MM.

Balbiani and Signoret; Cervus megaceros previously known in

the Fens, by H. Seeley, Esq. ......... Seman en snessseeecoresk 141—152

CONTENTS. i's

NUMBER CXVII.

XX. On Venomous Fishes. By M. Auguste DUMERIL ......... 153

XXI. On the Menispermacee. By Joun Miers, F.R.S., F.LS.,

SiGe Seetearan ee enone Pa sacrcennena: stuce camadacsee saan eae en ee secendc cos ee 167

XXII. On the Recent Zoology and Paleontology of Victoria. By

FREDERICK M‘Coy, Professor of Natural Science in the University

of Melbourne, Director of the National Museum of Victoria, &e. ..... 175

XXIII. Notes on Spiders, with Descriptions of several Species

supposed to be new to Arachnologists. By JoHN BLACKWALL,

XXIV. On some new Species of Oliva and a new Trivia. By

IBS OPV Meee co WE REA a cans ove coatet/ ans tea aucenssSacesie cou qes tank ccactn ess 213

XXV. Descriptions of some remarkable new Species and a new

Genus of Diurnal Lepidoptera. By ArtHur G. Burter, F.Z.S.

EAC ies pear to uaa eetatt actiec ceccateatans ee caneinedunsSenactteanunses sau 216

XXVI. Description of a new Species of Tiger-Moth in the pos-

session of Mr. T. W. Wood. By ArrHur G. Buruer, F.Z.S.

QBlate PM shies ehe) cua cesaaseeceqs on Se staouuse eda csi sesceeacansueSeuncaatagnes 2]

XXVII. Notes on the Skulls of Hares (Leporide) and Picas (La-

gomyide) in the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S....... 219

oa)

XXVIII. Descriptions of two new Saurians from Mossamedes

(West Afries). By J. V. BARHOZA DU BOGAGE 0.2.5.2... 500 ssceck wea 2o

On the Development of the Ctenophora, by A. Kowalewsky; Re-

markable Instances of Crustacean Parasitism, by A. E. Verrill ;

On the Anatomy of Balanoglossus (Delle Chiaje), by A. Kowa-

lewsky ; On the external Characters of the Young ef the Central

American Tapir (Elasmognathus Bairdii, Gill), by A. E. Verrill

228—232

NUMBER CXVIII.

XXIX. On the Classification of the Subdivisions of M‘Coy’s Genus

Athyris, as determined by the laws of Zoological Nomenclature. By

E. Bituines, Palzontologist of the Gevlogical Survey of Canada ... 233

XXX. Fourth Report on Dredging among the Shetland Isles. By

Jit GWAVINE UIE RR VIS RHA Ses sci iaw ce sanckeen seceueulen coo ceatres cake Sec cacseces 247

XXXI. Notule Lichenologice. No. XVII. By the Rev. W. A.

Leteuton, B.A., F.L.S.—Dr. W. Nylander on new British Lichens 256

XXXII. On the Menispermacee. By Joun Mters, F.RS.,

vi CONTENTS.

Page

XXXIII. Revision of the Group of Lepidopterous Insects hitherto

included in the Genus Pronophila of Westwood. By A. G. BuTLER,

EZ Sack weecc a cneeccs saimeelasiuateres ovsiailestel aaa os baie Sug as os oe aaRea encore wack peti 266

XXXIV. On two new Birds from Eastern Australia. By JoHN

GOULD, EORS) cicnccsencec oss ssnveecacwencconcstteaqesenteeanavaacusmqesvpetact 269

XXXV. Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels (Sciuride) in the Collec-

tion of the British Museum, describing one new Genus and some new

Species. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., V.P.ZS., & 0. ceeceeeeeseeeeeees 270

XXXVI. On anew Genus of Phalanger. By FrepERIcK M‘Coy,

Professor of Natural Science in the Melbourne University and Director

of the National Museum of Victoria. (Plate VI.) .........sceeeeeseeseees 287

XXXVII. Additions to the British Fauna. By Dr. ALBERT

GunwHer, FIR.S.. (Plate Vi) o.cccscesecccascupsyeendennnscnvsiweaceevasuna 288

XXXVIII. On the Systematic Value of Rhynchophorous Coleo-

ptera. By Joun L. Leconte, MUD rh eee ee reece cence wen asst 291

Proceedings of the Royal Society ......s..ssessseeesseseeeeeeeecaeees 294—300

Notice of a new Species of Spider Monkey (Ateles Bartlettiz) in the

British Museum, by Dr. J. E. Gray; Note on a Species of Plana-

rian Worm hitherto apparently not described, by the Rev. W.

Houghton, M.A., F.L.S.; Megaceros hibernicus in the Cam-

bridgeshire Fens, by Mr. Norman Moore ; Note on Ursus lasio-

tus, a hairy-eared Bear from North China, by Dr. J. E. Gray,

F.R.S. &e.; On the Anatomy and Physiology of Amphioxus, by

MOP Bent. oc cxcenaaccccataccoates wees ceueuectcvcheacresactessnctcs 300—304

NUMBER CXIX.

XXXIX. On a new form of Mudfish from New Zealand. By

Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER; F.R-S: (Plate VIR) ccitiswex cosctss=scu>-cn0e 305

XL. Remarks upon Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa observed at Sea.

By CurHpert CoLLInGwoobD, M.A., F.L.S. &. cessseeeeeeeeeee sees 309

XLI. List of Coleoptera received from Old Calabar, on the West

Coast of Africa. By ANDREW Murray, F.LS. ............00 ere 314

XLII. Synopsis of the African Squirrels (Sciwrid@) in the Collee-

tion of the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S.,

Keeper of the Zoological Department .......... seaaamedanwd “Cena sopceeenr 323

XLIII. On some undescribed points in the Anatomy of the Limpet

(Patella vulgata). By E. Ray Lanxesrer, Christ Church, Oxford 334

XLIV. On the Structure of the Annelida, including a critical

CONTENTS. Vil

Page

Examination of the most recent Works on this class of Worms. By

PRE GA DIAS CRN eee cee ede ines naicanis'c omaaeeicseeiaseenpaste.<s sda sarewes oases aces 337

XLV. On the Campodee, a Family of Thysanura, By Dr. Fr.

MEINERO ce0--o-e2000 Geseat=ren SSL BE PRPC p ? oe SRE AERO EAP RE Soe Een 361

New Books :—British Conchology. Vol. [V. Marine Shells, in con-

tinuation of the Gastropoda as far as the Bulla Family, by John

Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S., F.G.S., &e.—Muind in Nature; or, the

Origin of Life and the Mode of Development of Animals, by

Henry James-Clark, A.B., B.S., Adjunct Professor of Zoology in

Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., &. ....-...sseesseees 3/8—382

On the Organization of Cryptoprocta ferox, by MM. A. Milne-Ed-

wards and A. Grandidier; A way to determine Trichopterous

Pupe, by A. E. Eaton, Trin. Coll. Cam. ; On the Spontaneous

Movements of the Leaves of Colocasia esculenta (Schott), and

on the Ejection of Water from them in a continuous Jet, by M.

Musset ; On two new forms of Plants parasitic on Man (Asper-

gillus flavescens and A. nigricans, by Robert Wreden; The

Theory of the Skeleton, by Mr. H. Spencer..............0... 382—388

NUMBER CXxX.

XLVI. Observations on the Aériferous Vesicles of the Utricularia.

Yas eC EN MUZE Miadenna Sane. s ccec da dessa secaeeumsidedcs dersseetawsesateas 389

XLVII. Descriptions of new or little-known Species of Asiatic

Lepidoptera. By ArrHuR G. BuTLER, F.Z.S. (Plates VIII. & IX.

piven! (U0) Ae crntncr Sono Uspr Ree aonneOoree Madenee sc anesocviecs tans ietsden ce snark 399

XLVIII. Description of a new Genus and Species of American

Satyride from the Collection of Mr. H. W. Bates. By A. G. Burter,

HePess BUPIaLe Es Ho ls) as acsenessaemine sat cuseaseen obec ndamadssasseaencs 404

XLIX. The Method of Geology; being an Account of the intro-

ductory part of a paper on “The Laws which have determined the

Distribution of Life and of Rocks,” read before the Cambridge Philo-

sophical Society, Nov. 12, 1866. By Harry G. Srenxey, F.G.S., of

the Woodwardian Museum in the University of Cambridge ............ 405

L. Synopsis of the Species of American Squirrels in the Collection

of the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S., &c.. 415

LI. Synopsis of the Species of Burrowing Squirrels (Tamias) in

the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S., V.P.Z.S. ......... 434

LII. Descriptions of two new Fossil Cowries characteristic of Ter-

tiary beds near Melbourne. By Frepericx M‘Coy, Prof. of Nat.

vill CONTENTS.

Page

Science in Melbourne University, and Government Palontologist

for ViCbOria svaienceadecsosoceessscv+gs sacmasenstep meet ya seni tniptes suas > en naemennn 436

LIII. Notule Lichenologice. No. XVIII. By the Rev. W. A.

LercuTon, B.A., F.L.S.—On the Lichens of Spitzbergen ..........+. 439

LIV. On a new Species of Victorian Honey-eater. By FrepE-

r1cK M‘Coy, Prof. Nat. Se. Melbourne University, and Director of

the National Museums, VictOrial Jecccsscssccccsecssasaccceresciececnssvslissleas 442

New Book :—Letters Home, from Spain, Algeria, and Brazil, durmg

past Entomological Rambles, by the Rev. Hamlet Clark, M.A.,

BS IS 5 eae taioe's cx cucwaetathsanccuasvoee st apteese eee estcwcag tees tceaeaismen=< 443

Note on Mermis nigrescens, by William Mitten, A.L.S.; Experiments

on the Axolotl, by M. Auguste Duméril; Note on a supposed

new Species of Planarian Worm, by the Rev. W. Houghton; On

the Development of Sepiola, by E. Mecznikow; M. LeVaillant,

the African Traveller, by Mr. E. Layard; Investigations on

Rhabditis terricola, hy M. J. Perez ......sscecocessscnseseeeee 445—455

LST Y6 (E> ane RSE a nA Re APRN OIA as ann, eB corti ORBOGRCOCOC 456

PLATES IN VOL. XX.

Pate I. Spherodorum Claparedii.

Hr te Fish from the Gaboon and Gold Coast.

IV. New Diurnal Lepidoptera.—Mazeras Woodii.

V. New British Fish.

VI. Gymnobelideus Leadbeateri.

VII. Neochanna apoda.

VIII. New Asiatic Lepidoptera.

IX. New Asiatic Lepidoptera.—New Genus of American Satyride.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[THIRD SERIES. }

ee eaads ROAEONCAONECD per litora spargite muscum,

Naiades, et circdm vitreos considite fontes :

Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores :

Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.

At vos, o Nymphz Craterides, ite sub undas ;

Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco

Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas

Ferte, Dez pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.’

N. Parthenii Cee init Ecl.1.

No, 115; -JUBY 1867.

I.—On the Annelid Genus Spherodorum, Girsted, and a new Re-

presentative of it, 8. Claparedi. By Dr. Ricuarp Greerr*,

[Plate I.]

Unpir the name of Spherodorum, Cirsted, in 1844+, founded

a new genus of Annelids, characterized by the spherical form

of the dorsal cirri, and by numerous papille standing on the

fore part of the head. This was afterwards described by John-

ston { under the name of Pollicita (peripatus), and lately

more carefully by Claparéde §, and, with especial reference to

the structure of the wee globular dorsal cirri, by Kol-

liker |].

During a short residence in Dieppe last year, I found in the

oyster-basin of that place a small Annelid which showed a near

relationship to the genus in question, but at the same time

differed from it in several points, and which, morcover, in other

respects seems to me to present some very interesting pecu-

* Translated from Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1866, pp. 338-351, by W.S.

Dallas, F.L.S., &e.

t “Zur Classification der Annulaten,” Wiegmann’s STeuy, 1844, p. 108.

f Annals & Magazine of Natural History, vol. xvi. p- 5, pl. 2. figs. 1-6.

§ * Beobachtungen uber Anatomie und Entwickelungsgeschic! ite wir-

belloser Thiere,’ Lei ipzig, 1863, p: 5, taf. 11. figs. 8-18.

|| ‘‘Kurzer Bericht wber einige vergl. -anat. Untersuchungen,” Wurz-

burger naturwiss. Zeitschrift, 1864, Band v. p. 240, taf. 6. fig. 1.

Ann. § Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 1

2 Dr. R. Greeff on the Annelid Genus Spherodorum,

liarities that may render it worth a particular description *. I

will revert at the conclusion of my communication to the cha-

racters common to this worm and to Spherodorum, as also to

those by which it differs therefrom, im order the better to

effect a comparison between them.

The little animal measures scarcely 2 millims. in length, but is

of considerable comparative breadth, attaining nearly 0°6 millim.

in the middle regions of the body. It is narrowed before and

behind in such a manner that the general form of the body,

leaving out of consideration the external appendages, approaches

an oval; nevertheless the narrowed anterior part of the body

is shorter and more rounded, whilst the hinder part appears

more drawn out. The skin has a general light brownish-

yellow colour, with dark-brown marks (plaques) distributed

singly over the whole surface of the body ; these acquire the

most various forms, and possibly represent the secretion pro-

duced by the cutaneous glands. At no part is there a trans-

verse segmentation of the body indicated by external furrows.

The segmentation, however, is sufficiently indicated by the ex-

ternal appendages, according to which the entire body is divisible

into 18 segments. The cephalic scgment (see Pl. I. fig. 1),

which at first sight almost presents a greater resemblance

to that of a mollusk than to that of an annelid, is the longest

of all; its somewhat truncated frontal margin presents in the

middle a distinct but not deep notch forming the two lateral

lobes of the head. On each lobe are seated two clavate tenta-

cles—cne placed more towards the upper surface, the other

lower down towards the mouth ; so that, in all, four cephalic or

frontal tentacles are present—two superior, ad two inferior.

The bases of these, as also the space between them, are densely

set with small papille, likewise more or less clavate, which are

distinguished from the true tentacles by nothing but their

smaller size; so that the tentacles, from their whole habit and

when compared with the small papille surrounding them,

might hkewise be characterized as papille projecting, in conse-

quence of especial development, from the midst of the numerous

smaller but otherwise perfectly similar structures. But their

constant occurrence on the above-mentioned spots on the head,

their size, and mobility justify their receiving the denomination

of tentacles.

Further back, at about half the length of the head, there are

* T have already made a brief communication upon this subject, at

the Meeting of the Niederrheinischen Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heil-

kunde (Bonn) on the &th February, 1866, where I also exhibited the

drawings relating to it (Kolnische Zeitung, dlst March, 1866, No, 90).

and a new Representative of it, 8. Claparedi. 3

two more tentacles, one on each side, which might be deno-

minated posterior cephalic tentacles or tentacular cirri; so that

we have in all six tentacles on the head—four anterivr, and two

posterior. The small clavate papillee mentioned above as oc-

curring in the spaces between the anterior tentacles, extend also

into the region of the posterior tentacles, but are not so closely

approximated, and from this point begin to change from the

elongate. clavate to a more globular form. I call attention at

once to this change, as it indicates at the same time a change

in the function of these cutaneous appendages, the anterior cla-

vate appendages being, in my opinion, organs of touch, whilst

the posterior globular ones are to be regarded as glands. The

middle part of the cephalic segment bears two reddish-brown

eyes, which are placed a little within the bases of the two lateral

posterior tentacles. The segment of a spherical lens projects

from each eye forward and outward.

The cephalic segment, as already remarked with regard to

the segmentation in general, is not separated by any transverse

furrow from the first segment of the body, but passes into it

without any definite boundary. The first body-segment is

therefore determined partly by the inferior setiferous pedal tu-

bercles, and partly by the large globular cutaneous appendages

which at this spot pass like a rmg round the whole body. I

say like a ring, and must call particular attention to this, be-

cause, singularly enough, these appendages are not only ar-

ranged transversely upon the dorsal surface between the two

lateral rudimentary feet, but occupy the ventral surface also in

the same manner*, As regards the number, however, there is

a noticeable difference between those standing on the dorsal

and ventral surfaces; for whilst on the back there are six of

these globular bodies in a row, there are only four on the ven-

tral surface. This condition, of course, tends greatly to sug-

gest the notion that the two outer lateral processes situated

upon the back over the pedal tubercles are to be regarded as

the two true dorsal cirri. But the two lateral structures are

perfectly similar to those standing in a row between them,

both in size and form. As regards their function, moreover,

there is no distinction ; all, as we shall see hereafter, are glands.

If, therefore, we were to call the two lateral processes dorsal

cirri, this might also be required for the other similar ap-

pendages situated on the back, and, in the same way, we should

also have to name the transverse rows situated on the ventral

surface ventral cirri. It would be no obstacle to such a conception

* In Spherodorum peripatus, as is well known, only one pair of these

globular cutaneous appendages is situated upon each segment—one on

each side of the back.

4 Dr. R. Greeff on the Annelid Genus Spherodorum,

that all these appendages, as already stated, are glands; for the

cirri of the Annelids in general are not to be regarded merely

as organs of touch or motion, but may apparently be subser-

vient to very various,purposes *.

If we now examine these globular cutaneous appendages

more closely, we observe, even with a low power, that their

cavities are occupied by a coil of tortuous vermiform bodies, which

(Ersted + has already detected and described in the dersal cirri

of Spherodorum, and with regard to which he proposes the

question whether they may not be ovaries. These peculiar

structures seem to have entirely escaped Johnston {, which I can

only explain by supposing that he did not examine them ina

fresh state; for if the animals under examination be dead, or

if they have been exposed for some time to pressure for the

purpose of observation, nothing remains of the original appear-

ance, in consequence of the breaking up of the vermiform bodies.

Johnston regards the globular appendages in Spherodorum

(Pollicita peripatus) as branchiz. To Claparéde belongs the

merit of having first more accurately grasped the morpholo-

gical nature, although he could not arrive at any definite

opinion as to the physiological signification of these organs. He

thought that he could see an orifice § in the papilliform process

which occurs on the upper part of the globular dorsal cirri in

Spherodorum, but not in our animals, but found that the cap-

sule was closed in other respects; in this, however, as Kolliker

has proved, he was in error.

Kolhker|| first placed their histological and by that means also

their physiological character in the proper light, when he found

that the papilliform process in Spherodorum is not perforated,

but that each of the vermiform bodies situated in the interior

of the capsule opens externally by an orifice of its own. He

regards the individual bodies as tubular glands, which “ appa-

rently consist entirely of rounded-angular, dark, cell-like struc-

tures.”

As regards my own observations, I have but little to add to

Kolliker’s statements in relation to the structure of these organs.

The mammilliform process occurring upon the capsules in Sphe-

rodorum is entirely wanting in our animals; so that I can ex-

press no opinion as to the perforation which Clapérede describes,

but, according to Kolliker, has no existence; I can, however,

completely confirm KOlliker’s results, according to which each of

* See Ehler’s ‘Die Borstenwiirmer,’ p. 22.

T “ Zur Classification der Annulaten,”’ Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1844, p. 108.

Tt ‘Annals,’ vol. xvi. p. 5, pl. 2.

§ Beobacht. tiber Anat. der wirbell. Thiere, p. 21, taf. 11. figs. 12, 13.

|| Wurzb, naturw. Zeitschrift, 1864, p. 240, taf. 6. fio;

and a new Representative of it, S. Claparedu. 5

the tubular glands opens externally by a separate orifice (PI. I.

figs. 10-14).

With regard to the contents of the individual tubes, these

frequently consist of densely compressed, small, more or less

roundish, sharply defined corpuscles: these were seen by

Claparéde; and Kolliker, as already stated, calls them “ cell-

like structures.”” Even by the employment of high powers I

could detect no nucleiform structures, or anything of the sort,

in the individual corpuscles.

KOlliker’s interpretation of the structures in question as

tubular glands is the only admissible one; it is especially

founded on the above-mentioned opening of each tube sepa-

rately at the external surface.

Thus (to return to the description of our little animal) we

have ten of these large globular glandular capsules surrounding

the periphery of the first segment of the body, and that of

each following one, in two transverse rows, one on the dorsal,

the other on the ventral surface. It is only on the last seg-

ments that the number diminishes by one or two capsules in

each row. Between the regular rows of these large cutaneous

appendages there are distributed over the whole surface of the

body a very great number of irregularly arranged smaller but

likewise globular capsules, the size of which varies greatly

among themselves. They all, like the above-described larger

structures, represent cutaneous glands; and by their careful

examination we may, it appears to me, carry out the very in-

teresting observation of the complete development of the glan-

dular bodies in question. I have figured some of the principal

forms and stages of development, so far as the limited material

permitted this to be done (Pl. I. figs. 3-9). The first (and

smallest) of these forms (fig. 3) represents a vesicle of only

0-009 millim. in diameter, in the interior of which a tolerably

sharply marked compact nucleus is situated : there are often two,

or even three of these nuclei; but one of them is usually re-

markable for its size. A further-advanced form (fig. 4) shows

the vesicle enlarged to nearly double the diameter, as also the

enclosed nucleus, which has also become filled with a finely

granular substance. This type is also retained by the following

stage, except that the granular substance of the nucleus be-

comes more dense, and some granules shine out of it like dimly

lustrous globules. When a certain size has been attained, a

roundish perforation of the nuclear substance itself takes place

at some spot, usually near the periphery of the nucleus, so that

the nucleus appears as if pierced at this point. This first hole

is often followed by a second in close juxtaposition with it. As

this opening enlarges, the bridge situated towards the peri-

6 Dr. R. Greeff on the Annelid Genus Spherodorum,

phery, corresponding with the narrowest border of the orifice,

breaks through, and the two ends then separate from each

other; so that instead of the round hole in the nuclear sub-

stance we have a deep indentation of the nuclear substance

penetrating from the circumference towards the middle. By

this simple process therefore, as may be readily seen, the form

of the above-mentioned glandular tube is very soon produced :

at first, by the two ends becoming rounded, it has nearly the

appearance of a sausage with two surfaces in apposition; and it

frequently retains this form even in the fully developed state.

But generally, during the further growth of the tube, its two

extremities separate more or less, and then one of them becomes

bent or rolled up, so as even to embrace the neighbouring

tubes; and thus the position and form of the mdividual glands

is altered in many ways, and the above-described appearance of

the vermiform, tortuous, glandular coil as the contents of the

capsule is produced.

As regards the further histological differentiation of the indi-

vidual glandular tubes, these, during the processes just de-

scribed, become more and more filled with darkly granular

substance, in which afterwards larger pale bodies make their

appearance; these gradually increase, until finally the whole

tube is filled with the roundish corpuscles, or, as Kolliker calls

them, cell-like structures, above described. The perfectly formed

glandular tube is attached by one end, or frequently, as it seemed

to me, by both ends, to the wall of the capsule; but only one

extremity, and with it the wall of the capsule at the same spot,

exhibits a roundish external orifice.

The number of glands enclosed in a capsule is not constant.

The above-mentioned large capsules standing in regular trans-

verse rows generally contain three or four, rarely more (figs. 10

to 14); the smaller only one, or, at the utmost, two tubes.

On various parts of the surface of the body, partly upon and

partly between the vesicles, and sometimes even within them,

we frequently see dark-brown marks (plaques), forming the most

multifarious figures, which are often, in consequence of their

tenacious consistence, much elongated, and only connected by

narrow bridges. These substances appear to have nothing to do

with the pigment-structures which so frequently occur in the

skin of Annelids; but whether they are, as I suppose, to be

regarded as the secretion furnished by the glands, and. what

purpose is served by it in this case, I cannot decide.

I have already called attention to the gradual transition from

the small clavate cutaneous structures, resembling the tentacles

which stand upon the anterior portion of the head, to the globular

ones which succeed them, and indicated that a change of func

and a new Representative of it, 8. Claparedi. i

tion is connected with the change of form. This opinion is

founded upon the circumstance that in the small papille of the

cephalic segment I have never detected structures resembling

the above-described developmental stages of the glands, or the

latter with their openings. On the other hand, it appeared to

me that fine filaments penetrated into some of them from

below, and passed at the top into granular inflations: these

therefore might be regarded as the extremities of nerves. I

believe, therefore, that these small papilla of the cephalic seg-

ment are to be regarded as tactile organs, in contradistinetion

to the globular appendages seated upon the rest of the body,

which, as already shown, are cutaneous glands. With reference

to Spherodorum, Kolliker remarks that the (whole of the) small

papilla of the skin are not pierced by glands, but contain nerve-

terminations—in direct contradiction to Claparéde, who found

the papille of the entire surface of the skin pierced by the

efferent ducts of small cutaneous glands in the same animal.

As I have at my disposal only a few spirit-specimens of Sphe-

rodorum, collected last summer in Heligoland, I cannot decide

upon this difference, or whether the above-described distinction

between tactile and glandular papille exists also in Sphero-

dorum.

Besides the described circlet of globular glandular capsules

(or, if it be preferred, the transverse rows of dorsal and ventral

cirri), each segment also bears a pair of uniramose pedal tuber-

cles. Each foot (fig. 2) consists of a conical tubercle, at the

apex of which there is a pair of lamellar processes or fins and a

bundle of about six composite sete inserted into the tubercle ;

posteriorly the number of the latter diminishes, so that on the

last segments there are only one or two sete in each tubercle ;

but these are exactly similar to those of the anterior feet. The

pedal tubercles are placed directly beneath the two lateral dorsal

capsules, and are usually in part concealed by them.

The alimentary apyiaratus of our animal commences with a

buccal orifice placed on the lower surface of the cephalic seg-

ment, towards the anterior margin; this, when retracted, re-

sembles a funnel with numerous folds. The mouth leads at

once into a spacious flask-shaped cesophagus (fig. 1) or gizzard

with double walls, or rather consisting of two chambers placed

to a certain extent one within the other. By compression, the

inner part can be pushed out ; but whether it can be voluntarily

extended, and is consequently to be regarded as a trunk, I was

unable to determine by observation, The cesophagus is directly

followed, and, indeed, embraced, by a rather wide, dark-brown

intestine, which lies loose in the body- -cavity without any attach-

ments or constrictions, and makes about four or five convo-

8 Dr. R. Greeff on the Annelid Genus Spherodorum,

lutions before reaching the anus, which is situated at the poste-

rior extremity of the body.

With regard to the sexual conditions, I can only state that

one of the animals examined I found filled pretty closely with

roundish disccid ova, which lay perfectly loosely and irregularly

in the body-cavity, and, surrounding the intestine on all sides,

were driven to and fro in the cavity of the body by the move-

ments of the intestine and the general movements of the animal.

If we now glance back at the zoological characters of our

animal, especially in comparison with those of the genus Sphero-

dorum, we shall be at once struck by certain pomts common to

both. The most prominent of these are the globular cutaneous

appendages occupied by glands, and the form of the cephalic

segment, with its pecuharly formed tentacles and _papille.

Further points of union are presented by the form and compo-

sition of the feet, which in both consist of simple conical fins

having a bundle of composite sete. Cirsted* indeed ascribes

to Spherodorum a multifid fin (pinna unica multifida); but this

notion, as Claparede correctly observes, has evidently arisen

from the fact that Girsted regarded the glandular appendages

which are frequently seated upon the pedal tubercles as parts or

branches of the fin. Besides these characters, the two have in

common the absence of any external segmentation of the body,

or annulation of it by means of transverse furrows, as also, in

connexion with this, no internal constrictions of the intestine

are present, but the latter in both constitutes a loose tube laid

together in several convolutions.

When we consider those properties of our animal which re-

move it from Spherodorum, we find, in the first place, that whilst

Spherodorum bears only one pair of the large globular cutaneous

appendages upon the back of each segment, in our animal fen

of these stand upon each segment—six on the back, and four on

the ventral surface. There is also a difference in the form of

these appendages; for in Spharodorum there is a papilliform

process upon the globular capsule, whilst in our animal, in

which this process is deficient, the globular form of the struc-

tures in question is much more clearly shown. In the presence

and even the form of the-four frontal tentacles of the buccal

segment both agree; but we have described two posterior

tentacles or tentacular cirri, exactly like the frontal tentacles,

which are wanting in Spherodorum, where thei place is taken

by two mere rudimentary glandular appendages.

Of subordinate distinctions we find that in our animal there

are at the apices of the pedal tubercles two lamellar fins, which

are absent in Spherodorum; whilst, on the other hand, the

* Loc. cit. p. 108.

and a new Representative of it, S. Claparedi. 9

pecuhiarities which Claparéde describes in the fect of some of its

segments (the third, fourth, &c.) are wanting in our animal.

Further, according to the statements of all authors, Sphero-

dorum fas four eyes, whilst our animal only shows two. The

accordance of the true intestine has already been pointed out ;

but we find essential differences in the anterior part of the ali-

mentary tube, as in Spherodorum this consists of three succes-

sive divisions (see Claparéde, Anat. &e., p.51), which cannot be

made to agree with the structure of the cesophagus &c. described

by us.

Lastly, as regards the external form of the body in general,

this, again, 1s extremely different in the two animals. ‘Ersted

says of Spher cdorum, “corpus lineare teretiusculum ;” John-

ston, “body serpentiform;’ and, lastly, Claparede describes

Spherodorum as a cylindrical worm of 2 inches long. If we

contrast with this the little animal above described, scarcely

2 millims. in length, and comparatively very broad and nearly

oval, the difference becomes very striking.

Nevertheless, notwithstanding all these differences, the affini-

ties first indicated lead me to prefer uniting our animal, at least

provisionally, with Spherodorum to form a single genus, for

which purpose, however, the generic characters given by Mrsted

and others must undergo some modifications. I would define

the genus as follows :—

Genus Spumroporum, Cirsted.

The more or less elongated body, which is always narrowed

before or behind, nowhere shows any transverse annulation

or segmentation indicated by external furrows, although this is

defined by the outer appendages. The buccal segment bears

on the anterior margin of the small and not deeply divided

cephalic lobes four clavate and anteriorly somewhat inflated

frontal tentacles, the bases of and intervals between which are

closely set with small but also clavate papille. Further back,

likewise on the buccal segments, there are two tentacular cirri,

one on each side, which sometimes resemble the frontal tenta-

cles, and in this case are to be regarded as true tentacles also in

respect of their function, sometimes in form and signification

approach the globular cutaneous appendages of the followmg

segments, and must then pass as glandular organs. The first

body-segment and all the following ones are characterized by

large globular cutaneous appendages occupied by tortuous

tubular glands. Of these either each segment bears only two

upon its back, namely, one on each side over the pedal tubercle

(dorsal cirri), or the whole segment is surrounded by a circlet

10 Dr. R. Greeff on the Annelid Genus Spherodorum.

of these appendages, which are placed at regular intervals, and

form a transverse row upon the back and another on the belly.

Between the large cutaneous appendages there are numerous

small ones irregularly scattered over the body. Feet simple,

containing a bundle of composite sete.

1. Spherodorum flavum, Hirst.

Annulat. Danicor. Conspectus, fase. i. p. 43, pl. 1. fig. 5, pl. 6. fies. 92,101.

Archiv fiir Naturg. 1844, i. p. 108.

Corpore 14" longo, 2!” lato, teretiusculo, flavescente, utrinque

fere equaliter attenuato, segmentis 150, duplo latioribus

quam longis, papillarum 12-16 in margine anteriore capitis,

duabus paulo longioribus; oculis quatuor quadratum forman-

tibus; pinnis abbreviatis, 7-8-fidis, setis 5-7 uncinatis.

The preceding character of Mirsted’s species must certainly

undergo some alterations in accordance with the above observa-

tions. As, however, S. flavum does not appear to have been

observed by any one since Mirsted, I leave his description unal-

tered for the present. It is possible, moreover, that there is no

specific difference between S. flavum and 8. peripatus.

2. Spherodorum peripatus, Grube.

(Die Familien der Anneliden, p. 67.)

Pollicita peripatus, Johnston, Aun. Nat. Hist. vol. xvi. p. 5, pl. 2. figs. 1-6.

Spherodorum peripatus is the species investigated by Clapa-

rede and Kolliker, as has already been repeatedly stated.

3. Spherodorum Claparedii, sp.n. Pl. I.

I venture to name the new species described in detail in this

paper after the indefatigable observer who has done so much for

the natural history of the Annelida.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. 1. Spherodorum Claparedii, magnified about 40 diameters.

Fig. 2. Foot with the bundle of composite uncini, magnified 300 diameters.

Figs. 3-9. Developmental stages of the glandular appendages, magnified

about 600 diameters.

Figs. 10-14. Developed glandular capsules with the tubes contained in

them, and opening externally by a fine orifice in the wall of the

capsule ; magnified about 600 diameters.

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 11

II.—On the Menispermacez.

By Joun Minrs, F.R.S., F.L.S., &e.

[Continued from vol. xix. p. 330.]

50. PycnarRHENA.

This genus was established by me in 1851 upon an Indian

plant in the Wallichian Collection. It is easily recognized by

its oblong, acuminated, simply penninerved leaves, upon short

and remarkably tumid petioles: this manner of nervation,

though less frequent, is not rare among the Menispermacee,

for it occurs also in Hyperbena, Antitazis, Penianthus, Clambus,

Elissarrhena, Spirospermum, and Rhaptonema. It is also remarka-

ble for having nine stamens almost without filaments, or, rather,

as many 2-celled anthers, crowded in three series so as to form a

sessile central head, after the manner of Anamirta; the anthers are

transversely oval, 2-valved, gaping by a common horizontal suture.

The drupe is oval, with the vestige of the style placed a little

above the middle on the ventral face ; the putamen is reniformly

oval, somewhat compressed, thin and testaceous, the seed being

appended to the slight intrusion of an almost obsolete con-

dyle on the ventral side; the ore is exalbuminous; the co-

tyledons, occupying almost the whole space of the cell, are very

fleshy, accumbent, lunately incurved at the apex towards the

ventral face, where the minute radicle points to the persistent

style. The genus comes near to Antitazis.

PYcNARRHENA, nob.—Flores dioici. Mase. Sepala 6-9, ter-

natim disposita, exteriora gradatim minora et bracteiformia,

3 interiora multo majora, cuneatim ovalia, valde concava,

estivatione imbricata. Petala 6, sepalis breviora, cuneata,

transversim latiora, apice subtruncata, lateribus paulo oblique

involutis, membranacea. Stamina 9, in glomerulum centralem

crebriter ageregata ; filamenta ee coe tenuia, fere obso-

leta; anthere subglobose, cruciatim sulcate, s septo transverso

bivalvatim hiantes, loculo antico septulo verticali diviso, hine

inequaliter 3-locellate.—F/. Mem. ignoti. Drupa gibboso-

ovata, styli vestigio facie ventrali supra medium notata,

glabra: putamen subreniformi-ovatum, paulo compressum,

leve, chartaceo-testaceum, 1l-loculare; condylus e sinu ven-

trali intra loculum paulo intrusus, hine convexiuasculus. Se-

men loculo conforme, exalbuminosum ; integumentum tenuiter

membranaceum, facie ventrali condylo affixum: embryo locu-

lum implens ; ‘cotyledones magni, carnose, accumbentes,

apice incumbentim incurvee, radicula minima supera ad stylum

spectante multoties longiores.

Frutices Indie orientalis et insularum indigent; rami rigidt,

12 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee.

flexuosi, avillis nodosis et approximatis ; folia oblonga, utrinque

subacuta, lucida, glaberrima, penninervia, supra im nervis sul-

cata, petiolo brevi, apice valde tumido et cavo: panicule g

perplurime vel pauciores, supra-axillares, fasciculate, interdum

brevissime et crebriter subglomerate, aut laxe ramose et petiolo

paulo longiores ; floribus parvis: in? pedicelli pauct, aaillares,

et 1-flori.

The characters of the following species will be given in the

third volume of the ‘ Contributions to Botany ’—

1. Pycnarrhena pleniflora, nob. in Ann, Nat. Hist. 2 ser. vil. 44;

—Pyenarrhena planiflora, Hook. & Th. Fl. Ind. 1. 206 ;—

Cocculus. planiflorus, Wall. (pro errore typographico vice

pleniflori)—In India orientali: v. s. in herb. Soc. Linn.

3S, Sylhet et in bort. Bot. Cale. cult. (Wall. Cat. 4961) ;

in herb. Hook. ° , Bengal (Griffiths).

2. tumefacta, nob.—In Borneo: v. s. in herb. Hook. 2,

Bangarmassing (Motley, 357).

3. mecistophylla, nob.—In Himalaya: v. s. in herb. Hook.,

Assam (Griffiths, 1264).

5]. ANTITAXIS.

This genus was proposed by me in 1851 for a plant collected

in Malacca by the late Mr. Griffiths, with male flowers. It is

only lately that I have seen other specimens in fruit. It has

large lanceolate leaves, with alternate pinnate slender nerves,

anastomosing towards the margin, and with rather short pe-

tioles: in the ¢ it has a few slender 1-flowered pedicels, fasci-

culated in each axil; in the ? the inflorescence is similar. The

6 flower has eight sepals decussately arranged in opposite pairs,

the two inner series being larger, equal in size, and imbricated

in estivation; it has two petals alternate with the inner pair of

sepals, and somewhat smaller thau these, four stamens cruciately

placed opposite the petals, with filaments somewhat shorter than

they, fleshy, thickening upwards, the anthers partly immersed

in their summits, globular, 1-lobed, opening somewhat extrorsely

by a diagonally transverse fissure, showing two gaping lips, as

in Anelasma and Elissarrhena. The 9 flower is unknown; but

the drupes are subglobose and tomentose, with a somewhat

reniform putamen, which is chartaceous and brittle, with an

almost obsolete condyle in the sinus of the ventral side; the

embryo is exalbuminous, reniformly orbicular, with large, fleshy,

curving, accumbent cotyledons which nearly fill the cell, and a

very minute, somewhat superior radicle. ‘The leaves are coria-

ceous, glabrous, shining, having a peculiar nervation resembling

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 13

that in Pycnarrhena, Clambus, and Penianthus. In its inflores-

cence, with several 1-flowered pedicels fasciculated in each axil,

it resembles Pycnarrhena, as well as in its globular anthers

opening extrorsely by a gaping fissure—a feature repeated in

Anelasma, Jateorhiza, and Elissarrhena. The chief peculiarity

of Antitaxis is in the dimerous arrangement of its floral parts ;

but the AMJenispermacee are far from constant in their usual

ternary disposition, as we find also binary sepals and petals in

Antizoma, Clypea, Peraphora, and others of the Cissampelide,

while in several genera of the family the floral parts are found

in numbers varying between two and seven, or even beyond

this. When I published the synopsis of the genera (hw. op. xiii.

124), a separate section was made to includes all those of which

(for want of sufficient evidence) the tribe to which they belong

could not be determined; to this section Antizoma was then

referred. Since that time I have seen its fruit, which closely

resembles that of Pycnarrhena and other genera of the Pachy-

gonee ; consequently <Antitavis must now find its place in

that tribe: its wood is unmistakeably of 1 ,Menispermaceous

structure. The authors of the ‘Nova Genera’ (i. p- 33), in one

sentence, expel this genus and Odontocarya from this family,

because they appeared to them to offer no character distinct

from the Euphorbiacee, and because they differ from Meni-

spermacee in their inflorescence and in their habit. The strong

evidence afforded here and elsewhere completely disproves all

these inferences.

Antitaxis, nob.—lores dioici. Mase. Sepala 8, per paria

decussatim opposita, 2 exteriora bracteiformia, extus longe

pilosa, 2 sequentia late obovata, apice truncata, ciliato-fim-

briata, 4 interiora paulo majora, zqualia, suborbicularia,

concava, carnosula, glabra, eestivatione imbricata. Petala 2,

tenuiora, obovata, apice truncata, sepalis 2 interioribus alterna

et paulo breviora. Stamina 4, cruciatim disposita, petalis

opposita et paululo breviora; jfilamenta carnosula, sursum

gradatim incrassata ; anthere filamenti vertice semiimmerse,

subglobose, carnosze, 1-lobze, subextrorsee, rima subobliqua

transversim et bivalvatim hiantes. Ovarii rudimentum nul-

lum.—Fe@m. Flores ignoti. Drupe 3, aut abortu pauciores,

subglobose, exsiccse, velutine, styli vestigio facie ventrali

notate ; putamen subreniformi-ovatum, tenuiter chartaceum,

fragile, 1-loculare ; condylus parvus, internus, intra loculum

sinum versus paulo intrusus aut fere obsoletus. Semen reni-

formi-globosum, exalbuminosum ; infeyuwmentum membrana-

ceum, sinum versus chalaza majuscula notatum : embryo reni-

formi-globosus, loculum implens, cotyledonibus magnis, car-

14 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez.

nosis, crassis, accumbentibus, curvatis, radicula minima su-

pera ad styli vestigium spectante multoties longioribus.

Frutices Asiutici, forsan scandentes ; ramuli pubescentes, demum

glabri, cupuloso- nodosi ; awillis approximatis ; folia oblonga

vel oblongo-lanceolata, glaberrima, nervis impart-pinnatis ; pe-

tiolo subbrevi, imo apiceque subtumidulo : pedicel 3 axillares,

plurimi, fasciculata, gracillimi, 1-flori, internodiis sepius equi-

longi; 2 awillares, pauciores, crassiores, l-fiori; drupe sub-

globose.

Descriptions of the following species will be found in the

third volume of my ‘ Contributions to Botany ’—

1. Antitawis fasciculata, nob.—In peninsula Malayana: v. s.

in herb. Hook. et meo 3, Malacca (Griffiths).

2. cauliflora, nob.—In Java: v. s. in herb. Mus. Brit.,

Java, ? (Horsfield, 3 et 4).

3. lucida, nob.;—Coceulus lucidus, Teysen et Bennings,

Nat. Tijdsch. i. 897.—In Java: v.s. in herb. Hook. 2 in

hort. Bogor. cult. (T. Anderson).

4, - longifolia, nob. ;-—Cocculus longifolius, DC. MS.—In

insula Timor: v.s. in herb. Mus. Paris.

SPIROSPERMUM.

This genus was founded, in 1806, upon a Madagascar plant,

by Du Petit-Thouars, who gave a very meagre description of it.

De Candolle, in 1818, arranged the genus in Menispermacee, in

his ‘Systema,’ comprising all the Taiaoie afforded by Thowsis

within the space of six lines, and that is all we know of the plant

since that time. In my prefatory remarks on this order (hu.

op. 8 ser. xiil, 125), not having then seen the plant, I excluded

the genus from the family, on account of the spiral form of its

embryo, and upon the following grounds. In every instance

throughout the Menispermacee I had found the embryo always

more or less incurved, the degree of its curvature invariably

corresponding with ihe extent of excentric growth of the ovary

and fruit, the cotyledonary end of the embryo being seen inva-

riably in ‘close proximity to the basal point of attachment of the

fruit, while the radicular extremity as constantly points to the

vestige of the deflected style, the latter being generally drawn

down near to the basal point of attachment: hence, in the most

extreme cases, the embryo never completes an entire circle ; and

from the constancy of this feature, it was naturally inferred that

a spiral embryo could not occur in Mentspermacee. <A sub-

sequent examination of the seed convinced me that I was quite

mistaken in this conclusion, and that Spzrospermum offers a very

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 15

anomalous departure from the above-mentioned otherwise uni-

versal rule. Here, although the radicular end of the embryo

remains in its normal position, its cotyledonary extremity is not

directed as usual to the point of attachment of the fruit, but it

wanders to some uncertain station through a helical channel.

The putamen contains a single orbicular seed, which is greatly

flattened and covered by a thin membranaceous integument ;

from a point on its periphery, just below the persistent style,

and close to the basal attachment of the putamen, the cell be-

gins to be intercepted by a thin partition, which curves spirally

until it terminates in the exact centre of the seed, thus com-

pleting in its course two and a half gyrations, and the embryo

is found within the spiral cell of the integument, without any

albumen. This spiral division is, in fact, the condyle, which at

its commencement is like that seen in T’liacora, Diploclisia, &e.

—where, terminating a little beyond the middle of the cell, it

divides it into a bimarsupial or hippocrepiform pouch ; but in

Spirospermum this septiform condyle is continued far beyond

that point, in an extremely attenuated state, under the form of

a spiral coil, which reaches the centre in the manner before de-

scribed. This septiform line is attached to the two opposite

inner faces of the putamen, as in the other genera; and when a

knife is passed round the periphery of the putamen, its two

flattened sides are easily torn away from the adherent edges of

the condyle, leaving a corresponding helical cicatrix upon the

two faces, and showing correlative grooves on tke outer surfaces

of the putamen. We might suppose that the embryo would fill

the entire length of the helical cavity of the integument; but it

was otherwise in the specimens I examined ; for although this

spiral cavity consisted of nearly three eyrations, the elongated

slender embryo only extended through half of the first turn,

the remaining two gyrations being quite empty; the radicular

end, however, touched its normal point on the periphery, at the

beginning of the first coil.

I have explained how the development in Tilacora, Diplo-

clisia, &c. takes place by the simple process of excentric growth;

indeed in all the genera of the family, even in the more extreme

cases just mentioned, the amount of curvature of the integu-

ment and seed is coequal and symmetrical with the unequal

expansion of the ovary, and therefore of the pericarp and puta-

men; but in Spzrospermum the one greatly exceeds the ratio of

the other, as is shown above ; and this forms a solitary exception

to the otherwise general rule.

It would be instructive if we could ascertain the cause of this

singular growth. In all cases the original ovular integument

grows lengthways; and in Spirospermum we might suppose that

16 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee.

it grows into a very slender elongated tube within the cell of

the ovary, gradually extending itself till it completes a circle,

and that at that point, meeting with obstruction, it would be

turned aside and carried forward in an inward spiral coil for

nearly two other gyrations, terminating in the centre: in this

case the entire coiling tube ought to be free; but we see the

reverse; for its adjacent sides are found agglutinated together

and also with the interposing spiral condyle, which has simul-

taneously accompanied it in its growth. By what means this is

accomplished appears av enigma very difficult of explanation.

The only species of Spzrospermum is a tree of low stature, or

a shrub with pendent branches charged with large, lanceolate-

oblong, coriaceous, polished, glabrous leaves, with many parallel

oblique nerves, which anastomose near the margin; the petiole

is short and stout; the inflorescence is a terminal panicle, twice

the length of the leaves, pendent, and, with the fruit, becomes

black in drying; it is copiously branched, its ultimate branches

bearing, in the @ plant, two long fructiferous pedicels, swollen

at their summit into a receptacle, which carries nine crowded

stipitate drupes, all being glabrous, bractless, and black. The

drupes are exsiccous, orbicular, extremely compressed, acutely

carinated on the margin, on which, close to the base, is seen the

remnant of the persistent style, and on each flattened face, near

the carinated margin, is a prominent ring: the putamen is thin

and coriaceous, quite flat and discoid in the centre of each face,

where it is marked by a spiral furrow corresponding with the

line of condyle already described.

In the ¢ plant the inflorescence is in axillary panicles, which

are as long as the leaves, having a slender rachis provided at each

of its alternate axils with two slender branches of unequal length,

all dichotomously divided, the ultimate branchlets bearing two

equal 1-flowered pedicels, all quite glabrous. The flowers are

small, consisting of :—six obovate sepals, in two series, the three

inner being twice the length of the three outer ones; six equal

oblong petals, one-third the length of the inner sepals, having

their lateral margins inflected; six stamens, in two series, the

length of the petals, the three outer ones free, with slender fila-

ments, the three imner filaments being united for half their

length into a monadelphous column ; each stamen provided with.

two free, distinct, erect anther-lobes.

SprrosPperMUM, Thouars.—F lores dioici, ubique glabri. Mase.

Sepala 6, biseriata, obovata, fusco-nigrescentia, quorum 3

interiora duplo majora. Petala 6, biseriata, eequalia, oblonga,

sepalis interioribus 3-plo brevioribus, lateribus inflexis. Sta-

mina 6, biseriata, petalis equilonga; filamenta filiformia,

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 17

erecta, 3 exteriora libera, 3 altera fere ad medium in columnam

centralem coalita; anthere didyme, lobis parvis, oblongis,

liberis, erectis, apice paulo divaricatis, rima laterali longitudi-

naliter dehiscentibus.— Fam. ignoti. Drupe 9, supra recepta-

culum parvum crebriter erecte, longiuscule stipitate, exsicce,

orbiculares, valde compress, basin versus stylo persistente

notate, nigre, rugulose, glabra; putamen sarcocarpio sicco

tenaciter adherente vestitum, orbiculare, valde compressum,

carina peripherica tenui latiuscula munitum, utraque facie mar-

ginem versus lira annulari prominente signatum, disco planum

et sulco spirali notatum, tenuiter chartaceum; condylusinteruus,

septiformis, primum angustus, demum filiformis, a basi ortus,

deinde ex anfractibus 3 spiraliter convolutis in centro termi-

natus. Semen loculum implens, exalbuminosum, valde com-

pressum ; integumentum conforme, membranaceum, condylo

spirali interseptatum: embryo valde elongatus, pariter teres,

radicula basi proxima, ad stylum persistentem spectante, coty-

ledonibus linearibus accumbentibus vagis paulo breviore.

Frutex vel suffrutex Madagascariensis, crebre ramosus; rami —

longi, teretes, iterum ramosissimi, pendentes, glaberrimi, ramulis

ultimis pedicellos 2 unifloros gerentibus : flores parvi, glabri.

The following species will be described in the third volume of

my ‘ Contributions ’°—

Spirospermum penduliflorum, Thouars, Gen. Madag. p.19. no. 63;

DC. Syst. i. 515, Prodr. i. 96.—In Madagascar: v. s. in

herb. Hook. 3 et ? (Gerard, 32).

53. DETANDRA.

This genus was proposed by me, several years ago, for two

plants in the herbarium of Prof. DeCandolle, both natives of the

province of Bahia in Brazil; its characters were sketched more than

three years since in my synopsis of the genera of the family (Aw.

op. xi. p. 124). One of these plants, in the size, shape, and tex-

ture of its leaves, offers some resemblance to Chondodendrum

tomentosum, R. & P., with which it also agrees in the more than

usual number of its imbricately disposed sepals; but it differs

in the form of its six petals, and in having only three stamens,

whose filaments are united into a central column, leaving the

anthers almost sessile on its furcated summit* ; the two cells of

each anther are laterally imbedded in the nearly obsolete points

of the filaments, the intermediate connective being very shortly

and obtusely excurrent beyond their apex; and they burst by a

* This feature of the agglutination of the stamens suggested the generic

name, from derds, ligatus ; avip, mas.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xx. 2

18 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez.

longitudinal suture corresponding with a narrow semiseptum,

which renders them 2-locellate. We may perceive in the above

peculiar characters some analogy towards Parabena and Syrrho-

nema, from which genera it differs in many respects.

I have here described two species, one of which Dr. Eichler

has made a third species of his genus Sychnosepalum; but I

have shown, under my description of the latter genus, how much

dissimilarity exists between them : it differs in its habit, its sub-

peltate leaves, its inflorescence and the structure of its flowers.

The Somphoaylon of the same botanist is at variance with De-

tandra only in its more expanded panicle, minute flowers, and

the smaller number of its sepals (frequently an inconstant

character) ; it agrees in the number, shape, and relative size of

the petals, and exactly in its three monadelphous stamens.

The Spe: of Detandra have somewhat oval, subpeltate,

coriaceous, 5-nerved leaves, which are glabrous and polished

above, pale and tomentose beneath, on rather slender petioles :

the inflorescence is a panicle shorter than the petiole, with short

alternate branches, each bearing one to three alternate pedi-

cellated flowers; the flower has fifteen to eighteen closely

imbricated sepals becoming gradually smaller externally (the

upper moiety of the six interior and larger ones expanding

horizontally, as in Chondodendrum), six petals in two series,

which are oblong or lanceolate, unguiculated at the base, and

entire or denticulated on the margin; the stamens are already

described.

Deranpra, nob.—Flores dioici. Masc. Sepala 14-17, in or-

dine ternario ad torum subcylindricum imbricatim disposita,

quorum 2-5 exteriora minutissima et bracteiformia, 6 inter-

media ovato-oblonga et extus pilosiora, 6 interiora cuneato-

oblonga, cum apicibus rotatim reflexis, omnia extus leviter

tomentella et ciliolata. Petala 6, biseriata, subzequalia, sepalis

dimidio breviora, unguiculato-oblonga vel lanceolata, erecta,

glabra. Stamina 3, alte monadelpha, petalis longiora; fila-

menta in columnam centralem fere ad summum coalita, apice

hine crassiuscule et brevissime trifurca; anthere bilobe, lobis

ovatis, majusculis, s segregatis et in filamentum lateraliter

semlimmersis, connectivo "infermcdio paululo excurrente, bi-

locellatis, 2-valvatis, rima longitudinali dehiscentibus.—#/,

fem. ignoti.

Frutices Brasilienses scandentes ; rami striati, ad axillas cupuloso-

nodost; folia alterna, petiolata, subpeltata, ovata vel ovato-

oblonga, imo rotundata vel sinu levi subtruncata, integra, co-

riacea, 5-nervia, supra glabra, subtus pallide tomentosa: pani-

cula axillaris, petiolo brevior, tomentosa, alternatim ramosa,

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez. 19

ramis brevibus, corymbuloso-paucifloris, pedicellis 2-3, fascicu-

latis ; flores parvi.

The descriptions of the two following species will be given in

the third volume of the ‘ Contributions to Botany ’—

1. Detandra latifolia, nob. in Ann, Nat. Hist. ser. 3. xi. 124.—

In Brasilia: v. s. in herb. DeCand. 3, Bahia (Blanchet).

ovata, nob., loc. cit.;—Sychnosepalum microphyllum,

EHichl. in Mart. Fl. Bras. fase. xxxviil. p. 204, tab. 44. fig. 5.

—In Brasilia: v. s. in herb. De Cand. 3, Bahia (Blanchet,

3178 a).

54. SyRRHEONEMA.

This genus was proposed by me for a climbing plant having

roundish cordate leaves, with a supra-axillary inflorescence,

consisting of from three to six short fasciculated peduncles

bearing generally three sessile flowers, which are small, with

six tomentose imbricated sepals, no petals, and three stamens

united for half their length into a central column%, the free

portions being nearly erect, fleshy, and semiterete, each having

four distinct anther-lobes quadrately disposed and imbedded

introrsely in their summits. There is some resemblance in this

latter feature to the stamens of Jateordiza; but the analogy

extends no further.

The genus approaches Detandra, Aristega, and Desmonema in

having three monadelphous stamens; but it differs from them

in having no petals and in other particulars. In its inflorescence

(consisting of several fasciculated, axillary, simple peduncles) it

offers some analogy with Pycnarrhena and Antitaais; but there

the peduncles are 1-flowered, while here they bear from three to

six crowded, sessile, very small flowers.

SYRRHEONEMA, nob.—Flores dioici. Mase. Sepala 9, quorum

3 exteriora minora et bracteiformia, 3 interiora majora, ovata,

acuta, concava, membranacea, extus pilosa. Petal/a nulla.

Stamina 3, sepalis longiora, monadelpha; filamenta ad me-

dium in columnam centralem coalita, sursum libera, crassius-

cula, fere erecta, intus plana, extus valde convexa; anthere

omnino introrse, loculis 4, parvulis, quadratim discretis,

2 inferioribus minoribus, singulis subglobosis, filamento

semllmmersis, rima obliqua hiantibus.—F7. fam. ignoti.

Suffrutex scandens insule Fernando Po indigene ; ramuli teretes,

tomentosi; folia alterna, ovata, subcordata, 5-nervia, reticulata,

subtus pubescentia, petiolo pubescente, limbo breviore : pedun-

* Hence the generic name, from ouppéw, confluo; vipa, filamentum.

20 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

culi ¢ breves, 3 vel plures, supra-axillares, fasciculati, pilosi,

apice 8-4:-flori; flores sessiles, parvi, cano pubescentes.

The following only known species will be described in the

third volume of my ‘ Contributions to Botany :’—

Syrrheonema fasciculatum, nob. in Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. xii.

124.—In insula Fernando Po: v. s. in herb. Hook. (Mann,

192).

[To be continued. |

ITI.—List of Coleoptera received from Old Calabar, on the West

Coast of Africa. By ANDREW Murray, F.L.S.

[Continued from vol. xix. p. 340.]

Cucujide.

CHEILOPOMA™%, nov. gen.

Maxillee membranaceous, not concealed by jugular pieces ;

mandibles unequally trilobed at the apex (the lobes or teeth

unequal in length), and tridentate on the inner side and with a

membranous plate at the base; ligula with its apex bilobed

and membranaceous ; both labial and maxillary palpi subeylin-

drical, moderately stout; labium entire. Clypeus very large,

prominent, triangular, and projecting, almost covering the man-

dibles. Labrum almost imperceptible, narrow and membrana-

ceous. Antennze as long as the head and the thorax, and

moniliform ; all joints nearly equal, except the last and first two ;

the first is pear-shaped, the second a little longer, and the last

twice the length of any of the rest. Anterior tarsi tetramerous

(in the male?), middle tarsi pentamerous, and posterior pro-

bably also pentamerous, but broken off in the only specimen

received ; first article smallest; the last article in the anterior

tarsi twice the length of the last article in the middle tarsi ;

femora and tibiz short. Body flat, depressed, and with the

sides parallel. Head rather broad. Thorax with parallel sides,

rounded posteriorly.

Cheilopoma castaneum.

Dilute castaneum vel testaceo-ferrugineum,

nitidum, leviter punctatum ; elytris striato-

punctatis, interstitiis irregulariter punc-

tatis. .

Long. 44 lin., lat. 13 lin.

* From xetAos, a lip, and mapa, a lid, in allusion to the large clypeus

covering the greater part of the mandibles.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 21

Pale chestnut or testaceo-ferruginous in colour, with tip of the

mandibles black ; shining, finely punctate. The head rather

broad, with a marginal projection in front of the eye; the cly-

peus lower than the rest of the head, and also separated from it

by a further depression ; there is a very shallow depression on

each side, between the eyes, which are rather strongly granular;

punctuation fine. Thorax nearly a third broader than long,

smooth and flat, with shallow depressions towards the posterior

angles; sides parallel; apex truncate; anterior angles, as seen

from above, right-angled, posterior rounded except at the

angle of the base, where there is a slight projection ; base and

sides margined, the margin visible from above at the posterior

half of the thorax, not visible on the anterior half, it being

turned in below. Scutellum small, transversely ovate, rounded ;

the apex slightly indicated, very slightly punctate. Elytra

punctate-striate, the strie becoming evanescent towards the

apex, the interstices punctate ; shoulders not prominent, sides

subparallel; slightly narrower behind the shoulders, and becom-

ing broader again behind the middle ; apex rotundato-truncate,

sides margined, but the margins not seen from above. Under-

side very shining and smooth, more finely punctate than above.

I have only received one specimen of this species; and even it

was somewhat imperfect, the posterior tarsi having been lost ;

but it appeared such an interesting addition to the genera of

Cucujide that Lhave had no hesitation in describing it from my

materials such as they are.

The only forms which we have hitherto known of this little

family are the true Cucujus, with its dull opaque texture and

usually bright-red colour, of which species occur in Europe,

America, and Australia. In looking at the section from my pre-

sent point of view, the Australian Platisus clearly goes along

with the typical Cucuwjus. The Brazilian Palestes, bright and

shining, forms a different section ; and the present genus a third.

It has a certain degree of superficial resemblance to Trogosita.

Silvanide.

Silvanus frumentarius, Fabr. Syst. El. un. 557.11; Enrichs.

Ins. Deutsch. i. 336.

In the packing of boxes from Old Calabar.

Cryptophagide.

Cryptophagus sericeus.

C. bicolori affinis, thorace angulis anticis in dentem acutum

producto dignoscitur ; oblongo-ovalis, piceo-ferrugineus ; ely-

22 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

tris et pedibus testaceis, sericeo pubescens, levissime punc-

tatus.

Long. lin., lat. lin.

Allied to C. bicolor of Sturm, in the text of his Deutschlands

Fauna, vol. xvi. p. 107 (C. rufipennis, De)., of Sturm, in plate, op.

cit. pl. 319), but is readily recognized by having a projecting tri-

angular tooth at the anterior angles of the thorax. It is more

shining silky and finely pubescent than most of the other spe-

cies, and its punctuation is so fine as to be almost imperceptible.

The thorax, besides the projecting tooth at its anterior angles,

has a very slight promimence on the surface a little behind

it. The tooth is triangular in shape, and points obliquely out-

wards.

In the packing of boxes from Old Calabar.

Murmidius ovalis, Beck (Ceutocerus advena, Schuppel),

Germar, Ins. Nov. 1. p. 85.

In the packing of boxes from Old Calabar.

Lathridiide.

Holoparamecus Kunzei, Aubé, Aun. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1848, p. 245.

Readily distinguished from the other species described by its

having a ‘longitudinal dorsal fovea in the middle of the disk of

the thorax,

Alive in the packing of boxes from Old Calabar. This spe-

cies was first found by M. Kunze in fungi coming from Brazil.

Its mode of occurrence throws some uncertainty on its aboriginal

habitat.

Dermestide.

Dermestes subcostatus.

Supra totus brunneus, punctatus, pube brunnea et grisea

pubescente ; elytris subcostatis, apice rotundato ; abdomine

pube cinerea vestito, utrinque bitessellato.

Long. Iimas; lat. lin.

Above concolorous, dark brown, clothed with dark and paler

brown pubescence mixed, producing a dark-brown pubescence ;

punctate. The thorax is twice and a half the length of the ely-

tra, and has the usual round depression at the base between the

middle and the posterior angles. ‘The elytra are subcostate, but

the punctuation continues irregularly over all. The underside

is clothed with cinereous whitish pubescence, and the anterior

part of each segment of the abdomen has on each side a mark

clothed with dark-brown pubescence, next the margin of the

abdomen, and another between it and the middle, giving the

Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Potton Sands. 23

abdomen the appearance of a double row of tessellation on each

side of the middle; the outer mark is bilobed, the lobes point-

ing backwards; the inner mark is more or less triangular, the

apex pointing backwards. In none of my specimens is there any

appearance of the fossette which Erichson uses as a character to

divide the genus into two sections, according as the males have

a fossette on the fourth segment or on the third and fourth

segments of the abdomen.

The species is otherwise not difficult to distinguish. Its

upper surface being concolorous reduces the number with which

to compare it to a few; the ordinary proportions between the

elytra and the thorax remove it from the Chilan species; and

the double tessellation of the pubescence on each side of the

abdomen distinguishes it from the Australian, Natal, and

Siberian species.

If we except one or two of the species which are established

and go everywhere in ships, the members of this genus do

not appear to be so cosmopolitan as is generally supposed. At

any rate, the other species come constantly from the countries

to which they are ascribed.

[To be continued. |

1V.—Remarks on the Potton Sands, in reply to Mr. Walker’s

Paper in the ‘Annals of Natural History’ for November 1866.

By Harry Govier Srezey, F.G.S., of the Woodwardian

Museum in the University of Cambridge.

In July 1866 I wrote to the editors of this Magazine a letter on

the fossils of the sands at Potton, expressing a few results of

investigations into the nature of the sands between the Kim-

meridge Clay and what are usually called the Middle Cretaceous

beds*. My friend Mr. Walker, apparently misunderstanding

my paper, and being zealous for the geological honour of our

University, at once wrote a refutation of my mistakes, and pub-

lished it in various sections of the British Association and in

this Magazine. However, the only mistake in my letter was the

statement that “Gryphea dilatata is perversely wanting,” which,

indeed was then true; for before the end of July it occurred in

great plenty, and was exhibited in the Woodwardian Museum.

* A portion of my results were given in a paper “On the Carstone

and its Southern Extension,”’ read in the Geological Section of the British

Association at Nottingham; and the whole of them, with the method on

which they depended, were given in a paper “ On the Potton Sands,” read

before the Cambridge Philosophical Society, Nov. 12, 1866.

24 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Potton Sands.

With this confession I now proceed to examine Mr. Walker’s

aper.

i it The deposit in which the phosphate-bed occurs he names

the Lower Greensand. The Shanklin (or Lower Green) Sand,

as I understand it, is the series of beds between the Weald Clay

and the Gault. But these sands at Potton are between the

Gault and the Oxford Clay; and, so far as I remember, the

only fossil previously recorded from the beds in this district is

Ammonites biplex, mentioned in my paper on the Cretaceous

beds at Ely,—neither of which facts offers any presumptive

evidence of the deposit being Shanklin Sands.

To assume the age is, no doubt, an easy way of settling an

exceedingly complicated problem, and at the same time enables

us to assert with confidence that all fossils except those

previously found in similar deposits must be extraneous fossils,

derived from the denudation of older beds, or, if need be, of

newer ones. But even if the Potton Sands had been Lower

Greensand, for which there is not an atom of evidence published,

_Iam not aware that there would be anything more wonderful in

the occurrence of Gryphea dilatata im such a bed than there is

in the occurrence of Ammonites Lamberti, a lower Oxfordian

species, in the Kimmeridge Clay of Ely and in the Lower

Greensand of Atherfield, or in the finding of the eminently

Cretaceous Neithea quinquecostata in the Kimmeridge Clay of

Weymouth.

If. A paragraph further on, Mr. Walker calls the phosphatic

deposit a conglomerate. The idea conveyed by the term to

most men who have seen conglomerates is a deposit formed by

the wearing up of older strata into rounded masses, which

have often become cemented together. But this Potton bed is

a quantity of rolled concretions of tolerably pure phosphate of

lime with a quantity of rolled masses of sand, sometimes con-

creted with phosphate of lime, sometimes with iron, rarely with

silex, and a small proportion of old rocks: these are oftenest

loose in sand, but sometimes bound into a hard mass by oxide

of iron. The term conglomerate applied to this bed is calcu-

lated to mislead ; for, involving the idea of denudation of older

beds, these might furnish our author with his would-be extra-

neous fossils.

III. The author then questions my reference of this stratum

to the Carstone. That name I have since proposed to restrict to

the sands of Yorkshire, Lincolnshire, and Norfolk which occur

between the Upper Greensand (Hunstanton Limestone) and the

Kimmeridge Clay. But though I abandon the term, I do not

abandon the idea; for what I wanted to express may be shown

Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Potton Sands. 25

by this diagram of the succession of sands in this part of our

series of strata :—

North. Red Rock, ¢.e. Upper Greensand.

Gault.

Shanklin Sands,

Weald Clay.

Hastings Sands.

Kimmeridge Clay (South).

In the south the sands pass insensibly down into the Kim-

meridge Clay, in the north they rise insensibly up into the

Upper Greensand ; and the further one travels from the eleva-

tion of the Purbeck-Wealden area, the more thoroughly do

those and all the cognate beds become represented by marine

sands.

IV. What I meant by the deposit reproducing earlier in time

the conditions of the Cambridge Greensand is not what our

author is at such pains to show (that the Potton bed is sand,

and does not effervesce with hydrochloric acid, while the Cam-

bridge bed is a marl which does effervesce with hydrochloric

acid), but that both were formed on a long low shore during a

protracted period of time, that both derived their phosphoric

acid from the growth and decay of sea-weed, that both were

open to the actions which furnished the Greensand with its

wonderful erratics*.

V. Our author then reminds us that in one analysis of a sample

from this Potton phosphate bed there was as much as 6°64 per

cent. of alumina, magnesia, and fluorine, and adds, “this would

indicate that the phosphatic nodules had been formed of clay

soaked in decomposing animal and vegetable matter.” The au-

thor does not tell us whether this has been determined by ex-

periment or evolved by some other method; but it is certainly

a notable discovery that by soaking six or seven parts of alumina

in decomposing animal and vegetable matter till they increase

to 100, you will produce a nodule of phosphate of lime. What,

meanwhile, would become of the clay, or in what reservoir all

this soaking was to be done, are matters as to which we are left

in ignorance.

VI. I am then criticised for saying that I had gathered no

extraneous fossils from the bed. This, with diffidence, on ac-

count of the state of the specimens, I still repeat. And it is

one of those things which have surprised me most ; for I have

* See Geol. Mag. July 1866, “ On the Cambridge Greensand.”

26 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Potton Sands.

long been in the habit of teaching that sands and sandstones are

formed during upheaval, and therefore we may expect in them

fossils denuded out of older strata; but we shall also almost

inevitably have in the bed, of contemporary age, a mixture of

the life of the preceding and of the succeeding periods*.

VII. The author then says that the phosphatic casts of shells

in their general aspect resemble those of the Kimmeridge and

Oxford Clays. Had he taken the trouble to get a few of them

named, he would have found that they were Portland species ;

he would, moreover, have found that a large number of the casts

are in sand cemented with phosphate of lime, and that species

which are usually preserved as mternal moulds occur with the

shell preserved when contained in hard sandy nodules.

VIII. Many of the Mollusca, as Mr. Walker has stated, occur

with the shell replaced by oxide of iron. They are all in exactly

the same state of preservation; but since our author imagined

the bed to be Shanklin Sand, he selects a few which have affini-

ties with Lower Greensand species, and discards the remainder

as extraneous—a way out of a difficulty, as I imagine, hardly in

accordance with scientific method.

IX. Our author’s list of Mollusca, as far as it goes, is given

with some approach to correctness. I have seen no Terebratula,

however, which corresponds with Prof. Morris’s celfica. But

T. celtica, T. prelonga, T. sella, T. tamarindus, and T. depressa,

with some few others, will, I apprehend, hereafter be regarded

as varieties of one species ; so that it is one of those shells which

it would not be surprising to find.

Pecten Robinaldinus is not a bad identification. But P. Ro-

binaldinus, P. interstriatus, P. Galliennei, and several others are,

I believe, only varieties of the elongatus of Lamarck, separated,

like the Terebratule, because the series at the describer’s com-

mand was too small to show the gradations of one form into

another.

Ostrea macroptera.—Although this is the name used by me

for this fossil, as a variety of the O. frons of Parkinson, it is a

form limited, so far as | know, to the Portland Rock, being

usually attached by the whole of one valve, and having the other

valve nearly smooth—very unlike Sowerby’s typical O. macro-

ptera. O. frons and O. gregaria are not to be separated as

species.

Pleurotomaria Deshayesii, though resembling that shell, is a

variety of P. gigantea, intermediate between that species and

P. rugata.

* “The Laws which have determined the Distribution of Life and of

Rocks.’ Read before the Cambridge Philosophical Society, Nov. 12,

1866.

Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Potton Sands. 27

Not having seen Mr. Walker’s specimens, I am unable to

speak with confidence on the other species named ; but no such

shells as Exogyra conica, Modiola equalis, and Myacites plicata

have come under my notice, though I have long had other spe-

cies of those genera in the Woodwardian Museum.

X. The author’s list of fish and reptiles needs but brief com-

ment, the names being in part identical with those which have

for years been attached to similar fossils in the Woodwardian

Museum ; but it can hardly be necessary to assure any one that

the genera Pycnodus, Hybodus, Lepidotus, Gyrodus, &c. are

just as little found only in the Kimmeridge Clay as are the spe-

cies Asteracanthus ornatissimus and Lepidotus (Spherodus) gigas,

and that there can be no reason for thinking them other than

tenants of the sea of the time. Had the author availed himself

more fully of the collections to which he appears to have had

access, he might have chronicled a more wonderful series of

fossils than those enumerated—a series as rich perhaps in

genera and species of fossil reptiles as any known geological

fauna,

XI. The author quotes the existence, in the Woodwardian

Museum, of shelly limestone containing Cyrene, and uses this as

evidence for inferring some of the fossils to have been derived

from the Wealden. I can confidently say that no such speci-

mens have ever been found; and the concretions which were

supposed to be the said shelly limestone, on being broken, are

found full of Cardium, Cytherea, &c. Moreover I have shown,

in my paper on these beds, that the material of the deposit

came from the east.

XII. Finally, Mr. Walker has described and figured (pl. 13)

two shells. The one referred to Sphara Sedgwicki is not a

Sphera, but a Cyprina, and only differs as a variety from C.

angulata (Sow.), a type prolific in varieties. The form figured

is not typical. The species referred to Pholas Dallasii may be

new. As every one is aware, all the secondary Pholades belong

to the genus Pholadidea. This species burrows in wood, and

lines its burrow with shell, and rather approximates to Xylophaga

and Teredina than to Pholas. It has no affinity to D’Orbigny’s

P. Cornueliana.

The age of the beds to which Mr. Walker’s paper relates is a

difficult problem, and not one that can be solved by an appeal

to fossils, or mineral character, or superposition. And it is in-

timately bound up with questions of great interest, such as the

age of the Farringdon beds and the nature of the marine equi-

valents of the Purbeck and Wealden strata. For I have found

to the north of Cambridge most of the Farringdon fossils in a

28 Mr. T. G. Ponton on Pyrula (Fulgur) carica

bed inseparable by any great distinction from, and under, sands

full of the Potton-Sand fossils*.

A discussion of the whole question and descriptions of the

fossils are given in my ‘Geology of the Country round Cam-

bridge.’ It may be here stated that this investigation led to

proposing the following classification of the secondary strata :—

Chalk.

Cretaceous... ; Greensand.

Gault.

Shanklin (or Lower Green) Sand.

Psammolithic } Wealden { Potton? and Wicken and

(or Siliceous) ) Purbeck | Farringdon beds?

Portland.

eabitihen Ge { Kimmeridge Clay.

Felspathic)... Coral Rag and Gamlingay Clay.

Oxford Clay.

Great Oolite.

Inferior Oolite.

Lias.

Trias.

Oolitic ......

While these divisions mark approximately the greater physical

breaks and the periods when great changes were made in phy-

sical geography, it happens almost as a necessary consequence

that there is a linking of the life between each of the six great

groups of formations here indicated.

V.—Remarks on Pyrula (Fulgur) earica (Lamarck) and Pyrula

(Fulgur) perversa (Lamarck). By T. Grauam Ponton.

A.tuovucH fully alive to the responsibility which rests upon any

one who presumes to doubt the specific value of old and well-

known forms, I nevertheless venture to submit the few following

remarks to the consideration of other conchologists.

Having for some time past been engaged in re-arranging the

collection of shells in the museum of this city, and having paid

particular attention to the species comprised in the Lamarckian

genus Pyrula, I have reluctantly come to the conclusion, for

reasons to be afterwards mentioned, that Pyrula perversa (La-

* At the meeting of the Cambridge Philosophical Society, May 27, 1867,

a paper was read ‘‘ On the association of Potton-Sand fossils with those of

the Farringdon Gravels in a phosphatic deposit at Upware on the Cam;

with an account of the superposition of the beds, and the significance of

the affinities of the fossils.” This series I propose to name the Wicken

and Herrimere group. I have already obtained 120 species, including

many continental species not previously recorded in Britain.

and Pyrula (Fulgur) perversa. 29

marck) is not a distinct species from P. carica (Lamarck), but

simply a reversed form of that shell.

The chief distinctions relied on for the discrimination of the

two species, independently of the difference in the direction of

the whorls, are

1. The comparatively greater breadth of the shell in Pyrula

carica.

2. The orange-red colouring of the columella in the same

species.

Now let us see how far these distinctions are worthy of

reliance.

1. On measuring a number of both shells, I find that in

shells of either species in which the length is equal, the breadth

is also equal.

2. As to colouring: in specimens of P. carica, in this museum

and other collections which I have examined, the colour of the

columella varies from the typical deep orange, through various

shades of yellow more or less intense, to, im one instance, a pure

white—this individual being young, but not very small. Again,

in specimens of P. perversa, I find that the colouring of the

columella varies from the normal white to a yellow, in some

instances deeper than that of many specimens of P. carica.

Another distinction sometimes relied on is, that the interior

of the aperture in P. carica is merely striated, whereas in P.

perversa it is grooved; but here, again, this appears to be an

individual character, depending more on age than anything else;

for the aperture of young specimens of P. carica is distinctly

grooved; and the grooves in the aperture of mature individuals

of P. perversa become in most instances almost obliterated,

degenerating into mere striations.

The characters of the two species based on the form of the

spire and the external coloration and sculpture of the shell are

so variable that they must, I think, be regarded rather as

individual than specific.

There is one obstacle, however, to the admission of the spe-

cific identity of the two forms—namely, the difference of locality,

P. carica being usually considered to be confined to the more

northern seaboard of America, and P. perversa to the more

southern. This fact might seem to take the case out of the ordi-

nary one of reversed shells ; nevertheless a parallel case might,

I think, be found in the differences caused by locality in Pur-

pura lapillus, Buccinum undatum, &c. The fact itself, moreover,

in the case under consideration requires confirmation ; and it is

by no means certain that P. perversa and P. carica are not both

found in the West Indies. There is, indeed, in the collection

30 ~—~ Prof. J. C. Schiddte on the Tunnelling Coleopterous

of this museum a specimen of P. perversa said to have been

brought from South Carolina ; but I should not like to lay much

stress upon this, as the localities given, in collections, for foreign

shells are too often, alas! not to be depended on.

I may add that my notes on these species were submitted to

Dr. Eduard von Martens, of Berlin; and it is at his suggestion

they are published.

In conclusion, I would suggest the following amended dia-

gnosis of the shells in question :—

Pyrula carica (Lamarck).

Shell pyriform, ventricose, tumid, rather thick, more or less

transversely striated ; whorls dextral, more or less depressedly

angled round the upper part, armed at the angle with large

flattened spines; interior of the aperture striated or famtly

grooved; columella varying in colour from deep orange to

white; exterior of the shell white, variously streaked and

banded with reddish brown.

Hab. South Carolina, West Indies ?

Var. a. The Pyrula perversa of Lamarck.

The shell the same as the last; but whorls sznzstral; aperture

more or less distinctly grooved ; colour of the columella vary-

ing from pure white to deep yellow.

Hab. West Indies, Gulf of Mexico, Florida, South Carolina ?

Two other varieties might perhaps be added, namely :—

Var. 8. Shell thin; colours pale or uniform; smooth within ;

dextral.

Var. y. The shell with large spines, with a rather short but very

gibbous and swollen canal.

Hab. Guyana. A specimen in the Museum at Berlin (Dr. von

Martens).

Clifton, near Bristol, June 10, 1867.

VI.— On the Tunnelling Coleopterous Genera Bledius, Heterocerus,

Dyschirius, and their Danish Species. By Professor J. C.

ScH10DTE*.

THE connexion between these three genera is not of a systematic

character, for they belong to three widely different families ;

* Translated from the Danish original in ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,’

3 ser. vol. iv. p. 171. Copenhagen, 1866.

Genera Bledius, Heterocerus, and Dyschirius. 31

but they are closely connected by their habits, living together

as they do on the shores of fresh and salt waters, where they

excavate tunnels and galleries, which betray their presence on

the surface by small heaps of earth, like diminutive mole-hills.

Besides, Dyschirit and their larve are specially equipped for

hunting the others.

The species of Bledius and Heterocerus are generally not seen

about in the daytime, but leave their habitations on warm sum-

mer evenings, after sunset, flying in numbers near the surface.

Those few which are observed in the daytime are only such as

have been pressed out of the soft ground by footsteps, and

hurry away for safety. They may, in fact, be collected in this

manner; but very many are thus squeezed to death, and it is

better to dig them out. The small heaps indicating their

dwelling-places are easily observed, because, consisting as they

do of loose particles of earth, they dry soon and distinguish

themselves by a lighter colour from the moist ground. The

different species of Dyschirius, on the contrary, are constantly

in motion, both in their galleries and out of them, hunting their

prey, love to bask in the sun, and exhibit upon the whole the

same wild, restless, insatiably rapacious nature as the shrew-

mouse and the mole, which they may be said to represent

amongst Carabide.

ITE

“ Oxytelini genuini,” Er. (Gen. et Spec. Staphylinorum, 30)

forms a well-defined small group of Oxytelini, easily distin-

guished by triarticulate tarsi; but the views hitherto enter-

tained of the mutual relationships of the genera belonging to

this group can scarcely bear a thorough sifting. Thus the

existence of two rows of fossorial spines on the anterior tibiz of

Bledius is erroneously regarded as the most characteristic pecu-

liarity of that genus (which is more specially than any other

constructed for digging) ; for Oxytelus and Platystethus, when

carefully inspected, exhibit the same structure. On the other

hand, it seems to have been overlooked that Bledius possesses

another character distinctive of its peculiar fossorial type—viz.

that the basal joint of the antennze can be received into a groove

situated close in front of the eyes, which therefore in Bledius

are flatter than in the other genera. Nor is Bledius properly

placed near Oxytelus and Platystethus; for that genus really

represents the type of the Carpalimi modified for tunnelling-pur-

poses. A close inspection will show that the entire group of

Oxytelini genuini, Er., naturally divides itself into two sub-

groups principally distinguished by the structure of the eyes

32 Prof. J. C. Schiddte on the Tunnelling Coleopterous

and the position of the cox, according to whether they move

more on the surface and in daylight, or in darkness and under-

ground. In the first case, as in Oxytelus and Platystethus, the

eyes are finely granulated and naked, the middle coxe separated

from one another by a broad expanse of the sternum ; the whole

figure is flatter, the integuments with coarser sculpture and less

hairy. But in Carpalimus *, Haploderus, and Bledius the eyes

are coarsely grained, only fit for near vision, with lashes between

the facets ; the cox are closely approximated to one another, the

general figure more cylindrical, the sculpture finer, and the hair

more abundant, finer, and closer. The pronotum is more smooth

and vaulted, in the same proportion as the animals are more

calculated for digging; in those which merely root on the sur-

face, the coxal muscles are weaker, and the prothorax is by ex-

ternal cavities relieved of so much of its inner space as is not

required for the neck and its muscles. Those which dig or root

in the ground have the tibize furnished with spines, whilst in

those which merely run about on the surface the tibie have fine

hairs. The organs of the mouth exhibit a more or less pro-

truding membranaceous labellum divided into two lobes, of

which either the external margin alone, or the internal alone,

or both margins are fringed or ramified, ‘the ramifications being

in some cases several times subdivided ; besides, a kind of comb

of horny spines is placed at the base of the inner side of each

lobe, the two combs meeting in the middle of the labium. The

mandibles possess a large rough grinder, and a well-developed,

lobated, fringed or ramified inner lobe; its terminal part is

slender and provided with few teeth in B/edius and others, but

very powerful and with many teeth in Platystethus, Haploderus,

and Carpalimus. The lingua is broad, with thin integuments,

more or less emarginate in front, the corners pointed or (in Car-

palimus) rounded ; the paraglosse are small, closely united with

the lingua, and do not show in front of its corners. In Bledius

alone the narrow fulcrum lingue reaches the anterior margin of

the lingua or protrudes in front of it as a ligula, carrying on its

truncated apex a row of pointed spines.

The mutual relations of the principal genera of the group

would therefore appear to be the following :—

* Names suggestive of life under the bark of trees are not to be allowed

for animals living in moist places and in vegetable mould (cf. also Linn.

Philos. Botan. § 232, and Fabr. Philos. Entom. § 22). The names Haplo-

derus, Steph., and Carpalimus, Leach, ought therefore to be preferred

(though not originally sustained by real characters) to Phiwoneus, Er., and

Trogophleus, Mannerh.

Genera Bledius, Heterocerus, and Dyschirius. 33

I. Eyes finely granulated, naked. Middle coxe distant from one another.

OxyteLus, PLatysTETHUS.

IJ. Eyes coarsely granulated, hairy. Coxe approximated.

1. No antennal grooves.

a. Legs calculated for rooting; anterior tibiz with only one row of

spines, emarginate at the point. The lateral rib of elytra close

to the margin.

HaPLopERrws.

b. Legs calculated for running ; tibiz with fine hairs, not emarginated.

The lateral rib of elytra distant from the margin.

CaRPALIMUS.

2. Antennal grooves in front of the eyes.

Legs constructed for digging; anterior tibize whole, with double row

of spines ; lateral rib of elytra distant from the margin.

BLEDIUvs.

Two attempts have been made at a subdivision of the old

genus Bledius, Leach; but they have failed to command general

support, having been aimed rather at an isolation of some more

remarkable species than a careful analysis of the mutual rela-

tions of the species in general. Nevertheless such a general

analysis, carefully executed, reveals so many important differ-

ences between the species, particularly in the structure of the

mouth and the prothorax, that it becomes impossible to preserve

Bledius, Leach, as an undivided natural genus. This will have

become manifest already to those who have studied the descrip-

tions and details of the larva which I have given on a former

occasion™ ; and the divisions of the old genus suggested by the

differences between the larvee correspond most closely to those I

have now to point out in the perfect insects, and which may be

thus summed up :—

I. Terminal part of mandibles thick, with a strong sharp tooth be-

hind the apex. Inner lobe of mazille spinulous, the terminal

spines blunt and powerful. Anterior margin of labium straight ;

lobes rounded, their margins ramified all round; the spines of

the comb (see above, p. 32) ramified at their points. Posterior

corners of pronotum rounded, not separated from the posterior

margin.

A. Sockets of first pair of cove externally open.

Lobes of Jabellum with three elongated ramifications, the innermost of

which is very long, all profusely subdivided.

Spinulous ridges of anterior tibie widely separated.

BLepIvs, s. str.

Danish species :—1. B. tricornis, Herbst, fr. Sometimes re~

* In the “ Observationes de Metamorphosi Eleutheratorum,” in vol. i.

of the ‘ Naturhist. Tidsskrift,’ tab. 12. — >

Ann, & Mag. N, Hist. Ser.3, Vol, xx. 3

34:

Prof. J.C. Schiddte on the Tunnelling Coleopterous

markably tenacious of the locality : thus a small colony of this

species still existed thirty years ago in the unpaved footpath of

a little-frequented street in Copenhagen, which in ancient

times was a meadow such as it generally inhabits. 2. B. bi-

cornis, Ahrens, m. fr. on marshy soil near high-water mark, in

company with Corophium longicorne ; its tunnels reach a depth

of 2 feet, and are of importance for the formation of new allu-

vium. 3. B. diota, n.sp., resembles B. hinnulus, Er., but is

distinguished by the great size and development of the anterior

corners of the forehead, and by the elytra being more sparingly

and finely punctate. The larva was described in ‘ Naturhist.

Tidsskrift,’ iii. p. 148 as that of B. hinnulus, Ey., for which the

Danish specimens of the imago were first mistaken; and it is

Dr. Gerstiicker who kindly undertook to compare Danish

specimens with the original specimens of B. hinnulus of Erich-

son in the Berlin Museum, and has thus ascertained that the

former belongs to a different species.

B. Sockets of anterior cove closed.

Lobes of /abellum with only one long, much subdivided branch.

Spinulous ridges on anterior tibieé close together.

TaDUNUS, nov. gen.

Danish species :—1. T. fracticornis, Payk., fr. 2. T. crassi-

collis, Boisd. & Lacord., r. 3. T. atricapillus, Germ., r.

II. Terminal part of mandibles attenuated. Lobes of labellum

ramified on the outside: ramifications short and of uniform

length, some of them bifid or trifid at the apex.

Posterior corners of pronetum projecting from posterior margin.

Spinulous ridges on anterior tibie close together.

A. Inner lobe of mavil/e spinulous, the terminal spines strong, blunt,

Labrum with a round emargination. Lobes of Jabellum broadly

rounded ; the spines of the comb lobate at their points.

Sockets of first pair of coxe externally open.

BarGus, nov. gen.

Danish species :—]. B. erraticus, Er., r. 2. B. opacus, Ey.,

m. fr. 3. B. pallipes, Gravenh., fr. 4. B. ratellus, n. sp.,

m.fr. 5. B. terebrans,u.sp.,m. fr, The two new species re-

semble B. pallipes, but are shorter and thicker, the teeth of their

mandibles strong and powerful, and placed close behind the

point, whilst in pallipes they are small and removed from the

point ; the posterior corners of the pronotum are perceptibly

salient in the new species, obtuse in B. ratellus, rectangular

in B. terebrans; the colour of the antenne and legs is deeper

in the two new species, particularly in B.ratellus. The latter

differs from B. terebrans by possessing a small but distinct

depression on the top of the head, which is wanting in the

latter, and by the elytra being closely and finely punctated in B.

ratellus, whilst their puncture is much coarser in B. terebrans.

B. Inner lobe of mawille without spines, ending with a brush of bristles.

Lobes of labellum elongated, pomted.

a. Sockets of anterior cove externally open.

Terminal part of mandibles with one tooth behind the apex.

Labrum deeply bifid. Tooth of the comb serrate.

Astycoprs, Thomson.

Genera Bledius, Heterocerus, and Dyschirius. 35

Danish species:—l. A. talpa, Gyllh., m. fr. 2. 4. sub-

terraneus, Ev., fr.

b. Sockets of anterior pair of cove closed.

Terminal part of mandibles with two teeth behind the apex.

Anterior margin of /abrum straight. Teeth of the comb with blunt

points.

HusPEROPHILUS, Steph.

Danish species:—1. H. arenarius, Payk., fr.

nT:

The manner in which Erichson, in his work ‘ Naturgeschichte

der Insekten Deutschlands, has treated of the numerous

small Clavicornia has afforded a new starting-pomt for in-

vestigations of the often very difficult natural history of these

animals. His principal object being to reduce to order the

confused mass of material by settling the species, it was but

natural that he should be more successful in distinguishing and

separating than in combining. It is therefore to be expected that

future more penetrating investigations of the structure and de-

velopment of these Coleoptera, and more strictly scientific com-

parisons, will in some cases result im the principal systematic

value being attributed to points now less regarded or overlooked,

and in essential changes in his classification. The last four

families more particularly, Byrrhii, Georyssii, Parnide, and

Heteroceridee, exhibit so close a relationship in all essential

features, especially in the structure of the mouth, and in all

stages of their development, that it is more than probable they

will have to be regarded merely as subdivisions of one and the

same family, each expressing a peculiar modification of the same

fundamental type; for it will be found that all those characters

which distinguish these families from one another are merely

expressive of the different requirements of movement and re-

spiration in different kinds of localities and different media. In

Byrrhus we find this Coleopterous type developed for life on

land, in shady and moist places, and. for feeding on moss. In

other genera we find an incipient modification calculated for

wetter localities. Still within the pale of Byrrhi we meet with

Limnichius, living on the shore itself, and Syncalypta, which is

enabled, by club-shaped bristles on the back, to carry about a

protecting shield of mud. In Georyssus* we see the same type

* With regard to the character “‘ prosternum membraneum,” on which

Erichson lays so much stress as being peculiar to Georyssus, it must be

observed that the prosternum of these Coleoptera is as hard as any other

part of their skeleton; but it is very narrow, owing to the manner in which

the head is retracted, and consists only of a narrow, arched, transverse

band, which, besides, on account of its hidden position, does not acquire

36 Prof. J.C. Schiddte on the Tunnelling Coleopterous

adapted for a similar life, the beetle wandering about on the

shore, protected entirely from the sun and hidden from its ene-

mies by means of a portable roof of clay. Heterocerus obtains

the same protection by tunnelling the shore, whilst Parnus and

Elmis represent still more decided modifications for living in

water, the former crawling about the water-plants under the

surface, whilst the latter clings to the under surface of the

stenes on the bottom. It is one of the most striking examples

of typical unity coupled with extreme biological adaptation for

different modes of life, that im all these animals the structure of

the mouth remains almost entirely the same, even in the smallest

details, not only in Heterocerus and Parnus, but even in the

larvee of Heterocerus and Elmis. All these Coleoptera are dis-

tinguished by the peculiar structure of the mandibles, which,

both in imagos and in larve, are constructed as pincer-shaped

grinding-instruments carrying several teeth on their terminal

part. The larvee possess two maxillary lobes. Hitherto much

stress has been laid on their external shape, which is very vary-

ing ; but this view will have to be abandoned here as everywhere.

Even the larva of Cytilus is entirely different from that of Byr-

rhus in appearance, being much more like the larva of Szlpha,

though the imagos are so very much alike.

Heterocerus and allied genera occupy exactly the same position

with regard to the other Coleoptera we have mentioned as Bledii

occupy amongst Staphylini, Scaritint amongst Carabide, Ce-

briones amongst Elateridee. They exhibit the fossorial modifica-

tion of the type, are the moles of the family, and form a special

group (Heterocerini), which, according to the structure of the

mouth and of the antenne, is distributed into several genera,

the characters of which will be explained further on. H. von

Kiesenwetter has supplied excellent materials for the difficult

distinction of the species, to which we offer some further addi-

tions. The principal characters of the group are as follows :—

When the head is pushed forwards, the closed mandibles work

both as a wedge and asa shovel. These latter are proportionally

long, their upper surface somewhat hollow, the outer margin

bent upwards, and with a tooth on the very edge; the terminal

part is protruding, carries four teeth, and is (in the males of

some species, particularly in large and powerful specimens) pro-

longed and curved upwards ; the inner lobe is greatly developed,

with a free apex and the inner margin furnished with spines

forming a comb ; the molar tooth is very large and grooved ; the

the dark colour of the other integuments. When the head is bent in, the

prosternum is covered up by the organs of the mouth, the trochanters of

the first pair, and the mesosternum.

Genera Bledius, Heterocerus, and Dyschirius. 37

labrum is long, hard, rounded in front, the edge slightly emar-

ginate in the middle, with four strong, short, thick and blunt

spines on each side. The maxillze and labium are elongated and

narrow ; the palpifer of the maxillee reaches beyond the root of

the palpi, forming a protruding point; the maxillary lobes are

hard; the anterior angles of the mentum very salicnt; the

lingua is cordate, hard, and spinulous; the stipites of the labial

palpi very small, and coalesced with one another as well as with

the lingua. The basal joint of the antenne can be laid into a

groove in front of the eye; the club is serrated, arched, calcu-

lated for being coiled round the eye. Prothorax narrowed

behind, its sides extended so as to form an angle on each

side (hitherto erroneously described as the hind corner) ; the

prosternum possesses a short procursus labialis. The legs

are constructed for digging, all three pairs of about the same

size and shape; the cox are transverse; the trochanters

support the femora, which are spindle-shaped ; the tibice broad,

with a comb of spines; the spurs long and curved; the feet

thin, long-haired, four-jointed, the claws very thin. The body

is in general cylindrical, rather flat or vaulted, oblong, with

parallel or round sides. The hairy covering double, consisting

of an inner coat to which the air clings, and an outer coat of

longer bristles standing out from the body; both layers vary

according to the closeness and moisture of the soil in which the

animal has its home, being finer and closer in those which live

in clay, coarser and stiffer in those which dig in sand, those

which live in mixed soil presenting intermediate modifications.

These short observations may suffice as an introduction to the

following synopsis of Danish species; but there is one rather

remarkable point in the structure of these Coleoptera which de-

serves more special attention.

Erichson pointed out (Naturg. d. Ins. Deutschl. ili. 539) the

existence of a peculiar arched ridge on each side of the first

(externally visible) ventral segment, and a similar straight and

sharp ridge on the inner side of the third pair of femora, which

he interpreted as constituting an organ of sound, as indeed it is.

It seems, however, that in suggesting this interpretation, Erich-

son was led rather by a happy instinct than by a careful exa-

mination of these parts; for he does not give any account of

those peculiarities of structure which really enable the animal to

make a sound by means of this apparatus; and those parts to

which he draws attention have in fact nothing at all to do

with the production of the creaking sound. He says that in

some species, the lateral part of the arched ridge is distinctly

transversely grooved in both sexes or only in the males*, whilst

* Referring to the descriptions of the species, we find that the lateral

38 Prof. J.C. Schiddte on the Tunnelling Coleopterous

in others it is entirely smooth all over in both sexes; and this

is really the appearance presented when the parts are observed

through an ordinary pocket magnifier. But whilst, on the one

hand, it seems impossible that the friction of the two ridges

against one another could produce a sound in those species

where they are described as entirely smooth (supposing always

the description to be correct), a careful examination shows, on

the other hand, that the lateral part of the ridge on the abdo-

men, which Erichson evidently looks upon as the source of the

sound, cannot by any means be concerned in its production. It

lacks two essential conditions, being neither in a favourable po-

sition nor furnished with transverse grooves sufficiently fine.

The creaking sound produced by many insects depends on a very

rapid and powerful friction of a very thin edge against a grooved

surface, the fine transverse strize of which catch hold of and again

let go the edge. The thinner the edge, the finer the striz, and

the greater the velocity of the movement, the higher is the note;

and if the velocity and strength of the movement are small and

the grooves coarse, no sound, or a mere low rattling noise, can

be produced. But that lateral part of the abdominal ridge

which, in some species, under a moderate power, shows transverse

grooves is placed so far forward that the ridge on the femur

could touch it only when the leg is stretched out, moved by its

tensors, when the movements would not by any means be strong

or quick enough; and its direction is, moreover, such that the

grooves could not alternately catch and let go the ridge on the

femur. Besides, these grooves are so distant from each other,

so coarse, and so deficient in sharpness, in comparison with the

strie on the creaking-apparatus of other Coleoptera, that even

on that account they cannot be regarded as sources of sound.

Eyen in animals so large as Necrophorit and Cerambyces, the

strie on the surface of the creaking-apparatus are so extremely

close and minute that they show interferential colours*, and are

distinctly observable only by the assistance of a very strong mag-

nifier. The structure does not come out clearly till the parts are

examined under the microscope by strong side light and a mag-

nifying-power of 50-100 times. If the creaking-apparatus of

Heterocerus deserves that appellation, the strize must be expected

to be still more minute, and the surface would appear smooth

part of the ridge is described as grooved in both sexes of H. marginatus,

antermedius, and levigatus, grooved in the male but smooth in the female

of H. fossor, femoralis, fusculus, and hispidatus, smooth in both sexes of

H. parallelus, obsoletus, and sericans.

* On the creaking-apparatus of Necrophori, y. Naturhistorisk Tids-

skrift, ser. 2. vol. 1. (1844), pp. 61, 69; and on that of Cerambyces, Nat.

Tid. ser. 3. vol. ii. p. 494 [Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xv. pp. 191, 192].

Genera Bledius, Heterocerus, and Dyschirius. 39

to the naked eye or even under an ordinary pocket magnifier.

Now this is precisely the state of the case. The ridge on the

femur is not rubbed by the action of the tensors against the

outer lateral part of the ridge, which in some species shows a

few coarse transverse grooves (a sort of introduction, as it were,

to the structure of the true apparatus), but it is rubbed, by the

powerful action of its flexors, against the inner part of the arched

ridge, which forms exactly a ‘segment of acircle, the point of

the coxa being the centre and the femur the radius, and which,

though apparently smooth in all species and both sexes, is co-

vered with transverse striz as regular, close, and minute, in

proportion to the size of the animals, as in any of the larger

insects just mentioned. Of course this is not observable except

by means of the microscope, by side light and a suitable mag-

nifying-power: it is best seen by a power obtained by using a

proportionally strong eye-piece, if the instrument allows it. It

is still better to choose specimens for the examination which

have just gone through their transformations, and in which the

integuments, having not yet acquired their deep colouring, are

semipellucid. The first ventral segment should be cut off, carefully

separated from the soft parts, cleansed with solution of caustic

potash, and examined, under a strong magnifying-power, by

transmitted side light, which, of course, ought to be directed

along the arched ridge, across the transverse striz. The pre-

paration repays the trouble, as nothing can be more elegant

than the aspect of the strize, which cover the whole arch in the

cases where this, by a low power, appears entirely smooth all

over, but only the inner larger portion of it in those cases where

the pocket magnifier shows transverse grooves on the outer or

lateral part of the arch. Whilst, according to the account given

in ‘ Naturg. d. Ins. Deutschl.,’ these latter species would appear

to have the most developed creaking-apparatus, the reverse is

the case, as it is the apparently smooth part of the arch which

produces the sound, not the coarsely grooved part.

It follows that several of the characters for species and sexes

which Erichson thought to find in this creaking-apparatus lose

very much of their value ; but it presents one peculiarity, hitherto

overlooked, whick more than makes up for the loss, and is of

great utility in distinguishing closely allied species. The fore

end of the arch, which generally exhibits a few coarser trans-

verse grooves, is the broader of the two; and these two circum-

stances indicate clearly enough that the friction is calculated to

commence at that end and continue inwards, when the femur

is inflected, towards the lower or posterior extremity of the

arch, which is more and more attenuated, and generally ends at

the posterior margin of the segment. But im some species

40 Prof. J. C. Schiodte on the Tunnelling Coleopterous

(amongst the Danish in H. sericans, intermedius, Physites aureolus

and Augyles hispidus) the arch is continued as an excessively

thin and sharp recurring ridge, as far as the apex of the poste-

rior coxee, thus completing a larger section of the circle. Inter-

mediate forms between this and the common structure do not

seem to occur.

DANISH SPECIES.

HETEROCERUS, F.

Antenne 11-jomted, the club abruptly separate; third and fourth joints

very small.

Maxillary lobes spinulous.

Inner lobe of mandibles membranaceous, with membranaceous comb.

A. Lateral angles of pronotum rounded, without marginal groove.

Inner lobe of mandibles slightly emarginate in the middle.

Body oblong, with parallel sides, flatly vaulted.

Pronotum in the male broader than the elytra, in the female of the

same breadth as these.

a. Arches of creaking-apparatus ending in the posterior margin of the

first ventral segment.

1. H. femoralis (Kiesenw.), fr.

b. Arches of creaking-apparatus recurring from the posterior margin

of the first ventral segment towards the apex of the third pair of

cOxe. ;

2. H. sericans (Kiesenw.), m. fr.

B. Lateral angles of pronotum with deep marginal groove.

a. Lateral angles of pronotum rounded.

Inner lobe of mandibles with a sharp indentation in the middle.

Body oblong, with parallel sides, flatly vaulted.

Pronotum in the male as broad as elytra, in the female narrower.

Arches of creaking-apparatus ending in the posterior margin of the

first ventral segment.

3. H. obsoletus (Curt.), fr. 4. H. levigatus (Panz.), m. fr.

5. H. fusculus (Ksw.), fr.

. Lateral angles of pronotum pointed.

Body oblong, rounded, rather high vaulted, almost the same in both

SEXES.

* Arches of creaking-apparatus ending in the posterior margin of

first ventral segment.

6. H. marginatus, Ksw.

* Arches of creaking-apparatus recurring towards the posterior coxz.

7. H. intermedius, Ksw., vr.

PHYRITES, nov. gen.

Antenne 11-jointed; the club increasing gradually from the third joint.

Mazillary lobes spinulous.

Tnner lobe of mandibles bifid, the lower division membranaceous, with

membranaceous comb, the outer division horny, with frmged margin,

and carrying five or six very thick horny spines.

1, P. aureolus, ». sp. (Oblong, rounded sides, highly vaulted ; hairy

Genera Bledius, Heterocerus, and Dyschirius. 4)

covering thin, coarse, the hair standing out from the body, brown,

in the elytra partly golden, forming three narrow, serrated,

golden transverse bands; the outer “lay er of hairs very long,

close, and black; teeth of mandibles very powerful; lateral

angles of pronotum pointed, marginated; elytra coarsely punc-

tured, without coloured markings on the integument itself; ab-

domen underneath with a broad, dark-red margin; arches of

creaking-apparatus recurring towards posterior cox. 3f—4 mil-

lint: )5 3

AUGYLES, nov. gen.

Antenne 10-jointed; club abruptly commencing, third and fourth joints

very small.

Mazwillary lobes furnished with bristles.

Inner lobe of mandibles membranaceous, with membranaceous comb,

1. A. hispidulus, Ksw., fr.

Ti:

Although the representatives of our indigenous genera of

Searitini, Clivina and Dyschirius, abound everywhere, our know-

ledge of their natural history seems still open to not unimpor-

tant additions. On a previous occasion* I drew attention to

several peculiarities in the structure of the mouth not hitherto

noticed—for instance, the convenient character for distinction be-

tween these two genera, that the anterior margin of the clypeus

is merely slightly emarginate in Clivina, but bi- or tridentate

in Dyschirius; and in a paper on the new genera Niletus and

Ochyropus +, I have pointed out that both Niletus and Chivina,

Dyschirius, Oxygnathus, and Oxystomus amongst Scaritini, pos-

sess a sharp, hard, horny spine between the claws—a true ony-

chium, the possession of which was formerly looked upon as a

principal character of certain Lamellicornia, but which really

occurs in many Coleoptera. ‘To these we shall add two other

remarks. The inner lobe of the maxille in Dyschirius is

almost straight, and ¢runcate at the apex, though it is often de-

scribed as pointed, owing to some of the terminal spines being

mistaken for the apex of the lobe. But in Clivina (fossor) the

lobe terminates, as in other Carabi, with an inwardly bent hook.

In Dyschirius the two bristles of the lingua are divergent, whilst

in Clivina (fossor) they stand so close together as to look like

one thick bristle. The anterior margin of the palpifer is

rounded in Dyschirius, with finely serrated edge, whilst in Cli-

vina it presents an obtuse angle with undulated edge.

In examining the organs of the mouth in a great number of

specimens of Dyschirius, I observed that in many individuals

* Danmarks Eleutherata, i. p. 110, she 4, Ae

+ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift, Rekke 2. vol. ’* 1846-49), 346; vide

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. x. p.379.

4.2 Prof. J.C. Schiddte on the Tunnelling Coleoptera.

the terminal joint of both pairs of palpi presented a rather

peculiar structure. In dry specimens this betrays itself by

the joimt being somewhat broader than usual; and on the

under surface a deep spoon-shaped cavity is observable. In

fresh specimens, or such as have been boiled for examination,

the hard chitinous integument seems to be wanting in this spot,

and to be replaced by a soft membrane, closely covered, as if it

were paved, with small black polygonous chitinous warts, pretty

regularly disposed in quincunx. It can scarcely be doubted

that this is an organ of sense, a secondary palparium; and a

dissection of the internal sexual organs shows that the indivi-

duals possessing this peculiarity are all males. Hitherto no

external marks of distinction between the sexes were known ;

but these supplementary inferior palparia are found in the males

of all species of Dyschirius and in many exotic species of Clivina,

though they are wanting in the males of Clivina fossor.

The characters available for the distinction of species are not

very many. Originally authors were almost confined to the

variations of the external teeth on the tibie; Erichson added

(Kifer d. Mark Brandenburg) the varying extension of the mar-

ginal striz of the elytra; in ‘Danmarks Eleutherata’ I pointed

out some additional characters derived from the shape of the

clypeus ; whilst Thomson, in ‘Skandinaviens Coleoptera,’ drew

attention to the marginal striz of the pronotum, which some-

times are wanting, and, where they exist, extend to a varying

distance from the posterior corners. ‘Two new characters may

be derived from the different size of the supplementary palparia

on the maxillary palpi of the males, and from a small difference

in the outline of the ligula (or, rather, fulerum ligule). By

combining these characters, the species may be grouped with satis-

factory precision. But within the pale of each of these groups the

species are so closely connected that it is exceedingly difficult to

distinguish them except by a set of characters which are not

always as sharp as could be desired; and one is often tempted

to look upon many reputed species as mere local variations.

But this same uniformity is observable also in other genera of

Scaritini, and is, upon the whole, of frequent occurrence in

Arthropoda which dig or burrow in the ground, within such

genera as have a very wide geographical distribution. _ If,

then, those species of Dyschirius which dig their tunnels on the

shores of the Ganges, or in the salt-moors of Tranquebar, and

along the rivers of America, when carefully examined, differ as

little from our indigenous species as these latter do from one

another, we must be content to leave the matter as it is, in spite

of the dearth of specific characters.

Dr. J. E. Gray on a new Australian Tortoise. 43

DANISH SPECIES.

DySscHIRIUS.

A. Superior palparia on both pair of palpi of the male very large, extend-

ing over the whole length of the joint.

a. Clypeus tridentate. Ligula extended at the apex, with pointed cor-

ners. Marginal strie of pronotum continued past the second pair

of bristle-points. Marginal strie of elytra continued to the base

of the latter. External teeth of anterior tibie pointed. Pronotum

round. Hlytra ovate.

1. D. thoracicus, Fabr., fy. 2. D. obscurus, Gyllh., fr.

b. Clypeus bidentate. Ligula gradually attenuated, with round apex.

Marginal strie of pronotum terminating in the second pair of

bristle-points. Marginal strie of elytra ceasing at the shoulder.

External teeth of anterior tibie pointed. Pronotwm oblong, round.

Striz of elytra deeply punctate, smooth towards the apex.

3. D. eneus, Dej., fr. 4. D. salinus, Er., fr.

-¢. Clypeus bidentate. Ligula gradually acuminated, with round apex.

Marginal strie of pronotum wanting. Marginal strie of elytra

ceasing at the shoulder. External teeth of anterior tibie obtuse.

5. D. gibbus, Fabr.

B. Superior palparia on the labial palpi very large, extending over the

whole length of the joints, those on the maxillary palpi reduced to a

small spot behind the apex of the joint.

Clypeus bidentate. Ligula gradually acuminate, with round apex.

Marginal strie of pronotum continued beyond the second pair of

bristle-pomts. Marginal strie of elytra ceasing at the shoulder.

External teeth of anterior tibie indistinet. Pronotum oblong.

6. D. inermis, Curt., r. 7. D. politus, Dej., m. fr. 8. D. im-

punctipennis, Daws. (Geod. Brit. 29. 6 = arenosus, Putz.,

levistriatus, Farm. & Laboulb.), fr.

VII.—Deseription of a new Australian Tortoise (Elseya lati-

sternum). By Dr. J. EH. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

In the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for 1863,

vol. xi. pp. 98 & 246, I described a species of Chelymys under

the name of Chelymys dentata. In that paper I proposed to

divide the genus into two sections, the one having and the

other being destitute of a nuchal shield. In the collection from

North Australia there are two specimens of the animal in spirits,

which show that the animals of the Chelymydes without a nuchal

shield differ greatly from those of the typical Chelymys ; and they

are particularly interesting (as forming a passage between the

Hydraspides of Australia and South America) in having a pair of

beards in the front of the chin, a warty upper surface to the

neck, and scaly temples—all characters absent in most of the

Australian species, but generally present in those genera of the

44, Dr. J. HE. Gray on a new Australian Tortoise.

family peculiar to South America. They thus combine with the

habit and structure of the Australian genera some of the technical

characters of the South American.

I am therefore inclined to form for these a new genus, which

I propose to name (after my late friend, who lost his life in

attempting to increase our knowledge of the zoological produc-

tions of Australia) Eusrya, and which may be thus charac-

terized :—

Nose and crown of the head covered with a smooth skin;

temple, cheek, and throat covered with flat polygonal plates;

tympanum flat; chin two-bearded; upper side of the neck

warty. Shell convex, expanded and subdentate behind; sides

slightly revolute ; nuchal shield none; front of the cavity rather

contracted. Vertebral column short, keeled within; sternum

solid, rather narrow, with shelving side-wings; gular shield

elongate, smal], marginal. Tail short, thick, concave ; claws 5/4,

acute.

Hab. Australia.

This genus contains two species :—

1. Elseya dentata.

Chelymys dentata, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1863, vol. xi. pp. 98, 246.

The front of the sternum narrow, half-ovate, with the sides

rapidly contracted in front; the gular shield very narrow, elon-

gate.

Hab. North Australia, Upper Victoria (Dr. Elsey).

There is a series of three shells of this species in the British

Museum, young, middle-aged, and adult. The plates of the

under surface of the two younger specimens are pale, and do not

appear to have a dark edge as is the case with the two half-

grown specimens of the next species. The adult shell is black

brown above and below, varied with pale brown on the middle

of the sternum.

2. Elseya latisternum.

The front lobe of the sternum broad, nearly semicircular in

front; the gular shield as broad as the side shield, and rather

short ; the plate on the under surface yellow, with narrow dark

edges to the shields; hinder margin of the shell dentated.

Hab. North Australia.

There are two specimens of this species in the Museum;

they are at once known from FE. dentata by the greater compa-

rative breadth of the sternum, which is most marked in the

form of the front lobe, though common to all its parts.

The shells of the two specimens vary considerably im form,

one being much broader compared with the length than the

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 45

other ; and also, on the surface, one has the shields of the back

of the shell nearly smooth, and the other covered with close

sunken dots.

The animal is dark slate-coloured above, and paler grey be-

neath. ‘There is a broad well-marked white streak from the

hinder angle of the mouth, margining the underside of the

tympanum and extending nearly to the middle of the base of

the front legs; the hind legs have a series of rather large pro-

minent scales from the outer side of the knee to the base of the

outer toes, which are largest near the toes; tail short, with two

series of shields on the underside, behind the vent.

VIII.—Additions to the knowledge of Australian Reptiles and

Fishes. By Avpert GUnruer, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.

Tue British Museum has received in the course of the last three

or four years various collections of reptiles and fishes from Aus-

tralia, and quite recently one made at Champion Bay and Nicol

Bay (Western and North-western Australia) by Mr. Duboulay,

and two others brought by Hr. Dimel from Cape York and Port

Denison. The following notes were made during the arrange-

ment of these specimens; and, besides the new species, only

those are mentioned which were either previously desiderata in

the British Museum, or for which new localities can be given.

TORTOISES.

1. Elseya latisternum.

See the preceding paper by Dr. Gray.

LIZARDS.

2. Odatria punctata (Gray).

West and North Australia.

Var. timoriensis. Timor, Torres Straits.

3. Odatria ocellata (Gray) = ?O. tristis (Schleg.),

West and North-west coast of Australia (Nicol Bay, Du-

boulay).

Distinguished by the large spines of the tail.

4. Pygopus lepidopus (Lac.).

Pygopus squamiceps (Gray).

Swan River, Champion Bay, Sydney, Van Diemen’s Land.

5. Lygosoma laterale, sp. n.

Habit slender ; limbs feeble, fore limbs equal in length to the

4.6 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

distance of the ear from the snout ; toes very unequal in length.

Nasals shghtly in contact behind the rostral ; central occipital

not much larger than a preoccipital. Eyelid with a transparent

disk ; ear-opening very small. Body surrounded by twenty-two

series of scales; sixty-seven scales in a series between the axils

of the fore and hind limbs. Two large preeanal scales. A deep-

black band, two scales broad, runs from behind the eye along

each side to the root of the tail.

South Australia. 54 inches long (Krefft, 47).

6. Lygosoma australis (Gray).

Swan River, Cape York.

7. Delma Fraseri (Gray).

Champion Bay and Nicol Bay.

8. Lialis Burton (Gray).

Scales in seventeen rows. Swan River, Houtman’s Abrolhos.

Var. with the ornamental colours very pale; chin not dark-

coloured. Champion Bay.

9. Lialis punctulata (Gray).

Scales in nineteen rows. Sydney, Port Essington.

Var. bicatenata. Port Essington.

Var. uniformly coloured. Sydney, Cape York.

10. Rhodona punctata (Gray).

Swan River.

11. Rhodona Gerrardii, sp. n.

Rhodona punctata, var. Gerrardu, Gray.

Nasals slightly in contact with each other; upper labials

six ; frontal triangular, thrice as large as the central occipital.

Body surrounded by twenty-one longitudinal series of scales ;

seventy-one scales in a longit. series between the axils of the

fore and hind limbs. Two large preeanal scales. Ear-opening

small, covered by scales. Fore limb very small, single-toed on

one side, and with two toes on the other. Two toes behind, the

outer more than twice as long as the inner. Body with three

black longit. bands, one along the middle, and one on each side

of the back.

Swan River, Champion Bay. 5 inches long.

The fore limb of Rhodona punctata is about as large as a scale,

that of Rhodona Gerrardii equals the length of six scales; Rh.

punctata has only one large central occipital, kh. Gerrard one

central and a pair of preeoccipitals. The eyelid has a transparent

disk m the middle.

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. A7

12. Rhodona punctato-vittata, sp. n.

Nasals forming together a broadish suture ; upper labials six;

frontal triangular, twice as large as the central occipital. Body

surrounded by seventeen longit. series of scales; eighty-two

scales in a longit. series between the axils of the fore and

hind limbs. Two large preanal scales. Ear-opening small,

covered with scales. Fore limb minute, tapering, terminating

in a straight minute claw, with scarcely an indication of a second

claw. Two toes behind, the outer more than twice as long as

the inner. Each scale on the upperside with a black dot, the

dots forming six or eight longit. lines.

Queensland. 5 inches long.

13. Anomalopus Verreauatu (Dun.).

Brisbane, Clarence River, New South Wales. Specimens

from the last two localities through Mr. Krefft.

The eyelid is scaly, as observed by Prof. Peters in ‘ Monatsber.

Ak. Wiss. Berl.’ 1867, p. 24. All our specimens are distin-

guished by the light occipital cross band, which is pure white

in young examples, but only faintly marked in adults of twelve

inches in length.

14. Hinulia fasciolata, sp. n.

Ear-opening small, rounded, and not denticulated in front. Na-

sals separated by the prefrontal, which is of a triangular shape.

Postoccipitals forming a suture together behind the central

occipital, which is a little smaller than the preoccipitals. Body

surrounded by thirty-three longit. series of scales, the vertebral

scales being scarcely larger than the others; there are fifty

scales in a longit. series between the axils of the fore and hind

limbs. Subcaudal scales broad. Lach series of scales on the

upperside of the tail with a low ridge. Six preeanal scales, the

central pair being much the largest. Limbs rather feeble; tail

of moderate length, but very thick. Body with narrow, black,

rather irregular cross bands, some of them obliquely descending

forwards.

Rockhampton, Port Curtis. 8 inches long.

15. Hinulia branchial, sp.u.

Ear-opening small, rounded, and not denticulated in front.

Nasals forming together a suture ; the central occipital separating

entirely the postoccipitals. Body surrounded by twenty-four

longit. series of scales, of which the vertebral pair is broadest;

there are fifty scales in a longit. series between the axils of the

fore and hind limbs. Subcaudal scales broad. Four przeanal

scales, the central pair largest. Limbs rather feeble; tail of

48 Dr. A.Ginther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

moderate length. Three black transverse spots on each side of

the neck.

Three specimens, 4 inches long, from Champion Bay, north-

west coast of Australia.

16. Hinulia Richardsonii (Gray).

Abrolhos, Champion Bay.

17. Hinulia (Hemispheriodon) Gerrardii (Gray).

Rockhampton (Krefft, 43, 512).

18. Cyclodus gigas.

The stomach contained the remains of crabs and a fungus.

19. Cyclodus occipitalis (Ptrs.).

Adelaide, Swan River.

20. Cyclodus Adelaidensis (Ptrs.).

Adelaide (Krefft, 40).

21. Tropidolepisma nitidum (Gray).

Swan River.

22. Tropidolepisma majus (Gray).

Rockhampton.

23. Mabouia macrura, sp. n.

Tail strong, much longer than the body; limbs rather feeble.

Supranasals separate. Prefrontal forming a long suture with

the rostral and parietal, separating the postfrontals, which are

small. Central occipitals three, of nearly the same size; post-

occipitals forming a short suture together behind the central

occipital. Anterior margin of the ear-opening with very small

denticulations. Body surrounded by twenty-eight longit. se-

ries of scales, the vertebral pair being broadest. There are forty-

eight scales in a longit. series between the fore and hind limbs.

Eight preeanal scales nearly equal in size. Uniform brownish-

olive above, white below.

Cape York. 143 inches long, the length of the tail being

9 inches.

24. Tetradactylus decresiensis (Péron).

Kangaroo Island, Swan River, Champion Bay.

Young specimens with a very distinct and well-defined black

lateral band from the snout to the end of the trunk.

25. Hemiergis polylepis, sp. n.

Very similar to H. decresiensis, but with smaller scales, the

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 49

body being surrounded by twenty-six series (in H. decresiensis

by eighteen or twenty). Also the toes are more developed, the

anterior as well as the posterior being conspicuously longer than

the eye. Posterior frontals well developed. Seventy-two scales

in a series between the axils of the fore and hind limbs.

South Australia. 4 inches long (Krefft, 48).

26. Chelomeles quadrilineatus (D. & B.).

Houtman’s Abrolhos, Swan River.

27. Soridia miopus, sp. n.

Form of the head and arrangement of head-shields as in S.

lineata, but with the snout somewhat less wedge-shaped. No free

fore limbs, but there is a short longitudinal groove, in the upper

end of which a minute tubercle (the first indication of an external

limb) is visible; hind limb as long as the head, terminating in

a single longish toe. Body surrounded by twenty series of scales.

Coloration nearly uniform, pale olive ; four very indistinct stripes

of minute blackish dots along the dorsal series of scales.

Six inches long. Champion Bay.

28. Ctdura marmorata (Gray).

Port Essington, New South Wales (Krefft, 52).

29. dura rhombifera (Gray).

2?Phyllodactylus Lesueurii, D. & B.

New South Wales (Krefft).

30. Strophura spinigera (Gray).

Houtman’s Abrolhos, Champion Bay, South Australia ( Krefft,

31. Diplodactylus vittatus (Gray).

Champion Bay, New South Wales.

32. Diplodactylus ornatus (Gray).

Houtman’s Abrolhos, New South Wales, through Mr. Krefft

(114, 518).

33. Diplodactylus marmoratus (Gray).

Houtman’s Abrolhos, Freemantle, Champion Bay.

34, Diplodactylus ocellatus (Gray).

Diplodactylus bilineatus (Gray).

Houtman’s Abrolhos, Champion Bay.

35. Diplodactylus polyophthalmus, sp. n.

Allied to D. ocellatus (Gray), but with much smaller scales,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xx. 4,

50 =Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

which in that species are particularly rough and tubercular.

Tail rounded, rather swollen. Head scarcely depressed. Sub-

digital plates narrow. Scales minute, those on the belly scarcely

larger than those on the back. Upper parts brownish or greyish,

with round white spots, which, in young examples, are sur-

rounded by a brown ring. Uniform white below.

Two specimens, 3 and 2 inches long.

Nicol Bay, Champion Bay.

36. Gecko albo-fasciolatus, sp.u.

Body covered with small flat granulations arranged in cross

series, and with ten longitudinal series of mamilliform tubercles ;

seales of the belly in about twenty-six longitudinal series ; pree-

anal pores sixteen, in a slightly angular series. Nostril sepa-

rated from the rostral by an intervening shield. Thirteen upper

and eleven lower labials; the front pair of chin-shields are as

long as the first lower labial. Head depressed, longer than

broad. Tail rounded on the sides, with an irregular series of

enlarged subcaudals. Reddish-olive, marbled with greyish ;

upperside of the head with a few small white spots; a narrow

white horseshoe-shaped band across the neck, the convexity

being directed backwards. Trunk with six rather irregular,

narrow, transverse bands, composed of white spots. Lower

parts uniform whitish.

Ten inches long ; without tail 63.

Polynesia ?

37. Gehyra australis (Gray).

Swan River, Port Essington, Champion Bay, Norfolk Islands.

38. Heteronotia Binoei (Gray).

Eublepharis derbianus (Gray).

Hoplodactylus australis, Stemdachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 18, taf. 1. fig. 2.

Houtman’s Abrolhos, Champion Bay, Port Essington, North

Australia, Queensland.

39. Hemidactylus vittatus (Gray).

Borneo, Port Essington.

The Australian specimen differs from the types only in having

a pair of additional rows of very small tubercles along the median

line of the back. ,

40. Phyllurus Milliusii (Bory).

Sydney, Houtman’s Abrolhos, Champion Bay.

RuyNcHOEDURA (g.n., Geckot.).

All the toes are compressed, rather slender, not dilated in any

Dr. A. Gunther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 51

part, granular below, with feeble claws. Head and body with

very small granule-like scales, without any tubercles; tail

rounded, slightly swollen, covered with rings of small square

plates. Snout pointed, peculiarly compressed; labial shields

minute, front of upper jaw covered with a prominent, nail-like

shield. Tongue narrow, rather pointed in front, not notched.

Eye very large. Some larger shields, without pores, before

and behind the vent.

41. Rhynchoedura ornata, sp. n.

Greyish, each side with confluent black half-rings, a black

band across the occiput. Head and body with round, faint,

whitish spots. Lower parts white.

Nicol Bay. 24 inches long.

42. Physignathus Lesueurw (Gray).

Istiurus Lesueurii (D. & B.).

Amphibolurus heterurus (Ptrs.).

Clarence River (Krefft).

43. Chlamydosaurus Kingu (Gray).

Port Essington, Cape York, Nicol Bay.

44, Lophognathus Gilberti (Gray).

Redtenbacheria fasciata, Stemdachner, Reise d. Novara, Rept. p. 31.

Port Essington, Swan River, Champion Bay, Nicol Bay.

45. Grammatophora reticulata (Gray).

Nicol Bay.

46. Grammatophora maculata (D. & B.).

Nicol Bay, Champion Bay.

47. Grammatophora macrolepis, sp. n.

No larger scales scattered between the others; all the scales

comparatively large, those on the back larger than the labial

shields ; body surrounded by fifty-four series of scales, of which

fourteen belong to the back. Scarcely a trace of a dorsal crest

is visible on the back. Hund limbs long, extending to the ear,

if laid forwards. Snout short, nostril midway between the end

of the snout and the angle of the ocular slit. A few small pro-

minent scales above and behind the tympanum. Yellowish-olive,

with some darker markings on the side of the body and tail.

Snout deep brown, interorbital space yellowish ; lateral fold of

the neck black.

Adult female, 8 inches long, tail 74 inches.

52 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

48. Grammatophora levis, sp. un.

Back with a median series and several irregular transverse

series of larger scales. None of the dorsal scales with a distinct

keel or spine; scales of the limbs and tail distinctly, those of the

belly very faintly keeled. Head broad, high; snout very sbort,

the nostril being midway between the end of the snout and the

angle of the ocular slit. Limbs of moderate length, hind limb ex-

tending nearly to the gular fold. Sides of the head and neck with

conical tubercle-like scales. Yellowish brown, with a series of

irregular large blackish-brown blotches along each side of the

back ; sometimes the whole back reticulated with brown.

Champion Bay. 7 inches long, tail 4 inches.

49. Grammatophora temporalis, sp. un.

No larger scales scattered between the others, those on the

back small, shorter than the labial shields ; a shght dorsal crest

runs from the nape to the end of the trunk. Hind limbs very

long, extending beyond the eye, if laid forwards. Nostril much

nearer to the end of the snout than to the angle of the ocular

slit. A few prominent scales in the middle between the tym-

panum and the lateral fold of the neck. A white band along

the lips, below the tympanum to the lateral fold of the neck ; a

black band above it from the eye to the tympanum ; a white

streak above the black band, more or less distinctly continued

along the side of the anterior part of the trunk. Back with

more or less complete black cross bars, the anterior only being

distinct in adult examples. Tail more or less distinctly

annulated.

Port Essington, Nicol Bay. The largest example is 13 inches

long, the tail being 9 inches.

50. Grammatophora calotella.

Calotella australis, Steindachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 28.

Cape York.

51. Tympanocryptis cephalus, sp.n.

Body very stout; head very short, high, and broad; snout

extremely short, the nostril being midway between the angle of

the ocular slit and the end of the snout; hind limb extending

somewhat beyond the gular fold, if laid forwards. Head above —

with keeled scales, larger than those on the back, those on the

occiput being particularly large. Back with numerous enlarged

spinous scales intermixed with the others; upper parts of the

limbs with large spinous imbricate scales. Body reddish olive,

with a brown collar; blackish-brown bands across the limbs

and tail.

Nicol Bay. Adult female 54 inches long, tail 3 inches.

‘Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 53

SNAKES.

52. Tropidonotus picturatus (Schleg.).

This snake varies in coloration. We have received a nearly

entirely black example from Cape York.

Port Essington, Cape York, Rockhampton.

53. Dendrophis punctulata (Gray).

Attains to a length of 66 inches.

Port Essington, Moreton Bay, Cape York, Sydney.

54. Dendrophis calligastra, sp. n.

Scales in thirteen rows. Loreal none. Hight upper labials,

the fourth and fifth entering the orbit ; one pre- and two post-

orbitals ; temporals 1+2+42. Abdominal shields 179, strongly

keeled. Some of the scales with a single terminal pore.

Greenish brown above, sides of the head and neck yellow; a

black band across the rostral shield through the eye to the side

of the neck. Belly purplish yellow, powdered with purplish brown.

Cape York. 36 inches long, tail 12 inches.

55. Brachysoma diadema (Schleg.).

Elaps ornata (Gray).

Glyphodon ornatus (Gthr.).

Extends over the whole of Australia.

56. Diemenia superciliosa (Fisch.).

= Pseudoelaps Sordelli (Jan)=Ps. Kubingui (Jan) = Cacophis Giintheri

(Steindachner).

New South Wales, Adelaide, Norfolk Islands ?

Of this snake we possess now a series of nine examples, vary-

ing in length from 16 to 60 inches.

57. Hoplocephalus nigriceps (Gthr.).

Swan River, Champion Bay.

58. Hoplocephalus maculatus (Steindachner) .

The young has the upperside of the head and neck uniform

black.

Rockhampton.

FROGS.

1. Pterophryne Georgiana (Bibr.).

Port Essington, Sydney, King George’s Sound (Krefft, 4).

2. Pterophryne fasciata (Stemdachner).

Houtman’s Abrolhos, Sydney. (Cystignathus sydneyensis,

Krefft, 16.)

54. Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

8. Limnodynastes Krefftu (Gthr.).

se da Salmini, Steindachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 27, taf. 4. figs.

12-15.

Specimens from Rockhampton, collected by Hr. Damel, have

the hinder surface of the thighs black, dotted with white.

Sydney, Brisbane, Rockhampton, Clarence River (Krefft, 59),

Port Denison.

4 Limnodynastes ornatus (Gray).

Opisthodon Frauenfeldi, Steindachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 9, taf. 1. figs. ]-3

(representing the usual coloration).

Extremely variable in coloration.

Port Denison, Cape York.

5. Limnodynastes (Platypectron) Dumerilii (Ptrs.).

Heliorana Grayi, Steindachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 32, taf. 2. figs. 11-14.

Adelaide.

6. Limnodynastes platycephalus, sp. un.

Closely allied to ZL. tasmaniensis, but with the head much

broader and depressed. Snout very short, not longer than the

eye. Hind leg without large gland. Two small metatarsal

tubercles. Hind toes slightly fringed. Choanz very small.

Olive, with large dark-brown blotches, sometimes a white verte-

bral line. A broad dark band along the canthus rostralis, an-

other from the eye to behind the angle of the mouth; an

oblique band-like spot below the eye descending forwards.

Adelaide (Krefft, 39).

7. Chiroleptes australis (Gray).

Cyclorana Nove Hollandie, Steimdachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 29, taf. 2.

figs. 7-10.

?Phractops alutaceus (Ptrs.)=old example?

Clarence River, Rockhampton, Port Denison, Nicol Bay.

8. Chiroleptes alboguttatus, sp.n.?

? Chiroleptes inermis, Ptrs.

Head as long as broad; snout depressed, with very indistinct

canthus rostralis, somewhat pointed; the distance between the

nostrils is less than that from a nostril to the eye. Tympanum

at least one-third smaller than the eye. Vomerine teeth between

the choanez, in two transverse series, separated by an inter-

space, but extending to the edge of the choane. The inner

metatarsal disciform tubercle well developed; no outer meta-

tarsal tubercle. Smooth above; hinder lower parts very finely

granulated. Toes half webbed. Blackish ashy above, indistinctly

marbled with black. A white vertebral line. Sides of the

Dr, A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 55

body and hind part of the thighs black, with numerous round

white spots. A black band along the canthus rostralis and

above the tympanum. Lower parts white; throat reticulated

with greyish.

Port Denison, Cape York. Body 2% inches long, hind limb

34 inches.

9. Heleioporus albopunctatus (Gray).

Swan River, Port Essington, River Murray, New South

Wales.

10. Uperolia marmorata (Gray).

West Australia, Cape York, Sydney.

1]. Pseudophryne Bibronii (Gthr.).

Van Diemen’s Land, Sydney, Clarence River (Krefft, 60).

12. Eucnemis bicolor (Gray).

Port Essington, Cape York, Brisbane, Blue Mountains, Port

Denison.

13. Litoria Wilcowu (Gthr.).

?Litoria Copei, Stemdachner, Reise d. Novara, p. 56, taf. 3. figs. 14-17.

Clarence River, Rockhampton, Port Curtis, Brisbane (Krefft,

62, 55), Richmond (Krefft, 12).

14. Litoria nasuta (Gray).

Port Essington, Clarence River (Krefit, 56), Brisbane (Krefft,

57), Sydney (Krefft, 54).

15. Litoria latopalmata, sp. n.

Snout of moderate length, somewhat pointed in front, the

distance between the front angles of the orbit being equal to

that between the eye and the extremity of the snout. Canthus

rostralis rather obtuse; nostril much nearer to the end of the

snout than to the eye. Tympanum very distinct, not much

smaller than the eye. Back with a few indistinct, short, glan-

dular folds or tubercles. Vomerine teeth in two oblique short

series between the choanz. Tongue with scarcely a trace of a

notch behind. Openings of the Eustachian tubes at least as

wide as the choanz. Limbs rather slender, the third finger

much longer than the fourth. The length of the body is less

than the distance between vent and heel. Tarsus with a lateral

fold of the skin. Metatarsus with two small tubercles, the inner

being minute. Toes broadly webbed, the web extending to the

disks of the third and fifth toes. The length of the fourth toe

is one-half that of the body. Disks small.

Upper parts reddish-olive, with numerous small irregular

56 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

brown spots. An irregular brown cross band between the eyes.

A brown streak along the canthus rostralis ; tympanum in front

and behind with a narrow deep-brown margin. Hunder surface

of thighs marbled with brown, as the upperside.

Kenethyvot the bodyasneamrr rt: ener ee 18 lines.

Width of cleft of the mouth .......... ess

Lengthvof forelimb. 21a. oaeews ese La ee

- third finery. : vst sie oa By ap

as hin litle G cece eee oe Somes

a GMAIR ING 4 oo aioroins Aa ay a aa LAr.

35 TOUTtHELOE: OM ees cee Or;

Two specimens from Port Denison (Krefft, 11).

16. Hylorana erythrea (Schleg.).

East-Indian archipelago, San Christoval, Cape York.

17. Hyla Ewing (D. & B.).

Hobart Town, North-east Australia, Melbourne, King George’s

Sound (Krefft, 2).

18. Hyla adelaidensis (Gray).

Port Essington, King George’s Sound (Krefft, 23).

19. Hyla rubella (Gray).

Port Essington, Houtman’s Abrolhos, Port Denison (Krefft,

36).

20. Hyla Peroni (D. & B.).

Port Essington, New South Wales, Clarence River, Rock-

hampton.

21. Hyla infrafrenata, sp. n.

Snout short, rounded, with obtuse canthus rostralis. Vome-

rine teeth in two transverse series on a level with the hind part

of the choane, which are wide. Skin minutely granular.

Fingers one-third webbed. Uniform green above (bluish in

spirits). A pure white band round the margin of the lower jaw,

and continued in a straight line to below and behind the tym-

panum. Lower parts whitish.

Cape York.

Body 13 inch long, hind limb 3 inches, foot 2 inch.

22. Hyla nigrofrenata, sp.n.

Allied to H. adelaidensis, but with longer hind limbs, wider

choane, and different coloration.

Snout long and pointed. Vomerine teeth in two transverse

groups on a level with the front part of the choanz. Choanz

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 57

about one-fourth the size of the tympanum. Fingers not

webbed. Skin perfectly smooth above. Light olive-coloured ;

a broad black band runs from the extremity of the snout through

the eye and tympanum, to the side of the abdomen, being inéer-

rupted a short distance behind the tympanum. A blackish band

across the back of the wrist. Hind limbs marbled with blackish

along the fore and hinder surfaces.

Cape York.

Body 12 inch long, hind limb 33 inches, foot 10 lines.

23. Pelodryas ceruleus (White).

Port Essington, Moreton Bay, Nicol Bay, Sydney.

FISHES.

1. Serranus fuscoguttatus (Riipp.).

Kast Africa, Hope Island, Port Essington, Port Denison,

Cape York.

2. Serranus undulato-striatus (Ptrs.).

New South Wales.

3. Plectropoma maculatum (Bl.).

Cape York.

4. Priacanthus Benmebari (Schleg.).

Japan, Sydney.

5. Ambassis agrammus, sp. un.

De7 t— Avee Welat. 26-27.

The height of the body is two-fifths of the total length (with-

out caudal). Lateral line visible on the foremost scale only.

The second dorsal spine is longer than the third, much longer

than the second and third anal spines (which are equal in

length), not much shorter than the head, and two-sevenths of

the total length (without caudal). Uniform greenish olive, with

a narrow bluish-silvery band along the middle of the tail.

Cape York.

6. Ambassis Agassizii (Stemdachner).

EGA oni lnty 25)

The height of the body is contained twice and one-third in

the total length (without caudal). Lateral line none. The

second dorsal spine is scarcely longer than the third, much

longer than the anal spines, shorter than the head without snout,

and less than one-fourth of the total length (without caudal),

Body immaculate, with a narrow bluish-silvery lateral band.

Clarence River (Krefft, 65).

58 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

7. Apogon aterrimus, sp. 1.

D.7| 5. A.=. I lat. 25.

The height of the body is one-third of the total length (with-

out caudal). Entirely uniform deep black.

Cape York.

8. Apogon Nove Hollandie (Val.).

New South Wales.

9. Arripis georgianus (C. & V.).

Port Jackson, Hobson’s Bay, Holdfast Bay, Houtman’s

Abrolhos.

10. Therapon percoides (Gthr.).

Fitzroy River, Nicol Bay.

The cross bands become less distinct in large examples, of

7 inches in length.

11. Therapon unicolor (Gthr.).

New South Wales, Fitzroy River, Rockhampton.

12. Therapon caudovittatus (Rich.).

Victoria, Harvey River, Cape York.

13. Diagramma reticulatum (Gthr.).

China, Cape York.

14. Scatophagus argus (L.).

= Sc. ornatus (C. & V.).

In young specimens the markings are frequently like those

represented in Se. ornatus by Cuvier and Valenciennes; but

these specimens do not constitute a distinct species, being in other

respects entirely similar to young Sc. argus without light bands

on the head. The length of the dorsal spines is subject to much

variation. Young specimens from Australia exhibit the coloration

of Se. ornatus ; adult do not differ from East-Indian Se. argus.

Cape York, Sydney (Krefft, 102).

15. Atypichthys strigatus (Gthr.).

Young with a black ocellus on the soft dorsal fin.

Swan River, Holdfast Bay, Champion Bay, Raoul Island,

Sydney.

16. Scorpis equipinnis (Rich.).

Scorpis lineolatus (Kner).

Richardsonii (Steindachner).

This species varies a little in the shape of the body, and in the.

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 59

proportions of parts of the head; but from an examination of

eight examples in the British Museum, I cannot convince my-

self that these variations represent distinct species.

Swan River, King George’s Sound, New South Wales (Krefft,

5), Sydney (Schiitte).

17. Upeneus porosus (C. & V.).

D.8|5. A.7. L, lat. 30.

Distinguished by the elevated anterior part of the body, the

greatest depth of which is not more than one-third of the total

length (without caudal). Upper profile of the head and neck

describing a fourth of a nearly regular circle. Snout elevated,

not quite twice as long as the eye. Barbels extending to the

vertical from the hind margin of the opercle. The dorsal fin

commences above the root of the pectoral ; its spines are flexible,

the longest being two-thirds the height of the body. Tubes of

the lateral line with a cluster of short branchlets. Parts above

the lateral line clouded with darker. Spinous dorsal blackish.

Sydney (Krefft), Melbourne, Van Diemen’s Land, New

Zealand.

18. Upeneus signatus, sp. nu.

Allied to U. barberinus, but with the head much deeper, the

snout much shorter, and larger caudal spot.

D.8|5. Ag L. lat. 30-31.

The height of the body is contained thrice or thrice and one-third

in the total length (without caudal). Head not much longer than

deep ; snout only twice as long as the diameter of the eye.

Barbels extending to the hind margin of the preeopereulum.

Dorsal spines slightly flexible at the top. Tubes of the lateral

line with rather long lateral branchlets in small number. Colo-

ration as in U. barberinus, but with the black caudal spot large,

square, extending over the back of the tail ; a whitish blotch in

front of it.

Port Jackson (Krefft, 12). 0™:18 long.

19. Lethrinus Richardsoni (Gthr.).

China, Cape York.

20. Girella tricuspidata (Q. & G.).

New South Wales.

21. Chilodactylus nigricans (Rich.).

D. 4S. A. 4. L. lat. 48-53.

King George’s Sound, Victovia.

60 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

22. Chilodactylus gibbosus (Rich.).

The tuberosities on the snout and the long dorsal spines are

probably sexual characters developed with age.

Sydney (Krefft).

23. Scorpena bynoensis (Rich.).

Scorpena bynoensis, Richards. Ereb. & Terr. Fish. pl. 14. figs. 3-5 (young).

jacksoniensis, Steindachner, Wien. Sitzgsber. xin. taf. 3. fig. 2

(adult ; tentacles and membrane between dorsal spines badly figured).

North-west coast of Australia, Port Jackson (Krefft, 6).

24. Centropogon australis (White).

Sydney, Port Jackson.

25. Centropogon robustus (Gthr.).

Centropogon Troschelit (Stemdachner).

Sydney, Port Jackson, Cape York.

26. Centropogon marmoratus (Gthr.).

Moreton Bay.

27. Polynemus macrochir, sp. n.

Das tes Aa eeeietat7O:

Five pectoral appendages, three of which extend to the anal

fin; pectoral fin nearly as long as the head, the length of which

is contained thrice and two-thirds in the total (without caudal),

and equal to the distance between the root of the ventral and

the anal. A distinct spine above the angle of the praeoperculum.

Coloration uniform.

New South Wales (Krefft, 103). 0™:22 long.

28. Otolithus atelodus.

DANO. egy

Scales small; canine teeth none. Body elongate. The height

of the body is contained five times in the total length (without

caudal), the length of the head thrice and two-thirds. The

maxillary does not quite extend to the vertical from the hind

margin of the orbit. Preeoperculum rounded, with small,

slender, distant, spmous teeth. Dorsal spmes moderately feeble.

Caudal fin slightly emarginate. Silvery; distinct, oblique, dark

lines along the series of scales. Axil black behind.

Australia. O™31 long.

29. Acanthurus matoides (C. & V.).

Indian Ocean, Pacific, Nicol Bay.

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 61

30. Trachynotus Bailloni (Lac.).

Indian Ocean, Pacific, New South Wales (Krefft, 101).

31. Psettus argenteus (L.).

New South Wales.

32. Aphritis Urvillit (C. & V.).

Dee L7H19, AL 23.) Ll. late 61:

(Van Diemen’s Land.) Sydney (Krefft, 506).

33. Batrachus diemensis (Les.).

Port Essington, Cape York.

34, Batrachus dubius (White).

New South Wales (Krefft).

35. Antennarius pinniceps (C. & V.).

Sydney.

36. Antennarius Commersonii (C. & V.).

Sydney (Krefft).

Entirely uniform deep black.

37. Lepidotrigla phalena (C. & V.).

Melbourne.

38. Gobius crassilabris (Gthr.).

Oualan, Aneiteum, Australia (63. 7, 29, 20, Krefft).

39. Gobius bynoensis (Richards.).

Port Essington, Cape York.

40. Gobius ornatus (Rupp.).

Indian Ocean, Pacific, Nicol Bay.

41. Gobius Voigtit (Blkr.).

Port Essington, Cape York.

42. Gobiodon quinquestrigatus (C. & V.).

Tubercles on the forehead minute.

_ Kast-Indian archipelago, Cape York.

43. Eleotris australis (Krefft).

Eastern Creek.

62 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

44, Eleotris gymnocephalus (Stemdachner).

Hawkesbury River (Krefft, 52).

45. Hleotris Coxti (Krefft).

Hawkesbury River, Mulgoa Bay (Krefft).

46. Eleotris grandiceps (Krefft).

Bronte (Krefft).

47. Eleotris fusca (Bl., Schn.).

Indian and Pacific Oceans, Australia.

48. Eleotris compressus (Krefit).

This species varies much in the form of the body, according

to age and season, being rather elongate when young and be-

fore spawning-time. Also the coloration varies, old males

having, in the spawning-season, a bright orange anal fin with a

broad black and white margin.

Clarence River (Krefft), River Dunn (Port Denison).

49. Eleotris aporos (Blkr.).

Islands of the East-Indian archipelago and Pacific, Port

Denison, Cape York.

50. Eleotris muralis (Q. & G.).

Kast-Indian archipelago, Philippine Islands, Cape York.

51. Periophthalmus Koelreuteri (Pall.).

Port Essington, Nicol Bay.

52. Salarias meleagris (C. & V.).

Van Diemen’s Land, Cape York.

53. Petroscirtes anolis (C. & V.).

Port Jackson.

54. Lepidoblennius haplodactylus (Steindachner).

Rockhampton (Krefft).

55. Cristiceps robustus, sp. n.

D.3/%. AZ

The anterior dorsal fin commences over the hinder margin of

the preoperculum, and is not higher than the posterior. A

fringed tentacle above the orbit, a small one at the nostril.

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 63

Back with seven dark cross bands, the first below the anterior

dorsal, subocellated.

Melbourne. 5 inches long.

StTicHARIUM, gen. nov. (Blenn.).

Body elongate, compressed, naked, or with scarcely a trace of

rudimentary scales hidden in the skin. Anterior part of the

lateral line distinct, near the dorsal profile. Snout short ; small

teeth im the jaws, without canines; palate apparently toothless.

Dorsal fin long, formed by pungent spines only. Ventrals

jugular, with two rays; caudal distinct. Gull-openings rather

wide, the gill-membranes being broadly united below the throat

and quite free from the isthmus.

56. Sticharium dorsale, sp. n.

D.41. A.Z.

The height of the body is two-thirds of the length of the head,

which is contained six times and a half in the total length (without

caudal). Cleft of the mouth extending to below the middle of

the eye; lower jaw slightly prominent. Length of the trunk

not much exceeding that of the head. Dorsal and anal fins

very low, terminating in a low fold of the skin, which is con-

tinued to the caudal. Ventrals much longer than pectorals.

A broad white band runs along the upper surface of the head

and back. Sides finely marbled with brown, the markings

radiating from the eye on the head.

Two examples, 0-066 long, formed part of a collection

from Australia, containing several species known from Port

Jackson. .

Noroerartus, gen. noy. (Blenn.).

Body elongate, compressed, covered with minute scales. La-

teral line complete, running along the base of the dorsal fin.

Head longish and rather depressed ; snout of moderate extent,

somewhat pointed ; cleft of the mouth wide; a short flat barbel

at the symphysis of the lower jaw. Bands of villiform teeth im

the jaws and palatine bones, none on the vomer; tongue narrow,

long, free. Vertical fins confluent; dorsal and anal with nu-

merous spines, the posterior becoming gradually stiffer and more

pungent than the anterior. Ventrals jugular, close together,

reduced to a single bifid ray. The gill-membrane is attached to

the isthmus before the ventrals. Pseudobranchiz well deve-

loped. Intestinal tract short, simple, without pyloric appen-

dages. Air-bladder none.

64 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

57. Notograptus guttatus, sp. n.

D. 69. "Crile Al 43.

The height of the body is one-twelfth of the total length

(without caudal), length of the head two-fifteenths. Eye small.

Barbel shorter than the ventrals, which are about twice as long

as the eye. Reddish or brown; dorsal fin, upper, aud lateral

parts with numerous blue dots, those on the head largest.

Young with the spots on the body indistinct, and of a brown

colour.

Cape York. O™-17 long.

58, Mugil subviridis (C. & V.).

India, Cape York.

59. Mugil cephalotus (C. & V.).

China, Hawkesbury River.

60. Mugil breviceps (Steindachner).

Hawkesbury River (L. lat. 48-50).

61. Atherina stercus muscarum, sp. 0.

D7 | A.%. L. lat. 33. LL. transv. 8 or 9.

Origin of the spinous dorsal behind the root of the ventrals.

The height of the body is contained four times and two-thirds in

the total length (without caudal), length of the head thrice and

two-thirds. Snout not much shorter than the eye. Dorsal spines

feeble. Pectoral short, extending to the root of the ventral. A

black band from the snout through the eye to the root of the

pectoral. A silvery band along the fourth series of scales. Each

scale with a black dot at the base.

Cape York. 2 inches long.

62. <Atherina signata, sp. n.

D.3|;%. A. L. lat. 28. L. transv. 7.

Origin of the spinous dorsal behind the root of the ventrals.

The height of the body is contained thrice and three-fourths

in the total length (without caudal), length of the head four

times. Snout obtuse, shorter than the eye. The three dorsal

spines are united into a narrow lobe, termimating in a long

filament. Anterior dorsal and anal rays, lobes of the caudal,

and the ventrals prolonged into long filaments. The middle of

the sides silvery; the prolonged parts of the fins deep black ;

ventrals white.

Cape York.

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 65

This is the smallest species of Atherina known at. present,

the single specimen, an adult male, being only 14 inch long.

Probably the female and young are without the prolongations

of the fins.

63. Nematocentris nigra.

Atherina nigrans, Richards.

Atherinichthys nigrans, Gthr.

Nematocentris splendida, Peters, Monatsber. Ak. Wiss. Berlin, 1866,

July 23, p. 516 (published in 1866).

Strabo nigrofasciatus, Kner und Steindachner, Sitzgsber. Ak. Wiss.

Bary 1866, Oct. 4, p. 372. fig. 10 (immature example) (published in

Of this species, which was formerly represented in the British

Museum by some skins in a more or less bad state of preserva-

tion, we possess now a fine and complete series, viz. :—

a. A skin, 3 inches long, from King’s River, near Victoria,

which is the type of the species. (Not from Port Essington as

stated by Sir J. Richardson.)

b. A skin, 3 inches long, from Port Essington.

c-e. Three skins, 21 lines long, from Severn River, New

South Wales.

j-l. Six examples, in spirits, 3-5 inches long, from Rock-

hampton (Krefft). [Nematocentris splendida, Ptrs. |

m—n. Two examples in spirits, 18-24 lines long, from Cla-

rence River (Krefft, 67).

o. One example in spirits, 20 lines long, from Brisbane.

[Godeffroy Coll., Strabo nigrofasciatus. |

p. One example, in spirits, 4 inches long, from Port Denison

(Krefft).

g-t. Four examples in spirits, 3 inches long, from Cape York

(Diamel).

I have convinced myself, from an examination of these speci-

mens, that the names lately proposed and mentioned above

refer to the same species, which appears to be spread over the

whole of Australia. The black band, so distinct in the typical

example, is paler in specimens from Port Denison and Rock-

hampton, replaced by a bluish band in other examples from

Rockhampton and other parts of Queensland and New South

Wales, and disappears sometimes entirely in apparently very old

examples. The form of the body varies, of course, according to

age and season. The pungent dorsal spines become stouter

with age, and some of the rays become produced. The number

of longitudinal series of scales varies from ten to thirteen, the

: 1 3

lowest being more or less developed. D.5 | 5-5. A- i;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 5

66 Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes.

64. Parma microlepis (Gthr.).

Port Jackson.

65. Parma squamipinnis (Gthr.).

Port Jackson (Krefft, 2).

66. Heliastes hypsilepis, sp. n.

Du. A.W* 7. L lat. 29.

This species is allied to H. notatus; but each scale on the

middle of the side of the body is twice as deep as long, whilst

it is only somewhat deeper than long in that Japanese species.

The height of the body is a little less than one-half of the total

length (without caudal). A whitish spot below the end of the

soft dorsal. Upper half of the base of the pectoral black.

New South Wales (Krefft). 0™-18 long.

67. Labrichthys gymnogenys (Gthr.).

Port Jackson (Krefft, 2).

The specimens from Port Jackson are 8 and 9 inches long,

and agree perfectly with the typical examples, which are of the

same length. However, Mr. Krefft has sent us two other exam-

ples, 11 inches long, which differ in a remarkable manner in

their coloration, but appear to be merely a variety. They are

uniform dark brown, only the tail being somewhat lighter, the

middle ventral rays black. In other respects they are perfectly

identical with the younger examples.

68. Labrichthys laticlavius (Rich.).

Tasmania, King George’s Sound, Port Jackson (Krefft).

Young with the lateral bands very indistinct or entirely ab-

sent.

69. Odax Richardsonu (Gthr.).

Odax Hyrtlii (Stemdachner).

New South Wales (Krefft, 61), Hobson’s Bay, Victoria.

70. Gerres philippinus (Gthr.).

Philippine Islands, Cape York, Nicol Bay.

71. Dinematichthys mizolepis, sp. u.

Very similar to D. iluoceteoides and marginatus, but with

conspicuously larger scales, there being about ninety transverse

series. Head naked. Palatine teeth in a long stripe.

Cape York. 2 inches long.

72. Copidoglanis brevidorsalis, sp. n.

This species differs in a singular manner from its congeners in

Dr. A. Giinther on Australian Reptiles and Fishes. 67

having the anterior half of the second dorsal fin replaced by a

pad of fat, from which the rays gradually emerge behind ; the

anterior portion does not contain any rays. It is therefore im-

possible to give an exact number of dorsal rays. The anal fin

is composed of about eighty-five rays. The nasal barbel extends

to the origin of the dorsal fin; none of the others reach beyond

the extremity of the pectoral. The eye is one-seventh of the

length of the head. Entirely black.

Cape York, Nicol Bay. 6 inches long.

Neosilurus Hyrtli (Stemdachner), from Rockhampton, is evi-

dently closely allied to this species.

73. Exocetus atrodorsalis, sp. un.

DD. 3-9) FACTO. Lilats35:

Closely allied to E. hillianus. The pectoral extends to the

end of the dorsal. The ventral fin is scarcely nearer to the

root of the caudal than to the end of the snout, extending to

the origin of the anal. Dorsal fin elevated, its longest anterior

rays being as long as the head; it commences in front of the

anal. Upper pectoral rays blackish, lower whitish; dorsal fin

entirely black.

Cape York. 5 inches long.

74. Hemiscyllium trispeculare (Rich.).

Turtle Island, Cape York.

75. Crossorhinus tentaculatus (Ptrs.).

Adelaide, Cape York.

76. Trienodon obesus (M. & H.).

Red Sea, Aneiteum.

77. Trygonorhina fasciata (M. & H.).

? New South Wales (Krefft).

ADDENDUM.

Holacanthus Duboulayi, sp. un.

D.G. A. =.

Allied to H. mesoleucus. Scales small. Preeopercular spine

with a scarcely perceptible groove, reaching to the vertical from

the hind margin of the operculum. Dorsal and anal fins rounded

posteriorly. Head with the anterior part of the trunk yellowish,

which colour is sharply defined from the remaining brown por-

tion. A very broad brown ocular band, broader than the eye,

68 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on the Shell-structure of

descends from the neck to the ventral fins. The brown portion

of the body coarsely reticulated with yellowish, the lines de-

scending from the back to the belly. Caudal fin and a cuneiform

band along the hinder half of the base of the dorsal yellow.

North-west coast of Australia (Duboulay).

I1X.—On the Shell-structure of Spivifer cuspidatus, and of certain

alhed Spiriferide. By Wriittam B. Carrenter, M.D.,

P.R.S.

To the Editors of the Annals of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,

Being now in a condition to give a complete and explicit

reply to the question raised by Mr. Meek, on which I addressed

you six months ago (Ann. Nat. Hist. Jan. 1867, p. 29), I take

the earliest opportunity of communicating to you the results of

my researches, which will be found, if I mistake not, of singular

interest to such paleontologists as pay special attention to the

Brachiopoda.

I think it due both to Mr. Meek and to myself to point out

that the note in the ‘ Annals’ for August,’ 1866 (p. 144), in

which he is represented as calling in question the accuracy of

my original observations on the imperforate structure of the

shell of Spirifer cuspidatus, did not correctly express his views.

In a letter with which he favoured me immediately on reading

my previous communication he says :—

“Tam sorry you had not seen my little paper before you

read the notice of it to which you allude. If you had done so,

I am sure you would have at once seen that I made no attempt

whatever to cast doubts upon the accuracy of your investiga-

tions. I never for a moment questioned the fact that the shells

examined by you are not punctate. The only question with me,

after seeing, as I believed, very minute and very scattering

punctures in the shells I had examined, was, whether there might

not be in Ireland, and possibly in England, another rare type,

not seen by you, indistinguishable by form and other external

characters from S. cuspidatus, and yet widely separated by

having a punctate structure. Believing that this might be the

case, and knowing that, if so, it would be a matter of some in-

terest to know which was the true cuspidatus, I published my

remarks mainly in order to cause further investigations.

“As you have doubtless ere this seen my little paper, you

must have observed that the words ‘contrary to the opinion of

Dr. Carpenter,’ quoted by you, do not occur in it, nor any others

Spirifer cuspidatus and of certain allied Spiriferide. — 69

of the same meaning. Indeed the question never once suggested

itself to my mind whether you might not have been mistaken in

regard to the shells you had examined; for I assure you there

is no one living im whose opinion on such a question I have

more confidence than in yours”’*,

The results I bave now to communicate, whilst fully con-

firmatory of my original determination, also afford a complete

verification of the sagacious guess thus put forward by Mr.

Meek.

Through the kindness of Mr. Worthen and Mr. Meek, I have

been furnished with the following materials for examination :-—

1. Chips of the type species of the genus Syringothyris,

established by Prof. Winchell on the basis of a very peculiar

feature of internal structure, which differentiates it from ordi-

nary Spirifers, viz. the connexion of the vertical dental plates

(fig. 1 /, 7) by a transverse lamina (fig. 2, tr) which gives off a pair

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

~\\ YS Js 7 LL LE /

SS \ a y

Fig. 1. Syringothyris typa, from a drawing by Prof. Winchell : /, J, dental

plates; A B, plane of section.

Fig. 2. Section of Syringothyris typa across the plane a B, after Winchell :

l,l, dental plates; tr, transverse lamina; ¢, incomplete tube.

of parallel lamelle that curve towards each other so as nearly to

meet on the median line, and thus form an incomplete tube (é)

* I cannot but contrast the courteous tone in which Mr. Meek (an entire

stranger to me) has expressed his full reliance on my scientific accuracy in

this matter with the treatment I continue to receive from Prof. King, who,

in spite of my reiterated warnings against the fallacy of such superficial

observations, has again (in the last number of the Geological Magazine)

called in question the correctness of my statements, on no better evidence

than that afforded by the examination of the surface of a specimen of

Spirifer cuspidatus with a hand magnifier !

70 Dr. W. B. Carpenter on the Shell-structure of

projecting into the interior of the shell. This peculiarity not

being indicated by any corresponding peculiarity of external

conformation, shells which are now found to present it have

been ranked among Spirifers by our very highest authorities*.

2. Chips of the shells which have been ranked by American

paleontologists as Spirifer cuspidatus and Sp. subcuspidatus.

3. Chips of the shell referred to by Mr. Meek as having been

sent to Mr. Worthen by Mr. Davidson as a typical specimen of

Spirifer cuspidatus from Millecent in Ireland.

Tn all the foregoing specimens the shell-structure was ex-

tremely well preserved.

Through the kindness of Mr. Jukes, who sent a collector to

Millecent on purpose to obtain for me specimens of the last-

mentioned type, I have also been enabled to examine—

4. Two entire specimens of reputed Spirifer cuspidatus from

Millecent. Although there was but little shell on these speci-

mens, that little was well preserved, and proved quite sufficient

for my requirements.

Finally, the readiness of Mr. Davidson to make any needful

sacrifice for the sake of arriving at the whole truth on this point

has led him to place at my disposal—

5. The entire specimen of Spirifer cuspidatus from Millecent,

figured by him in his ‘Carboniferous Brachiopoda’ (plate 8.

fig. 19) as a typical representative of the species. The shell of

this specimen is so well preserved that lamelle scaled off from

it could scarcely be distinguished from those of a recent Rhyn-

chonella.

All the foregoing specimens have been examined under mag-

nifying-powers of from 50 to 100 diameters, (1) by mounting

in Canada balsam such lamelle as were already thin enough to

be transparent, and (2) by grinding down such chips as were

originally opaque until they became thin enough to be seen

through, and then mounting them in Canada balsam. This is

the method which I have uniformly practised, when able to do

so, in the examination of the shells of fossil Brachiopoda; and

I consider it the only one by which satisfactory results can be

obtained. A natural lamella gives the structure of that parti-

cular layer of which it formed part, whilst a thin section procured

by grinding will generally traverse all the layers of the shell.

The following are the facts thus revealed as to the structure of

the specimens just enumerated :—

1. The type-specimen of Prof. Winchell’s Syringothyris ex-

hibits distinct perforations of about 1-3000th of an inch in

diameter, set at an average distance of about 1-300th of an

* A fully illustrated description of this genus, by Mr. Davidson, will be

found in the ensuing (July) Number of the Geological Magazine.

Spirifer cuspidatus and of certain allied Spiviferide. 71

inch from each other. They are not distributed, however, with

the uniformity which usually prevails in the shells of the per-

forated Brachiopoda ; for patches of imperforate shell intervene

between portions that are pretty regularly perforated, and some-

times a fragment large enough to fill a great part of the field of

view is entirely imperforate. This, I feel certain, is not the

result of any alteration produced by fossilization, the shell-

structure being equally well preserved in the perforated and in

the imperforate parts. Prof. Winchell speaks of this shell as

*‘jmpunctate in all conditions and under high powers,’—a

statement for which I can only account on the supposition that

he happened to examine only minute fragments which chanced

to be imperforate, as occurred to myself in my first examination

of No. 4.

2. The Spirifer cuspidatus and Sp. subcuspidatus of the United

States paleontologists are unquestionably perforated ; and pre-

cisely resemble the preceding not only im the size of the per-

forations and in their distance from each other, but also in the

patchiness of their distribution.

3. The Millecent (Irish) shell in Mr. Worthen’s possession

exhibits exactly the same combination of imperforate with per-

forated structure ; and I have no doubt that it was the uncer-

tainty produced by this peculiarity which led Mr. Meek, in

transmitting me chips for examination, to express a doubt

whether he had been originally correct in asserting the presence

of perforations in this shell.

4. The two Millecent specimens obtained for me by Mr. Jukes

also unquestionably exhibit the same character of patchy per-

foration ; but I might not have ascertained the existence of

perforations if I had not carefully scrutinized every lamella of

shell that I could scale off, all the fragments first examined

having chanced to be imperforate.

5. Mr. Davidson’s typical specimen of Spirifer cuspidatus,

also from Millecent, exhibits not the smallest trace of perforations,

though I have scaled off from it flakes of such size, and from so

many different parts (including also both its outer and its inner

layers), that I feel justified in confidently asserting that this

shell is essentially imperforate.

Thus, then, whilst my previous determination of the zmper-

forate structure of Spirifer cuspidatus is fully borne out by the

examination of a remarkably well-preserved specimen of that

type (No. 5), this result is in apparent contradiction to the fact

that shells (Nos. 2, 3, 4) not externally distinguishable from it

are indubitably perforated. The difficulty has been entirely re-

moved, however, by an examination of the internal structure of

these shells, the results of which are in complete harmony with

72 On the Shell-structure of Spirifer cuspidatus &c.

the singular correspondence between the patchy distribution of

the perforations in Nos. 2, 3, 4 and that which is characteristic

of Syringothyris (No. 1)—a correspondence which is the more

significant as I have not elsewhere encountered this peculiarity.

On slicing across my perforated Millecent specimens (No. 4)

in the direction indicated by Prof. Winchell’s figure, the internal

structure of one of them proved to be sufficiently well preserved

to show most distinctly the transverse lamina (fig. 3, ¢7.) con-

Fig. 3. Transverse section of Syringothyris from Millecent, from a drawing

by Mr. Davidson: /, 7, dental plates ; ¢r, transverse lamina; ¢, incom-

plete tube.

Fig. 4. Transverse section of true Spirifer cuspidatus from Millecent, from

a drawing by Mr. Davidson: J, /, dental plates.

necting the dental plates (/, 2), with its projecting pair of

lamellee forming the nearly complete tube (¢) characteristic of

the typical Syringothyris (figs. 1, 2), to which genus, therefore,

these shells are obviously to be transferred.

Nothing, then, remained save to subject the imperforate shell

of the true Spirifer cuspidatus (No. 5) to the same crucial test ;

and on carrying a section through this specimen in precisely the

same direction (AB), it proved that its dental lamine (J, /, fig. 4)

are unconnected by any transverse plate, and that there is no

vestige whatever of the characteristic tube of Syrzngothyris.

Thus, then, the remarkable fact is incontestably established

that there is an exact isomorph of Spirifer cuspidatus, not distin-

guishable from it by external conformation, but generically

differentiated by a very marked peculiarity of internal structure,

of which peculiarity the perforated structure of the shell seems

(so to speak) to be the exponent.

It would be difficult, I think, to find a more significant proof

of the value of the microscopic test than this result has afforded;

and I venture to hope that, as I have spared neither time nor

trouble in the investigation, and am prepared to stake my

scientific character upon the accuracy of the observations now

detailed, they may not be lightly called in question.

I should add, in conclusion, that, in addition to the foregoing,

I have examined chips of the shells of the following species of

Bibliographical Notice. 73

reputed Spirifers sent to me from America by Mr. Meek :—

Sp. Hannibalensis (Swallow), Sp. capax (Hall), Sp. ? hemiplicatus

(the type of a new genus Syntrilasma), all of which are unques-

tionably perforated. On the other hand, a chip sent to me by

Mr. Meek of a little shell which he states to be the type of Prof.

Hall’s genus Ambocoilia (= Orthis umbonata, Con.) is as cer-

tainly imperforate. But, after the experience above described,

I should hesitate to pronounce on the absence of perforations in

a shell allied to this group, except after the examination of

several such fragments.

I remain, Gentlemen,

Your obedient Servant,

WittraM B. CarPenter,

University of London, June 17, 1867.

P.S. I have to add that, having learned from Mr. Davidson that

the typical structure of Syringothyris is exhibited by a Belgian

shell hitherto known as Spirifer distans, I have reexamined the

only example of this type at present accessible to me, the one

contained in the Museum of the Royal School of Mines. So far

as I can judge from the minute fragments of shell, not very well

preserved, which this specimen has afforded, I should still say

that it is imperforate. But the experience I have now acquired

from the Millecent shells leads me strongly to desire a more

complete investigation of this type; and I should be greatly

obliged to any of your readers who may be able to supply me

with well-preserved specimens of it. It does not seem impro-

bable that the reputed Spirifer distans of Belgium, which proves

to be truly a Syringothyris (see Davidson, Joc. cit.), may be, like

the Millecent shell, an isomorph of a true Spirifer.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

1. A List of the Flowering Plants, Ferns, and Mosses collected in

the immediate neighbourhood of Andover. By C. B. Ciarke.

Calcutta, 1866.

2. Flora of Devon and Cornwall. By J. W.N. Keys. (Ranuncu-

laceee—Geraniaceze.) Plymouth, 1866.

3. The Bath Flora. A Lecture delivered to the Members of the

Bath Natural-History and Antiquarian Field Club. By the

Rev. L. Jenyns. Bath, 1867.

4. Flora of Norfolk: a Catalogue of Plants found in the County of

Norfolk. By the Rev. K. TRimmEr. London, 1866.

THESE four tracts on the flora of Britain have recently reached us.

They differ considerably in intention and character, but are well

deserving of notice. The first has the peculiarity of being a partial

flora of a district in England, printed and published at Calcutta.

74 Bibliographical Notice.

The cause of this is mentioned in the introductory remarks—namely,

that the author has become a resident in Bengal. We may add that

he is a fellow of Queen’s College at Cambridge, and has now charge

of a large educational institution in India. He had occupied him-

self for several years before leaving England in the examination of

the flora of Andover during such parts of the summer as he could be

there, and has done well to print the results of his researches. He

justly remarks that “a list of this kind can never be complete,” and

he therefore less regrets the incompleteness of the present. It is a

valuable contribution to a knowledge of the distribution of our native

plants. The author is a man of great ability and much originality :

he has therefore occasionally made remarks which may not be quite

palatable to some other botanists. They always well deserve atten-

tion, although we are sometimes far from altogether agreeing with

the author. We would especially direct attention to the observations

upon ‘‘ geographical distribution,’ on pages 10-14. They deserve

the notice of all who occupy themselves with that interesting study.

Under Ruédus is the remark :—‘‘I admit that universal botanists

are not bound to get up the Rudi; but if they only describe R. fru-

ticosus and R. cesius, they should define those ‘species’ so as to

collect the allied forms as well as possible ; and they must not sup-

pose that by making two species only they avoid all difficulty. So

far is that from being the case, that it is as difficult at the least to

separate the Ceszi and Fruticosi as it is to separate R. leucostachys

from R. discolor. For instance, Dr. Bromfield, a skilful rubologist,

considered R.corylifolius to belong to the Fruticosi, laying stress on

its fruit; whilst most other rubologists consider it to be one of the

Cesii. If, therefore, rubologists are not always able to separate ab-

solutely their ‘species,’ they are not therefore to be taunted as

triflers by those who define their two species R. fruticosus and R.

eesius in such a way that, in the case of great masses of Rudi, no-

body can decide under which section they are to be placed.”

But we must proceed, after simply adding that the List records

the localities and frequency of 667 species of flowering plants and

ferns—not a bad catalogue for a small district of less than ten miles’

radius.

The ‘Flora of Devon and Cornwall’ is the first instalment of a

complete flora of these interesting counties. Such a flora is very

much wanted, as we possess no satisfactory account of the plants of

the south-west of England. Mr. Keys is well qualified for the work

that he has undertaken ; and we hope that he will be able to proceed

successfully and quickly with it.

He makes only two “districts,” namely the counties of Devon

and Cornwall. We think that it would have been well, considering

how much the different parts of these counties differ from each

other, if he had followed the example of most of the modern local

floras, and divided each of the counties into several local districts.

The work which he has undertaken seems to be performed well and

carefully.

Mr. Jenyns’s Lecture is intended to show what has been done in

Miscellaneous. 75

the elucidation and completion of the flora of Bath since the publi-

cation (in 1839) of the ‘Supplement to the Flora Bathoniensis.’

He points out the errors to be found in that book, and corrects

them, and adds a considerable number of species to the list.

Unfortunately, we cannot greatly praise Mr. Trimmer’s ‘ Flora of

Norfolk.’ As a list of plants found in the county, it is doubtless

very correct; but as a flora of the county it is very imperfect.

There is no attempt to show the distribution of the plants by local

divisions. It is an old-fashioned flora, such as might have been

published fifty years since, except that its nomenclature and the

view taken of species are those of the present day. Whole districts of

the county seem not to have been examined, or only in a very super-

ficial manner. If the author had made known his intention of pub-

lishing a flora of the county, we know that he might have obtained

lists of plants for some of these neglected tracts. Let us hope that

a new edition will supply the wants of this one.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the actual state of our Information relative to the ‘ Leporide,’

or Hybrid between Hare and Rabbit. By Dr. Pigeaux.

AreE there any sexual relations between the hare and rabbit in a

state of nature to which it would be possible to attribute the crea-

tion of a mixed or intermediate species, to be named, on account of

external configuration, Leporide? The ancients, and indeed some of

the moderns, deceived by the colours and special forms of certain

varieties of rabbits common in the south of Europe and very abun-

dant in Asia Minor, have believed this to be the case. Such varie-

ties are found in some departments of the east of France and along

the banks of the Rhéne. These are, after all, merely rabbits which

burrow, and are born without fur and with the eyes closed. Such

are the Léporides of M. Roux, and those also which have been and

are perhaps still called ‘ Leporides’ at the Jardin d’ Acclimatation in

Paris. These rabbits pair voluntarily, and are productive either

amongst themselves or in conjunction with the ordinary domestic

rabbit. I have had in my possession some of them which, from

their appearance, might almost have been mistaken for hares, having

the tip of the ears black and the inferior surface of the belly and of

the thighs tawny ; nevertheless, by all characters distinctive of the

species, they were never anything but rabbits. Thus I am able to

negative the pretentions of M. Roux to having created a race of

fertile hybrids begotten through a male hare and several female

rabbits.

It is, however, by no means difficult to bring about a connexion

between the hare and rabbit in a state of domestication; but for

success we must not persist in uniting adult individuals unaccus-

tomed to living together previously. In such a case the female

nearly always kills the male, bleeding him at the jugular, or, unless

the hutch be very securely fastened, succeeds in dislodging him.

76 Miscellaneous.

This will occur indeed sometimes when a young male leveret has

been brought up with young female rabbits, as soon as they become

adult, if the cage be too constrained in its dimensions. In order

that the experiment may succeed, it is necessary to provide a cage of

a certain extent, say of some metres, barred in some portions and

pannelled in others, so that the animals may escape observation at

pleasure. It is well also to leave several females with the young

male, in order that he may have some range for choice. Such

measures were adopted by M. , of Nanterre, near Paris, whose

success has been as complete as it is perfectly attested and indubit-

able. Several female rabbits were rendered pregnant by the agency

of a single male hare existing in his menagerie ; he has further been

able to rear to the adult state a number of the mongrels or, rather,

mules so obtained between the two species. There were both males

and females, apparently strong and well developed ; and these paired,

but have not been productive, as far as I know, hitherto. I would

not deny to these mongrels a fecundity similar in degree to that

which is sometimes found in the cross between ass and mare; but

such a case is only exceptional, and we can neither fear nor indeed

hope to create a new race: so that from this point of view the

Leporides do not exist.

The instance cited by M. Albert Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire, in which

a female hare covered by a male rabbit gave birth to a young already

covered with fur, and having the eyes open, is a most remarkable

one; it could, however, be merely a case of a cross retaining the

form of the mother, and no more fertile than in the case of those

hybrids between the Ass and the horse in which the latter animal

(the male) gives the predominant character to the offspring.

These experiments may be repeated and varied, proceeding with

very young animals brought up together and enjoying a certain

liberty, although confined in the hutch. It is of especial import-

ance, in breeding with the male hare, to provide several females,

whether of rabbit or of hare, always, however, isolating them as

soon as they are ready to bring forth (in twenty-eight or thirty days).

That the hare, when in good condition, will produce several times a

year admits of no doubt ; but as she does not burrow, it is necessary

to furnish her with a sufficient quantity of twigs, and to keep them

extremely fresh and clean. Although in captivity the hare usually

produces only one or two young, she has been known to bring forth

three, and to rear them with great tenderness ; it is, however, neces-

sary to remove them early from the male, and even from the female,

who will often strangle them as soon as they are capable of living

independently, especially if they are about pairing again.

The rearing of hares in captivity is but a thankless task, as they

do not live long, wanting a sufficient space for running ; their flesh,

also, is insipid, unless, indeed, they are let loose some months pre-

viously in an area perfectly free from rabbits; for between these two

species there rages a most inveterate war; and a single rabbit

would with ease strangle fifty hares in one night. The female, also,

is not very productive, and ceases to bear after the third year.

Miscellaneous. rai

To sum up, therefore, we would affirm that Leporides exist un-

doubtedly under both forms, with predominance of the hare or of

the rabbit; but as a species, or even a variety, we cannot admit

them, since, like all other crosses, they have merely an accidental

productiveness. ‘Their utility moreover is but slender, the flesh

having neither the whiteness of the rabbit nor the fine flavour of the

hare. Pretty much the same thing may be said of hares reared in

hutches ; their flesh lacks flavour, and their multiplication is too

limited to render them a profitable object of industry.— Bulletin

mensuel de la Société Impériale zool. d’ Acclimatation, 2™* série,

tome iil. No. 7, July 1866.

Megaceros hibernicus in the Cambridgeshire Fens.

By Norman Moore, Esq.

Karly this year some diggings for phosphatic nodules were opened

near Upware, a village on the Cam, about twelve miles below Cam-

bridge. I have several times visited the workings in company with

Mr. J. F. Walker, B.A., F.G.S., Examiner in Natural Science at

Sidney Sussex College; and whilst he was occupied with the Lower-

Greensand fossils, I paid more particular attention to the surface

soil. Some fragments of roebuck horns and teeth, one horn of a

red deer, and various other bones have been the result. One of the

roebuck horns is notched on each side, as if to afford a fastening-

place for string, and the points are rubbed smooth ; hence one might

suppose that the horn was used, centuries ago, as a net-peg. While

at Upware, on my last visit to the bed, a few days ago, I heard that

a man in the neighbouring village of Wicken had an elephant’s bone,

which he had dug out of the surface soil while working at the

coprolite-diggings in Burwell Fen. I luckily fell in with the man

and the bone, which, to my delight, I saw belonged to an Irish elk.

It was an almost perfect and well-marked ulna, evidently of a full-

grown animal. The man informed me that several bones of like

appearance were found with this one. They were sold for a small

sum to a bone-dealer; this was kept as a curiosity because of its

curious shape, ‘like a pistol.” It is of a dark peat-colour. As far

as I can judge by a comparison of the relation which the length of

the ulna bears to the height of the shoulder from the ground in the

Irish elk in the Woodwardian Museum, I suppose that the animal to

which this ulna belonged cannot have been less than eighteen hands

high.

St. Catharine’s College, Cambridge.

Note on Assiminea Francesiz. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

In the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for June last,

at p. 381, Mr. Blanford makes some observations on the various

terminations which have been given to the name of the shell called

Assiminea Francesiea. I may state that I originally described the

shell as above, naming it after my sister, Frances Ince, who made a

78 Miseclianenie.

very extensive collection of the freshwater shells of India—the first,

I believe, that was sent to this country.

It is figured by Mr. W. Wood, however, in the Supplement to the

Catalogue of Shells as Turbo Francesi, from specimens sent home

by Mrs. Ince: so the confusion began early. Mr. Wood (unfortu-

nately for science, as it added some confusion to the nomenclature)

submitted the proofs of the text of the Supplement to Dr. Goodall,

who, I suppose, not knowing that the names which I had supplied

to Mr. Wood had already been published (though it is mentioned

in the preface that they are the names used in the British Museum

collection), altered some of the names capriciously. I suppose that

the Provost of Eton College did not think it right that a shell should

be named after a woman; for in the same way he altered Nerita

Smithie and Turbo Maugere to Nerita Smithii and Turbo Maugeri.

No one who knew him can believe that it arose from want of polite-

ness or gallantry ; but conchologists are more liberal now. I may

observe that all the shells figured from specimens in the Supplement

were engraved (not etched) on the copper at once, from the shells

selected by myself either from the British Museum, Mrs. Mawe’s,

or Mrs. Gray’s collection; and I furnished him with the names of

the species (which in some cases were so oddly changed) and also

with the Lamarckian Index to the Catalogue and Supplement.

On the Species of the Genera Latiaxis, Faunus, and Melanatria.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

The examination of the original specimens on which the various

species of the genus have been described and figured has convinced

me that there are not more than two distinct species of Latiazis.

The first, Z. Maire, is nearly smooth, with a flat depressed spire

and a very large umbilicus: L. purpurata, Chenu (Mollusques Mar.),

appears to be only a variety of this species, which is sometimes of a

purplish colour. The second, L. pagoda, Johnson, has a conical

spire and a small umbilicus. JL. pagoda, Johnson, L. tevrtilis, A. &

H. Adams, LZ. Eugenia, Beraud, and L. nodosa, A. Adams, are all

varieties of the same species, varying in the presence or absence of a

keel on the last whorl, and in the whorls being slightly nodose.

They are all inhabitants of the China Seas.

The specimens of the genus Faunus, Montfort, in Mr. Cuming’s

cabinet show most conclusively that the shells named Faunus ater,

F’. terebralis, Lamk., F. Cantori, Benson, and F. pagoda, Reeves,

are only slight varieties of a single species. . Cantori is a dwarf

decollated state, and F. pagoda is described and figured from an acci-

dentally distorted adult shell. They are found in Ceylon, Penang,

the Philippines, and New Caledonia.

The species of Melanatria, Bowdich, have been also needlessly

divided. There can be no doubt that M. fuminea and M. plicata,

Reeve, are only varieties of M. spinosa, Lamk. It is found in

Madagascar and West Africa. They vary not only in the strength

Miscellaneous. 79

of the plaits and spines (some are even quite smooth), but also in

the depth of the notch of the hinder part of the outer lip.

The named species of Latiaxis, Faunus, and Melanatria are not

even local varieties. A series of specimens from the same locality

show the variations in the surface on which these dealers’ species

are professed to be distinguished, which should be treated as the

names given to flowers by nurserymen and florists are by the botanist,

as they are scarcely worthy the attention of the scientific conchologist.

The effect of this useless multiplication of names has been to almost

entirely prevent conchology being studied as a science.

Descriptions of new Fishes. By F. SrE1nDACHNER.

1. Plecostomus Wertheimeri.—Marginal scutes of the sides of the

head closely beset with long bristle-like spines; a row of broad

transverse plates on each side of the belly between the pectoral and

ventral; head adorned with black spots, body with yellow spots.

From the river Mucuri in Brazil.

2. Cottus Brandtii.mHead parabolic ; skin of body scaleless ; pree-

operculum with three spines, of which the uppermost is the longest ;

mouth-cleft oval, longer than broad; vomer with teeth; upper sur-

face of head closely set with round warts. D.9/13; A.11; V.3;

P. 17. From the mouth of the Amur.

3. Amblyopus Sieboldi.—Length of head contained 9 times in

the total length, or 74 times in the length of the body; greatest

depth 51, of the total length; caudal pointed, long, ¢ of the total

length. D. 6/48-49; A. 44; C.17. Mouth of the Amur.

4. Pseudorhombus adspersus.—Length of head contained 32 times,

depth of body 22 in the total length; diameter of eye }% of the

length of the head; numerous black points, spots, and rings on the

whole body. D. 72; A.58; P.12; V.5; L. lat. 104. From the

Chinchas Islands.

5. Scopelus spinosus.—Scales of body toothed; a long spine on

the lower extremity of each scale of the last longitudinal series but

one above the anal, which is longer than the dorsal ; diameter of the

eye 4 the length of the head. D.14; A. 20; V.9; L. lat. 40;

L. transv. 1. From China.

53 (43)

6. Genus Teniolabrus.—Body rather compressed, much elon-

gated, of very small depth, covered with cycloid scales; head scale-

less; ventral fins articulated a little before the pectorals *; teeth in

intermaxillaries and lower jaw uniserial, pointed, the foremost the

longest ; vomer and palatal bone with teeth; dorsal and anal fins

very long; lateral line not interrupted.

7. Teniolabrus filamentosus.—Head pointed, 4 of the total length;

lower jaw protruding; eyes approximated ; depth of body ,/; of the

* In the original the author contrasts ‘‘ Bauchflossen” with “ Ventra-

len,” which are identical; the above is probably his meaning.

80 Miscellaneous.

total length; middle ray of ventral very much elongated; caudal

very long, pointed; black rings on the scales of the lateral line.

D. 6/41; A. 1/38; V.1/5; L. lat. 58-59.

8. Gobius pavo.—Length of head contained 38, breadth of head

64, depth of body 81, and caudal fin 4} times in the total length ;

length of eye 1 of length of head; dark golden brown, with four

large indistinctly limited black spots along the lateral line, and two

deep-black obliquely placed spdts, separated by a light-yellow spot

of nearly the same size behind the fifth spine of the first dorsal.

1D. 6;°2)D21/8- P5207 Avt/8c diate). From. the Pbilip-

pines.—Anzeiger der Akad. der Wiss. in Wien, May 16, 1867,

p.119.

Supplement to ‘ English Botany,

Mr. J. W. Salter, the proprietor of this work, wishes to continue

the publication of the fifth volume, which was commenced in 1863,

and of which six numbers have appeared, but, owing to the very

small support which the work receives from botanists, to whom

apparently its great value is unknown, he is unable to do so. There

ought to be ample support for this Supplement to the original

‘English Botany,’ since there are at least 2000 copies of that work

in the hands of the public, and none of them can be considered

complete without these supplementary volumes.

Some friends of this work are desirous of obtaining the help of

from forty to fifty subscribers of £5 each, in order to raise a fund

for completing this publication. They propose that these subscrip-

tions should be placed in the hands of Prof. C. C. Babington, of

Cambridge, and expended by him solely in the payment of the

artists’ and printers’ bills for each number when it is issued to

the subscribers. They will of course receive their copies in part

repayment of the money advanced by them, the remainder being

repaid by the sale of the work.

There are between 100 and 150 flowering plants as yet unpublished,

of which about 20 have been already drawn by Mr. J. D. C. Sowerby

or Mr. J. W. Salter for this Supplement: most of the remainder

can readily be obtained ; and it is intended to proceed with their

publication as rapidly as circumstances will allow.

The plates and text will be superintended by Prof. C. C. Babington,

who will be supported by some of the most active English botanists.

But nothing can be done until the fund for paying the necessary

expenses has been raised; for the proprietor is not able to bear

the heavy cost himself—although if once published it is nearly certain

that the work will in due time be remunerative. The proprietor

will hand over the booksellers’ balance annually to Prof. Babington

until the entire sum subscribed has been repaid.

Botanists or others who will kindly aid in this way are requested

to communicate with, and pay their subscription to, Prof. C. C.

Babington, of Cambridge, as soon as possible.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[THIRD SERIES. ]

No. 116. AUGUST 1867.

X.—On Waldheimia venosa, Solander, sp.

By Tuomas Davipson, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c.

To the Editors of the Annals of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,

A great deal of valuable matter in connexion with the Recent

Brachiopoda has from time to time been contributed to the

‘Annals,’ and consequently I would solicit space for a few re-

marks with reference to the largest recent specimen, and species,

of Brachiopoda hitherto discovered, and of which we are now in

possession of the correct habitat.

In the ‘Annals’ for June 1861, Mr. Lovell Reeve mentions

that I had communicated to him the discovery that either

Waldheimia globosa or W. dilatata had been collected nearly a

century ago by the illustrious navigator Capt. Cook, and named

by Solander Anomia venosa, that the name only appeared in

manuscript at first in the Portland Catalogue, but that a few

years later another specimen had been brought to England from

the same locality (the Falkland Islands) by Capt. George Dixon,

and in the narrative of his expedition, published in London in

1789, a very excellent figure and description had been given of

it. The designation Waldheimia venosa, Solander, was con-

sequently adopted by Mr. L. Reeve and myself, as it was the

earliest name given to the largest recent form of Terebratula

hitherto discovered.

On the 3rd of April of the present year, Rear-Admiral B. J.

Sulivan kindly forwarded for my inspection and determination

a Terebratula much exceeding in dimensions any I had hitherto

seen ; and I was informed at the same time that he had dredged

it alive in the outer harbour of Port William, at the Falkland

Islands, in the year 1843 or 1844. The depth at which the

animal lived was from six to seven fathoms; the bottom on

which the shell lay was a compact quartzose sand only, as no

mud ever comes up with the dredge, although a stiff muddy

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xx.

82 Mr. T. Davidson on Waldheimia venosa.

clay underlies the sand, in which anchors hold very firmly.

Many small Serpule are attached to its surface; and a long piece

of sea-weed, two feet in length, was found growing from near

its hinge.

On opening the box containing this interesting specimen (of

which two correct drawings are here appended), I at once per-

ceived that the shell was no cther than an extremely large ex-

Vi aldheimia venosa, Solander, sp.

(Falkland Islands, and Collection of Rear-Admiral B. J. Sulivan.)

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 83

ample of Solander’s species. In shape it is almost regularly

oval, and longer than wide; the valves almost equally convex

and deep, while in the dorsal valve there exists a shallow median

depression or sinus close to the front, and which corresponds

with a broad, slightly elevated mesial fold in the ventral valve.

The beak of the ventral valve is moder ately produced, incurved

and truncated by a large circular foramen, partly margined by

a deltidium in two pieces. In the interior of the dorsal valve

the loop is elongated and reflected, while a sharp raised septum

extends from under the cardinal process to about half the length

of the valve. This fine specimen measured 3 inches 2 lines in

length by 2 inches 8 lines in breadth, and 2 inches in depth.

Now the largest Tertiary Terebratula with which I am at

present acquainted measures 4 inches 2 lines in length by

3 inches 1 line in breadth, and 2 inches 1 line in depth; but

although the Crag Terebratula grandis, to which we would refer,

does very much resemble in general form the recent W. venosa,

the Tertiary shell was possessed of a short loop, and consequently

is a true Terebratula, while 7. venosa has an elongated one

characteristic of the subgenus Waldheimia.

Admiral Sulivan informs me that W. venosa may perhaps

occur also near Tierra del Fuego, where he supposes Solander’s

shell might have been found, as he is doubtful whether that

naturalist ever was at the Falklands; and he thinks it surprising

that during his own long service in that region, while in com-

mand of the ‘ Beagle,’ the shell was never found by Darwin

or any other of the officers on board, although the dredge was

frequently at work.

In conclusion, I may here add that both the Cretaceous and

Jurassic periods possessed one or two very large species of Tere-

bratula ; but none that I am aware of attained the proportions

of the largest example of 7. grandis with which we are acquainted.

In the Triassic and Paleozoic periods the species of the genus

are fewer in number and of much smaller proportions.

I remain, Gentlemen, yours, &c.,

Tuomas Davipson.

XI.—List of Coleoptera received from Old Calabar, on the West

Coast of Africa. By ANDREW Murray, ELS.

{Continued from p. 23. ]

Bostrichide.

Apats, Fab.

This genus is in a state of considerable confusion. The few

species described are for the most part of old date, ae chiefly

84. Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

from the pen of Olivier and Fabricius and other authors of their

date; and although tolerable figures are sometimes given by

Olivier, it is not surprising, considering the strong family re-

semblance which prevails in all, that their short descriptions

should have left entomologists very much in the dark and almost

entirely dependent on tradition for a knowledge of the species

intended by them.

Before entering on the description of the species from Old

Calabar, I must ask leave to add to the entomological termino-

logy an expression to enable me to deal without periphrasis

with the anterior and posterior extremities of the Bostrichide.

Every one who reads this knows that this group is composed of

cylindrica] insects which have the thorax terminating in an

overhanging straight or excavated or more or less vertical front,

and the elytra terminating either in a rapid, steep rounding off,

an abrupt, oblique, or even vertical slope, or an actual excava-

tion. These abrupt terminations at each end of the body I

propose to call truncatures,—viz. the thoracic truncature and

the apical truncature of the elytra. The word does not much

matter ; as Prof. Owen says, it is a mere tool to do the work.

What I want is something to express in a word the declining

abrupt termination at either end of the Bostrichids. Where

it does not occur, of course it will not be used.

1. Apate terebrans, Pallas, Spicilegia Zool. Ins. p. 7; Oliv.

Ent. iv. No. 77, pl. 1. fig. 4.

(A. barbifrons, Dupont, De}. Cat.)

Found both in Brazil and Africa, and distinguished from

other species by its size and a large tuft of yellow hair and

two small projecting triangular teeth on the forehead. The

elytra are marked with punctures running into each other, and

making a series of rather fine rugosities or slight reticulations.

I have no doubt tradition is correct in assigning this insect

to Olivier’s terebrans, although his figure represents an insect

considerably shorter. This we may assume to be an error in

the drawing, because we know no other species which is so like

the drawing as this, and the description in the text corresponds

with that of the species.

I have wasted a good deal of time in carefully comparing the

African and Brazilian specimens, with the expectation or desire

of finding some difference between them ; but have been unable

to find anything that is constant or could be called specific. As

a rule, the African specimens are more distinctly and deeply

marked, and have a deeper fovea round the scutellum; but

sometimes there is no such difference, or even the reverse occurs.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 85

If a number of Brazilian and African specimens were mixed

together, I think it would be impossible to assign them all cor-

rectly to their different countries, although probably the majority

might be successfully guessed at.

Not rare in Old Calabar.

The same species also extends to Natal.

2. Apate muricata, Fab. Syst. El.

Nigra; capite plano, epistomate parum fulvo piloso

antice; thorace utrinque antice dentibus parum

uncinatis instructo; elytris profunde reticulatis,

nitidissimis.

Long. 14 lin., lat. 44 lin.

This is a large, handsome insect (the finest of the

family), cylindrical, black, with the elytra strongly

impressed with deep coarse reticulations, and the

raised parts glittering and shining. Head punctate posteriorly,

almost impunctate in front, leaving smooth shining spaces

about the middle and on each side, with a longitudinal line

down the middle, somewhat more deeply impressed at a point

in the centre, free from hair or pubescence, but covered on

the sides and partially on the front with round, small tuber-

cles. Epistome with a projecting point in the middle and a

fringe of yellow pile. Labrum emarginate, almost bilobed,

the margm of the lobes fringed with yellow pile; palpi

and club of the antennz piceous. Thorax widest in front,

opaque, except behind, divided as it were transversely into

two parts; the anterior part broad and large, and covered

with denticulations, which at the anterior angles become de-

veloped into hooks, the denticulations being triangular projecting

teeth near the anterior angles, on the sides and front flattened

triangular spaces slightly elevated; the posterior half finely

aciculate or subtuberculate, the tubercles here being a modifica-

tion of the same triangular denticulations, only much finer and

more closely adpressed and flattened, in the centre towards the

base almost smooth; a slight central longitudinal line runs

forward from the middle of the base ; there is an indentation on

each side of the middle of the base, making the centre into a

lobe; the posterior angles are rounded eminences, with two

somewhat transverse impressions on the sides. Scutellum

rounded, opaque, lying in a hollow. Elytra parallel, cylin-

drical, deeply and broadly reticulated, with the elevated spaces

very bright ; there is a longitudinal hollow for about a line and

a half behind the scutellum ; the base is straight, the shoulders

rather prominent and nearly smooth; the apical truncature

is hollowed out, and the excavated space shining and nearly

86 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

impunctate; the elytra above the truncature terminating in

three projecting teeth (the two outermost projecting furthest,

and the outermost the smallest) ; there are faint traces of three

raised lines or coste, of which these teeth are the terminations ;

the raised reticulations have in some specimens one more deve-

loped than usual, like a varicose vein, running transversely from

the suture at about one-third of the length of the elytra from the

apex. The outer margin has a row of punctures marked off by

a slightly raised straight line, within which at the anterior part

are two rows of punctures enclosed by an oblique line. Under-

side piceous. Metathorax fulvo-pilose. Tibize finely externally

toothed, especially near the apex.

This I believe to be the A. muricata of Fabricius. Some ento-

mologists on the continent still apply that name to it, doubtless

from tradition. There is also a specimen in the Fabrician

collection, now in the British Museum, bearing this name.

The continental entomologists generally, however, consider it

synonymous with A. terebrans, Oliv.; and Lacordaire (Gen.

Col. iv. p. 538) so records it; but Iam convinced that this is

an error, and a strong proof that it is so is that A. terebrans

is found both in Brazil and Africa, while muricata is confined

to Africa. Its appearance, too, is so different that one can

only account for its ever being considered the same by the

difficulty of putting the differences into words, and the ease

with which a little exaggeration of the characters of terebrans

would turn it into muricata.

It is of the same size as ¢erebrans, only broader and not quite

so long, giving the effect of a more bulky insect. The thorax

is decidedly broader in front, instead of bemg narrower as in A.

terebrans. It is deep black, with much deeper reticulations on

the elytra, leaving more open raised spaces, which are more

shining and glittermg. The apical truncature is more vertical.

The descriptions do not help us in the least, that of Olivier’s

terebrans and Fabricius’s muricata being totidem verbis the same

for both. Lacordaire makes the suggestion that the tuft of bair

on the forehead may be a sexual difference, in which case the

present species might be a sex of ¢erebrans: it has not the tuft,

nor the projecting teeth, and it has an additional and a curved

development of the small most advanced teeth on the thorax—

both corresponding to a sexual difference which, I think, occurs

in another (smaller) species, A. monacha; but in it the reticula-

tions are the same in both, which is not the case here ; and, be-

sides, as already said, all idea of this being a sex of terebrans is

excluded by the fact of the one, and not the other, being found

in South America.

Not common in Old Calabar. It extends to Natal.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 87

3. Apate degenera.

A. muricate valde affinis, fere tertia parte minor; elytris minus

rugosis et minus reticulatis, apice haud leviter punctato sed

leviter et evanescenter rugoso.

Long. 9 lin., lat. 8 lin.

Very close to A. muricata, of which it has the form, but

nearly a third smaller, and the reticulations on the elytra not

nearly so marked; they are not much deeper or more decided

than in A. terebrans, but they have the character of those of A.

muricata. ‘It is exceedingly difficult to find any definite cha-

racter to distinguish it from the latter; but the difference in its

appearance, coupled with the above-mentioned distinctions,

seem to warrant its being treated as a distinct species. A minor

difference is that the apical truncature of the elytra, instead of

being sparsely dotted with small shallow round punctures, is

smooth, but marked with faint, evanescent, chiefly longitudinal

corrugations.

Only one specimen received.

4, Apate monacha, Oliv. Ent. iv. pl. 2. fig. 9.

(A. reticulata, De}. Cat. 333; A. Leprieurii, De}. Cat. 333.)

A. terebranti similis, sed tertia parte minor. Mas? Capite cum

fronte sine tuberculis sed fasciculo fulvo piloso instructo ;

thorace cylindrico, haud latiore antice, lateribus anticis vix

tuberculatis ; elytris subreticulatis, bi- vel tricostatis et apice

aciculatim papillosis. Femina? Capite levi, haud fulvo piloso;

thorace parum latiore antice, lateribus anticis tuberculatis vel

minute dentatis, dentibus anticis uncinatis; elytris vix costatis,

potius fortiter punctatis quam reticulatis et apice fere levibus.

Long. 84 lin., lat. 24 lin.

The above two forms are, in my opinion, the different sexes

of the same species, the specimens which I possess of the

allied species, A. Francisca, Fab., from Algiers, being of two

forms, which are distinguished by similar differences, and which

are also probably male and female. In A. monacha the general

outline of the one is like that of A. terebrans, and that of the

other is like A. muricata, but each about a third less than them

in size. What, in accordance with Lacordaire’s suggestion, I

assume to be the male has a tuft on the forehead, and the elytra

are subreticulate and bi- or tricostate ; the hollowed apical trun-

cature is acicularly papillose: in the other sex the tuft is absent

and the forehead smooth and bare; the thorax is broader, too,

and the tubercles or teeth on each side of the front of the thorax

are more numerous and extend to its anterior margin, and the

foremost of these is hooked. The small tubercles on the disk

88 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

are still tubercles, although very small and flat-topped, while in

the supposed female they appear as if rolled flat and even with

the surface, and the elytra have the coste less distinct, and are

rather deeply punctate than reticulate; the hollow space at the

apex of the elytra, too, is nearly smooth.

Var. indistincta.—There are some slightly larger and more

coarsely reticulate specimens, which look somewhat different ;

but I can find no tangible character; however, I note it as a

variety, because I have received specimens from Natal belonging

to it, and not of the normal type.

I have no certain knowledge that this is the 4. monacha of

Olivier ; but it corresponds with his description and figure; and as

his species is said to have come from Senegal, I think we may as-

sume it to be it, especially as there is nothing else from Africa (so

far as I know) to compete with it, except A. Francisca, Fab., from

Algeria, which, although very close to it, is still distinct. A.

Francisca can be readily distinguished from the present species,

however, by the narrower thorax, the more rounded and decided

punctures of the elytra, and more especially by the hollowed

apical truncature of the elytra, which in the male of 4. Francisca

is strongly marked with deep, scattered, round punctures; while

in this species, on close examination, it will be seen that the

truncature, although apparently punctate, is in reality not so,

but derives the appearance from raised papille or minute tuber-

cles instead of sunk holes. The female of A. Francisca, Fab., is

A. Carmelita of Fabricius, according to Lacordaire.

Common at Old Calabar.

Bostricuvus, Geoffr., Lacordaire.

§ 1. Thorax with anterior angles prominently projecting.

1. Bostrichus protrudens.

anticis recte projicientibus, apice haud acu-

tis, subtus unituberculatis ; elytris striato-

punctatis, apice rotundatis, sine truncatura,

margine solum parum explanato.

Long. 8-83 lin., lat. 22 lin.

Black, moderately shining. Head invisible from above, in

consequence of the projection of the thorax, covered with small

round tubercles, which are finest behind; deeply hollowed out

behind in a transverse rounded groove reaching to the posterior

part of the eye on each side; in front of this furrow is a higher

shelf running from the anterior part of the eye on each side;

there is a longitudinal line in the middle of this, which has

Niger, nitidus; thorace tuberculato, angulis |

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 89

a slight emargination behind, on each side of which there is a

faint elevation : in front of this shelf is a raised rounded ridge

divided longitudinally, reminding one of the swollen upper lip

of an otter or seal, slightly and shortly bristly, chiefly at the

sides ; this raised part projects a very little at each side both to

the sides and in front, forming a semicircular epistome. Labrum

transverse, entire, rather large, fringed with a moustache of

fulvous pile. Thorax cylindrical, nearly as broad in front as

behind, roughly tuberculate, except on the disk, where the tu-

bercles are flattened down into flat scale-like markings ; there is

an irregular, not very strongly marked, longitudinal dorsal stria.

The anterior angles are produced for a space about a third or

fourth of the length of the thorax. Seen from above, the pro-

jections are nearly straight forward; seen from the sides, twice

as broad as from above, and slightly turned up at the end; on

their underside towards the base there is a tubercle; along

the upper margin and the hollowed front of the thorax lying

between the two projections are a number of small teeth or tu-

bercles of different sizes ; this anterior margin slopes obliquely

to a channel in the middle, on each side of which is one of the

more prominent tubercles ; it is lined on its upper part with a

sparing fulvous pile, and immediately above the head it is hol-

lowed out into two smooth shallow fovez ; there is no marginal

edging along the front; the posterior angles, seen from above,

are rectangular. Scutellum slightly raised, somewhat rugosely

punctate, and longitudinally impressed. Elytra very deeply and

coarsely punctate-striate, the strive, slightly oblique, being more

numerous at the base than at the apex; suture depressed, most so

near the scutellum ; there are three slightly raised coste running

obliquely inwards from the base to the apex, the inner one starting

at the base between the third and fourth or fourth and fifth strize ;

and the three or four striz lying between it and the suture have

diminished to two before it reaches the apex ; the second costa

is separated from the first by a similar number of striz similarly

diminishing in number as they approach the apex; the outer

costa is scarcely observable except posteriorly ; none of the coste

reach the apex, but stop where the elytra begin to decline to

the apex, where, in the species which have apical teeth, they

would have terminated in teeth; the inner costa, as usual, stops

first ; the striation and punctuation continues equally marked

to the apex; there is no excavation or smooth space, but the

extreme apical margin is slightly explanate, and the edge thick-

ened. Underside clothed with a somewhat loose woolly fulvous

ile.

: Olivier describes and figures a species from Madagascar under

the name of B. cornutus, with the angles of the thorax projecting ;

90 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

but it cannot be this or any of the following cornute species,

for his species has the apex of the elytra hollowed out and with

the teeth projecting. I have received another species, under the

mistaken name of Apate cornuta, from Abyssinia, which comes

much nearer this, and which I shall call B. Abyssinicus, as from

the indications of its characters, which J am about to mention,

I may be entitled to give it a name. It is distinguished from

B. cornutus by many characters. The thorax is much shorter and

less massy. The projecting angles of the thorax are not of the

same shape: in B. Abyssinicus they are not flat, nor broader at

the side than above ; in it there is no tubercle on their under-

side. They are turned in in front, and the hollow between them is

more rounded, open, and less sloped to the centre; that hollow

in it is much more pilose. The whole surface of the thorax

(except a longitudinal dorsal space) is covered with well-marked

distinct small tubercles, instead of the disk being smooth : its

elytra have traces of punctate strize; but, instead of being re-

markably distinct, they are almost merged m a tendency to

transverse indiscriminate corrugation. The coste are also much

more prominent.

2. Bostrichus productus, Imhoff in Bericht tiber die Verhand-

lungen der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Basel, vol. v.

p. 176.

Mas. Niger, punctatus; thorace cornibus

intus haud tuberculatis et elytris haud apice a

prolongatis. Femina. Niger, punctatus; ‘J

thorace cornibus intus bituberculatis; ely-

tris singulis apice obtuse prolongatis.

Long. 83 lin., lat. 24 lin.

Like B. protrudens, but easily distinguished from it by the

projecting angles of the thorax being curved instead of straight;

and the female is equally easily distinguished both from it and

the male, as well as the other species with curved thoracic pro-

jections, by the apex of each elytron being produced into a pro-

jecting knob.

Male. The head is nearly the same as in B. protrudens, except

that the intermediate shelf between the hollow furrow at its back

part and the ridge forming an apparent swollen upper lip is,

absent; that ridge is consequently broader, and is not marked

by any longitudinal line or division, The thorax is also nearly

the same, with the following exceptions :—it 1s narrower in front,

and the posterior angles are rather more rounded; the anterior

angles of the thorax are incurved instead of being nearly straight,

and have a slight turn outwards again at the very tip; viewed

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. on

sideways, they are scarcely broader than when viewed from above,

and terminate in a point curved upwards; there is no tubercle

beneath them, nor on the upperside are there two on each side

of the inner lower margin, as is the case with the female of this

species. On the upper margin of the curve of the horns the

teeth or tubercles are more numerous and larger than in B. pro-

trudens. The scutellum does not differ from that of protrudens.

The elytra differ in the coste being almost absent, the striation

straighter and less oblique, and in the apex of each being pro-

longed into a rather obtuse triangular end. I see no difference

in the underside.

Female. Very nearly the same as the male, , Ss

but it is distinguished by the elytra each ter- ily) ik

minating in a prolonged knob. ‘The head is (e ‘if

the same. The thorax is scarcely so coarsely

tuberculate, and the disk is smooth and

only shows a sculpture of the form of ad-

pressed tubercles, instead of having flat-topped smaller tubercles

present; and the dorsal longitudinal line is not so deep as in

the male: the horns of the projecting angles are longer and

less incurved; they have not a tubercle on the underside as in

B. protrudens, but two on the inner margin of the upperside,

one a little behind the point, and the other on the front margin,

just before where the curve of the horn begins, with a marginal

edging uniting the inner two; the hollow between the horns is

greater than in the male. The elytra are, if anything, more

deeply punctate, and at the apex, instead of a simple obtuse end,

each elytron is prolonged into a rather large conical knob,

smooth and shining, a little turned upwards and outwards. In

other respects the same description will apply to both.

I state the distinction of the sexes on the authority of Imhoff.

Until I saw his description I had regarded the male and female

as distinct species.

I have only seen three specimens.

3. Bostrichus brevicornutus.

B. producto similis; elytris apice rotundatis

dignoscitur.

Long. 6-8 lin., lat. 13-2 In.

Very like B. productus (male), but has the

elytra without any prolongation. The head

and thorax are almost identical with those of that species, while

the punctuation is more like that of B. protrudens, the striation

being, as in it, more oblique than in B. pr oductus. The elytra

are rounded at the apex, and have the apical marginal edging

92 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

of the former species; but it is rough and rugose, instead of

being shining and more or less smooth.

Apparently more numerous than the preceding species of this

section, but still received only in very small numbers.

§ 2. Thorax with anterior angles not prominently projecting.

The species in this section have not the same facies as the pre-

ceding species. They are large, coarse, black insects, with much

more real affinity to the genus Apate than to the species of the

present section, which contains the smaller Bostrichi, such as

B. varius, lig. (Dufourti, Latr.), &e. Indeed the distinction

between Apate and Bostrichus (as that genus is now defined by

Lacordaire) would better rest (according to my judgment) on

the facies of the insects than on whether the antennz have the

club compact and close or open and loose. There are all

degrees of difference in this character to be found in the spe-

cies forming the two genera; and I should have preferred that

Apate had been reserved for all the large, coarse, black species,

while Bostrichus was kept for the smaller ones. But few genera

can be so well defined as to escape criticism, at least when they

contain more than one species; and to attempt to disturb

Lacordaire’s arrangement now would be a much worse evil than

to preserve some incongruous or ill-characterized genera. A

fixed arrangement that we all know and can refer to as a

standard is what we have wanted for thirty years past, what

Lacordaire’s ‘Genera’ was started to supply, and what that

wonderful work has most successfully accomplished.

4. Bostrichus brunneus.

Angustus, brunneus ; thorace duobus parvis dentibus uncinatis,

antice projicientibus, et post hos quatuor vel quinque lineis

transversis dentium minorum; elytris lineatim punctatis,

hneis irregularibus vix strias formantibus, apice rotundato sat

abrupte declivo.

Long. 34 lin., lat. 1 lin.

The species in question is narrow, dull, and brown. The head

is finely papillose or granulated, with a shallow transverse

furrow across the front between the eyes, wider and tumid

behind this depression ; in the middle of the depression there is

a short, transverse, slightly raised, smooth line; there is a little

fulvous pile on the front of the epistome; the margin of the

labrum is also fringed with fulvous pile. The thorax is as broad

as long, widest in the middle, sinuate before the posterior

angles, which are slightly prominent; the anterior angles are

rounded, and terminate in front in two short but rather pro-

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 93

minent teeth, which are curved upwards; there is a hollow

between these, and the margin is semicircular; behind the

thoracic truncature there are about four rows of small teeth

running across from side to side; the posterior part of the

thorax is finely granulose or papillose. Scutellum small and

triangular. Elytra twice and a half the length of the thorax.

punctate in lines, many of which are irregular. There are the

faint traces of three cost; the apex declines rapidly, and is

rounded at the margin; the sutural line and the margin are

both raised at the apex, so that on each elytron they include a

slightly depressed, coarsely punctate space, although scarcely so

decided as to be called a truncature. The underside is not

quite so dark as the upper.

A single specimen.

SINOxYLON, Guér.

1. Sinoxylon pubescens.

Piceo-fuscum, pubescens ; elytris sexdentatis, sutura sine dente ;

subtus dilutius, pedibus piceo-testaceis.

Long. 33 lin., lat. 15 lin.

Of the type of S. sexdentatum, but nearly a third larger.

Piceous brown, clothed with a short, pale griseous pubescence

close and thickly applied on the sides and back part of the

thorax and on the underside; fine and woolly hairs sparingly

scattered over the elytra. Antenne and parts of the mouth

testaceous. Head black and finely granulose ; there is a narrow

ridge or edging along the part that lies next the thorax; a

transverse shghtly curved line runs from the anterior inner

angle of each eye, separating the epistome from the rest of

the head; the labrum is covered with fulvous pile. The thorax

is widest at about a third from the base, the truncature of

which is pear-shaped with the apex in front, and truncate

with the anterior angles slightly produced, covered with tuber-

cles, which are largest at the sides; the sides and back part

nearly smooth, covered closely with pale griseous pubescence,

among which appear a few scattered, very minute, but distinct

papille. Scutellum small, subquadrate. Elytra with the apical

truncature very slightly oblique, almost vertical and even, as

if a part of the body had been cut off; irregularly punctate,

faintly at the base, and gradually more deeply towards the

apex, where the punctuation is very deep, coarse, and rugose;

there are traces of the usual three costz on each elytron, which

respectively terminate at the apical truncature in well-developed

teeth ; the sutural margin and the external margin of the trun-

94. Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

eature are both a little raised. Underside piceo-ferruginous,

pubescent. Legs piceo-testaceous.

One specimen only.

2. Sinoxylon fumatum.

Antice testaceo-ferrugineum, postice gradatim piceum, parum

pubescens ; thorace postice levi; elytris irregulariter _punc-

tatis, fortius versus apicem, apice oblique declivo, singulis

duobus minutis tuberculis instructis.

Long. 23-3 lin., lat. 1-1¢ lin.

Testaceo-ferruginous until past the middle of the elytra, when

the colour becomes gradually darker, until at the apex it is

piceous. The head and thoracic truncature are rather darker

than the rest of the thorax. Head finely granulose, with a

transverse curved depression or line behind the epistome. Man-

dibles piceous. Thorax broader than long, with the truncature

covered with dentiform tubercles pointing backwards; the pos-

terior part of the thorax smooth, shining, slightly pubescent,

and with traces of very fine tubercles next the tubercular anterior

part. Scutellum subquadrate, raised. Elytra very cylindrical,

irregularly punctate, faintly at the base, and gradually more

coarsely towards the apex, thinlyclothed with fine woolly hairs; the

apical truncature very slightly oblique, being very nearly vertical,

as if the body had been cut through; the truncature is well-

defined, slightly sloping inwards to the suture, which is distinctly

raised, as well as the margin of the truncature, all round, except

at its top; a little within it, near the upper margin, are on each

elytron two scarcely perceptible tubercles in the relative position

which would have been occupied by the termination of the two

inner costz usually met with in other species. Underside finely

pubescent.

There is an undescribed species from Port Philip which is very

like this; but it is narrower and has no tubercles at all on the

apical truncature. In it the elytra are more coarsely punctate,

particularly toward the base; the thorax (except the truncature)

is shining and very finely and sparingly punctured ; the piceous

termination to the elytra is less decided, and the reddish colour

brighter. I would call it S. rufescens.

Two specimens received.

3. Sinoxylon nitidipenne.

Atrum, interdum plus minusve piceum vel piceo-ferrugineum ;

elytris nitidis, leviter punctatis, truncatura apicali superiore

margine rotundato sex-dentata ; subtus castaneo pubescens.

Long. 24 lin., lat. 1 lin.

Black, varying more or less, both in place and degree, to

Mr. R. J. L. Guppy on Diplommatina Huttoni in Trinidad. 95

piceous or piceo-ferruginous ; the base of the elytra sometimes

ferruginous, and the rest black; the legs testaceous, piceo-

testaceous, or piceo-ferruginous. Head finely granulose; the

epistome separated from the rest by a very marked line of sepa-

ration, and more depressed than the posterior part. Thorax

broadest behind the middle; the truncature rounded, extending

pretty far back ; a series of larger teeth and tubercles extending

along the sides, others, not so large, across the back part ; the

front merely granulose; the anterior margin nearly straight ;

the posterior half of the thorax granulose or finely tuberculate

in the middle, smooth, shining, and impunctate on the sides ;

the basal margin with a transverse depression reaching to the

posterior angles, marked with four longitudinal aciculations.

Scutellum small. Elytra shining, sparsely and finely punctured,

the punctures of different sizes and often indistinct, most deeply

marked towards the sides and apex; the apical truncature

nearly vertical, with the margin sloped with a gentle curve on

the upperside, and with a sharp raised edge on the sides;

the sutural line is also raised, and projects in the middle into

two teeth; there are also two smaller teeth within the truncature

near the upper margin, corresponding in position to the termi-

nation of the usual cost, which are not here present, but within

the truncated space; near the apical margin the truncature is

slightly hollowed. The underside is covered with a pale chestnut

pubescence.

Four or five specimens of this have been received.

[To be continued. ]

XI1.—On the Occurrence of Diplommatina Hutton in Trinidad,

By R. J. Lecumere Guppy, F.G.S., F.L.S.

By the kindness of my friend Mr. Thomas Bland, F.G.S., of

New York, I was made aware of the discovery, by Mr. Theodore

Gill, in Trinidad, of a minute land-shell, which was believed by

Dr. Pfeiffer to be identical with the East-Indian Diplommatina

Huttoni. On the receipt of this information I took the earliest

opportunity of making an expedition with the view of discover-

ing this little shell, which had previously escaped my search.

I was fortunate beyond my anticipation in finding the Diplom-

matina ; but upon the first search I only found two perfect ex-

amples. Subsequently, however, I had the good fortune, on

revisiting the same locality, to obtaim more than twenty living

examples. I could not, however, induce the mollusks to show

themselves out of their shells; and I was obliged to destroy

several in order to obtain a sight of the operculum and the

96 Mr.R.J.L. Guppy on Diplommatina Huttoni zn Trinidad.

dental membrane. Owing to its minuteness and tenuity, the

operculum is scarcely visible to the naked eye, even when iso-

lated. It is horny, transparent, subcircular, and composed of a

few indistinct whorls with raised edges, hardly resembling the

figure I have seen of that of D. folliculus.

The species is remarkable as being the only sinistral one of

the genus, which only includes, I believe, five or six known

species. The lingual dentition, being very minute, is somewhat

difficult of preparation; but I have been able to make out its

characters, which are as follows :—The dental band is of mode-

rate length; the teeth are 3.1.3, the median is broad, its

edge narrowly reflexed and five-toothed, its base narrow, almost

pointed. The first and second laterals are subclavate, their

edges reflexed and three-toothed. The third lateral is somewhat

hamate and obscurely tricuspid. The mandible is broad and

flat, covered with very distinct, separate, lozenge-shaped plates.

All this tends to induce one to retain this genus in the Cyclo-

phoride, to which these characters attach it more closely than

to the Cyclostomide. Its position, therefore, with respect to

its congeners seems to have been pretty correctly given by

Pfeiffer and Gray.

The occurrence in Trinidad of a second land-shell common to

India naturally induces one to seek an explanation of so curious

a circumstance. Hnnea bicolor has for some years been known

to be common to St. Thomas and Trinidad in the West Indies,

and to the East Indies. But it would have been unsafe to

ground any conclusion upon a single coincidence, which might

have been due to accident, as Mr. Bland appears to have sug-

gested. Hnnea bicolor is rare in Trinidad. During my eight

years’ residence in Trinidad, I have closely searched every loca-

lity near Port-of-Spain ; and until made aware by Mr. Bland of

its existence here, I had not discovered Diplummatina Huttoni.

It has not been found in any other place than near the Maracas

Waterfall, a distance of nine or ten miles from Port-of-Spain,

the nearest seaport. I think, therefore, it is highly unlikely

that these two species can have been introduced, not to mention

the improbability of their surviving a voyage from India. In

fact I need scarcely say more on this point, considering that the

only direct communication between Trinidad and India is con-

fined to the ships which bring Asiatic labourers from the latter

place. I would suggest for consideration the possibility of these

species having migrated by means of the supposed tertiary

Atlantis, of the former existence of which I have endeavoured to

show the probability in my paper on the Tertiary formations of

the West Indies, published in the twenty-second volume of the

Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society. It is true that

On the different Ages of Trochus uiloticus and T. maximus. 97

this hypothesis supposes a very great antiquity for these species.

But this antiquity has its parallel in the Helix labyrinthica of

North America, which is found in the Hocene deposits of the

Isle of Wight; and there are many circumstances which tend

to show a high antiquity for the species of terrestrial Mollusca.

Port-of-Spain, Trinidad, June 4, 1867.

Conchological Gleanings.

By Dr. EK. von Martens.

[Continued from vol. xvii. p. 213.]

V. On the different ages of Trochus niloticus, L., and

Tr. maximus, Koch.

Trochus niloticus is one of the commonest shells in our col-

lections ; nevertheless it seems not to have been fully understood

as regards its several stages of growth and its differences from

its nearest ally Zr. maximus, Koch, which, indeed, is figured in

Reeve’s ‘ Conchologia Iconica’ instead of the true niloticus.

Chemnitz’s ‘ Conchylien-Cabinet,’ the most complete work on

conchology of the last century, contains, in its fifth volume,

published in 1781, four shells, said to be of different species,

which are to be referred as follows :—

Figs. 1605 and 1614, the true Tr. niloticus of Linné, full-

grown.

Figs. 1606 and 1607, registered by Gmelin as a variety of the

former, by Lamarck and Philippi (in Kiister’s new edition of

Chemnitz) as a distinct species, Tr. marmoratus, Lam.; by Dill-

wyn, Deshayes, and Anton, on the contrary, as the younger

age of Zr. niloticus. This latter opinion seems to me to be

correct.

Figs. 1608 and 1609, cited only by Philippi (loc. cit.) as a

variety of niloticus, “which may be perhaps a distinct species,”

I think is a young state of 7. maximus.

Fig. 1611, called by Gmelin Tr. spinosus, regarded by Pfeiffer,

in his index to Chemnitz’s figures, with some doubt, as a young

marmoratus, and by Philippi as marmoratus, var... 1 suppose

it to be a Tr. naloticus still younger than fig. 1606.

The full-grown Tr. maximus, Koch, was ar introduced as a

distinct species before the year 1844, when it was figured in

Philippr’s ‘Abbildungen und Beschreibungen neuer ‘Conchy-

lien; it appears again in the same author’s treatise on the

genus Trochus, which forms a part of the above-mentioned nev

edition of Chemnitz, in Kiener’s ‘ leonographie,’ with the name

Tr. marmoratus, ad in Reeve’s ‘Conchologia Iconica’ as an

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 7

98 Dr. E. von Martens on the different Ages of

illustration of niloticus. H. & A. Adams, ‘ Genera of Molluscous

Animals, i. p. 413, admit three species—Tr. maximus, niloticus,

and spinosus ; under the last name they perhaps also comprehend

Lamarck’s marmoratus, on the authority of Philippi, who unites

both into one species.

In the zoological museum of Berlin there are at present

twenty-seven specimens which I have been able to examine for

this purpose—five full-grown Tr. niloticus, four full-grown Tr.

maximus, twelve which I presume to be young ages of niloticus,

and six which I think to be the young of 7. maximus.

The differences of the two species, when full-grown, prove

to be very striking; they are the following :-—

1. Tr.mazximus is as high as broad, niloticus 1s broader thanhigh.

2. In Tr. maximus the two whorls before the last exhibit a

distinct sculpture of large oblique folds ; in 77. niloticus they are

as smooth as the last itself.

3. In Tr. maximus the last whorl has its upper surface

slightly curved, in the same manner as the preceding ones; in

Tr. niloticus it is remarkably concave, the peripheral margin

being very swollen and projecting, whereas the surface of the

preceding whorls is even.

4. The base or under surface of Tr. maximus is concave, that

of niloticus convex.

5. The same part exhibits in Tr. maximus about twelve spiral

grooves, whilst in Zr. niloticus it is smooth.

6. The markings also are somewhat different : in 77. maximus

they consist of distinct large purple rays, which become somewhat

more numerous on the last whorl; in 77. niloticus the rays are

much more numerous, narrower, and variously bent in the last

whorl; on the preceding ones they are interrupted and inter-

mingled one with the other so as to form a repeatedly rather

marbled design. ‘The base, on the contrary, exhibits in 77,

maximus small linear spots situated between the grooves, and

therefore in the direction of the spiral—in 77. niloticus narrow

radiating lines, which are variously bent and interrupted.

In both the markings of the base are of a lighter red than those

of the upper surface, and in both the purple colour of the latter

is sometimes partially replaced by a rather dark green. I sup-

pose the latter to be the original colour, which may be changed

into red in the dead shell, or the dead portions of it, by the in-

fluence of light, just as the same change of colour happens in

Neritina fluviatilis by long exposure to the light of the sun.

Both species are subject to individual variations within rather

narrow limits. The dilatation of the last whorl of Tr. niloticus

and the convexity of its base especially are different in degree

in different specimens; and the rays of some specimens of 77,

Trochus niloticus and Trochus maximus. 99

niloticus are almost as bread, regular, and few as those of 77.

maximus: such a specimen of Tr. niloticus is figured by Chem-

nitz. The measurements of the largest and of the smallest

specimens, which may be supposed to be full-grown, among

those exhibited in the Berlin Museum are as follows, the height

being measured from the top to the undermost part of the pillar

side of the aperture :—

Tr. maximus: height 130, breadth 130; height 91, breadth 91 millims.

imrniocicus ass) Vga! iss) on Bedon” Ok Gls. oN Gf.

The last measurements are taken from an extraordinarily dwarf

specimen, the thickened pillar-lip and convex basis of which

prove it to be full-grown.

In almost every full-grown specimen of Tr. niloticus the

uppermost whorls are much worn and often wholly destroyed ;

this circumstance has probably hitherto formed the chief dif_i-

culty in recognizing the very young specimens as belonging to

the same species. [I am compelled by it also to number the

whorls in a retrograde manner, from the last upwards. The two

whorls before the last in 7. niloticus are, as above stated,

even, smooth, and marbled; they agree in these respects, as

well as in size, exactly with the last two whorls of 7. marmoratus

as figured by Chemnitz (figs. 1606, 1607) ; and on placing several

specimens in the Berlin Museum agreeing with those figures

side by side with the full-grown niloticus, I feel quite convinced

that they are nothing but the same species in a younger state,

wanting the last whorl. The base of one of these specimens is

as smooth as that of the full-grown niloticus; the base of an-

other exhibits distinct traces of spiral grooves; in all, however,

it is neither convex nor concave, but as even as the spiral

growth allows it to be. The second whorl before the last in

Tr. marmoratus exhibits a sculpture of large plaits or tubercles

near the lower edge, and two or three rows of small grains above

them, sometimes uniting themselves into oblique plaits, vanish-

ing gradually towards the upper whorls; therefore the third

before the last in the full-grown nzloticus must have the same

sculpture ; but this is just within reach of the apical destruc-

tion, so as to show only few and less distinct traces of the sculp-

ture in question. Moreover there are in the Berlin Museum

smaller specimens agreeing perfectly with Gmelin’s Trochus spi-

nosus, Chemnitz, fig. 1611, in size, shape, and sculpture, which,

on comparison with those named marmoratus, prove evidently to

be the young of the same—that is, the very young ndloticus,

requiring still three or four whorls for its full age, and therefore

sculptured on all the whorls which have been as yet formed.

In these specimens, also, the base is even and slightly grooved

in a spiral direction.

100 Dr. E. von Martens on the different Ages of

This sculpture is the same as that of the upper whorls in

Trochus maximus ; the striking differences between the two spe-

cies enumerated ‘above in Nos. 3-5 are situated in the last

whorl. The markings on the upper whorls of marmoratus are ~

nearly the same as in maaimus ; therefore the only differences by

which we are able to distinguish the very young 77. niloticus

from a Tr. maximus of the same age are the somewhat broader

shape of the whole shell and the somewhat larger apical angle.

But whenever the specimens have reached about 40 millimetres

in diameter, or about the fifth or sixth whorl (the third before

the last in full age), the persistence of the sculpture and the

deepening spiral grooves of the base will undoubtedly distin-

guish the young Tr. maximus from the young Tr. niloticus. I

have at present before me two young maaimus of this deserip-

tion, and two which are somewhat older but retain the same

character; they agree very satisfactorily with Chemnitz’s figures

1608 and 1609: in these specimens also the base is neither

convex nor coneave, but even; the markings show the charac-

teristic features of 7. maximus.

Thus three periods may be distinguished in the course of life

of the two species: in the first, which extends until the fifth or

sixth whorl, both are very like each other; in the second, com-

prising the two whorls before the last, the sculpture both of the

upper and underside vanishes in 77. nzloticus, whilst in Tr. maai-

mus the upper one becomes only more feeble, and the under one

even increases in strength; in the third period, finally, the

differences between the two species prove to be quite contrary,

the last whorl becoming in 7’. niloticus concave above, convex

and smooth beneath—in 77. maximus nearly straight above,

concave and deeply furrowed beneath.

The synonymy of the two species may be resumed as fol-

lows :—

I. Trochus niloticus, L. Turbo exoticus umbilicatus, Columna, De Purpura,

p- 21; Chemnitz, Conch.-Cab. v. pl. 167. fig. 1605, and pl. 168.

fig. 1614 ; Encyclopédie Meth. pl. 444. fig. 1 ; Kiener, Iconogr. pl. 10;

Nanaia Genera! pl. 46. fig. 7.

Trochus juvenilis, Lister, 680. 6; Chemnitz, v. pl. 167. figs. 1606, 1607.

Tr. marmoratus, An. s. Vert. no.

Trochus pullus, Chemn. v. pl. 167. fig. 1610. Tr. spinosus, Gmel. Tr.

marmoratus, var. 8, Philippi.

Il. Trochus maximus, Koch. Trochus pyramidalis maximus late radiatus

ex rubro, Lister, Hist. Conch. no. 617. fig. 3; Philippi, Abbildungen,

i. pl. 4. fig. 3; Chemn. ed. noy. Trochus, pl. 19. fig.4. Tr. marmo-

ratus, Kiener, Iconogr, pl. 11. Tir. niloticus, Reeve, Conch. Icon.

fig. 3.

Trochus pullus, Lister, 619.5; Rumph. 218; Chemn, vy. figs. 1608,

1609. Tr, niloticus, var. 8, Philippi.

irochus niloticus and Trochus maximus. 101

In Lister’s figure 3 the base seems rather convex than con-

cave; but, as the other characters agree with Zr. maximus, I

feel inclined to think this may be a fault of the engraver; or

may it be a form intermediate between the two?

The figures in the works of Rumph (pl. 3. fig. 21), Gualtieri

(pl. 59. fig. c), and, Argenville (pl. 8. fig.c) seem to represent

rather 7’. maximus than Tr. niloticus.

Trochus niloticus is an nhabitant of the Indian seas. I found

it myself alive on the coral beach of the little island Pulo-tikus,

near Bencoolen, Sumatra. Quoy and Gaimard (Voyage of the

Astrolabe) describe the living animal, found by themselves at

New Ireland. Philippi mentions as a locality for Tr. marmoratus

(2. e. the young niloticus) the Sooloo Islands, south of the

Philippines. Other localities, which may be got out of various

published lists of sea-shells found at Ceylon, Madagascar, &c.,

may be here omitted, as, where no description or figure is added,

we. cannot tell with certainty whether the true 77>. niloticus or

Tr. maximus is meant. The name Trochus niloticus itself is

consequently incorrect: it originated with old Aldrovandi (who

gave it, equally incorrectly, to a large species of Conus), and was

transferred to our Trochus by Linné; but as it is now generally

adopted and so evidently untrue that no misunderstanding is to

be feared from it, I would not propose to change it for a new one.

The habitat of Tr. maximus has not been stated by Koch and

Philippi. I procured a young specimen at Singapore, and

think therefore that the Indian Ocean is the common home of

both Tr. niloticus and Tr. maximus. Nevertheless there are

some traces of another habitat for Zr. maximus: in the Berlin

Museum there is a very young specimen of the latter, stated by

a label to have formed part of a collection made in Guinea by

Mr. Halleur (the other shells of the same collection are true

West-African species) ; and Chemnitz informs us that, in his

copy of Lister’s work, a manuscript note, “ex insula Principis,”

was added to the said figure 617.3. If this is the island situated

in the Gulf of Guinea, it would be in favour of the West-African

habitat ; or are we perhaps allowed to presume that the Prince

of Wales Island, ze. Pulo Pinang, on the coast of Malacca,

was meant? It is very desirable that more reliable statements

concerning the habitat of this form, Trochus maximus, should

come to our knowledge.

I never saw a full-grown specimen which left any doubt

whether it belonged to the one or the other species: the dif_i-

culty of distinguishing them increases the younger the indivi-

duals are which come under observation, and the more so as

even the different stages of age in which the characteristic

changes of feature make their appearance are subject to a certain

102 On the different Ages of Trochus niloticus and T. maximus.

amount of individual variability. Some young individuals of

Tr. maximus are as broad as high, some even a little broader

than high; and, on the contrary, in the younger age of Tr. ni-

loticus (stage of marmoratus), its breadth exceeds its height by a

relatively smaller amount than in the full-grown shell. I have

before me two very young specimens (stage, of spinosus), which

Iam induced to regard as niloticus by their relative breadth ;

the height of both is ‘the same, millims.; the breadth of the

one _, of the other millims. *, which last proves to be a very

excessive one when compared with those of other young indivi-

duals’ The even and smooth surface of their last whorls is the

most characteristic feature of the adolescent specimens of nilo-

ticus (marmoratus) ; it is the consequence of the disappearance

of the sculpture long before the change of shape peculiar to the

full-grown age makes its appearance at the same time as the

last whorl; whilst in Tr. maximus both changes, which are of

less intensity, coincide with regard to the age of the individual.

But even this vanishing of the sculpture in 77. niloticus takes

place in some individuals a little sooner or later than in others :

the amount of this variation may be a whole whorl; and external

causes seem to have some influence upon it: in fact one of the

specimens in the stage of marmoratus shows the traces of having

been fractured just in the whorl, where the change generally

takes place very gradually ; but here the sculpture is preserved

in its full strength up to the fracture, and immediately after it

the newly formed continuation is smooth. There is no evi-

dence that a rather large portion of shell has been destroyed

and taken away by the fracture; on the contrary, the perfect

regularity of the following portion of the whorl shows that there

is no marked restoration, but simply progress of growth ; never-

theless the change of sculpture is sudden, as if the interruption

and new beginning had given the animal an impulse to construct

the following parts of the shell at once according to the new

fashion, instead of gliding gradually from one into the other.

Another instance of individual variation is presented by a speci-

men of niloticus which shows on its Jast whorl the dilatation

and swelling of the lower edge which is so very characteristic

of the last whorl of the full-grown shell, whilst its dimensions

(height 56, breadth 66 millims.), the still even base, the broad

purple rays above, and the small spots beneath rather clearly

indicate that another whorl is still required for the full growth

of the shell. Such specimens, in which a property normally

peculiar to the adult makes its appearance in a previous stage of

growth, may be called premature individuals.

* [These measurements, which have been accidentally omitted by our

correspondent, will be given in a note in our next.—Eb. |

Dr. E. von Martens on the Species of Argonauta. 103

It is an almost general rule throughout the animal kmgdom

that members of different species, genera, families, or orders

agree more with each other in the first stage of their life than

when full-grown; but very often this general resemblance is

due rather to the special characters being indistinct, or not

yet developed, not to the special similarity of them—as, for in-

stance, the embryo of all the Vertebrata in its first period is

similar, but not a fish or a bird, the distinctive characters of

these making their appearance afterwards. In the present in-

stance the sculpture, which is a rather special character, neither

similar in all species of Trochus nor already formed within the

egg, is specifically similar in the young state of both species;

and the difference in the sculpture between the two full-grown

shells arises not from any new character coming up, but from

the disappearance, earlier or later, perfectly or partially, of that

which has been common. If we may take for granted that

the single species, such as they live at present, have not been

created independently of each other, but that they are the

descendants of others of other times, that they bear the traces

of their genealogy in themselves, and that the characters trans-

mitted by a longer series of ancestors are also more constant

and manifest themselves earlier in the youth of the individual,

whereas the modifications acquired for the species in later times

make their appearance less early in the course of individual

development—if this be granted, then we may be entitled to

pronounce that Trochus niloticus and Trochus maximus descend

from similar, therefore probably common ancestors, which must

have been sculptured throughout, with an even, spirally grooved

base, such as is presented, for instance, among the now living

allied species by 77. acutangulus,—that Tr. niloticus has deviated

in the same space of time more from the common ancestors than

Tr. maximus, the characters of the last whorl in Tr. niloticus

being quite new,—and that the above-mentioned premature spe-

cimen of the same may give a hint as to the direction in which

the species will change itself in future times.

VI. On the Species of Argonauta.

Linné comprises all the Argonaute known to him in one

species, A. Aryo; his second species, A. Cymbium, is a foramini-

ferous shell (Peneroplis planatus, Montfor t), as is proved by his

own words, “testa vix minim arenule magnitudine,” and by

the quotation of Gualtieri.

Lamarck, who laid the foundations of the modern generic and

specific distinction of sea-shells, distinguishes ¢hree species of

Argonauta— Argo, tuberculosa, and nitida (= hians, Solander).

104 Dr. E. von Martens on the Species of Argonauta.

D’Orbigny limits himself to the same three species, admitting

A. gondola and haustrum, Dill., as varieties of A. tuberculata and

Argo. Reeve, in the ‘Conchologia Iconica,’ vol. xu. 1861,

admits five species; H. and A. Adams, in the ‘Genera of Mol-

luscous Animals,’ 1858, and Sowerby, in the ‘ Thesaurus Conchy-

liorum,’ six species.

On reviewing the twenty-nine specimens exposed in the Ber-

lin Museum, I was impressed with the conviction that they all

are referable to three constant types :—

1. Type of A. Argo: ribs smooth and numerous; keel nar-

row; colour white.

2. Type of A. tuberculata, Shaw (nodosa, Solander, tubercu-

losa, Lam., oryzata, Meuschen) : ribs tuberculated, numerous ;

keel rather narrow; colour white or pale yellow.

3. Type of A. hians, Solander (nitida, Lam.) : ribs smooth,

distant, and therefore few; keel broad; colour yellowish or ight

brown.

In all three the hinder part of the keel is very often tinged

with dark brown; this dark-brown colour is wanting in a few

specimens of A. Aryo and tuberculata, and in many of A. heans.

Within each of these types there are specimens in which the

lateral edge of the aperture is nearly straight, the aperture

therefore narrow (forma mutica), and others in which this edge

forms near its inner end an angle which is more or less blunt

(forma obtusangula), or extends itself into a prolongation called

the ear (forma aurita).

Type of Argonauta Argo :—

a. Forma mutica: A. Gruneri (Dunker), Reeve, fig. 66, Marquesas

Islands; Sow. fig. 9.

b. Forma obtusangula: A. Argo of most authors. Lister, Hist. Conch.

pl. 555. fig. 7; Martini, Conchylhen-Cabinet, vol. i. pl. 17. fig. 157;

D’Orbigny, Céphalopodes, pl. 2. figs. 1,2; Reeve, fig. 2°, from

Venezuela; Sow. Thes. fig. 2.

c. Forma aurita: obtained at Ceram, Moluccas, by myself; Rumph,

Amb. Rariteitkamer, pl. 18. fig. a, from Amboyna; Gualtieri,

pl. 12. fig. a; Argenville, Conchyliologie, pl. 5. fig. a; D’Orb.

Céph. 2, 3-5. A. haustrum, Dillwyn; Reeve, fig. 2, from Tahiti ;

Sow. Thes. fig. 1.

Type of Argonauta tuberculata :—

a. Forma mutica: one specimen from the coast of Brazil, in the Ber-

lin Museum; Reeve, fig. 1.

6. Forma obtusangula: some specimens in the Berlin Zoological Mu-

seum.

c. Forma aurita: Gualtieri, pl. 12. fig. B ; Argenville,5c; Martini,

figs. 156 & 160; D’Orb. Céph. pl. 4; Reeve, fig. 2; Sow. fig. 3.

A. navicula, Solander. A. gondola, Dillwyn, on the authority of

D’Orbigny.

Dr. E. von Martens on the Species of Argonauta. 105

Type of Argonauta hians :—

a. Forma mutica: Lister, 553. 5?

6, Forma obtusangula: Gualtieri, pl. 12. fig. c; Argenville, 5B. A.

hians, Solander, and A. Owenii, Adams and Reeve, Zool. Voy.

Samarang, Reeve, figs. 4 & 5, pl. 3, South Atlantic. Obtained

by myself at Ceram, Moluccas.

e. Forma aurita: Lister, 554.6; Rumph, pl. 18. fig. B, from Amboyna;

D’Orb. Céph. pl. 5. A. gondola (Dillwyn), Adams and Reeve,

Zool. Voy. Samarang, pl. 2, from the South Atlantic. A gon-

dola, Reeve, figs. 3° & ge Sow. fig. 4, from the Philippines.

Obtained by myself at Batjan, Moinccns! from the natives.

Concerning ¢uberculata, I have no doubt that the three forms

are merely variations of the same species, as some specimens

remain intermediate between them. For A. hians I incline rather

to think the same, although very respectable authorities range

themselves on the opposite side; in this the first form seems to

be very rare, as it is the only one out of the nine which is

wanting in the Berlin Zoological Museum. The presence or

absence of the ears, however, is not a character of age, as both

are to be seen in very young ‘and in full-grown specimens, nor

does it seem to be a difference of geographical value, the forms

b & c of hians having been found both in the South Atlantic

and in the Indian Ocean. For A. tuberculata, 1 cannot find

anywhere the geographical habitat of the eared variety separately

stated, so as to compare it with that of the earless form.

Concerning A. Argo I feel much more doubtful—first because

the want of the ears in A. Gruneri is combined with a more

elongated shape of the whole shell, and secondly because it

seems to me that the eared form, A. haustrum, is proper to the

Indian seas, the obtuse-angulated, on the contrary, to the Medi-

terranean; but I am acquainted with the exact habitat of too

few specimens of either form to advance anything positively m

this respect. However, it seems to me not quite absurd to admit

that some species may be rather constant and others very vari-

able in the shape of the upper margin. It may be remarked

that the ears of A. haustrum are prolonged in the same plane

with the sides of the shell, whereas they are bent outwards in

the eared forms of A. tubercuiata and A. hians.

Finally, there is in the Berlin Museum a specimen, belonging

to the type of A. Argo, in which the angles are present but

little developed, and not free but firmly joined to the spire, in

consequence of which, at first sight, one might suppose them to

be entirely absent; the shell is more compressed and more

elongated than that of A. Argo generally; its coloration is

typical of that species. This seems to be a very well-charac-

terized species; but I cannot help suggesting whether it may

not be regarded rather as a fourth variation of A. Aryo, espe-

106 Prof. Santo Garovaglio on the Species of

cially as A. Kochianus, Dunker (loc. cit. figs. 7, 8) appears to be

the analogous variation of A. hians. If this view should prove

to be right, we shall have a fourth form (forma agglutinans),

the rarest of all, being as yet exemplified only in two of the

three species.

XIV.—WNotule Lichenologice. No. XVI.

By the Rev. W. A. Leicuton, B.A., F.L.S.

Pror. Santo Garovacuio has favoured us with a copy of a

further portion of his ‘Tentamen Dispositionis Methodice

Lichenum,’ comprising the Verrucarie quadriloculares, and

illustrated with three plates.

Secrio III.

Verrucarie quadriloculares.

Saxicole vel corticole ; hermaphrodite, monoicz vel dioicee ;

epithecium breve, dimidiatum, subintegrum, carbonaceum (in

una alterave specie coloratum ; paraphyses null, obsolete vel

distinctz, simplices aut ramosz, continue vel in feaceale solutee,

capillares vel articulate ; asci lineares vel clavato- elongati ob-

ovative, interdum circa medium ventricosi, interdum supra basim

saccato-gibbi, octospori ; spore in duplicem triplamve seriem,

rarius (Cohors IV.) uno ordine altera super alteram disposite,

figura et magnitudine vari, s. ovoidez, obovate, in formam

cocci, bombycis, vel fusi, in cohorte IIL eracillimee, aciculares,

in reliquis sat crass, rectze vel curvate, normaliter quadri-

loculares, loculis amplis vel angustis, quorum duo interpositi

vix non semper rectangulari-tetragoni, extimi duo subconici.

In quibusdam speciebus loculi omnes ocellulati apparent, ocellis

rhombeis, subrotundis vel ellipticis, in singulis loculis ut pluri-

mum singulis. Thallus varius, in corticolis hypophloeodes.

Hypothallus modo obsoletus, modo distinctus, ater.

Cohors I.

Epithecio brevi vel dimidiato ; paraphysibus nullis vel obsoletis;

ascis elongato-clavatis, ventricosis, inflatis, octosporis; sporis

in duplicem triplamve seriem intra ascos distributis, tumi-

dulis, ellipsoideis obovatisve, eximie bombyciformibus, gran-

diusculis, quadrilocularibus, loculis binis intermediis rect-

angulari-tetragonis, extimis duobus ad formam coni, quorum

infimus vix non semper minor. (Species omnes ‘saxicolee,

hermaphrodite.)

1. V. pseudo-Dufourei, Garov. = V. pyrenophora, Leight. Ang.

Lich. p. 76; Exs. 189. V. papillosa, Leight. Ang. Lich. t. 24.

Verrucaria found in Lombardy. 107

f.1. V. Sprucei, Leight. Ang. Lich. t. 23. f. 4,5, 6; Heppe,

97, 98.

Subspecies 1. V. eryptarum, Garov. = Anzi, Lich. rar. Ven.

2. V. Zwackhu, Garov. = Heppe, 96, 437, 442, 443; Anzi,

Lich. rar. Ven. 186, 171.

Cohors II.

Epithecio vario, carbonaceo vel colorato; paraphysibus liberis,

distinctis, flexuosis, simplicibus vel subramosis, capillaribus

vel articulatis, perdurantibus ; ascis elongatis, linearibus, in-

feriora versus sensim attenuatis, passim clavato-obovatis, in

medio ventricosis vel circa basim saccato-gibbis, octosporis ;

sporis duplici triplave (jam ordinata, jam confusa) serie spi-

raliter intra ascos dispositis, angustato-ellipticis s. fusiformi-

bus, adultis quadrilocularibus, loculis ope septi tenuis cras-

sive evidenter sejunctis, duobus interpositis eylindrico-trun-

catis vel rectangulari-tetragonis, extimis subconicis. (Species

saxicolee vel corticolee, monoicz vel dioicz.)

A. Sazicole.

1. V. umbonata, Scher. = Scher. Exs. 285; Leight. Ang.

Lich. t. 24. f. 6, Exs. 82; Heppe, 696; Rabenh. 650.

2. V. Ricasolu, Garov. = Leight. Ang. Lich. t. 22. f. 1, 2,

t. 23. f.1; Heppe, 694, 695.

Subspecies V. macularis, Wallr. = Zw. Exs. 152, 153; Scher.

L. H. Exs. 523, 524; Leight. Ang. Lich. t. 25. f.3, Exs. 138 ;

Heppe, 693.

B. Corticole.

1. V. punctiformis, Fries, L. Europ. Ref. p. 447.

f. carpinea, Garov. = M. & N. 855; Scher. 525; Leight.

Ang. Lich. t. 18. f. 2, Exs. 99; Heppe, 459; Anzi, Lich, rar.

Ven. 139.

f. callopisma, Garov. = Mass. Lich. Ital. 350 4,8; Anzi, Lich.

rar. Longob. 222; Zw. Exs. 46.

f. rhyponta, Garov.=M. & N. 557; Scher. 591; Anzi, Lich.

rar. Ven. 121,122; Mass. Ital. 255.

Subspecies V. erumpens, Garov.

2. V. cerasi, Schrad.=Scher. Exs.664; Zw. Exs. 106; Leight.

Ang. Lich. p.41; Mass. Ital. 106; Anzi, Lich. rar. Ven. 130 ;

Heppe, 457.

108 Prof. Santo Garovaglio on the Species of

Cohors III.

Epithecio tenui, dimidiato, carbonaceo; paraphysibus raro dis-

tinctis, plerumque obsoletis, vel in massam granuloso-floc-

cosam cito diffluxis; ascis clavato-elongatis sublinearibusve,

octosporis ; sporis duplici sat regulari serie intra ascos col-

lectis, gracillimis, fusiformi- acicularibus, vel angustato-ellip-

ticis, incurvis, primum unilocularibus, tribus vel quatuor

ocellis rotundis minutis preeditis, dein bilocularibus cum

loculis elongato-cylindricis acuminatis, postremum quadri-

locularibus cum vel absque ocellis. (Species unica, corticola.)

1. V. oxyspora, Nyl.=Zw. Exs. 107; Rabenh. 117; Heppe,

460; Mass. Ital. 352.

Cohors IV.

Epithecio carbonaceo, crasso, subintegro, cum tunica arcte laxeve

conjuncto; paraphysibus creberrimis, gracilibus, filiformibus,

flexuosis, interdum in frustula fatiscentia solutis; ascis elon-

gatis, cylindricis, vel linearibus, circa basim attenuatis, octo-

sporis; sporis plerumque in una rectilinea serie ad invicem

verticaliter aut oblique sibi succedentibus, rarius duplici con-

fuso ordine congregatis, ovoideo-ellipticis, obtusiusculis (s.

cocciformibus), quandoque torulosis, ceeterum coloratis s.

fulvis vel fuliginosis, quadrilocularibus, passim bi- triloculari-

bus, loculis septo tenuissimo, szepe obsoleto, divisis, duobus

interpositis prismatico-tetragonis, binis extimis obtuse co-

nicis, omnibus ocellulatis, ocellis in singulis vel pluribus,

rhombeis, subrotundis vel ellipticis. (Species omnes corticole,

monoice vel dioicze.)

1. V. nitida, Schrad. = Borrer, E. Bot. Suppl. t. 2607. f. 1;

Leight. Ang. Lich. t. 15. f.3; M.& N. 365 as.

f. major=Scher. Exs. 111; Heppe, 467.

f. minor = Leight. Exs. 28; Heppe, 468.

2. V. glabrata, Ach.=Scher. Exs.110; M.& N. 950; Zw.

Exs. 34, 85; Leight. Ang. Lich. t.18.f. 4; Heppe, 227.

f. coryli, Nyl.=Rabenh. 85; Heppe, 455.

Appendix.

V. quercus, Garov.=Scher. Exs. 105; Zw. Exs. 33, 215.

The plates contain sections of the apothecia, asci, and spori-

dia :—

Verrucarie uniloculares.

Tab. I. fig. 1. V. aberrans, Gar. 2. V.hydrela, Ach. 3. V. ethio-

bola, Ach. 4. *V. submersa, Scher. 5. V. plumbea, Ach.

Verrucaria found in Lombardy. 109

6. V. glaucina, Fries. 7. *V.collematoides, Gar. 8. V. nigres-

cens, Pers. 9. *V. nigrescens, Pers., var. stenospora, Gar.

Tab. II. fig. 1. V. macrostoma, Duf. 2. V. tristis, Krmphbr.

3. V. Dufourei, DC. 4. V. epipolea, Ach., var. orbicularis, Gar.

D. FV. epipolea, Ach., var. muralis, Gar. 6. V. macrostoma, Duf.,

var. imbricum, Gar. 7. V. epipolea, Ach., var. lurida, Gar.

8. V. epipolea, Ach., var. murina, Gar.

Tab. IIT. fig. 1. V. decussata, Gar. 2. V. epipolea, Ach., var. rupes-

tris, Gar. 3. V. epipolea, Ach., var. major, Gar. 4. V. papu-

laris, Fries, var. neglecta, Gar. 5. V. papularis, Fries, var. platy-

spora, Gar. 6. V. papularis, Fries, var. subtestacea, Gar. 7. V.

purpurascens, Hoffm. 8. V. calciseda, DC.

Verrucaria biloculares.

Tab. IV. fig. 1. V7. olivacea, Fries. 2. V. Ungeri, Flot. 3. V. he-

terospora, Gar. 4. V, pertusatii, Gar. 5. V. conoidea, Fries,

var. vulgaris. 6. V. conoidea, Fries, var. subsquamacea.

Tab. V. fig. 1. V. gemmata, Ach. 2. V. biformis, Borr. 3. V. con-

fusa, Gar. 4. V. epidermidis, Gar., var. analepta-spectabilis.

5. V. epidermidis, Gar., var. cinereo-pruinosa. 6. V. epidermidis,

Gar., var. lauri. 7. V. epidermidis, Gar.; var. fraxini. 8. V.

epidermidis, Gar., var. analepta-vulgaris. 9. V. epidermidis, Gar.,

var. analepta-betule. 10. V. Heppii, Naeg., var. Juglandis, Gar.

Verrucarte quadriloculares.

Tab. VI. fig. 1. V. pseudo-Dufourei, Gar., var. verrucosa. 2. V.

pseudo- Dufouret, Gar., var. feracissima. 2*. V. pseudo-Dufourei,

Gar., var. crassiseda. 2**. V. pseudo-Dufourei, Gar., var. con-

spurcata. 3. V. cryptarum, Gar., var. intumescens. 4. V. cryp-

tarum, Gar., var. hiascens. 5. V. cryptarum, Gar., var. asperata.

6. V. eryptarum, Gar., var. detersa. 7. V. Zwackhii, Gar.

8. V. umbonata, Scher. 9. V. Ricasolii, Gar. 10. V. macularis,

Wallr.

Tab. VII. fig. 1. V. nitida, Schrad., var. major, Gar. 2, 2*. V.

nitida, Schrad., var. minor, Gar. 3. V. glabrata, Ach. 4. V.

punctiformis, Gar., var. callopisma*. 5. V. punctiformis, Gar.,

var. carpinea*. 6. V. punctiformis, Gar., var. callopisma**,

7. V. *erumpens, Gar. 8. V. Heppii, Gar., forma. 9. V. punc-

tiformis, Gar., var. rhyponta. 10. V. punctiformis, Gar., var.

carpinea**, 11. V. cerasi, Schrad.

Tab. Suppl. I. fig. 1. VY. Anziana, Gar. (unilocular). 2. V. cinereo-

rufa, Schrad. (unilocular). 3. V. Hochstetteri, Fr. (unilocular).

4. V. scrobicularis, Gar. (bilocular). 5. V. micula, Fitw. (bi-

locular). 6. V. oxryspora, Nyl. (quadrilocular). 7. V. quercus,

Gar. (4-5-6-locular).

110 Dr. A. Gunther on new Fishes

XV.—New Fishes from the Gaboon and Gold Coast.

By A. Gunruer, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.

[Plates II. & III.]

A most valuable collection of Fishes made by Mr. R. B.N. Walker

in the Gaboon country has been recently secured by the Trustees

of the British Museum. Besides several species which were

formerly desiderata in this collection, the following prove to be

new and of great interest, partly because some of them are the

types of distinct groups, and partly because others prove that

the Fish-fauna of the Upper Nile is nothing but the most eastern

branch of that of Tropical West Africa. Repeatedly on former

occasions I have directed attention to the identity of these two

faunas ; and we may safely conclude that there is an uninterrupted

continuity of the fish-fauna from west to east, and that the species

known to be common to both extremities inhabit also the great

reservoirs of water in the centre of the African continent.

Mr. Walker had sent other collections to the Free Public

Museum of Liverpool; and Mr. Moore was kind enough to lend

them to me for examination, adding another very valuable col-

lection made by H.T. Ussher, Esq., Deputy Assistant Commissary-

General, Lagos, on the Bossumprah River, Gold Coast. The

latter gentleman had previously sent a small collection to the

British Museum from the same locality.

The Cyprinoids are not mentioned in this paper, as their

descriptions will be found in the forthcoming seventh volume of

the ‘ Catalogue of Fishes.’

Ctenopoma Petherici (Gthr.).

Dorsal spines sixteen, seventeen, or eighteen, anal spines nine

or ten. This species, first discovered by Mr. Petherick in the

White Nile, occurs also in the Gaboon.

Ctenopoma multispine (Ptrs.).

This species was first described from Kast-African specimens

with seventeen dorsal and ten anal spines. An example from

the Gaboon, with twenty dorsal and eleven anal spines, agrees

in every other respect with the East-African type, and must be

regarded as a variety only.

Mastacembelus cryptacanthus (Gthr.).

The number of dorsal spmes varies between twenty-four and

thirty. A fine example, 16 inches long, has been sent to the

Liverpool Museum, from the Bossumprah River, by Mr. Ussher.

Hemichromis fasciatus (Ptrs.).

Guinea, Lagos (Mr. Ussher), Gaboon (Mr. Walker).

from the Gaboon and Gold Coast. ti)

Clarias Gabonensis, sp. n. -

D. 76-78. A. 56-60.

Vomerine teeth villiform, forming a. band which is about as

broad as that of the intermaxillaries ; it has not a process behind

in the middle of its concavity. Head finely granulated above,

its length being one-fourth of the total (without caudal). Bar-

bels long; those of the nostril extend to the base of the occi-

pital process, those of the maxillary beyond the origin of the

dorsal. The pectoral fin extends to, or somewhat beyond, the

vertical from the origin of the dorsal ; its spine is at least three-

fourths as long as the fin. The dorsal extends to the root of

the caudal. Snout somewhat narrowed in front.

River Ogome (Mr. Walker). 7 inches long.

This species may prove to be identical with Clarias angolensis

of Dr. Steindachner, who, however, has omitted to give the

formula of the fin-rays, so that it is impossible to determine

our specimens from his description.

Heterobranchus isopterus (Blkr.).

Bossumprah River (Mr. Ussher).

GyMNALLABES, g.n. (Silur.).

(Group Crarimna.) Adipose fin none; dorsal and anal fins

very long (confluent with the caudal*). Jaws with a band of

villiform teeth ; a crescent-shaped band of similar teeth across

the vomer; cleft of the mouth transverse, anterior, of moderate

width; eight barbels, as mm Clarias. Kyes very small. Head

covered entively with soft skin, the lateral parts especially mus-

cular and soft. The postbranchial cavity is present; but the

accessory organ is reduced to a simple securiform process of the

second and third arches. Pectoral and ventral fins very small,

the former with a pungent spine, the latter five-rayed.

Gymnallabes typus, sp.n. Plate II. fig. A.

Di ca 98. A-caiB2. ©. 12:

The height of the body is one-sixteenth or one-fifteenth of

the total length (without caudal), the length of the head one-

ninth or one-tenth. Head much depressed, flat, swollen on the

temples, two-thirds as broad as long. Nasal and outer mandi-

bulary barbels not quite as long as those of the maxillary; the

latter are longer, and the inner of the mandible shorter, than

the head. Uniform brownish black.

West Africa, probably Old Calabar. 7 inches long.

* This is perhaps merely a specific character, as in Clarias.

E12 Dr. A. Giinther on new Fishes

Eutropius mandibularis, sp. n.

Do /6 Rae SOS ee /10:

The height of the body is contained thrice and three-fourths

in the total length (without caudal), the length of the head five

times. The greatest width of the head equals its length without

snout. The upper jaw is slightly the longer; cleft of the mouth

twiee as broad as deep. Anterior mandibulary barbels short ;

maxillary, nasal, and posterior mandibulary barbels subequal in

length, not extending to the base of the pectoral, but beyond

the orbit. The diameter of the eye is two-ninths of the length

of the head. The dorsal fin is situated entirely before the

ventral, the width of its base being more than tbat of the latter;

its height equals the length of the head; spine slender, serrated

posteriorly. The anal fin terminates at some distance from the

caudal. Caudal deeply forked, with the lobes pointed. Pec-

toral spine rather broad, serrated, terminating at some distance

from the ventral.

A single specimen, 9 inches long, was sent by Mr. Ussher

from the Bossumprah River to the Liverpool Museum.

Chrysichthys macrops (Gtky.).

Upper Nile, Gaboon, Bossumprah River (Gold Coast).

Synodontis guttatus (Gthr.).

Gaboon, Lake Aznigo.

Malapterurus affinis (Gthr.).

Old Calabar, Gaboon.

NANNOCHARAX, g. 0. (Characin.).

Dorsal fin short, placed in the middle of the body, above the

ventrals; anal short. Body elongate, covered with scales of

moderate size; belly rounded. Cleft of the mouth very small,

similar to that of a Coregonus ; intermaxillary and mandible with

a single series of notched incisors. Nostrils close together.

Gill-openings rather narrow, the gill-membrane being grown to

the isthmus.

This genus 1s the type of a separate group, NANNOCHARACINA,

intermediate between Anostomatina and Tetragonopterina.

Nannocharax fasciatus, sp.n. Plate III. fig. A.

D.12. A.10. V.10. L.lat.46. L. transv. 43/44.

The height of the body is contained six times in the total

length (without caudal), the length of the head four times and

one-third. Kye large, the length of its diameter being less than

from the Gaboon and Gold Coast. 113

one-third of that of the head, and more than that of the snout

or the width of the interorbital space. Head low, elongate, flat

above ; snout subconical, the upper Jaw somewhat longer than

the lower. Ventral fin below the anterior dorsal rays, long,

pointed; the third ray is the longest, extending to the vent.

The distance of the origin of the dorsal fin from the end of the

snout is somewhat more than that from the adipose fin. Back

with seven rhombic brown spots, lighter in the centre ; sides with

about ten brown cross bars broader than the interspaces between.

Gaboon. 2 inches long.

This discovery of Mr. Walker is of the greatest interest, not

only because the fish is the type of a distinct group of the family

of Characinide, but also because it throws light upon the fish

from the Nile which was deseribed by Joannis in Guérin’s Mag.

Zool. 1835 (Gtnth. Fish. v. p. 379) as Coregonus niloticus, and

which has ever since been a riddle to ichthyologists. There can-

not be the slightest doubt of the affinity of these two fishes,

although Joannis (who had no experience whatever in the de-

scription of fishes) states that his fish is toothless. The affinity

between the two fishes is so great that the differences which at

present appear on comparing the descriptions may prove to be

accidental, and the Nannocharax niloticus to be identical with the

West-African species.

The figure is double the natural size.

Alestes macrophthalmus, sp. vn.

DIO Ac els Ulatso9 4. otransyer lle

Closely allied to A. sethente, but with larger scales. The

height of the body equals the length of the head, and is two-

ninths of the total length (without caudal). Kye very large,

scarcely less than one-third of the length of the head, with broad

adipose eyelids. The origin of the dorsal fin is exactly oppo-

site to that of the ventral. Pectoral not much shorter than the

head. Silvery, a blackish stripe along each series of scales ;

pectoral blackish.

Gaboon. 11 inches long.

Alestes teniurus, sp. 1.

D.10. A.19. L. lat. 23. L. transv. 43/34.

Closely allied to A. acutidens, but with the body more elevated,

its depth being more than one-third of the total length (without

caudal). The origin of the dorsal fin is a little behind the base

of the ventral. A narrow deep-black band runs along the middle

of the tail and caudal fin, commencing below the end of the

dorsal fin.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 8

114 Dr. A. Giinther on new Fishes

Gaboon. 5 inches long.

I do not retain the genus Brachyalestes, as the last two species

would be separated from those most nearly allied to them by the

technical character on which that genus was founded.

Alestes leuciscus, sp. 1.

D.10..A.17. LU. lat. 26-27. LL. transv. 54/34.

The height of the body is contained thrice and one-fourth in

the total length (without caudal), the length of the head thrice

and two-thirds. The origin of the dorsal fin is exactly opposite

that of the ventrals. The pectoral terminates close to the ven-

tral. Bright silvery, with a very indistinct dark humeral spot

and a second at the root of the caudal. Ins golden.

Two specimens, 24 inches long, from West Africa; purchased

of a dealer.

Sarcodaces odoé (Bl.).

Bossumprah River (Mr. Ussher). This fish has fifty scales in

the lateral line, and not sixty, as stated in ‘ Fish.’ y. p. 852.

XENOCHARAX, g. n. (Characin).

(Group Crenucuina.) Dorsal fin rather long, placed in the

middle of the length of the body, above the ventrals. Anal not

elongate. Body compressed, rather elevated, covered with rather

small scales ; lateral line present; belly rounded. Cleft of the

mouth rather wide. Intermaxillary and mandible with a double

or treble series of small bicuspid teeth; a few teeth in the

maxillary. Nostrils close together. Gull-openings wide; the

gill-membranes not attached to the isthmus. Gill-rakers long,

setiform.

Xenocharax spilurus, sp.n. Plate II. fig. B.

Dis) TALIS 2 VAT. late 73.5 aattransyetOyilos

The height of the body is contained twice and two-thirds in

the total length (without caudal), the length of the head thrice

and one-fourth. Jaws equal in length; the maxillary extends

to below the front margin of the large eye. Root of the ventral

below the middle of the dorsal. Silvery; body with about four-

teen narrow blackish transverse bands. A large round black

spot on the root of the caudal.

Gaboon. 4 inches long.

Distichodus notospilus, sp. un.

D.16-17. A.15-16. L.lat.39. L. transv. 7/9.

The height of the body is two-fifths of the total length (with-

from the Gaboon and Gold Coast. — 115

out caudal), the length of the head one-fourth ; snout a little

longer than broad, with the nose slightly protruding. Teeth in

a double series, the lower jaw with sixteen teeth im the front

series. Body silvery, caudal and lower fins red; a large, oblique,

band-like black blotch on the dorsal; a small black spot on the

root of the caudal.

Gaboon. Frofn 3 to 5 inches long.

Mormyrus zanclirostris, sp.n. Pl. II. fig. B.

DO AS o. li lato 70:

Snout much prolonged, tubiform, straight. Lower jaw with-

out appendage; eye rather nearer to the end of the snout than

to that of the opercle, very small. Teeth small, compressed,

incisor-like, =. Pectorals much longer than ventrals, but ter-

minating at a great distance from the base of the ventrals.

Caudal very small. Origin of the dorsal fin opposite to the

thirteenth anal ray. The height of the body is one-seventh of

the total length (without caudal), the length of the head rather

more than one-fourth. Brown; an ill-defined band along the

lateral line, and the tail of a darker colour.

Gaboon. 10 inches long.

The figure is two-thirds the natural size.

Mormyrus microcephalus, sp. n.

D. 15-16. A.28-381. L. lat. 62.

Snout obtuse, very short, twice as long as the eye, the dia-

meter of which is about one-seventh or one-eighth of the length

of the head. Mouth subanterior. Teeth brown, emarginate,

small, ®. The height of the body is two-elevenths of the total

length (without caudal), the length of the head one-sixth. Pec-

toral nearly as long as the head, extending beyond the root

of the ventral. Caudal fin small. Brown; head and fins

black.

Gaboon (River Ogome). 7 inches long. Evidently allied to

Marcusenius brachyistius (Gall).

Mormyrus Henryt.

Isichthys Henryi (Gill).

This is not a Mormyrops as I formerly supposed; it has an

elongate band of teeth on the palate and tongue. Our specimen

has D.48. A. 46, and is from West Africa, probably Old

Calabar.

116 _ Dr. A. Giinther on new Fishes.

Mormyrus Mooru, sp. n.

D: 24. A.29. DL. lat-45. 1. transv: 22%

ca 7

Snout obtuse, with the jaws equal in length, the mouth being

terminal. Eye small, its diameter being one-half of the length

of the snout, and one-eighth of that of the head. Teeth small,

deeply notched, . Pectoral fin not much shorter than the head,

extending somewhat beyond the middle of the ventral fin. The

height of the body is contained thrice and four-fifths in the

total length (without caudal), the length of the head nearly five

times. Brown; head and a small spot on the root of the caudal

fin black.

One specimen, 9 inches long, is in the Liverpool Museum ;

it was discovered by Mr. Walker in the River Ogome.

Mormyrus Ussheri, sp. n.

1D. 27-28. A.30. 1. lat.58. 1. transv. =

ca 10°

Snout not very obtuse, with the lower jaw somewhat promi-

nent, and terminating in a very short skinny flap. , Eye small,

its diameter being two-fifths of the length of the snout, and

two-thirteenths of that of the head. Teeth small, slightly

notched, 5. Pectoral fin at least as long as the head, extending

beyond the middle of the ventral fin. The height of the body

is contained thrice and a half in the total length (without

caudal), the length of the head four times and two-thirds.

Uniform brown.

Two specimens, from 7 to 9 inches long, were collected by

H. 'T. Ussher Esq., in the Bossumprah River, Gold Coast.

Mormyrus catostoma (Gthr.).

This species was described from Kast-African specimens. An

example with twenty-nine anal rays, from the Bossumprah River,

has been sent by Mr. Ussher to the Liverpool Museum.

Mormyrus Walkeri, sp.n. Plate III. fig. C.

D. 21. A. 22-28. I. lat. 55.

Allied to M. niger.

Snout obtuse, convex, not projecting beyond the mouth,

which is terminal. Eye small, its diameter being shorter

than the length of the snout. Teeth deeply notched, =. Pee-

toral fin as long as the head withont snout, not quite twice

as long as, and extending beyond the root of, the ventral. The

* Tn an oblique line between the origins of the dorsal and anal fins.

Dr. A. Giinther on a new Species of Apocryptes. ily

height of the body is two-sevenths of the total length (without

caudal), the length of the head one-fourth. Uniform brown.

River Ogome (Gaboon). 4 inches long.

Mormyrops longiceps, sp. n.

De26) "AL 39) Trlats90)

Head very low and elongate, more than twice as long as high.

Snout subcylindrical, of moderate length, rounded in front,

with the upper jaw somewhat longer than the lower. Eye very

small, situated in the anterior third of the head. Teeth not very

small, truncated and notched at the apex, 3+. Dorsal fin more

than half as long as the anal. The height of the body is one-

seventh of the total length (without caudal), the length of the

head a little less than one-fourth. Coloration uniform.

This species is more closely allied to WM. anguilloides from the

Nile than to M. deliciosus from West Africa; it differs from the

former in the shape of its head. It was discovered by H. T.

Ussher, Esq., in the Bossumprah River. One specimen,

1] inches long, is in the Liverpool Museum.

XVI.—Deseription of a new Species of Apocryptes.

By Dr. ALBert GintueEr.

Apocryptes polyophthalmus.

D.5-6| 5. A. 25.

Scales minute anteriorly, becoming somewhat larger poste-

riorly. The height of the body is one-sixth or one-seventh of

the total length (without caudal). Snout rather high, twice as

long as the eye, with the upper jaw somewhat longer than the

lower ; gape extending to below the posterior margin of the eye.

Eye retractile as in Periophthalmus. Teeth small, two anterior

pairs enlarged in each jaw; mandibulary teeth nearly horizontal.

Dorsal fins not continuous, the spmes of the anterior prolonged

into filaments. Caudal fin shorter than the head. Olive-

coloured ; head with some minute whitish dots. Anterior dorsal

with numerous small (in spirits white) ocelli. Similar ocelli on

the second dorsal, where they are elongate and arranged in four

regular series ; a few ocelli on the caudal fin.

China. 5 inches long.

118 Mr. J. F. Walker in reply to Mr. Seeley on the

XVII.—A Reply to Mr. H. G. Seeley’s Remarks on my Account

of the Phosphatic Deposit at Potton, in Bedfordshire. By

J. F. Wacker, B.A., F.C.P.S., F.C.S., F.G.8S., Sidney Sussex

College, Cambridge.

In April 1866 the Rev. P. B. Brodie wrote a paper on the phos-

phatic deposit near Potton, in Bedfordshire, and stated that the

fossils were derived from preexisting formations*. Having ob-

tained from this bed some additional fossils, especially remains

of Iguanodon, I wrote a short paper, supplementary to Mr.

Brodie’s, which was published in the Number of this Magazine

for July 1866. At this period the Woodwardian Museum con-

tained no fossils from this deposit ; but since then, through the

exertions of Mr. Keeping, who has the care of the Museum, it has

obtained a fine series of these fossils. In August of the same year

Mr. Seeley published a letter criticising the results arrived at

by Mr. Brodie and myself; but this fact does not appear from

his reference to that paper in the last Number of the ‘ Annals,’

in which he would seem to intend to represent himself as the

person attacked, instead of the aggressor, in this matter. Mr.

Seeley stated in his letter that all the fossils appeared to him to

be “denizens of the old sea-bed where they abound ;” and this

is the chief point on which our views do not coincide. Mr. Seeley

says that the only mistake in his paper is the statement that

“the Gryphea dilatata is perversely wanting.” But I am not

surprised that Mr. Seeley obtaimed no specimens of this fossil,

as the work-people did not save the ferruginous shells until I

told them to do sot. I will now consider Mr. Seeley’s criticisms

sertatim.

I. Mr. Seeley objects to this deposit being called the Lower

Greensand, and says :—‘ The Shanklin (or Lower Green) Sand,

as I understand it, is the series of beds between the Weald Clay

and the Gault. But these sands at Potton are between the

Gault and the Oxford Clay; and, so far as I remember, the

only fossil previously recorded from the beds in this district is

Ammonites biplex, mentioned in my paper on the Cretaceous

beds at Ely,—neither of which facts offers any presumptive

evidence of the deposit being Shanklin Sands.” Here is his

statement in the paper he refers to :—“ The lower part of the

Shanklin Sands is a conglomerate of small rounded pebbles,

which in the best place in the section is hardly more than four

feet thick ; and above this are some brown sands alternating

irregularly with thin courses of clay with phosphatic nodules ;

* Geological Magazine, vol. ii. p. 153.

+ This circumstance explains Mr. Brodie’s apparently erroneous asser-

tion that “every organism in this phosphatic bed is evidently extraneous,”

which was perfectly true with regard to the fossils obtainable when he wrote.

Phosphatie Deposit at Potton, in Bedfordshire. 119

and in places these deposits almost stand on end, through false

bedding. They are seven feet thick, and unfossiliferous, a good

deal resembling the beds below; but I cannot say they should

not be classed with the Gault. A rolled fragment or two of

Ammonites biplex is the only fossil I have found in the rock ; so

that it might be Portland Sands but that it is traced to Hunstan-

ton, where fossils are more numerous.” Mr. Seeley then pro-

ceeds to trace the bed to near Potton and Sandy. He evidently

at the time he published the above (December 1865) considered

the bed to be of the same age as I do, but has since altered his

opinion. I shall again have occasion to refer to the second

paragraph quoted above. I am not aware that Neithea quinque-

costata has ever been found in the Kimmeridge Clay at Wey-

mouth or elsewhere.

II. Mr. Seeley says, “ The term conglomerate applied to

this bed is calculated to mislead,” and gives a definition of what

he thinks a conglomerate ought to be. In the paragraph already

quoted Mr. Seeley applied this term to the same beds! I wished

to involve the idea he objects to, viz. the denudation of older beds.

III. I stated that, if Mr. Seeley’s views be correct, the term

Carstone is inapplicable to the bed. On the idea that the Car-

stone at Hunstanton represents the Gault and Lower Greensand,

he forms his remarkable hypothesis of the Significance of the

Sequence of Rocks*. He now restricts the term to the sands

of Yorkshire, Lincolnshire, and Norfolk, between the Hunstan-

ton Limestone and the Kimmeridge Clay, and says, “ But though

I abandon the term, I do not abandon the idea,” which idea he

proceeds to illustrate by a diagram, but does not attempt to

prove it; therefore I will not discuss the merits of it.

IV. I appear to have misunderstood Mr. Seeley’s remarkable

expression “the truth is, the ‘Sandy nodule bed,’ as this bed m

the Carstone may be called, reproduces earlier in time the con-

ditions of the Cambridge Greensand.” I am very sorry ; but it

may be due to the ambiguity of the sentence tending to mislead.

But I am still of opinion that two deposits so different in every

respect as the Cambridge Greensand and the sandy conglomerate

bed at Potton and elsewhere cannot have been accumulated

under similar conditions. Mr. Seeley by no means explains the

discrepancies between the two formations indicated in my former

paper+, nor does he bring forward a particle of evidence in

support of his assumption that both were formed upon a long

low shore.

V. Mr. Seeley ascribes to me the “notable discovery that by

soaking six or seven parts of alumina in decomposing animal

* Geological Magazine, vol. il. pp. 262-265.

+ Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. vol. xvii. p. 383.

120 Mr. J. F. Walker an reply to Mr. Seeley on the

' and vegetable matter till they increase to 100, you will produce

a nodule of phosphate of lime.’ In return I may congratulate

him on having made a still more “ notable discovery,” “namely,

that clay consists of pure alumina, which is evidently implied in

his interpretation of my statements. Mr. Seeley ought to be

aware that clay consists not of alumina, but of a silicate of alu-

mina; and also that clays like the Oxford and Kimmeridge

contain various other substances. Again, what Mr. Seeley

denominates “rolled concretions of tolerably pure phosphate of

lime ” do not, in the best average samples, contain more than

22°39 per cent. of phosphoric acid =48°51 per cent. of tricalcic

phosphate, supposing it all combined with calcium (see ana

given in Mr. Brodie’s paper). I hope at some future period to

demonstrate the origin of these nodules by chemical analysis.

The indication of the comparatively small amount of pure alu-

mina contained in clays may serve to a certain extent to remove

Mr. Seeley’s difficulty as to what “ becomes of the clay ;” and |

may also remind him that, on his part, he has not told us

whence the alumima undoubtedly contained in the nodules is

derived. To Mr. Seeley’s objection to the word “soaked” I

can only reply that I used it to indicate my belief that the clay

derived from the sea-cliffs, formed of older beds, encloses and is

saturated with animal and vegetable matter.

VI. Mr. Seeley repeats, “ with diffidence, on account of the

state of the specimens,” that he gathered no extraneous fossils

from the bed. It is ‘‘on account of the state of the specimens”

that I regard them as derived from the denudation of older

formations. The condition of the bones and teeth of reptiles

and fishes shows that they have been rolled, and, moreover, rolled

after fossilization.

VII. & VIII. Mr. Seeley complains that I did not take the

trouble to get the phosphatic casts of the shells named; but he

cautiously omits to give a list of those which he has determined

to be Portland species; he also omits a list of the ferruginous

shells. I gave a list of all I had obtained, when my paper was

published, that were in a condition sufficiently perfect for deter-

mination.

IX. I am flattered by Mr. Seeley’s remark that my list of

Mollusca has ‘‘ some approach to correctness.” I am sorry that

he does not add the “ some few others ” to his remarkable state-

ment about the species of Terebratule. With regard to the

fossil I have named Ostrea macroptera, he makes the following

curious statement :—‘ Although this is the name used by me

for this fossil, as a variety of the O. frons of Parkinson, it is a

form limited, so far as I know, to the Portland Rock—very

unlike Sowerby’s typical O. macroptera”’ Why does Mr. Seeley

Phosphatie Deposit at Potton, in Bedfordshire. 121

call this fossil by a name which he knows to be the wrong one?

On referring to Prof. Morris’s catalogue, I find that O. macro-

ptera occurs in the Gault of Oxfordshire, in the Lower Greensand

of Atherfield, and in the Greensand of Farringdon, where I

found specimens during a recent visit. Mr. Seeley next states

that he has seen no such shells as Exogyra conica &c., adding,

“though I have long had other species of those genera in the

Woodwardian Museum.”’ He ought to have given a list of the

specimens, which I presume, from his statement, have been

presented by him to the University Collection.

X. With regard to this paragraph I can only say that, m my

paper read before the British Association, I distinctly mentioned

that fishes from the Kimmeridge Clay at Ely, specifically iden-

tical with those from Potton, were exhibited m the Woodwardian

Museum, and that I think the rolled condition of the Potton

specimens is a sufficient “reason for thinking them other than

tenants of the sea of the time.” I must confess that 1 am at a

loss to understand the purpose of Mr. Seeley’s reference to the

existence of named specimens of these fishes in the University

Museum, unless he considers that no one has a right to consult

a public museum without acknowledging each occasion on which

he may have derived information from it. As regards the spe-

cimens referred to in my paper, I had many of them in my

possession and had determined them before any fossils from

Potton were exhibited or, so far as I know, contained in the

Woodwardian Museum.

XI. I will not be behind Mr. Seeley in confessing what I dare

not call the only mistake in my paper. There occur in this bed

rolled fragments of a rock composed almost entirely of shells ;

the specimens found were very much decomposed, and presented

precisely the aspect of fragments of the Cyrena-bed. Since

then, more boulders of this rock have been found, in a better

state of preservation. On breaking these, I also have found

specimens of Cardium ; therefore I will admit that the specimens

I mentioned in my paper probably contain the same shells.

But I think that there is sufficient evidence of the denudation

of the Wealden in the occurrence of the rolled bones of [guano-

don &e., and in the rolled fruits and wood. The wood exists

in two different states of mineralization, as I remarked in my

paper. Mr, Seeley states that he has shown in his paper “ that

the material of the deposit came from the east.” I suppose he

refers to one of his unpublished papers.

XII. The species described by me as Sphera Sedgwickii, if

not a Sphera, is probably the type of a new genus ; if, however,

it should hereafter be proved to be a Cyprina, I have no doubt

that it will be found to differ considerably from C. angulata,Sow.,

122 Dr. P. L. Selater on the Species of the Genus Tribonyx.

of which species Mr. Seeley says it is only a variety. Pholas

Dallasii (nibi) appears to me to be nearly allied to D’Orbigny’s

P. Cornueliana ; and both will, of course, take their place in the

subgenus Pholadidea, as indicated by Mr. Seeley.

Finally, Mr. Seeley says: “ The age of the beds is a difficult

problem, and not one that can be solved by an appeal to fossils,

or mineral character, or superposition.” Unfortunately, Mr.

Seeley does not inform us how the problem is to be solved,

unless he wishes us to receive his hypotheses without requiring

any proof. If I am honoured by a reply to my remarks, I may

remind Mr. Seeley that, although the opinion of an eminent

geologist must have great weight, yet it is by no means weakened

by an appeal to facts, and that it is hardly fair to adduce in

support of his arguments results said to be detailed in a book

still unpublished, or in papers which have not yet appeared in

print *,

XVIII.— Note on the Species of the Genus Tribonyx. By P. L.

Scrater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Zoological

Society of London.

In endeavouring to ascertain the correct scientific name of a

fine specimen of a Ralioid bird of the genus Tribonya, from

Western Australia, which has lately been added to the Society’s

Collection, I have discovered that there seems to have been some

little confusion between two of the species of this genus, which

I take the opportunity of setting ght.

Upon turning to Mr. Gould’s ‘ Birds of Australia,’ to which one

naturally refers for the determination of an Australian bird, it

is at once apparent that the Society’s specimen is not the bird

figured there as Tribonyx Mortiert, being distinguishable by its

larger size and the distinct white stripes on the wings, although

otherwise much resembling it. But, in his original description

of Tribonyx Mortieri, Du Bus most clearly describes these

* Several examples of this citation of unpublished materials occur in

Mr. Seeley’s paper. I may refer more particularly to that which, as he

says, was read on May 27th, 1867, before the Cambridge Philosophical

Society, on a deposit near Upware. I was present on that occasion, and

heard Mr. Seeley’s remarks, with many of which, however, I could not

concur, as I stated at the time. Mr. Seeley’s so-called paper consisted

apparently of an extempore exposition of his views. No list of fossils was

given by him; and the whole paper was quite unworthy of an attempt to

revolutionize the geological classification of the Upper Jurassic and Lower

Cretaceous beds, in support of which it is cited in the last Number of the

‘Annals.’ I had already communicated (May 7th, 1867) a short paper on

the Upware deposit to the Yorkshire Philosophical Society : this is printed

in the ‘ Geological Magazine’ for July.

Prof. J. V. Barboza du Bocage on Hyalonema lusitanicum. 123

spots*, although they are very faintly represented in the figure

attached. It is the same in the case of Lafresnaye’s descrip-

tion of his Brachyptrallus ralloides, which is to be referred to

the stripe-winged species. It becomes evident, therefore, that

Mr. Gould has been in error in referring the smaller Tasmanian

bird to Tribonyx Mortieri ; and I propose to call it Tribonyx

Gouldi, after its discoverer. We may then distinguish the three

species (two of which are now living in the Society’s collection,

where also the third was exhibited alive a few years since) as

follows :—

1. Tribonyx Mortiert.

Tribonyx Mortieri, Du Bus, Bull. Ac. Brux. vii. p. 215 (cum fig.).

Brachyptrallus ralloides, Lafr. Rev. Zool. 1840, p. 232.

Diagn. Major ; alis albo striatis ; plaga magna hypochondriali

alba.

Hab. Western Australia.

In vivario Soc. Zool. Londin. Specimen unicum !

2. Tribonyx Gouldi.

Tribonyx Mortieri, Gould, Birds of Austr. vi. pl.71; ejusd. Handb. it. p. 324.

Diagn. Medius; alis immaculatis; plaga magna hypochon-

driali alba.

Hab. Tasmania.

Nuper in vivario Soc. Zool. Londin.

3. Tribonyx ventralis.

Gallinula ventralis, Gould, Proc. Zool. Soe. 1836, p. 85.

Tribonyx ventralis, Gould, Birds of Austr. vi. pl. 72; Handb. to Birds of

Austr. il. p. 325.

Diagn. Minor ; alis immaculatis; hypochondriis nigris, albo

guttatis.

Hab. New South Wales, Southern Australia, Victoria and

Western Australia (Gould).

In vivario Soc. Zool. Londin.

XIX.—On Hyalonema lusitanicum. By J. V. Barsoza pu

BocaGe.

Letters addressed to Dr. J. E. Gray.

My pear SiR, Lisbon, May 25, 1867.

On my return from a journey of a few weeks to our northern

provinces I have just received three of your letters, the last of

* “ Tectricibus alarum mediis et minoribus cinereo-olivaceis, albo termi-

natis, et longitrorsum in medio striatis.”,—Du Bus.

124 Prof. J. V. Barboza du Bocage on Hyalonema lusitanicum.

which informs me that the specimen of Hyalonema sent to M.

Ehrenberg has already returned into your possession.

At the same time with your letter, I have received another

from Professor Ehrenberg. He persists in believing me the

victim of a mystification, and in regarding the Hyalonemas as

artificial products manufactured by the Japanese. I will here

transcribe for you a portion of his letter, in order that you may

judge of the arguments upon which he supports his opinion. It

is Professor Ehrenberg who speaks :—

“T am convinced that the officer of customs who procured you

these specimens has been deceived by some dealer in objects

of natural history, or by travellers coming from Japan, and who

have invented the fishery of these bodies near Setubal. It has

been possible to place beyond doubt the presence of cotton threads

for the attachment of the different pieces; there are also on the

surface fibres of wool coloured red and green, certainly belonging

to some old sailor’s garment. The resemblance of this specimen

to one of Brandt’s figures is so striking, that it is impossible for

me to believe that bodies so alike im all their parts can occur

both in the Sea of Japan and in that of Portugal, or that these

forms could be constructed in a manner so identical in the midst

of circumstances so widely separated.”

Such are the arguments which lead Professor Ehrenberg to

maintain:—1l. That the Hyalonemas are artificial products.

2. That the specimens that I possess have been manufactured in

and brought from Japan. 38. That they have been sold to my

correspondents by natural-history dealers (who do not exist in

Portugal), or by sailors returning from Japan to Setubal, which

has never, in the memory of man, seen a ship from China or

Japan enter its little port!

I have just replied to M. Ehrenberg:—1. That the seven

specimens which I possess have been sent to me from Setubal by

three persons, all belonging to the well-to-do classes of society,

and all well known as perfectly honourable. 2. That these per-

sons have received the Hyalonemas at different periods (1863,

1864, and 1865) from well-known fishermen, who brought them

precisely in the season of the shark-fishery. 38. That these

fishermen had no interest in deceiving, as they could not know

the scientific interest of these captures. 4. That these fisher-

men were always contented with a very modest gratuity (two or

three francs) as a remuneration for having brought them. 5. That

if the fishermen had the intention of demanding a higher price,

instead of announcing them as derived from our coasts, they

would not have failed to say that they had bought them from

strangers, that this had cost them very dear, &c. Here, as

everywhere, exotic products generally pay much better.

Prof. J. V. Barboza du Bocage on Hyalonema lusitanicum, 125

This is pretty nearly what I have replied to Professor Ehren-

berg; but I am sure that he will maintain his first notion. It

is his fixed idea.

There is, however, in what Professor Ehrenberg has written

to me a question of fact, which I beg you to verify and get veri-

fied. M. Ehrenberg asserts that he has been able to place be-

yond doubt the presence of cotton threads attaching the different

pieces of the Hyalonema. Now I beg you to examine with the

utmost care the specimens which you possess, and in which M.

Ehrenberg asserts that he has found this proof of artificial fabri-

cation, and be kind enough to communicate to me the result of

your examination.

For my part I have examined with scrupulous attention the

six specimens which [ possess; and not one of them presents

the least trace of cotton threads, or anything which would lead

one to believe in their artificial fabrication. The power of a

preconceived idea is such that it will make us see cotton threads

and signs of human fabrication in perfectly natural products in

which they do not exist !

The confidence with which M, Ehrenberg writes to me about

this throws me into the deepest astonishment. On my side

there is not the least question of self-love. I am disposed

to change my opinion in the presence of good arguments ;

but I cannot accept as such perfectly absurd hypotheses. I

have also just read, in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural

History? (March 1867), the article by M. Max Schultze. He

still believes in his sponge; but, although agreeing on this point

with Dr. Bowerbank, he does not admit that the polypes also

belong to the sponge. Quot capita, tot sententie.

Excuse me for having written you such a long letter, and

accept, &e.

J. V. Barsoza pu Bocacs.

My DEAR AND HONOURED CONFRERE, Lisbon, June 15, 1867.

Professor Ehrenberg’s incredulity with regard to the habitat

of Hyalonema lusitanicum has driven me to undertake a journey

to Setubal, in order to obtain all desirable particulars on the

spot. The following is a summary of the rigorous imquiry

which I have just carried out.

The Hyalonemas are well known not only to the shark-fishers

and the proprietors of fishing-boats, but also to several people of

good position in the town. They call them “ chicotes de mar,”

that is to say, “sea-whips.” It is since 1863 that the shark-

fishers have most frequently found Hyalonemas attached to their

fishing-apparatus ; nevertheless some persons remember having

126 Prof. J. V. Barboza du Bocage on Hyalonema lusitanicum.

seen, long before that period and at long intervals, some speci-

mens brought from the sea by an old padrone lately dead, called

Christovao da Penha.

It is not difficult to explain why the Hyalonemas, having been

extremely rare and almost unknown at Setubal until 1863, have

become more abundant since that period. We must in the first

place take into account the ignorance of the fishermen, who are

in the habit of throwing overboard everything that they think

useless ; but there is another important circumstance that has

strongly struck me. Formerly the sharks were more abun-

dant in our seas, and to find them the fishermen of Setubal

did not need to depart very far from the shore; but for some

years they have had to be sought at greater distances and at

greater depths; and it is precisely in these deeper seas and at

this greater distance from the coast that the Hyalonemas are

found. I must also add that, from information in which I have

perfect confidence, the above-mentioned fisherman (Christovao

da Penha) was, previous to 1863, perhaps the only one who was

in the habit of fishing in the seas at a distance from the shore

now frequented by all the fishermen; and this explains quite

naturally why this same fisherman was the only one to meet

with Hyalonemas in his tackle.

Since 1863 I have received from Setubal seven complete spe-

cimens of Hyalonema and a large packet of threads belonging to

three or four individuals, which makes a total of ten or eleven

individuals. Perhaps you would like to know the dates of these

acquisitions, the names of the persons from whom I received

them, and the names of the proprietors and padrones of boats

who captured them.

The first specimen (that which was described and figured by

me) was sent to me by M. Garnitto, superior officer of customs

at Setubal ; it was fished in June 1863 by the padrone Domingo

Correia.

In May 18641 received from M. Garnitto another individual,

which was given to him by José Vagueiro, proprietor of a boat,

the padrone of which is named Manuel de Souza.

In September of the same year, M. Brito, a landed proprietor

at Setubal, presented me with a magnificent specimen and with a

large packet of threads, which he had received from Manuel Pedro,

proprietor of a boat, the padrone of which is named José Correia.

Lastly, in September 1866, M. Cunha Freire, officer of cus-

toms at Setubal and collector of the fishery. dues, presented me

with four specimens taken together by the padrone Domingo

Correia, the same who brought to M. Garnitto the first specimen

of which he made me a present, in 1863. It is one of these

four specimens that is now in the British Museum.

Royal Society. 127

I profited by my short residence in Setubal to inquire whether

there were other specimens of Hyalonema im the possession of

any inhabitant of that town, and I had the good fortune to find

one in a good state of preservation, belonging to a proprietor of

fishing-boats, Antonio Avelino, who generously gave it to me.

This individual, which brings up to twelve the number of Hya-

lonemas observed by me, was fished in April of the present year,

by the padrone Manuel de Souza the younger,

After this exposition of the facts, the correctness of which I

guarantee, I hope there will no longer be any pretext for

doubting the habitat which I have assigned to Hyalonema lusi-

tanicum.

As to regarding the Hyalonemas as artificial products of the

industry of the Japanese, this is an hypothesis so destitute of

proof that it seems to me useless to discuss it here. I will only

renew the declaration which I have already made to you with

regard to the cotton thread which Professor Ehrenberg supposes

to exist twisted round the filaments beneath the corium poly-

pigerum. I maintain that this supposed thread does not exist

either in the specimen I have presented to the British Museum, or

in any of those in the Museum at Lisbon.

I authorize you to make what use you please of this letter, as

also of my preceding one.

Accept, &c.,

J. V. Barsoza pu Bocace.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

ROYAL SOCIETY.

May 2, 1867.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.

“On the Genera Heterophyllia, Battersbyia, Paleocyclus, and

Asterosmilia, and their Position in the Classification of the Sclero-

dermic Zoantharia.”” By Dr. P. M. Duncan, Sec. GS.

Although the practical and natural classification of the Madre-

poraria (Sclerodermic Zoantharia) which has been submitted by

MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime is very generally admitted to

be the best, still there are great gaps in the succession of the genera,

and, moreover, some genera cannot be placed.

The ‘‘ break”’ between the Turbinolides and the Astrzeides is so

great as to render the classification rather artificial ; but Dr. Duncan’s

discovery of a genus Asterosmilia, comprising several species, unites

these great divisions. The new genus has the peculiarities of the

Trochocyathi, but in addition it is furnished with an endotheca.

The species are described.

The genera Heteropiyllia, M°Coy, and Battersbyia, Milne-

128 Royal Society :—

Edwards and Jules Haime, are amongst those incerte sedis. The

discovery of several new species of Heterophyllia enables Dr. Duncan

to determine the anatomy of the genus, to offer for consideration the

most extraordinary coral form he has ever seen, and to ally the

genus with Battersbyia, which he proves had no ccenenchyma. The

species of both of the genera are described shortly, and the develop-

ment and reproduction of B. gemmans also. The genera are placed

amongst the Astreeidee.

The genus Paleocyclus, M.-E. & J. H., supposed to be one of

the Fungidee, is proved to be a vesiculo-tubulate coral genus, and to

be one of the Cyathophyllide.

One Mesozoic family is therefore removed from the Paleozoic coral-

fauna, and two genera of a Mesozoic division are introduced. They

foreshadow the Thecosmilie of the Trias.

“Contribution to the Anatomy of Hatteria (Rhynchocephalus,

Owen).” By Avsert Gintuer, M.A., Ph.D., M.D.

The skull of Hatteria is distinguished by the following charac-

ters :—

1. Persistence of the sutures, especially of those between the

lateral halves of the skull, combined with great development of its

ossified parts—a development which appears in the expanse of the

bones forming the upper surface of the facial portion, in the com-

pleteness of an orbital ring with a temporal and zygomatic bar

(Crocodilia), in the much expanded columella, in the nearly com-

pletely osseous bottom of the orbit, and roof of the palate.

2. Sutural union of the tympanic with the skull; firm and solid

union of the bones of the palate with the tympanic, as shown by the

sutural connexion of tympanic and pterygoid, broad sutural con-

nexion of the columella with tympanic and pterygoid, immoveable

pterygo-sphenoid joint, firm and extensive attachment of pterygoid

to ectopterygoid.

3. This restriction of the mobility of the bones named is com-

pensated by an increased and modified mobility of the lower jaw,

the mandibles being united by ligament, and provided with a much

elongated articular surface.

4, Displacement of the palatine bones, which are separated by the

pterygoids, and replace a palatal portion of the maxillaries.

5. Perforation of the tympanic; extremely short postarticular

process of the mandible.

The vertebral column and the remainder of the skeleton show the

following peculiarities :—

1. Vertebree amphiccelian ; caudal vertebre vertically divided into

two equal halves. Points of minor importance are the uniform

development of strong neural spines, and the direction of the caudal

pleurapophyses, which point forwards.

2. The costal hemapophyses are modified, first, into a series of

appendages identical in position with the uncinate processes of

birds; and, secondly, into a double terminal series connecting the

Dr. A. Giinther on the Anatomy of Hatteria. 129

ribs with the thoracic and abdominal sterna, the distal pieces being

much dilated and forming the base of a system of muscles (retractors

of the abdominal ribs).

3. The development of a system of abdominal ribs, standing in

intimate and functional relation to the ventral integuments.

4. Continuity of the ossification of the coracoid ; presence of an

ae tuberosity of the scapula; subvertical direction of the os

ilium.

5. The arrangement of the bones of the limbs and their muscles

does not show any deviation from the Lacertian type.

The dentition of Hatteria is unique. That of young examples

differs scarcely from the dentition of other acrodont lizards. In

adult examples the intermaxillaries are armed with a pair of large

cutting-teeth ; a part of the lateral teeth are lost ; and the alveolar

edges of the jaws are cutting and highly polished, performing the

function of teeth. A series of palatine teeth is in close proximity

and parallel to the maxillary series, both series receiving between

them in a groove the similarly serrated edge of the mandible.

As regards the organs of sense, the absence of the pecten of the

eye and of the tympanic cavity, the commencement of a spiral turn

of the cochlea, and the attachment of the hyoid bone to the terminal

cartilage of the stapes are to be noticed.

The structure of the heart and of the organs of respiration and

circulation are of the Lacertian type.

The absence of a copulatory organ is a character by which Hat-

teria is distinguished from all other Saurians. Thus Hatteria pre-

sents a strange combination of elements of high and low organiza-

tion, and must be regarded as the type of a distinct group. Its

affinities and systematic position may be indicated in the following

Synopsis of Recent Reptilia.

I. SQuaMATa.

First order. Ophidia.

Second order. Lacertilia.

Suborder A. Amphishenoidea.

Suborder B. Cionocrania.

Suborder C. Chameleonoidea.

Suborder D. Nyctisaura.

Third order. Rhynchocephalia.

II. Loricata.

Fourth order. Crocodilia.

III. CaTaAPHRACTA.

Fifth order. Chelonia.

May 9, 1867.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.

**On the Development and Succession of the Teeth in the Marsu-

pialia”’ By Witit1am Henry Fiower, F.R.S., F.R.C.S.

Although the dentition of adult individuals of all the animals which

constitute the remarkable Order or, rather, Subclass Marsupialia

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 9

130 Royal Society :—

has been repeatedly subjected to examination, and described with

exhaustive minuteness of detail, it is a singular circumstance that

most of those peculiarities in the succession of their teeth which

distinguish them from other mammals appear hitherto to have escaped

observation. To supply this blank is the object of the present com-

munication. Fortunately the materials at my disposal, although not

quite so complete as might be desired, are yet amply sufficient to

illustrate the main aspects of the question, and to supply a result

as interesting as it was unexpected.

Descriptions are given in the paper, accompanied by drawings, of

several stages of the dentition of members of each of the six natural

families into which the order is divided.

1. Macropodide.—tThe dentition of the Kangaroo (genus Macro-

pus), from the completely edentulous foetus to adult age, is described

in detail. Contrary to what has been specially stated with regard

to this genus, there are no deciduous or milk-incisors, the teeth of

this group which are first formed and calcified in both jaws being

those which are retained throughout the life of the animal. The

rudimentary canine and first premolar have also no deciduous pre-

decessors. The second tooth of the molar series (a true molar in form)

is vertically displaced by a premolar. The four true molars have, as

has long been known, no deciduous predecessors. There is thus but

one tooth on each side of each jaw in which the phenomenon of di-

phyodont succession occurs. ‘The period at which this takes place

varies in different species of the family. In some forms of Hypsi-

prymnus the successional premolar is not cut until after the last true

molar is in place and use,—this probably having relation to the ex-

traordinary size of the tooth, and the time consequently required for

its development.. A special characteristic of this family is the ten-

dency to lose the canine and one or both premolars at a compara-

tively early period of life.

2. Phalangistide.—Several early stages of the dentition of Pha-

langista vulpina are described and figured. In a young specimen in

which no teeth had cut the gum, the crowns of the permanent in-

cisors, canine, and first two molars were found to be calcified, and

the germ of the permanent premolar was already formed beneath the

milk- or deciduous molar, which, as in Macropus, is the only tooth

which is shed and replaced by a successor. The change takes place

at an earlier period than in the last family.

3. Peramelidea.—No very early stages of Perameles were examined;

but adolescent specimens of this genus and of Cheropus show that

a very minute, compressed, molariform tooth is replaced by the tri-

angular, pointed, third or posterior premolar. No other signs of

vertical displacement and succession were observed.

4. Didelphide.—In the American genus Didelphys, the observa-

tions are complete from the earliest stage, and show that, as in the

Australian Macropodide and Phalangistide, none of the teeth of the

permanent series have predecessors except the compressed pointed

last premolar, which replaces a tooth having the broad multicus-

pidate crown of a true molar.

Mr. W. H. Flower on the Teeth in the Marsupialia. 1381

This change does not occur until the animal approaches the adult

age.

5. Dasyuride.—In a foetal Thylacinus, in which no teeth had cut

the gum, the crowns of the permanent incisors, canines, premolars,

and anterior true molars were partially calcified, and necessarily

much crowded together in the jaw. A very minute rudimentary

molar was situated just beneath the alveolar mucous membrane,

superficially to the apex of the hindermost premolar, and was evi-

dently its milk-predecessor.

6. Phascolomyide.—This family is placed last because the obser-

vations regarding it are less complete than in the case of any of the

others. The youngest Wombat available presented no evidence of

succession of any of the teeth; but it is probable that the single

premolar is preceded by a milk-molar, at a still earlier period than

any examined.

From the foregoing observations it may be concluded with toler-

able safety that the animals of the Order Marsupialia present a pe-

culiar condition of dental succession, uniform throughout the order,

and distinct from that of all other mammals. This peculiarity may

be thus briefly expressed. The teeth of Marsupials do not vertically

displace and succeed other teeth, with the exception of a single tooth

on each side of each jaw. The tooth in which a vertical succession

takes place is always the corresponding or homologous tooth, being

the hindermost of the premolar series*, which is preceded by a tooth

having the characters, more or less strongly expressed, of a true

molar.

It has been usual to divide the class Mammalia, in regard to the

mode of formation and succession of their teeth, into two groups—the

Monophyodonts, or those that generate a single set of teeth, and the

Diphyodonts, or those that generate two sets of teeth; but even in

the most typical diphyodonts the successional process does not ex-

tend to the whole of the teeth, always stoppmg short of those

situated most posteriorly in each series. The Marsupials occupy

an intermediate position, presenting as it were a rudimentary diphyo-

dont condition, the successional process being confined to a single

tooth on each side of each jaw. This position, however, is by no

means without analogy among the mammals of the placental series.

In the Dugong and the existing Elephants the successional process

is limited to the incisor teeth. It is questionable whether the first

premolar of those animals of this group which have four premolar

teeth, as the Hog, Dog (mandible), &c., ever has a deciduous pre-

decessor, at all events so far advanced as to have reached the calci-

fied stage. But the closest analogy with the marsupial mode of

succession is found among the Rodents. Here the incisors appear to

have no deciduous predecessors ; and in the Beaver, Porcupine, and

others, which have but four teeth of the molar series, 7. e. three true

* The convenient distinction between false molars or premolars and true

molars, is always well marked in the form of the crown, especially in the upper

jaw, in the Marsupials.

1382 Royal Society :—

molars and one premolar, the latter is, exactly as in the Marsupials,

the only tooth which succeeds a deciduous tooth. The analogy,

however, does not hold in those Rodents which have more than one

premolar, as the Hare; for in this case each of these teeth has its

deciduous predecessor.

In the preceding account I have used the term “ permanent”? for

those teeth which remain in use throughout the animal’s life, or, if

they fall out (as do the rudimentary canines and the premolars of

the Macropodide), do not give place to successional teeth; and I

have therefore assumed that the milk or temporary dentition of the

typical diphyodont mammals is represented in the Marsupials only

by the deciduous molars. It may be held, on the other hand, that

the large majority of the teeth of the Marsupials are the homologues

of the milk or first teeth of the diphyodonts, and that it is the

permanent or second dentition which is so feebly represented by the

four successional premolars, This view is supported by many general

analogies in animal organization and development, such as the fact

that the permanent state of organs of lower animals often represents

the immature or transitional condition of the same parts in beings of

higher organization.

Looking only to the period of development of the different teeth in

some of the marsupial genera, we might certainly be disposed to

place the successional premolar in a series by itself, although, indeed,

all its morphological characters point out its congruity with the row

of teeth among which it ultimately takes its place, the reverse being

the case with its predecessor. It is, however, almost impossible,

after examining the teeth of the young Thylacine described and

figured in the paper, to resist the conclusion originally suggested.

The unbroken series of incisors, canines, premolars, and anterior true

molars of nearly the same phase of development, with posterior

molars gradually added as age advances, form a striking contrast to

the temporary molar, so rudimental in size, and transient in duration.

I can scarcely doubt that the true molars of this animal would be

identified by every one as homologous with the true molars of the

diphyodonts, which are generally regarded as belonging to the per-

manent series, although they never have deciduous predecessors.

Now, if the homology between the true molars of the Thylacine

and those of a Dog, for instance, be granted, and if the anterior

teeth (incisors, canines, and premolars) of the Thylacine be of the

same series as its own true molars, they must also be homologous

with the corresponding permanent teeth of the Dog.

It may be objected to this argument, that the true molars of the

diphyodonts, not being successional teeth, ought to be regarded as

members of the first or milk-series; but, in truth, the fact that they

have themselves no predecessors does not make them serially homo-

logous with the predecessors of the other teeth, while their morpho-

logical characters, as well as their habitual persistence throughout

life, range them with the second or permanent series.

We have been so long accustomed to look upon the second set of

teeth as an after-development or derivative from the first, that it

Mr. W.H. Flower on the Teeth in the Marsupialia. 133

appears almost paradoxical to suggest that the milk- or deciduous

teeth may rather be a set superadded to supply the temporary needs

of mammals of more complex dental organization. But it should be

remembered that, instead of there being any such relation between

the permanent and the milk-teeth as that expressed by the terms

*‘progeny’’ and “parent”’ (sometimes applied to them), they are

both (if all recent researches into their earlier development can be

trusted) formed side by side from independent portions of the pri-

mitive dental groove, and may rather be compared to twin brothers,

one of which, destined for early functional activity, proceeds rapidly

in its development, while the other makes little progress until the

time approaches when it is called upon to take the place of its more

precocious locum tenens.

Many facts appear to point to the milk-teeth as being the less

constant and important of the two sets developed in diphyodont

dentition. Among these the mest striking is the frequent occurrence

of this set in a rudimentary and functionless or, as it were, partially

developed state. The milk-premolars of some Rodents (as the

Guinea-pig), shed while the animal is iz wéero, the simple structure

and evanescent nature of the milk-teeth of the Bats, Insectivores, and

Seals, the diminutive first incisors of the Dugongs and Elephants,

all appear to be cases in point. On the other hand, examples of

the commencing or sketching out, as it were, of the successors to a

well-formed, regular, and functional first set of teeth, are rarely, if

ever, met with. Occasional instances of the habitual early deca-

dence, or, perhaps, absence of some of the second or so-called per-

manent teeth occur in certain animals ; but these are rather examples

of the disappearance or suppression of organs of which there is no

need in the economy, and chiefly occur in isolated and highly medi-

fied members of groups in the other members of which the same

phenomenon does not occur, as in Cheiromys among the Lemurs,

Trichechus among the Seals, and the recent Elephants (as regards

the premolars) among the Proboscideans. They form no parallel

to the cases mentioned above of the rudimentary formation of an

entire series of teeth of the temporary or milk-set.

To return to the Marsupials :—If this view be correct, I should be

quite prepared to find, in phases of development earlier than those

yet examined, some traces either of the papillary, follicular, or sac-

cular stages of milk-predecessors to other of the teeth besides those

determinate four in which, for some reason at present unexplained,

they arrive at a more mature growth*. Such proof as this would

alone decide the truth of these speculations ; and I have not at pre-

sent either the requisite leisure or materials for following out so

delicate an investigation. I trust that the facts already elicited are

sufficiently novel and important to justify my bringing them, as they

now stand, before the Society.

* Tt may be remarked that the milk-tooth which alone is developed in the

Marsupials corresponds homologically with that which, as a general rule, is most

persistent in the typical diphyodonts, including Man, viz. the posterior milk-

molar, replaced by the posterior permanent premolar,

134 Royal Society :-—

May 16, 1867.—William Bowman, Esq., V.P., in the Chair.

“Further Observations on the Structure and Affinities of Hozoon

Canadense.” (In a Letter to the President.) By Wriuiam B.

CARPENTER, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S.

University of London, May 9th, 1867.

When, on the 14th of December 1864, I addressed you on

the subject of the remarkable discovery which had been recently

made in Canada, and submitted by Sir William Logan to myself

for verification, of a fossil belonging to the Foraminiferal type,

occurring in large masses in the Serpentine-limestones imter-

calated among Gneissic and other rocks in the Lower Laurentian

formation, and therefore long anterior in Geological time to the

earliest traces of life previously observed, no doubts had been

expressed as to the organie nature of this body, which had

received the designation Hozoon Canadense.

The announcement was soon afterwards made, that the Serpen-

tine Marble of Connemara, employed as an ornamental marble

by builders under the name of “ Irish Green,” presented struc-

tural characters sufliciently allied to those of the Laurentian

Serpentines of Canada to justify its bemg referred to the same

origin. An examination of numerous decalcified specimens of this

rock led me to the conclusion that, although the evidences of its

organic origin were by no means such as to justify, or even to

suggest, such a doctrine, if the structure of the Canadian Eozoon

had not been previously elucidated, yet the very exact corre-

spondence in size and mode of aggregation between the Serpen-

tine-granules of the Connemara Marble and those of the ‘ acervu-

line’ portion of the Canadian was sufficient to justify in behalf of

the one the claim which had been freely conceded in regard to the

other.

In the following summer, however, it was announced in the

‘Reader’ (June 10,1865) by Professors King and Rowney of

Queen’s College, Galway, that having applied themselves to the

study of the Serpentine-Marble of Connemara with a full belief

in its organic origin, they had been gradually led to the convic-

tion that its structure was the result of chemical and physical

agencies alone, and that the same explanation was applicable to

the supposed Kozoon Canadense of the Laurentian Serpentines.

This view was afterwards fully set forth in a Paper “ On the go-

called Eozoonal Rock,” read at the Geological Society on the

10th of January 1866, and published (with additions) in the

Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society for August 1866. The

following is their own Summary of their conclusions (p. 215) :—

“Tt has been seen (1) that the ‘chamber-casts’ or granules of

serpentine are more or less simulated by chondrodite, coccolite,

pargasite, &c., also by the botryoidal configurations common in

Permian Magnesian Limestone; (2) that the ‘intermediate ske-

leton’ is closely represented, both in chemical composition and

other conditions, by the matrix of the above and other minerals ;

Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon Canadense. 135

(3) that the ‘proper wall’ is structurally identical with the

asbestiform layer which frequently invests the grains of chondro-

dite—that, instead of belonging to the skeleton, as must be the

case on the eozoonal view, it is altogether independent of that

part, and forms, on the contrary, an integral portion of the

serpentine constituting the ‘ chamber-casts,’ under the allomorphic

form of chrysotile, and that perfectly genuine specimens of it,

completely simulating casts of separated nummuline tubules,

occur in true fissures of the serpentine-granules; (4) that the

‘canal-system’ is analogous to the imbedded crystallizations of

native silver and other similarly conditioned minerals, also to the

coralloids imbedded in Permian Magnesian Limestone; that its

typical Grenville form occurs as metaxite, a chemically identical

mineral imbedded in saccharoidal calcite ; (5) that the type ex-

amples of ‘casts of stolon-passages’ are isolated crystals appa-

rently of pyrosclerite. Furthermore, considering that there has

been a complete failure to explain the characters of the so-called

internal casts of the ‘ pseudopodial tubules’ and other ‘ passages’

on the hypothesis of ordinary mechanical or chemical infiltration,

also bearing in mind the significant fact that the ‘intermediate

skeleton,’ in Irish and other varieties of eozoonal rock, contains

modified examples of the ‘definite shapes’ more or less resembling

the crystalline aggregations and prismatic lumps in primary sac-

charoidal marbles—that eozoonal structure is only found in meta-

morphic rocks belonging to widely separated geological systems,

never in their unaltered sedimentary deposits,—taking all these

points into consideration, also the arguments and other evidences

contained in the present memoir, we fee! the conclusion to be fully

established, that every one of the specialities which have been

diagnosed for Hozoon Canadense is solely and purely of crystalline

origin: in short, we hold, without the least reservation, that from

every available standing point—foraminiferal, mineralogical, che-

mical, and geological—the opposite view has been shown to be

utterly untenable.”

Considering that the Foraminiferal characters of Hozoon Cana-

dense had been unhesitatingly accepted by all those zoologists,

Continental as well as British, whose special acquaintance with

the group gave weight to their opinion, it might have been pru-

dent, as well as becoming, on the part of the Galway Professors,

to express themselves somewhat less confidently in regard to its

purely mineral origin. The case they made out would not have

lost any of its real strength if they had simply put forward their

facts as affording valid grounds for questioning the received doc-

trine ; and a way of escape would have been left for them, if the

progress of research should happen to bring to light conclusive

evidence on the other side.

Although such conclusive evidence is now producible, it may be

well for me briefly to point out what I regard as the fundamental

fallacies in the argument of Professors King and Rowney.

136 Royal Society :—

In the first place, the Serpentine-Marble of Connemara, on

which their investigations had been chiefly conducted, is admitted

by every one who has examined it to have undergone a considera-

ble amount of metamorphic change. To myself, as well as to

Professors King and Rowney, the evidence which it presents of

the operation of chemical and physical agencies is most obvious

and conclusive; whilst the evidence of its organic origin rests

entirely on its partial analogy to the eozoonal rock of Canada.

Hence an entire surrender might be made of the organic hypothesis

as regards the Connemara marble, without in the least degree

invalidating the claim of the eozoonal rock of Canada to an or-

ganic origin. But, on the other hand, if the latter claim can be

sustained, it may be fairly extended to the “ Irish Green,” should

the evidence of similarity be found sufficient to justify such an

extension, since it must be admitted by every petrologist that no

amount of purely mineral arrangement in a metamorphic rock

can disprove its claim to organic origin, if that claim can be

shown to be justified by distinct traces, in other parts of the same

formation, of organisms adequate to its production. The Carboni-

ferous Limestone, various members of the Oolitic and Cretaceous

formations, and the Hippurite and Nummulitic Limestones, all

exhibit in parts an entire absence of organic structure, which is

yet so distinct elsewhere as to justify the generalization that their

materials have been originally separated from the ocean-waters by

animal agency. And it is well known to those who have studied

the changes which recent Coral-formations have undergone when

upraised above the sea-level, that a complete conversion of a mass

of Coral into a subcrystalline Limestone not distinguishable

from ordinary Carboniferous Limestone, may take place under

circumstances in no way extraordinary.

It is, therefore, upon the character of the Serpentine- Limestone

of Canada, not upon the nature of the Connemara Marble, that

the question of organic origin eutirely turns; and, as I have else-

where shown in detail*, the hypothesis of Professors King and

Rowney altogether fails to account for the combination of pheno-

mena which the former presents, whilst the accordance of that

combination with the idea of its Organic origin (a very moderate

allowance being made for the effects of metamorphic change) is

such as to establish the same kind of probability in its favour as

that which we derive in the case of the Human origin of the “ flint

implements ”’ from the cumulative evidence of their succession of

fractured surfaces, or in the case of the chemical composition of

the sun from the precise correspondence between certain dark

lines in the solar spectrum and groups of bright lines produced in

a dark spectrum by the combustion of certain known metals.

I may stop to point out, however, that Professors King and

Rowney do not attempt to offer any feasible explanation of the

fundamental fact of the regular alternation of lamelle of Calca-

* Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, August, 1866.

Dr. W. B. Carpenter on Eozoon Canadense. 137

reous and Siliceous minerals, often amounting to fifty or more of

each kind, extending through a great range of area, nor of the

fact that not only is this arrangement the same, though the sili-

ceous mineral may be Serpentine in one place, Pyroxene in an-

other, or Loganite in another, whilst the calcareous may be Calcite

in one part and Dolomite in another, but that these variations

may occur in one and the same specimen, the structural arrange-

ment being continuous throughout.

And in what they state of the peculiar lamella forming the

proper wall of the chambers, which I have designated the ‘ num-

muline layer,’ they have fallen into errors of fact so remarkable,

that I can only account for them by the belief that when their

paper was written they knew this layer only by decalcified speci-

mens, and had never seen it in thin transparent sections. For

they describe it as composed of parallel fibres of chrysotile packed

together without any intermediate substance; whereas I have

distinctly proved that the siliceous fibres are imbedded in a calea-

reous matrix, which I therefore feel justified in regarding as a

finely tubulated Nummuline shell, of which the tubuli that were

originally occupied by pseudopodia have been permeated by sili-

ceous infiltration.

So, again, while asserting that by no conceivable process could

the animal substance originally occupying these tubuli have been

replaced by siliceous minerals, they have entirely ignored the fact

stated by me, that this very replacement has taken place in recent

specimens in my possession—a fact on the basis of which the

reconstruction of the animal of Eozoon proposed by Dr. Dawson

and myself securely rests.

The question may now, I believe, be regarded as conclusively

settled by the recent discovery, in a sedimentary limestone of the

Lower Laurentian formation at Tudor in Canada, of a specimen

of Hozoon presenting characters that cannot, in the opinion of the

most experienced paleontologists and mineralogists, be accounted

for on any other hypothesis than that of its organic origin. Jor,

in the first place, the occurrence of a calcareous framework or

skeleton in a matrix of sedimentary limestone, which also fills up

its interspaces, altogether excludes the hypothesis that this frame-

work might be the product of any kind of pseudomorphic arrange-

ment produced by the separation of calcareous and _ siliceous

minerals from a solution containing both. And, secondly, this

specimen exhibits that which had not previously been distinctly

seen in any other, viz. a distinctly limited contour, formed by

the curving downwards and closing-in of the septa, in a manner

as perfect and characteristic as the closing-in of the successive

chambers of any polythalamous shell. I believe that no palzonto-

logist familiar with Paleozoic fossils would have hesitated to pro-

nounce this specimen a fossil Coral allied to Stromatopora, if it

had oceurred in a Silurian Limestone.

That this specimen, though differing greatly in appearance

138 Royal Society :—

from the ordinary Serpentinous Hozoon, really represents that or-

ganism, is shown not merely by the oeneral arrangement of the

calcareous lamelle, but by their minute structure. This, it is

true, is far less characteristically seen in thin sections microsco-

pically examined than it is in the specimens whose cavities have

been filled up: by Serpentine, the texture of which is often so

marvellously little changed as to have all the appearance of recent

shell-substance ; but the alteration which the shelly layers have

undergone in this specimen is precisely paralleled by that which

I have been accustomed to find in the best-preserved specimens

of other organic structures contained in the more ancient lime-

stones. And there are still distinctly recognizable traces of the

canal-system imperfectly injected with black substance, which

correspond with those of the ordinary Serpentinous Hozoon.

For the imperfection of the specimen in this respect, however,

full compensation is made in the perfect preservation of the canal-

system in a small fragment of Hozoon long since observed by Dr.

Dawson in a crystalline limestone at Madoc. This specimen

having been placed in my hands by Sir William Logan, with

permission to treat it in any way that should enable me to make

a thorough examination of it, I have succeeded in finding in it

most complete and beautiful examples of the canal-system, pre-

senting varieties of size and distribution exactly parallel to those

with which I am familiar in the Serpentine-specimens. Now, as

there is not in the Madoe, any more than in the Tudor specimen,

any such combination of different minerals as has been supposed

by Professors King and Rowney to have given origin to the arbo-

rescent forms of the canal-system of Eozoon (which they have

likened to moss-agate or crystallized silver), there can be no

longer any reasonable ground for disputing the essential similarity

of this canal-system to that first described by myself in Calcarina,

with which it was originally compared by Dr. Dawson*.

The extension of the inquiry into the character of the Serpentine

limestones intercalated among the Gneissic and other rocks of

Laurentian age in various parts of Europe, has brought to light

such numerous examples of eozoonal structure, more or less dis-

tinctly preserved, as to afford strong grounds for the conclusion

that this organism was very generally diffused at that epoch, and

performed much the same part, in raising up solid structures in

the waters of the ocean, that the Coral-forming Zoophytes perform

at the present time. I had myself examined before the close of

1865 specimens of Ophicalcite from Cesha Lipa in Bohemia and

from the neighbourhood of Moldau, in which an eozoonal struc-

ture was distinctly traceable ; and early i in 1866 a more extended

series was transmitted to me ‘through Sir C. Lyell from Dr. Giim-

bel, the Government Geologist of Bavaria, in which I was able to

* A full description of these specimens by Dr. Dawson, with a notice of their

stratigraphical position by Sir William Logan, has been read at the Geological

Society, on the 8th of May, 1867.

Mr. W. B. Dawkins on Ovibos moschatus. 139

trace a continuous gradation, from specimens in which the eozoonal

structure was distinct, to others in which, if it ever existed, it had

been completely obscured by subsequent metamorphism. The

results of a very careful and complete examination of the Ophi-

calcites of Bavaria by Dr. Giimbel himself have been communicated

to the Royal Academy of Munich*.

Appearances of the same character are presented by a series of

specimens of the Serpentinous Limestones from the Primitive

Gneiss of Scandinavia, kindly transmitted to me by Prof Lovén.

Iventure to hope that the foregoing résumé of the present aspect

of this subject will be of interest to the Fellows of the Royal

Society. I say the present aspect, because I am strongly con-

vinced that we are at present only at the beginning of our know-

ledge of this and other ancient types of Foraminiferal structure,

and that careful search in promising localities will bring to light

many wonders now lying unsuspected in the vast aggregate of

pre-Silurian strata.

May 23, 1867.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.

a “ Ovibos moschatus (Blainville).””, By W. Boyp Dawkins, M.A.,

GS.

Ovibos moschatus, more commonly known as the musk-ox, has

been described under different names by naturalists as their

opinions fluctuated concerning its aflinities with the ox, buffalo,

or sheep. It is called the musk-ox by all the arctic explorers,

Bos moschatus by Schreber, Zimmermann, Pennant, and Cuvier,

musk-buffalo allied to the Bubalus caffir of South Africa by

Professor Owen, Ovibos moschatus by De Blainville, Desmarest,

Richardson, and M. Lartet. That the latter four naturalists are

right in the place they assign to it in the zoological scale, inter-

mediate between Ovis and Bos, is proved both by the natural his-

tory and the osteology of the animal. The absence of a muftle

and dewlap, the hairiness of the nostrils, the shortness of tail and

smallness of ear, and the possession of two teats only, separate

the animal from Bos and connect it with Ovis, while the large size

and long gestation of nine months differentiate it from the latter

animal. Precisely the same evidence is afforded by its skeleton.

In the skull, the tapering of the anterior portion, the prominence

of the orbit, the verticality of the facial plate of the maxillary, the

presence of a larmier, the squareness of the basisphenoid, the pre-

sence of the occipito-parietal suture on the coronal surface—in the

dentition the sharpness of the cost 1, 2, and 3, and the absence

of the accessory column from the inner interspace of the lobes

of the upper teeth, are among the chief ovine characters; and

throughout the skeleton the same ovine tendency is manifested.

* “Ueber das Vorkommen von EKozoon im ostbayerischen Urgebirge,” aus d,

Sitzungsber. d. k. Acad. d. W. in Miinchen, 1866, i. 1,

140, Royal Society.

With the exception of the great development of the horns, there is

no point in common between it and Bubalus caffir. The encroach-

ment of the horn-cores on the parietals differentiates it from the

sheep.

The animal ranges at the present day from Fort Churchill,

lat. 60°, northwards as far as the arctic sea, and eastwards as far

as Cape Bathurst, lat. 71°, living for the most part on the

“barren grounds,’ and never penetrating far into the woods. In

geological times, however, it had a far greater range eastwards

and southwards. In the pleistocene river-gravels lying on the

solid ice in Eschscholtz Bay, in Russian America, it is found

associated with the elk, reindeer, bison, horse, and mammoth.

Traces of the animal ranging further to the east are afforded by

the skull found on the banks of the Yena, in lat. 70°, long. 185°.

Dr. Pallas’s discovery of two skulls on the banks of the Obi

brings the animal still closer to the borders of Europe. All

three skulls were found in the “ Tundas,” or treeless “ barren

grounds”’ of Siberia, in the same series of eravels which afford

such vast stores of fossil ivory. In Germany it has been found in

three localities ; and in France, in the valley of the Oise, it is as-

sociated with flint implements of the St. Acheul type, and with

the mammoth and Hlephas antiguus. It has also been found in

the reindeer-caves of Périgord, under circumstances that prove

beyond doubt that the animal was eaten by the reindeer-folk.

In England it has been found in three gravel-beds of late pleisto-

cene age, near Maidenhead, at Freshford near Bath, and at

Greenstr -eet- green near Bromley. In 1866 the author dug it out

of the lower brick-earth of Cray ford in Kent, where it was as-

sociated with Rhinoceros megarhinus, R. leptorhinus (Owen),

and Elephas antiquus. The skull in this latter case belonged

to a remarkably fine old male. Thus its present limited range in

space contrasts most strongly with its wide range in pleistocene

times through North Siberia and Central Europe north of a line

passing through the Alps and Pyrenees. Its association with

animals of a temperate or else southern zone is to be accounted

for by its having been driven from its usual haunts by an un-

usually severe winter. The rarity of its remains proves that it

was not so abundant as those animals which are associated with

it in France, Germany, and Britain.

Professor Leidy figures and describes two fossil skulls most

closely allied to Ovibos moschatus, from Arkansas and Ohio, under

the name of Bootherium cavifrons and B. bombifrons; they are,

however, most probably the male and female of the same species.

They differ from Ovibos moschatus only in the direction of their

horn-cores, and in their bases meeting and becoming fused on the

coronal surface of the male skull. The horn-cores are supported

both by the frontals and parietals. In other respects they pre-

sent the same ovine affinities as Ovibos, and certainly belong to

the same genus.

14]

MISCELLANEOUS.

Cases of Monstrosities becoming the starting-point of New Races in

Plants. By C. Naupin.

THE discussion lately raised by MM. C. Dareste and A. Sanson

upon the question whether monstrosities, in the animal kingdom,

can become the origin of peculiar races, recalls to my memory some

teratological facts which appear to me to show that this is the case

in plants. Perhaps, however, in the first place, we ought to come

to an understanding as to the sense to be attached to the word mon-

strosity ; and to avoid all confusion I shall say that I employ it in

the sense which is habitually given to it in botany, that of a notable

deviation from typical or reputed typical forms. There is, in fact,

a distinction to be made between cases of monstrosity incompatible

with the faculty of reproduction by generation in the individuals

affected by it, and those in which the alteration of form is not such

as necessarily to imply the loss of this faculty. It is to the latter

only that I wish to refer here, as they alone are in question.

Well attested facts place it beyond a doubt, in my opinion, that

considerable anomalies which, by general consent, are classed among

the teratological facts of the vegetable kingdom are faithfully

transmitted from generation to generation, and become the salient

characters of new races. Horticulture would furnish a great number

of these if the trouble had been taken to collect them and subject

them to the check of experiment; but I can cite only a few, because

they alone, as far as I know, have been examined scientifically ; and,

moreover, they suffice to establish the principle of the transmission

of anomalies by sexual reproduction through an indefinite series of

generations.

The first fact of this kind will be borrowed from Professor

Goppert of Breslau. This was a poppy (Papaver officinale) which

presented the curious anomaly of the transformation of a part of its

stamens into carpels, from which resulted as it were a crown of

secondary capsules round the normal central capsule, the develop-

ment of which was nevertheless complete. One thing to be noted is

that many of these small additional capsules, as well as the normal

capsule, contained perfect seeds capable of reproducing the

plant. In 1849, M. Goppert, having learnt that a whole field of

these monstrous poppies existed a few miles from Breslau, sowed in

the following year a considerable quantity of seeds taken designedly

from the normal capsules; and nearly all the plants which sprang

from this sewing reproduced the monstrosity of the previous genera-

tion, although not all in the same degree. I do not dwell upon this

first fact, because its observation was not, so far as I know, carried

any further, and it may be thought that the number of generations

is not sufficient to justify our concluding from it the stability of the

anomaly indicated.

The same doubt does not exist with regard to the following facts.

Cultivators of ferns know that these plants are very subject to vary,

and that some of them, even in the wild state, present true mon-

142 Miscellaneous.

strosities in the conformation of their fronds, which by that means

acquire very singular figures. These monstrosities are sought

for by the fanciers of these plants, because they consider

them an improvement; and they were for a long time rare and

bore a high price in horticultural commerce. Now-a-days they

are produced in as great abundance as can be desired, by simply

sowing the spores, on condition that these spores are taken from the

altered parts of the fructifying frond. Where the frond remains in

the normal state, the spores only give origin to normal plants ; but

those of the monstrous portions of the same fronds reproduce with

certainty plants affected with the same kind of alteration. This

mode of propagation has been in use for several years; and the fact

of the transmission of monstrosities by sowing, in the Ferns, has

never yet been invalidated by experiment.

Very considerable anomalies, which may be classed among terato-

logical facts with as much reason as in the two preceding instances,

may be observed in the three species of alimentary gourds—plants

subjected to cultivation from time immemorial, and which have never

been found in the wild state. These anomalies are peculiar in this

respect, that they characterize very well-marked and persistent races,

are preserved notwithstanding changes of place and climate, and

even partially resist crossing with other races of the same species.

The date of their origin is unknown, nor do we know under what

influences they were formed; but the species being here entirely

reduced to a state of domesticity, it is very probable that some of

these races, if not all, were actually produced by cultivation. Such,

among others, is a race of the common gourd (Cucurbita pepo), in

which the tendrils are all converted into a kind of branches which

give origin to leaves, flowers, and often to fruits ; such are also, in

the same species, those numerous races with deformed, warty, and

oddly coloured fruits, which are preserved by sowings, always in a

similar condition, so long as intercrossings do not step in to modify

them. A still more remarkable example i is that of a small race of

pumpkin (C. maxima) which we have received from China and ob-

served for several years at the Museum. Resembling the type of

the species in the organs of vegetation, it differs therefrom singularly

in the ovary and the fruit, which have become almost entirely free,

the tube of the calyx being reduced into a sort of plateau serving to

support the carpels. Nevertheless the complete adhesion of the ovary

to the tube of the calyx, in which it is deeply immersed, is given by all

authors as one of the essential characters of the family Cucurbitacee.

From this example we see how great may be the extent of the varia-

tions and also what a degree of fixity these variations may acquire

when once they are produced.

The fact of which I have still to speak is quite recent, and has

already been brought under the notice of the Academy by Dr.

Godron, Professor of Botany at Nancy (Comptes Rendus, 1866, i.

p- 379). I refer to it here because my own observations confirm it

in all points, and especially because it shows us very clearly how a

new race may originate from an anomaly. In 1861, Dr. Godron

Miscellaneous. 143

found in a sowing of Datura tatula, a species with very spinous

fruits, a single individual of which the capsule was perfectly smooth

and unarmed. The seeds taken from this capsule furnished, in 1862,

a lot of plants, all of which faithfully reproduced the individual from

which they were derived. From these seeds sprang a third genera-

tion similarly unarmed ; and I have myself observed at the Museum,

in 1865 and 1566, the fourth and fifth generations of this new race,

in all nearly one hundred individuals, none of which manifested the

least tendency to resume the characters of the spinous type of the

species. When crossed with the latter by M. Godron himself, the

unarmed race furnished hybrids, which in the succeeding generation

reverted to the spinous and unarmed forms; in other words, they

behaved like true hybrids endowed with fertility. From this fact

M. Godron proceeds to refer to a single specific type Datura stra-

monium, D. levis (Bertoloni, not Linneeus), and D. tatula, three

very constant forms which had previously been regarded as good

species. By adding to these the D. tatula inermis, discovered by

him, and to a certain extent originated under his eyes, we have four

distinct forms, issuing by variation from a single type, and with

regard to which we should not well know how to say what they

wanted of being true species.

Here a point presents itself to which I call the particular atten-

tion of those who believe in the mutability of specific forms, and

ascribe the origin of existing species to simple modifications of more

ancient ones. They assume (at least most of them do so) that

these modifications have been effected with excessive slowness,

and by insensible transitions—for example, that it required

several thousands of generations to transform one species into

another congeneric species. We do not know what may have

taken place in this long lapse of ages ; but experiments and observa-

tion teach us that in the present day slight or profound anomalies,

alterations of what we, perhaps arbitrarily, call specific types,—in a

word, monstrosities, whether they be transitory and purely indi-

vidual, or give rise to new durable races uniform in an unlimited

number of individuals, are produced suddenly, and without there

ever having been transition forms between them and the normal

form. A new race originates perfectly formed, and the first indi-

vidual which represents it is at once such as it will show in the suc-

ceeding generations if circumstances allow it to be preserved. New

modifications may be added to the first and subdivide the primary

race into secondary races, but they are produced with the same

suddenness as the first. Ido not here set myself up as the defender

of the doctrine of evolution; I only say that the biological pheno-

mena of the period in which we live by no meaus justify the hypo-

thesis of an insensible degradation of ancient forms and the necessity

of millions of years for changing the physiognomy of species. To

judge from what we know, these transformations, if they have taken

place, may have been effected in a lapse of time incomparably

shorter than has been supposed. It may be, indeed, that there are

these alternations in the life of nature—that periods of immobility,

144. Miscellaneous.

real or apparent, are succeeded by other periods of rapid transforma-

tion, during which what was previously only exceptional and abnormal

becomes the regular state of matters. And, finally, we must not

forget that to us time is only the succession of phenomena, and

that, whether these phenomena appear to us to succeed one another

slowly or precipitately, the result remains the same as regards the

doctrine of evolution. In either case the principle of the continuity

of things is in no degree affected.—Comptes Rendus, May 13, 1867,

pp. 929-933.

The Theory of the Skeleton.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—I do not imagine that readers of this Magazine will

have forgotten Mr. Herbert Spencer’s claim to date his views on the

skeleton from 1858. I wrote to you not to dispute that, or to impugn

Mr. Spencer’s claim to be a great discoverer, but to vindicate my own

claim to have honestly and independently thought out, from anato-

mical and physiological data, the theory of the skeleton which I had

the honour to submit to your readers. I did not attempt to claim any

credit, believing the pursuit of truth inconsistent with the pursuit of

fame, and that fame is not honour when awarded at a man’s measure

of his deserts, but only when spontaneously conferred by his fellow

thinkers. If the germ of the view published in my paper prove, as

it may prove in its present or some other form, an addition to the

philosophical groundwork of anatomy, Mr. Spencer may be sure that

he will receive a full share of honour, if his claim is well founded ;

but till then, all haggling over priorities is waste of good time,

which neither of us ought to be able or asked to spare from original

work.

I have done myself the pleasure to read the review of Prof. Owen’s

theory of the skeleton, printed in the ‘ British and Foreign Medical

and Chirurgical Review’ (new ser. vol. xxii.), of which Mr. Spencer

avows himself the author. And after much logical criticism, in

which Prof. Owen’s views are roughly handled, the review concludes

with a page or two, much less logical, in which Mr. Spencer claims

to have stated his discovery. So far as I can judge, the important

passages in this statement are these :—

“The entire teaching of comparative osteology implies that dif-

ferences in the conditions of the respective vertebrze necessitate

differences in their structures.”

* * * * *

“Tt is impossible to deny that if differences in the mechanical

functions of the vertebrze involve differences in their forms, then

community in their mechanical functions must involve community in

their forms.”

* * * * *

Beta ka have a community of function, it follows necessarily that

they will have a certain general resemblance.”

Miscellaneous. 145

In my judgment, this is only another and more emphatic way of

stating the coordination of structure and function which has been

insisted on by Prof. Owen and other naturalists again and again. In

the first passage that I have quoted all this dependence of structure

on “conditions”? is assumed to be true. In the second passage,

assuming it to be true, it is generalized into a law. In the third

passage, assuming the existence of the law, its results are assumed

to be tolerably uniform.

Now I am not aware that any number of assumptions, vague

ideas, or guesses will make a discovery; and if they had done so,

are we not entitled to assume that the discoverer, instead of pub-

lishing it anonymously, in a few vague sentences at the end of a

review in a specially professional periodical, would have avowed his

great thought, and brought it prominently before naturalists who

could judge of its value? especially as he is now anxious to have:

credit for it.

I have also had an opportunity of referring to the ‘ Principles of

Biology ;’ and although Mr. Spencer insists with admirable clearness

on the correlation of structure and function, and, as in the review,

on the modification of structures by ‘incident forces,” I did not

notice that these “‘incident forces’’ were defined ; while, so far as I

could understand, Mr. Spencer confessed that he did not altogether

see how their results were produced.

If this is a correct statement of Mr. Spencer’s vague hypothesis,

I submit that, but for the terms “pressure and tension,” and

‘mechanical theory,”’ our views have little in common. His appears

to me to have been an idea evolved out of an intellectual conscious-

ness of what ought to be. My view was arrived at inductively from

a long investigation ; and it was only when I was assured by mathe-

maticians, chemists, physicists, and others of their willingness to

cooperate in eventually demonstrating the view, that I consented to

publish a sketch of my method of studying the theory of the skele-

ton. For it is a part of a larger system referring the phenomena of

nature to their ultimate and actual physical causes, many of which

in their applications to life are discussed in a book of mine shortly

to be published, on ‘‘ The Dynamical Geology of Great Britain.”

. I am, Gentlemen,

Very faithfully yours,

Harry SEELEY.

Note on the Phenomena of Muscular Contraction in the Vorticelle.

By C. Rovcet.

Living muscles can alternately shorten and elongate themselves :

this is their characteristic property. In purely elastic organs short-

ening only takes place after previous mechanical elongation ; the

muscles, on the contrary, can shorten themselves without appearing

to have undergone any extension.

Whatever may be the causes of the elongation and shortening of

the muscular fibres, whether these opposite states result from a

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist, Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 10

146 Miscellaneous.

mechanical extension followed by retraction, or whether they are

produced apparently spontaneously, observation proves that in either

case the alternate changes which the contractile organ undergoes

are identical. In a muscular fibre which, after mechanical extension,

returns upon itself in virtue of its elasticity, the transverse striee

change their aspect and approach each other, at the same time that

the transverse diameter increases in proportion to the diminution of

the length. It is exactly in the same way that the muscular fibre

behaves in passing from the state of elongation corresponding with

the repose of the muscle to the state of active shortening designated

by the name of muscular contraction. If the essential phenomena

by which muscular contraction is manifested are identical with those

of the elastic contraction of muscles—if, on the other hand, the

elementary structure of contractile organs appears specially adapted

to the manifestations of elasticity, we may justly ask whether it is

necessary to invoke, in order to explain the shortening of muscle in

the state of contraction, a special property of contractility, distinct

from the properties of inorganic matter.

Elasticity may become a cause of movement in two opposite condi-

tions :—

Either the elastic body, the spiral spring, is subjected to a pres-

sure which keeps the turns of the spiral in a forced approximation,

when, on the pressure ceasing, the turns separate, the spring elon-

gates and moves by the mere fact of its elasticity ; or the spring is

subjected to a tension which elongates it by separating the turns of

the spiral from each other; on the tension ceasing, the turns ap-

proach each other, and the spring moves by shortening, without

anything but elasticity coming into play.

The alternations of elongation and shortening of the elastic ele-

ments (spiral fibrille) of the muscles might therefore be explained

by elasticity alone, if we demonstrated the existence either of an

agent of pressure exercising its action during the period of shorten-

ing, or of an agent of extension acting during the period of elonga-

tion—the muscle elongating in the former case and shortening in

the latter by the free play of elasticity the moment the action of an

antagonistic force ceases to equilibrate it.

The physiological problem of muscular movement is thus brought

to its most simple terms—to determine the natural form (the state

of repose) of the muscular spring, the conditions which can remove

it therefrom, and those to which elasticity recalls it.

There are at present two hypotheses as to the cause of muscular

movement: one attributes this movement to a special property of

muscular fibre, zrrztability or contractility, which manifests itself

only in the period of activity of the muscle and produces the short-

ening; the other, on the contrary, regards the shortening as the

return of the muscle to a state of repose. This latter hypothesis,

which supposes that, during the period of apparent inactivity of the

muscle, the nerves are constantly at work to maintain the forced

extension of the contractile fibres, is certainly refuted by the incon-

testible fact that the section of the motor nerves does not cause the

Miscellaneous. 147

contraction of the muscle, but, on the contrary, the opposite state ;

nevertheless it approaches the truth much more closely than the

former.

The observation of the phenomena of muscular contraction is

presented to us in the Vorticelle in the most simple condition which

it is possible to imagine. In many Invertebrata an entire muscle is

often represented by a single primitive bundle; in the Rotifera iso-

lated fibrillee form so many distinct muscles. The stalk of the

Vorticella shows us the principal organ of locomotion of an animal

composed of a single muscular fibrilla free in a canal in the centre

of a perfectly transparent sheath, which allows us to see, with the

greatest distinctness, all the changes which the contractile element

undergoes during the states of activity and repose, of elongation and

contraction.

When the animal is at rest, the stalk is at its maximum of elonga-

tion, and the body as far removed as possible from the point of

attachment and refuge. The vibratile cilia alone are active, the body

and the stalk remain perfectly immoveable. In this state the cen-

tral filament of the stalk, the contractile fibrilla, is completely ex-

tended; nevertheless it is never straight, but constantly presents a

torsion in a very elongated spire, like a ribbon twisted round its

longitudinal axis, and of which the appearance exactly resembles

that of a spiral watch-spring fixed and strongly extended by the ex-

tremities. As soon as any mechanical, electrical, thermic, or other

excitant affects the animal, this elongated spiral, suddenly contract-

ing upon itself, becomes transformed almost instantaneously into a

perfectly regular spiral spring, with very close turns, which does not

measure more than one-fifth of the length of the stalk in repose,

and of which the transverse diameter has proportionately increased.

This state generally persists only for a short time: the turns of the

spring separating, it soon elongates, rather slowly, and the animal

returns to its natural position.

The shortening and elongation of the contractile organ are here

manifestly due to the approximation and separation of a spiral spring;

but to which of these two states belongs the action of elasticity?

which of them shows us the muscular spring in its natural form, in

its state of repose? Observation establishes, in the first place, this

important fact—namely, that the spiral filament never appears in

its extreme elongation except when the animal is alive and uninjured.

As soon as the animal is killed, or detached from its stalk, sponta-

neously or by violence, the turns of the spiral roll themselves up

like a tendril, and remain in this state for an indefinite period; the

same is the case if the animal be suddenly killed by poison or by

the elevation of the temperature to 104° or 113° F.

It frequently happens, even during the life of the animal, that the

contractile fibrilla breaks, and the continuity is broken between it

and the body, the nutritive centre of the whole animal ; in this case,

if the sheath be intact and continuous, the body, living and swimming

by means of the vibratile cilia, drags along at its posterior part the

10*

148 Miscellaneous.

dead contractile fibrilla rolled up like a tendril, persisting in this

state of contraction, and having Jost for ever the faculty of elonga-

tion.

I have several times observed that as soon as the body of a Vorti-

cella detaches itself from the stalk to which it normally adheres, the

contractile stem begins to execute a series of movements of rotation

round the axis. Each of these movements is accompanied by the

formation of a spiral turn; and when the whole of the stalk is thus

converted into a close spiral, the movement ceases, and no elongation

afterwards takes place.

The elongation of the spiral fibrilla, the organ of muscular move-

ment in the Vorticelle, is therefore dependent on the state of life—

that is to say, on the continuity of nutrition and the exchange of

materials. From the moment when nutrition is suppressed by the

death of the animal, or by the separation of the fibrilla from the

nutritive centre, the contractile element takes and retains the

natural form inherent in its structure—that of a spiral spring, of

which the turns are at the maximum of approximation in the state

of repose.

The contraction of the muscular fibre of the stalk of the Vorti-

cella corresponds with the state of repose of the spring; it is the

immediate consequence of its elasticity ; the elongation of the fibre

is the result of the forced extension of the spring by a cause of

movement dependent on the act of nutrition, and acting during the

apparent repose of the contractile organ. As soon as the source of

this antagonistic force is exhausted, elasticity, recalling the muscle

to its natural form, produces the so-called movement of contrac-

tion.

Is this a phenomenon peculiar to a singular organ of locomotion,

the stalk of the Vorticella? or is it the condition of muscular con-

traction in all animals?

I shall have the honour very shortly to communicate to the Aca-

demy the results of numerous experiments which I have undertaken

upon muscular contraction in the higher animals, their results

establishing :—

1. That a recent hypothesis, according to which permanent con-

traction is essentially constituted by a series of successive shocks or

vibrations, is in absolute contradiction to well-observed facts.

2. That a tendency towards extreme contraction is a property

inherent in living muscular fibre, a necessary consequence of its

structure and elasticity.

3. That during life this tendency to contraction is combated by

a cause of extension which predominates during the repose of the

muscle, is developed in the exchange of nutritive materials, increases

with the activity of their access, diminishes or becomes extinguished

by their exhaustion, and may be momentarily suspended by all the

excitants of muscular contractility—nervous action, heat, the electric

shock, &c.—Comptes Rendus, June 3, 1867, pp. 1128-1132.

Miscellaneous. 149

On the Regeneration of the Limbs in the Axolotl (Siren pisciformis).

By J. M. Parirpeavx. |

On the 24th of September, 1866, I had the honour to bring before

the Academy some experiments demonstrating that the limbs of the

newt (Triton cristatus) are only regenerated when at least the basal

part of these members is left in its place (that is to say, the sca-

pula, when, as in my experiments, we have to do with the anterior

limbs). It appeared to me necessary to repeat these experiments

upon other animals of the same class, in order to see whether we

have to do in this case with a constant fact, as, indeed, everything

would lead us to suppose.

By the kindness of M. Duméril, I have had at my disposal ten

Axolotls bred in the menagerie of reptiles at the Museum of Natural

History. On the 4th of October, 1866, I removed the left anterior

limb, including the scapula, from five of these Axolotls ; from the

five others, on the same day, I amputated the right anterior limb,

with scissors, at the surface of the body, consequently leaving in

place not only the scapula, but also the head of the humerus.

It is now more than eight months since the operation was per-

formed ; and it is easy to. prove that it has furnished the results

which I had foreseen. In the Axolotls of the first series cicatrization

has taken place in the most regular manner; but there has not yet

been the least indication of any ‘regeneration. In those of the second

series, on the contrary, very soon after the operation, the cicatrix

began to rise, and there was formed a projection which has gradually

increased, and I was able to trace day by day the phenomena of the

regeneration of the limb. Already, and indeed for a long time

past, this limb has been completely reproduced, with all its normal

characters of form and structure.

Thus all the experiments which I have made since I commenced

studying the question of the reproduction of removed parts con-

stantly lead me to the same conclusion. Whether we have to do

with the removal of entire limbs, as in the Batrachia, or with that

of more deeply seated organs, such as the spleen in the Mammalia,

regeneration never takes place except when the operation has left in

position, and with its normal anatomical connexion, a portion of the

limbs or of the spleen. This constancy in the results already at-

tained has encouraged me to try other experiments, the results of

which I will hereafter communicate to the Academy.—Comptes

Rendus, June 10, 1867, p. 1204.

On the Development of the Brown Aphis of the Maple.

By MM. Bausrant and Signorer.

The facts recently observed by M. Dareste in the evolution of the

common fowl, and the deductions which he has drawn from them

with regard to the production of races in animals, with the conclusive

analogous examples in plants made known by M. Naudin, demon-

strate that, in both kingdoms, certain anomalies of development may

150 Miscellaneous.

be the starting-point of peculiar races. The following observation

proves not only that simple races are produced in this manner, but

that forms described as species, or even as actual genera, sometimes

acknowledge no other origin.

In 1852 an English naturalist, Mr. J. Thornton, indicated, under

the name of Phyllophorus testudinatus, an Hemipterous insect which

he had found on the leaves of the common maple (Acer campestre),

and which he regarded as the larva of an undetermined species of

Aphis. Subsequently, in 1858, Mr. Lane Clark also observed it,

and placed it, under the name of Chelymorpha phyllophora, in a

genus intermediate between the Aphidide and the Coccide. Lastly,

in 1862, M. van der Hoeven, of Leyden, described it, also as a new

genus, replacing the generic names Phyllophorus and Chelymorpha

by that of Periphyllus, the other names being previously employed

to designate other genera of insects ; and our Hemipteron received

from the illustrious Dutch naturalist the name of P. testudo. Like

Mr. Thornton, M. van der Hoeven regarded it as the larva of an

Aphis of which the adult form was still unknown.

These brief historical indications form a summary of all that was

known about this insect when we on our part undertook some inves-

tigations upon it, the results of which we now propose to communi-

cate. We first ascertained that, far from constituting a new genus

or even a distinct species, the Periphyllus is really nothing but the

larva of one of the known species of Aphides which live on the maple

—namely, Aphis aceris, a brown species which is to be met with

during a great part of the year upon the leaves and at the extremi-

ties of the young shoots of that tree. But, at the same time that

we ascertained this fact, we were set on the track of a most unex-

pected discovery, constituting a new and very remarkable peculiarity

in the development of the animals of this group, already presenting

such curious phenomena in connexion with their reproduction.

This was the faculty, become transmissible to all the generations

of a particular species, of engendering two kinds of individuals—one

normal, the other abnormal—of which the former alone, after their

birth, continue the course of their development, and become capable

of reproducing the species ; whilst the latter retain throughout their

existence the form which they possessed on coming into the world,

and appear to be incapable of propagating. Moreover these two

categories of individuals present such marked characters that, with-

out having watched their birth, and being thus convinced that they

are really produced by identical females, and sometimes even by one

and the same mother, one would inevitably consider them to belong

to two species, nay even to two completely different genera. Now

one of these is nothing but the Periphyllus mentioned at the

commencement of this note as having been described by the authors

who had observed it as a separate genus in the family of the

Aphides.

Such is, in summary, the singular observation that we have made

upon Aphis aceris. We may now give some fuller details upon each

of the two kinds of individuals of which this species is composed.

Miscellaneous. 151

When we examine with the naked eye or with a lens the embryos

of the brown Aphis of the maple at the moment of their being pro-

duced by the females, or after opening the bodies of the latter, we

see at once that all of them have not the same coloration. In some

they are of a tolerably bright green, whilst in others their colour is

more or less brownish or greenish brown. The brown embryos pre-

sent no peculiarities, and only differ from their mothers by characters

analogous to those which are remarked in all species of Aphides

between the newly born young individuals and the adult females.

As in these latter, their bodies and appendages are furnished with

rather long simple hairs, and, like all young Aphides at the moment

of their birth, they already contain rudiments of embryos in the

interior of their generative apparatus. If, on the other hand, we

examine the green embryos, we at once detect, besides their peculiar

coloration, very marked differences between them and their brown

congeners. The various parts of the body and limbs do not present

the same conformation as in the latter, but one is especially struck

by the extraordinary development and the unusual appearance of

their tegumentary system. Thus their surface is no longer furnished

only with simple hairs, but also and principally with scaly transpa-

rent lamella, more or less rounded or oblong, and traversed by

divergent and ramified nervures. These lamelle occupy especially

the anterior margin of the head, the first joint of the antennee (which

is very stout and protuberant), the outer edge of the tibize of the two

anterior pairs of legs, and the lateral and posterior margins of the

abdomen. Moreover the whole dorsal surface of the latter and of

the last thoracic segment is covered with a design having the aspect

of a mosaic composed of hexagonal compartments, and which is

not without analogy to the pattern formed by the scaly plates of

the carapace of tortoises. These peculiarities give our insect a great

elegance of appearance, which causes it to be much in request with

the amateurs of the microscope in England, where it is commonly

known under the name of the “ leaf-insect.’’ The entire animal is

strongly flattened, and resembles a small scale applied to the surface

of the leaf upon which it reposes, and on which it requires a certain

amount of care to detect it.

Another remarkable character of these abnormal individuals of

Aphis aceris is the rudimentary state of their generative apparatus.

This is reduced to a few groups of small pale and scarcely visible

cells, none of which arrives at maturity to become transformed into

an embryo; and it retains this character as long as it is possible to

observe the animal. The functions of nutrition, also, are performed

in them in a very unenergetic manner ; for from the moment of their

birth until that at which we cease to observe them, they increase

but little in size, attaining scarcely 1 millimetre. They undergo no

change of skin, never acquire wings like the reproductive individuals,

and their antennze always retain the five joints which they present

in all young Aphides before the first moult. Nevertheless they

possess a well-developed rostrum and an intestinal canal, the peri-

152 Miscellaneous.

staltic contractions of which we have distinctly observed. In short,

although we have observed them for several months (that is to say,

from May to November), no change in their condition was ascer-

tained; and they disappeared with the leaves which bear them,

without its being possible to ascertain what becomes of them sub-

sequently.

The question naturally arose, What was the signification of these

abnormal individuals of the Aphis of the maple, and what part did

they fulfil in the reproductive functions of the species to which they

belong? They are evidently not males, since their generative appa-

ratus retains the same rudimentary form at whatever epoch we

examine them. . Moreover in no known species of Aphis are the

males produced at the same time as the viviparous individuals, which

are not the true females of the species. There is therefore no other

~ alternative but to regard them as a modification of the specific type

constantly reproduced with the same characters by the successive

normal generations. Our abnormal Aphides are indeed deprived of

the faculty of reproduction, either by sexual generation or in any

other manner ; but after the observations of M. H. Landois upon the

law of sexual development in insects, we know that in them the sexes

depend simply upon the conditions of alimentation of the larva.

Because, in the present state of things, these conditions have not

yet occurred for one of the two sorts of larvee of Aphis aceris, there

is no reason for our concluding that they may not some day be

realized; and by thus acquiring, with the attributes of the sexes,

the faculty of propagating directly in an indefinite manner, these

abnormal individuals will become in their turn the origin of a new

species produced by deviation from an anterior specific type.—

Comptes Rendus, June 17, 1867, pp. 1259-1262.

Cervus megaceros previously known in the Fens.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—If Mr. Norman Moore will turn to pp. 466-467

of Prof. Owen’s ‘ British Fossil Mammals,’ he will find it recorded

more than twenty years ago that “remains of the Megaceros found

eight and a half feet below the surface of the peat-bog at Hilgay,

Norfolk, are preserved in the collection of Mr. Whickham Flower,

F.G.S.”’ Various specimens have come under my notice in the last

five or six years; and these facts I have recorded, by enumerating

the species as one of the peat-fauna mammals, in the ‘ Geological

Magazine’ for November 1866, and in the ‘ Quarterly Journal of the

Geological Society’ for the same date.

I remain yours, &c.

H. See vey.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL ‘HISTORY.

[THIRD SERIES.]

No. 117. SEPTEMBER 1867.

XX.—On Venomous Fishes. By M. Aucuste Dumrrit*.

THERE are numerous instances on record of poisoning due to

the use of certain fishes as food: the manner in which such

venomous properties are acquired has long been matter of re-

search.

Causes of the Poisonous effects produced by the Flesh of Fishes.

It is evident that the nature of the waters in which they live

must exercise a considerable influence upon the qualities of the

flesh.

A. Waters in which textile plants have been allowed to rot, or

in which carcasses have become decomposed—all such, in fact,

as have been corrupted by the presence of matter in a state of

putrefaction will be capable of rendering unfit for food any fish

which may inhabit them. This was the case with the waters of

the Loire in 1794, when, on account of the number of persons

drowned at Nantes, the police were obliged to forbid not only

drinking of the river, but even fishing in it.

B. Another source of such taint is to be apprehended from

the discharge of the refuse of different manufactures into the

waters.

II.

Herrings, both salted and smoked, sometimes occasion acci-

dents of this kind, when, from long keeping, the ingredients

employed in their preservation have lost their efficacy.

Sometimes deleterious effects are to be traced to the imperfect

or bad curing of such fish. In other cases of this nature the

* Translated, from the ‘ Annales de la Soc. Linnéenne du Département

de Maine-et-Loire,’ 8™° année, 1866, by Arthur W. E. O’Shaughnessy.

Ann. & Mag. N. Mist. Ser.3. Vol. xx. 11

154 M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

accident is mainly due to zdiosyncrasy or some peculiar condition

of the stomach, by which certain aliments, generally easy of

digestion, become a sort of poison.

ITI.

The supposition has been put forward that the noxious pro-

perties of various fishes are dependent on circumstances con-

nected with their aliment.

Thus Munier, in a letter to Sonnerat (Journal de Physique,

1774, t. m1. p. 129), says that in Bourbon and Mauritius, be-

tween December and March, or even April, none of the Scari

which he calls “ Vieille” and “ Perroquet ” (the precise deter-

mination of which, as Valenciennes has remarked*, is uncertain)

are eaten. They are then regarded with mistrust, because,

during the season when the coral is growing, they eat great

quantities of the animal which constructs it.

According to Munier, the causticity of the juices of their

prey is the only cause of their baneful properties.

Commerson, in his manuscripts, says, speaking of the “Catau-

bleue ” (Scarus capitaneus, Cuv. et Val. t. xiv. p. 230), that this

species, like its congeners, gnaws the coral, and is consequently

looked upon with suspicion in both the Ile-de-France and

Bourbon.

M. Dussumier, in the MS. catalogues accompanying the fishes

brought by him from the Indian seas (Val. Hist. Poiss. t. xiv.

p- 252), has noted that the inhabitants of Bombay regard with

mistrust another Scarus (Sc. harid), its flesh béing reputed —

dangerous when it has fed upon corals.

Certam Annelides of the northern seas, hitherto ill-deter-

mined, are sometimes so abundant as to give a red tint to the

water. They are eaten by the herrings, and are thought to be

capable of communicating hurtful properties to their flesh (Cuv.

et Wal. Hist. Poiss. t<xx. p. 71).

In Duhamel’s ‘ Traité des Péches’ (2¢ partie, sect, ii. p. 549)

are some remarks by Barbotteau relative to the sardine of the

Antilles (Harengula humeralis, Cuv. et Val.). This fish is said

to have a baneful effect, occasioning fevers, and often even death,

when it has been taken in the vicinity of copper or has fed on

the zoophytes named “ Men-of-war ” (Physalia). It is worthy of

notice that Lherminier, who resided for a long time in Guade-

loupe, observed it to be venomous in all seasons, and, indeed, to

such an extent as to cause death in a few minutes.

The fish named Courpata at Nice, and which Risso has made

the type of the genus Tetragonura, cannot be eaten. That

* Cuv. et Val. Hist. d. Poiss. t. xiv. pp. 237 & 238.

M.A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes. 155

naturalist experienced the extent of its unwholesomeness by

many very serious accidents. He says (Ichth. de Nice, p. 350)

that its pernicious qualities arise from its feeding on a species

of Medusa common in the Mediterranean, and belonging to

the genus Stephanomia, which possesses acrid and irritating

properties to an extreme degree. Valenciennes remarks with

reason upon the strangeness of the fact that the internal mem-

brane of the digestive tube of the fish may be brought into

contact with so caustic a substance (the pernicious qualities of

which are by no means destroyed by such contact, since they

are capable of bemg communicated afterwards) without any ill

effect upon the organs of the animal itself.

In many cases, then, such poisoning may be attributed to the

kind of food which the fish partakes of: we cannot, however,

consider this to be the sole cause. There are, in fact, venomous

species where no polypes are to be found; and, on the other

hand, some which are caught in islands like Marie-Galante,

surrounded by these aggregated zoophytes, are not more dan-

gerous than those from other quarters. Further, if such fishes

do indeed, as is reported, retain the odour of the coral, it is not

always because they have eaten of it, but merely from their

having existed in its vicinity.

I must not here omit to mention the experiments made by

Moreau de Jonnés with a view to obtaining light upon this

subject. He placed in a basin occupied by species of fish which

are considered capable of becoming venomous some Aplysia,

sea-stars, medusze, and portions of polypes; he found that this

food was exceedingly repulsive to them, and that, after a long

time, although having no other sort of nourishment, they had

left them altogether intact. M. Moreau de Jonnés then forced

them to eat a considerable quantity of the acrid substance of

these animals, mixing and disguising it in farinaceous paste ;

and, thus involuntarily nourished upon that which they had

previously rejected, they caused no sort of ill effect when eaten

at table*.

Amongst the substances from feeding upon which fishes are

supposed to derive their baneful properties, are the fruits of the

Manchineel (Hippomane mancinella, Linn.), which are held in

great dread in the Antilles ; however, as M. Moreau de Jonnés

* Are the poisonous qualities of certain fishes of the Antilles attributable

to their preyig upon the abundant and much-dreaded Meletta thrissa,Val.?

Ferguson (‘On the Poisonous Fishes of the Caribbee Islands,” in Trans.

Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 1821, t.ix. p. 76) supports this notion. He says that,

in localities where this Meletta abounds, accidents are more frequent ;

while they are almost unknown in those portions of the Antilles where it

is rare.

11*

156 M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

asks, in his memoir already cited (pp. 19-26), is it ascertained

that fishes really eat these fruits? Searching in their digestive

organs with the utmost care, during his stay in Martinique,

for the nuts of this euphorbiaceous fruit (the monospermic cells

of which are rendered so remarkable by their minute pointed

and sharp apophyses), he never succeeded in finding any.

Judging, moreover, from the great quantities of these fruits

which find their way into the sea, the margin of which is often

covered with them, would not such accidents, resulting from the

consumption of fish caught in such waters, be even more frequent

than they are?

TY.

In some countries it is customary to cast noxious plants into

the water, in order to render the fisheries more rapid and abun-

dant. The fish, coming in crowds to the surface to die, are

taken without difficulty in considerable numbers in a very short

space of time. Many procedures of this kind are to be severely

condemned as really capable of rendering the fishes poisonous.

The fruits of the Cocculus suberosus, and many shrubs of the

same genus confounded under the common name of ‘‘ Coque du

Levant,” are more particularly employed for this purpose. The

Indians bruise them, mix them with a species of crab, and make

them into pellets of the size of a cherry, which the animals take

with great avidity. The effect is very immediate.

M. P. F. G. Boullay, in a dissertation on the natural and che-

mical history of the ‘ Coque du Levant,” published in 1818,

made known the use of this substance as the basis of several

receipts current in Europe. Fish taken with the aid of such a

bait putrefy very readily, and, if not cooked or prepared imme-

diately, may become venomous, as shown by the experiments of

M. Goupil de Nemours, who caused certain animals to eat the

flesh of fishes poisoned with this substance (Bullet. Fac. de Méd.

de Paris et de la Soc. établie dans son sein, t.1. 1807, p. 143).

I ought, however, to observe that there must still remain

some uncertainty as to the reality of the accidents attributed to

the use of such as food, since the “ Coque du Levant”? is fre-

quently employed in India in fisheries whose product is intended

for consumption.

A further example of the innocuousness of fishes subjected to

the influence of certain poisonous plants is furnished by M. de

Castelnau (Voy. dans les parties centr. de ’Amér. du Sud,

1855, Paris, pp. vi-vi). An extremely plentiful supply of fishes

having been obtained on the great lake near the Rio Sarayacu,

in the Missions of the Ucayale, by means of the poison residing

in the stems of the Barbasco or Necklace-wood (Jacquinia armil-

M.A. Daméril on Venomous Fishes. 157,

laris, Linn.), these, after rapidly undergoing the destructive in-

fluences of the plant, were eaten without ill effect, and the

natives even drank the waters of the lake with impunity*.

Among the causes of the unwholesomeness of certain species

we should perhaps mention, as exercising some influence on

their qualities, the age and, by consequence, the size of the fish;

for the most venomous may generally be submitted to culinary

preparation while they are still young. The accuracy of this

statement, which might seem somewhat singular, is attested by

the fact that, at Havana, it is not forbidden to expose for sale

in the market the Caranaz fallax, Cuv. & Val., unless it weighs

more than one kilogramme. In the island of Trinidad, as Dr. J.

Court, who practised medicine there for some time, informs me,

the Becuna or Sphyrena may be eaten with impunity if still of

small size. He adds that the same rule applies to all the fishes

held to be venomous: when they have not attained their full

dimensions, there is nothing to dread from using them as food.

The natives of Hayti hold the same opinion with respect to a

Serranus (S. rupestris, Cuv. & Val.), there commonly called

‘Grande guenle,’ and designated also by the English name of

Rock-fish. This fish may attain a length of O™80; but when

* M. Mouchon, junr. (Journal de Méd. prat. de Bordeaux, 2° sér. 1840,

t. xl. p. 152) gives two lists of plants which are known to be employed as

such auxiliaries i the capture of fishes. These lists have been reproduced

by MM. A. Chevallier and Duchesne (Mém. sur les Empoisonnements par

les Huitres...et par certains Poissons, p.59; Ann. d’Hyg. et Méd. Lég.,

1851, t. xlv.) :—

I. Plants that are baneful in effect upon the human species, particularly

if the precaution be not taken of well clearing and scraping the fish be-

fore preparing it for food:—1l. Cocculus suberosus, DeCand., Coque du

Levant: the fruits. 2. Delphinium staphisagria, Linn.: the seeds. 3. D.

Requienii, DeCand.: the seeds. 4. Hydnocarpus inebrians, Vahl: the

fruit. 5. Menispermum lacunosum, Lamarck: the fruit. 6. Taxus bac-

cata, Linn.: the leaves. 7. Veratrum sabadilla, Retzius : the capsules.

Il. Plants that are not hurtful to man :—1. Barringtonia speciosa, Rum-

phius, Butonica speciosa, Lam.: the almonds eaten by the Chinese sailors

under the name of “square caps.” 2. Calophyllum inophyllum, Lam. :

affords the ‘‘ Calaba” balm used for poisoning fishes. 3. Cerbera ahouat,

Lam.: the wood. 4. Daphne fetida, Lam.: the seeds. 5. Euphorbia

cotinifolia, Linn.: the entire plant. 6. Galega sericea, Thunb. : the root.

7. G. toxicaria, Sw.: the leaves. 8. Lepidium piscidium, Forster: the

leaves and the seeds. 9. Paullinia pinnata, Linn.: the seeds. 10. P. tri-

ternata, Linn., Serjania lethalis, St. Hil., “ Liane a persil,” ‘‘ Timbo” of

Brazil: the leaves. 11. Phyllanthus brasiliensis, Lam., P. conami, Wild.,

Poison-wood : the twigs with leaves and the roots bruised. 12. P. virosus,

Roxburgh: the shoots and leaves pounded. 13. Piscidia carthaginensis,

Linn.: twigs and foliage crushed together. 14. Potalia amara, Aublet :

the stems and leaves. 15. Robinia nicou, Aubl., or R. scandens, Wilden.

158 M.A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

of this size, it is dreaded as often proving poisonous (MS.

note by Plée in Cuv. & Val. t. ix. p. 440); and Thomas (of

Salisbury) (Traité Méd. Prat., translated by H. Cloquet, t. 11.

p- 648) says that all fishes exceeding the average dimensions

are regarded with mistrust by the fishermen.

The baneful properties would seem to be developed diversely,

according to the season of the year. Thus, in the Loyalty

Islands, as M. Jouan, captain of a frigate, has observed in a

notice published by him relative to these islands (Mém. de la

Soc. Impér. des Sc. Nat. de Cherbourg, t. xvii.), many species

are dangerous, and even deadly, according to the time of the

year at which they may have been taken. It often occurs, he

says, that the natives poison themselves by partaking of fishes

which at other seasons have been eaten with perfect impunity.

In the Antilles many fishes, as the ‘ Petit Négre’ (Serranus

migriculus, C. & V.) and others, should be avoided at certain

periods of the year, in the same way that we cease to take

oysters during the season of their reproduction.

It is, indeed, at the time of spawning that we observe such

species to become dangerous. The Conger or sea-eel, for in-

stance, will occasion dysentery at the time of depositing its ova

(Risso, Ichth. de Nice, p. 93).

It is further known that the ova of the pike, barbel, and

burbot are very efficient purgatives ; and these fishes have more

than once, when taken in the act of spawning, caused accidents

due to the precaution having been omitted of completely clearing

away both the organs and products of generation. Dr. Franque

has published a curious observation relative to effects experienced

by four persons who had eaten the ova of the barbel, while

others, who had rejected the ova but partaken of the flesh of the

fish, felt no ill consequence (Journ. fiir Kinderkrankheiten, &

Gaz. Méd. 1859, p. 526).

VII.

To the different causes already enumerated we must now add,

as holding an important place in the etiology of this subject,

such alteration as may supervene in the tissues, and more parti-

cularly in the flesh. How, in fact, otherwise shall we explain

“many very serious cases in which food, mode of capture, and

such changes as are dependent upon age and seasor of the year

have nothing to do with the effects produced ?

Sometimes there is no cause whatever for apprehension ;

sometimes, on the contrary, results would justify any amount of

previous mistrust and circumspection. Thus the Becuna of the

M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes. 159

Antilles (Sphyrena becuna, Lacép.), which is a very savoury fish,

is, however, eaten with considerable caution, on account of its

often proving venomous; but when the roots of the teeth are

not black, according to M. Poey’s remark (Cuv. & Val. t. i.

p- 341), or when a silver spoon or coin, placed in the vessel in

which the fish is being cooked, does not become blackened, the

flesh may be eaten without fear *,

In the same category must be ranged the great Sphyrena

(S. barracuda, Cuv. & Val.), sometimes named Esox barracuda, on

account of its resemblance to the pike, both as regards its general

form and the quality of its flesh. It is very often poisonous ;

and the tests employed are the same as in the case of the Be-

cuna, a peculiar bitterness of the liver, however, being an addi-

tional sign in the case of this fish.

There is a belief in the Antilles that this fish becomes poisonous

as a consequence of certain conditions of alimentation. How-

ever, according to MNS. observations of Plée, reproduced by

Cuvier (Hist. Poiss. t. iii. p. 346), “its venomous properties are

due to a particular condition of the individual, which would

seem to recur at different periods.”

“Tf, on cutting it, a white watery fluid or matter, which is a

certain sign of malady, be not seen to issue,” it may be eaten

with perfect safety.

“ When salted,” adds Plée, ‘it never produces any ill effects.

At Ste. Croix it is customary to defer eating it until the day after

that on which it has been subjected to the action of the salt.”

Dr. Guyon, Sanitary Inspector of troops at Martinique, has

expressed an opinion similar to that of Plée, in a MS. memoir

which he has kindly communicated to me, and of which the

‘Comptes Rendus Ac. Sc.’ 1856, t. xlu. p. 840, have given only

an extract referring to the symptoms attending the phenomena

of poisoning. According to him, the real cause is a commence-

ment of decay in the flesh of the fish.

Knowing the rapidity with which, in hot climates, a certain

modification of tissue, not actually amounting to putrefaction,

will set in (some species being, no doubt from various causes at

present hidden from us, more particularly exposed to such modi-

cation than others), we can easily understand that such dire

results should so frequently occur.

In support of this opinion, which I also share, M. Guyon

alleges the following facts :—

* Thomas (Joc. cit. p. 648) says, however, that implicit confidence is not

to be placed in this as a preventive measure. He says that a surer method

is that of giving to a duck, a cat, or a dog the intestines of the fish, which

may be eaten with perfect security if, after an hour or two, no accident

shall have happened to the animal.

160 M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

1. The mackerel taken at St. Helena is, according to Quar-

rier, constantly poisonous if kept for a single might; if pre-

pared, however, on the same day on which it is caught, it is

not so.

2. The inhabitants of the Antilles say that the Bonito should

be dressed for the table as soon as it is taken from the water*.

3. The Chinese eat the Tetraodon ocellatus, one of their best

fishes, as soon as it is capturedy.

4. The instances of poisoning belong almost exclusively to

countries where the temperature is very high, and more espe-

cially to the great heats of the year—that is to say, when de-

composition is most rapid.

5. Finally, it is to a phenomenon of this sort that we must

attribute the change of colour which takes place on a silver

spoon plunged into the vessel in which the fish is being cooked,

black sulphuret of silver being formed as a consequence of the

liberation of sulphuretted hydrogen, which is a sure indication

of a decay of tissue.

VEU:

In fishes that are thus baneful, it is perhaps sometimes a

condition of disease which alters the natural qualities.

IX.

I pass over in silence the réle attributed to copperas-beds

in certain marine bottoms. In the already cited memoir by

M. Moreau de Jonnés (pp. 14-19) there are some remarks of

sufficient weight, tending to demonstrate the impossibility of

accepting the hypotheses which have been put forward on this

subject.

In conclusion, it is evidently not proper to adopt any one of

* The necessity of eating this fish without delay has often been remarked;

but an instance of the danger incurred by neglecting to do so is given in a

memoir by M. Morvan de Lannilis (Journ. de Chim. Méd., Pharm., Toxicol.,

rédigé par A. Chevallier, 4° série, t. i. p. 719, 1857), who relates that

five persons, having experienced no ill effects after eating, on board the

corvette ‘Corneline,’ at Teneriffe, some Bonitos freshly caught, suffered

severely for an hour or two on the following day for having breakfasted on

some of those reserved over night. M.Guyon witnessed at Martinique, in

1822, a case of poisoning which, though not mortal, disturbed the health

of an entire company of soldiers for several hours most fearfully. The

repast, which took place at 3 o’clock p.M., consisted of Bonitos bought

in the afternoon of the preceding day, and supposed to have been taken

in the morning of that day. Thus the thirty hours since the fish were

first captured sufficed for a most considerable alteration in their condi-

tion.

+ According to Forster, this is the fish eaten by the Japanese when they

wish to commit suicide.

M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes. 161

the foregoing explanations of these phenomena to the exclusion

of the others. We have, in fact, seen that several of them are

entitled to equal consideration. Further, in spite of what has

been hitherto asserted, such poisonous action is not to be attri-.

buted to any poison of a particular nature, sui generis. There

is, in fact, no known ichthyic venom*.

Enumeration of such Fishes as are known to be poisonous.

1. Of these there is certainly none more to be dreaded than

the Clupea known by the name of “‘Cailleu-tassard” in the French

colonies of the Antilles, and by that of “ yellow-bill sprat ” in

the English colonies of the same islands (Meletta thrissa, Val.).

I lave already mentioned it when speaking of the opinion ex-

pressed by Ferguson that fishes acquire poisonous properties

merely through having fed upon the ‘ Cailleu-tassard.? Making

allowance for the exaggeration of this statement, we may never-

theless regard the poison residing in the flesh of various spe-

cies as due to the influence of this Meletta, which is indeed

venomous to an almost incredible degree, as attested by Rob.

Thomas (of Salisbury), who practised the medical profession in

these colonies. He relates that this fish has, in several instances,

been known to occasion death, with frightful convulsions, in the

space of half an hour (Nouv. Traité de Méd. Prat., transl. by

Hipp. Cloquet, t. u. p.641). Death, prompt and certain, he

says, 18 the consequence of a repast composed of this fish

(p. 642)+.

2. Another Meletta, proper to the Indian seas (M. venenosa,

Val.), is almost equally formidable. It is probably to this spe-

cies that Capt. Jouan refers in a letter to me, dated 1861, from

Port de France (New Caledonia), where he says the “ Sardines,”

as they are vulgarly called, are nearly always poisonous.

* Hipp. Cloquet, in the Dict. d. Se. Nat. t. xxi. p. 550 et seq., has treated

the present subject under the above title; but he has made use of this

expression merely to designate poisonous effects produced by the alimentary

use of different species, without connecting them with any special veno-

mous properties residing in their flesh.

{It may be as well to call attention to Dr. Giinther’s discovery of a

poison-organ in a Batrachoid fish (Proc. Zool. Soe. 1864, p. 155).—Tr. ]

t Can it be true, as, indeed, the negro fishermen of Guadeloupe informed

W. Ferguson (‘On Poisonous Fishes of the Carribbee Islands,’ Trans.

Roy. Soc. Edinb. 1821, t. ix. p. 69), that the ‘ Cailleu-tassard’ is never

venomous when taken in the Bay of La Basse-terre, even at the season when

it is more particularly dangerous out of that bay, though at a very slight

distance and along with other Clupee which cause no ill effects whatever ?

{ He informs me, in another letter, that many fearful and sudden acci-

dents, occurring after the occupation of New Caledonia, caused several of

the fishes of its coast to be regarded with suspicion. He asserts that their

162 M.A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

3. In 1853, Dr. Pappe (Synopsis of the Edible Fishes of the

Cape of Good Hope, p. 7 e¢ seg.) drew attention to some serious

accidents occasioned by the use as food of a Tetraodon which he

referred to the T. Honkenyi of Bloch. This creature, he says, is

the terror of the fishermen and inhabitants of the Cape. Many

cases of death are cited as having been caused by it in the

colony. Thus, at a period already remote, in the time of the

war, when Muizenburg and its environs was occupied by the

English troops, some soldiers perished from having imprudently

eaten of this fish. In 1856 a ship-boy belonging to a Danish

trading-ship, in 1845 two sailors attached to a Dutch vessel

then at anchor in the Bay of Simon, and in 1846 a man belong-

ing to the French corvette ‘Oise’ underwent a similar fate.

By reason of the frequency of these occurrences, Dr. Pappe

expresses wonder that Government has not, with a view to pre-

venting them, inserted amongst the regulations of the port an

absolute interdiction of the use of so formidable a species.

4. In 1858, M. Fonssagrives, Physician in Chief to the Marine

and Professor at the Faculty of Medicine at Montpellier,

completed, with the aid of documents furnished by Dr.

Praeger, the remarks and observations relative to poisonous

fishes commenced in his ‘Traité d’Hygiéne Navale;’ he calls

particular attention to the external characters of the Spotted

Tetraodon (Geneion maculatum, Bibr.). So’ frequent are the

accidents caused by it, that ships anchoring at the Cape are now

warned against it by the local authority (Bull. Acad. Méd.

texte. p. 1059),

Thus the desire of Dr. Pappe relative to administrative mea-

sures has been realized in the colony.

To such instances as we have already cited Dr. Praeger has

added another—that of two sailors in the Dutch brig ‘ Postillon,’

who, in 1845, succumbed to the baneful influence of this fish,

one of them having eaten only the liver.

Other Tetraodons undoubtedly produce similar effects. There

is one in New Caledonia, not designated specifically, which is

particularly terrible, simce Captain Jouan (doc. cit. p. 8) has seen

5 grammes of its flesh occasion the death of a pig with dreadful

convulsions.

dangerous properties are due to their feeding on medusz and polypes, and

more especially on the coral when it is “in flower.”

A very grave instance of poisoning, fatal in the case of three of the

persons, had occurred previously at Port Balade (New Caledonia), in

1852, the parties concerned being sailors belonging to the corvette ‘Catinat,’

who had eaten of the venomous Meletta. A very particular account of

this case has been given by M. Lacroix, surgeon-major to the corvette.

(Revue Coloniale, 2¢ série, Mars 1856, pp. 257-265.)

M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes. 163

5. A fish of the same family, of which, however, the lower jaw

differs from the same in Tetraodon by presenting only a single

dentary piece (the Diodon orbiculare), produces death, as at-

tested by M. Moreau de Jonnés at Martinique, either imme-

diately or after two months of suffering.

6&7. As formidable in the order Plectognathi, we may cite

many Balistes, and in particular that called ‘ Vieille’ (B, vetula,

Bl.), and the ‘ Coffre cornu’ (Ostracion cornutus).

8,9, 10,11,&12. After the Becuna (Sphyrena becuna, Lacép.,

Cuy. & Val. t. ii. p. 340) and the great Sphyrena (S. barracuda,

Cuv. & Val. t. iii. p. 343), I would also indicate the false Caranax

(C. fallax, Cuv. & Val. t. ix. p. 95), the Scarus called ‘ Catau-

bleue’ in Mauritius (Sc. capitaneus, Cuv. & Val. t. xiv. p. 228,

pl.403), and the Lachnolemus caninus (Cuv. & Val. t. xiii. p. 288).

It is to one or other of these species that the accidents men-

tioned in a journal of Noy. 23, 1855, must be attributed :—

An American whaler, starting from Boston, in March 1854,

for the Pacific, stopped to take in water at the islands of Juan

Fernandez, situated at about 700 kilometres from Chili, to which

they belong. During some hours of leisure the men took to

fishing ; and at night, when the anchor was raised, more than

200 kilogrammes of fish had been taken. Among many species,

those commonly called by the sailors ‘Carangue,’ ‘ Capitaine,’

and ‘ Vieille’ &c. were remarked. The greater number were

cooked for the men’s supper, the officers distributing also a

ration of arrack.

But a few hours elapsed after this repast before forty-two of

the men out of the fifty-seven who formed the company of the

ship were seized with dizziness, pains in the belly, nausea, and

repeated vomitings. The pains in the intestines became inter-

mittent, and were followed by prostration and a state of coma,

which, after eleven hours of atrocious suffering, terminated in

the death of thirty-four of the sailors, im spite of every attention

and solicitude. The recovery of the remaining eight was very

slow, and accompanied by pains and burnings in the limbs,

pealing off of the skin, paralysis of part of the body (and, in

the case of some, of all the members) for a longer or shorter

time—eight days and a half with some, five days with the rest.

The differences were evidently due to the quality of the various

kinds of food which had been taken, and to the constitution of

the individuals.

Of the fifteen who continued healthy, four suffered only from

severe colics accompanied by pains in the stomach and followed

by a dysentery which lasted not longer than two or three days.

The evening repast of the captain, mate, surgeon, and other

164: M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

officers was already over when the bell called the men to supper;

and a reserve of the products of the fishery had been appro-

priated for their breakfast on the morrow ; to this circumstance

they owed their safety.

13-16. I have already made known the serious consequences

which sometimes attend the introduction into the digestive pas-

sages of the flesh of the Bonito (Thynnus pelam wa) when not

dressed immediately after it has been taken from the water.

This is not the only Scomberoid which should be used with

caution, Thus the ‘Tassard guarapucu’? (Cybium caballa,

Cuv. & Val. t. viii. p. 188) is indicated by Plée as being some-

times poisonous. Ferguson (“ On Poisonous Fishes of the Car-

ribbee Islands,” Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb. 1821, t. ix. p. 66) has

given an account of a case of poisoning which occurred at St.

Domingo, in the house of the Quartermaster-General, when

every one present had partaken of a fine individual of this spe-

cies. Each person was variously affected, according to the

quantity taken. The negro cook died; and the wife of the

Quarter-master, having dined almost exclusively on the fish,

experienced the effects of the poison for several months.

The species of Caranz called C. Plumieri, Cuv. & Val. t. ix.

p. 65, which is very similar to the mackerel in taste, and must

not be confounded with the false Caranx (C. fallax) already

spoken of as being always dangerous food, is also at times pro-

ductive of harm. ‘This is indicated by the bones displaying a

red hue; and, according to Lherminier, the venomous property

is then so virulent that the fish is used as a poisoned bait for

rats. There is, in fact, no species of this family, even to the

tunny (Thynnus vulgaris, so prized for the excellent quality of

its flesh in all parts of the Mediterranean), which should not be

subjected to strict scrutiny before being offered for sale; for

there are on record various instances of persons suffering more

or less severely from having eaten of this fish too long after its

capture. M. de Martens, .in the account of his Voyage to Venice

(t. . pp. 432 & 433), relates the prudent administrative measures

which, in that city, restrict the sale of the tunny to within four-

and-twenty hours after its capture.

17 & 18. Among the Clupeide, the Anchovy of the Indian

seas (named Engraulis belama, Cuv. & Val., or Anchovy of

Forskal), like the Meletta venenosa already cited as an original

inhabitant of those seas, is not less formidable than this latter

species, when, in preparing it, the precaution of taking away

the head and intestines has been neglected. M. Dussumier, in

his Catalogue, says that one only of these anchovies will cause

the death of a man.

To this list of fishes which are poisonous others might cer-

M.A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes. 165

tainly be added; but the scientific determination of many is at

present so uncertain that the mere mention of them would be

of very little utility.

Accidents occasioned by the use of poisonous kinds of Fishes.

The preceding details have made known some of the sym-

ptoms of this species of poisoning. Their similarity in every case

is remarkable. Many of them, it is true, especially those which

characterize more properly the graver stages of functional affec-

tion, may be absent when the result is not destined to be fatal ;

but these symptoms, variable in their intensity, are constantly

the same.

First of all supervenes dizziness, obscuring of the vision, and

giddiness. ‘To these feelings are constantly added palpitation

of the heart, and a sensation of weight and heat in the sto-

mach and entire abdomen. At the same time the pulse be-

comes slower and feebler, and the patient is soon obliged to

resort to a horizontal position. Then commence the urticary

symptoms so commonly attendant upon poisoning by means of

mussels, and the essential character of which is the appearance

on the face and on different parts of the body of numerous

shght elevations, red or white blotches of irregular form and

variable dimensions, resembling the blisters produced by the

sting of nettles, and surrounded by a ring of matter of an almost

crimson hue. The palms of the hands and soles of the feet are

more particularly the seat of a sensation of burning, the con-

comitant of eruption. This is accompanied, according to the

testimony of Thomas (of Salisbury) (Traité Méd. Prat., transl.

by H. Cloquet, t. u. p. 643), by a tingling of the hands when

these are immersed in water—a certain indication, as he remarks,

of the true nature of the malady.

The sensation of tingling was the culminating symptom of a

case of poisoning observed by M. Gasquet, and of which Dr.

Roux, junr., of Brignoles, furnished an account to the Société

Imp. de Médecine de Marseille, prefacing the same by certain

remarks on the poisonous properties of fishes (Bull. des Trav.

of that Society, 1860, pp. 97-116*). “The palms of the hands

and soles of the feet,” says M. Gasquet, “ were the seat of pains

such as might be produced by the points of needles heated in

flame. This tingling, which was unaccompanied by any redness

or swelling, occasioned a continual agitation in the seven men

who were under the influence of the poison: they could not re-

main at rest; and the least touch or the effort of walking caused

* The fish in this instance was a percoid, the species of which has uot

been ascertained.

166 M. A. Duméril on Venomous Fishes.

acute agony, drawing cries from the patients. These sensations

were so lasting that the sailors, when already in a satisfactory

state and restored to their avocations, experienced them still,

though in a modified degree. Later these gave place to a sin-

gular diminution of the sensibility : the impression produced by

the resistance of the ground and the physical qualities of ob-

jects held in the hand were very imperfect, and repeated appli-

cation of both touch and pressure became necessary to render

them complete.” Thus, as M. Gasquet remarks, the poison-

principle had produced a sort of sideration of the nervous sys-

tem. Perfect sensibility of touch did not return for a month after.

The urticary symptom extends also to the surface of the

buccal mucous membrane. There are often pains in the limbs,

and particularly at the articulations, where a considerable swell-

ing 1s sometimes apparent.

When the case is not destined to prove fatal, a few vomitings

will clear the digestive organs, whence Epsom salts will cause the

ejection of various matters in a liquid form and commonly of

a fetid odour. On the other hand, existence is generally

seriously compromised when very frequent evacuations, at-

tended by tenesmus and violent pains in the entrails and in-

voluntary emission of urine, take place. Nevertheless these

symptoms are not always precursors of death, even when they

have been very intense during several hours. The condition

of convulsion is a very troublesome complication ; and during

its continuance life may perhaps be arrested suddenly and ra-

pidly ; or, on the contrary, as in the remarkable case which

T have alluded to, in which thirty-four out of forty-two men

perished, it is during a profound insensibility, a sort of coma,

that the victim succumbs.

In the number of these phenomena which have been observed

we may range that mentioned by Thomas as experienced by

himself. Under the noxious influence of the flesh of the

Rock-fish (Serranus rupestris) he became completely yellow, as

in jaundice—his urine, as also the liquid result of transpiration,

assuming the same tint. In one or two patients, whom he

mentions, the tegumentary surface presented a similar change

of colour.

When convalescence takes place, it is accompanied by a de-

squamation of the skin (the epidermis of which is detached),

and often also by a falling off of the hair both of the head and

other parts of the body, and even of the nails. Further, it is

in all cases effected but slowly, as the constitution receives a

very severe shock, the effects of which are felt for years, and

disappear only by degrees. It is necessary to remove to a cold

climate, according to Thomas, who himself had recourse to this

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez. 167

method for a cure, which, after all, he obtained only at the end

of several years.

Treatment.

In cases of poisoning by means of fish there are two courses

to be followed :—(1) to induce, as promptly as possible, an

evacuation of the noxious substance; (2) to combat, or at least

endeavour to diminish, the effects produced by it.

Emeties serve to clear the stomach, which must then be sub-

jected to a process of rinsing or washing, by the free use of clear

fluids, such as water, imbibed in constant draughts. It is ne-

cessary, moreover, when the constitution admits of it, to act

upon the digestive tube by means of castor-oil or calomel. Such

is the local treatment to be applied to these cases, the intensity

of the symptoms in each being sufficient guide to the physician

as regards the regulation of the measures.

The general treatment should consist principally of the ad-

ministering of generous stimulants, such as tea and, in particular,

coffee and alcoholic liquors. ‘There are many examples of the

good which results from the use of these latter. I may cite one.

It is that of a case of poisoning by the flesh of a species of

Balistes, said to be B. vetula: twenty persons were affected, the

only exception being that of an old man who always drank rum

instead of wine at his meals.

Preparations of opium become advisable if, in spite of the use

of evacuants, the vomitings and irritation of the bowels continue.

They are especially to be prescribed in cases where convulsions

ensue, and then indeed, as Thomas recommends (loc. cit. p. 646),

in rather considerable doses. He adds that, in order to diminish

the heat, as also the dryness of the skin, slight doses of ipeca-

cuanha should be administered when the irritation of the bowels

has ceased.

After the removal of the symptoms, tonics are indispensable.

XXI.—On the Menispermacee.

By Joun Miszrs, F.R.S., F.L.S., &e.

[Continued from p. 20. ]

55. ELissARRHENA.

On previous occasions I have alluded to the fact that when

two Menispermaceous plants present themselves differing con-

siderably in their habit, especially in the nervation of their leaves,

we may be nearly certain that this character will be found ac-

companied by some dissimilarities in their floral and seminal

structure. So it has occurred with a plant from the Rio Negro,

168 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez.

which I proposed as the type of a new genus, and named Elis-

sarrhena longipes in my Synopsis of this family (hw. op. xi.

124). This species has been since described and figured by

Dr. Eichler under the name of Anomospermum grandifolium.

Its branches are fistulose, with very large leaves, upon unusually

long and stiff petioles: these leaves are flaccid in texture, con-

spicuously 5-nerved at base, the nerves being outwardly branched,

little divaricating, extending in a nearly parallel direction for

three-fourths of the length of the leaf, when they anastomose in

an arching manner with the few lateral nerves which spring from

the upper portion of the midrib; these nerves are all prominent

and shining on both sides, as are also the very conspicuous

transverse veins. In Anomospermum, on the contrary, the spe-

cies are very lofty climbers, all the branches having a wood

which is very compact and solid to the centre ; the leaves are

not a quarter the size of those of Elissarrhena, and upon shorter

and slender petioles ; they are coriaceous and finely reticulated,

with three simple slender nervures, springing from the base,

running for a short distance near the margin, and soon anasto-

mosing with many others that spring from the midrib, so that

they appear almost pinnately nerved, without the transverse

veins which form so conspicuous a feature in Elissarrhena; or

more frequently the nerves and reticulations are wholly immersed

in the thick parenchyma, so that they become almost impercep-

tible. This extreme difference in the general appearance of the

leaves is very striking. The inflorescence in Anomospermum is

always glabrous, normally consisting of two axillary solitary

flowers, each upon a pedicel the length of the petiole; but fre-

quently upon the same plant we find in the axils a long aphyl-

lous young branch, from which the nascent leaves have fallen

away or are abortive, so that the inflorescence thus assumes the

form of a very simple raceme, with two single pedicellated

flowers in each axillule, and much longer than the entire leaf:

the flowers are double the size, very glabrous; the petals are so

very thick and compressed together that they resemble a central

fleshy disk; the anthers consist of two oblong cells dorsally

affixed, each cell bursting introrsely by a longitudinal fissure.

On the other hand, in Hiissarrhena the inflorescence is very

tomentose, five-sixths to nine-tenths shorter than the petiole, con-

sisting of a peduncle with its apex separated into three very short

branches and again divided, each branchlet bearing three flowers

upon pedicels so very short that they appear almost sessile ; all are

thus closely approximated into a corymbulose and almost globular

head on the summit of the peduncle: the sepals are pubescent

on both sides ; the petals are of thinner texture, more separated,

cuneately orbicular, with the laterally lobed margins inflected, as

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 169

in Pycnarrhena and Antitavis, and embracing the filaments, as

in the latter genus; the filaments are thick and fleshy, flat in-

side, very convex outside; the anther, as in Anelasma, is sub-

globose, formed of two collateral cells semiimmersed in the

gibbous, incurved, clavated apex of the filament, and it opens

horizontally by an introrse transverse suture into two gaping

valves, each cell being rendered bilocellate by a semiseptum, as

in Anelasma, Antitaxis, and Pycnarrhena. The flower in its

structure thus most resembles that of Anelasma, only provided

with petals, but still more that of Antitaxis, only that the floral

parts are there tetramerous.

These differences are so many and so manifest that they

justify the maintenance of Hlissharrhena as a genus distinct

from Anomospermum. I have remarked, under Sciadotenia

(vol. xix. pp. 8325, 327) the analogy that exists in several points

between it and Elissarrhena, both from Guiana.

ELissaRRHENA, nob.—Flores dioici. Masc. Sepala 9, ternatim

disposita, utrinque puberula, margine ciliata, quorum 3 ex-

teriora bracteiformia, multo minora, 3 interiora intermediis

2-plo majora, orbiculata, concava, zstivatione imbricata, de-

mum expansa. Petala 6, sepalis triplo breviora, sublobato-

orbicularia, lobis lateralibus inflexis, imo cuneata, subcar-

nosa, glabra. Stamina 6, libera, zequalia, petalis opposita et

unguibus affixa, illis fere duplo longiora ; filamenta imo tenuia,

subincurva, sursum gradatim incrassata, intus plana, extus

convexa, summo gibboso-clavata; anthere subglobose, in-

trorse, filamento semummersx, 2-lobe, lobis rotundiusculis,

connectivo angustissimo collateraliter adnatis, singulis rima

horizontal bivalvatim hiantibus.

Frutex Brasiliensis, scandens; ramuli fistulosi, tomentosi ; folia

majuscula, oblonga, e bast 5-nervia, nervis conspicuis extus

ramosis et transverstm venosis, submembranacea, textura flac-

cida, glaberrima, longe petiolata: panicule g supra-azillares,

solitaria vel gemine, tomentose, petiolo 12-plo breviores ; pe-

dunculus ebracteatus, apice breviter trichotomus, ramis iterum

divisis, ramulis brevissimis, flores 3 fere sessiles gerentibus ;

inflorescentia hine corymbulosa aut fere capitata; flores parvi,

adpresse pubescentes.

The only known species will be fully described in the third

volume of my ‘ Contributions.’

Elissarrhena longipes, nob., huj. op. xi. 124 ;—Anomospermum

grandifolium, Hichl. in Mart. Fl. Bras. xxxvii. p. 169,

tab. 37. fig. 1—In Brasilia septentrionali: v. s. in herb.

varus, Rio Negro (Spruce, 1538).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 12

170 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez.

56. SyNCLISIA.

This genus was established by Mr. Bentham in his ‘ Genera

Plantarum’ (i. 86) ; it is one of African origin and of much in-

terest. Although nothing is known of its female flower or of

its seminal structure, it is there placed in the same section as

Tiliacora and Abuta, both very peculiar genera, remarkable for

their seeds with deeply ruminated albumen and a very long,

narrow, hippocrepiform embryo. The only apparent ground

for this arrangement is the valvate estivation of its inner whorl

of sepals; but with equal or even greater reason it might be

placed among the Pachygonee, near another African genus,

Triclisia, in which the inner sepals have also a valvate eestivation

and at their lower edges, though not agglutinated, adhere closely

together by their tomentose margins, and the stamens are

likewise partly monadelphous. Until its seed be known, it

appears to me much safer to place it among the genera of doubt-

ful position. One of its chief peculiarities is the agglutination

of the inner whorl of sepals, for more than half their length,

into a cylindrical 3-lobed tube, in which respect it bears some

resemblance to Cyclea and Peraphora: the six more external

"sepals, in two series, are much smaller, quite free, linear, and

very acute. It has six minute scale-like petals, and nine sta-

mens one-third the length of the inner sepals; of these, three

are more external, free, and a trifle shorter than the other six,

which are briefly monadelphous at their base, and central. The

inflorescence consists of two supra-axillary very slender pedicels,

double the length of the petiole, each bearing a solitary flower,

which is of rather a large size for the order. In its 1-flowered

axillary pedicels it therefore bears some resemblance to Pycnar-

rhena, Syrrhonema, and Antitazis. Only one species is known,

which has very slender scandent branches, and distant, cordate,

somewhat oval leaves, acuminated at the apex, with rather short

petioles.

Syncuis1A, Benth.—Flores dioici.— Mase. Sepala 9, subcarnosa,

in seriebus 3 alternatim disposita, quorum 3 exteriora bractei-

formia, 3 intermedia paulo majora, cuncta linearia, acutissima,

extus longe pilosa, intus glabra, 3 interiora 4-plo majora, in

tubum cylindraceum apice 3-partitum agglutinata, laciniis

tubo dimidio brevioribus, una cum tubo extus glabris, erectis,

subobtusis, sepalis externis 3-plo latioribus, marginibus sericeo

tomentosis, estivatione valvatim clausis. Petala 6, minima,

sepalis interioribus 10-plo breviora, suborbicularia, imo bre-

viter unguiculata, glabra. Stamina 9, quorum 3 exteriora

libera, paululo breviora, 6 centralia imo in stipite breviter

monadelpha, sepalis iterioribus 38-plo breviora; filamenta

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. Lika

paulo compressa, sursum gradatim crassiora; anthere bilobe,

exteriores subintrorse, centrales subextrorse, lobis connec-

tivo subexcurrente sejunctis, filamento fere lateraliter adnatis,

rima longitudinali subobliqua dehiscentibus.—FV. fam. ig-

noti.

Frutex scandens Africe occidentalis equinoctialis ; ramuli debiles;

folia ovata, cordata, apice acuminata, imo 5-nervia, pilis sparsis

munita: inflorescentia supra-axillaris, e pedicellis geminis uni-

floris ; pedicellus petiolo 2-plo longior ; flos pro ordine majus-

culus.

The only known species will be fully described in the third

volume of my ‘ Contributions to Botany.’

Synclisia scabrida.—In Africa equinoctiali: v.s. in herb, Hook.,

Gaboon River (Mann, 986) ; Congo (C. Smith).

57. PENIANTHUS.

Among the plants arranged under Fibraurea in the Hookerian

herbarium, I noticed one from the island of Fernando Po, which

is very different in habit, particularly in its leaves, which are

not triplinerved as in that genus; its inflorescence, instead of

being a very long and laxly spreading panicle, is barely half an

ich long, consisting of a very short supra-axillary peduncle

that supports a number of umbellated 1-flowered pedicels of

half its length, all being pubescent. It is a female specimen,

its flowers having nine sepals in three series diminishing in size

outwards and imbricated in estivation, six minute petals affixed

by their claws to the feet of as many sterile stamens seated

round a raised gynecium which supports three short, gibbously

cylindrical, pilose ovaries, almost concealed (when seen from

above) by their very large sessile stigmata, which resemble those

of Calycocarpum. Its leaves are of considerable size, lanceolately

oblong, narrowing towards both extremities, and acuminated

at the summit, having many parallel divergent nerves that

archingly anastomose together near the margin, in which respect

they offer some resemblance to Pycnarrhena. I know of no

genus to which this plant can be referred.

Penrantuvs, nob.—Flores dioici. Masc. ignoti.—Fem. Sepala

9, alternatim in ordine ternario disposita, quorum 38 exteriora

minora et bracteiformia, 3 intermedia ovata, paulo majora,

glabra, 3 interiora adhuc majora, orbiculari-ovata, concava,

carnosula, marginibus membranaceis, glabra, zstivatione im-

bricata. Petala 6, minima, staminibus opposita, late obovata,

erecta, subcarnosula. Stamina 6 sterilia, libera, ovarii dimidio

12*

172 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee.

breviora ; filamenta compressa, cum petalis gynecio affixa,

erecta; anthere 2-lobe, apicifixee, filamento dimidio breviores,

lobis oblongis, erectis, sine connectivo collateraliter adnatis,

lateraliter sulcatis, effoetis. Ovaria 3, cylindrico-ovata, gib-

bosa, arcte conferta, gynzecio brevi insita, pilosa, 1-locularia,

ovulo unico angulo ventrali appenso; stylus nullus; stigma

maximum, sessile, horizontaliter reflexum, depressum, radiatim

3-lobum, lobis deltoideis, margine eroso-denticulatis. Czetera

ignota. .

Frutex scandens, insule Fernando Po indigenus : folia majuscula,

lanceolato-oblonga, utrinque subacuta, apice attenuata, glabra,

penninervia, petiolo crassiusculo, subbrevi: pedunculus ¢

supra-azillaris, petiolo 4-plo brevior, apice pedicellos circiter 7

breves bracteolatos \-floros gerens ; flores parvt.

Its single species will be described in the forthcoming volume

of my ‘ Contributions to Botany.’

Penianthus longifolius, nob. huj. op. xiii. p. 124.—In insula

Fernando Po: v.s. in herb. Hook., loc. cit. (Mann, 194).

58. SELWYNIA.

This genus was founded on an Australian plant by Dr. F.

Mueller, who described it in his ‘Fragmenta,’ iv. 153. It is

evidently a climber, with slender branches, furnished with

shining, glabrous, lanceolate leaves, somewhat acute at both ex-

tremities, 8-nerved as well as triplinerved at base, reticulated,

and upon slender petioles. The ¢ inflorescence is axillary, pani-

culate, on a slender divaricated rachis half as long again as the

leaves, with alternate, long, spreading branches, each again with

alternate short branchlets bearmg from five to seven others,

which support from one to three sessile flowers on their apex :

the flower consists of from eight to ten sepals, all orbicular, very

concave, glabrous, the outer two ciliated on the margin, smaller

than the others, which are subequal, submembranaceous, and

much imbricated ; it has from eight to ten petals, half the size

of the sepals, cuneately oblong, with the lateral margins inflected

and embracing the stamens, subfleshy; from eight to ten sta-

mens the length of the petals and affixed to their claw, with 2-

lobed introrse anthers, the lobes dorsally and collaterally adnate

to the filament, each bursting by a longitudinal furrow. I have

had no opportunity of seeing either the female flower or the

fruit; but Dr. Mueller states that it bears three drupes (one or

two sometimes abortive), subglobose and stipitate, enclosing a

hard putamen of similar shape, rounded dorsally, somewhat

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez. 173

compressed on its faces, the condyle being internal and intru-

ding, thus rendering the cell hippocrepical and 4-locellate by a

monstrous expansion of the intruding condyle—a formation

which it is difficult to understand : the seed is said to be hippo-

crepiform, but whether with or without albumen is not stated,

nor is the shape of the embryo known. The genus must for the

present therefore be referred to the section made to include those

of doubtful position.

Setwynta, F, Mueller—lores dioici. Mase. Sepala 8-10,

orbicularia, valde concava, glabra, submembranacea, quorum

2—4 exterlora minora, margine ciliata, 6 interiora duplo ma-

jora, subzequalia, decussatim imbricata, omnino levia. Petala

8-10, sepalis dimidio breviora, cuneato-oblonga, sepalis

opposita, eequilonga, in unguibus iis affixa ;_filamenta subcom-

planata, sursum gradatim latiora; anthere introrse, filamento

dorso adnate, 2-lobz, lobis oblongis, collateraliter affixis, la-

teribus profunde sulcatis, in sulcis 2-valvatim dehiscentibus.—

Fem. Flos ignotus. Drupe 3, vel abortu pauciores, sub-

globose, imo stipitatz, basin versus stylo persistente signatz :

putamen durum, subglobosum, dorso convexum, in faciebus

subcompressum, loculo hippocrepiformi; condylus internus,

intra loculum longe intrusus. Semen hippocrepiforme. Cz-

tera ignota.

Frutex scandens Australie orientalis intertropice ; ramuli teretes,

tenues ; folia ovato-lanceolata, imo 3-nervia et triplinervia, longe

tenuiter petiolata: panicula $ aawillaris, glabra, folio multo

longivr, divaricato-ramosa, bracteolata, vamis alternis, iterum

ramulosis, ramulis ultimis 5-7, apice flores 1-3 sessiles geren-

tibus : inflorescentia 2 simpliciter racemosa.

The details of the only known species, as far as they are

known, will be given in the 3rd volume of my ‘ Contributions.’

Selwynia laurina, F. Muel. Fragm. iv. 153.—In Australia orien-

tali: v.s. im herb. Hook. 3, Rockingham Bay (F. Mueller).

59. ARISTEGA.

This genus is proposed for a plant in the Hookerian herbarium,

obtained from the Collection of the East-India Company, and

registered as from the Helford herbarium : no locality is stated ;

but it may be presumed to be of Indian origin. It has ovate

leaves, rounded at the base, acuminated at the summit, 3-nerved

as well as triplinerved, the nerves extending beyond the middle

and archingly anastomosing with the few other lateral nerves ;

the petiole is short and slender. The inflorescence consists of

174 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez.

two or more raceme-like panicles which spring out of the knotty

axils of the leafless old branches ; in these the rachis is slender,

longer than the leaves, furnished sparsely with short branches

again branched, the branchlets supporting from one to three

pedicellated flowers, all bracteolated at the articulations and

rigidly pubescent ; the flowers have nine sepals in three series,

alternately smaller, the outer bracteiform, the intermediate

somewhat larger, the three inner ones double the length of the

former, nearly orbicular, very concave, thick, with their margins

valvate in estivation ; they have three petals, smaller than the

sepals, fleshy, cuneately oblong, subconcave, emarginated at the

apex, having as many free stamens fixed to their claws; the

filaments, nearly as long as the petals, become much broader

and flattened towards the apex, to which two distinct divaricately

separated anther-lobes are dorsally affixed and partially imbedded,

the lobes bursting introrsely by a longitudinal furrow. Here

the chief peculiarity consists in the valvate estivation of its or-

bicular fleshy inner sepals, in which respect it resembles Tiliacora,

Abuta, Anelasma, Limacia, Triclisia, and Synclisia. From the

first and fourth it differs in having only three free stamens,

from the second and third in the presence of petals, from the

fifth in its stamens being only three in number with three petals,

and from the last in its sepals being orbicular and free to the

base, not oblong and united for half their length into a tube:

other differential features exist, which may be seen by comparing

the respective generic characters. This valvate character of its

stamens suggested the generic name *.

Aristeca, nob.—Flores dioici. Mase. Sepala 9, in ordine ter-

nario alternatim disposita, extus gradatim minora, quorum

6 exteriora bracteiformia, ovata, carnosula, preter margines

tenuiores longe piloso-ciliatos, glabra, 3 interiora dimidio

majora, suborbicularia, valde concava, apice inflexa, carnosa,

marginibus crassis, zstivatione arcte valvata, glabra. Pe-

tala 3, sepalis tertia parte breviora, alterna, cuneato-ob-

longa, apice emarginata, canaliculatim concava, carnosa, gla-

bra, staminibus paulo breviora et opposita. Stamina 3, libera;

filamenta unguibus petalorum affixa, sursum gradatim latiora,

crassiuscula, apice dilatata et rotundata; anthere 2-lobe,

introrse, dorso semiimmerse, lobis oblongis, segregatis, imo

paulo divaricatis, utrinque sulco longitudinali dehiscentibus.

Frutex scandens, origine ignoto, sed veristmiliter ex India orientali:

folia ovata, acute attenuata, 5-nervia, reticulata, glaberrima,

petiolo brevi et tenuti: panicule g racemiformes, solitarie aut

gemine, e nodis aphyllis annotinis orte, folii circa longitudine,

* From apt, valde; oréya, tego.

On the Recent Zoology and Paleontology of Victoria. 175

ramis approximatis brevibus, iterum ramulosis, ramulis brevis-

simis, pedicellos 1-3 unifloros gerentibus.

This plant will be more fully described in my ‘ Contributions

to Botany ’—

Aristega levifolia, nob.—Forsan ex India orientali.: v. s. in herb.

Hook. e museo Soc. Ind. orient. (hb. Helford).

[To be continued. ]

XXII.—On the Recent Zoology and Paleontology of Victoria.

By Freprrick M‘Coy, Professor of Natural Science in

the University of Melbourne, Director of the National Mu-

seum of Victoria, &c.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,

I drew up the following brief notice on the above subject for

our Intercolonial Exhibition, just held in Melbourne. If any

part of it should seem fit for your pages, I beg to place it at

your disposal.

I am, Gentlemen,

Your most obedient Servant,

Freperick M‘Coy,

In the following pages I shall only refer to those species of

animals affording economically useful materials, or of some spe-

cial present interest in relation to unsettled scientific questions.

ZOOLOGY.

MAMMATIA,

Very few of the Victorian quadrupeds are economically useful.

The skims of the various kangaroos (Macropus and Osphranter),

wallabies (Halmaturus) , and wombats (Phascolomys) afford various

qualities of leather, but are at present very little used; and for

food the only portions of any native quadruped appearing in the

market are the tails of the larger kangaroo, for soup. The flesh

of the smaller kinds, as well as that of wombats, opossums

(Phalangista vulpina and P. viverrina, var. Victorie*), hare-

kangaroos, and kangaroo-rats (Lagorchestes and Hypsiprymnus)

* The common ring-tail opossum of Victoria has no specific relation to

the rusty P. Cooki of New South Wales, and is constantly distinguishable

from the P. viverrina of Tasmania, of which it is at least a variety which

we may conveniently refer to under the name of P. Victoria.

176 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

and bandicoots (Perameles obesula and P. fasciata), afford abun-

dant food to the natives and wanderers lost in the bush.

The gigantic red kangaroo (Osphranter rufus) is only found

towards the warm northern boundary of the colony, where it

occurs in immense numbers, along with the rather rarer sooty

kangaroo (Macropus fuliginosus) and the Macropus ocydromus of

Gould, which is certainly a good and distinct species. These

three species are replaced in the cooler southern part of Victoria

by the Macropus major—the great “Old Man,” or “ Boomer”

kangaroo, as the male is termed by the colonists. Since the

new law increasing the fencing of the country taken up for

pastoral purposes, the number of individuals of those species of

kangaroo has increased prodigiously ; so that hundreds are on

occasions killed on some of the squatters’ runs merely to save

the grass for the sheep. The extensive poisoning of the native

dog, or dingo, by strychnine also tends of late years to increase

very greatly the numbers of the plant-eating animals. The

wallabies of the southern part of the colony are the Halmaturus

wallabatus, chiefly of the islands in Bass’s Straits, on some of

which H. Bennetti also occurs; and, curiously enough, I find

that H. brachyurus, looked upon by Gould as‘a rare species of

Western Australia, i is the common species of the south-eastern

portion of Victoria.

As some uncertainty seems to have been felt as to the occur-

rence of the genus Molossus in Victoria, it may be interesting

to state that I have lately got some additional examples of the

M. australis (now in the museum) from a hollow tree near Mel-

bourne ; so that there can be no doubt of the fact of the genus

extending to Victoria, although the habitat is so abnormal.

Of seals two species are not uncommon—the eared seal (Arcto-

cephalus lobatus) and the large spotted “sea-leopard” (Steno-

rhynchus leptonyx) ; but they are so much less abundant than

formerly that sealing has been quite given up for many years.

The fur of the Victorian fur-seal is of good quality when pro-

perly dressed. Fur rugs of beautiful softness, close and warm,

and often of elegant appearance, are annually made in thousands

from the skins of the opossum and the “ native cat” (Dasyurus

viverrinus), not only as carriage-wraps, but for use instead of

blankets by the great number of people whose business leads

them to sleep in the open air. So abundant and easily obtained

are these skins that a profitable export trade might possibly

result from their becoming better known to the European

furriers.

Of Crracna, a great number of the smaller-toothed sorts, of

no economic value, may be seen on our coasts; but also, occa-

and Paleontology of Victoria. Ly

sionally, whalebone-whales of enormous size are stranded on the

shores, and the oil and whalebone sent to market, without

giving rise to any extensive whaling-expeditions into the southern

waters. One of these whalebone-whales, 90 feet in length, was

cast on our shores last winter, and I have secured the skeleton of

it for our museum. It proves to be a new species of the genus

Physalus, or “finner.” The pectoral is about one-eighth of the

total length, and the ribs are sixteen on each side, and there are

about sixty vertebrae. It cannot be referred to the New-Zealand

Physalus antarcticus, as the “baleen” is black. The largest

blades of baleen are 18 inches wide at base, and 28 inches long.

This species, of which I hope to publish a more detailed illus-

trated description shortly, I name Physalus Grayi (M‘Coy), after

my valued friend Dr. Gray, of the British Museum, whose re-

searches on the Cetacea have so greatly aided and stimulated

the recent investigations in this difficult branch of zoology.

The whalebone of this whale, like that of the other “ Finners,”

is only fit for splitting into the false bristles for brushes &e.

BIRDS.

As my friend Mr. Gould has recently published in his ‘ Hand-

book of the Birds of Australia’ a list showing the geographical

distribution of the species generally over the continent, I sub-

join a list of those of Victoria, as the least-perfectly known of

the colonies, and presenting several interesting modifications of

Mr. Gould’s list.

I would remark that the specimen of Dendrocygna Eytoni in

the Melbourne Museum was purchased in the poultry-market,

and seen by myself with the flesh untouched; so that there is

no room for the doubt which has been expressed of the species

occurring in Victoria. Another interesting species, the Indian

and Kuropean little egret (Herodias garzetta), which is only

doubtfully quoted by Mr. Gould as an Australian bird, I have

carefully identified from a Gippsland specimen now in our Mu-

seum. The very rare Pycnoptilus floccosus, the locality of which

Mr. Gould is not certain of, occurs not uncommonly in the dense

brushes of the Yarra mountains. The new species of bristle-

bird (Sphenura Broadbenti, M‘Coy) is a very rare addition to this

curious genus, easily distinguished by its rufous head from the

previously known species. The Pardalotus xanthopyge (M‘Coy)

is a new species, brought under my notice by Mr. Leadbeater,

and which seems to appear first in the north-west part of Vic-

toria, and gradually to increase in numbers towards Adelaide,

where it seems to replace the P. punctatus, with which it has

previously been confounded.

178 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

LIST OF THE BIRDS OF VICTORIA

(Specimens of all of which are in the National Museum of Melbourne).

Ord. I. RAPTORES.

1. Fam. Falconide.

Aquila audax.

Polioaétus leucogaster.

Falco hypoleucus.

melanogenys.

— subniger.

lunulatus.

Hieracidea berigora.

occidentalis.

Tinnunculus cenchroides.

Leucospiza Rai.

Astur approximans.

cruentus.

Accipiter torquatus.

Milvus affinis.

Elanus axillaris.

scriptus.

Circus assimilis.

Jardinii.

2. Fam. Strigide.

Strix Nove Hollandiz.

tenebricosus.

delicatulus.

Hieracoglaux strenuus.

connivens.

Spiloglaux boobook.

Ord. II. INseEssoreEs.

1. Fam. Caprimulgide.

Mgotheles Nove Hollandiz.

Podargus strigoides.

brachypterus.

Eurostopodus albogularis.

2. Fam. Cypselide.

Cheetura caudacuta.

Cypselus pacificus.

3. Fam. Hirundinide.

Hirundo frontalis.

Hylochelidon nigricans.

Cheramceca leucosterna.

4, Fam. Meropide.

Merops ornatus.

6. Fam. Alcedinide.

Dacelo gigas.

Todiramphus sanctus.

pyrrhopygius.

Nove Hollandiz (albino).

Aleyone azurea.

7. Fam. Artamide.

Artamus sordidus.

personatus.

superciliosus.

leucopygialis.

8. Fam. Ampelide.

Pardalotus striatus.

punctatus.

affinis.

xanthopyge (M‘Coy).

9. Fam. Laniade.

Strepera graculina.

anaphonensis.

Gymnorhina tibicen.

leuconota.

Cracticus torquatus.

10. Fam. ——?

Grallina picata.

11. Fam. Campephagide.

Graucalus melanops.

mentalis.

Pteropodocys phasianella.

Campephaga Jardin.

humeralis.

Pachycephala glaucura.

melanura.

rufiventris.

— rufogularis.

olivacea.

Colluricincla harmonica.

Faleunculus frontatus.

Oreoica cristata.

12. Fam. Dicruride.

Chibia bracteata.

13. Fam. Muscicapide.

Rhipidura albiscapa.

rufifrons.

Sauloprocta motacilloides.

Seisura inquieta.

Piezorhynchus nitidus.

Myiagra plumbea.

—- concinna.

nitida.

Microeca fascinans.

Monarcha carinata.

—— trivirgata.

and Paleontology of Victoria.

14. Fam. —— ?

Smicrornis brevirostris.

15. Fam. Sazicolide.

Erythrodryas rhodinogaster.

Petroica multicolor.

— Goodenovii.

pheenicea.

Melanodryas cucullata.

Eopsaltria australis.

16. Fam. Menuride.

Menura superba.

Psophodes crepitans.

17. Fam. ——?

Malurus cyaneus.

melanotos.

Stipiturus malachurus.

Sphenura Broadbenti (M‘Coy).

Pycnoptilus floecosus.

Cisticola exilis.

lineocapilla.

ruficeps.

Sericornis osculans.

Acanthiza diemenensis.

— nana.

lineata.

Geobasileus chrysorrhous.

Ephthianura albifrons.

tricolor.

aurifrons.

Calamanthus fuligimosus.

Chthonicola sagittata.

18. Fam. Motacillide.

Anthus australis.

Cincloramphus cantillans.

Ptencedus rufescens.

19. Fam. ——?

Sphenceacus gramineus.

20. Fam. Sylviade.

Calamoherpe australis.

Mirafra Horsfieldii.

21. Fam. Fringillide.

Zoneginthus bellus.

gintha temporalis.

Stagonopleura guttata.

22. Fam. Merulide.

Cinclosoma punctatum.

castaneonotum.

Oreocincla lunulata.

23. Fam. Paradiseide.

Ptilonorhynchus holosericeus.

Chlamydodera maculata.

Mimeta viridis.

24, Fam. ?

Corcorax melanorhamphus.

26. Fam. Corvide.

Corvus australis.

28. Fam. Crateropodide.

Pomatostomos temporalis.

superciliosus.

ruficeps.

29. Fam. Meliphagide.

Meliornis longirostris.

Lichmera australasiana.

Glyciphila fulvifrons.

albifrons.

Ptilotis Lewinii.

leucotis.

auricomis.

ornata.

—— penicillata.

fusca.

chrysops.

Plectorhyncha lanceolata.

Meliphaga phrygia.

Entomophila picta.

Anthocheera carunculata.

Anellobia mellivora.

lunulata.

Tropidorhynchus corniculatus.

— citreogularis.

Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris.

Myzomela sanguinolenta.

nigra.

Entomyza cyanotis.

Melithreptus gularis.

— lnnulatus.

Myzantha garrula.

Manorhina melanophrys.

Diceeum hirundinaceum.

30. Fam.

Zosterops ceerulescens.

32. Fam. Certhiade.

Climacteris scandens.

—— erythrops.

leucoptera.

Sittella chrysoptera.

180 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

33. Fam. Cuculide.

Cacomantis pallidus.

flabelliformis.

insperatus.

Lamprococcyx plagosus.

34. Fam. Psittacide.

Cacatua galerita.

Leadbeateri.

roseicapilla.

Licmetis tenuirostris.

Calyptorhynchus Leachii.

funereus.

naso.

Callocephalum galeatum.

Polytelis Barrabandi.

melanura.

Aprosmictus scapulatus.

Platycercus Pennantii.

adelaidensis.

zonarius.

flaveolus.

eximius.

Psephotus heematorrhous.

hamatonotus.

Euphema chrysostoma.

elegans.

—— aurantia.

pulchella.

Bourkii.

Melopsittacus undulatus.

Calopsitta Nove Hollandiz.

Pezoporus formosus.

Lathamus discolor.

Trichoglossus multicolor.

chlorolepidotus.

Glossospitta australis.

porphyrocephala.

—— pusilla.

Ord. III. Rasores.

1. Fam. Columbide.

Phaps chalcoptera.

elegans.

Ocyphaps lophotes.

Geopelia tranquilla.

Stictopelia cuneata.

2. Fam. Megapodide.

Leipoa ocellata.

3. Fam. Turnicide.

Turnix varia.

scintillans.

—— velox.

—— pyrrhothorax.

Pedionomus torquatus.

4. Fam. Perdicide.

Coturnix pectoralis.

Synoicus australis.

diemenensis.

sordidus.

Excalfactoria australis.

Ord. IV. GRALLATORES.

1. Fam. Struthionide.

Dromaius Nove Hollandie.

2. Fam. Otitide.

Chloriotis australis.

3. Fam. Charadriade.

(Edienemus grallarius.

Hematopus longirostris.

fuliginosus.

Lobivanellus lobatus.

Sarciophorus pectoralis.

Charadrius orientalis.

Eudromias australis.

Cirrepidesmus asiaticus.

Aigialites monacha.

nigrifrons.

Erythrogonys cinctus.

Ochthodromus mornatus.

bicinctus.

5. Fam. Himantopide.

Himantopus leucocephalus.

Cladorhynchus pectoralis.

6. Fam. Recurvirostride.

Recurvirostra rubricollis.

7. Fam. Limoside.

Limosa melanuroides.

uropygialis.

8. Fam. Tringide.

Limnocinclus acuminatus.

Ancylochilus subarquatus.

Actodromas australis.

Glottis glottoides.

9, Fam. Scolopacide.

Gallinago australis.

Rhynchea australis.

10. Fam. 2

Numenius cyanopus.

11. Fam. Tantalide.

Carphibis spinicollis.

Threskiornis strictipennis.

Falcinellus igneus.

Platalea regia.

Platibis flavipes.

and Paleontology of Victoria.

12. Fam. Gruide.

Grus australasianus.

14. Fam. Ardeide.

Ardea pacifica.

Herodias alba.

egrettoides.

garzetta.

Demiegretta Grayi.

Nycticorax caledonicus.

Botaurus poiciloptilus.

Butoroides flavicollis.

Ardetta pusilla.

15. Fam. Rallide.

Porphyrio melanotus.

Tribonyx ventralis.

Gallinula tenebrosa.

Fulica australis.

Hypoteenidia philippensis.

Rallus brachypus.

Porzana fluminea.

palustris.

tabuensis.

Ord. V. NATATORES.

1. Fam. Anatide.

Chenopsis atrata.

Cereopsis Nove Hollandiz.

Anseranas melanoleuca.

Chlamydochen jubata.

Casarca tadornoides.

Anas superciliosa.

punctata.

Stictonetta nzevosa.

Spatula rhynchotis.

Malacorhynchus membranaceus.

Dendrocygna Eytoni.

Nyroca australis,

Erismatura australis.

Biziura lobata.

2. Fam. Laride.

Larus pacificus.

Bruchigavia Jamesonii.

3. Fam. Sternide.

Sylochelidon caspia.

Thalasseus poliocercus.

Sternula nereis.

Hydrochelidon leucopareia.

4, Fam. Procellariide.

Diomedea exulans.

cauta.

culminata.

Pheebetria fuliginosa.

Ossifraga gigantea.

Nectris brevicauda,

Daption capensis.

Prion turtur.

Pelagodroma fregata.

Haladroma urinatrix.

5. Fam. Pelecanide.

Pelecanus conspicillatus.

Phalacrocorax Nove Hollandiz.

leucogaster.

melanoleucus.

stictocephalus.

Plotus Nove Hollandiz.

Tachypetes aquila.

Sula australis.

6. Fam. Podicipide.

Podiceps australis.

Nestor.

—— gularis.

7. Fam. Spheniscide.

Eudyptula undina.

Chrysocoma catarractes.

181

REPTILIA.

Of this division of the animal kingdom there are scarcely any

Victorian forms of economic importance. The edible “ green ”

turtle (Chelonia viridis) is a very rare visitor to our shores, two

examples being all that I have any knowledge of, both now in

the museum. An example of the leathery turtle (Spharyis

cortacea), caught at Portland, on our west coast, gives the most

southern range of the species known. Our two freshwater

Chelonians, Chelodina oblonga and C. longicollis, are only found

in the rivers towards the northern boundary of Victoria, where

182 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

they are common. Of these a kind of turtle-soup was made at

the dinner of the Melbourne Acclimatization Society; but the

taste for it has not yet been acquired.

The Crocopi11a do not come down the Australian coast so

far south as Victoria, the largest of the Sauria being the Hydro-

saurus varius, called “iguana” by the colonists, of five or six

feet. Of the skin of this species some slippers and other small

articles in the Intercolonial Exhibition now open in Melbourne

are manufactured with much elegance. The natives use it for

food. The Trachydosaurus rugosus, Cyclodus gigas, Hinnula

teniolata, and Grammatophora barbata abound in the warmer

north part of the colony, but gradually disappear towards the

south coast.

Of snakes, the following species occur, and the larger and

more common are roasted and eaten by the natives :—Morelia

variegata, or carpet-snake, the only Python and non-venomous

snake in Victoria, and confined to the northern boundary ;

Acanthophis antarctica, or “ death-adder,” also confined to the

northern boundary; Hoplocephalus curtus, or “tiger snake,”

common about Melbourne, and the cause of most of the acci-

dents from snake-bites; H. flagellum, or “little whipsnake,”

H. coronoides, and H. superbus. This latter species, with

fifteen rows of scales, the two outer rows with red centres,

is very common about Prahran, near Melbourne, though said

to occur only in Tasmania; the neck is not dilatable into a

flat hood, as in the H. curtus. The “black snake ”’ (Pseudechis

porphyraicus) is rather rare; and the P. australis is only found

with us near our northern boundary. The common “brown

snake ” may possibly include two species; but I doubt the dis-

tinctions between Pseudonaja nuchalis and Diemenia superciliaris

being permanent; at any rate, specimens with the proportions

of the rostral shield of the latter are common, and several inter-

mediate proportions varying to that characteristic of the former

occur. Diemenia reticulata is very common on the Lower Murray

boundary.

The Barracuta, with the exception of the common green

frog (Ranhyla aurea) are rarely seen or heard,—the true tree-

frogs (Hyla) inhabiting the lofty gum-trees, and the Lymno-

dynastes tasmanicus, L. dorsalis, and L. affinis burrowing in the

sand during the day.

PISCES.

The species of fish good for the table are very much fewer in

Victoria than in Europe; and great interest attaches, therefore,

with many of the general public, to the endeavours of the

and Paleontology of Victoria. 185

Acclimatization Society of Victoria to introduce the salmon and

other good British fish into the waters of the colony, indepen-

dently of the scientific interest of the experiment. Large English

trout are now in considerable numbers, from ova imported,

packed in ice, by our Victorian Acclimatization Society, acting

in conjunction with the Tasmanian government. Not only were

numbers of parr hatched in the Victorian and Tasmanian rivers

from the salmon-ova imported in this way, but there is now in

the Exhibition one caught a few weeks ago in the Tamar River,

about ten inches in length, which has lost the marks of the

parr, and assumed the bright silvery aspect of the migratory

stage of development, or “grilse.” This is a great success for

acclimatization and pisciculture, and shows that none of the

insuperable difficulties which were supposed in England to bar

our success with the Salmonidz really exist, but that food and

climate, and quality of water of such of our rivers as flow all

the year, are sufficiently suitable to permit of success.

The cartilaginous fishes are supposed to be so abundant here

as greatly to diminish the chance of the acclimatized salmon

returning in safety from the sea; but I do not think they are

as numerous as in Britain.

The Callorhynchus antarctica, or Southern Chimera, is com-

mon near Portland, at short distances from the shore; and all

round our coast the Port-Jackson shark, or “ bulldog shark,”

as it is called by the colonists (Cestracion (Heterodontus) Philippi),

is not uncommon. The most beautiful and curious of our sharks

is that called “ carpet shark ” by the colonists—the Crossorhinus

barbatus. The largest of our sharks, the “ black-finned shark ”

(Carcharias melanopterus), is so rare that I have seen only one

specimen (fifteen feet long), from Hobson’s Bay. The European

“ hammer-headed shark” (Sphyrnias zygena) is not very uncom-

mon. But, what is very curious, we find the common English

“tope” (Galeus canus) common in the bay; and, more extra-

ordinary still, the common English ‘ smooth- hound” (Mustelus

vulgaris) is the commonest dogfish or small shark of our coast,

occurring in great numbers in “Hobson’s Bay, undistinguishable

from Cornish specimens. The large Odontaspis taurus is, per-

haps our commonest large and very destructive species, al-

though the Indian Heptranchus indicus is not uncommon also.

Another large shark, perfectly identical with the English species,

is the “angelfish” (Squatina vulgaris), not very uncommon.

Intermediate between the sharks and rays we have the tentacu-

lated “ sawfish ” (Pristiophorus cirratus) in abundance, and the

rare Trigonorhina fasciata. These, with one or two rays (Raja

Lemprieri &c.), two large “sting rays” (Zrygon), and a rare

Cephaloptera, are the chief predaceous Chondropterygi. One

184. Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

small lamprey is not uncommon in the Murray, and another

(Mordacia) in the Saltwater River.

Of bony fish there are numerous genera and species ; of these

I need only now advert to a few used for food or otherwise in-

teresting. Of the Percide one of the very best table fish is the

Lates colonorum, or “ Gippsland perch,” which has appeared of

late years in the market. Also of this family is our most

gigantic river-fish, the “ Murray cod-perch’’ (Oligorus macqua-

riensis), which is often three feet long and upwards of twenty

pounds weight; it is perhaps the most commonly seen at table

of all the Victorian fish, although not at all the best; it is now

brought to the Melbourne markets in great numbers by the

railway. The next example is the most abundant and cheapest

of the marine fish, never seen at the best tables, but used very

extensively as food by the poorer people. It has the reputation

of very frequently causing, even when perfectly fresh, the most

violent symptoms of fish- “poisoning, accompanied by a peculiar

redness of the face and great suffering, sometimes ending in

death—although so irregular in its action that other persons

eating of the same fish have experienced no ill effects. It is the

Arripis georgianus, and is called by the fishermen “salmon”

when old and of a uniform olive tint, and “salmon trout” in

the younger spotted stage of growth. I have no doubt the

Centropristis georgianus (C. & V.), C. salar (Rich.), C. truttaceus

(C. & V.), and Perca marginata (C. & V.) are all synonyms

of this one common species. An excellent river-fish of this

family is the Dules ambiguus of the Murray; it is popularly

known as the “ Murray golden perch,” or sometimes “ Murray

golden carp,” and far exceeds in general estimation any of the

other freshwater fish for the table. Of the Pristipomatide the

Murray River affords an excellent table fish, the Therapon ellip-

ticus, known in the market and to the colonists generally as the

“ Murray silver perch,” and it is now brought to Melbourne in

great numbers by railway.

Amongst the mullets (Mullide) we have a representative of

the European red mullet, forming an equally delicious delicacy

when cooked in the same way ; it is the Australian red mullet,

the Upeneichthys porosus, which, like its home representative,

is only occasionally found, and must be considered a rarity.

The family Sparidz affords the most important fish for the table

found in the Victorian seas, when we take its size (occasionally

reaching twenty pounds weight), abundance, and excellence to-

gether into account ; it is the Pagrus unicolor, or “snapper” of

the colonists: and to this family also belongs one of the most

popular fishes with the anglers in the mouths of the rivers near

Melbourne, as giving good sport and forming an agreeable ad-

and Paleontology of Victoria. 185

dition to the dinner table: it is the “bream ” of the colonists,

the Chrysophrys australis. The Chironemus TTR GT AL es is not

uncommon in the market: I have heard the name “ carpet-

fish” applied to it ; but I may here remark that the community

is so new that the vulgar or popular names are not to be relied

upon as in older countries, and vary irregularly within short

distances. A nearly allied fis h, universally known as the

“butter-fish,” and often found at table, although not very good,

is the Chilodactylus nigricans: the uniform colour supposed by

authors to characterize this species only occurs in the nearly

adult examples, I find; and the young are marbled with brown

and bluish grey. The Chilodactylus macropterus, although com-

mon in the market, seems to have no common name. The

finest of all the Australian marine fishes for the table is the

“trumpeter ”’ of the colonists, formerly supposed to be confined

to Tasmania, but now found so abundantly on some fishing-

banks in the track of the steamers plying to Melbourne that at

certain seasons it is abundant in the Victorian markets: it is

the Latris hecateia. Several species of Platycephalus, of which

P. tasmanius and P. levigatus are the most common, are con-

founded under the common popular name of “ flat-head,” given

to the commonest edible fish of the Victorian coasts—found

abundantly and easily caught by line all the year round: these

are eaten by people living on the coasts, and are always in the

market, but not good enough to be held in any esteem for the

table. Of “gurnets,” the beautiful Lepidotrigla vanessa and

the Trigla kumu and Trigla polyommata are not uncommon

occasional visitors, but more noted for their extraordinary

beauty than as food, for which I have not known them used.

In the family Trachinide, several species of Uranoscopide, vul-

garly called “ stone- lifters, ” of which the Kathetostoma leve is

the commonest, occur on our shores, but are not used for food.

Of the same family, however, there i one fish, called “ whiting ”

by the colonists (although not at all lke the European fish of

that name), very abundant, always in the market, and so good

as to be found at the best tables usually: it is the Si/lago pune-

tata. Of the family Scizenidee, one example is a not uncommon

occasional visitor, an exceedingly fine fish, of excellent quality

for the table, and often four feet in length; it is called “ king-

fish”? by the Melbourne fishermen and dealers: I believe it to

be perfectly identical with the “ maigre” of the Mediterranean

and Cape of Good Hope—the Sciena aquila. Of the family

Sphyrzenidz a tolerably good table fish is very common at times

in the markets: it is the “ pike ” of the colonists, Sphyrana Nove

Hollandie. Of the allied family Trichiuride an equally abundant

and even larger fish is found in great numbers in the market at

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx, 13

186 Prof. M‘Coy on the Reeent Zoology

certain scasons—the “ barracouta,” perfectly identical with the

Thersites atun of the Cape; it is one of the few fish dried and

preserved in large quantities in Victoria. Of the Scombride,

the only true Mackerel are rare visitors, the Seomber australa-

sicus having only occurred to me twice in several years, and the

S. pneumatophoris very lately ; but of the tunny we have a new

species, Thynnis australis (M‘Coy), a not uncommon visitor ;

and the Heheneis remora is occasionally found in Hobson’s Bay.

The true dory (Zeus faber), perfectly identical with Mediterra-

nean specimens, is a not very uncommon straggler into our

seas; but in fish-markets the infinitely inferior table fish, the

Australian “ boarfish ” (Histiopterus recurvirostris), is constantly

sold under this name, although easily distinguished from the

dory, even by unscientific purchasers, by the want of the round

dark spot in the middle of the sides. The Cyttus (Capros)

australis is common, but too small to be used for the table. Of

the allied family Carangide, many interesting species occur in

our seas. The common “ horse-mackerel” (Trachurus trachurus),

perfectly identical with English specimens, appears occasionally ;

and the Caranx georgianus, under the name of “ silverfish,” is

still more common. A fine species of Seriola, nearly three feet

long, is occasionally caught in numbers, and is sometimes called

by the fishmongers “ yellow tail,” as at St. Helena; and some-

times it is sold and noticed in the newspapers under the name

of “ Bonito,” with which its size and quality of flesh caused

them to confound it; it differs only in smal! details from the

Seriola Lalandi, of which I believe it to be a mere trifling

variety. A curious instance of an almost cosmopolitan fish of

this same family (Carangide) is the “skipjack” (Temnodon

saltator), of which I have obtained many specimens in Hobson’s

Bay exactly identical with examples from New York, or the

West Indies, or the Cape of Good Hope. There are many small

species of Gobius, Callionymus, and Blennius, many of the latter

viviparous ; but they are not specially interesting or important.

The Clinus despicillatus and Cristiceps abound amongst the sea-

weed between high- and low-water marks. The gourami

(Osphromenus olfax) has been introduced and lived in a pond in

my botanic garden at. the university for nearly two years, until

devoured by the herons; and it also lived in the ponds of the

Acclimatization Society long enough to show that the experiment

of the acclimatization of this famous table fish may be expected

to succeed in ponds or tanks favourably placed. ‘Two species of

Atherina and two of Mugil are not uncommon in the bay; but

the commonest “ mullet” found abundantly in the fish-market

for the table is the dgonostoma Forsteri. Two species of Gly-

phidodon or Melambaphes are common, aud may often be found

and Paleontology of Victoria. 187

in the market, although not very good for the table: these are

the M. (Glyphidodon) nigroris, called the “black perch,” and the

Glyphidoden Victorie, commonly called the “rock perch.” The

Parma squamipennis has occurred also to me not very uncom-

monly in the bay. Several brilliantly coloured fish of the family

Labride occur as rare occasional visitors, but they are not worth

special notice, the commonest and best-known being that called

*parrot-fish ;” it 1s the Labrichthys ephippium. The Labrichthys

laticlavius, L. psittacula, and several others also occur occasion-

ally. A much esteemed fish in the Yarra and other Victorian

rivers is called “black fish” by the colonists; it is abundant,

and sometimes exceeds a foot in length: it belongs to the genus

Gadopsis, so remarkable for combining a spiny first dorsal fin

with all the other characteristics of the Anacanthini; it is a

mere variety, apparently, of the fish called “freshwater trout”

in the Tasmanian rivers, the Gadopsis marmoratus. The Lotella

callarias is a rare visitor, confounded with the Pseudophycis bar-

batus and two other species of Pseudophycis under the com-

mon name of ‘‘cod”’ and “rock cod” by the fish-dealers. The

“flounder” of the colonists is a good table fish, with which the

market is now regularly supplied; it seems peculiar to these

seas, and is the Rhombosolea flesoides. A true sole (Solea),

nearly allied to the Solea margaritifera, also occurs, although

rarely, at the Heads. Amongst the Siluroid fishes the most

important is the Copidoglanis tandanus, which is now regularly

supplied to the Melbourne market by railway from the river

Murray, under the name of “ Murray catfish.” The Yarra Yarra

and some other of the rivers near the southern coast contain in

great abundance a beautiful and active fish, excellent for the

table, and affording capital sport to the angler. By ichthyo-

logists following the classification of Cuvier it would be referred

to the Salmonidz, the adipose second dorsal fin being well

marked; and so much does it resemble a grayling, in the cu-

cumber smell when caught, in general appearance, habits, mode

of rising to the fly, and playmg, as well as in flavour, that

anglers are in the habit of calling it now the “ Australian gray-

ling ;” its close resemblance in food and habits to the true

Salmonidz helped the Acclimatization Society to argue that

certain of our rivers would serve for the experiment of accli-

matizing the European salmon and trout, and, as experience has

since shown, successfully ; it is vulgarly also called the “ Yarra

herring,” and is the Prototroctes marena. There is only one

other fish known in Victoria with the second adipose dorsal fin

and other characteristics of the Cuvierian Salmonide (but now

referred to the Scopelide); it is the large and beautifully

coloured marine form, the Auropus purpurisatus, of which I have

13*

188 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

got four specimens from Hobson’s Bay for the museum ; it is

too rare, however, to have a popular name or be eaten.

Of the family Clupeid, or herrings, there is only one of

much importance in our seas. A specimen of this was first

brought to me in August 1864, from a small shoal, then seen

for the first time in Hobson’s Bay, and quite unknown to the

fishermen. It was supposed by the sender to be the “ Yarra

herring ” or “ grayling”’ gone out to sea; but, on examination,

I found it was the Clupea melanosticta of Temminck, or the

species of pilchard so abundant on the shores of Japan. In the

same month in the succeeding year, they appeared in greater abun-

dance in the bay, and were caught by thousands for the market.

After remaining for a few weeks they disappeared until the same

time in 1866, when they arrived in such countless thousands that

carts were filled with them by simply dipping them out of the sea

with large baskets; hundreds of tons of them were sent up the

country to the inland market, and through the city for several

weeks they were sold for a few pence the bucketful; while the

captains of ships entering the bay reported having passed through

closely packed shoals of them for miles. They may probably

be now expected every year as a very important addition to the

food-fishes of the country. I imagine some alteration of the

bed of the sea, from the earthquake disturbances north of

Australia about that time, may have facilitated or induced the

extension of the shoals in such unusual quantities from Japan to

our coasts. Duperrey (or Lesson and Garnot) found it in New

Zealand; and Cuvier and Valenciennes referred their specimen

to the genus Alausa. I find, however, that the authors of the

‘Histoire des Poissons’? were in error, and Temminck in the

right, in the former assigning five, and the latter seven, gill-

rays ; and it has also a row of teeth on the tongue, as was cor-

rectly stated by Temminck and erroneously denied by Cuvier

and Valenciennes. The fish is therefore a Me/etta, and not an

Alausa, and should be referred to as the Meletta melanosticta

(Temm. sp.). A true anchovy I find in great abundance in Hob-

son’s Bay; it is the Engraulis australis (Wh. sp.), and if iden-

tical, as Cuvier supposes, with all the synonyms he groups

under his £. Brownii, would be almost a cosmopolitan species.

The Chatoesus come is occasionally to be found in the market.

Of the family Galaxide are several interesting species in our

rivers, going under the vulgar names of “gudgeon” and

“trout.” The species of Galaxias bearing the latter name in

the Yarra and the Gippsland rivers is a beautiful new species,

Galaxias ocellatus (M‘Coy), marked with large circular eye-like

spots, representing closely the G. ¢ruttaceus of Tasmania. The

species called popularly “ gudgcon ” in the Yarra is the Galawxias

and Paleontology of Victoria. 189

pseudoscriba (M‘Coy), related to the G. scriba (Cuv. and Val.),

but with the depth of the body one-eighth of the total length,

and other differences of proportion. The family Murenide, or

eels, is represented in the bay by a large congor; and the

Anguilla australis is the extremely abundant eel of the Yarra,

Saltwater River, and many other streams and the adjacent

swamps filled by them. Of the family Balistide there are a

great number of species, all going under the popular name of

“ leather-jackets,” having the reputation of being poisonous,

and of no economic value. Of the family Tetraodontide, the

Tetraodon Hamiltoni is extremely abundant along the shores,

and popularly called “ toadfish.”

MOLLUSCA.

There are scarcely any molluscous animals of economic im-

portance in the colony, the two species of oysters used for food

being imported from Sydney of late years. “The Venus strigosa

is sold in the fish-shops under the erroneous name of “ cockle;”

and the Lunetta undulata is eaten by persons near the coast

under the equally erroneous name of “ winkles.”

ARTICULATA.

Of the articulated animals there are only a few Crustacea ap-

plied to any use. The great Murray-River crayfish or lobster

(Astacoides serratus) is brought in great numbers with the

Murray fish by railway now to market, and is generally used at

table as the lobster is in Europe. The smaller river crayfish

(Astacoides quinquecarinatus) is not sold in the markets, but is

commonly eaten in the vicinity of the many streams and reser-

voirs in which it is found in abundance. The great marine

spiny crayfish or lobster, found abundantly at the Heads, is

constantly found in the shops, and used at table in salads &e. ;

it seems to be a variety of the Homarus annulicornis, or a very

closely allied species. A most destructive enemy to the sub-

marine timbers of our piers belongs to this division of the ani-

mal kingdom: it is the little Mylostoma or Chelura, multiplying

in the timbers, and causing them to crumble to pieces, as in

Europe. Of the Insecta no species are used for any useful pur-

pose at present, although several species of the Coccus affording

dyes abound. Of the Annulata almost the only useful form is

the species of leech (Hirudo) found so abundantly in the Murray

River, which has the mouth so nearly like that of the H. offici-

nalis of Europe that it is collected and used in immense quanti-

ties for medical purposes.

190 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

RADIATA AND PROTOZOA.

Of these divisions there are no economically useful kinds

known, a few sponges alone having been applied to any useful

purpose.

PALHONTOLOGY.

The paleontology of Victoria and the adjacent parts of Aus-

tralia is of very great interest, from the many unsettled scien-

tific questions on which it bears.

POST-PLIOCENE AND PLIOCENE PERIODS.

The most recent geological period in Victoria, as in Europe,

may be illustrated by the remains of bones found in caverns

and in the superficial drifts and clays deposited, apparently, at

the same time as that at which the caverns became closed.

These Pleistocene and newer Pliocene periods are in Victoria, as

in Europe, remarkably rich in osseous remains of warm-blooded

animals, some of which are still inhabitants of the spot; others

still live, but in other countries; and many are extinct—gene-

rally of the same type of structure as the more characteristic

living animals of the country, but of species frequently immensely

superior in size to any that now lhve—repeating, in fact, in

Australia that appearance of gigantic antitypes of the peculiar

geographical groups of zoological structure marking the living

zoology of the great regions of the earth at the present day. I

believe the majority of the so-called alluvial gold-deposits to be

of this newer Pliocene period. In the sinkings into the various

drifts at the Ballarat gold-fields, remains of timber and the cha-

racteristic fruits of the Banksia or “ honeysuckle ”’-trees of the

colonists are common, and apparently of the species still grow-

ing in the vicinity. In the clay-beds leaves are occasionally

found in abundance, and perfectly preserved, undistinguishable

from the foliage of the common “ stringy-bark” tree (Hucalyptus

obliqua) of the neighbouring forests. In these gold-drifts no

marine remains have yet been found, and, indeed, few fossils of

any kind; but in some of them (as, for instance in the gold-

“cement” of Dunolly) I have found the jaw of a wombat,

of the generic type (Phascolomys) so characteristic of the

southern part of Australia and the adjacent island of Tasmania,

but forming a distinct species (Phascolomys pliocenus, M‘Coy),

easily distinguished from the three living species of the same

size by the greater antero-posterior length of the grinders. In

the living and fossil lower jaws, having the same length from

the tip of the incisor to the back of the hindermost grinder,

the whole grinding series, of one premolar and four molars, only

and Paleontology of Victoria. 19]

measures as much as the four molars of the fossil species, the

premolar of which thus stands entirely in front of the corre-

sponding tooth in the three living ones of the same size. This

wombat enables me thus to connect the gold-drifts in age with

the more superficial red clays, in which the bones of the lake-

timboon &c. are found. And here we find, with the living dingo,

or native wild dog, inhabiting the neighbouring localities at

present, skulls and teeth of the Sarcophilus ursinus, or “ Tas-

manian devil,” which now is only known to exist in "Tasmania,

and has never been known on the mainland; with these are

the bones and teeth of the gigantic extinct kangaroos (the Ma-

cropus Titan and the M. Atlas), as well as bones and teeth of the

gigantic extinct genera Nototherium and Diprotodon. The spe-

cies of the latter occurring in Victoria is quite distinct from

those of the more northern parts of the continent; it is the

Diprotodon longiceps (M‘Coy), readily distinguished by the more

slender, elongate proportion of the jaws. The ordinary gold-

drifts of Victoria, from the association (more or less direct) with

these fossils, may thus be taken to be of the newer Pliocene or

Mammaliferous Crag period, like those of Russia, determined by

Su R. Murchison.

MIOCENE PERIOD.

Under the Pleistocene and Phocene deposits above alluded to

are a series of plant-beds in a few localities, with a totally dif-

ferent facies from the recent flora of the country, not one species

being identical; nor are the characteristic genera represented,

but an entirely extinct series of species having generic and

general resemblance to the foliage of Asiatic plants of tropical

types of dicotyledonous plants, of which the Laurus is the most

conspicuous. Many of the forms are closely allied to those of

the Miocene plant-beds of the Rhine country. In apparently

the same position, in much more numerous localities, the marine

deposits of sands and clays full of shells, echinoderms, corals, with

occasional fish, and with still rarer marine mammalian remains,

occupy wide areas just under the Pliocene beds. These have

the general facies (and even specific identity) of so many species

so clearly marked, that there cannot be the slightest doubt of

the great thickness of those beds being lower Miocene of the

date and general character of the Faluns of Touraine, the Bor-

deaux and the Malta beds, while the base of the series blends

imperceptibly with a series of beds having a slightly older facies,

and rendering the adoption of the Oligocene formation of Bey-

rich as convenient for Victorian as for European geologists.

The only marine mammal of which I have seen portions which

could be identified in those beds is a new species of Squalodon

192 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

or Phocodon (P. Wilkinsoni, M‘Coy), from the Miocene Tertiary

sands of the Cape Otway cozst: and as the genus is only known

in Miocene strata of Malta and the French falun, the occurrence

of a new species of so restricted a genus is not only valuable as

an addition to paleontology, but an interesting fact as showing

that the zoology of Australia, as I have on former occasions en-

deavoured (contrary to received opinions) to establish, was not,

during the older Tertiary period, of the isolated exceptional

character it now has, but was then closely related generically, and

even specifically, as I shall show, to that of many parts of Europe

and America. The molar teeth of P. Wilkinsoni are smaller

than the Maltese P. scille, and agree most nearly with the Squa-

lodon (Phacodon) Grateloupi (Meyer) of the Miocene beds near

Bordeaux, from which the Australian species differs chiefly in

smaller size, some details of proportions, and the relatively

larger roots, indicating a greater depth of jaw. In these same

beds remains of fish are not uncommon; and these are almost

all of well-known European and American Miocene and Upper

Kocene Tertiary extinct species of Plagiostomi: the most

abundant widely distributed species is, I have no doubt, per-

fectly identical with the Carcharodon angustidens (Ag.) of the

Biinde and other well-marked European Lower Miocene and

Oligocene beds. The C. megalodon (Ag.) is an almost equally

common Australian Miocene species, and (on comparison, as m

the former case, of specimens) undoubtedly identical with the

Lower Miocene and Oligocene Tertiary specimens from Malta,

Binde, and other European sections, and with those from the

Eocene London Clay and North-American localities. The

Otodus Desori (Ag.), Lamna elegans (Ag.), and L. contortidens

(Ag.), of the European and United-States Miocene localities,

are also common in many of our Victorian Miocene beds, in

which I have also identified the Zamna denticulata (Ag.), and

the large teeth of Oxyrhina trigonodon (Ag.), exactly agreeing

with those of the Lower Miocene beds of the Rhine country.

Along with these entirely extinct plants, mammals, and fish,

there are many genera and species of Mollusca entirely extinct,

many identical with extinct species of the same geological age

in other localities both in Europe and North America, and many

of the commonest forms are identical with living species, none

of which are found in the adjacent seas of Victoria, but in the

warmer seas north of New Zealand, Philippines, and South

Africa), with one or two rare exceptions of species extending

into colder latitudes in the northern hemisphere.

A fine new Aturza (A. australis, M‘Coy) is the most common

and important of the fossil Cephalopoda, closely related to the

Aturia ziczac of the Lower Miocene and Upper Eocence beds

and Paleontology of Victoria. 193

of Germany, France, and England. No species of Aturia lives

now, the angulated septa contrasting strongly with the waved

ones of recent Nautilus.

The Gasteropoda are very abundant and for the most part

peculiar, several of them being closely representative types of

well-known Miocene and Eocene European species, while others

are identical with European and North-American Miocene and

Upper Eocene species. Of these, one of the most striking is a

Dentalium found in extraordmary abundance in nearly every

locality of our Victorian Miocene Tertiaries ; and yet no species

of the genus has ever been found living in the Victorian seas.

The fossil species is manifestly identical with the Belgian Mio-

cene Tertiary D. Kickzit; and the Victorian examples also agree

completely, on the most minute comparison, with specimens I

have from the Lower Miocene and Oligocene beds of Flonheim,

as well as with North-American specimens I have from the

Upper Eocene beds of Vicksburg, described by Conrad under

the name D. mississippiense, without observing its identity with

the European Miocene species. This Dentalium, occurring toge-

ther with the above-named extinct species of fish so abundantly

in Australia, as in the United States, France, and Germany,

is a very curious additional instance of the general identity in

facies of the marine zoology of Australia with that of Europe

and Northern America during the Miocene period, when all

of these localities seem to have had a warmer climate than at

present. Amongst the representative types the most extra-

ordinary case is that of an entire series of Volutes in the Oligo-

cene clay-beds near Mount Martha and Mount Eliza on one

side of Hobson’s Bay, and the sandy beds of slightly younger

age on the other side of the bay south of Geelong, representing

in the most complete manner the series of common species of

Volutilites of the Upper Eocene or Oligocene beds of the Isle

of Wight, the Hampshire coast, and the corresponding French,

Austrian, and Belgian strata of the basins of Paris, Vienna, and

Limbourg. In fact the V. suturalis and V. cingulata (varieties

of our species) of the “Tongrien ” or Lower Miocene beds of

Lattorf, near Bernberg, is so exactly represented by a species

which I have called Voluta anticingulata (M‘Coy), that, on

comparison of specimens with the tip of the spire absent, it

would be almost impossible to separate them as the most trifling

varieties; yet the European V. cingulata has the acute regular

apex of the spire characteristic of the Eocene genus Volutilites,

while our Australian representative form has the obtuse mam-

millated tip of the more recent true genus Voluta. In the same

Lower Miocene or Oligocene on both sides of Hobson’s Bay,

we have great numbers of another species, the Voluta anti-

194 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

scalaris (M‘Coy), which so completely resembles the Voludzlites

scalaris, equally common in the Isle of Wight and Hampshire

cliff beds, that, on comparing specimens from the two localities,

the nicest eye could scarcely find character for a variety, except

the same generic difference of the acute regular tip to the spire

in the European, and the obtuse mammillary tip in the Austra-

lian shell ; and so with several others. None of these resemble

living species, and they are accompanied by many others (as V.

Hannafordi and V. macroptera, M‘Coy) equally removed from

any known living or fossil ones. In the same beds species of

Cyprea are common, of the most extravagant forms when com-

pared with any known living or fossil types. Thus one species,

the Cyprea gastroplax (M‘Coy), has the underside dilated to

a flat circular plate between three and four inches in diameter.

Another huge species, the Cyprea gigas (M‘Coy), is commonly

eight or nine inches in length, far exceeding any living species

in size. Other Gasteropods are equally remarkable for repre-

senting fossil European species of the same age: thus the com-

mon Cassidaria depressa of the German Lower Miocene beds is

so closely imitated by the C. reticulospira (M‘Coy) in the Vic-

torian strata, that the reticulation of the extreme apex of the

spire is almost the only character for distinction. The common

Trivia aveliana of the European strata is represented by an

equally common curiously similar species, the 7. avellanoides

(M‘Coy). Amongst the singular forms in these Australian Ter-

tiary beds, recalling Oolitic European ones, is a Pleurotomaria

(P. australis, M‘Coy) as large as the Mesozoic P. anglica, and

a concentrically costated Zrigonia (T. semiundulata, M‘Coy)

strongly contrasting with the radiated species which are alone

found living now. ‘The old notion, found in many books, that

the marine Oolitic fauna, as well as the terrestrial, exists still in

Australia in the modern times, has no definite foundation when

closely examined. The genus Jrigona has often been quoted

as a case in point of a genus common in old-world Mesozoic

formations, not occurring in the Tertiaries, but found living in

Australian waters. I have now described two Tertiary Australian

abundant species, the above one, and a radiated species, the 7.

acuticostata (M‘Coy), fillmg up the geological gap in the range

in time of the genus, yet both perfectly distinct specifically from

the four recent ones.

With these strange forms are abundance of a very small per-

centage of recent species, none of which, however, occur in

Victorian waters, but in warmer seas, thus following the rule in

this respect of recent species in Miocene strata in Europe being

usually recent in some warmer latitude. All our evidence, in

fact, goes to show that there was no glacial period in Victoria

and Paleontology of Victoria. 195

succeeded by a warmer modern one, but that there has been a

regular and gradual falling of the temperature to the present day.

The most abundant living shell in almost every locality of our

Victorian Miocene or Oligocene beds is the Pectunculus latt-

costatus of the warm seas of North New Zealand, found in

thousands, and perfectly identical with the living one, though

having no relation to any found in the seas of Australia. The

Cucullea concamerata and granulosa (Reeve), living in the

warmer seas of southern China, but not found living south of

the equator, is not uncommon in the fossil state in our Victorian

Miocene beds. One of the commonest fossils in the same beds

is the Limopsis Belcheri, previously only known as a very rare

living species dredged from deep water off the Cape of Good

Hope, where the Mozambique current heats the sea more than

the latitude would account for. Almost equally common, how-

ever, and mixed with it, is the Limopsis aurita (Sassi), perfectly

undistinguishable, on a minute comparison of specimens, from

examples from the Coralline Crag of Suffolk and the Miocene

Fahluns of Flonheim, Rheinhessen, or from living specimens

from the seas of the northern hemisphere. The only other

excessively common living species of shell in our Miocene or

Oligocene beds is the Corbula sulcata (Lam.), of the tropical

seas of the west coast of Africa, whence I have procured living

specimens, so that, as in the other cases of identity of species

spoken of, I might not run the chance of misleading my readers

by erroneous identifications based on comparisons with figures

or descriptions only.

The Brachiopoda, although not very abundant, present many

representative and peculiar forms, with one doubtful recent spe-

cies, and another certaimly identical with the very rare Rhyncho-

nella lucida (Gould), found living in the Sea of Japan. The

Echinodermata are all extinct, and closely related to Maltese

species. The corals are few and all extinct, and peculiar to

the locality.

MESOZOIC PERIOD.

It is generally supposed that no marine Mesozoic strata occur

in Australia. The announcement will therefore have some in-

terest, that I have lately determined clearly the existence of the

lower cretaceous rocks in nearly the centre of Australia, with the

characteristic genera and closely representative species of the

corresponding beds in Europe.

CRETACEOUS PERIOD.

From the head of the Flinders River Messrs. Carson and

Sutherland have forwarded me specimens of an olive-coloured

196 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

argillaceous and sandy rock, containing two large species of

Inoceramus (I. Carsoni and I. Sutherlandi, M‘Coy), so nearly

agreeing in size and shape with the English Cretaceous J. myti-

loides (Sow.) and the English and French J. Cuvieri respectively,

that at first sight they might be readily confounded. With

these are two species of Ammonites, one (A. Flinderst, M‘Coy)

so closely agreeing in size, number of whorls, shape, markings,

and septa with the common Ammonites Beudanti (Br.) of the

French Lower Chalk, that, except for being slightly less com-

pressed and a slight difference in some of the septal lobes, it

could scarcely be separated, even as a variety.

With these is a Belemnite (Belemnitella diptycha, M‘Coy) so

exactly like in size and shape the B. plena of the English and

French Lower Cretaceous rocks that they can only be distin-

guished by a slight difference in the distance of the two great

longitudinal furrows.

The most wonderful occurrence which I am able to announce

along with those molluscan forms are three new species of

Enaliosaurian reptiles of Cretaceous genera, and most nearly

allicd to ecretacean European species. One of these is an Ichthyo-

saurus (I. australis, M‘Coy), of which I have recognized a large

number of vertebra, the large skull, with the eye and its bony

sclerotic ring perfectly preserved, and part of one of the paddles.

The other two are species of Plesiosaurus,—one (P. macrospon-

dylus, M‘Coy) differing from the nearest known species in the

greater proportional length of the bodies of the vertebrae, and

the other (P. Sutherlandi, M‘Coy) more nearly approaching the

ordinary proportions of the genus and the New-Zealand species

of Owen.

LOWER MESOZOIC.

The coal-bearing rocks of Victoria belong, I have no doubt,

to the Mesozoic period, from the characteristic plants being such

as are found with the Mesozoic coal in Yorkshire, Germany, Xc.,

and from the total absence of all the genera characteristic of the

Paleozoic coal. At Cape Paterson and Bellerine we find in the

shales alternating with the coal three well-marked species of

Zamites (Z. ellipticus and Z. Barklyi, M‘Coy, and a rarer spe-

cies, Z. longifolius, M‘Coy, which I have seen from the N.S.W.

beds), a Teniopteris (T. Daintrei, M‘Coy) of the size and shape

of the 7. vittata of the English Oolitic coal-beds, but differing

in the number of transverse veins in a given space, and the

Phyllotheca australis, identical with the New-South- Wales coal-

species. The association of these genera alone would indicate

the beds to be Mesozoic and not Paleozoic with certainty ; but

the association of the same plants with other species in other

and Paieontology of Victoria. 197

localities furnishes much additional interesting information.

Thus the Phyllotheca australis is found with the Glossopteris

Brownana in the New-South-Wales coal-beds of the Hunter

River ; so that, although the latter plant has not yet been found

in Victoria, it is by this association brought to bear on our beds.

Then, again, I have found the Teniopteris Daintret associated in

New Zealand with a new species of Camptopteris (C. Nove Zea-

landie, M‘Coy) ; and thus by this association we get yet another

Mesozoic genus of plants to support the view of the Mesozoic

age of the Victorian coal. Besides these generic forms, so un-

hike those of Paleozoic coal, there are numerous species of

Pecopteris, Neuropteris, Sphenopteris, and other genera having a

greater range in time, and, as generic forms, therefore, of no

interest in the discussion of the age of our coal-beds; but the

species are generally nearly related to the Burdwan and Raj-

mahal coal-beds in India, and the Scarborough ones in the

Oolitic series of England. One of these, found commonly near

Bellerine (the Pecopteris australis), I have recently compared

carefully with specimens of the English Oolitic P. Whithiensis,

and am convinced that there is no specific character to separate

the Australian fossil, which at most can only rank as a slight

variety mcapable of definition. The Indian beds of Rajmahal,

so closely related to the Australian coal-deposits near Sydney,

are now, I believe, satisfactorily connected with the marine

Mesozoic beds of that country containing Oolitic Ammonites,

Belenmites, &ce.

It is worthy of note that the collections illustrative of the

coal-deposits of New South Wales sent to the Intercolonial

Exhibition by the Rev. W. B. Clarke and Mr. Keene, having

been carefully examined by myself in company with Mr. Selwyn,

entirely fail to give the slightest support to the view of those

gentlemen that the plant-beds and coal are there Paleozoic, as

there is no trace of the Szgillaria, Stigmaria, Calamites, &c.,

said to be so abundant. The fish have the facies of Permian or

Triassic forms rather than of Carboniferous, of which period the

characteristic abundant forms Psammodus, Cochliodus, Ctenopty-

chius, Gyracanthus, Rhizodus, &e. are as completely absent as

the Palzozoic plants in the plant-beds. Both in New South

Wales and Victoria a Lepidodendron occurs, but in beds entirely

below those we are speaking of. I some years ago determined

the Oolitic age of some marine fossils, including Pentacrinites,

Belemnites, Ammonites, &c., which had been sent from New-

South-Wales localities to Mr. Clarke, and by him transmitted

to His Excellency Sir H. Barkly, for my “opinion as to the

geological epoch to which they belonged.”

The sandstones of Bacchus Marsh, probably inferior in posi-

198 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

tion to the coal-beds, contain one plant often of the size, shape,

and reticulated neuration of the Glossopteris Browniana, but

without the midrib. For this I have proposed the name Gan-

gamopteris; and of this generic form a species, G. angustifolius

(M‘Coy), occurs in New-South-Wales coal-plant beds along with

the Glossopteris Browniana.

In all the marine Australian Mesozoic fossiliferous beds which

I have seen, the genus Trigonia is absent.

TRIASSIC AND PERMIAN PERIODS.

I was able to suggest the existence of Trias deposits in Aus-

tralia from the muschelkalk genus Myaphoria, which I recog-

nized in some fossils from Wollumbilla sent by Mr. Clarke ;

and the Permian I suggested to exist at Mantuan Downs, also

in New South Wales, from the Producte and Aulesteges of that

period submitted to me in the same collection.

CARBONIFEROUS PERIOD.

The sandstones of the Avon in Gippsland are the only traces

of this formation that I can recognize in Victoria; and the only

fossil I have seen from it is the Lepidodendron referred to above,

identical with that recognized by me many years ago from New

South Wales, and which I have lately seen also from Queens-

land.

DEVONIAN PERIOD.

It is with great pleasure I announce the fact of my having

been able satisfactorily to determine the existence of this forma-

tion also in Australia, the limestone of Buchan in Gippsland

containing characteristic corals, Placodermatous fish, and abun-

dance of the Spirifera levicostata, perfectly identical with speci-

mens from the European Devonian Limestones of the Eifel.

UPPER SILURIAN PERIOD.

I have been able to recognize the Mayhill Sandstones and the

Wenlock rocks with certainty in many localities in Victoria.

At Broadhurst Creek, for instance, the beds are filled with

numbers of the Phacops (Odontochila) longicaudatus, exactly as

the corresponding English beds of Cheney Longville are in Shrop-

shire; and here, as in every part of the northern hemisphere,

the Spirifera reticulata is the commonest Brachiopod ; and many

others identical with species of England, Bohemia, and North

America occur with it.

The Ludlow rocks are indicated by the Orthoceras bullatum

and a series of starfish closely representing those of the English

Ludlow beds, together with a beautiful new Homalonotus (H.

and Paleontology of Victoria. 199

Harrisoni, M‘Coy), which I have named after the discoverer, as

well as the Graptolites Ludensis. The Hemithyris diodonta(Dalm.)

is as abundant in the Mayhill Sandstone of Victoria as in the

corresponding English beds at Malvern; and the same ap-

pearance of oblong smooth Pentamerus (P. australis, M‘Coy)

marks this sandy base of the Upper Silurian in Victoria as in

England and Wales and North America.

CAMBRIAN PERIOD OF SEDGWICK, LOWER SILURIAN OF

MURCHISON.

It is to this period that I have been able without hesitation

to refer the whole of the slates containing gold-quartz veins or

reefs in Victoria; and all the slates containing these gold-bear-

ing veins are identical in age and character with those of North

Wales, in which the Romans worked the gold-mines of Gogo-

fau.

Not only are the majority of the fossil Graptolites found in

the Welsh Llandeilo Flags and in the corresponding Cumber-

land and Scotch slates, also found in those beds in Victoria, but

we have in these formations the most extraordinary proof of the

unexpected fact which I announced on a former occasion, that

there was in the Cambrian or Lower Silurian period a nearly

complete specific uniformity of the marine fauna, not only over

the whole northern hemisphere, but across the tropics, extending

to this remote temperate latitude of the southern hemisphere.

In the slates of the gold-fields the principal fossils are Grap-

tolites; and, what is very extraordinary, I have identified speci-

fically here nearly the whole of the series of remarkable com-

pound Graptolites first made known from the similar slates of

Canada by the researches of Professor Hall. Many of the spe-

cies have not yet been recognized in any but the Canadian loca-

lities in the northern hemisphere; and to find nearly the whole

series here is most interesting, as their powers of locomotion

could only be exercised in the short ovarian and free stage ; so

that, except on the supposition of a uniform marine fauna at

this earliest zoological period of the earth’s history, we could

scarcely account for their width of distribution, and still less so

of the littoral or shallow-water Mollusca which accompany them

in other beds. The Diplograpsus mucronatus (Hall), so common

in the Utica Slates of New York, I find in equal abundance

here in the slates of Bendigo or Sandhurst, and with it abun-

dance of the D. guadrangularis (M‘Coy), completely identical

with those I described many years ago from the slates of Duin-

friesshire. The Diplograpsus pristis (His., sp.) also occurs in

these same slates, mixed with the others as in Sweden, Bohemia,

and Scotland; but in certain different sandy beds it covers the

200 Prof. M‘Coy on the Recent Zoology

whole of the planes of deposition in millions, to the exclusion of

everything else, exactly as it does in certain beds of the English

Caradoc Sandstone near Church Stretton. In some localities

these are replaced by great numbers of the Bohemian Diplo-

grapsus palmeus (Barrande), on the upper end of many specimens

of which I tind a large, smooth, pear-shaped or heart-shaped

appendage which I believe to be an ovarian vesicle. I should

remark that I have observed exactly the same appendage (bear-

ing out, I think, the idea, which I have supported formerly on

other grounds*, of the affinity of the Graptolites with the Hy-

droida) in specimens of this species from the slates of the typical

locality in Bohemia, when carrying out the direct careful com-

parisons of specimens of species which I state to be identical in

Victoria and other countries ; so the frequent observation of this

apparent ovicell in the Victorian specimens does not at-all affect

the identity of this species with that of the basin of Bohemia, of

which there can be no doubt. The D. ramosus (Hall) in our

slates is also identical with those of the Utica Slate of New York.

Of the group of compound Canadian Graptolites, the commonest

in the Victorian gold-field slates of many localities is the Didy-

mograpsus caduceus (Salt.), first described from the Quebec Slates.

In many localities the specimens of this species are as small a.

the first-described Canadian ones ; but in others they acquire :

greatly increased size, occasionally twice the length and nearly

three times the width; and the angle of divarication of the twc

branches varies from 5° to 70°. This is usually accompanied

by the D. serratulus (Hall), identical with those of the New York

Slates, and generally also by the very large Canadian D. bryonotdes

(Hall), which it is possible may be hereafter found to be the

perfect development of my G. datus. The D. nitidus (Hall) is

more rare, but perfectly identical with the Canadian types. The

Graptolites gracilis (Hall), identical with the New-York and

Canadian species, is one of the rarer compound forms. The

curious radiating compound forms, which created so much

astonishment when published first by Professor Hall in his De-

cades of the paleontology of this part of Sir H. Logan’s Geo-

logical Survey of Canada, | find in just as great abundance in

the slates of the same age in Victoria. D. octobrachiatus, D.

quadribrachiatus, and D. Logani (Hall) are, especially the latter,

not uncommon in many of the gold-field localities. The curious

Canadian quadrifid Graptohte, named Phyllograptus typus by

Hall, is one of our most abundant Australian Graptolites; but,

although sometimes upwards of an inch in length, small speci-

mens, I find, on comparison with Swedish specimens of the

G. folium of Hisinger, are perfectly identical therewith ; and,

* British Paleozoic Rocks and Fossils.

and Paleontology of Victoria. 201

further, on carefully comparing Bohemian specimens of the G.

ovatus of Barrande with the Swedish G. folium, I have no doubt

they belong to one variable species, and are identical with the

smaller examples of the Australian and Canadian species, and,

further, that the European specimens are truly quadrifoliate,

like Hall’s Phyllograptus ; and in this way the difference in the

different descriptions, as to the width of the midrib, becomes

intelligible.

As a general rule, the Graptolite-slates in every part of the

world contain no other fossils. I many years ago discovered in

Wales, near Builth, the only shell I ever heard of in Graptolite-

slates (the Siphonotreta micula, M‘Coy); and I was greatly sur-

prised to recognize it also in Victoria, in the Deep Creek section.

The Crustacean genus Hymenocaris is represented by a new

species, H. Saltert (M‘Coy), found in most of the Graptolite-

slate localities.

In a different set of sandy, marly, and mud-stone beds (as at

Woori Yallock, Yarra) we find :—an extensive series of the genera

and many of the species of Corals, Trilobites, and Mollusca of

the ‘‘ Bala beds” of North Wales; species of Favosites*, Paleo-

ora, Calymene, Phacops, Beyrichia, Strophomena, Leptagonia

lepressa, Spirtfera reticularis, Orthis elegantula, the characteristic

ittle genus Cuculle’la, Murchisonia, Conularia, &c.; and some

species new, and some identical with British ones, forming a

group so completely reproducing the well-known Bala beds as

to afford a second case in support of the view of the general

specific identity of the marine fauna over both hemispheres of

the whole world in the earliest palzeozoic times. ,

It is curious that I have not yet seen any trace of the genus

Trinucleus in Australian beds, nor Ampyz, while all the above-

mentioned genera of Trilobites, with Acidaspis, Chirurus, &c.,

are well marked.

I can scarcely close this part of the subject without drawing

attention to the curious confirmation offered in Victorian geo-

logy of the view of Professor Sedgwick and myself, that there

was a real systematic line of division between the Upper Silu-

rian and the Cambrian and Lower Silurian, at the base of the

Mayhill Sandstone and over the Caradoc Sandstone—the May-

hill Sandstone, which we first defined and demonstrated to have

Upper-Silurian fossils only, and the true Caradoe Sandstone full

exclusively of Lower-Silurian or Cambrian types,—the previous

confusion of these two sandstones, from the erroneous mingling

* Itis worthy of remark that as on the continent of Europe the Devonian

genus Pleurodictyum has now been found in Silurian strata, so in those

beds in Victoria I find a new species (P. megastoma, M‘Coy), with cells

half an inch in diameter.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 14

202 Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders.

of their fossils in collections, having given Sir Roderick Murchison

the erroneous impression that his. Upper and Lower Silurian

eroups of fossils (the distinctness of which he himself was the

first to point out) were mixed together in the Caradoc Sand-

stone, and that consequently the Bala beds, identical in fossils

with those of the Caradoc beds (although formerly recognized

by him as the type of the Cambrian system), could not be sepa-

rated palzontologically from the Upper Silurian group. The

Mayhill Sandstone was one of the first formations I recognized,

on landing near Melbourne, with the usual Upper-Silurian

fossils; and it is now found here, as in Wales, to be slightly

unconformable to the Cambrian or Lower Silurian, forming the

obvious base of the former and totally distinct from the latter.

XXIII.—Notes on Spiders, with Descriptions of several Species

supposed to be new to Arachnologists. By Joun Buackwatt,

PSEA:

Tribe Octonoculina.

Family Myearip#.

Genus Frutstata, Walck.

Filistata distincta, un. sp.

Length of the male (not including the falces) -4; of an inch;

length of the cephalothorax =3,, breadth 3;; breadth of the ab-

domen +; length of an anterior leg 11; length of a leg of the

third pair +3; length of a palpus 13.

The cephalothorax is oval, clothed with yellowish-grey hairs,

moderately convex, with a longitudinal indentation im the medial

line, and an abrupt prominence in the cephalic region, on which

the eyes are seated, the space between the prominence and the

frontal margin being sloped forwards; its colour is brownish

yellow, the medial region being the darkest. The falces are

small, subconical, prominent, united at the base, somewhat

hollowed on the inner surface, armed with a very short, curved,

red-brown fang, and have a pointed tooth near their extremity,

on the inner side; the maxilla, which are strongly curved to-

wards the lip, have the palpi articulated on the outer side,

nearer to their extremity than their base; the lip is long, and

somewhat pointed at its apex; and the sternum is oval and

hairy. These parts have a brownish-yellow hue, the falces,

which are rather the darkest-coloured, being tinged with red at

the extremity. The eyes are closely grouped on the cephalic

prominence, and are diaphanous; three on each side, of an oval

figure, form an irregular triangle, the anterior ones being the

Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders. 203

largest of the eight, and between these groups two round eyes

are placed transversely. The legs are long, moderately robust,

provided with hairs and spines, and are of a brownish-yellow

colour, the tibize, metatarsi, and tarsi having a tinge of red; the

first pair is the longest, then the fourth, and the third pair is

the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by three claws; the two

superior ones are curved and pectinated, and the small inferior

one is inflected, and has a few fine teeth at its base: the palpi

are very long, and resemble the legs in colour ; the radial nearly

equals the humeral joint in length, and the short digital joint

is terminated by the oval red-brown palpal organs, which have

a prominent, spiral, dark red-brown spine at their extremity.

The abdomen is oviform, clothed with hairs, slightly convex above,

and projects a little over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is of

a yellowish-brown colour, the under part being the palest.

The immature female is rather darker-coloured than the adult

male, and its legs are stronger and much shorter, but their

relative length is the same; its palpi, which are comparatively

short and robust, have the dark-brown digital joint terminated

by a curved claw.

It is very difficult to determine the position that the spiders of

the genus Filistata should occupy in a systematic arrangement

of the Araneidea. They possess few characteristics in common

with the Mygalide, in which family they are usually placed by

arachnologists. By the disposition of the eyes, the relative

length of the legs, and the structure of the falces they are

allied to the spiders of the genus Artema; but by their general

structure and economy they appear to have the nearest affinity

to the Drasside, and particularly to certain species of the genus

Drassus.

The adult male described above, and two immature females

were captured in the island of Jamaica.

Family Lycosip#.

Genus Lycosa, Latr.

Lycosa ingens.

Lycosa ingens, Blackw., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xx. p. 284.

The male is smaller than the female, but it resembles her in

colour. Its palpi have a red-brown hue, and are clothed with

greyish-brown hairs, the digital joint, which is the darkest,

having a few white hairs at its base; the radial is larger than

the cubital joint, and has some white hairs at its extremity ;

the digital jomt is of an oblong-oval figure, slightly convex

above, compact at the extremity, which is provided with several

strong spines, and has a concavity at its base, on the underside,

] 4

204. Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders.

which comprises the palpal organs ; these organs are moderately

developed, rather complex im structure, and of a red-brown

colour at the base, the hue of the anterior part, whose black

inner margin is curved, being dull yellow; from a small dark

red-brown piece, situated near the middle of the outer side, pro-

ject two pointed processes, one of which is prominent and the

other is directed outwards towards the margin of the digital

joint.

Since the female of this fine species of Lycosa was described

in the ‘ Annals and Mag. of Nat. Hist.,? I have received from

the Barao do Castello de Paiva specimens of both sexes, which

had been captured in the islands of Madeira, Porto Santo, and

Deserta Grande.

Family SaLrrcipZ.

Genus Sauticus, Latr.

Salticus diligens, n. sp.

Length of the male (not including the spmners) = of an

inch; length of the cephalothorax +15, breadth ;4,; breadth of

the abdomen ;!;; length of an anterior leg +; length of a leg

of the third pair -3,.

The minute intermediate eye of each lateral row is rather

nearer to the anterior than to the posterior eye of the same row.

The cephalothorax is large, glossy, somewhat quadrilateral,

sloping abruptly at the base and projecting a little beyond the

falces in front ; it has a curved indentation in the middle, whose

convexity is directed forwards, and is of a reddish-brown colour ;

the lateral eyes are seated on brown spots, and there are some

white hairs on its sides. The falces are short, subconical, verti-

eal, and have a brownish-red hue. The maxille are straight,

and enlarged and rounded at the extremity, and the lip and

sternum are oval. These parts are of a yellowish-brown colour.

The legs are robust, especially those of the anterior pair, and

are provided with hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of

the latter occurring on the inferior surface of the tibize and

metatarsi of the first and second pairs; they are of a brownish-

yellow colour, the inferior surface of the femora of the anterior

pair having a brown hue; the first pair is the longest, then the

fourth, and the second and third pairs are nearly of equal length;

each tarsus is terminated by two curved claws, below which

there is a small scopula. The palpi resemble the legs in colour;

the cubital and radial jomts are short, the latter being the

shorter; the digital is long, of nearly equal breadth, slightly

convex and hairy above, compact at the extremity, with a con-

cavity at the base, on the underside, comprising the palpal

Mr. J. Blackwali on new Species of Spiders. 209

organs, which are moderately developed, with a slender, curved,

reddish-brown spine near the extremity, on the outer side, and

are of a yellowish-red colour. The abdomen is oviform, clothed

with hairs, somewhat depressed, and projects over the base of

the cephalothorax ; the upper part is of a yellowish-brown co-

lour, with a series of yellowish-white angular lines in the middle,

whose vertices are directed forwards ; three dark-brown spots

occur on each side of the medial line, and above the prominent

yellowish-red spinners there is a yellowish-white space, which

comprises two contiguous, brown, angular lines; the upper part

is encompassed by a white band, and the sides and under part

have a dark-brown hue, a dull-yellow band extending along

each side of the latter.

This Salticus was captured in the island of Madeira.

Salticus vafer, n. sp.

Length of the female 4 of an inch; length of the cephalo-

thorax =/,, breadth -1,; breadth of the abdomen +';; length of a

posterior leg +; length of a leg of the second pair +.

The cephalothorax is glossy, somewhat quadrilateral, and

slopes from the posterior eyes to both extremities ; it projects a

little beyond the falces in front, has a broad, shallow indenta-

tion in the middle, and is of a brown colour, the medial line

and the sides, which are much the palest, having a tinge of red;

and the hue of the cephalic region and narrow lateral margins

is brownish-black. The minute intermediate eye of each lateral

row is rather nearer to the posterior than to the anterior eye of

the same row. The falces are short, subconical, and vertical ;

the maxille are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the ex-

tremity; and the lip and sternum are oval. These parts are of

a red-brown colour, the falces being the darkest, the maxillie

much the palest, and the base of the hp having a dark-brown

hue. The legs are moderately robust, and are provided with

hairs and sessile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring

on the inferior surface of the tibize and metatarsi of the first

and second pairs; they are of a dull-yellow colour, with a red-

brown annulus at the base of the tibie, metatarsi, and tarsi;

the fourth pair is the longest, then the third, and the second

pair is the shortest ; each tarsus is terminated by two slender,

curved claws, and below them there is a small scopula. The

palpi are short, and have a pale-yellowish hue. The abdomen

is oviform, thinly clothed with hairs, convex above, and projects

over the base of the cephalothorax; it is of a yellowish-white

colour, the under part being the palest ; the sides are irregularly

marked with brown intermixed with yellowish-white; a broad

yellowish-white band, which extends along the middle of the

206 Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders.

upper part, and is broadest at its anterior extremity, projects

from each side, at somewhat more than a third of its length

from the spinners, a ray of the same hue, which is directed

obliquely downwards and backwards ; the anterior part of the

band comprises several brown spots, and there are in the poste-

rior part two or three angular lines of the same colour, having

their vertices directed forwards; the under part is without spot,

and the sexual organs, which are not highly developed, have a

red-brown hue.

Salticus vafer was captured in the island of Madeira.

Salticus catus, n. sp.

Length of an immature female (not including the spmners)

3, of an inch; length of the cephalothorax +5, breadth +; ;

breadth of the abdomen +1; ; length of a posterior leg 4; length

of a leg of the second pair +.

The legs are moderately robust, provided with hairs and ses-

sile spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring on the in-

ferior surface of the tibiee and metatarsi of the first and second

pairs, and are of a brownish-yellow hue; the fourth pair is the

longest, then the third, and the second pair is the shortest ;

each tarsus is terminated by two curved claws, and below them

there is a small seopula. The palpi are short and resemble the

legs in colour. The cephalothorax is convex, glossy, somewhat

quadrilateral, sloping to each extremity, and projecting a little

beyond the falces in front; it has a sight mdentation near the

middle, and is of a brown colour, tinged with yellow in the

medial line and on the sides, and the cephalic region has a

brownish-black hue. The minute intermediate eye of each

lateral row is nearly equidistant from the eyes constituting its

extremities. The falces are short, subconical, vertical, and

armed with one or two small teeth on the inner surface; the

maxill are straight, and enlarged and rounded at the extremity;

and the lip is oval. These parts have a brown hue, the falces

being tinged with red. The sternum is oval and of a yellowish-

brown colour. The abdomen is oviform, glossy, pointed at the

spinners, which are prominent, convex above, and projects a

little over the base of the cephalothorax ; the upper part has a

dark-brown hue, with irregular lateral margins, and a brownish-

yellow dentated band extends along the middle, which com-

prises a series of angular lines of a dark-brown hue, whose

vertices are directed forwards; the sides and under part are of

a pale brownish-yellow colour, the former being marked with a

few longitudinal dark-brown streaks, and the latter having a

black spot near the base of the spinners.

This species was captured in the island of Madeira.

Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders. 207

Salticus sublestus, n. sp.

Length of the female + of an inch; length of the cephalo-

thorax -=1,, breadth =1,; breadth of the abdomen =; ; length of

a posterior leg -3,; length of a leg of the second pair 15.

The cephalothorax is rather long, glossy, and somewhat

quadrilateral ; it slopes abruptly at the base, projects a little

beyond the falces in front, and is of a dark-brown colour, the

cephalic region being the darkest. The minute intermediate

eye of each lateral row is nearly equidistant from the eyes con-

stituting its extremities. The falces are short, subconical, and

vertical; and the maxille are straight, and enlarged and

rounded at the extremity. These organs have a brownish-yellow

hue, the former having a tinge of red. The lip and sternum

are oval, and of a dark-brown colour. The legs are robust,

particularly those of the first and second pairs, and are of a

brownish-yellow hue; they are provided with hairs and sessile

spines, two parallel rows of the latter occurring on the inferior

surface of the tibize and metatarsi of the first and second pairs ;

the fourth pair is the longest, then the third, and the second

pair is rather shorter than the first ; each tarsus is terminated

by two slender, curved claws, and below them there is a small

scopula. The palpi are short, and resemble the legs in colour.

The abdomen is oviform, glossy, convex above, and projects a

little over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is of a brown hue,

with two nearly parallel, short, white streaks at each extremity

of the upper part, the posterior ones being the broader ; there

are a few obscure, oblique, whitish streaks on each side of the

medial line, and two longer ones on the posterior half of each

side: the sexual organs are moderately developed, and of a red-

brown colour.

The male is darker-coloured than the female, and the whitish

marks on its abdomen are less conspicuous. The legs have a

brown hue. The palpi are long and resemble the legs in colour;

the cubital and radial joints are clavate, and the latter, which is

rather the shorter, has a straight, pointed apophysis at its ex-

tremity, in front, towards the outer side, and a minute one on

the underside; the digital joint has an oblong-oval form ; it is

convex and hairy above, compact at the extremity, with a con-

cavity underneath comprising the palpal organs, which are well

developed, not very complex in structure, with a short, pale,

pointed process at their extremity, and are of a brown colour.

This small Sa/ticus inhabits the island of Madeira.

Salticus vigilans, n. sp.

Length of an immature female (not including the spinners)

41 of an inch; length of the cephalothorax +5, breadth ;';;

208 Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders.

breadth of the abdomen 5+; length of an anterior leg +;

length of a leg of the second pair +.

The legs are robust, especially those of the anterior pair, and

are provided with hairs and sessile spies, two parallel rows of

the latter occurring on the inferior surface of the tibiz and

metatarsi of the first and second pairs; they have a dull-yellow

hue, the anterior pair being tinged with red; the first pair is

the longest, then the fourth, and the second pair is slightly

shorter than the third ; each tarsus is terminated by two curved

claws, below which a small scopula is situated. The minute

intermediate eye of each lateral row is nearly equidistant from

the eyes constituting its extremities. The cephalothorax, which

is somewhat quadrilateral, slopes abruptly at its base, and

projects a little beyond the falces in front; it is glossy, with a

shallow indentation in the middle, and is of a brownish-red

colour, the lateral eyes being seated on brown spots. The falces

are short, subconical and vertical ; the maxille are straight, and

enlarged and rounded at the extremity; and the lip and sternum

are oval. These parts are of a brownish-red colour, the falces

being the darkest. The palpi are short, and resemble the legs

in colour. The abdomen is oviform, glossy, pointed at the

spinners, which are prominent, moderately convex above, and

projects over the base of the cephalothorax ; it is of a brown-

yellow hue; the under part, which is the palest, has an obscure

brown band extending along the middle, and on each side of the

medial line of the upper part there is a longitudinal row of four

brown spots.

Immature females of this species have been received from the

island of Madeira.

Family THoMiIsip#.

Genus Purttopromus, Walck.

Philodromus ambiguus.

Philodromus pallidus, Blackw., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xx.

p- 499; Spiders of Great Britain and Ireland, p. 93, pl. 5. fig. 56.

This spider, when originally described by me, was supposed

to be specifically identical with the Philodromus pallidus of

Walckenaer and the Artamus griseus of Koch ; but a comparison

of these species, made subsequently, has not only convinced me

that it is distinct, but has also induced the belief that it is new

to arachnology ; the specific name ambiguus therefore is substi-

tuted for that of pallidus.

Genus Sparassus, Walck.

Sparassus ornatus.

Sparassus ornatus, Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insect. Apt. tom. 1. p. 583;

Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders. 209

Sund. Vet. Akad. Handl. 1832, p. 271; Koch, Die Arachn. Band xi.

p- 90, tab. 417. fig. 1021.

An immature male of this handsome spider, which has not

hitherto been recorded as indigenous to Britain, was transmitted

to me from Exeter, by Mr. Edward Parfitt, in August 1866.

This specimen, which had not undergone its final ecdysis, was

captured in Devonshire.

Family Drassipa.

Genus Drassus, Walck.

Drassus Collingsia, n. sp.

Leugth of an immature female (not including the spinners)

=, of an inch; length of the cephalothorax ;4, breadth +}, ;

breadth of the abdomen =, ; length of a posterior leg 2; length

of a leg of the third pair 4.

The eyes, which are seated on black spots, are disposed in

two transverse, slightly curved rows, on the anterior part of the

cephalothorax ; the posterior row is rather the longer, and the

two intermediate eyes are nearer to each other than they are to

the lateral eyes of the same row ; the intermediate eyes of the

anterior row, which is situated immediately above the frontal

margin, are the largest and darkest-coloured of the eight. The

cephalothorax is convex, glossy, compressed before, rounded on

the sides, which are marked with furrows converging towards a

narrow indentation in the medial lie of the posterior region,

and is of a brownish-yellow colour, with narrow, soot-coloured

lateral margins. The falces are conical, rather promment, and

have one or two small teeth on the inner surface; the maxillze

are convex near the base, depressed transversely near the mid-

dle, enlarged at the extremity, and inclined towards the lp,

which is somewhat quadrate, being rather longer than broad ;

and the sternum is oval, with small eminences on the sides,

opposite to the legs. These parts have a brownish-yellow hue,

the lip being the brownest, and the sternum, which is the palest,

having soot-coloured lateral margins. The legs are moderately

long, hairy, and of a pale brownish-yellow colour ; the inferior

surface of the metatarsi and tarsi are clothed to a greater or

less extent with greyish-brown hair-like papille, and the tibie

and metatarsi of the third and fourth pairs are provided with

sessile spines; the fourth pair is the longest, then the first, and

the third pair is the shortest ; the tarsi are terminated by two

curved, pectinated claws. The palpi resemble the legs in co-

lour, and the digital jomt, which is the darkest, has a small

curved claw at its extremity. The abdomen is of an oblong-

oviform figure, tapering a little to the spinners, which are pro-

210 Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders.

minent and cylindrical; it is slightly convex above, projects a

little over the base of the cephalothorax, and is clothed with

adpressed grey hairs; the upper part is of a yellowish-brown

colour, with some long blackish hairs at its extremity, in front,

and an obscure, brown, fusiform band extending thence, in the

medial line, about half its length; the under part is of a pale

dull-yellowish hue; the basal joint of the spmners has a yel-

lowish-white tint, and the other joints of those organs are of a

brownish-black colour,

I have much pleasure in connecting with this Drassus the

name of Mrs. Louisa E. Collings of Serk, who on various occa-

sions has obligingly forwarded to me numerous interesting spe-

cies of Araneidea captured in that island, and among them

several specimens of this Drassus in different stages of growth,

but all in a state of immaturity.

Family CInIFLONIDA.

Genus Vetepa, Blackw.

Veleda pallens.

eleda pallens, Blackw., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. vol. ix. p. 372.

I am informed by Frederick Pollock, Esq., of Thurlow, who

has resided in the island of Madeira, that he has found speci-

mens of Veleda pallens in that island, associated with Nephila

aurelia, at an elevation of 800 feet above the level of the sea.

This species, he remarks, constructs a horizontal geometric

snare, and invests one of the radii with a loosish thread. Should

a young Nephila venture to trespass on the snare, the Veleda

rapidly approaches it with a vibratory motion, and envelopes its

victim with silk drawn from the spinners by a lateral motion of

the posterior legs.

Family THERIDIID.

Genus THERIDIoN, Walck.

Theridion triste.

Theridion triste, Hahn, Die Arachn. Band i. p. 89, tab. 21. fig. 67.

ee triste, Koch, Die Arachn. Band vui. p. 83, tab. 276. figs. 653,

Two females of this species (now first recorded as British)

were found under a stone, in a pasture near Hendre House, on

the 16th of June, 1864, They were placed in a phial; and one

of them constructed therem two balloon-shaped cocoons of white

silk, of a loose texture, the larger of which measured } of an

inch in diameter, and contained about thirty spherical eggs of a

pale-yellow colour.

The Theridion triste of Walckenaer (Hist. Nat. des Insect.

Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders. 211

Apt. tom. 1. p. 291) is a much larger spider than the 7. triste

of Hahn and Koch, and is probably specifically identical with

the Phrurolithus linatus of the latter author (Die Arachn.

Band vi. p. 107, tab. 206. fig. 509).

Theridion grossum.

Theridion grossum, Walck., Hist. Nat. des Insect. Apt. tom. ii. p. 328.

Theridium grossum, Koch, Die Arachn. Band. iv. p. 112, tab. 140. fig. 321.

Length of the female 2 of an inch; length of the cephalo-

thorax 4, breadth $ ; breadth of the abdomer 753 length of an

anterior leg 3 ; jena of a leg of the third pair ;°,.

As the adult female of Theridion grossum, which, like certain

species of the genus Latrodectus, does not acquire its sombre

hue till it arrives at maturity, has been well described by Koch,

I shall merely supply, in addition to the measurement given

above, a few particulars that have been omitted.

The eyes are disposed on the anterior part of the cephalo-

thorax in two transverse rows; the four intermediate ones de-

scribe a trapezoid, the two anterior ones, which form its shortest

side, and are seated on a protuberance, being the smallest and

darkest-coloured of the eight; the eyes of each lateral pair are

placed obliquely on a tubercle and are contiguous. The maxille

are obliquely truncated at the extremity, on the outer side, and

inclined towards the lip, which is somewhat quadrate, being

broader at the base than at the apex. These parts have a red-

dish-brown hue, that of their extremities being yellowish-white.

The sexual organs, which are well-developed and semicircular,

have their posterior margin curved and prominent, and are of a

red-brown colour, that of the branchial opercula being dull

yellow.

The immature female and adult male of this species do not

appear to be known to arachnologists. They differ remarkably

from the adult female, the upper “part of the abdomen being of

a dull yellowish- white hue, densely freckled with minute white

spots, and having a series of broad, curved, transverse, soot-

coloured bands in the middle, whose extremities extend to the

sides. The legs have a brownish-yellow hue.

The male is much smaller than the adult female, and its

slender legs are much lighter-coloured. Its palpi are short, and

the radial, which is larger than the cubital joint, is produced at

its extremity, on the outer side; the digital joint is of an elon-

gated oval form and of a reddish-brown colour ; it is pointed at

the extremity, convex and hairy externally, concave within,

comprising the palpal organs, which are well developed and are

terminated by a large curved spine, whose extremity is in con-

212 Mr. J. Blackwall on new Species of Spiders.

tact with some white membrane; their colour is red-brown in-

termixed with brownish-yellow.

An adult male and female, and specimens of immature females,

of Theridion grossum have been transmitted to me by Mrs. Louisa

KE. Collings from the island of Serk, m which locality they were

captured.

Genus Larropectvus, Walck.

Latredectus Erebus.

Length of the female 2, of an inch; length of the cephalo-

thorax 1, breadth + aeeth of the Aidomen =3;; length of an

anterior leg =3; ; leneth of a leg of the third pair 12

The Latrodectus Erebus of authors was considered by M. Dugés

to be the adult female of Latrodectus malmignatus (Annales des

Sciences Naturelles, seconde série, Zoologie, tome vi. p. 169) ;

and his opinion appears to be well founded. Adult living spe-

cimens of this species,’captured in the island of Porto Santo, im

1865, and forwarded to me by the Bardo do Castello de Paiva,

were received in vigorous health, and fed freely on the insects

with which they were supplied; but they could not be induced

by any means I could devise to inflict a wound with their short

and weak fangs on my forearm, or on any other part to which

they were applied. The failure of this experiment is to be re-

eretted ; for, had it been brought to a successful issue, it would

have served to test the accuracy of the belief entertamed in

Italy and in the Canary Islands that the bite of Latrodectus

malmignatus produces very alarming symptoms, which frequently

terminate fatally.

The cocoon of this spider is balloon-shaped, of a very compact

texture, and of a pale dull-yellowish colour; it measures = inch

in length, }inch in diameter in its broadest part, and comprises

between two and three hundred eggs. The young, on com-

pleting their first ecdysis, have the abdomen marked with white

spots.

Tribe Senoculina.

Family Dysperip@.

Genus Srcestrria, Latr.

Segestria perfida.

A female of this species, which had to undergo its final ecdysis,

was taken in Exeter, on a vine growing against a wall having a

south aspect, in May 1865, by Mr. Edward Parfitt, by whom it

was presented to me.

Segestria perfida was included in the ‘ History of the Spiders

of Great Britain and Ireland, part second, page 3738, solely on

the authority of Dr. Leach, who has recorded an instance of its

Mr. F. P. Marrat on some new Species of Oliva. 213

capture at Plymouth. The additional evidence supplied by

Mr. Parfitt of its claim to be regarded as indigenous to Britain

is highly interesting.

As the falees of this species do not appear to acquire their

brilliant green hue till it. becomes adult, M. Dugés was induced

to regard it, when in a state of immaturity, as identical with the

Segestria senoculata of authors (Annales des Sciences Naturelles,

seconde série, Zoologie, tome vi. p. 169).

XXIV.—On some new Species of Oliva, and a new Trivia.

By Freperick P. Marrar.

Tur Cones, Cowries, Mitres, and many other genera have

been carefully studied, and the result is that a large number of

species have been described belonging to each genus. The

Olives have scarcely. had twenty new species described in as

many years: but this is not all; the species that were known,

and many of those that were described, have not been brought

under the notice of conchologists. I am now alluding to the

shells figured by Duclos, in his excellent work published in the

year 1835.

The following new species have been named in my cabinet for

several months, and during that time I have found no reason

for altering my views respecting the validity of the species now

described. .

1. Oliva violacea, Maryrat.

Shell ovate-fusiform ; spire exserted, conical, canaliculate,

impressed ; colour white, with pale zigzag lines and numerous

halfmoon-shaped dots; interior of aperture and base of pillar

beautiful violet.

Obs. Intermediate between O. reticularis and O. episcopalis ;

differs from both in having the folds at the base suffused with

beautiful violet. Loc. unknown.

2. Oliva jamaicensis, Marrat.

Shell cylindrically fusiform; spire short, canaliculate, rather

flattened ; colour reddish brown, with triangular cream-coloured

spots and two broad indistinct bands; mouth purple; pillar

reddish brown on the plaits at the base.

Jamaica.

Obs. Somewhat intermediate between O. splendidula and O.

reticularis, approaching the former in form and the latter in

markings.

3. Olwa polita, Marrat.

Shell elongately fusiform ; spire much produced, canaliculate,

214 Mr. F. P. Marrat on some new Species of Oliva.

colour yellowish white, with triangular brown markings, with

two broad indistinct bands; columellar lip with few plaits ;

aperture pale purple, almost white. '

Obs. Resembles the O. jaspidea, Duclos, O. Duclosii, Reeve,

but may at once be known by its oblique and narrow form. A

very pretty shell, and I have seen at least twenty specimens.

4. Oliva piperata, Marrat.

Shell obliquely fusiform; spire elongated, blunt, canalicu-

late ; aperture widening downwards ; colour white, with purple-

brown spots ; suture edged with pencilled lines, which terminate

in dark triangular brown blotches.

Obs. Allied to O. conoidalis, Lam., but much more elongated,

and the markings are altogether different.

5. Oliva faba, Marrat.

Shell cylindrical ; spire short ; whorls rounded, canaliculate ;

colour yellowish white, with brown zigzag markings; mouth

purple brown ; plaits on the columella numerous.

Philippines. -

Obs. This species appears somewhat intermediate between O.

todesina, Ducl., and O. ispidula, resembling the former in form

and the latter in the open sutural groove.

6. Oliva blanda, Marrat.

Shell ovate-cylindrical ; spire callous; colour dark drab with

dark-brown zigzag lines; aperture purplish brown ; pillar-lip

swollen, plaits sharp; size about 1 inch.

7. Oliva cylindrica, Marrat.

Shell cylindrically fusiform; spire depressed, canaliculate ;

colour either light or dark drab, with brown zigzag lines shaded

with yellow, and sometimes two interrupted bands ; aperture

from pale to very dark purple; folds at the base stained with

brown.

Borneo.

Obs. This is allied to the Borneo form of O. irisans, Lam.,

the spire of which is callous.

8. Oliva ornata, Marrat.

Shell ovate-subcylindrical, rather inflated ; spire callous, apex

papillary ; cream-coloured, with light-brown markings, some-

times double-banded with dark-brown spots; pillar thickened,

white, slightly plaited.

North Australia.

Obs. The only species having a callous spire from Australia.

Mr. F’. P. Marrat on a new Species of Trivia. = 215

9. Oliva similis, Marrat.

Shell ovate-cylindrical, inflated; spire small, canaliculate,

apex dark ; colour from light drab to dark yellowish brown,

with light-brown or purplish wavy lines, and sometimes dark

angular spots forming two interrupted bands; suture edged

with fine purple pencilled Imes; interior purplish brown ; co-

lumellar plaits numerous.

10. Oliva pallida, Marrat.

Shell cylindrically fusiform; spire short, conical; colour

white or very pale, with faint flexuous lines and two pale brown

bands; interior either white or light pink.

Eastern Seas.

Obs. In collections this shell is not uncommon, named O,

literata, O. scripta, or O. reticularis. It differs from all in

having a short spire and pale interior.

11. Oliva oblonga, Mavrrat.

(Duclos, plate 9. figs. 3 & 4, reticularis, var.)

Shell oblong-fusiform, very thick; spire conical, elongate,

canaliculate ; colour yellowish white suffused with ash-grey,

with brown wavy markings, generally crowded so as to form

two indistinct bands; interior cream-coloured ; plaits almost

obsolete.

Central America.

Obs. Most conchologists, when examining this shell, pro-

nounce it distinct.

12. Oliva truncata, Marrat.

Shell cylindrically ovate; spire rather shortly conical, apex

papillose; colour greyish, with zigzag dotted brown mark-

ings; suture canaliculate, edged with pencilled brown lines ;

aperture very pale purple, almost white.

Cape of Good Hope.

Obs. Shell much narrower than O. palpasta, without the dark-

brown spots, and from a very different habitat.

On a new Trivia.

Trivia affinis, Marrat.

_ Shell oblong-ovate, transversely coarsely ribbed ; beaks pro-

jecting, broad; teeth acute, dorsal groove obsolete; very pale,

but indications of colour in one of the specimens.

Obtained from a dealer’s stock among West-Indian species.

Obs. Resembles a large T. insecta, Mighels, but may at once

be known by its coarse ribs and obsolete dorsal groove.

216 Mr. A.G. Butler on new Species of Diurnal Lepidoptera.

XXV.— Descriptions of some remarkable new Species and a new

Genus of Diurnal Lepidoptera. By A. G. Burier, F.Z.S.

[Plate IV. figs. 4-9. ]

Genus Eucuto&, Hubner.

Euchloé Coliagenes, sp.nov. Pl. IV. figs. 4& 5.

Q@. Ale supra sulphureo-fulvee : anticee margine apicali late brun-

nescente, a maculis fulvis interrupto ; basi cellze discoidalis pallide

grisescente; puncto cellam terminante nigro; costa minime flavo-

ochracea: posticee margine externo maculari fusco: corpus tho-

race cinereo, pilis fulvis, capite colloque ochreo-flavescentibus ;

abdomine fulvo.

Ale subtus fulvee: anticee pallidiores, fascia antemarginali lunulata ;

margine apicali ochreo tincto; puncto cellulari velut supra nigro :

posticee ochraceze, fascia tenui discali subobliqua angulari, apud

angulum analem trimaculari: corpus pallescens luteum.

Exp. alar. une. 142.

Hab. White Nile. B.M.

This species is chiefly noticeable from its great resemblance

to the Hyale type of the genus Colias: it seems to belong to

the Jone group of Euchloé. It would be very interesting if we

could get the male, to see whether it would have the violet tips

to the front wings, so characteristic of the Jone type.

Genus Tayertis, Hiibner.

Taygetis albinotata, sp.nov. Pl. IV. figs. 6 & 7,

3. Ale supra olivaceo-fuscze : anticse integree, maculis sex submar-

ginalibus pallidioribus: posticee margine externo sinuato, nigres-

cente; maculis quatuor punctoque subanali niveis : corpus fuscum.

Ale subtus basi pallidiores; fasciis tribus ochreis pallidis; interna

et media posticarum ad angulum ani coéuntibus, media latissima ;

externa nigro marginata, posticarum extus sinuata ; linea marginali

et margine ipso nigro-fuscis : anticee ocello uno subapicali niger-

rimo, albo pupillato et minime pallido cincto: postice ocellis sex

ochreo cinctis, primo et ultimo minoribus; tertio et quarto sub-

reniformibus roseo-cinereis, lunulis albidis pupillatis ; aliis niger-

timis puncto albo pupillatis ; cillis niveis fusco variis: corpus

fuscum.

Exp. alar. unc. 33.

Hab. Bolivia. B.M.

This species is totally distinct from all the other species of the

genus; and I have often been asked why I did not describe it.

I should have done so long since, but that I was anxious to give

a figure of the insect.

Mr. A. G. Butler on a new Genus of Lepidoptera. 217

CALLEREBIA, gen. nov.

Gen. Erebie simillimum, differt forma et alarum scriptis, quee multo

illis Calistonis simulant ; antennis quoque tenuioribus minus dis-

tincte clavatis, palpisque magis angulatis.

The type species of this genus, C. scanda, greatly resembles

Callisto ; the markings are very similar, and the hind-wing

anal angle is frequently produced and lobe-shaped. The genus

is nearly allied to Hrebia, but has a totally different aspect ;

and as it does differ in several structural details, I have thought

it best to concede to the wishes of my brother lepidopterists by

separating it as a distinct genus.

Sp. 1. Callerebia scanda. PI. IV. figs. 8 & 9.

Erebia scanda, Kollar, in Hiigel’s ‘ Kaschmir,’ iv. pt. 2. p. 452, taf. 17.

figs. 3, 4 (1844).

Hab. Cashmere, Northern India. B.M.

Var. a. Alis omnino pallidioribus, fasciis subtus subobsoletis ; ocellis

posticarum duobus analibus rotundatis valde distinctis oblique

positis.

Var.d. (? an C. annada, Moore). Alis piceis marginibus pallidioribus ;

angulo anali posticarum valde producto: subtus posticae magis

albido roratz ; ocellis subanalibus duobus ceecis distinctis (variat

posticis minus productis ocellisque subtus minus oblique positis).

Var.c. Alis posticis, non productis, velut in varietate a: subtus

pallido nec albido roratis ; ocellis posticarum analibus rotundatis

distinctis nee oblique positis, ocelloque minimo discali simili (va-

riat posticis subtus uniformiter fuscis; ocellis duobus discalibus

distinctis, omnibus albo pupillatis).

This species varies considerably : it would be quite impossible

to link the two extreme varieties in our Collection, did we not

possess all the intermediates, as they are far more distinct than

many species.

Sp.? 2. Callerebia annada.

Erebia annada, F. Moore, Cat. Lep. Mus. East Ind. Comp. p. 226, n. 475

(1857).

Hab. Bootan (Moore).

Sp.? 3. Callerebia nirmala.

Erebia nirmala, ¥. Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 501. sp. 91 (1865).

Hab. North-western Himalayas (Moore).

As Thave not yet seen the types of these two forms, I am

unable to say whether or not they are identical with any of the

varieties of scanda.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 1

218 Mr. A.G. Butler on a new Species of Tiger-Moth.

XX VI.—Description of a new Species of Tiger-Moth in the pos-

session of Mr. T. W. Wood. By Axtuur G. Burter, I.Z.8.

[Plate IV. figs. 1-3.]

Tu species of Tiger-Moth described in the present paper is the

most beautiful that I have yet seen ; it appears to be quite new,

and to belong to the genus Mazeras, characterized by Mr. Walker

in his ‘Catalogue of the Lepidoptera Heterocera in the British

Museum ;’ the Eucharia sacrifica of Hiibner’s ‘Zutrage exotis-

cher Schmetterlinge’ seems also to belong to this genus: all

the species are South American. This group will now stand as

follows :—

Genus Mazmras, Walker

(Cat. Lep. Het. Brit. Mus. pt. m1. p. 632, genus 14.)

“ Corpus longum, validum, eylindricum : proboscis corporis dimidio

brevior: palpi ascendentes, longiusculi; articulus secundus arcuatus,

primo multolongior ; tertius conicus, minimus : antennee mediocriter

pectinate, corporis dimidio non longiores : abdomen alas posticas

longe superans: pedes validi, longiusculi; tibiae posticze calearibus

quatuor longis. Ala angustz, sat longe.’”’—Lep. Het.

Sp. 1. Mazeras conferta, Walker, p. 633.

“‘Saturate rufa; palpi apice nigri; antennz nigre ; thorax ocello

discali maculisque quatuor nigris: abdomen luteum, e maculis

nigris trivittatum ; tibize tarsique nigree ; alee anticee fuscee ma-

culis rufis strigisque transversis testaceis.”—Lep. Het.

Exp. alar. unc. 23.

Hab. Brazil. ?9. B.M. PI. IV. fig. 1.

Sp. 2. (Hucharia) sacrifica, Hubner

(Zutrage exot. Schmett. figs. 473, 474 (1806).)

Olivaceo-fusea ; thorax collo albicante ; abdomen supra virideseente

fasciatum, punctis lateralibus albis, ano rufescente: alze anticee

roseo-albo fasciatee, subtus ad marginem albo rubroque maculatee :

posticee punctis marginalibus lunulatis maculisque quinque sub-

apicalibus albidis ; maculis submarginalibus rubris.

Exp. alar. unc. 23.

Hab. Tpaunema (Brazil).

The genus Eucharia is characterized by Hiibner in his ‘ Ver-

zeichniss,’ p. 181. n. 1865-1867 (1816); he does not, however,

include his sacrifica, which certainly is not congeneric with

those species which he does include.

Sp. 3. Mazeras Woodii, sp. nov. PI. IV. figs. 2, 3.

Q. Ale supra nigerrime ; anticee striola punctoque ad celle finem,

subcostalibus et fascia lata angulis duobus alternis diseum totum

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Skulls of Hares and Picas. 219

interruptante luteo-ochreis, ad basim flavescentibus: posticse

macula luteo-ochrea subquadrata subapicali, a venis tripartita ;

fascia valde irregulari submarginali coccinea apud apicem at-

tenuata: corpus nigerrimum ; collo flavo fasciato ; abdomine flavo

fasciolato, fasciolis regularibus in medio et ad latera interruptis ;

antennis palpisque nigris.

Ale subtus nigerrimee ; anticee macula discoidea apud celle finem,

altera disco-cellulari, ovalibus, tertia triangulari subanali, striola

apud marginem apicalem, punctoque basali, omnibus coccineis ;

macula submedia costali triangulari Juteo-ochrea; fascia velut

supra irregulari sed tripartita; punctis tribus submarginalibus

apicalibus cinereis: posticee puncto basali coccineo, aliter velut

supra: corpus nigerrimum; pedes postici tarsis albido fascio-

latis; segmentis abdominalibus minime flavo marginatis; ano

flavo.

Exp. alar. une. 24.

Hab. Bahia. Possidet T. W. Wood.

Most closely allied to sacrifica, but quite distinct ; it does not

show any pectinations to the antennz, and the hind wings are

proportionally larger than in conferta. This species has been

kindly lent to me by my very obliging friend Mr. T. W. Wood.

XXVII.—Notes on the Skulls of Hares (Leporide) and Picas

(Lagomyide) in the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray,

F.R.S

Havine had occasion to examine the skulls of hares in the British

Museum, I have made the following notes.

It has been usual to unite the Leporide and Lagomyide into

one family; but the entire form of the skull forbids such a union,

and I follow Professor Lilljeborg in regarding them as belong-

ing to two distinct groups of the suborder Duplicidentata of

Hliger.

Dr. Spencer Baird, in his excellent essay on the Hare of

North America, has shown how the hares of that country might

be divided into natural sections ; and I have verified the accuracy

of this from the skulls contained in the British Museum, and

have added one or two groups for skulls which did not come

under his observation.

The determination that the hare of the Holy Land is distinet

from the common European hare is interesting. It is more

allied to the hare of Tunis and the southern shore of the Medi-

terranean, and it may be only a large variety of that species ;

but there are several characters in the skull that make it proba-

bly a distinct kind.

15*

220 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Skulls of Hares

Suborder II. DUPLICIDENTATA, I[lliger.

Cutting-teeth $;

molars rootless, o.8 or

united.

upper with a deep angular central groove ;

>.2. Skull with the two optic foramina

Fam. 1. Lagomyide = Lagomys, F. Cuvier.

Tail none visible; ears short, rounded; hind legs short ;

toe-pads naked, small. Skull depressed, expanded behind.

Maxilla with a large perforation in front of orbit. Grinders 2-2,

the upper hinder with a small third lamina on the hinder side ;

the front grinders shelving backwards.

1. Ocotoma. Skull: the orbits very large ; space between the

orbits narrow ; nose narrow, bent down.

Ogotoma Pallasii. (Lagomys ogotoma, Cuvier, Waterh. Glir.

17. Lepus ogotoma, Pallas, Glires, 30, t.3, 44. f. 16a.) B.M.

2. Lacomys. Skull: the orbits large ; space between the orbits

broad and flat ; nose broad, shelving, nearly in a line with the

forehead.

Asia.

1. Lagomys alpinus, Cuvier, Waterh. Glir. 15, fig. (Lepus

alpinus, Pallas, Glires, 30, t.2,t.44.f.13a, 5). Siberia. B.M.

2. Lagomys pusillus, Desm., Waterh. Gl. 19. (Lepus puszllus,

Pallas, Glires, 30, t. 1, t. 4. f. 4,9). South Siberia; Ural. B.M.

3. Lagomys rufescens, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842,

p. 266; Waterh. Gl. 20. Cabul. B.M.

4. Lagomys Hodgsoni, Blyth, J. A. 8S. B. 1841, x. 816, t. ;

Waterh. Gl. 23. Ladakh.

5. Lagomys nepalensis, Hodgson, J. A. S. B. 1841, x. 854,

t.; Waterh. Gl. 24. Thibet? Nepal. B.M.

6. Lagomys Roylu, Ogilby, Royle, Himal. t. 4; Waterh. Gl.

26. Choor Mountains.

7. Lagomys hyperboreus, Wagner, Waterh. G1.36. (Lepus hy-

perboreus, Pallas.) North-east Siberia.

America.

8. Lagomys princeps, Richards. F. B.-A. 227, t.19; Waterh.

G1.28; Baird, N. A. M. 619; Aud. N. A. Q. t. 83 (skin). Rocky

Mountains. B.M.

9. Lagomys minimus, Lord, P. Z. 8. 1863, p.98. North-west

coast of America. B.M.

Fam. 2. Leporide, J. Gray (Lilljeb. 59).

Ears large, elongate, often longer than the head. Tail

short, bushy; the hind legs much longer than the fore legs,

and Picas in the British Museum. 221

strong. Skull high, more or less compressed ; the nose arched ;

maxilla netted in front of the orbits. Cutting-teeth (upper)

with a subcentral groove ; molars $° *, each formed of two plates

united by enamel, except the upper hinder one, which is small

and formed of only one plate. The upper hinder grinder is like

the third plate in the former family ; but it is distinct, forming

a separate tooth.

Section I. Skull high, rather compressed. Nose compressed ; cheeks

nearly flat, separated from the orbits by a strong ridge, and edged

above by the prominent upper hinder elongated process of the in-

termaxillaries. Orbits large, roundish. Cutting-teeth moderate.

A. Hares. The hinder nasal aperture of skull broad, deep,

rounded above, and with nearly erect sides. Young born with

the eyes open and the body covered with hair. Living in “ forms”

on the surface of the earth.

I. Postorbital process more or less soldered with the skull.

1. Hyproxracus. Lepus § F, Baird, N.A.M.575. Feet very

short, weak, covered with scattered hairs, exposing the toes ; claws

acute. Skull and incisors comparatively large and massive; muzzle

about as wide as high. Postorbital process completely fused

into the skull for its entire length, leaving neither foraminal

notch nor suture. “ Water-Hare.”

* Tail elongate, white beneath.

1. Hydrolagus aquaticus. (Lepus aquaticus, Bachm. J. A. N.S.

Philad. vii. 319, t. 22. f. 2; Baird, N. A. M. 612, t. 59. f. 1

(skull). L. Douglasii, var. 1, Gray, Mag. N. H. 1837, p. 586.)

** Tail very short, dusky beneath.

2. Hydrolagus palustris. (Lepus palustris, Bachm. J. c. t. 25,

26; Baird, N. A. M. 615, t. 59. f. 2 (skull). JZ. Douglasiz,

var. 2, Gray, Mag. N. H. 18387, p. 586.)

2. Sytvinacus. Lepus § D, Baird, N. A. M. 575. Skull

about twice as long as wide, very convex and much arched be-

hind; muzzle rather wider than high. Postorbital process mo-

derate, united behind and laterally by anchylosis with the skull,

with a distinct suture bounding a small narrow foramen in

front. Cutting-teeth narrow. Hind feet nearly as long as the

head. Burrows for protection (Clark).

* Soles very densely furred.

1. Sylvilagus nanus. (Lepus nanus, Schreb. t. 2348; Dekay.

L. americanus, Desm. Lepus sylvaticus, Bachm., Waterh. Gl.

L1G. Aud NegA] ©) t..22: Baird, N: A.M. 600, t. 58.(f2

(skull).) Grey Rabbit. B.M.

222 Dr. J. BE. Gray on the Skulls of Hares

2. Sylvilagus Artemisia, Bachm., Waterh. Gl. 126; Baird, N.

A. M. 602. (ZL. artemisianus, Wagner. ? L. Nuttalli, Bach.,

Aud. N. A. Q. t. 94.) Sage Rabbit. New Mexico. B.M.

** Soles of feet very sparsely furred.

3. Sylvilagus Bachmanni. (Lepus Bachmanni, Waterh. P. Z.S.

1838, p. 103, Glir. 124; Aud. N. A. Q.t. 108; Baird, N. A. M.

606.)

3. Euracos. Skull rather elongated; face broad, rounded

above; the intermaxillary bones form a ridge on each side ;

anterior orbital notch narrow; postorbital aperture oblong,

elongate, narrow, behind complete from the coalescence of the

hinder end of the postorbital process with the skull. Grinders $;

the hinder upper grinder very small and very close to the pen-

ultimate, which has caused it to be overlooked.

1. Eulagos mediterraneus. (Lepus mediterraneus, Wagner,

Waterhouse, Glires, 48. L. meridionalis, Géné. L. granatensis,

Schimper. L. timidus, var. c, Blasius, Saugeth. Deutschl. 412.)

Tunis, Fraser. B.M.

Mr. Waterhouse overlooked the hinder upper grinder; and

Blasius confounded this very distinct species with L. timidus.

Length of skull 3 inches 3 lines, width at zygomata 1 inch

5 lines, of nose in front of orbit 9 lines. The upper edge of the

orbits narrow, ascending.

2. Eulagos Judee. The Holy Land Buneas, Tristram, B.M.

The skull is much larger than that of EH. mediterraneus, nearly

as large as that of the common hare, Lepus timidus. Length

of skull 3 inches 10 lines, width at zygomata 1 inch 9 lines, at

front of orbits 1 inch. The upper edge of the orbits wide,

expanded, forming a concave hood.

Il. Postorbital process separate from the skull.

4, Lepus, Linn. Lepus §§ A & BH, Baird, N. A. M.575. Skull

narrow, slightly curved above ; face margined by the upper edge

of the intermaxillaries.. The front lower edge of the zygoma swol-

len, rounded, solid. Postorbital process very large, the hinder

part nearly parallel with the skull, but separated from it by a

slit. Grinders 2-2, hinder upper very small; cutting-teeth

narrow, upper with a central groove. Born covered with hair,

and the eyes open. Lives on the surface or behind stones.

European.

1. Lepus timidus, Linn., Waterh. Gl. 389. (L. europaeus, Pal-

las.) Europe. B.M.

2. Lepus hybridus, Desm., Waterh. Gl. 45. (LZ. medius, Nils-

and Picas in the British Museum. 223

son. L. aquilonius, Blasius. L. altaicus, Eversm. LL. russata,

F. Cuv.) Russia. Mus. Leyden.

3. Lepus variabilis, Pallas, Schreb. t. 235 a, B; Waterh. Gl.

51. (L. borealis, Nilsson. L. albus, Brisson, Jenyns. L. hi-

bernicus, Bell, B. Q.) Scotland, Ireland, North Europe. B.M.

4. Lepus canescens, Nilsson, i. 172; Waterh. GI. 57. (ZL.

borealis, var., Nilsson, lum. t. 22.) Scandinavia. 3B.M.

African.

5. Lepus egyptius, Geoftr. Desc. Egypt. t. 6. f.2; Waterh.

Gl. 65. Egypt. North Africa.

6. Lepus habessinicus, Hemp. & Khr. 8, P. t. 15. f.2. Abys-

sinia.

7. Lepus isabellinus, Riippell, Atlas, t. 20; Waterh. Gl. 88.

(L. ethiopicus, Hemp. & Ehr. S. P. t.13.) Nubia. B.M.

8. Lepus capensis, Linn., Waterh. Gl. 95. (L. ochropus, A.

Wagner. JL. arenarius, I. Geoff.) South Africa.

9. Lepus saxatilis, F. Cuy., Waterh. Gl. 92, t.1. f.1. (ZL.

rufinucha, A. Smith. L. longicaudatus, Gray. L. fumigatus,

Wagner.) Berg Haas, South Africa. B.M.

10. Lepus crassicaudatus, 1. Geoff. Mag. Zool. 1882, t. 19 ;

Waterh. G1.99. (L. rupestris, A. Smith. L. melanurus, Riippell.)

Roode Haas, South Africa, Natal.

Asiatic.

11. Lepus arabicus, Hemp. & Ehr. 8. P. t. ; Waterh. Gl. 84.

Arabia.

12. Lepus syriacus, Hemp. & Hhr. S. P. t. 14. f.2; Waterh.

Gl. 81. Syria.

13. Lepus sinaiticus, Hemp. & Ehr. 8. P. t. 14. f. 1; Waterh.

Gl. 83. Arabia Petreea.

14. Lepus nigricollis, F. Cuv. Mamm. t.; Waterh. Gl. 72.

(L. melanauchen, Temm. L. kurgosa, Gray. L. hurgosa, Buch.

Ham.) Malabar. B.M.

15. Lepus ruficaudatus, I. Geoff., Waterh. Gl. 74. (L. ma-

crotus, Hodgson.) Bengal. B.M.

16. Lepus tolai, Pallas, Gl. 30; Waterh. Gl. 48. (L. dau-

ricus, Erxl.) Mongolia. B.M.

17. Lepus tibetanus, Waterh. P. Z. S. 1841, p. 7; Gl. 58.

(L. otostolus, Hodgson, Waterh. Gl. 61.) Tibet.

18. Lepus pallipes, Hodgson, J. A. S. B. x1. 288, t.; Waterh.

Gl. 62. Tibet.

19. Lepus brachyurus, Temm. F. Japon. t. 11; Waterh. Gl.

69. Japan. B.M.

20. Lepus sinensis, Gray, Ill. I. Z. t.; Waterh. Gl. 90;

Swinhoe, P. Z. 8S. 1862, p. 359. Formosa, China. B.M.

21. Lepus altaicus, Brandt. Altai. B.M.

224 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Skulls of Hares and Picas.

American.

+ Hind feet considerably longer than the head.

* Changing colour in winter ; postorbital widely divergent.

22. Lepus arcticus, Leach, Ross’s Voy. Append. 2. 151, 1819.

(L. glacialis, Leach, 1. c. 170, 1819; Audub. N. A. Q. t. 32;

Baird, N. A. M. 577, t. 56. f. 1 (skull) ; Waterh. Gl. 102. L.

timidus, O. Fab.)

23. Lepus americanus, Erxl., Waterh. Gl. 108 ; Baird, N.A.M.

579. (L. hudsonius, Pallas. L. nanus, Schreb. L. virginianus,

Harlan. JZ. borealis, Schinz.) B.M.

24. Lepus Washingtonii, Baird, 1855, N. A. M. 583, t. 15.

25. Lepus campestris, Bachm., Baird, N. A. M. 585, t. 56. f. 2

(skull) ; Waterh. Gl. 127. (Z. Townsendii, Bachm., Aud. N. A.

Q.t. 3. LZ. virginianus, Rich.) Prairie Hare. Missouri River,

Columbia.

** Not changing colour in winter ; postorbital diverging, but i

contact behind.

26. Lepus caltotis, Wagner, 1830; Baird, N. A. M. 590, t. 57.

f. 2 (skull); Audub. N. A. Q. t.63 ; Waterh. G1. 138. (L. nigri-

caudata, Bennett. L. flavigularis, Wagner. L. tewianus, Wa-

terh. Gl. 136.) Sonora.

27. Lepus californicus, Gray, Mag. N. H.1837, p.586; Waterh.

GL 171; Audub. N. A. Q.t.112; Baird, N. A.M. t.5728,2

(skull). (L. Richardsonit, Bachm.? L. Bennetti, Gray, Voy.

Sulph. t. 14.) California. B.M.

28. ?Lepus longicaudatus, Gray, Mag. N. H. 1836, p. 586.

Magellan’s Straits.

+} Hind feet apparently shorter than the head ; postorbital process

scarcely in contact with the cranium behind ; ears as long as

or longer than the head.

29. Lepus Audubonii, Baird, N. A. M. 608, t. 18, 58. f. 2

(skull). Coast of California.

30. Lepus Troubridgii, Baird, N. A. M. 610, t. 14. California.

5. Taretr. Skull like Zepus, but the hinder supraorbital notch

narrow, the lobes short, with a sharp inner edge ; the front of the

lower edge of the zygoma dilated, sharp-edged, porous above;

hinder nasal opening rather narrower. ‘ail none. Lars short.

1. Tapeti brasiliensis. (Lepus brasiliensis, Linn. L. tapeti,

Pallas.) Para and Bolivia. B.M.

B. Rassits. Skull: the hinder nasal aperture narrow, deep, an-

gular, contracted above, with sloping sides. Living in burrows ;

young born blind and naked.

6. Cunicutus. Lepus §C, Baird, N. A.M. 575. Skull:

Prof. J. V. Barboza du Bocage on two new Saurians. 225

hinder supraorbital notch narrow, elongate, contracted behind by

the inflection of the sharp tips of the lobes ; upper edge of orbits

narrow; the hinder nasal opening narrow, very deep; sides

flat, contracted at the top; lower front edge of the zygoma

rather dilated, solid. Hind legs short.

“Skull more than twice as long as wide; muzzle and nasal

bones very long, the former wider than high, anterior to the

molars. Postorbital processes divergent, not in contact behind

with the skull.” (Baird.)

1. Cuniculus fodiens, Klein. (Lepus cuniculus, Linn., Waterh.

Glir. 64. LZ. magellanicus, Lesson ; Blasius, Faun. Deut. (fig. of

skull). L. vermicula, Thompson.) Europe, North Africa. B.M.

Var. Lepus ngripes, Bartlett, P. Z. S. 1857, p. 159, t. 56.

Section II. Skull conical, subcylindrical ; nose thick, subcylindrical ;

cheeks very convex; the front edge of the orbits and the upper

hinder processes of the intermaxillaries scarcely raised. Orbits

moderate, oblong. Cutting-teeth large, strong ; the hinder upper

orbital notch open, short ; the zygomatic arches broad, flat, and

produced behind, over the temple.

7. Carvoracus, Blyth, J. A.S. Beng. 1845, p. 247. Ears

shorter than the head; fur harsh. Skull solid; face broad,

rounded on the sides; upper edge of the intermaxillaries thin,

even with the nasals. Cutting-teeth very broad ; grinders broad ;

palate long and broad. Anteorbital foramina nearly closed by

oblique, transverse, bony spicules. Zygomata very long. Supra-

orbital processes continued forward uninterrupted; anterior

notch quite filled up with bone, hinder less deep.

Carpolagus hispidus, Blyth. (Lepus hispidus, Pearson, Waterh.

Gl. 78.) Burrows? Assam. B.M.

XXVIII.— Descriptions of two new Saurians from Mossamedes

(West Africa). By J. V. Barsoza pu Bocageer.

Scapateira (?) reticulata.

Characters —Head narrow, with the muzzle elongated and

pointed. No occipital shield. Nostrils situated in the midst

of three slightly inflated shields—one naso-rostral and two naso-

frenals. No teeth on the palate; tongue emarginate at apex,

covered with imbricated squamiform papille. Inferior eyelid

granular. Palpebral disk bordered with granules without and

behind, and preceded by a large shield placed between two very

small ones. Subocular shield situated between the seventh and

226 = Prof. J. V. Barboza du Bocage on two new Saurians

eighth labials. Anterior margin of the ear furnished with three

denticulations. Upper parts and sides of the neck, and the

anterior half of the back clothed with very small rounded scales,

smooth and not imbricated; on the posterior half of the back

and on the base of the tail these scales gradually become larger

and more distinctly keeled and imbricated; the rest of the tail

is covered with large keeled scales above and below. Ventral

shields quadrilateral, smooth, arranged in longitudinal and

transverse series; the widest of the latter includes eighteen

shields. In the middle of the preanal region there is a large

scale surrounded by smaller ones. Femoral pores twenty to

twenty-two. Digits smooth beneath, but denticulated on the

edges; the anterior less compressed than the posterior.

Coloration.—Above (on a ground sometimes fulvous, some-

times with a bluish tinge) all our specimens present a reticulate

design of a dark-brown colour. On the head predominates an

olive tint punctured or marbled with brown. A blackish streak,

more or less interrupted, follows the middle of the dorsal sur-

face of the tail; another similar streak extends along each side

of the tail, from its origin to its extremity. The upper surface

of the limbs resembles the back. The inferior regions are

white or yellowish white.

Dimensions.—The largest of our individuals measures 150

millims. in length, of which the head occupies 14, the trunk 37,

and the tail 99.

Habitat.—Mossamedes, Western Africa. The natives call it

Cocola, a name which they also give to several other Saurians.

The five individuals which we possess were sent to us by our

indefatigable travelling naturalist, M. d’Anchieta.

In its characters this reptile seems to approach most closely

to the genus Scapateira. Thus the position of the nostrils in

the midst of three shields, the existence of numerous femoral

pores, the structure of the dorsal scales and ventral shields, the

denticulations with which the edges of the digits are furnished,

and the presence of an antepectoral fold are so many characters

which it has in common with the single species of that genus,

Scapateira grammica. Nevertheless it presents certain differences

of some importance, such as the absence of an occipital shield,

and especially the conformation of the anterior digits, which

have no well-marked flattening. This is why we hesitate in

referring it to the genus Scapateira.

PACHYRHYNCUS, genus novum.

This new genus that we propose is established upon the

examination of a single adult individual lately received from

Mossamedes through M. d’Aunchieta.

from Mossamedes, West Africa. 227

It belongs to the Lacertia (Calodontes pristidactyles of the

‘ Krpétologie Générale’). From its general organization it is in

the vicinity of the genera Acanthodactylus and Eremias, perhaps

between the two, that it should be placed; but the flattening of

its head and the extraordinary widening of its muzzle give it a

peculiar physiognomy, and render it perfectly distinct from all

other Saurians in general.

Generic characters.—Head wide and flattened ; muzzle much

depressed, wide, spatulate, with its trenchant margins greatly

exceeding the outline of the opening of the mouth (figs. 1 & 2).

Fig. 1.

Tongue sagittate, emarginate at its extremity, covered with

squamiform papille. Palate not furnished with teeth. Nostrils

looking directly upward, placed in the midst of three shields, as

in Eremias. Rostral shield much depressed, forming with the

first seven superior labials the projecting border of the muzzle.

No free antepectoral fold. Ventral shields smooth, forming

regular longitudinal and transverse bands. Tail broad and

depressed at the base, rounded throughout the rest of its extent.

No femoral pores. Five unequal digits on each foot ; these are

compressed, covered with smooth scales beneath, and denticu-

lated at the edges.

Pachyrhyncus Anchieta, sp. n.

No occipital plate. Lower eyelid covered with granulations.

Auricular opening narrow, its anterior margin smooth, without

denticulations. Nostrils bordered by three shields—one naso-

rostral and two freno-nasals. Nine superior labials, of which

the first seven form with the rostral the trenchant margin of the

muzzle. One subocular shield, in contact by its lower margin

with the fifth, sixth, and seventh superior labials. Scales of the

back and base of the tail very small, smooth, slightly inflated,

not imbricated ; those of the rounded portion of the tail large,

imbricated, and keeled. Ventral shields quadrilateral, of mode-

rate size, nearly equal, arranged in from twenty to twenty-four

longitudinal rows, and bordered upon the flanks by several rows

of similar but smaller shields. Preeanal scales numerous, small,

nearly equal.

228 Miscellaneous.

We may refer to figs. 1 and 2 for more ample details as to

the scaling of the head.

Coloration.—The upper parts exhibit a fine golden-yellow tint ;

an elongated black spot covers the occiput ; a black streak is con-

tinued upon the dorsal line from the region of the fore limbs as far

as the anterior third of the tail ; on both sides the back 1s covered,

down to the flanks, with a large-meshed black network, having

a very pretty effect ; the upper surface of the limbs presents a

similar pattern. The head and the temples are variegated with

black ; beneath each eye a great number of small black spots form

an elongated spot, which is prolonged from the fourth to the last

of the labials. A black line follows the lateral margin of the

tail from the base. The lower parts are of a uniform white or

whitish tint.

Dimensions.—Total length 112 millims.; head 17, trunk 18,

tail 57.

Habitat.—Mossamedes. A single individual.

We have received from the same locality, through M. d’An-

chieta, several rare and interesting reptiles, such as—

Sauria: Chameleo namaquensis (Smith), Homodactylus Bibroni,

Euprepes Olivieri, E. Merremi, Mochlus afer, Anelytrops elegans.

Ophidia: Cerastes caudalis, Psammophas, sp. ?

Batrachia: Dactylethra Miilleri, Bufo spinosus.

Lisbon, July 9, 1867.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Development of the Ctenophora.

By A. KowaLewsky.

Tue author has carefully traced the development of the egg in

various Ctenophora, and has arrived at some very curious results,

especially with regard to the first phases of evolution.

In the Lschscholtzie (and the other Ctenophora seem to be in

the same case) two layers may be distinguished in the vitellus,—the

external one very thin, formed of true protoplasm, the other central,

consisting of an emulsion of large fatty drops. Acetic acid produces

a granular precipitate in the former, but has no action on the

second. The distinction of these two layers is important, as the

former alone plays the part of a formative vitellus, the second behaving

as a vitellus of nutrition.

The segmentation into two and then into four and eight parts is

effected in such a manner that each of the spheres of segmentation

presents the two layers, like the original vitellus. These spheres are

completely destitute of nuclei. At this period a remarkable pheno-

menon takes place. In each of the eight spheres of segmentation

Miscellaneous. 229

the external protoplasmic layer passes entirely to one side, forming

a sort of cap upon each sphere. The division into sixteen then

takes place, in such a way that the eight caps separate to form

eight spheres of protoplasm, side by side with the eight spheres of

fatty emulsion. From this moment the formative vitellus is com-

pletely separated from the eight large spheres of nutritive vitellus.

In Eschscholtzia cordata the latter is never composed of more than

sixteen spheres ; the former alone continues to become rapidly seg-

mented, and the nuclei suddenly make their appearance when the

small spheres have reached the number of thirty-two. In other

species the spheres of the nutritive vitellus continue to multiply by

division for a certain time, but always more slowly than the formative

vitellus.

The formative vitellus is now juxtaposed to the nutritive vitellus ;

but when its cells have become greatly multiplied, it gradually en-

velopes the latter. The egg then reacquires precisely the appear-

ance which it had before the commencement of evolution. We may

distinguish in it, in fact, a central mass in the form of an emulsion,

the nutritive vitellus, and a peripheral layer, physically and chemi-

cally different. From this period, however, this layer is cellular ;

it is the blastoderm, or, if it be preferred, the external epithelium of

the animal.

The mouth and intestinal canal soon make their appearance, in the

form of a tubular invagination of the superficial epithelium. But,

without following step by step the formation of each organ, we shall

content ourselves with indicating two very remarkable histological

circumstances relating to the formation of the otolithes and that of

the tissue intermediate between the outer epithelium and the central

mass.

The otolithes are formed in the embryonic nervous ganglion, which

only presents from thirty to forty cells. Each of them (originally

only one pair exists) appears as a little point in the interior of a cell

by the side of the nucleus. When it has acquired a certain size, it

slips out of the cell, this being the more easily effected because the

latter has no enveloping membrane. The author appears to be in-

clined to believe that all the otolithes are successively produced by

these two cells.

The formation of the intermediate tissue is very curious. It is

effected by an actual secretion, with migration of cells. Between

the external cellular layer and the central mass there accumulates a

homogeneous, amorphous, and colourless substance. Stellate cells

are soon seen to detach themselves from the external layer and pe-

netrate into the interior of the homogeneous layer to constitute its

cellular web. The migration of these cells takes place by means of

their processes, which appear to act like the pseudopodia of the

Rhizopoda.

M. Kowalewsky’s memoir relates also to the development of Ces-

tum, Pleurobrachia, Cydippe, and Beroé.—Mém. Acad. Imp. de

St. Pétersb. tome x. 1866; Bibl. Univ. 1867, Arch. Sct. pp. 247-

249.

230 Miscellaneous.

Remarkable Instances of Crustacean Parasitism.

By A. EB. Verri.u.

In a collection of about ninety specimens of a small sea-urchin

(Euryechinus imbecillis, Verrill) from the coast of Peru, not one

could be found in which the anal area and surrounding parts of the

upperside of the shell were not more or less irregularly distorted

or imperfect. An examination of the interior showed that in each

specimen a crab (Fabia chilensis, Dana), allied to the common

crab of the oyster (Pinnotheres ostree), had effected a lodgment in

the upper part of the intestine, which had thereby been greatly dis-

tended in the form of a membranous cyst, attached to one side of

the shell, and extending around to the lower surface near the

mouth. The shell is usually swollen on the side over the cyst; and

the anal area is depressed and distorted, with a large open orifice

passing obliquely into the cyst, out of which the crab may thrust

its legs at pleasure, but is apparently unable, when full-grown, to

come entirely out. All the specimens examined in the cyst were

females, carrying eggs ; but a very small crab found clinging among

the spines appears to be the male. The crab probably effects an

entrance into the intestine through the anus while quite young, and,

by its presence and growth in that position, causes the gradual dis-

tortion of the shell and formation of the cyst. In Prof. Dana’s

Report on the Crustacea of the U. 8. Expl. Expedition this crab is

described as from Valparaiso, from an Lehinus; but no special notice

of its mode of occurrence and remarkable frequency appears to have

been published*.

Another peculiar mode of parasitism I have observed in a sin-

gular crustacean (Hapalocarcinus marsupialis, Stimpson +) from the

Sandwich Islands. This creature lodges itself among the slender

branches of a coral (Pocillipora cespitosa, Dana) and causes, pro-

bably by its incessant motions,the branches to grow up and surround

it on both sides by flat expansions of coral, terminating in digita-

tions which often interlock above, leaving openings between them

suitable for the uses of the parasite, but usually too small to allow of

egress. Most specimens of the corals of this species sustain one or

more, and often numerous, examples of these curious enlarged

bulbs among the branches. The habits were unknown to Dr.

Stimpson when he described his specimens, which had dropped

from among recently collected corals.—Silliman’s American Journal,

July 1867.

On the Anatomy of Balanoglossus (Delle Chiaje).

By A. Kowa.Lewsky.

Under the name of Balanoglossus, Delle Chiaje described a vermi-

form animal of the Bay of Naples, known to the fishermen under the

name of lingua di bue. It has since scarcely attracted any attention

* Pinnaxodis hirtipes, Heller, recently described from Ecuador and

found im an Echinus, is probably the same species.

+ Proceedings Boston Soe. Nat. Hist. vi. 412.

Miscellaneous. 231

from naturalists; and the very incomplete investigation of it made in

1860 by M. Keferstein taught us nothing of importance about it.

The Balanoglossi nevertheless constitute one of the most curious

of animal types, the position of which in the zoological scale is not

easy to fix. This appears evidently from the fine work of M.

Kowalewsky.

The body in the Balanoglossi (of which two species exist at

Naples) is vermiform and composed of a series of successive regions.

The foremost, separated by a constriction from the following one,

has all the appearance of a head; but a careful examination shows

that it possesses none of the characters which would justify that

name. It is no doubt a tactile organ, to which M. Kowalewsky gives

the name of trunk. It is followed by a sort of muscular collar

bearing the mouth underneath. The succeeding region is much

longer, and may be designated the branchial region. We shall recur

immediately to its singular structure. Further back the body bears

upon its back two rows of glands (the sexual glands), and then nu-

merous papille, which Delle Chiaje took for respiratory organs, but

which in reality contain blind processes of the intestinal canal:

this, therefore, might be called the hepatic region. Lastly, the

terminal or caudal region is smooth and finely annulated.

The most remarkable peculiarity of the Balanoglossi is the struc-

ture of the respiratory apparatus. The water which serves for the

oxygenation of the blood penetrates by the mouth and issues upon the

back of the animal by two series of apertures placed upon the sides

of the branchial region. It traverses a very complex branchial -

apparatus, sustained by a chitinous skeleton. This skeleton is

formed by two symmetrical series of vertical transverse plates,

united in threes by small rods perpendicular to the direction of the

plates. The whole therefore constitutes a double series of frames,

upon which ramify the blood-vessels, covered by an epithelial layer.

The openings of the frames are covered with vibratile cilia. The

water, after penetrating by the mouth into the pharynx, gets en-

tangled in the respiratory frames, and issues by the orifices which we

have mentioned, the number of which is equal to that of the frames.

It is impossible, in our opinion, not to be struck by the great

resemblance of this apparatus to the branchial apparatus of the

Vertebrata. Certain anatomists have already attempted a compari-

son of the Ascidia with the Vertebrata, in consequence of their sin-

gular respiratory apparatus; but in this case the resemblance is very

much greater.

No doubt, in other respects, the analogy with the Vermes is

striking, especially as regards the facies of the animal and the cen-

tral portions of the vascular system reduced to two principal trunks

—a dorsal vessel driving the blood from behind forwards, and a

ventral vessel conveying it in an opposite direction, &e. Neverthe-

less it appears to be impossible to ascribe to these animals, as M.

Keferstein has done, a place among the Nemertida, or especially to

approximate them to the Annelida, as M. Kowalewsky would do.

For the present it is necessary to elevate the Balanoglossi into a

232 Miscellaneous.

separate class among the Vermes, through which the latter will as

it it were hold out a hand to the Vertebrata, as already, by other

types, to the Infusoria, Echinodermata, Mollusca, and Arthropoda.

The group of Vermes is daily showing more and more the character

of being the origin of all the animal kingdom.—Mém. Acad. Imp.

de St. Pétersb. 1866; Bibl. Univ. 1867, Arch. Sct. pp, 249-251.

On the external characters of the Young of the Central American

Tapir (Elasmognathus Bairdii, Gill). By A. EK. Verrinu.

This remarkable animal has hitherto been known only by its

skull, and a skeleton, not entirely complete, belonging to the

Smithsonian Institution. The Museum of Yale College has recently

been so fortunate as to receive from J. H. Sternberg, Esq., a specimen

of the young animal, preserved entire in alcohol. This individual

is a female, and is supposed by Mr. Sternberg to have been about

three months old in April. He states that its weight is not more

than that of the head of the adult, one head that he formerly ex-

amined weighing 82 pounds.

Its entire length is 31 inches; nose to occiput 11; nose to eye

4°25; nose to incisor teeth 1°5; eye to ear 3:2; lower jaw 6°5;

length of ear 3°5 ; breadth 2°5 ; tail from vent, not including hair, 2.

The legs are short and stout; the tail small and inconspicuous.

The head, viewed from the side, is elongated oval, from above elon-

gated triangular, the sides nearly straight, the nose truncated. In

advance of and above the eyes the sides of the nose are compressed

and concave, with a slight depression on its ridge. Beyond this the

snout is enlarged, and convex both on the sides and above ; the tip

papillose and slightly decurved, which gives it a truncated appearance.

The nostrils are large, oval, placed obliquely at the end of the nose,

about half an inch long, the inner angles separated about a quarter of

an inch, the margins thickened. The nose itself is quite flexible and,

apparently, capable of extension. The ears are large and prominent,

broad oval, rounded at the end. The hair is rather fine and soft,

about an inch long on the body, and half as long on the head, where

it is not so thick.

The general colour is bright reddish brown, the head darker

above. The lips and end of the nose, bordering the naked black

tip, are white. Five interrupted narrow white stripes pass along

each side of the nose, the upper one extending over and beyond the

eye. The cheeks have several larger patches of whitish, one of

which is under the eye; a larger white spot is on the throat. The

ears are dark brown, lighter at the outer base, the tips and several

unequal spots on the outside white. The back and sides are

marked by longitudinal rows of yellowish-white patches, which

partially blend ito continuous stripes on the sides. There are in all

about ten of these stripes. The underside of the body is uniform

yellowish grey. The legs are darker brown than the body, and

marked by numerous transverse bands and spots of white,—Si/liman’s

American Journal, July 1867.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[THIRD SERIES.]

No. 118. OCTOBER 1867.

XXIX.—On the Classification of the Subdivisions of M<Coy’s

Genus Athyris, as determined by the laws of Zoological Nomen-

clature. By KH. Biixines, Paleeontologist of the Geological

Survey of Canada*.

[Read before the Nat. Hist. Soc., Montreal, March 25, 18677.]

Every naturalist who has studied the palozoic Brachiopoda is

aware that there exists a very great diversity of opinion with re-

gard to the classification of the several sections into which the

old genus Athyris has been divided. The arrangement which I

and some others have adopted is, in substance, the same as that

proposed by Mr. Davidson in the first edition of his ‘ General

Introduction,’ published in 1853}. Although this has been

* From ‘Silliman’s American Journal,’ July 1867.

+ After the reading of this paper, the subject was discussed by some of

the members of the Society. The following is from a short report

published in the newspapers at Montreal :—*‘ After the paper was read,

Dr. P. P. Carpenter said that he thought that Mr. Billings had clearly

established his pot, and gave an account of the history of a committee

appointed by the British Association to make laws to regulate scientific

nomenclature, of which committee he was a member. Mr. Whiteaves

stated that he was satisfied with the correctness of the view Mr. Billings

had taken, and made some remarks about scientific nomenclature and

upon some structural points in the shells of the genus in question. Prin-

cipal Dawson deplored the confusion that has arisen through conflicting

views on the question of nomenclature, and, agreeing with Mr. Billings in

the conclusion he had come to, said that this communication was valuable

inasmuch as it cleared up a question that had hitherto been obscure.”

{ Modified by separating Merista, thus :—

Genus. Type.

Athyris, M‘Coy, 1844 ..... S0SR086 A. tumida, Dalman.

Spirigera, D’Orbigny, 1847 ...... S. concentrica, Von Buch.

Merista, Suess, 1851...... Seetauiaee M. Herculea, Barrande.

The recent classification differs from the above as follows :—

Meristella, Hall, 1860 ............ A. tumida.

Athyris or Spirigera.......cscweee S. concentrica.

Meristan ne sctronneseennstsre conseeess M. Herculea.

According to this, either Athyris or Spirigera must be suppressed, in

order to make room for Meristella.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xx. 16

234 Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

objected to by several distinguished paleontologists, and in con-

sequence thereof abandoned by its author, yet I believe that, on

a careful examination of all the circumstances, it will be found

to be perfectly just toward the parties concerned, and in no re-

spect inconsistent with the rules of zoological nomenclature. It

was the first subdivision of the genus published, and should

therefore take precedence over all others.

Previously to 1853 Athyris was only known as a single large

genus of Brachiopoda, which included such forms as Terebratula

concentrica, Von Buch, T. tumida, Dalman, and 7. Herculea,

Barrande. In that year Mr. Davidson divided it into two

smaller genera, confining the name Athyris to that section for

which it was most appropriate, with tumida or Herculea for the

type, and adopting Spirigera, D’Orbigny, for the other type, 7’.

concentrica. It was afterwards found that Athyris, as then re-

defined, included two genera; and in consequence it has been

again divided by separating all those typified by 7. Herculea

under the name of Merista, a genus proposed but not clearly

characterized by Prof. Suess in 1851. This is the classification

which | believe to be the true one. While discussing it I shall,

throughout this paper, when I may have occasion to refer to the

species above named, designate them Athyris tumida, Spirigera

concentrica, and Merista Herculea.

Those who are opposed to this arrangement contend that, as

all the species which M‘Coy placed in the genus at the time he

first described it belong to the group typified by S. concentrica,

the name Athyris must be retained for that group, and cannot

now be transferred to the other section of which A. tumida is

the type. This reasoning, according to my views, can only hold

good in case it be first proved that M‘Coy specially confined the

genus to species having the generic characters of those in his

original list, or pointed out one of them as the type, or drew up

his diagnosis in such a manner as to exclude A. tumida. In

this paper I shall endeavour to show—

1. That M‘Coy did not limit his genus to the species first

placed in it.

2. That, on the contrary, he and other naturalists understood

it to include both A. tumida and S. concentrica.

3. That, according to the laws of zoological nomenclature, the

subdivision made by Davidson in 18538 cannot be set aside.

4, That Davidson’s classification has been adopted in several

works, some of them of great influence and wide circulation.

In order to prove the above propositions, J shall give the

more important facts of the history of the genus, with M‘Coy’s

original figure, and shall quote some of the laws above mentioned

in full. Much of this, of course, belongs to the common stock

Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris. 235

of knowledge of all paleontologists conversant with the fossils

of the older rocks, and might be thought superfluous. But the

question is somewhat complicated, and cannot well be decided

unless in view of all the circumstances. Besides this, it is one

upon which any good naturalist is perfectly competent to give

an opinion although specially engaged in other departments.

Few of these have access to works on paleozoic fossils; and

therefore, for the convenience of such as may feel inclined to

investigate the subject, it is desirable to bring all the facts to-

gether.

There is no dispute about the extent of the genera; and there-

fore the details of the internal characters need not be given. It

is purely a question of natural-history ethics, if I may be per-

mitted to use such a term.

1. History and Extent of the original Genus.

The original description was published in the ‘ Synopsis of

the Carboniferous Fossils of Ireland,’ in 1844. From this work

I shall make some extracts, and shall introduce along with the

original figure two others to further illustrate the subject.

Fig. 1. Copy of the original figure given by M‘Coy (without a specific

name) to illustrate his idea of the general form of an Athyris.

Fig. 2. Spirigera concentrica, Von Buch. The form is copied from

Davidson’s Monograph of the British Devonian Brachiopoda,

pl. 3. fig. 13, Pal. Soe. Mon. for 1862. The right-hand side is,

im this copy, a little restored, and the aperture in the beak made

larger than it is in the original figure.

Fig. 3. Athyris tumida, Dalman. Copied from Davidson’s ‘ General In-

troduction,’ pl. 6. fig. 73.

The following extracts are from M‘Coy’s work above referred

“The family Delthyridee appears to be divided into the five fol-

lowing genera :—1. Spirifera, Sow., composed of those longitudinally

ribbed species in which the hinge-line is equal to, or exceeds, the

width of the shell, the cardinal area with parallel sides, the cardinal

teeth of the ventral valve [now called the dorsal vaive] large, spirally

rolled, and having a triangular foramen beneath the beak of the

16*

236 Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

dorsal [ventral] valve. 2. Martinia, M‘Coy, or the smooth Spirifers,

in which the hinge-line is less than the width of the shell, and the

cardinal area triangular. 3. Athyris, M‘Coy, in which there is no

vestige of either Souniaey. cardinal area, or hinge-line. This remark-

able genus is frequently confounded with those shells usually named

Terebratula in the older rocks, but is distinguished bythe large

spiral appendages, which are wanting in the other group. 4. Bra-

chythyris, M‘Coy, in which we find the longitudinally ribbed sur-

face of Spirifera united with the short hinge-line of Martinia.

5. Orthis, Dal., in which there are no spiral appendages, the hinge-

line and strize frequently spinose (as in Leptena), the cardinal area

common to both valves, and its sides inclined towards each other

at its angles; dorsal valve smallest.’’—Op. cit. p. 128.

On page 146 of the same work he thus concisely describes

the genus :—

* Gen. Char.—Nearly orbicular, small; no cardinal area or hinge-

line ; spiral appendages very large, filling the greater part of the

shell.

«This very interesting group possesses all the external characters

of the Terebratulidee united to the internal structure of the Spirifers,

to which latter family it truly belongs. Prof. Phillips is the only

author who has recognized the group: he forms of it his last division

of the genus Spirifera, but gives no characters to distinguish it from

Terebratula; the internal structure is, however, a sure guide.”

The above is all that he wrote about the genus at that time ;

and it will be perceived that he does not point out any parti-

cular species as the type, and, further, that there is nothing in

his remarks from which it can be inferred that he knew any-

thing about the genera into which the group was afterwards

subdivided. Consequently it is impossible that he could have

intended to confine the genus to any one of them, as is now

affirmed by some of the naturalists who are opposed to the clas-

sification advocated in this paper. Instead of excluding species

with an imperforate beak such as A. tumida, the etymolog y of

the word Athyris (without a door or opening), the expression

“in which there is no vestige of either foramen, cardinal area,

or hinge-line,” and also his typical figure, all induce the belief

that he had before him one or more forms with the beak entire.

This is rendered certain by what he says on page 147. Speak-

ing of what he calls A. concentrica, he says :—‘“ This species is

not uncommon; it is figured in the ‘ Bull. de la Soe. Géol. de

France,’ with a perforated beak as in Terebratula. I have, how-

ever, seen numerous specimens with the beak entire and imper-

forate, as in the other palzozoic species.” It is highly probable

from all this that he had in view such Silurian forms as A. tu-

mida. This latter species is so common that it is almost certain

Mr. KE. Billings on the Genus Athyris. 237

that such a collection as he was then engaged upon would con-

tain one or more specimens.

If we take the paragraph No. 3 as a part of the generic

description, then A. tumida is included. If, on the other hand,

we confine ourselves to the extract from page 146, it is not ex-

cluded, as there is no reference made there to the structure of

the beak. This latter diagnosis is sufficiently comprehensive and

general in its terms to include Athyris, Spirigera, and Merista.

He did not place A. twmida in the genus, for the reason that his

work was confined altogether to the Carboniferous fossils, among

which it does not occur. But he did so afterwards, when he

described Professor Sedgwick’s Silurian fossils, as will be shown

further on. He was wrong in supposing that all the species

were imperforate—a matter of little consequence, as it was sim-

ply an error of observation, which does not vitiate. Had the

genus turned out to be not capable of subdivision, all that could

be done now with this error would be to strike it out. There

was sufficient in his diagnosis to mdicate what group of fossils

was intended. He was also wrong in supposing S. concentrica

to be a Carboniferous fossil: it is Devonian. It may be that he

mistook some other species with an imperforate beak for that.

It will be seen further on that Prof. King made a similar mis-

take with respect to this very species, having taken 7. scalprum,

Barrande, for it—an error which was detected by Mr. Davidson.

Altogether he referred eleven species to the genus, several of

which have been shown to be synonyms.

In the same work he proposed another genus, Actinoconchus;

but as it was founded on error, he afterwards withdrew it, and

added it to Athyris (Brit. Pal. Foss. p. 436). All scientific works

abound more or less with such misconceptions.

That the genus was understood by other naturalists to include

A. tumida is proved by the following facts. It is well known

that the genus Spirigera was proposed by D’Orbigny, in 1847,

simply as a substitute for Athyris, on the ground that this

latter name implies the absence of a foramen, and is therefore

not appropriate for species with a perforated beak. It is quite

clear that D’Orbigny considered his genus to be precisely the

same in extent as Athyris. All the species, therefore, which

he placed in Spirigera he regarded as fairly within the group ;

and it is unquestionable that he would have referred them all

to Athyris had not that name appeared to him objectionable.

I have not seen his original description in the ‘ Annales des

Sciences Naturelles,’ referred to by Mr. Davidson in the ex-

tract given below; but in the ‘ Paléontologie Francaise,’ vol. iv.

p- 357, he says :—‘ This division has already two generic names

which we cannot preserve, because they are in complete contra-

238 Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

diction to zoological characters.” The two genera referred to

were Athyris and Actinoconchus.

He specially selected 7. concentrica* for the type of his genus;

and therefore, if Spirigera be retained at all, it must be for that

section. He refers to his ‘ Prodrome’ for a list of the species ;

and we have thus only to examine this list in order to ascertain

his idea of the extent of the genus. They are the following,

taking them in the order in which they are published :—

“8. Ceres, vultur, Circe, passer, Herculea, harpya, Hecate, tu-

mida, concentrica, Helmerseni, Puschuna, decussata, plebeia, Ferro-

nesensis, Ezquerra, Hispanica, Toreno, subconcentrica, Pelapayensis,

Campomanensis, Mayendorfi, Roissyi, serpentina, lamellosa, am-

bigua, Blodena, plano-sulcata, expansa, pentaédra, pectinifera, tri-

gonella, quinquecostata, quadricostata, tricostata, and eristigall.”

Several of the above species do not belong to the group. This

list shows that D’Orbigny regarded the genus as including not

only the types of Athyris and Spirigera, but also that of the

genus Merista (M. Herculea), which I shall notice further on.

I think it quite certain that, had D’Orbigny been aware that the

genus was capable of subdivision, he would have retained Athyris

for one of the groups which have the beak imperforate. In-

deed, according to the laws of nomenclature, he could not have

done otherwise with any probability of producing a permanent

classification.

In a valuable paper, read before the Geological Society of

France, in May 1848, on the Brachiopoda of the Upper Silurian

rocks of England+, Mr. Davidson made the following observa-

tions on D’Orbigny’s genus :—

“‘ Vient ensuite le genre Spirigera que le méme auteur établit pour

les coquilles qui posstdent des spires internes placées de la méme

manitre que les Spirifer, mais qui ont des appendices et des détails

dorganisation essentiellement différents. Ces espéces, parmi les-

quelles nous trouvons les Terebratula, tumida, Circe, concentrica,

subconcentrica, Roissyi, pectinifera, ambigua, Helmerseni, Pela-

payensis, Campomanensis, Ferronesensis, Ezquerra, Hispanica, ont

dgja été distinguées par M. de Verneuil comme devant former une

section a part, quil a nommée la section des Concentrice. Je suis

de opinion de M. d’Orbigny qu’elles doivent constituer un genre.

L’ étude minutieuse que M. Bouchard a faite de la Terebratula con-

centrica ne m’en laisse aucun doute; mais ce genre n’ayant pas en-

core été convenablement caractérisé, je m’abstiendrai de l’adopter

* “Le type est T. concentrica, De Buch. Toutes les espéces avec leur

synonymie se trouvent dans notre ‘Prodrome de Paléontologie strati-

graphique.’ ”

+ ‘Mémoire sur les Brachiopodes du Systéme Silurien supérieur d’An-

gleterre, par M. Th. Davidson,” Bull. Soc. Géol. Fr. v. pp, 309-314.

Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris. 239

dans ce petit mémoire qui n’est pour ainsi dire qu'un résumé d’un

plus grand travail que je publie en ce moment dans le London

Geological Journal.”

Upon the above I shall only remark that it is quite clear

that Mr. Davidson then regarded S. concentrica and A. tumida as

congeneric, and that whatever new genus might be established

it would include both species.

In 1852, M‘Coy, in the second fasciculus of the ‘ British

Paleozoic Fossils,’ page 196, redefined Athyris as follows :—

** Gen. Char.—Nearly orbicular or ovate, both valves convex ; no

cardinal area, foramen, or hinge-line; spiral appendages to beak of

entering valve very large, nearly filling the shell; a strong mesial

septum in the rostral part of entering valve; dental lamellee mode-

rate; tissue of shell apparently fibrous.

“One specimen [of 4. tumida| shows the pallial and ovarian im-

pressions to be thick, numerous, and dichotomizing frequently from

beak to margin.”

In the work cited and in the third fasciculus we find the fol-

lowing species :—A, fumida, S. concentrica, ambigua, De Roissyi,

expansa, globistriata, globularis, gregaria, paradoxa, pectinifera,

and squamigera. This shows clearly enough his views of the

extent of the genus—that is to say, that, as it was then under-

stood, it included both A. tumida and A. concentrica. In com-

menting on this, Prof. Hall says :—“ The fact that M‘Coy cited

this as an Athyris no more renders it an Athyris than it was

made Atrypa by being thus described by Dalman; and it was

just as free for the foundation of a genus after the citation of

M‘Coy as before” *. This is true enough i in part. It was free

for the foundation of a genus until 1853, when Davidson used

it for that purpose; but since 1853 it has never been free.

The above is quite sufficient to prove my first and second

propositions.

Iam not aware of anything else of much importance, with

the exception of what relates to Merista, having been published

up to 1853, when Davidson’s excellent work, the ‘ Introduction

to the Classification of the Brachiopoda,’ made its appearance,

in which the genus was first subdivided. But, before entering

upon this, I shall notice the remarks of Prof. Suess on the genus

Merista.

This genus was proposed by Prof. Suess in 1851; but he did

not then sufficiently characterize it. The following is all that I

can find relating to it that was published previously to 1853 :—-

“Mr. E. Suess communicated the results of the investigations on

several Brachiopods, from the Bohemian transition rocks, which had

* Silliman’s Journal, ser. 2. vol. xxxii. p. 131.

240 Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

been made by him and Mr. Custos Dormitzer, of Prague. He

showed that some of the forms heretofore referred to Terebratula

had no opening in the beak for the passage of the muscle of adhesion,

and also that the distribution of their inner organs points to an

affinity with the non-attached genus Pentamerus. These inner

organs are borne by six partitions in place of a single calcareous

loop; the spiral arms are not unrollable.

«Through the separation of these forms (for which the name

Merista is proposed) from the genus Terebratula, an apparent con-

tradiction in the Jaws of palzontological distribution is solved, since

those smooth forms will now be separated which have heretofore

offered an apparent contradiction to the present views of these

laws.”

Lest I should not have expressed his views rightly in this

free translation, I give the original in the note below*.

On page 160 of the same work there are some further re-

marks on the classification of the Brachiopoda, by Prof. Suess,

in which he refers to the genus Merista. No generic description,

however, is there given. It appears also that it was again

noticed in Leonhard’s ‘ Neues Jahrbuch,’ 1854, p. 127. I have

not at present access to that work, and do not know whether

the genus is described there or not: at all events, at the time

Mr. Davidson prepared the English edition of his ‘ General

Introduction,’ Merzsta was not understood.

Prof. King, in his ‘Monograph of the Permian Fossils of

England’ (1850), proposed to restore the genus Cleothyris of

Phillips, apparently making it partly equal to Athyris, M‘Coy.

But the specimen on which this arrangement was founded was

afterwards shown to Mr. Davidson, and by him identified with

T. scalprum, Barrande (now Merista scalprum), while Cleiothyris

was intended by its author as a substitute for Atrypa. (See

Davidson’s ‘Introduction,’ p. 85.)

* « Herr Eduard Suess theilte die Erfolge der Untersuchung eimiger

Brachiopoden aus dem bohmischen Uebergangsgebirge mit, die er gemein-

schaftlich mit Herrn Custos Dormitzer in Prag angestellt hatte. Er zeigte,

dass mehrere bisher zu den Terebrateln gezihlte Formen an ihrer Spitze

keine Oeffnung fiir den Anheftungsmuskel besitzen, und dass auch die

Vertheilung ihrer inneren Organe auf eme Verwandtschaft mit der eben-

falls nicht angehefteten Gattung Pentamerus hinweist. Diese mneren

Organe werden von 6 Wanden, statt von einer einfachen Kalkschleife

getragen ; die Spiralarme selbst sind nicht aufrollbar.

“Durch das Lostrennen dieser Formen, fiir welche der Name Merista

vorgeschlagen wird, von der Gattung Terebratula, wird zugleich ein

scheinbarer Widerspruch in den Gesetzen palaontologischer Verbreitung

gehoben, da eben jene glatten Arten ausgeschieden werden, welche den

bisherigen Ansichten iiber diese Gesetze am schroffsten entgegengestanden

waren.”’—Jahrbuch der k. k. geologischen Reichsanstalt, Vienna, ui. pt. 4.

pp. 150, 160: 1861.

Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris. 241

2. Subdivision of the Genus by Mr. Davidson in 1854.

From all the facts above given it may be gleaned that in 1858,

when Mr. Davidson was engaged in the preparation of his

‘General Introduction,’ this group of Brachiopoda was known

as a single genus, but with two generic names—Athyris, M‘Coy,

1844, Spirigera, D’Orbigny, 1847. Each of these was intended

by its author to include the whole group. M‘Coy was under

the impression that all the species had the beak imperforate,

while D’Orbigny maintained that they were all perforated.

Both authors were partly wrong and partly right. The genus

was capable of subdivision; but no one had as yet undertaken

that task, unless, indeed, the observations of Prof. King and

Suess can be so construed. With regard to the latter, as the

genus Merista is now well understood and is different from

Athyris, it does not affect the question. Cleiothyris may be

regarded as obsolete.

Mr. Davidson, in his ‘ General Introduction,’ in endeavouring

to reconcile the conflicting nomenclatures of D’Orbigny and

M‘Coy, divided the genus, retainmg the name Aéhyris for

“forms with an apparently imperforate beak or closed foramen,

variously disposed septa, and largely developed dental plates.”

He selected two species, “A. tumida, Dal., or Herculea, Bar-

rande,” and specially named them as the types.

He retained Spirigera for the group of which S. concentrica is

the type. As to this latter group, by whatever name it may be

hereafter known, its extent will most probably always be that

assigned to it in the work in question.

The genus Athyris, however, as there defined, included Merista

—a circumstance which, however, as I shall presently show, in

no way vitiates the arrangement. In a note he states, “ Before

coming to the above conclusion, I submitted my views to Mr.

Deshayes, Mr. Salter, and others, who seemed to consider that

this mode of compromising the difficulty could not reasonably

be objected to by the two authors principally concerned, nor by

the generality of paleeontologists”’ (op. cit. p. 86).

Afterwards this classification was strongly objected to by

several naturalists, who maintained that M‘Coy had “ originally

and positively ” applied the name Athyris to the S. concentrica

group, and therefore it could not be transferred to the other

principal section. He, therefore, in the French edition of this

introduction (1856), abandoned his first arrangement *, and

* «Mais ce moyen terme a été critiqué par plusieurs naturalistes qui

ont insisté sur ce que le terme Athyris avait été origimairement et positive-

ment appliqué par son auteur a la T. concentrica et sur l’impropriété de

Vautre dénomination pour désigner des coquilles telles que les T. tumida,

Herculea, &c. M. Suess nous a informé (Neues Jahrbuch, p. 62, Janvier

242 Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

substituted Merista and Athyris, at the same time transferring

the latter to Spirigera, as in the extract given in the note below

(op. cit. p. 101).

Upon a careful examination of all the circumstances, I think

it will be found that, according to the laws of nomenclature,

this change cannot be sustained. I shall therefore quote some

of those laws, and endeavour to apply them to this case.

The first rule reads thus :—

“§ 1.—The name originally given by the founder of a group or

the describer of a species should be permanently retained, to the

exclusion of all subsequent synonyms.”

It seems scarcely necessary to quote such a rule as this. I

only do so in order to make the comment that it is the most

important of all the laws of nomenclature, and that its opera-

tion cannot be prevented in any case by merely technical objec-

tions or by any error in the details of a generic or specific de-

scription. Provided the original diagnosis contains sufficient in

substance to enable the scientific public to identify the group,

trivial errors, from which the writings of no naturalist are free,

will not have any effect. All that can be done is to rectify,

not to destroy. One of the exceptions to this rule is thus ex-

pressed in No. 11 :— A name may be changed when it implies

a false proposition which is likely to propagate important errors.”

According to this exception, if the name Athyris should be

applied to the S. concentrica group, there is a possibility of its

falling into the list of synonyms ; for, although no very impor-

tant error would be superinduced, yet few naturalists can apply

it to shells with a well-defined foramen without feeling that such

an application is to some extent inconsistent with the purity of

scientific nomenclature.

*§ 3.—A generic name, when once established, should never be

cancelled in any subsequent subdivision of the group, but retained

in a restricted sense for one of the constituent portions.

“§ 4. A generic name should always be retained for that portion

of the original genus which was considered typical by the author.”

This latter rule is preceded by some introductory observa-

tions which should be embodied in it, as they, in fact, form a

1854) qu’il avait, en 1851, proposé le nom de Merista (Jahrb. k. k. geol.

Reichsanstalt, ii. rv. 150, 1851. Mentionné encore dans Leonhard’s Neues

Jahrbuch, p. 127, 1854) pour le groupe renfermant ces derniéres. J’aban-

donne donc la proposition que j’avais faite en 1853, et je conserve indif-

féremment l’Athyris, M‘Coy, ou le Spirigera, d’Orb., pour le T. concen-

trica; et Merista, Suess, pour les T. tumida, Herculea, ete.”

Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris. 243

part of the rule itself. They are especially applicable to this

case.

“When a genus is subdivided into other genera, the original name

should be retained for that portion of it as at first defined. Authors

frequently indicate this by selecting some one species as a fixed point

of reference, which they term the ‘type of the genus.” When they

omit doing so, it may still in many cases be justly inferred that the

first species mentioned on the list, if found accurately to agree with

their definition, was regarded by them as the type. A specific

name, or its synonyms, will also often serve to point out the parti-

cular species which by implication must be regarded as the original

type of the genus. In such cases we are justified in restoring the

name of the old genus to its typical signification, even when later

authors have done otherwise.”’

Now this rule bears directly on the question, because many

naturalists are under the impression that the first species placed

on the list must necessarily be regarded as the type where the

author is silent on that point. But, according to the above (and

common sense), it is only so if found accurately to agree with the

definition. Spirigera concentrica does not agree either with the

name Athyris, or with M‘Coy’s generic description, or with

his typical figure. Therefore it cannot be arbitrarily selected

as the type, and the name Athyris, in consequence, retained for

that group. Indeed in many instances it would be impossible

that the first species placed in the genus should be the type; for

the author might not have the true type in the collection under

investigation.

In this instance, as before mentioned, M‘Coy was preparing

a work exclusively devoted to Carboniferous fossils, among

which A. tumida does not occur. In preparing his description

of the genus he may, however, have had that species before him,

and its imperforate beak may have had some influence.

“©§ 5. When the evidence as to the original type is not clear and

indisputable, then the person who first subdivides the genus may

affix the original name to any portion of it at his discretion ; and no

later author has a right to transfer that name to any other part of

the original genus.”

This last paragraph applies as well to the author who first

subdivided the genus as to others. Once a genus is established

or subdivided, on sound principles, it becomes the property of

science, and the author himself (either of the genus or the sub-

division) can make no change. He may amend, by striking out

the errors, if any there be, but all that is true must remain. _

I think that, on a careful study of all the circumstances, it

will be perceived that Mr. Davidson’s first adjustment of this

244, Mr. E. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

question was the most wise, the best for the interests of science,

and the most just towards all the parties concerned that could

be devised. It was not inconsistent with the laws of nomen-

clature, but in perfect accordance with them in every particular,

and therefore should be retained.

In one respect, however, it has been modified. Athyris, as

first defined by him, included Merzsta of Prof. Suess. This was,

no doubt, due to the fact that the characters of this last-named

genus were not then accurately known to the scientific public.

This makes little difference. Merista has long since been sepa-

rated, with its type M. Herculea, leaving the other and most

important group for Athyris, with A. tumida for the type.

With regard to Spirigera, I think it can also be retained, not-

withstanding the following rule :—

**§ When two authors define and name the same genus, both

making it exactly of the same extent, the latter name should be

cancelled in foto, and not retained in a modified sense.”’

If the name A¢hyris had been extremely objectionable, accord-

ing to the 11th rule, Spirigera might have cancelled it alto-

gether. But the true principle of interpreting these laws 1s,

that where there is any possibility at all of saving the original

name, it must be saved, even if the rules be strained to their

utmost in that direction. The rules cannot be stretched to de-

stroy, but they may be strongly bent in the other direction, to

preserve. If a generic name should be appropriate for a large

number of the species of the group to which it was originally

applied, and not very objectionable as to a few only, I doubt whe-

ther it can be changed. Such was the case with Athyris when

D’Orbigny objected to it. More than two-thirds of the species

designated by him are imperforate, and he should have retained

the name for these. Some naturalists were therefore in favour.

of rejecting Spirigera altogether, others of retaining it. It is

not, therefore, a case clearly within the rule; and as there was

much doubt, the best course to take, as soon as it was found

possible to do so, was taken by Mr. Davidson. He decided in

favour of preserving the name.

3. Authors who have adopted the Classification.

In 1856, Professors H. G. Bronn and F. Roemer, in the third

edition of Bronn’s ‘ Lethza Geognostica,’ adopted Davidson’s

classification, and copied his diagnosis of both genera in full.

They cited A. tumida as the type of Athyris. ‘‘ Die typische

Art ist Athyris tumida, M‘Coy (Atrypa tumida, Dalman). An-

dere Arten sind dA. Herculea (Terebratula Herculea, Barrande),

Mr. EK. Billings on the Genus Athyris. 245

A. pseudo-scalprum (Terebratula pseudo-scalprum, Barrande), A.

scalprum (Terebratula scalprum, Fried. Roemer)” (op. cit. p. 831).

They also recognized S. concentrica as the type of Spirigera.

“Die typische Art ist Sp. concentrica (Terebratula concentrica,

Bronn). Andere Arten sind Sp. pectinifera (Atrypa pectinifera,

Sowerby), aus dem Zechstein, Sp. Roissyi (Sp. de Roissyi, Le-

veillé),”” &c. (op. cit. p. 382).

In the same year Kichwald placed A. tumida in Athyris, and

S. concentrica in Spirigera*.

In 1860 he also introduced the same classification in his great

work on the Paleontology of Russia. The Russian species are

A.tumida, didyma, ungula, cassidea, S. concentrica and ambiguat.

In my studies of the Canadian Brachiopoda I had no occasion

to describe any species of this group until 1859, when I com-

menced a series of papers on the Devonian Fossils of Canada

West. At that time I had not fully investigated the subject, but

understood, from a paper published by Mr. Davidson in the

‘Geologist’ (vol. 1. p. 456), and also from Woodward’s ‘ Manual

of the Mollusca’ (p. 223), that A. tumida and S. concentrica were

thought to be inseparable t. Not feeling perfectly satisfied that

this was the correct classification, I prefaced my descriptions

with the following remarks :—

“‘Genus Aruyris, M‘Coy.

“There is much difference of opinion as to the propriety of retain-

ing this generic name. It implies that the shells have no foramen

in the ventral valve ; and yet many are placed in the genus which

have the beak distinctly perforated. Some paleontologists are there-

fore in favour of using D’Orbigny’s appellation Spirigera instead of

Athyris. Nearly all of the Silurian species, and some of those from

the Devonian rocks, have the beak so strongly incurved that no

foramen can be seen. For such, at least, the name Athyris does not

appear to be very inappropriate. Mr. Davidson still retains it, not

only for those which have the foramen concealed, but also for those

with it open. It appears probable that the genus will sooner or

later be subdivided ; and in that case Athyris might be retained for

the species with closely incurved beak, and Spirigera for some of the

others. I shall give some account of the generic characters of this

group of shells in another article. The following species are placed

in the genus provisionally.’’—Canadian Journal, ser. 2. vol. v. p. 273

(May 1860).

In that paper I described two species with closed. beaks (A.

* “Beitrag zur geographischen Verbreitung der fossilen Thiere Russ-

lands,” Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscou, vol. xxix. pp. 419, 422.

+ Lethzea Rossica, vol. i. p. 731 (Athyris), p. 735 (Spirigera).

{ In this work Mr. Woodward separates Merista (although with doubt)

as a subgenus, and refers 4. tumida to Athyris.

246 Mr. B. Billings on the Genus Athyris.

clara and A. Maia) which, no doubt, belong to the genus. The

others with perforated beaks I marked doubtful, thus :—A. (?)

scitula (Hall) ; A. (?) Clusia, n. sp.; A. (?) wntsuleata (Conrad) ;

A. (?) rostrata (Hall) ; A. (?) Chloé, n. sp.*

“I think it the same as the species called Meristella Doris by

Prof. Hall (13th Reg. Rep. p. 84, 1860). I doubt that any of the

others belong to either Athyris or Spirigera.”

Afterwards Prof. Hall (13th Reg. Rep. p. 74) proposed to es-

tablish a new genus, Meristella, precisely identical with Athyris

as redefined by M‘Coy in 1852. His diagnosis reads thus :—

“Shells variable in form, oval, ovoid, orbicular, or transverse.

Valves unequally convex, with or without a median fold and sinus ;

beak of the ventral valve apparently imperforate, incurved over the

beak of the smaller valve; area none; valves articulating by teeth

and sockets. Surface smooth, or with fine concentric lines of growth

and fine obsolete radiating strize, which are usually more conspicuous

in the exfoliated shell. The interior of the dorsal valve is marked

by the presence of the longitudinal septum, and the upper part of

the ventral valve by a deep subtriangular muscular impression which

unites with the rostral cavity.”

Now I hold that, instead of proposing a new genus, he should

have retained the original name A¢hyris, because his proposition

amounts to a subdivision of the group: and, according to the

laws of nomenclature, he should have applied the old name to

that portion for which it is most appropriate, as had been done

six years before by Davidson. As soon as this new arrangement

was published, I reinvestigated the subject, and perceiving that

it amounted to nothing more than a restoration of Davidson’s

former classification, but with a change of names, I declined to

adopt it. In all the publications of our Survey in which species

of this group are described or figured, Athyris is used instead of

Meristella.

On the merits of this classification, a note in ‘ Silliman’s

* T now think that A. clara is the same as Prof. Hall’s Meristella nasuta,

but am not quite sure that it is Conrad’s species. A. (?) scitula was after-

wards found to belong to a new geuus described by me under the name of

Charionella (op. cit. vol. vi. p. 148, March 1861). It is not Atrypa scitula,

Hall, a point on which I was not certain at the time, as will be seen by

the description, which reads thus :—

“The above figures represent different views of two specimens of a spe-

cies which appears to me to be identical with that figured in the work

above cited. It varies greatly in size. The length of the largest specimen

that I have seen is 17 lines, the greatest width 14 lines, depth 8 lines. The

smallest is about 2 lines in length; and many of intermediate sizes have

been observed, to make out the series. It is not certain that this species

belongs to the genus Athyris.”,—Op. cit. p. 30.

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on Dredging among the Shetland Isles. 247

Journal,’ ser. 2. vol. xxiii. p. 130, expresses the views advocated

herein. The following is an extract therefrom :—

‘This is the classification which the writer of the criticism main-

tains should be sustained ; and we cannot see any reasonable objection

to it. It is perfectly just towards both M‘Coy and D’Orbigny. It

inflicts no injustice on any other author. It is not inconsistent with

purity of zoological nomenclature, or in any way injurious to science.

it does not require any modification in either of the original defini-

tions. The typical species are central and dominant forms of two

different groups of species which together form one larger general

group. Athyris, under this arrangement, is the generic name of

that group which has 4. tumida for its type. Spirigera is a per-

fectly unexceptionable name for the other group, of which the typi-

eal form is 8. concentrica. Prof. Hall’s proposed genus Meristella

is precisely identical with the genus Athyris in its restricted sense

(as above explained), and cannot be admitted until some good reason

is shown, for setting aside Davidson’s arrangement. It belongs to

Prof. Hall to place this reason before the public in a clear and un-

sophisticated manner. If he succeed in maintaining his point, then

he will establish a classification for this group of fossils far inferior

to that proposed by Davidson. Spirigera must be suppressed, and

Athyris must take its place, and thus stand as the generic appella-

tion of a group of fossils for which it is not appropriate. We hold

that this change is not necessary; and as it would, if adopted, be

injurious to science by affecting the purity of zoological nomenclature,

it cannot be maintained.”

XXX.—Fourth Report on Dredging among the Shetland Isles.

By J. Gwyn Jerrreys, F.R.S.*

In spite of the weather (which was worse than usual in this

stormy region), some additional results of no slight interest

were obtained. The three requisites of such enterprises (time,

money, and experience) were not wanting; and the valuable co-

operation of Mr. Norman, Mr. Waller, and Mr. Dodd, aided by

a good yacht and crew, and by a large stock of apparatus, left

nothing to desire except calmer seas. Dr. Edmonston and his

family again did all in their power to promote our endeavours ;

and Mr. Cheyne of Edinburgh kindly placed his house at Tan-

wick at our disposal.

Discoveries in natural history are of several kinds, all of which

are nearly equally important :—1. New species or forms. 2. Geo-

graphical distribution. 3. Habits of animals, including in the

present case those supposed to be dependent on the depth of

water. 4. Geological relations. 5. Extraneous incidents.

* Communicated by the author, having been read at the Meeting of the

British Association at Dundee, 5th Sept., 1867.

248 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on Dredging

All these I will now notice as regards the Mollusca. Other

branches of the marine Invertebrata will be treated of by

Mr. Norman, Mr. Waller, and Dr. M‘Intosh ; and Dr. Giinther

has kindly promised to report on a few small fishes caught in

the dredge.

1. New Species.—The species I am about to enumerate are

new to the British fauna, but not to science.

Terebratella Spitzbergensis, Davidson.

A fresh and perfect, although dead, specimen occurred in

80-90 fathoms off Unst. The only locality hitherto recorded

for this shell in a living state is Spitzbergen. It was found by

Hisinger and myself in a fossil state at Uddevalla, and last year

by Messrs. Crosskey and Robertson in another raised sea-bed

near Christiania. There is, of course, a possibility that the

Shetland specimen also may be fossil; but it has all the appearance

of being recent ; and Terebratula cranium and T. caput-serpentis

(both of which are likewise arctic species) live in the same place

where this specimen of Terebratella Spitzbergensis was dredged.

Rhynchonella psittacea, Gmelin.

A specimen (unfortunately broken in dredging) was found

with Terebratella Spitzbergensis, Terebratula cranium, and T.

caput-serpentis. This was filled with soft mud, in which was a

fresh, but dead, young specimen of R. psittacea. I had ona

former occasion dredged a full-grown specimen and a young one

(both quite perfect, although not living) off Unst. In ‘ British

Conchology,’ vol. 1. pp. 22 & 28, is an account of all the speci-

mens said to have been taken by Capt. Laskey and others in the

British seas; and I am still convinced that most of these re-

ported discoveries were mistakes, and that some of the speci-

mens are fossil. The present case is free from doubt, except

on the latter ground. Single valves of Pecten Islandicus, Tellina

calcaria, and Mya truncata, var. Uddevallensis, are not uncommon

on the northern and eastern coasts of Shetland, and were procured

with 7. Spitzbergensis and R. psittacea; but the former had

an unmistakeably fossilized or chalky aspect, and never were

perfect or had the valves united. It seems to be an established

rule that all marine invertebrate animals increase in bulk north-

wards; and thus the comparative size of living and dead speci-

mens of arctic species found im the Shetland seas may serve as

an additional test to distinguish which of the latter were re-

cent and which fossil. The two Brachiopods in question must,

I think, stand or fall together as British. Mr. Davidson (the

great authority on this abnormal class of the Mollusca) says

among the Shetland Isles. 249

that, under the circumstances I have mentioned, “there appears

to be a probability that these two species may occur somewhere

in the neighbourhood—if not quaternary; but if this last, I

hardly think they would have been so perfect and fresh as you

describe them to be.” Professor Lovén, who has examined my

specimens, considers them recent. According to Professor Sars,

R. psittacea inhabits the coast of Finmark, as far south as Troms6

(69° 40'N. lat.), at depths of from 20 to 80 fathoms. Mr.

M‘Andrew dredged it off Drontheim and in Upper Norway, at

depths of from 40 to 150 fathoms. Drontheim lies in 63° N.

lat., Unst in about 61°.

Leda pernula, Miller.

A valve, apparently fossil, was dredged on the northern coast;

and several valves in a fresh state (partly covered with a glossy

epidermis) and a small perfect but dead specimen were dredged

in St. Magnus Bay, on the west coast, at a depth of from 60

to 80 fathoms. As no glacial fossils of arctic kinds occurred on

the west coast, I have no hesitation in regarding ZL. pernula as

British. I had in former expeditions dredged small valves

and a complete pair east of Shetland and in the Hebrides. This

species inhabits the Scandinavian coasts, as far south as Kullen

in Sweden, from 20 to 150 fathoms; and M‘Andrew records

a depth of 160 fathoms: it is widely diffused over the arctic

seas of both continents, and it is also one of our post-tertiary or

quaternary fossils.

The next two species are especially interesting, in respect both

of novelty and of the classification of the Mollusca. They

belong to the class Solenoconchia (Solenoconche, Sars, or

Scaphopoda, Bronn), which is represented by the genus Denta-

lium. I have elsewhere so fully treated of this remarkable class

that I will now offer merely a few remarks as to the genus

Siphonodentalium of Sars, to which or an allied genus the spe-

cies now about to be noticed must be referred. Siphonodentalium

(perhaps the type of a separate family of Solenoconchia) is dis-

tinguished from Dentalium by having an extensile worm-like

foot, the disk of which expands in the shape of a flower and is

furnished with a spike, by the mouth or anterior orifice of the

shell being obliquely truncated (in Dentalium it is circular), and

by the posterior or smaller orifice having its margin serrated or

slit on each side, instead of this orifice beg furnished with a

short pipe or having its margin slit on one side only. JI am

inclined to refer one of the species now discovered as British to

the genus Stphonodentalium, and the other to the genus Cadulus

of Professor Philippi*. In the latter genus (which Philippi

* Moll. Sic. ii. p. 209.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. LG

250 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on Dredging

proposed for the reception of a small Sicilian fossil—his Denta-

lium ovulum) the shell is not cylindro-conical as in Siphono-

dentalium, but is tumid in the middle or anterior portion, some-

times awl-shaped; and the mouth is encircled by a narrow rim.

In Cadulus the shell is quite smooth, transparent, and lustrous;

in Siphonodentalium it is striated or exhibits the lines of growth,

and is semitransparent. The long-lost Dentalium gadus of

Montagu, an allied species (D. clavatum of Gould) from the

China Sea, another species which I observed in the late Mr.

Cuming’s collection, from Mindanao (erroneously named D.

acuminatum, Deshayes), and D. coarctatum of Lamarck (a ter-

tiary fossil) apparently belong to Cadulus, and certainly not to

Ditrupa (properly Ditrypa)—a genus of testaceous Annelids the

shell of which is different in structure and composition from

that of Cadulus or of Siphonodentalium (the mouth is contracted

or pinched-in), and the animal is annulose and has a circular

operculum. On the other hand, several kinds of shelly cases

described as Dentalia really belong to Ditrypa. If Cadulus is not

generically distinct from Siphonodentalium, the former of these

names has priority ; and we shall thus be able to expunge a more

than sesquipedalian name from the terminology of the Mollusca.

The diagram now exhibited is an enlarged representation of the

figures of S. Lofutense and S. subfusiformis, in an admirable

paper by Professor Sars, published in the Transactions of the

Academy of Sciences at Christiania for 1864; and it will serve

to explain the nature of these extraordinary mollusks. One of

our species is

Siphonodentalium Lofotense, Sars

(“ Malacozoologische Jagttagelser,” in Vid.-Selsk. Forh. 1864,

p- 17, figs. 29-33), ranging from the Loffoden Isles to Chris-

tianiafiord, at depths of between 30 and 120 fathoms. It was

rather plentiful among sandy mud in St. Magnus Bay, at the

depth of from 60 to 80 fathoms; and I had found it in 1846

when dredging off Skye, in 1864 off Unst, and last year in the

Minch. The shell may easily be passed over (as it was by

me) for the young of Dentalium entalis; but it is more curved

and cylindrical, the mouth and corresponding lines of growth

slope backwards, and the margin of the posterior orifice is regu-

larly jagged (having two slight notches on each side), and this

extremity does not form a bulbous point in the fry. One of

the characters given by Sars (“ margine aperture posterioris

integro”’) should be amended. My observation of the animal

agreed with his, except that the foot is vermiform and has a

fine pomt, the disk being expanded and assuming the shape of

a flower only when the Stphonodentalium wishes to obtain a

fulcrum and keep its place in the sand. The foot of Nucula

among the Shetland Isles. 251

and Leda is somewhat similar, its disk when expanded resem-

bling the leaf of a palm. Another species of Siphonodentalium

proper is Dentalium quinquangulare of Forbes, from the Aigean

(80-230 fathoms), which M‘Andrew afterwards dredged off the

coasts of Portugal and Spain in 5-30 fathoms, and named

(lapsu calami) D. quadrangulare ; this species Sars lately procured

from the Loffoden Isles and Christianiafiord in 50-300 fathoms,

and described as S. pentagonum. ‘The coincidence of the first

and last of these specific names is curious. JD. bicarinatum of

Deshayes (a tertiary fossil) may also be referable to the genus

Siphonodentalium. D. bifissum of Searles Wood, from the Co-

ralline Crag, is possibly the type of another genus, for which

I would suggest the name of Dischides. This species has been

dredged in a living state off Gibraltar by Mr. M‘Andrew. I

suspected that D. bifissum might be the tube of a young Teredo

norvegica, on account of its having a septal process within the

posterior orifice: at all events my remark is justified by the

affinity which exists between the Teredinide and the Soleno-

conchia.

The second species of this class is

Cadulus subfusiformis, Sars

(Stphonodentalium subfusiforme, |. c. p. 21, figs. 36-44), having

a Norwegian distribution equally extensive with that of S. Lofo-

tense, but attaining a greater depth, viz. from 50 to 300 fathoms.

I noticed specimens among the fossils collected last year by

Messrs. Crosskey and Robertson in a raised sea-bed at Barholmen,

near Christiania. It occurred on the Unst ground, in 80-90 fa-

thoms, and was apparently not rare. Mr. Peach detected a spe-

cimen in looking over some sand which I dredged there in 1864 ;

this I at the time regarded as a Ditrypa. The margin of the

posterior orifice has two slight indentations or notches, one on

each side; and Sars’s statement that the margin is entire was

perhaps founded on imperfect specimens. C. subfusiformis may

be known from C. gadus not only by its much smaller size, but

also by having the greatest width or diameter in the middle

(instead of in the upper or anterior part), and by the posterior

or narrower part being abruptly curtailed. C. gadus is awl-

shaped, and has a tapering extremity. C. subfusiformis is

gibbous. Whether C. gadus inhabits our seas is questionable.

Montagu says*, “ This is a pelagic species, found in many parts

of the British Channel, and is known to mariners by the name

of ‘hake’s tooth,’ who frequently find it within soundings,

adhering to the log-line (as we are informed), but most likely to

* Test. Brit. i. p. 496.

17%

252 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on Dredging

the plumb-line.” My specimens are from the collections of

Dr. Turton and Mr. George Humphreys ; the latter dealt almost

exclusively in exotic shells. Rang placed D. gadus in his genus

Creseis, among the Pteropoda; but Philippi rightly objected to

such a classification, because the shells of all Pteropods are closed

at the smaller end.

The sixth and last addition to our molluscan fauna is

Utriculus globosus, Lovén

(Amphisphyra globosa, Ind. Moll. Scand. p. 11). Two living

specimens were dredged in St. Magnus Bay, with Leda pernula

and Siphonodentalium Lofotense. Its original distribution ex-

tended from Finmark to Bohuslan in the south of Sweden ; and

through the kindness of the discoverer and Professor Lilljeborg

I have been enabled to compare the Shetland specimens with

those from the Scandinavian coasts. I mention this, because

(before I was thus favoured, and when I had only Lovén’s de-

scription to consult) I mistook this species for another, which I

have lately described as U. ventrosus, from Skye.

2. Geographical distribution—The accompanying list* of all

the Mollusca hitherto observed in Shetland and the adjacent

seas will serve to show the relations which exist between these

and the Mollusca of the north and south of Europe. The

number of Shetland species is 363, of which 315 inhabit the

north and 245 the south of Europe. The total number of the

British Mollusca, so far as 1 have yet worked out the subject,

is 712. It may be remarked what a scanty proportion the

land and freshwater Mollusca of Shetland bear to those of

Great Britain, viz. 23 only out of 122. The marine species,

however, are 338 out of 590—although the Zetlandic Nudi-

branchs and Cuttles have not been well examined, and, of the

former, 28 only out of 110 have been as yet observed.

Some species are now for the first time recorded as Zetlandic,

e.g. Terebratella Spitzbergensis, Montacuta tumidula, Siphono-

dentalium Lofotense, Cadulus subfusiformis, Rissoa proaima, Odo-

stomia clavula, and Utriculus globosus. Other species, either

rare or local, which I had previously dredged on the eastern and

northern coasts, were found this year on the western coast also.

Such are Pecten Teste, Lima Sarsi, L. elliptica, Leda pernula,

Axinus ferruginosus, Isocardia cor, Tellina balaustina (one living

specimen being fully an inch in breadth), Panopea plicata,

Rissoa Jeffreysi, Aclis supranitida, A. Walleri, Odostomia minima,

O. eximia, Eulima intermedia, Natica sordida, Aporrhais Macan-

dree, Cerithiopsis costulata, Buccinum Humphreysianum, Colum-

* This list will be published in the Reports of the British Association.

among the Shetland Isles. 253

bella nana, Pleurotoma brachystoma, Cylichna acuminata, Philine

quadrata, and P. nitida.

3. Habits of Animals.—Species which were supposed to in-

habit shallow water only were found living at considerable

depths. In this category may be mentioned Natica catena,

which was dredged alive in from 40 to 50 fathoms. Capt.

Thomas informs me that he also dredged this species in the

Orkneys living at the same depth. A dead specimen of Stézlifer

Turtoni was procured with Natica catena. Bathymetrical con-

ditions are not of so much consequence to the Mollusca as a

suitable habitation and a good feeding-ground. We had the

good fortune of dredging in 170 fathoms—a greater depth

than had been previously explored in the British seas. This

was about forty miles N.N.W. of Unst. The ground was

stony intermixed with patches of sand. The greatest depth

recorded as having been dredged in our seas was 145 fathoms,

by Admiral Beechey, off the Mull of Galloway. The following

is a list of the Mollusca which I examined from our dredging

in 170 fathoms :—

Living.—Bracuiopopa: Terebratula cranium, young ; T. caput-

serpentis, young; Crania anomala. COoNCHIFERA: Anomia ephip-

pium, young; A. patelliformis, var. striata; Lima subauriculata,

young; Leda pygmea; Montacuta substriata, on Spatangus meri-

dionalis? ; Venus ovata; Lucinopsis undata, young; Saxicava ru-

gosa. Sotenoconcuia: Dentalium entalis, var. anulata. Gas-

TROPODA: Trochus occidentalis ; Eulima bilineata ; Natica Mon-

tacuti; Trophon Barvicensis.

Dead.—ConcuiFrerA: Pecten septemradiatus, a fragment; P.

tigrinus, ditto; P. similis, a single valve; Crenella decussata, frag-

ments; Nucula nucleus, single valves; N. tenuis, ditto ; Leda mi-

nuta, a single valve; Limopsis aurita, small but fresh single valves;

Arca pectunculoides, single valves ; Lucina borealis, perfect ; Axinus

Croulinensis, single valves ; Cardium fasciatum, ditto; C. minimum,

ditto; Astarte sulcata, ditto; Venus lincta, ditto; Tellina balaus-

tina, a fragment ; Psammobia Ferréensis, ditto; Mactra solida, var.

elliptica, single valves; Scrobicularia prismatica, a fragment ;

Thracia papyracea, var. villosiuscula, young; Neera cuspidata, a

fragment. Gastropopa: Tectura fulva, var. albula ; Propilidium

ancyloides ; Emarginula fissura ; Trochus amabilis, young ; T. mille-

granus, ditto; Turritella terebra, var. nivea; Natica Alderi ; Tri-

chotropis borealis ; Buccinopsis Dalei, a fragment ; Fusus gracilis,

young; FI. propinquus, ditto; Defrancia teres; D. linearis, var.

equalis, a fragment; Pleurotoma costata, ditto; Cylichna alba,

ditto. Preropopa: Spirialis retroversus ; Clio or Cleodora cuspi-

data, a fragment.

Of these species sixteen were living, and thirty-eight dead—

254: Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on Dredging

in all, fifty-four. They comprised some rarities, viz. Terebratula

cranium, Limopsis aurita, Axinus Croulinensis, Trochus amabilis,

Buccinopsis Dalei, and Cylichna alba. The shells were of the

usual colour; indeed this was brighter and darker in living

specimens of Venus ovata and Eulima bilineata than in average

examples of the same species taken in a few fathoms. The

notion that colour is absent or fainter in shells from deep water

seems to be quite unfounded.

4. Geological Relations—Fossil shells (beg relics of the

glacial epoch) occurred in 170 fathoms and higher up to 80 fa-

thoms. They were chiefly Pecten Islandicus, Tellina calcaria,

Mya truncata, var. Uddevallensis, Saxicava rugosa, var. Uddeval-

lensis, Molleria costulata, and Trochus cinereus. All these spe-

cies and varieties inhabit high northern latitudes, and none of

them have been discovered living in our seas. No such fossils

were detected on any part of the western coast of Shetland.

5. Extraneous incidents—In the dredged stuff taken from

a depth of about 85 fathoms, on a soft sandy bottom, twenty-

five miles N.N.W. of Unst, I found the canine tooth of an

animal of the weasel tribe ; and Mr. Waller found the shoulder-

blade of a much smaller quadruped. These occurred within a

comparatively small space, although not together, and they

were unaccompanied by any other land organisms. The socket

of the tooth and the bone were corroded. It is possible that

the tooth was that of a tame ferret, which was accidentally killed

in 1862 and thrown into the sea at Balta, at a distance of about

thirty-five miles from the place where the tooth was dredged.

The tide sets with great rapidity in that direction; and when

the carcase became distended by the gases evolved during putre-

faction, it must have floated for some time. The bone is sup-

posed by Mr. Boyd Dawkins to be that of a bat; this may have

been eaten by a snowy owl, and disgorged or voided on its way

back to the Faroe Isles or Iceland. I mention this curious cir-

cumstance to show that the bones of quadrupeds as well as of

man may be preserved for a long time in “the slimy bottom of

the deep,” without being disturbed by the naturalist. When we

consider the vast extent of the sea-bed, and the very trifling and

unfrequent operations of the dredge (the one beimg measured

by square nautical degrees, and the other by square yards), we

ought not to be surprised that the remains of drowned mariners

(at least their teeth) are not thus brought to light. Clarence’s

dream (the creation of a sublime poet) is never likely to be

verified by modern research.

I have had much pleasure in presenting a collection of the

rarer shells to our national Museum.

among the Shetland Isles. 255

ig Subjoined are letters from Dr. Giinther and Mr. Boyd Daw-

ins :—

*‘DEAR Sir,

“The fishes collected by you by means of the dredge, at a depth

of from 80 to 90 fathoms, at the Shetland Islands, belong to four

species, all being new to the British fauna. Singularly enough, two

belong to Mediterranean species—viz. a Dragonet, Callionymus ma-

culatus (Bonap.) and a Sand-Launce, Ammodytes siculus (Swains.).

The two others appear to be undescribed: one is a Rockling, dis-

tinguished by its very large eyes, for which I propose the name of

Motella macrophthalma ; the second a Goby, which I dedicate to its

discoverer under the name of Godius Jeffreysi. 1 will furnish you

with descriptions of the two new species [see p. 290], and remain

«Yours very truly,

“J, Gwyn Jeffreys, Esq., F.R.S.” “A, GUNTHER.”

“Upminster, Romford, Essex.

**My prEar Sir, * August 28, 1867.

‘*T have carefully examined the remains found under such inter-

esting circumstances. The tooth approaches nearer to the left lower

canine of the ferret (Putorius furo) than to any other teeth in the

Museum of the College of Surgeons. From so small a portion I

can hardly infer the species of the animal; but if its possessor was

not a Ferret, he was a Ferret’s first cousin, one of the Mustelines,

who died in the prime of life. The corrosion of the fang is very

curious, and cannot be the result of the waste of the sea: it seems

to be the result of the action of an acid, which has been prevented

from attacking the crown by the crystalline structure of the enamel.

Nearly all the gelatine has disappeared from the fang. Its age

would be best arrived at by the character of the sea-bottom. If

from a muddy deposit, probably it is of that age; if from a rocky

bottom, its age is altogether uncertain. It is not more recent-looking

than many of the Pleistocene bones I have dug out of caverns.

The second fragment seems to be a portion of the scapula of a bat ;

but its condition does not allow of a very accurate determination.

If the two were dredged up near each other, there is probably a

deposit of bones at the spot whence they were obtained, similar to

that of the east coast. Their discovery is of very great interest, and

I am only sorry that I can add so little to their elucidation.

“T am, my dear Sir,

“J. Gwyn Jeffreys, Esq. Yours truly, ‘

25 Devonshire Place.” W. Boyp Dawkins.

P.S. I may add that, before I left Shetland, Dr. Saxby kindly

undertook, at my suggestion, to ascertain whether mammalian

bones deposited in the sea would be corroded, and by what

means.

256 Dr. W. Nylander on new British Lichens.

XXXI.—Notule Lichenologice. No. XVII.

By the Rev. W. A. Lercuron, B.A., F.LS.

Dr. Nyztanver makes the following additions to the Lichens of

Great Britain in the ‘ Flora,’ April 26, July 17, and August 17,

1867 :—

1. Melaspilea amota, Ny).

Thallus macula albida indeterminata indicatus vel vix ullus dis-

tinctus; apothecia nigra, innata, rotundata vel rotundato-

difformia (latit. 0°5 millim. vel parum amplius), margine pro-

prio tenui inzequali; spore 4-8, incolores, 1-septate, medio

constricte, longit. 0‘016-0°022 millim., crassit. 0°007—0-010

millim.; paraphyses vix ulle; thece conferte ; epithecium

fuscescens vel fusco-luteum ; hypothecium tenuiter et leviter

vage obscuratum. Iodo gelatina hymenea vel thece dilute

cerulescunt (qui color dein evanescit).

Killarney, Ireland (Mr. I. Carroll).

A M. arthonioide (Sprengelit, Ach.) mox paraphysibus defi-

cientibus distat. Apothecia interdum epithecio fusco-rufescente

in statu humido ; sepe circumscissa (h. e. fissura cimcta).

2. Arthonia ilicinella, Nyl.

Similis A. ilicine, Tay]., sed seepius minor, sporis seepius minori-

bus (sed variant longitudine 0°021—0°036 millim., crassit.

0-:008-0:012 millim.), et iodo gelatina hymenea vinose rubes-

cente (nulla visibili czerulescentia).

Ad corticem J/icis in Hibernia, Killarney, legit Carroll.

Spore 3-6-septate, plerumque bene evolutze et majores 5-

septate. Accedit versus A. cinnabarinam. In A. ilicina iodo

gelatina hymenea cerulescit (cerulescentia persistente). Epi-

thecium hydrate kalica sordide czerulescit.

3. Verrucaria achroopora, Nyl.

Thallus hypophloeodes, macula pallido-glaucescente indicatus ;

apothecia extus protuberantia thallode leviter convexiuscula

(diam. 0°5 millim.) et ostiolo subincolore vel pallido puncti-

formi (diam. 0:05-0:07 millim.) non impresso indicata, con-

ferta, perithecio immerso integre (sat tenuiter) nigro (diam.

0°4-0°5 millim.), seepe depressiusculo; spore 8, fuscee, 4-

loculares, longit. 0'016-0:019 millim., erassit. 0-006—0:009

maillim.

In Hibernia, Killarney, ad corticem legit Carroll.

Arcte accedit ad Pyrenulam porinoidem, Ach. Syn. p. 128, et

vix est nisi ejus varietas ostiolis incoloribus vel pallidis (raro

obscuris). Facies Thelotrematis.

Dr. W. Nylander on new British Lichens. 257

4. Verrucaria analeptoides, Nyl.

Extus subsimilis analepte, sed revera forte sola varietas V. ante-

cellentis Nyl. (in ‘ Flora’ 1866, p. 86); sporis (1-septatis)

longit. 0:036-0:050 millim., crassit. 0°009-0:010 millim.

Variant spore septis (spuriis) 3-5. Paraphyses sepe laxe.

Hibernia, Killarney ; legit Carroll, 1866.

5. Verrucaria desistens, Nyl.

Thallus vix ullus proprius; apothecia perithecio integro minuto

(diam. 01 millim.), parte dimidia supera convexa prominula ;

spore 8, incolores, fusiformes, 3—5-septate, recte, longit.

0:011-0-016 millim., crassit. 0°003-0:004 millim.; para-

physes null. Lodo gelatina hymenea vinose rubens.

In Hibernia, Killarney, ad corticem Jlicis legit Carroll

(1866).

Prope V. albissimam locum habeat, sed recedit variis notis a

stirpe V. epidermidis.

6. Lecanora Hutchinsiea, Nyl.

Thallus pallido-cinerascens vel flavido-cinerascens tenuis, ri-

mosus vel rimuloso-diffractus ; apothecia rufo-testacea (latit.

O'S millim.), convexa, biatorma; spore 8, incolores, fusi-

formes, l-septate, longit. O-010-0-012 millim., crassit.

0:0025-0:0035 millim., paraphyses crassule (crass. 0°0025—

0:0035 millim.), nonnihil articulate, apice incrassato, inco-

lore; hypothecium incolar. Iodo gelatina hymenea ceru-

lescens (cum thecis, que apice intensius tinguntur).

Ad saxa in Hibernia (Miss Hutchins ex hb. Carroll.).

Facies Lecidee cujusdam propinque vernali, sed theoretice

Lecanora, nam spermogonia ut in stirpe Lecanore subfusce, ubi

accedit ad erystbem. Spore tenues et paraphyses crasse speci-

men distinguunt. Spermatia arcuata, longit. 0°020 millim.,

crassit. vix. 0°001 millim.

7. Lecidea aphana, Nyl.

Thallus griseus, tenuis, subverrucose vel subgranulose ineequalis,

indeterminatus ; apothecia nigra, parvula (latit. 0°2—0°4 mil-

lim.), convexula, immarginata, intus albicantia; spore 8,

incolores, ellipsoidez vel oblong, simplices, longit. 0-008—

0-011 millim., crass. 0:0035—0:0045 millim., thalamium vage

violaceo-fuscescens (epithecio vix obscuriore) ; paraphyses

non discrete ; hypothecium incolor (vel interdum vage infra

tenuiter violaceo- fuscescens). [odo gelatina hymenea ceru-

lescens.

In Hibernia, prope Kilkee com. Clare, ad saxa (Carroll, 1865).

258 Dr. W. Nylander on new British Lichens.

Extus comparabilis cum L. sylvicola, a qua vero variis notis

allatis differt.

8. Lecidea mesotropa, Ny].

Thallus cinerascens, verrucoso areolatus, indeterminatus (medio-

cris crassitiel) ; apothecia fusco-nigra vel nigricantia, opaca,

planiuscula, adnata (latit. 0-6-0°9 millim.), margine obtuso

vel evanescente, intus albida; spore 8, ellipsoidez, longit.

0:009-0:013 millim., crass. 0°005—0:006 millim.; paraphyses

gracilescentes, vulgo non discrete; epithecium fuscescens ;

hypothecium incolor.

In Scotia, Ben Lomond, ad saxa schistosa (Crombie).

Est quasi intermedia inter L. lapicidam et lithophilam, thallo

fere illius, apotheciis fere hujus, nec forsan species propria.

Apothecia szepe faciei biatorinz.

9. Lecidea leiotea, Nyl.

Thallus fuscus, tenuis, verniceus, levis, determinatus, obsolete

rimulosus; apothecia nigra, plana (diam. circiter 0°5 millim.

vel minora), obtuse marginata vel margine non distincto, ad-

nata ; spore 8, incolores, ellipsoidez, simplices, longit. 0-008—

0:011 millim., crass. 0‘006-0°007 millim.; paraphyses me-

diocres, apice fuscescente crassiores (et ibi vulgo aliquoties

septato-articulatz) ; hypothecium incolor. Todo gelatina hy-

menea nonnthil cerulescens.

In Hibernia, Killarney, ad saxa basaltica (Carroll).

Forsan non sit status perfectissimus speciei, sed e loco pen-

dens, thallo griseo-nigricante quasi “ mucoso-gelatinoso,” ut

diceret Acharius.

Spermatia ellipsoideo-oblonga, longit. circiter 0-004 millim.,

crass. 00015 millim., sterigmatibus breviusculis simplicibus.

10. Lecidea homalotropa, Nyl.

Thallus albus, glaber, tenuissimus vel macula alba subdetermi-

nata indicatus ; apothecia nigra, fere mediocria (latit. circiter

0:5-0°6 millim.), plana, marginata; epithecio subrugoso ;

spore 8, incolores, cylindraceze, multiseptatz (septis plurimis

et vulgo singulis inter se magis approximatis quam crassitie

spore), long. 0°130-0°140 millim., crass. 0:0045—0-0050 mil-

lim.; paraphyses gracilescentes, nonnihil anastomosantes ;

epithecium obscuratum ; hypothecium (sat tenue) nigricans.

Todo gelatina hymenea non tincta.

In Hibernia, inter Killarney et Kinmare, legit Dominus Car-

roll (Aprili 1867) ad corticem arboris.

Est species vicina L. urceolata, Ach., et differens preecipue

Dr. W. Nylander on new British Lichens. 259

apotheciis planis. Margo eorum sepe inequalis. Anne satius

amb habeantur Melaspilee ?

1]. Verrucaria epigeoides, Ny).

Similis V. epigee, sed minor et sporis 3-septatis (long. 0:018-

0:027 millim., crass. 0°005—0:008 millim.).

In Hibernia, ad Moher comitatus Clare, supra terram (Car-

roll, 1865).

Macula thallina pallido-virescens. Perithecium immersum

(latit. circiter 0-11 millim., altit. 0°25 millim.), supra nigrum,

parte immersa fuscescente (in lamina tenui) ; paraphyses gra-

ciles. Vix sumi possit pro statu terrestri V. chlorotice, nam

obstant jam apothecia immersa et profunda perithecio alio.

12. Verrucaria glabratula, Nyl.

Subsimilis V. achroopore, sed levior, ostiolis nigris, protuberan-

tis thalloideis minus distinctis, et interdum peritheciis supra

subemersis. Sporze long. 0°018-0°022 millim., crass. 0-006—

0-008 millim.

Killarney, ad corticem (Carroll).

Forte status V. glabrata, analoga ut nitidella est nitide; tum

achroopora, Nyl. in ‘ Flora’ 1867, p. 179, alium statum sistere

possit glabrate.

13. Collema confertum (Ach.).

Observetur Collema turgidum, var. confertum, Ach. L. U. p.634,

propriam sistere speciem.

Collema confertum (Ach.). Thallus nigricans, parvus, conferte

turgide squamulosus, squamulis szepe cyathoideis vel podetii-

formibus, omnibus fere fertilibus; apothecia (singula in

singulis squamulis vel lobulis thallinis superne urceolatis)

subconcoloria, impressa, margine thallino tumido cincta;

spore 8, ellipsoidez vel fusiformi-ellipsoidez, simplices, long.

0:017—0:023 millim., crass. 0-008-0°010 millim. ; paraphyses

gracilescentes. odo gelatina hymenea cerulescens (preeser-

timque thecze ita tinctz).

Supra terram in Anglia (Turner).

14, Verrucaria capnodes, Nyl.

Dici possit V. rhyponta, Borr., Leight., Mudd, fere ut species

distinguenda a V. rhyponta, Ach.

15. Verrucaria advenula, Nyl.

Non differt a V. rimosicola, Leight. (quod nomen forte non est

satis grammaticum).

260 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee.

16. Lecidea Dufourei, Ach.

Est nomen in herbariis variis obvium Lichenis, quem Lecideam

sabuletorum, f. simpliciorem, dixi in Lich. Scand. p. 205. No-

men Acharianum restituendum.

Etiam in Gallia occurrit, in Vogesis (Mougeot) ; atque in

Anglia (Leighton).

XXXII.—On the Menispermacee.

By Joun Mizrs, F.R.S., F.L.S., &c.

[Concluded from p. 175.]

60. DESMONEMA.

This genus is proposed for a plant from Natal, with cordate,

deltoidly orbicular, submembranaceous, glabrous, 5-nerved

leaves, the nerves branching externally, the petiole being long

and slender. It has an axillary inflorescence, with a somewhat

slender rachis as long as, or longer than, the leaves, the whole

plant so much resembling a species of Tinospora that it might

easily be mistaken for one. The inflorescence is a simple ra-

ceme, its rachis being provided at short intervals with a subu-

late bracteole, half the length of the 1-flowered pedicel which

emanates from the same point; the flower has six sepals, which

are ovate, subacute, the three outer being alternate with and

half the length of the three interior ; six petals in two series,

the outer ones subcuneately ovate, three-quarters of the length

of the inner sepals, plane, the three inner ones a trifle shorter,

linear, one-third their breadth, fuscous, subfleshy, longitudinally

canaliculated ; three monadelphous stamens as long as the outer

petals, the filaments being united for three-quarters of their

length into a central column, the upper extremities being free,

nearly erect, supporting as many subglobular anthers, which

are broader than them, 2-celled, the oval cells collateral, without

intervening connective, each cell opening bivalvately by a some-

what lateral and subextrorse longitudinal furrow. Desmonema,

in the feature of its three monadelphous stamens, resembles

Rhaptonema, Syrrhonema, Detandra, and Sarcopetalum. It dif-

fers from the first in its subextrorse anthers, in the number and

shape of its sepals, the kind of inflorescence, the form and vena-

tion of its leaves, and its very dissimilar habit. Syrrhonema

differs from it in its introrse 4-lobed anthers, the want of petals,

the greater number of its sepals, and in the character of its in-

florescence. Detandra is distinct from it in its anther-cells, a

far greater number of sepals, the character of its inflorescence,

its peltate leaves, with another kind of venation. Sarcopetalum

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 261

also differs in the number and form of its sepals, and in the

globular shape of its larger fleshy petals.

DrsmMonEMA, nob.—Flores dioici. Masc. Sepala 6, biseriata,

oblonga aut subovata, submembranacea, nervose picta, gla-

bra, 3 interiora exterioribus 2-plo longiora et 3-plo latiora,

estivatione imbricata. Petala 6, biseriata, quorum 3 exteriora

cuneato-ovata, submembranacea, plana aut subconcava, sepalis

dimidio breviora, 3 interiora paululo breviora, 3-plo angus-

tiora, linearia, erecta, fusco-carnosula, longitudinaliter canali-

culata. Stamina 3, monadelpha, petalis equilonga; fila-

menta longe ultra medium in columnam centralem coadunata,

summo libera, complanata, suberecta; anthere subglobose,

conniventes, apicifixee, 2-lobze, lobis sulco laterali subextrorsum

et bivalvatim dehiscentibus.

Frutex scandens Africe australis, habitu fere Tinospore ; folia de/-

toideo-orbicularia, cordata, obtusa, e basi 5-nervia, nervis extus

ramosis, glabra, membranacea, longiuscule petiolata: racemus g

simplex, supra-axillaris, folio sublongior, glaber ; rachis gra-

cilis, remotiuscule bracteolata; pedicellus bracteola 2-plo lon-

gior, 1-florus ; flos parvus.

The only species will be described in the third volume of the

‘Contributions to Botany.’

Desmonema Caffra, nob.—In Africa australi: v. s. in herb.

Hook. 3, Natal (Gerard, 1976).

61. RHAPTONEMA.

The plant here described is a native of Madagascar, and the

type of a new genus now proposed. It is a shrub of low growth,

with straight, somewhat slender, tomentose branchlets, with

oblong leaves having alternate nerves which anastomose every-

where with one another at short intervals, making thus a large

areolar network of veims which gives them a very peculiar ap-

pearance ; they are subpilose above, sulcate along the midrib,

furnished beneath with a yellowish pubescence, the petiole being

somewhat short and pubescent. The g inflorescence is a raceme-

like panicle, which springs from the axils of the young upper

leaves, and is therefore almost terminal; the somewhat slender

rachis, which is covered with yellowish pubescence, is about half

the length of the ordinary leaves, having rather distant, very short

branches, with still shorter branchlets, which bear from one to

three flowers at their apex; the flower is small, consisting of

nine equal spathulately linear sepals, rounded at their apex, in

three alternate series; six petals in two series, equal, rather

more than half the length of the sepals, oblong, narrowing at

262 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez.

each extremity, plane and glabrous; three stamens somewhat

shorter than the petals, united for two-thirds of their length

into a central column, leaving their extremities free, somewhat

divaricated, broad, compressed, bearing two anther-cells at their

apex inside, which are dorsally attached, collateral, separated by

a narrow space, each opening introrsely by a longitudinal furrow.

The genus agrees with Desmonema in its three monadelphous

stamens, but differs in their anthers being quite introrse, in

having nine equal sepals, in its more compound raceme, in the

very distinct character of its leaves, and a completely dissimilar

habit. It differs also from other genera with three monadel-

phous stamens by the characters enumerated under Desmonema.

RuHAPTONEMA, nob.—Flores dioici. Mase. Sepala 9, in ordine

ternario alternatim disposita, spathulato-oblonga, eequalia,

membranacea, extus pilosa, intus glabra, eestivatione imbri-

cata, demum rotatim expansa. Petala 6, biseriata, oblonga,

subacuta, sepalis fere tertio parte breviora, plana, submem-

branacea, glabra, nervo medio fusco signata. Stamina 3, mo-

nadelpha, petalorum longitudine ; filamenta ultra medium in

columnam centralem coalita, sursum libera, complanata, paulo

divaricata; anthere omnino introrse, dorso adnate, 2-lobe,

lobis ovatis, paulo dissitis, parallelis, suleo longitudinali de-

hiscentibus.

Suffrutex Madagascariensis, subhumilis, ramosus ; ramuli sub-

tenues, tomentosi; folia oblonga, imo rotundata, apice obtusa,

penninervia, nervis inter se ubique anastomosantibus, hine

grosse reticulatis, supra subpilosa, subtus pubescentia, petiolo

tenui, subbrevi: paniculis g racemosis, in axillis supremis solt-

tariis, hinc fere terminalibus, ramis brevibus, alternatis, flores

1-3 brevissime pedicellatos gerentibus ; flos parvus.

The specific characters of this plant will be given in my

‘Contributions to Botany.’

Rhaptonema cancellata, nob.—In Madagascar : v.s.in herb. Hook.

loc. cit. (Gerard, 18).

62. SomPHOXYLON.

This genus was established by Dr. Eichler, in Martius’s ‘ Flora

Brasiliensis,’ upon a scandent plant from Dutch Guiana; but

its characters are not all fully known. One of its peculiari-

ties, which suggested its generic name, is that its wood is

extremely soft and spongiose. Its leaves are rather large,

6-9 inches long, 4—74 inches broad, on a petiole 4 inches long,

somewhat penninerved and glabrous. The ¢ inflorescence is a

widely spreading panicle, 2 feet long, 13 foot broad, with its

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacez. 263

branches horizontally patent and gradually decreasing upwards;

these are again and again divided, by branchlets standing at

right angles with each other, all elongated, the last series being

very slender, 1-14 inch long, furnished at close bracteolated

intervals with three or four fasciculated minute flowers on

very short pedicels. The habit of the plant is therefore very

peculiar. The flower consists of six concave ovate sepals in

two series, the outer being very briefly connate at base, the inner

equal, alternate, and free; six fleshy petals somewhat shorter,

obovate, in two series, the inner plane, the outer ones alternate,

with their lateral margins inflected ; three monadelphous sta-

mens, whose filaments are united for three-quarters of their

length into a central column, their apices free, each bearing

two separated anther-lobes, adnate by their side and back to the

filament, and bursting somewhat extrorsely by a longitu-

dinal furrow. It will be seen that Elissarrhena and Scia-

dotenia, both from Guiana, have leaves similar in size and shape

to those of Somphoxylon, and have also soft-wooded fistulose

branches, thus offerimg a general resemblance; but the very

expanded and peculiar inflorescence of the latter and the struc-

ture of its flower remove all further analogy. There is no evi-

dence in the character of the plant that can indicate the tribe

to which the genus belongs.

Sompuoxyton, Eichler ;—Flores dioici. Masc. Sepala 6, bi-

serialia, alterna, concava, glabra, quorum 3 exteriora ovato-

lanceolata, dimidio breviora, inter se basi breviter connata, 3

interiora late obovata. Petala 6, biseriata, sepalis dimidio

breviora, obovato-elliptica, carnosula, 3 interiora plana, 3 ex-

teriora alterna, lateribus inflexis. Stamina 3, monadelpha ;

filamenta crassiuscula, pro majore parte in columnam cen-

tralem coalita; anthere majuscule, ad dorsum et latera

filamenti adnate, 2-lobz, lobis subglobosis, dissitis, singulis

sulco longitudinali subextrorsum dehiscentibus.

Frutex Guiane Bataviane glaberrimus, ligno mollissimo sub-

spongioso ; folia majuscula, oblonga, imo leviter vel subcor data,

apice repente cuspidata, penninervia, concoloria, petiolata : pa-

nicula ¢ magna, late ramosa, bracteolata, ramis longis patentim

divaricatis, sursum decrescentibus, iterum bis patentim expansis,

ramulis tertiarus longiusculis, gracilibus, axillulis approximatis,

flores 3-4 brevissime pedicellatos gerentibus; flores minini,

glabri.

The characters of the only species will be given in the third

volume of my ‘ Contributions.’

Somphoxylon Wellschlegelii, Kichl. in Mart. FI. Bras. xxxvui.

264 Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermaceee.

p. 206, et quoad inflorescentiam in tab. 37. fig. 4.—In Su-

rinamo, ad Paramaribo.

63. DiscrpHANIA.

This is another genus of Dr. Eichler’s, described in Martius’s

‘Flora Brasiliensis,’ the type being a plant from the river

Amazonas, which bears a very strong resemblance to a Jateorhiza.

It is a climbing plant, strigosely pilose in every part, with some-

what ovate leaves, deeply cordate, leaving a broad sinus between

two rounded basal lobes, and divided at its summit into three

almost parallel lanceolate-oblong segments ; they are 5—7-nerved

at base, on a petiole three-fourths of the length of the blade.

It has one or two supra-axillary racemes with a slender rachis as

long as the petiole, very pilose, spicated, with many alternate,

approximated sessile flowers; each flower rises out of a small

pilose bract, is glabrous, depressed-globose or subtrigonous in

the bud; it has six equal sepals in two series, which are subequal,

elliptic, and membranaceous; six equal petals, much shorter

than the sepals, the three exterior twice the breadth of the three

inner ones, all extremely thick and fleshy, closely compacted

and depressed into a subtrigonoid form, leaving a hollow in the

centre for the stamens, which thus appear sunk within a fleshy

disk, nearly as in Anomospermum: in the centre are three free

stamens, with almost obsolete filaments, each having a broad

fleshy connective bearing two oval separated anther-cells dor-

sally adnate upon it, and each bursting introrsely by a longitu-

dinal furrow. The position of the genus is yet quite uncertain.

Dr. Eichler places it near Tinospora, probably on account of the

resemblance of its leaves to those of Jateorhiza: it differs from

it and all the genera of the Heteroclinee in having only three

stamens; in the monadelphous character of the stamens it re-

sembles Chasmanthera, Parabena, and Odontocarya, belonging

to that tribe, which have six united filaments; while in its

three monadelphous stamens it approaches Sarcopetalum, De-

tandra, Syrrhonema, Rhaptonema, Desmonema, and Somphoxylon.

DiscipHanta, Eichl.—Flores dioici. Mase. Sepala 6, biserialia,

subzequalia, elliptica, membranacea, glabra. Petala 6, multo

breviora, biseriata, 3 interiora paulo angustiora, omnia cras-

sissime carnosa, valde depressa, compacta, et discum trigo-

noideum mentientia. Stamina 8, centralia, libera; filamenta

brevissima, fere obsoleta, in connectivum latum carnosum

expansa; anthere 2-lobe, lobis segregatis, ovatis, dorso semi-

immersis, singulis rima longitudinali introrsum dehiscentibus.

Frutex Brasilia septentrionalis scandens, undique strigoso-pilosus ;

folia subovata, profunde cordata, apice inciso-trilobata, lobis

Mr. J. Miers on the Menispermacee. 265

lanceolato-oblongis, e basi 5-nervia, petiolo limbo breviore :

racemus ¢ aaillaris, valde hirsutus, petiolo longior ; flores in

axillulis bracteolatis approximatis, sessiles, pro ordine majus-

culi, glabri.

The only species will be described in the third volume of the

, Contributions to Botany.’

Disciphania lobata, Hichl. loc. cit. p. 169, tab. 36. fig. 1 ;—Coc-

culus lobatus, Mart. Obs. MSS. n. 2803.—In Brasilia,

prov. Amazonica.

63. QuINIO.

This genus was proposed by Schlechtendal in the ‘Linnea’ for

1853, for an Indian plant received from Hohenhacker, respecting

which much doubt has existed; it was referred by the former

botanist to the Menispermacee ; but, as its floral parts are penta-

merous, it has been rejected from the order by most authorities.

Notwithstanding this decision, I entertain no doubt that it is a

truly Menispermaceous plant; and, before explaining the reasons

for this opinion, I will recapitulate its characters as recorded by

Schlechtendal. It is entirely glabrous, its branches sulcately

striated and black; its leaves alternate, transversely suborbi-

cular, cordate at base, retuse and mucronated at the summit,

5-nerved, the nerves branching externally, glaucous beneath,

2 inches long, 24 inches broad, on a petiole 4 inches long, which

is swollen at base and articulated upon the stem, almost palately

geniculated with the limb at the junction of the nerves. It has

a very elongated racemose panicle, with a black rachis 10 or 12

inches long, with alternate spreading branches 24 inches long,

bearing at their summit several branchlets, often so much ap-

proximated as to appear almost umbelliform, each bearing from

one to three flowers obsoletely pedicellated :; the glabrous flower

consists of five imbricated, obovate, concave sepals, which are

maculated in interrupted longitudinal lines; it has five petals

somewhat shorter and narrower than them, spathulately rhom-

boid, with their lateral margins lobulated and inflexed; five

stamens opposite to and somewhat longer than them, and affixed

to their claws, bearing on their apex two minute effete anther-

cells, slightly divaricated at base ; in the centre are three distinct

ovaries, ovate, very gibbous, each containing a single ovule, and

surmounted by a short style with a very thick dilated stigma.

It will readily be seen that all these minutely detailed

characters agree precisely with those of Diploclisia inclyta,

except the number of sepals, petals, and stamens, which here

are five, instead of six. It may be inferred, therefore, that

Schlectendal, when drawing up his diagnosis, was misled by

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xx. 18

266 Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Pronophila.

examining a flower in which one of these organs, which are very

caducous, had fallen away; and this seems clearly proved by

the following circumstances. Schlectendal states that Hohen-

hacker’s plant, on which he founded his genus, came from

the province of Canara, on the south-western coast of the Indian

peninsula. Now in the Hookerian herbarium I found a plant

of Hohenhacker’s from Mangalore, in Canara, which I carefully

examined and ascertained that its flowers are hexamerous,

agreeing in every character with other specimens of Diploclisia

inclyta: it is also a @ plant, according with Schlectendal’s de-

scription not only in the size and form of the leaves, but in the

length of the inflorescence, the distance and length of its pri-

mary branches, its almost umbellate branchlets, the markings

of the sepals, and the shape of the petals and sterile stamens.

It appears to me that there is not the slightest doubt of their

absolute identity; and I therefore think that the genus should

be suppressed, and that Quinio cocculus, Schl., should stand as

a synonym of Dzploclisia inclyta.

XXXIIL. — Revision of the Group of Lepidopterous Insects

hitherto included in the Genus Pronophila of Westwood. By

A. G. Butter, F.Z.S.

I wave recently had occasion to rearrange the species of butter-

flies included in Pronophila ; and, being struck with their great

variety of form and different style of colouring, I have madea

careful examination of all their structural details: the result of

my investigations has been to reveal great differences of form in

the cell of the front wings, and of position with regard to the

emission of the subcostal and discoidal nerves; the palpi also

differ slightly in form, length, and position.

The type of the genus Pronophila is P. Thelebe of Westwood

and Hewitson. This group, represented by only five species,

one of which is as yet undescribed, may now stand as fol-

lows :—

Genus 1. Pronopuita, Westwood (part.), 1851.

Typical Species, Pronophila Thelebe.

Gen. Alis magnis, repandis: anticis subintegris, margine externo

paulum undato: posticis margine undulato.

Alis anticis cella obtuse bifureata, fureca inferiore subquadrata,

longiore ; furca superiore conica, venas secundam et tertiam subcos-

tales et primam discoidalem ferente; venis his omnibus ad origines

confertim approximantibus.

Caput palpis mediocribus preeporrectis.

Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Pronophila. 267

Species :—1l. P. Thelebe, Westwood & Hewitson ; 2. P. Orcus,

Latreille; 3. P. Porsenna, Hewits.; 4. Sp. nov. (Venezuela) ;

5. P. Cordillera, Westw.

These species all agree in structure, stature, form, and general

coloration: they are closely allied to the genus Corades.

1. Neuration of Pedaliodes. 2. Neuration of Cxeoschistus.

3. a5 Gyrocheilus.

Genus 2. PEDALIODES (7ndad@dns), gen. nov.

Typical species, Pedaliodes Poesia.

Gen. Alis mediocribus: anticis plus minusve irregularibus, apice

plerumque subfalcato : posticis margine sinuato.

Alis anticis cella ad apicem claviformi-undulata; venarum tertia

solum subcostali et prima discoidali ad origines approximantibus.

Caput palpis brevioribus angulariter undatis.

Species :—1. P. Poesia, Hewitson; 2. P. Proerna, Hewits. ;

3. P. Pisonia, Hewits.; 4. P.? dejecta, Bates; 5. P. Perperna,

Hewits.; 6. P. Phanias, Hewits.; 7. P. Paneis, Hewits.; 8. P.

Polusca, Hewits.; 9. P. Pausia, Hewits.; 10. P. Piletha, Hewits.;

ll. P. Prytanis, Hewits.; 12. P. phenissa, Hewits.; 18. P.

Physcoa, Hewits.; 14. P. porina, Hewits.; 15. P. Peucestas,

Hewits.; 16. P. Pallantis, Hewits.; 17. P. Pylas, Hewits.; 18. P.

Plotina, Hewits.; 19. P. Parepa, Hewits.; 20. P. Phila, Hewits. ;

21. P.phea, Hewits.; 22. P. peruda, Hewits. ; 23. P. Panyasis,

Hewits. ; 24. P. Napea, Bates.

Genus 3. GyROCHEILUs (yupos yetdXos), gen. Nov.

Typical species, Gyrocheilus Patrobas.

Gen. Alis mediocribus : anticis subpiriformibus, apice rotundato,

margine externo subintegro : posticis margine externo dentato.

Alis anticis cella breviore, alarum medium solum attingente ; venis

regularibus bene separatis, discocellularibus angulariter positis,

18*

268 Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Pronophila.

furcas duas formantibus; furca superiore breviore venas secundam et

tertiam subcostales primamque discoidalem ferente.

Caput oculis subnudis, palpis elongatis cirratis subrectis.

Species :—1. G. Patrobas, Hewitson.

Genus 4. Oxroscuistus (6féws oxyvoTos), gen. nov.

Typical Species, Oxeoschistus Puerta.

Gen. Alis majoribus: anticis elongatis, subfalcatis; costa sub-

recta, margine externo plus minusve undato et minime sinuato:

posticis margine externo bene undulato, rarius ad venam secundam

medianam subproducto.

Alis anticis cella elongata, ad apicem bifurcata ; furca inferiore

majore, angularibus tribus arcuata; furca superiore acuminata venas

secundam subcostalem et primam discoidalem ferente.

Caput oculis cirratis, palpis elongatis undatis porrectis.

Species :—1. O. Puerta, Hewitson; 2. O.? hilara, Bates ;

3. O. protogena, Hewits.; 4. O. pronax, Hewits.; 5. O. pro-

pylea, Hewits.; 6. O. Prochyta, Hewits. ; 7. O. irmina, Hewits.

& Westw.; 8. O.? tauropolis, Hewits. & Westw.

Genus 5. Lastopuita, Felder (1859).

Typical species, Lasiophila Zapatoza.

This genus has already been characterized: it is chiefly re-

markable for the long palpi and tailed hind wings of all the

species ; there are also differences in the character of the mark-

ings upon the wings.

Species:—l. ZL. Cirta, Felder; 2. L. Praneste, Hewits.* ;

3. L. Zapatoza, Westw.; 4. L. Circe, Feld.; 5. Sp. nov.

(Bolivia) ; 6. L. Prosymna, ? , Hewits.

Genus 6. Dapatma (part.), Hewitson (1858).

Typical species, Dedalma Dinias.

Section 2, Alis posticis costa integra, rarius caudatis.

Species :—1. D. Phoronea, Hewits.; 2. D. Phaselis, Hewits.

The Dedalma drymea of Hewitson may, very likely, come into

this section.

* Our specimens of Cirta and Preneste are all males.

Mr. J. Gould on two new Birds from Eastern Australia. 269

XXXIV.—On two new Birds from Eastern Australia.

By Joun Goutp, F.R.S.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

26 Charlotte Street, Bedford Square, W.C.

Sept. 13, 1867.

GENTLEMEN,

Will you do me the favour to insert in your next Number

the following descriptions of two birds from Eastern Australia,

which I believe to be new to science, and oblige

Yours very faithfully,

JoHNn GouLp.

Cuculus (Cacomantis) castaneiventris.

Chin, ear-coverts, crown, and upper surface deep purplish

grey ; all the under surface, including the under tail-coverts,

bright chestnut-red; wings brown, glossed with olive; upper

tail-coverts and tail deep greyish purple; all the feathers tipped

and the lateral ones toothed on their inner web with white, which

assumes on the two outer ones the appearance of interrupted

bars ; bill purplish black; legs and feet orange; nails black.

Total length 94 inches; bill Z, wing 44, tail 5, tarsi 3.

Hab. The Cape-York district of Queensland, Eastern Aus-

tralia.

Remark. This bird is much smaller than Cacomantis flabelli-

formis, and, moreover, has much shorter wings, but assimilates

very closely to that species in form and contour; it differs,

however, not only from that and every other Australian cuckoo,

but from all others I have yet seen from the islands to the

northward; it is closely allied to a species inhabiting the

Philhppine Islands which I take to be the Cacomantis sepulchralis

of Bonaparte, and more distantly to the Cacomantis bronzina of

G. R. Gray.

Ptilotis notata.

Crown and all the upper surface greenish olive ; lores, a line

beneath the eye, and the anterior portion of the ear-coverts

brownish black ; from the angle of the mouth a pale-yellow

stripe; posterior part of the ear-coverts pale yellow, assuming

the form of a nearly round spot; under surface pale greyish

olive, obscurely streaked with pale grey down the throat and

breast; bill black, with a thick fleshy yellow gape; legs

bluish.

Total length 64 inches; bill 1,4, wing 33, tail 2, tarsi 4.

Habitat. The Cape-York district of Queensland, Eastern

Australia.

270 = Dr. J.B. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squrrels

Remark. This species is allied, on the one hand, to the large

Ptilotis chrysotis, and, on the other, to the small P. gracilis ;

its most remarkable feature, when compared with those birds,

is its long and stout bill, which is both longer and stouter than

that of the former species; in all its other admeasurements it is

considerably smaller, while they much exceed those of the P.

gracilis. It is also closely allied to, but quite distinct from, the

P. similis of the Aru Islands. Gilbert collected this bird at

Brown’s Lagoon, on the 20th of December, 1844, when travel-

ling with Leichardt from Moreton Bay to Port Essington; and

I have lately received specimens through Mr. Jardine from the

Cape-York district of Queensland.

XXXV.—Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels (Sciuride) in the

Collection of the British Museum, describing one new Genus

and some new Species. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.B.S., V.P.ZS.,

&e.

Tue Squirrels form a very natural group. The species are very

difficult to distinguish, on account of the general similarity

that exists between them, and the variation that the specimens

of the same kind present. The species appear to have a com-

paratively limited range, and therefore are most easily divided

into geographical series.

The North-American species have been well studied and de-

scribed by Dr. Spencer Baird, in his work on the North-American

Mammalia.

The species of Asia and, especially, of South and Tropical

America are very imperfectly known.

I have been studying the Asiatic specimens in the British

Museum, many of which are the types of the species described

by Horsfield, Hodgson, Blyth, Kelaart, Sykes, Elliot, Solomon

Miller, and myself; and I have attempted to arrange them

into groups, so as to bring together the species most nearly

allied, and to enable the student easily to distinguish them. A

synopsis of the species of Africa and America will follow. In

these synopses I have confined myself to the study of specimens

in the Museum Collection, which have been most carefully com-

pared together.

The section Sciurine of Sciuride is separated from the

Arctomyine by the small size of the upper front molar, or by

its absence (for it is often early deciduous), and by the broad

rounded form of the inner edge of the grinders. It may be

thus divided :—

in the Collection of the British Museum. 271

I. Without any cheek-pouches. Fur soft, consisting of fusiform

hairs and a soft under-fur. Ears ovate. Arboreal. Tree-

Squirrels.

A. The limbs free, without any parachute.

1. The front edge of the cutting-teeth broad, rounded, closely longi-

tudinally grooved.

]. RuxrrHRosciurus. Lars large, long, pencilled; head

large, short ; tail broad, clavate.

ur. The front edge of the cutting-teeth narrow, compressed, smooth.

2. Sciurus. Ears ovate, pencilled or tufted externally ; nose

rounded ; tail longer than the body.

3. Macroxus. Ears ovate, covered with short adpressed

hairs; nose short, blunt; cheek-pouch none; tail longer than

the body.

4. Ruinoscrurvus. Ears ovate, covered with short adpressed

hairs; nose acute, produced; cheek-pouch none; tail longer

than the body.

B. The limbs enclosed in skin, forming a parachute ; tail short,

broad, pennate ; front edge of cutting-teeth smooth.

5. Scrurorrerus. Hars ovate, covered with short adpressed

hairs. Europe, Asia, and America.

Il. Without any cheek-pouches. Fur short, rigid, with flat chan-

nelled spines, without any under-fur. LHars rounded, scarcely

raised. ‘Terrestrial. Ground-Squirrels.

6. Xerus. Hars narrow, short, mostly raised above the head ;

face short, blunt ; cheek-pouches none ; fur short, rigid. Africa.

lil. With distinct cheek-pouches. Fur soft, consisting of fusiform

hairs and a soft under-fur. Ears ovate. Fossorial. Bur-

rowing Squirrels.

7. Tamias. Ears ovate, covered with short adpressed hairs ;

face short, rounded; cheek-pouches distinct. Kurope, North

Asia, and America.

I. Without any cheek-pouches. Fur soft, consisting of fusiform

hairs and a soft under-fur. Ears ovate. Arboreal. ‘'Tree-

Squirrels.

A. The limbs free, without any parachute.

1. The front edge of the cutting-teeth broad, rounded, closely longi-

tudinally grooved.

1, RHEITHROSCIURUS, Nov. gen.

Head large, compressed, short; ears large, with a pencil of

elongated hairs at the tip; cutting-teeth broad, rounded in front

272 = Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

and closely longitudinally grooved. The limbs free; feet large,

strong. Tail as long as the body and head, very thick, clavate,

covered with long flaccid hairs.

The grooving of the teeth is a peculiarity not observed in any

other Sciuridz.

Rheithrosciurus macrotis.

Sciurus macrotis, Gray, P. Z. S. 1856, p. 341, t. 46.

Brown, very minutely punctulated ; throat and beneath white;

lateral streaks broad, yellowish; front of thighs bay. Tail

blackish, whitish-washed.

Hab. Sarawak (Wallace). Type in B.M.

11. The front edge of the cutting-teeth narrow, compressed, smooth.

2. Sciurvs.

Head moderate, short, rounded; ears ovate, covered exter-

nally with elongated hairs forming a tuft or pencil; front edge

of the cutting-teeth narrow, compressed, smooth. Limbs free.

Tail as long as or longer than the body, covered with long hair

spreading on the sides.

I. The ears with a tuft of elonguted rigid hairs forming a trans-

verse pencil. No.1.

Il. The ears with rather rigid hairs forming a fringe and slight

pencil. Nos. 2-4.

Ill. The ears with a puff or tuft of soft hairs on the outer sur-

face. Nos. 5-9.

I. Ears with a tuft of long hairs forming a pencil ; tail broad, as long

as the body; medium-sized.

1. Seiurus calotus.

Mustela? calotus, or Chuakhal, Hodgson, Caleutta J. N. H. 1. 221, t. 9.

Mustela calotis, Hodgson.

Sciurus europeus, var. Gray, List. Hodgs. Coll. 23.

Fur very soft, black-grey, beneath white; tuft of ears and

tail darker.

Hab. North China, Thibet (Mr. Hodgson’s type), Siberia.

B.M.

This may be the same as the Grey Squirrel of Northern Eu-

rope; but it is smaller and the fur softer than any S. vulgaris I

have seen.

II. The ears covered externally with elongated hairs forming a fringe

and slight pencil ; medium-sized.

2. Sciurus leucomus, Sol. Miller, Verh. N. B. 10.

Dark grey, grizzled with black and white; beneath reddish

grey, white half collar on the back of the neck. Tail as long

in the Collection of the British Museum. 273

as the body, hairs with two or three broad black and yellow

rings ; end of the nose yellowish.

Hab. Celebes. B.M.

3. Sciurus leucocephalus.

Dark blackish grey, varied with white tips to the hairs;

head, ears, throat, underside of body, outer and inner sides of

limbs, and underside of the tail white or yellowish white. Tail

as long as the body and head, with black, largely white-tipped

hairs; ears fringed with elongate hairs.

Hab. Asia? B.M. (a male).

See also Sciurus erythreus, Pallas, not Swinhoe, which is a

Macroxus.

4. Sciurus historicus.

Sciurus syriacus, Verreaux, Cat., not Ehrenb.

Fur elongate, soft, full, blackish grey, closely and minutely

punctulated with white ; head, neck, and shoulders with a reddish

tint ; chin, throat, underside of the body, fore legs, and fore feet

rufous. Tail as long as the body, blackish, reddish-grey-varied,

with broad reddish edges and tip, hairs rufous, with a broad

subterminal black band and reddish tip ; ears with longish rigid

hairs, forming a fringe and slight pencil.

Hab. Syria (Verreaux). B.M.

Differs trom Sciurus syriacus of Ehrenberg and Tristram in

the pencilled ears, the darkness and length of the fur, the dark

colour of the shoulders, and the red being confined to the sides

of the belly and not extending up the sides of the body.

Ill. Ears with a puff of soft hairs on the outer surface.

* Tail elongate, longer than the body and head ; large-sized. Ratufa.

5. Sciurus indicus.

Sciurus maximus, Schreb. Saugeth. t. 217; Horsf. Zool. Java, t. = Great

Squirrel, Shaw.

Se. indicus, Erxl., 1777.

Se. bombayus, Bodd.=Bombay Squirrel, Penn., 1785.

Se. purpureus, Zimm.

Fur red brown; thighs, loins, rump, and tail black ; cheeks

and occipital band fulvous.

Hab. India, Malabar. B.M.

Var. Elphinstonii.

Sc. Elphinstonii, Sykes, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 103.

Hab. Dukhun (Sykes). B.M.

Varies greatly in the intensity of the colour.

274 Dr. J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

** Tail moderate, as long as the body and head; fur grizzled; middle-sized.-

6. Sciurus lokrioides.

Sciurus lokrioides, Hodgson, J. A. 8. B. 1836, p. 223; Horsf. P. Z. 8.

1839, p. 152.

eit eadey M‘Clelland, MS.; Gray, List Mamm. B. M. p. 143

Fur pale grey, closely and minutely punctulated with yellow ;

chin, throat and beneath pale grey; front of thighs lke back.

Tail coloured like back, upper end with indistinct annulations,

tip blackish ; hairs pale, with three black bands and a pale tip.

Hab. India, Assam (Gray): type in B.M. Darjeeling (Hodg-

son) : type in B.M.

The hair of the ears soft.

7. Sciurus modestus.

S. modestus, S. Miller, Verh. Mam. t. 14.

Blackish olive, very closely and minutely punctulated with

yellow; head and sides of neck rather more rufous; chin,

throat, belly, and inside of limbs pale reddish. ail black and

and yellow, punctulated, obscurely ringed; hairs yellow, with

broad black subterminal ring, and with a well-marked yellow tip.

Hab. Sumatra (Miiller’s type in B.M.).

*** Tail moderate, as long as the body and head ; face with a longitudinal

streak ; small-sized.

8. Sciurus Maceclellandu, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1839, p. 152.

Sciurus trilineatus, Gray, B.M. 1828 (not Waterhouse).

Sciurus Barleei, Blyth, J. A.S. B. xvi. 878, t. 36. f. 3 (1847).

Fur soft, yellowish grey, with a black vertebral streak ; orbit,

streak from end of nose, under the eye and ear, along the side

of the back, yellowish; a small tuft of soft hair behind the ear

white ; chin and underside of body pale reddish grey.

Hab. Bhotan: typein B.M. Nepal (Hodgson, n. 33): B.M.

Formosa (Swinhoe) : B.M.

9. Sciurus melanotis.

Sciurus melanotis, S. Miller, Verh. t. 15. f. 4, 5, 6.

S. nanus, Wallace, B.M.

S. soricinus, Waterh. Cat. Zool. Soc. Mus. Suppl. ed. 2. no. 448.

Fur pale grey, soft; chin, middle of throat, chest, belly, and

inside of limbs reddish; streak from nose, under the eye to

side of neck pale reddish, edged above with black; ears covered

with soft black hairs. Tail dark grey, washed with whitish ; hairs

yellow, with a broad subterminal band and white tip. A very

small species.

Hab. Borneo (Miiller’s type in B.M.). Sarawak (Wallace’s

type in B.M.) New Guinea: B.M.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 275

3. Macroxvs.

Head moderate, short; nose rounded; ears ovate, covered

with short adpressed hairs; front edge of the cutting-teeth

compressed, smooth. Limbs free. Tail as long as or longer

than the body and head, covered with long spreading hair.

M. F. Cavier, in the ‘ Dents de Mammiféres’ and in his paper

on the skulls of Sciuride in the Memoirs of the Museum, pro-

posed a genus under the name of Macrozxus for Sciurus vittatus

of Asia and Sciurus estuans of Tropical America. It is very

indistinctly characterized ; and Lesson has referred to the genus

sundry species having little relation to each other. As it is

desirable to separate the squirrels with simple ears, I have

adopted the name, and defined it as above. It is a natural

group, containing many Asiatic, African, and American species.

The Asiatic Macroxi may be thus divided :—

I. Large size. Tail much longer than the body and head.. Nos. 1-3.

II. Medium size. Back with black longitudinal stripes. No. 4.

III. Medium size. Sides of the body with a black longitudinal

streak. No.5.

IV. Medium size. Sides of the body with a pale or white longitu-

dinal streak. Nos. 6-13.

V. Medium size. Sides of the back with two pale streaks ; lower

broad, diffuse. No. 14.

VI. Small size. Back with three or five white or pale longitudinal

stripes. Nos. 15-18.

VIL. Medium or small size. Back grizzled, without either dorsal

or lateral stripes. Nos. 19-38.

I. Large size. Tail much longer than body and head. Rukaia.

1. Macroxvus macrourus.

Sciurus zeylanicus, Rai. Syn. Quad. 265.

S. macrourus, Forster in Pennant, Ind. Zool. t. 1.

S. macrurus, Fischer.

S. ceylonensis, Bodd.

2S, madagascariensis, Shaw, Fischer.

Fur harsh; black, more or less grizzled with white; face,

fore and hind legs, and spots on nape white; tail sometimes

apparently imperfectly annulated.

Hab. Ceylon. B.M.

Var. End of tail white. Sczwrus macrourus, Blyth, J.A.S.B.

xvi. t. 36. f. 2. Ceylon.

Var. larger? Sciwrus Tennantii, Kelaart, J. A. S. B. xvii. 600;

Blyth, J. A.S. B. xvi. 13 (1851).

Hab. Ceylon, in the mountains.

276 = Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

2. Macrozus bicolor.

Sciurus bicolor, Sparrm.; Horsf. Java, t.; Kuhl.

Se. javensis, Schreb. t. 216; Shaw.

Sc. macrouroides, Hodgson.

Se. giganteus, M‘Clelland.

2Sc. abessinicus, Gmelin.

Black ; belly yellow or white ; legs black, front of legs whitish.

Fur harsh.

Var. a. Pale; belly white.

Se. albiceps, Geoff., Desm.

Sc. Leschenaultu, Desm.

Sc. Desmarestii, Fischer.

Sc. hypoleucus, Horsf.

Sc. humeralis, Coulson.

2Sc. affinis, Raffles.

Sc. ochraceus, Temm.

Var. b. Fur white; belly pale yellow.

Sc. aureiventer, I. Geoff. Mag. Zool. 1832, t.5; Gervais, Mag. Zool. 1842,

t.4. f. 1-4.

Hab. India, Nepal (Hodgson): B.M. Java, Sumatra: B.M.

Malay peninsula: B.M.

Fur rather harsh ; hairs generally of one colour, of the nape

and tail sometimes pale-tipped. Black; chin, under surface and

inside of limbs yellow or white, varying from black to blackish

brown or grey brown and whitish grey. The legs and feet in

the black specimens are black, with more or less of white hairs

on their front. The head of one dark specimen is whitish.

3. Macroxus ephippium.

Sciurus ephippium, 8. Muller, Verh. t.

Fur rather short, soft, very variable in colour, from black

minutely grizzled to pale reddish brown ; the throat, cheeks, and

feet red or yellow.

Hab. Borneo: B.M. Celebes (Verreaux): B.M.

II. Medium size. Back with three black longitudinal streaks ; fur

grizzled olive and yellow ; chin and beneath yellowish ; tail

as long as the body. Laria.

4. Macroxus insignis.

Sciurus insignis, Horsf. Z. Java, t.; Gervais, Mag. Zool. 1842, t. 32. f. 5

(skull).

Sc. trivirgatus, Franks.

Sides reddish ; tail dark, whitish-washed ; hairs of three co-

lours—yellow, black, and grey at the tip.

Hab. Sumatra: B.M. Java.

III. Medium size. Lower part of the sides of the body with a black

in the Collection of the British Museum. 277

longitudinal stripe ; tail elongate, end black; fur grizzled ;

chin and beneath red.

5. Macroxus Phayrei.

Sciurus Phayret, Blyth, J. A. S. B. 1858, p. 476; Peters, P. Z. S. 1866,

p. 429.

Fur olive, minutely and closely punctulated with yellow ;

chin and beneath red or reddish yellow, the two colours separated

by a black lateral streak ; tail annulated, with a black tip ; feet

white or yellow.

Var. Shoulders and fore legs darker.

Hab. Malabar (Blyth, type in B.M.). India. Borneo.

IV. Medium size. Sides of the body with a pale or white longitu-

dinal stripe.

a. The lateral stripe broad, produced over the shoulders and thighs ;

fur black or blackish, minutely punctulated ; tail black, rather

longer than body and head ; chin, inside of limbs, and beneath dark

red bay. Callosciurus.

6. Macrozxus Rafflesii.

Sciurus Rafflesii, Vigors & Horsfield, Zool. Journ. t.

Se. Prevostiu, Lesson (tail discoloured), Schlegel, Nederl. Tijdsch. i. t. 1. f. 1.

Black ; beneath red bay ; cheeks, shoulders, sides, and fringe

of the thighs white.

Hab. Malay Islands. B.M., type.

Var. Bangkanus. Cheeks and shoulders iron-grey.

Se. Prevostu Bangkanus, Schlegel, l. c. t. 1. f. 2.

Hab. Malay Islands. B.M.

See also Se. borneonensis, Schlegel, /. c. t.1. f. 3. Like the

former, but the cheeks black, sides of the body and outside of

the thighs dark iron-grey. Borneo. Mus. Leyden.

7. Macrozus sarawakensis.

Black ; lower part of cheek, sides of neck, shoulders, fore and

hind legs bright rufous, like the under parts of the body ;

narrow lateral streak and outer side of thighs yellowish white ;

black on back narrow between the shoulders and haunches ;

tail black, slightly greyish-washed.

Hab. Sarawak (Wallace). B.M.

8. Macroxus rufogularis.

Sciurus rufogularis, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842, x. 363.

Lateral streak and thighs white; tail black; thioat, shoul-

ders, and feet red; face black.

Hab. China. Type in B.M.

278 Dr. J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

Var. redimitus.

Se. redimitus, Boon Mesch.?, Blyth.

Shoulders red; outer side of thighs iron-grey; tail white-

washed.

Hab. Borneo.

b. The pale lateral streak on side of body with a black streak beneath it ;

fur black, blackish, or olive; beneath red; tail as long as body and

head.

9. Macroxus rufoniger.

Sciurus rufoniger, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842.

Cheeks, shoulders, legs, feet, and tail black; beneath red;

lateral streak narrow, interrupted; thighs grey, mottled exter-

nally.

Hab. -——. BM.

10. Macrozus atrocapiilus.

Sciurus atrocapilla, Schlegel, l. c. t. 2. f. 1.

Se. Schwaneri, B.M.

Back iron-grey, minutely punctulated with white; crown of

head, lower lateral streak, feet, and tail black; throat, chest,

belly, and inner side of limbs red; upper lateral line white, well

marked.

Hab. Borneo. B.M.

See also Se. Schlegelii (with cheeks red), Sc. erythrogenys,

Schlegel, /.c. t. 2. f.3 (1863), not Waterhouse.

11. Macrozus vittatus.

Sciurus vittatus, Raffles.

Se. bivittatus, Desm., Horsf. Z. J. t.

Macroxus toupai, Lesson.

Se. pygerythrus, 1. Geoff. Voy. Belanger.

Se. flavimanus, I. Geoff. Mag. Zool. 1832.

Macrocus bivittatus, F. Cuv. D. M.

Fur olive, black-and-yellow-punctulated ; sides with a pale-

yellow and black lateral streak ; chest and beneath red.

Hab. Ceylon: B.M. Java: B.M. Cochin China: B.M.

Malacca: B.M.

12. Macroxus nigrovittatus.

Sciurus nigrovittatus, Horsf. Z. Java.

Se. a I. Geoff. Mag. Zool. 1832; Coulson, Mém. Neufch. i.

t. 5

Fur olive, minutely black-and-yellow-punctulated ; sides with

a linear pale and a broad black streak beneath; chin and

underside dark black grey ; sides of face and throat and front of

shoulders rufous; tail black, obscurely ringed, with a black tip.

Hab. Malacca: B.M. Java: B.M.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 279

ce. The pale lateral streak with a streak of the same colour as the back

beneath it; fur olive, punctulated ; tail elongate, as long as the

body and head ; hairs pale-ringed. Baginia.

13. Macroxus platan.

Sciurus platani, Lingb., Desm., Horsf. Z. J. t.

Se. notatus, Bodd.

Se. bilineatus, Geoff.

Macrozus bivittatus, Lesson.

Hab. India? Java, Sumatra. B.M.

V. Medium size. Back with two white or pale longitudinal streaks

on each side; fur grizzled olive and yellow ; tail as long as

the body, hair yellow, with a black sublinear ring.

14. Macroxus Berdmorii.

Sciurus Berdmorit, Blyth, J. A. 8S. B. 1832, p. 334.

Se. Mouhoti, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1861, p. 137.

Fur grizzled ; sides blackish ; the lower streak broad, indis-

tinctly marked, upper one narrow, distinct ; chin and underside

of body white; tail blackish, base of hairs yellow. The first

upper grinder nearly as large as the second one.

Hab. Cambogia (Mouhot) : B.M. Tenasserim (Blyth): B.M.

VI. Medium or small size. Back with three (or five) pale longitu-

dinal streaks ; fur grizcled, punctulated ; tail as long as the

body. Palmista.

Palmiste, F. Cuv. Mém. Mus. x. 121, t. 10. f. 2.

Farunculus, Lesson, Ill. Zool.

Tamias, sp., Gervais, Mag. Zool. 1842.

15. Macrozus palmarum.

Sciurus palmarum, Horsf. Z. J.; Waterh. P. Z. S. 1834, p. 118.

Palmiste, Buff. H. N. x. t. 26.

Sides and beneath whitish grey ; back blackish olive, minutely

punctulated, with three elongated, distinct, pale longitudinal

streaks, the side ones wider in the centre, central one linear

elongate.

Hab. India: B.M. Ceylon (Kelaart) : B.M.

Var. a. Kelaartii. Fur uniform, shining ; the stripe and under-

surface in the adult male are reddish white.

‘““§, Kelaartii, Layard, Ceylon” (Kelaart, in B.M.).

16. Macroxus penicillatus.

Sciurus penicillatus, Leach, Zool. Mise. vi. t. 1.

Se. tristriatus, Waterh. P.Z.S.; Mag. N. H. 1837, p. 496; 1839, p. 114.

Se. trilineatus, Kelaart, P. Z. 8. 1850, p. 157.

Se. palmarum, Elliot, Madras Journ. 1839, p. 218.

Se. Brodiei, Layard, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1852, ix. 335, “ Blyth,”

Kelaart, B.M.

Back and sides dark olive, minutely punctulated ; chin, chest,

280 Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

and belly white; head reddish-washed ; middle of the back

often black, with three narrow linear pale stripes ; lateral stripes

widest, linear. Larger and darker, with narrower stripes than

the former.

Hab. Madras (Leach & Elliot, type in B.M.). India, Ceylon

(Lord Walden, Kelaart).

17. Macrocus Layardu.

Sciurus Layardii, Kelaart, in B.M.

Fur blackish, very minutely punctulated with white; middle

of the back black, with three longitudinal linear streaks; the

vertebral one the widest, orange-red ; the side ones very narrow,

linear, white; chin, chest, and underside red; tail black, ob-

scurely annulated with white, and with a black tip.

Hab. Ceylon (Lord Walden). B.M.

Sent from Ceylon as Se. Barleei; but the lateral streak is

not continued under the eyes.

18. Macroxus sublineatus.

Sciurus sublineatus, Waterh. P.Z.S. 1838, p. 19.

Se. Delessertii, Gervais, Mag. Zool. 1842, t. i. f. 1-3 (t. 2. f. 1, 4, skull).

Dark olive, very minutely punctulated ; back blackish, with

three indistinct narrow, linear, white streaks; chin and beneath

reddish grey ; tail blackish, slightly yellow-varied.

Hab. India, Nilgherries. Ceylon (Lord Walden). Water-

house and Delessert’s type in B.M.

VII. Medium size or small. Back grizzled, without any dorsal or

lateral longitudinal stripes.

a. Chest and belly grey or white. Nos. 19-24.

b. Chest grey ; belly red. Nos. 25, 26.

e. Chest and belly dark red brown.

Tail black (rarely red). Nos. 27-30.

Tail indistinctly ringed, with black tip. No. 31.

Tail dark grizzled, end white. No. 32.

d. Chest and belly reddish yellow.

Tail not annulated, end black. No. 33.

Tail blackish, punctulated, whitish-washed. No. 34.

Tail reddish, short. No. 35.

e. Fur above and below red brown. Nos. 36, 37.

f. Fur above and below white. No. 38.

a. Chest and belly grey or white; fur grey, punctulated ; tail as

long as body and head, annulated. Middle size or small.

19. Macroaxus caniceps.

Se. caniceps, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1842, p. 212.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 281

Sc. chrysonotus, Blyth, J. A. S. B. 1847, p. 873, 1855, p. 474; Peters,

P. Z. 8. 1866, p. 429.

Fur olive-grey, very minutely punctulated; back varied with

red; inner side of limbs, nose, throat, and beneath pale, nearly

uniform whitish grey ; feet pale grey; tail as long as the body

and head, grey-and-black varied, with a black tip; hairs of tail

yellowish, with three equal black bands. Middle size.

Hab. Bhotan: B.M. India (Beavan): B.M.

Var. 1. Back and nape yellow brown; loins grey. (Sc. cani-

ceps, Gray; type, S. chrysonotus, Blyth, J. A. 8S. B. t. 37. f. 2.)

Var. 2. Back and loins red brown. India (Beavan). B.M.

Var. 3. Fur grey, grizzled with a few roundish, irregularly

placed reddish spots on the middle of the back. India (Bevan).

B.M.

20. Macrozxus similis.

Sciurus lokrioides (part.), Hodgson’s Collection.

Fur blackish grey, very closely and minutely punctulated ;

outer side of thighs reddish-washed ; chin, chest, belly, and inner

side of limbs greyish white; the front edge of the thighs pale

rufous; tail blackish, indistinctly black-ringed, end black ; hairs

yellow, with two black rings and a long black tip.

Hab. Nepal (Hodgson). B.M.

Very like Sciurus lokrioides, but darker, and the front of the

thighs pale rufous, their outer side washed with rufous, and the

hair on the hinder part of the belly sometimes also has a rufous

tinge, and the ears are covered with short hairs.

21. Macrozxus philippinensis.

Sciurus philippinensis, Waterhouse, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1839, p. 117.

Fur blackish brown, minutely punctulated with yellow; hair

elongate; chin, chest, underside of body, and inner side of limbs

white; tail blackish, slightly yellow-varied, end black; hairs

with two black and four yellow bands.

Hab. Philippine Islands (Cuming ; Waterhouse, type, from

spirit, bad state). B.M.

22. Macroxus tenuis.

Sciurus tenuis, Horsf. Zool. Java, t.

Fur olive, very minutely black-and-yellow punctulated ; chin,

inner side of legs, and beneath white or greyish; tail black, yellow-

varied, black at the tip; hairs of tail yellow, with an indistinct

subbasal and very broad subapical black band. Small size.

Hab. Java (Horsfield) : B.M., type. Sarawak (Wallace): B.M.

Singapore: B.M.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 19

282 Dr. J.E. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

23. Macroxus chinensis.

Sciurus chinensis, Gray, L. M. B. M. 144.

Fur dark olive, minutely punctulated with yellow; chin,

throat, belly, and inner side of limbs greyish white ; tail elongate,

black, with long white tips to the hairs; tip blackish; hairs

pale brown at the lower half, with a broad black band and a

grey tip.

Hab. China (John Reeves). B.M., type.

Var. Head and shoulders paler yellow; tail dull brown, with

grey tips to the hairs. China. B.M.

See also Sciurus eailis, S. Miiller, Verh. t. 15. f. 4, 5, 6.

Sumatra, Borneo.

24. Macroxus inornatus.

Fur olive-grey, very closely and minutely punctulated with

reddish yellow; throat, inner side of limbs, and beneath pale

bluish grey, washed with whitish; feet like back; tail longer

than the body and head, coloured like the back, with elongated

white-tipped black hairs at the tip; hairs of the tail yellow, with

three black bands. Middle size.

Hab. Loo Mountains (Mouhot). B.M.

b. Chest grey, punctulated like the back ; belly reddish yellow ;

tail indistinctly white-ringed.

25. Macroxus griseopectus.

Sciurus griseopectus, Blyth, J. A. S. B. xxvi. 873, t. 36.

Sc. Fortuni, Parzudaki, MS.

Fur dark olive grey, closely and minutely yellow-punctulated ;

throat and chest grey, like back, but paler; belly, inner side of

limbs, and front of thighs pale red brown; face black ; tail hke

back, obscurely white-ringed, end black ; hairs pale, with black

rings and a grey tip.

Hab. China (Cuming). Type in B.M.

26. Macroxus leucopus.

Fur olive grey, minutely punctulated with yellow ; lower side

of neck like back ; hinder part of throat and belly, front of thighs

and hind legs reddish grey; feet white; tail elongate, coloured

like the back, grey, and black-ringed at the tip; hairs grey,

with several subequal broad black rings. Middle size.

Hab. Cambogia (Mouhot). B.M., male adult.

See also Sciurus persicus, Gmelin, Reise, i. 879, t. 45. Se.

vulgaris persicus, Erxl., Gilan, in Persia. ? Sc. anomalus, Giil-

denst. in Schreb. Saugeth. 781, t.215c. Sc. caucasicus, Schm.

Sc. erythreus, Penn., Georgia (not Kuhl). Hab. Caucasus.

tn the Collection of the British Museum. 283

c. Chest and belly dark red brown. Middle-size Squirrels.

+ Tail black, rarely red.

27. Macrozxus Pluto.

Fur, feet, and tail deep black; chest, belly, and a narrow

well-defined line down the inner side of the legs bright red bay.

Hab. Borneo, Sarawak. B.M.

See S. erythromelas, Schlegel, J. c. t. 2. f. 2, but with the

edges of the fore legs and the hind feet red; and S. piceus,

Peters, P. Z.S. 1866, p. 429.

28. Macroxus rufogaster.

Sciurus rufogaster, Gray, Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842.

Fur minutely punctulated ; back yellow-washed ; head, shoul-

ders, and thighs iron-grey (grizzled).

Hab. Malacca. B.M., type.

Var. Borneensis.

S. hippuris, I. Geoff. Mag. Zool. t.

Nape, back, rump, and hinder edge of fore legs bright red

chestnut, like underside.

Hab. Borneo (Blyth). B.M.

29. Macroxus punctatissimus.

Fur soft, black, very minutely and closely punctulated with

grey; tail and feet black; throat, chest, belly, and inner side of

limbs bright red chestnut.

Hab. India. B.M.

30. Macroxus erythrogaster.

Sciurus erythrogaster, Blyth, J. A. S. B. xii. 972, xxiv. 473.

Se. erythreus, Gray, List M. B. M.; Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1862, p. 357 (not

Pallas).

Fur dark olive, minutely punctulated with yellow; back yel-

lowish-washed ; throat, chest, belly, and inner side of limbs red

chestnut ; tail like back; hairs indistinctly pale-ringed.

Hab. Bhotan. B.M., type.

Var. 1. Tail yellow-washed. Formosa (Swinhoe, type). B.M.

Var. 2. Tail, hinder half, red bay, like belly. Assam. B.M.

See also Sciurus rubriventer, Muller, Verh. 10.

Tt Tail dark, indistinctly white-ringed ; end blackish.

31. Macroxus castaneoventris.

Sciurus castaneoventris, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842.

Fur dark olive grey, minutely punctulated; chest, throat,

19*

984 Dr. J.B. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels

and belly red-brown ; tail broad, coloured like back, indistinctly

white-ringed, end black; hairs black, with one or two narrow

yellow basal rings and grey tips.

Hab. China (Reeves). B.M.

ttt Tail dark-grizzled ; end white.

82. Macrozxus atrodorsalis.

Sciurus atrodorsalis, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H.1842, p. 213; Blyth, J. A.

S. B. t. 37. £.2; Peters, P.Z. S. 1866, p. 428.

Se. hyperythrus, Blyth.

Fur grey, minutely punctulated; back with a large black

patch ; tail coloured like back at the base, hinder half whitish,

with black rings; hairs black, with long grey tips ; face reddish ;

throat, chest, belly, and inner side of limbs dark chestnut-red.

Var. Throat more or less grey. India, Benares. B.M.

Hab. India (Blyth). Type in B.M.

d. Chest and belly reddish yellow.

* Tail elongate, as long as the body and head, with numerous narrow

black rings and a black tip.

33. Macroxus Blanfordi.

Sciurus Blanfordii, Blyth, J. A. S. B. 1862, p. 333.

Fur olive grey, punctulated with black and grey ; throat, inner

side of limbs, and feet rufous; tail with numerous narrow black

rings and a well-marked black tip.

Hab. India, Pegu and Upper Burmah (Blanford, Blyth).

Types in B.M.

** Tail as long as the body, varied, whitish-washed ; end blackish.

34. Macrozus lokriah.

Sciurus lokriah, Hodgson, J. A. 8. B. 1836, p. 223; Horsf. P. Z.S. 1841.

Sc. subflaviventer, M‘Clelland, MS.; Gray, List Mam. B. M. 144 (1842).

Sc. anomalus, Kuhl, Beitr. 69? not Giildenst.

Fur dark olive, grizzled, closely and minutely yellow-punctu-

lated ; chin, throat, middle of chest, and abdomen pale red

yellow ; tail black, washed with whitish, and with a bluish tip ;

hairs yellow, with an evident lower and a broader subapical

band and a grey tip; the underside of the tail with an orange

central streak from the orange base of the hairs, and a couple of

bluish marginal bands when expanded.

The extent of the red beneath varies; in some it occupies

the whole under surface, in others only the centre of the chest

and belly.

Hab. India, Nepal (Hodgson). Type m B.M.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 285:

See Sciurus pygerythrus, 1. Geoff. Mag. Zool. 1832, with

underside of body and vent and the base of the tail red. It

may be the same as the former, if the second account of the

outer side of the limbs is a slip of the pen for the znner side.

*** Tail short, only as long as the body, reddish.

35. Macrowus syriacus.

Sciurus syriacus, Ehrenb. & Hemp. S. P. t. 8; Tristram, P. Z. S.

Se. russata, Wagner, fide Verreaux : Schreb. S. iii. 155.

Fur pale iron-grey (black, very closely varied with white) ;

sides of the head and neck, the shoulders, fore legs, sides of the

body, front edge of the thighs, and the fore feet red; chin,

throat, chest, belly, and inner side of the limhs pale reddish yellow;

tail rufous, shghtly grey-varied, with a greyish edge; hairs. ru-

fous, with a more or less wide subterminal black band, and grey

tips.

Hab. Syria, Lebanon, under the cedars (Tristram): B.M.

Brussa (Verreaux): B.M.

Var. pallescens. Paler iron-grey; sides of head, shoulders,

fore legs, and the fore feet. pale yellowish ; chin and underside

of body and inner side of limbs white.

Sciurus syriacus, Verreaux.

Hab. Asiatic Turkey (“Asie Turque,” Verreaux).

This animal, according to Ehrenberg and Hemprich, changes

its colour according to the season, being ashy in summer and

foxy in winter. The animal, by the shortness of its tail and in

general appearance, much resembles a Spermophilus; but the

skull has the broad teeth and the high erect zygomatic arch of

the squirrel. The skull is also without the first upper grinder.

They are tree-squirrels, and abundant in the forests of Brussa

and on the cedars of Lebanon.

e. Fur uniform red brown, or red punctulated with black and white.

Tail elongate, longer than the body and head, rather slender,

red. Middle size. Erythrosciurus.

36. Macroxus ferrugineus.

Sciurus ferrugineus, F, Cuv. Mam. Lith.; Blyth, 1847, 1862.

Se. splendidus, Gray, P. Z. S. 1861, p. 137.

Se. ruberrimus, Blyth, M. Z. Soe.

Fur uniform, red bay, varying from dark chestnut to yellowish,

sometimes paler on the sides and beneath.

Hab, Cambogia (Mouhot): B.M. Arakan and Pegu (Blyth).

286 Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of the Asiatic Squirrels.

Var. Keraudrenit. Very dark bay; tail-end white.

Sc. Keraudreni, Reyn., Lesson, Cent. Zool. t. 3.

Sc. Kerodreni, Schinz.

37. Macroxus siamensis.

Sciurus siamensis, Gray, P. Z. S. 1859, p. 478; 1861, p. 137 (Blyth).

Small. Fur reddish bay, minutely punctulated with black ;

chest, belly, and beneath uniform red bay; tail elongated,

longer than the body and head, slender, tapering, grizzled black

and orange, apical half bright red bay.

Hab. Siam (Mouhot). B.M., type.

This may be an undeveloped state of the former.

f, Fur white, uniform above and below ; tail slender, elongate.

38. Macroxus Finlaysoni.

Sciurus Finlaysonii, Horsf. Zool. Java, t.

Fair Squirrell, Pennant, Syn. 285.

Fur white, whiskers and a few hairs on the tail black.

Hab. Sichung Island (Horsfield): type in B.M. Guzerat

(Penn).

4, Rurnoscrurvs, Gray, List Mamm. B. M. 195 (18438).

Head moderately elongate; nose produced, acute. Lars

ovate, covered with short close-pressed hairs. Cutting-teeth

compressed, smooth in front. Cheek-pouches none. Limbs

free. Tail as long as the body, pennate; hair rather long, ex-

panded. Skull, jaws much produced, narrow, compressed,

lower cutting-teeth very long.

Rhinosciurus tupaoides, Gray, l. c. 195.

Sciurus tupaoides, Blyth, J. A.S. B. 1855, xxiv. 477.

Dark olive-grey, minutely punctulated ; tail blackish, punc-

tulated.

Hab. Singapore. Type in B.M.

See also Rh. laticaudatus (Sciurus laticaudatus, S. Miller,

Varh, +. 15. £19 8). Borneo.

Prof. F. M‘Coy on anew Genus of Phalanger. 287

XXXVI—On a new Genus of Phalanger. By Freperick

M‘Coy, Professor of Natural Science in the Melbourne Uni-

versity, and Director of the National Museum of Victoria.

[Plate VI. |

GyMNOBELIDEUS (M‘Coy), nov. gen.

Teeth and general form of Belideus, but destitute of the lateral

cloak-like parachute or flank-membrane, and having on the fore

feet the inner finger or thumb shortest, the second longer, the

third longer than the second, the fourth longest, the fifth or

outer toe shorter than the third, but longer than the second.

On the hind feet the inner toe or thumb is succeeded by two of

nearly equal size, more slender and shorter than the others, and

united together as far as the base of the last jot. The thumbs

of the hind feet are without nails, and the claws of all the other

toes are small, and exceeded in length by the prominent wrinkled

pads on the underside. The ears are large, semielliptical, and

nearly naked towards the tips. Dental formula :—incisors ¢,

canines * premolars = molars : = 40.

In general appearance this curious animal is intermediate be-

tween Belideus and Phascogale ; but its nearest affinity is with the

former, from which the absence of the flank-membrane and the

different form of the feet distinguish it. There is only one species

known, which occurs in the scrub on the banks of the Bass River,

in Victoria. I name it after the skilful taxidermist of our Public

Museum, in which specimens of both sexes are preserved.

Gymnobelideus Leadbeateri (M‘Coy).

Upper surface brownish grey, with a blackish dusky streak

from the top of the head along the back to the sacrum; there

is a dark patch under the base of the ear, and a fainter one be-

fore and behind the eye. Under surface dull yellowish ; tail

rather lighter than the back, and lightest at the tip. Head lke

that of Belideus breviceps, but with a slightly sharper snout.

The tail has the fur no longer on the basal half than on the

back, the apical third of the length being gradually more bushy,

from the greater length of the hair. Ears brown. The fur of

the body is soft and dense, the hairs grey at the base, and

blackish and tipped with brownish white at the end; the fur of

the tail is brownish throughout. Teeth: anterior incisor above

more than twice the length of the others, and rather broader

near the edge than at the base; second incisor shorter than

the third, which is triangular; space between third incisor and

canine equal to length of second incisor ; canine conical, shorter

than the first, but longer than the third incisor ; space between

988 Dr. A. Giinther on Additions to the British Fauna.

canine and next premolar one-third the width of the canine ;

second premolar half the length of the canine, first a little

longer, both triangular and single-rooted ; third premolar as

long as the canine, or one-third longer than the next molar,

double-rooted, and triangular. First three molars quadrate,

with two blunt tubercles on outer and two on inner edge;

fourth or last molar smallest, triangular, with one tubercle be-

hind and two in front. The molars and second and third pre-

molars are in continuous contact. Lower jaw: all the teeth in

continuous series without interval; incisors long, nearly hori-

zontal, sharp-pointed ; first three premolars small, short, and

obtuse, the antero-posterior extent of the first greatest, third

least, but all of one height ; fourth premolar twice the height of

the others, triangular, with a slight lobe at back of base ; first

molar with anterior half forming a conical lobe nearly twice the

height of the last premolar and of the rest of the molars; pos-

terior half bitubercular, and only as high as the others, which

are all quadritubercular, except the small hind one, which is

tritubercular.

inches. _ lines.

Wen ob Ot PAC Wand p cretaieie, ey ese 1 8

» from snout to base of tail .. 5

Pa OLAtAl sy cot eucace ia cele yee 6 i

ep OCA ia oe atte nea een ee 0 9

Se POt Ore tOOba ta eerie re ee 0 9

Rene OL NING 100s 4 cts cca: 25 ] Of

BP OLMIRSALSDONES cestoe tui os 0 63

eo, Olarortali bones: sy. seek ele 0 7

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.

Fig. 1 represents the male, half the natural size.

Figs. 2, Fore foot, and 3, hind foot, twice the natural size.

Figs. 4, Upper, and 5, lower jaw, three times the natural size.

XXX VII.— Additions to the British Fauna.

By Dr. ALBERT GunTHER, F.R.S.

[Plate V.]

ALTHOUGH we are very well acquainted with the marine fishes

inhabiting the shores of Great Britain and Ireland, our know-

ledge of the pelagic and deep-sea forms is extremely scanty.

Of the Dealfish (Trachypterus arcticus), a fish by no means un-

common in the northern and eastern seas of Scotland, I have

never seen a British example in a good state of preservation.

Now and then, after the gales of the vernal equinox, a mutilated

specimen of the Ribbonfish (Regalecus Banksit) is drifted ashore,

Dr. A. Giinther on Additions to the British Fauna. 289

rarely to fall into the hands of a naturalist, generally to be cut

up as bait for the lobster-pot. The British species of Lepto-

cephalus is not better known than the allied forms from the

Mediterranean and tropical seas. Others, like Centrolophus, are

known from single examples only. Their development, as well

as that of many of the more common forms which spawn in the

open or deep sea, is perfectly unknown.

In seeking information concerning this part of the British

fauna, we are not hunting after a shadow: there is evidence

enough to show that the depths of the British seas are inhabited

by a fish-fauna very different from that of the coasts, and that

this fauna is composed of two elements—first, of those which

may be regarded as indigenous, and, secondly, of such forms as

are frequently, perhaps constantly, carried by currents from

more southern parts of the Atlantic northwards, even to the

coasts of Norway (Antennarius, Batrachus, Beryx)—not to men-

tion those fishes which by their strong power of swimming are

enabled to reach our shores in their migrations, as Ausonia.

The causes of our incomplete knowledge of these fishes are

evident : zoologists were either not aware of the existence of

such a fauna, or satisfied with the stray specimens thrown in

their way by accident; while the difficulties surrounding the

examination of the deep-sea fishes are so great as to render all

progress in attaining to a knowledge of them extremely slow.

Still it may be hoped that, after the attention of naturalists has

been directed to the subject, no opportunity will be lost of

advancing it.

Such an opportunity occurred to Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, who,

during his exploration of the marine invertebrate fauna of the

Hebrides, preserved the specimens of fishes which were brought

up in the dredge from a depth of from 80 to 90 fathoms. Small

as the number of specimens is, the result of their examination

proved to be most interesting and satisfactory, inasmuch as they

belong to four species new to the British fauna, two being new

to science, viz. Ammodytes siculus (Swains.), Motella macroph-

thalma (sp. n.), Callionymus maculatus (Bonap.), and Gobius

Jeffreysu (sp.n.). On former occasions I have pointed out that

the geographical range of deep-sea fishes appears to be extended

in proportion to the vertical depth inhabited by them, and that

they are either distinguished by an increased size of the eye to

collect as many rays of light as possible, or by a rudimentary

condition of that organ, as is the case in fishes inhabiting caves.

This is in some measure verified by the species collected by Mr.

Jeffreys, which, however, it must be remembered, inhabit a

much less depth than Regalecus, Plagyodus, &e. Two of them

(Callionymus maculatus and Ammodytes siculus) were previously

known as occurring in the Mediterranean; and the eyes of three

290 Dr. A. Giinther on Additions to the British Fauna.

of them are conspicuously larger than in their congeners (4Am-

modytes lancea, Callionymus lyra, and Motella tricirrata).

1, Ammodytes siculus (Swains.).

(Smooth Sand-Launce.)

This species was hitherto known from Sicily only. For de-

scription see Ginth. Fish. iv. p. 386.

2. Motella macrophthalma. PI. V. fig. B.

(Large-eyed Rockling.)

This species has three barbels, one at each of the anterior

nostrils and one at the chin. It is distinguished from specimens

of the same size of the other three-bearded species by its large

eye, the diameter of which, in the specimen obtained, is as long

as the snout, one-fourth of the length of the head, and much

longer than the width of the interorbital space. The teeth of the

mandible are very unequal in size, some being canine-like. The

anterior ray of the rudimentary first dorsal fin is about as long as

the eye. D.55. A. 55. Back with narrow brownish cross bars.

Three inches long.

The figure represents the specimen of the natural size. For

the sake of comparison the figure of the head of Motella tri-

cirrata (B') has been added.

3. Callionymus maculatus, Bonap. PI. V. fig. A.

(The Southern Dragonet.)

This species is common in the Mediterranean ; but it has been

also observed on the coast of Norway. It is easily recognized by

the shortness of the snout relatively to the diameter of the eye.

4. Gobius Jeffreysii. Pl. V. fig. C.

D.:65] 10: A..9: | Tedats80:

Body as deep as broad anteriorly, its greatest depth being

one-half of the length of the head, which is two-sevenths of the

total (without caudal). Head depressed, broader than high, its

greatest width being two-thirds of its length. Snout of mode-

rate extent, though shorter than the eye ; lower jaw projecting

beyond the upper. Eyes very close together, large, their dia-

meter being two-sevenths of the length of the head. Dorsal

fins higher than the body; the second dorsal spine more or less

prolonged. The pectoral and ventral fins reach equally far

backwards, to the vent. A series of five rounded blackish spots

along the lateral line, the last being on the root of the caudal

fin. Dorsal fins with series of black spots; outer half of the

anal blackish. A blackish bar below the eye.

Three specimens, two inches long.

Dr. J. L. Leconte on the Rhynchophorous Coleoptera. 291

The only British species with which this Goby might be con-

founded, and to which it is evidently allied, is Gobius rhodo-

pterus (Gthr.) ; however, this latter species is said to have the

interorbital space broader, its width being equal to one-half of

the diameter of the eye (Cuv. & Val. xii. p. 50); and M‘Coy,

who examined two Irish examples, describes the snout as “ very

short, tumid, and convex,” which character cannot be applied

to G Jeffreysii.

XXXVIII.—On the Systematic Value of Rhynchophorous Coleo-

ptera. By Joun L. Lecontz, M.D.*

In the empirical arrangement of the families of Coleoptera,

which has resulted from the adoption of the tarsal system of

division, the families contained in the great natural group of

Heteromera are followed by the Curculionide and Scolytide,

which, more or less subdivided into smaller families, have been

supposed to establish a linear relation between the rostrated

Heteromera (Salpingus, Rhinosimus, &c.) and the Cerambycide

and Chrysomelide, the great types of the Pseudotetramera or

Subpentamera of various authors.

It is the object of the present investigation to determine the

limits and the relations of the first-mentioned of these types,

the Rhynchophora.

The inferiority of this type is manifested not only in the

larval condition by the limited number or absence of visual

lenses, the want of locomotive appendages, the feeble develop-

ment or entire want of antenne, and the unchitinized epidermis,

but also by the combination in the imago of characters belong-

ing to a perfectly developed organism with others pertaining to

an inferior grade in the scale of Coleoptera.

Thus, for instance, while we perceive, in the other series of

beetles, that the lower forms retain certain larval characters (as

evidenced by the extension of the coxee, the imperfection of the

anterior coxal cavities, the softness of the integuments, and the

want of centralization in the abdomen), all such degradational

characters are absent in the Rhynchophora.

Other characters representing low grades in their respective

series do not appear in the Rhynchophora—such as vegetative

growth of the organs of sense, indicated by pectinate or flabel-

late antennze, or excessive length of palpi.

On the contrary, we find in the Rhynchophora that the in-

* From ‘Silliman’s Journal’ for July 1867, being an abstract of a

memoir read before the National Academy of Sciences at Washington,

Jan. 24, 1867.

292 Dr. J. L. Leconte on the Systematic Value

teguments are perfectly chitinized, the elytra never abbreviated

or wanting ; the anterior coxe are always completely enclosed ;

the ventral segments, usually five, never exceed six in number.

The plan of degradation, i in passing from the higher to the

lower forms, is by “the extension of the longitudinal axis of the

body, in its anterior half; this is usually most strongly mani-

fested in the head, and exhibited not only by the length of the

beak, but by the conformation of the lower floor of the mouth.

Commencing with those Curculionide (Adelognathi, Lacor-

daire) in which the mentum fills the gular emargination, as n

the higher Tenebrionidee, we find a gradual lessening in size of

the mentum, itself becoming supported upon a broad, short,

gular peduncle, permitting the maxille to become visible (Pha-

nerognathi, Cohort I., Lacordaire) ; next, the gular peduncle

becomes elongated and bilobed, receiving the mentum, now re-

duced to very small size, between its lobes (Phanerognathi,

Cohort II. and also Brenthidz and Anthribide).

Having, in the continuance of my work on the Classification of

the Coleoptera of North America, recently commenced a critical

study of our Rhynchophora, I became aware of the impossibility

of intercalating them between the Heteromera and Subpenta-

mera, and am now convinced that they represent a special type,

which must be isolated from all other types of Coleoptera, pos-

sessing a systematic value equal to all the others combined.

In seeking for the characters which should define this type,

I observed a remarkable difference in the arrangement of the

pieces of the under surface of the prothorax, heretofore over-

looked, and, so far as I know, confined to this particular type.

In other Coleoptera the prosternum is either extended behind

the anterior coxee, so as to form part of the hind margin of the

segment, thus coming in contact with the mesosternum, or it is

cut off between the coxee, and in this case (as in many others)

the coxal cavities are open behind: in the few exceptions

(Derodontus, Dacoderus) in which the coxee are contiguous and

the cavities closed behind, the prosternum still extends behind

the cox to the hind margin of the segment, as is shown by

the short sutures separating the epimera from the medial piece

of the prosternum.

I have represented these modifications of form in the adjoin-

ing woodcuts. Fig. 1, under surface of prothorax of a Carabide

(Pasimachus) ; the coxal cavities are closed, and the epimera and

episterna well defined. Fig. 2, ditto of a Scarabzide (Lachno-

sterna) ; the coxze are transverse, the cavities closed, the side

pieces not distinct. Fig. 3, ditto of Cucwus; coxal cavities open

behind, side pieces not distinct. Fig. 4, ditto of Telephorus ;

coxal cavities confluent, and open behind.

of Rhynchophorous Coleoptera. 293

In Rhynchophora the prothoracic sutures are obliterated ;

there is no separation between the prosternum and episterna,

and very rarely between the latter and the pronotum ; the coxal

cavities, frequently confluent, are always closed behind, by the

epimera, which become connate on the median line, enclosing

the hind part of the prosternum, thus cutting it off completely

from the mesothoracic segment.

Fig. 5 represents this arrangement of parts in a Brenthide,

in which family the extreme limit of degradation by linear ex-

tension is reached. Fig. 6, under surface of prothorax of a

Calandride (Rhynchophorus). Fig. 7, ditto of Cryptorhynchus.

Fig. 8, ditto of Balaninus. Fig. 9, ditto, Ophryastes. Fig. 10,

ditto, Thecesternus. Vig. 11, ditto, Dendroctonus.

When the cox are contiguous, the point of the prosternum

is visible behind them, but is none the less perfectly enclosed

by the growth of the side pieces to the median line.

Another evidence of the inferiority of type of the Rhyncho-

phora, which has not been mentioned, is seen in the functions

performed by the beak, which in the lower groups, especially in

the female, becomes greatly elongated. The occurrence of cor-

neous exserted ovipositors in other orders of insects is not rare ;

a few species of Coleoptera (certain Valgus, for example) have

the last abdominal segment prolonged, simulating such an organ;

but it was reserved for the Rhynchophora to exhibit a degrada-

tion of type by which a function, peculiarly appropriate to the

posterior extremity of the body, is performed by the head—the

elongated beak becoming, in fact, the ovipositor.

Thus the inferiority of grade, evidenced in other series of

Coleoptera by the softness of the integuments or by the perma-

nence of larval forms, chiefly in the abdomen and cox, is in

294. Royal Society :—

the Rhynchophora manifested by the transfer of a function

from the posterior to the anterior part of the body, and the

linear extension of the latter, in accordance with this “ change

of base.”

The principles of classification of Rhynchophora, and their

division into families, will be discussed in a subsequent memoir.

It is, however, proper to observe that the peculiar construction

of prothorax above described as characteristic of the Rhyncho-

phora is not exhibited in the Bruchids, which family, as ob-

served by Lacordaire (Gen. Col. vii. 600) should be viewed as

closely related to, if not actually a portion of, the great family

Chrysomelide.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

ROYAL SOCIETY.

June 20, 1867.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.

“On some Elementary Principles in Animal Mechanics.”’ By

the Rev. Samuet Haveuron, M.D., Fellow of Trinity College,

Dublin.

There are some elementary principles in animal mechanics

which are so natural that they may be assumed as probable, and

as such, have not received from observers the attention they really

deserve.

Among these principles I select for illustration the two follow-

ing: —

1. The force of a muscle is proportional to the area of its cross

section.

i. Lhe force of a muscle is proportional to the cross section of

the tendon that conveys its influence to a distant point.

i. In order to test the first of these statements, I made a careful

examination of the cross sections of the muscles that bend the fore-

arm and leg, in a very finely developed male subject, with the

following results :—

Neglecting the slight effect of the supinator radii longus in

flexing the forearm, I found the cross sections of the biceps

humeri and brachieus to be as follows :—

Cross section.

fe BE arep a iMmers’, V5) ye Pee ee ts one ALO 4usq2 ink

CaP OTOC hee | vial ic Newt) dep ore Otte Ure. | vos DON.

3190

The cross sections of the muscles that bend the leg were found

to be in the same subject :—

Rev. S. Haughton on Animal Mechanics. 295

1. Biceps femoris (long head) . . . 2°59 sq. in.

(short head) . . . 1:14

9 ”

2. Semitendinosus IIe y eee

3. Semimembranosus . . . . . . 225 ,,

AS AGTUCHIESIME MIME Leta. sas bay oe eae ODN as

DSSALOL Geet ae Pas. toe ee ey OOO aa.

9°33

When the arm was held vertically, and the forearm horizontally

with the fist shut and in supination, I found that 39 lbs. was the

limit of the weight that could be lifted when suspended at 124

inches from the axis of the elbow-joint, and that the perpendi-

culars let fall upon the directions of the muscles from the same

axis were :—

1. Biceps humeri pw! ee vee = es See OG anches:

PORE NUGU Sais, eee bee eel ae aon Ve COs ee

Hence if K denote the force of the muscle, per square inch of

cross section, we have, adding 2 lbs. for the weight of the forearm

at 124 inches from the axis of the joint,

41 Ibs. x12} inches=Kx { 4 199% qo7 }

6022=Kx | 3986 }

and finally K=94:7 lbs.

This represents the force per square inch of cross section that

the muscles flexing the forearm are capable of exerting.

In order to measure the force of the muscles flexing the leg, I

placed the observer lying upon his face upon a table, with the

legs extended over its edge, and having fastened down the

thighs, I observed the maximum weights, suspended from the

heel that could be conveniently lifted, and found that 34 lbs. was

the limit; to this must be added 3 lbs. for the weight of the leg,

supposed suspended at the heel, which was measured as 163

inches from the axis of rotation of the knee-joint. The perpen-

diculars let fall upon the directions of the several muscles flexing

the leg were then measured :—

Perpendicular,

1. Biceps femoris (long head) . . . . O95 in.

is (shorimhend)) el, 2O;56.—

2. Semitendinosus By Oh) ha? ae ee AAO

3. Semimembranosus . .. .. . . O65,,

AMG IGH IG well tchie gs Wis te ites Genaee “gn OL2ons,

De NAOMU Se oy its os wpa ae a O00 ,,

Hence we find, for the determination of K (the coefficient of

muscular Contraction per square inch of cross section),

296 Royal Society :—

0°95 x 2°59

+0°56 x 1:14

ArT +.0°40 x 1°87

+0:25 x 0°89

40:00 x 0:59

or,

( 2460

| +0°638

me +0:°748

6105=K x ) 41-462

| 40-222

| +£0:000

5°5380

and, finally,

_ 6105

It appears from the foregoing considerations that the force of

contraction of the muscles, per square inch, is in

Pherarm. ba Vee oe ee Se eA lbs:

Thee eens. 04. uae en TS ee Ae

These numbers are, perhaps, as near to each other as this class

of observations admits of; but I believe that they do not differ

so much really as they appear to do, for the following reason :—

As it was not convenient to procure a good subject destroyed

by a violent death, I made use of a powerful man who had died

of cholera * and who had been a blacksmith by profession. Now

it is natural to suppose that the muscles of the arm of a black-

smith are more developed than those of his leg; so that their cross

section would be relatively too great, and the coefficient derived

from that cross section, therefore, too small. I therefore com-

pared the sections of the biceps humeri and brachieus, found

by me, with the only other measurements with which I am

acquainted, for the knowledge of which I am indebted to Dr.

W. Moore of Dublin, who translated the results for me, from

the Dutch, of Messrs. Donders and Mansfelt + of Utrecht.

Cross Sections of Biceps humeri and Brachieus.

millims. sq. in.

K =110°4 lbs.

1. Biceps humeri (long head) ... . . 580 0°821

2. Brachieus gti | ine Bide fy 614 0°952

1596 24.74

* Tt is well known that after death by cholera, life continues in the muscles,

and manifests itself for some hours by movements, and by the existence of the

muscular susurrus. This latter fact, the first notice of which belongs to Dr.

Collongues, of Paris, I have repeatedly verified, as also the continuance of the

susurrus in cases of death by zetanus. It appeared to me, therefore, that such

a subject as I selected was one well suited to the purpose of my observations.

+t Over de Elasticiteit der Spieren. Utrecht, 1863.

Rev. S. Haughton on Animal Mechanics. 297

If this estimate of the cross section of the muscles be as-

sumed instead of my own, the coefficient found by me should be

increased in the proportion of 3190 to 2474; or

3190

24.74:

The mean of the coefficients found from my own measurement

of the muscles of the arm, and that of Professor Donders, is

108°4 lbs., which agrees nearly with that obtained from the

muscles of the leg, viz. 110-4 1bs., and the mean of all the ob-

servations on arm and leg would be 109°4Ibs., a result which I

consider to be not far from the truth.

The cross sections of the muscles were found by cutting them

across with a sharp scalpel, and marking out their section on

cardboard, and afterwards weighing the marked portions, the

weights of which were then compared with the weight of a

known number of square inches of the same cardboard, and so

the cross sections in square inches calculated.

I give here, for the purpose of illustration, the actual sections

of the muscles of the leg. (Figs. 1-6.)

The perpendiculars let fall upon the directions of the muscles

were measured by stretching strings from the origin to the in-

sertion of the muscles, and measuring, by means of a compass,

the perpendiculars let fall upon these strings from the axis of the

joint.

The weights of the muscles themselves were as follows :—

Coefficient of muscles of forearm . . 947 = 122 Ibs:

OZ. OZ.

1. Biceps humert . . 4°22 | 5. Semimembranosus . 7:25

2. Brachigus. . . . 5:04 |.6. Gracis ~~ . = 4 298

3. Biceps femoris . . 10°74 | 7. Sartorius . . . . 566

4. Semitendinosus . . 5:17

u. The principle of economy of force or of material in nature

would lead necessarily to the principle that each tendon convey-

ing the effect of a force to a distant point should have the exact

strength required, and neither more nor less; for, according to

the doctrine of final causes, it was originally contrived by a per-

fect architect, and according to Lamarckian views it must have

perfectly accommodated itself to the uses to which it is applied.

According, therefore, to either view, if the tendon be too strong,

it will become atrophied down to the proper limit; and if too weak,

it must either break or be nourished up to the requisite degree

of strength. It seemed to me desirable to prove this fundamental

proposition in animal mechanics by direct observation; and I

selected for this purpose the tendons in the leg of several of the

large running birds (Séruthionide),—and always with the same

result, viz. that the cross sections of any two muscles tending to

produce a similar effect are directly proportional to the cross

sections of their tendons.

I shall select as an example the case of the flewor hallucis longus

aud flexor digitorwm communis perforans of the Rhea, whose

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx.

298 Royal Society :—

tendons unite into a common tendon halfway down the posterior

side of the eanneon bone of the bird.

The cross sections of these two muscles are shown in the

annexed figures, taken as in the human subject (figs. 7 and 8).

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

- Biceps

(short head).

Biceps (long head).

Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 7.

Flexor perforans. (Rhea.)

Fig. 8.

Semitendinosus. Semimembranosus. Fexor hallucis, (Rhea.)

i <a

Gracilis, Sartorius.

The areas of these cross sections were found to be as 245 to

160; or the less was 65 per cent. of the greater.

On the Anatomy of Balenoptera rostrata. 299

Two equal lengths of the dried tendons were then weighed and

found to be in the proportion of 845 to 495, which was assumed to

be the proportion of their cross sections. The smaller of these

numbers is 59 per cent. of the greater—a result that seems to be

as near to the former result derived from the muscles as can be

expected in this class of experiments.

“On the Anatomy of Balenoptera rostrata, Fab.” By AuEx-

ANDER Carte, M.A., M.D., &c., and ALEXANDER MACALISTER,

M.D. &c.

In this paper the authors give an account of the dissection of a

young female of the Lesser Fin or Piked Whale, which was cap-

tured off Clougher Head, co. Louth, Ireland, on the 8th of May

1863.

After describing its external form, and giving accurate measure-

ments of its various parts, the authors point out some differences

between the relative sizes and positions of the organs of the animal

as contrasted with similar parts of those of the same species which

have been recorded by previous writers, especially as regards the

position of the dorsal fin, which appendage seems to vary in situa-

tion in different individuals, and show that consequently no value,

as indicative of species, ought to be attached to its relative position.

This is followed by a description of the osteology of the animal ;

and attention is drawn to the fact that the body of the axis vertebra

is composed, in part, by the displaced body of the atlas, showing

that what at present forms the upper half of the centrum of the

axis is in reality the centrum of the atlas.

The myology of the different regions of the animal has been

closely investigated, especially the rudimentary muscles of the

paddle, which latter the authors have minutely examined.

The anatomy of the mouth, pharynx, and blowholes is described,

and the mechanism by which the functions of respiration and

deglutition are performed. In connexion with the larynx, a re-

markable muscular pouch is mentioned as existing, which ap-

pendage is supposed by the authors to be accessory to the act

of expiration, serving a somewhat similar office to that of the

air-reservoir in a double-action bellows. Directly in front of the

glottis there existed a peculiar hood-like fold of mucous membrane

arranged in such a way as to allow of its being drawn over the

orifice, and so prevent the entrance of all foreign substances into

the respiratory tract during the act of deglutition.

The tongue was found fixed, as far as its tip, by a thick free-

num. The lateral walls of the submaxillary cavity were thrown

into folds, thereby admitting of considerable distention, this ar-

rangement being peculiarly adapted to the feeding-requirements

of the animal. The number of baleen plates found in the speci-

men was 280 on each side. d

The muscles for acting on the blowholes were arranged in

three strata, the superficial and deepest layers being used in

opening, and the intermediate one for closing the nasal canals.

20*

300 Miscellaneous.

The anatomy of the eye and ear is fully described in the

original paper, together with that of the digestive, nervous,

and vascular systems; in connexion with this last, remarkable

vascular retia were found, situated in the axillary, submaxillary,

and cervical regions.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Notice of a new Species of Spider Monkey (Ateles Bartlettii) in the

British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray.

Mr. Epwarp Bart ett, who is collecting specimens on the banks

of the Amazons, has sent home a new and beautiful species of -

spider monkey, which I propose to call Ateles Bartlettii, in honour

of the father and sons. Every one acquainted with the father knows

him as a most careful and accurate observer and most obliging per-

son; and I believe his sons are following in his footsteps.

Ateles Bartlettii may be thus distinguished :—

Fur abundant, long, and soft. Black ; the cheeks white, a band

across the forehead over the orbits bright reddish yellow ; the chest,

belly, inner side and front and back of the limbs, and the sides and

under surface of the tail yellow.

Hab. Brazil, the upper part of the Amazons (Bartlett). In Brit.

Mus.

Note on a Species of Planarian Worm hitherto apparently not

described. By the Rev. W. Hoveuron, M.A., F.L.S.

To the Editors of the Annals of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—I have recently met with a form of Planarian

worm which I am unable to identify with any described species,

either in Diesing’s ‘ Systema Helminthum’ or in Johnston’s ‘ Cata-

logue of non-parasitic Worms in the British Museum.’ It belongs

to the family of Dalyellidze, and is a species of the genus Typhlo-

plana, Hemp. & Ehrenb. Diesing (Syst. Helminth. vol. i. p. 231)

enumerates four freshwater species of this genus ; and Dr. Johnston

admits two into the British fauna, viz. T. foecunda and T. prasina,

the first of which is white, the second of a beautiful grass-green

colour. My specimens are almost entirely black, except at the mar-

gins near the head. I find them within the stems of Sparganium in

a weedy reedy pond where other Planariz (such as Polycelis nigra

and P. brunnea, Planaria lactea and P. torva) are common. The

species, which I believe to be new, occurs sparingly. Diesing’s

definition of the genus is as follows :—

“ Corpus oblongum, teretiusculum. Caput corpori continuum.

Os centrale v. subcentrale. Ocelli nulli. Aperture genitales....

Aquarum dulcium, rarissime maris incole.”’

The species, which I propose to call Typhloplana nigra, may be

thus described :—

Body rounded anteriorly, tapering to a point behind ; colour deep

Miscellaneous. 3801

black, except near the head, where the margin is white when viewed

under a lens. Length about 2 lines. Motion active.

From the bodies of some individuals I have pressed about twenty

round, reddish-brown, capsulated ova. It will be seen, by a refer-

ence to Dr. Johnston’s ‘ Catalogue’ (p. 16), that this species bears a

great resemblance to the 7’. (Planaria) prasina of Sir John Dalyell,

and differs almost solely in colour. I remain, Gentlemen,

Your obedient Servant,

W. Hoveuron.

Megaceros hibernicus in the Cambridgeshire Fens.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—In reply to Mr. H. G. Seeley’s letter in the

‘Annals’ for August 1867, on the Irish Elk, I beg to remark that

I was acquainted with the passage in Prof. Owen’s ‘ British Fossil

Mammals’ to which Mr. Seeley alludes; but, as the bone to which

my note referred was found in Cambridgeshire, and as Megaceros

hibernicus is not common in the Fens, I supposed that its occurrence

was worth recording. I am, Gentlemen,

Your obedient Servant,

Dublin, Aug. 26, 1867. NormMAN Moore.

Note on Ursus lasiotus, a hairy-eared Bear from North China.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

The Zoological Society has recently received a bear from North

China. It belongs to the same group as the European bear (Ursus

arctos), the Grisly Bear (U. ferox), and the Japanese bear, having

a broad head rounded above behind, a moderate broad nose, and

prominent ears.

It differs from these species in having the ears covered externally

and, especially, internally with long soft hairs, those on the in-

side forming a tuft that nearly fills up and projects beyond the

cavity of the ear. The fur is longer than in the European and

Japanese bear at the same seasons; and there is a large tuft of

longer hair on the back part of the throat, which is bent forwards

at the tips. It is nearly as black as the Japanese bear; but it has

a brownish nose and no indications of the angular mark on the

chest usually found in that species, and it is of a larger size.

These peculiarities induce me to believe that the Chinese hairy-

eared bear is a distinct species, for which I propose the name of

Ursus lasiotus. When we have an opportunity of examining the

skin and bones more particularly, I expect that more important

specific characters will be observed. It is very distinct from the

Syrian or Isabella bear of the mountains of Asia, which has a long

narrow head.

Mr. Bartlett believed that it was a distinct species as soon as he

saw it on board the ship. It is probably the bear that the Chinese

lead about and teach to tumble, as shown in Chinese pictures, and as

the ‘‘ bear-leaders”’ in my childhood’s days used to exhibit in London

the European brown bear.

302 Miscellaneous.

On the Anatomy and Physiology of Amphioxus.

By M. P. Berr.

The existence of Amphiowus has been ascertained, during the

month of March of this year, in the muddy sands of the basin of

Arcachon, by MM. Fillioux and Lafont. This is the first time, to

my knowledge, that any one has found it on the oceanic shores of

France.

From Mareh to May all the individuals have the generative organs

filled with eggs or with spermatozoids in different degrees of develop-

ment. After this period these organs are empty and atrophied.

Like all fishes, the Amphiowxi are fit for reproduction before they

have attained their full size. No difference can be ascertained be-

tween the male and female, even when the generative sacs are filled

with their products, except with the aid of magnifying-instruments.

The number of these pouches is, in both sexes, from twenty-two to

twenty-six; that of the muscular masses is sixty-one pairs; but

that of the branchial spaces varies considerably with the size, as has

long been known (an individual of the length of 20 millimetres has

93 spaces, one of 30 millimetres 153). This augmentation takes

place at the two extremities of the branchial apparatus; of this we

may easily be assured by taking for point of reference the anterior

extremity of the liver, which always corresponds to the sixteenth

muscular mass. Beyond the abdominal pore the coats of the body

do not closely embrace the intestine, as M. de Quatrefages says. I

have, on the contrary, verified the assertion of J. Miller, who de-

scribes a prolongation of the peritoneal cavity going to the anus.

It is true that the particles which have traversed the branchial net-

work never get into this passage, which is sometimes obliterated by

the contractions of the coats of the body. On the other hand, I

cannot admit the existence of the lateral canal (prolongation of the

general cavity) which according to some anatomists opens at the side

of the mouth.

Each of the ovarian sacs consists of a thin wall furnished with

pavement-epithelium, of which the very pale cells measure about

0°01 millim. Within, separated from the sac by an interval full of

a transparent liquid, is the ovigerous sac, which is extremely thin

and without epithelium when the eggs are developed ; but when

these first make their appearance, it possesses epithelial cells 0-010-

0°014 millim. These cells group themselves round the young

eggs, which appear to originate only in contact with the wall. The

smallest that I have seen were 0°038 millim., their germinal vesicle

0:009 millim., and their germinal spot 0°004 millim. I have found

them in the same sac from that size to 0°24 millim., which is that of

the mature egg (vesicle 0°09, spot 0°026 millim.). The vitellus

becomes opaque when the egg attains 0°085 millim. I have seen at

the same time in the sac some isolated corpuscles which had all the

characteristics of the germinal vesicle. When the eggs are mature,

they lose their spot and vesicle, and, bemg compressed in the sac, form

at its surface an elegant mosaic. ‘They then emerge by the burst-

ing of the sac and pouch: in the wall of the former some pigment-

granules are developed ; it then contracts and becomes invisible.

Miscellaneous. 303

I have not been able to trace from its commencement the appear-

ance of the spermatozoids; I have, however, once seen them united

by the head, in great numbers, in their mother cells (male ovules) ;

the latter then burst, and the spermatozoids group themselves in a

single bundle in a large sac with thin walls without epithelium.

Between this sac and the testicular pouch float a number of corpus-

cles measuring 0-0045 millim., the nature of which is unknown to me.

I cannot regard the dorsal cord as formed of cells (Quatrefages)

or of disks (J. Miller &c.). Longitudinal sections showed a more

regular structure, namely lamelle composed of semisolid amorphous

material. But these lamellee towards the centre of the dorsal cord

are forked in proportion as they recede from that centre, giving ori-

gin to secondary lamelle in gradually increasing numbers, which do

not reach the whole surface of the dorsal cord. Hence arise those

parallel lines which have led to the belief in juxtaposed disks, and

which, occupying a part of the circumference, have been regarded

by M. de Quatrefages as limiting large flattened cells. Nor can I

share the opinion of M. Marcusen, according to which the large

bodies contained in the cells of the fin on the one hand, and in the

swelled extremity of the spinal marrow on the other, are composed

of capillaries. In the first place, the large bodies are translucid

and homogeneous, whilst the swollen extremity (so well described by

M. de Quatrefages) is filled with corpuscles perfectly similar to those

which strike us at the first glance in the spinal marrow. Secondly,

in some fragments of Amphioxus which had been cut for several

days, and were still living, these parts preserved their dimensions,

which would not have been the case if they had been composed of

capillaries full of blood. The spinal marrow contains, both in the

swollen and contracted parts, some cells which are very difficult to

see clearly. They did not appear to me to be round, as is generally

stated, but angular or polar. I have seen from an angle on one of

them, which was tripolar and measured 0:015 millim., a fibre origi-

nate and soon become bifurcated.

The manifest contradiction between the description of M. de

Quatrefages and that of M. Marcusen with regard to the termination

of the cutaneous nerves appears to me to be founded on a premature

generalization. If we examine the cutaneous nerves in the middle

and posterior regions of the body, we find them ramifying more

and more, losing their proper envelope, and at last becoming so fine

that their extremities cannot be distinguished. I have reason to

believe that they present anastomoses in their course. But the

nerves which proceed from the facial trunks (second, third, fourth,

and fifth pairs of Quatrefages) behave differently ; after a short

course, they arrive at some oval cellular bodies, measuring from

0-012 to 0°015 millim., filled with granules, with one or two nuclei

of 0-004 millim. These cells, pointed out by Quatrefages, are the

very terminations of the nervous filaments ; but they only exist for

the facial filaments, in which they undoubtedly indicate some parti-

cular function.

The anterior termination of the spinal marrow of Amphioxus,

although not inflated, nevertheless plays the part of an encephalon ;

804 Miscellaneous.

if it be cut away, the animal, when once at rest, remains immoveable

upon the sand, without any indication of voluntary determination.

But it is still extremely sensitive, and regularly executes the move-

ments of the muscles of the belly which aid in respiration. I have

seen the general reflex movements persist for more than a week in a

decapitated Amphioxus.

The immersion of an Amphiorus in sea-water charged with blue

litmus (Vulpian’s method) furnished no evidence of an acid secretion

in its intestinal tube, unless perhaps in the buccal cavity. As to the

large greenish appendage which is usually denominated the liver, I

have been unable to perceive, under the microscope, the production

of violascent spots by the action of acidulated tincture of iodine ; hot

nitric acid gives it a rather bright bottle-green colour.

Neither in the liver and excrements, nor in those singular bodies,

differing in different animals in number, size, and position, which J.

Miller regards as the kidneys, could I detect the presence of uric

acid by the microscopic reaction of murexide.

I believe I am the first to have witnessed the ejection of the semen ;

it issues by the abdominal pore in a continuous jet, reinforced by

pulsations due to the abdominal muscles; the spermatozoids, which

are free and active, retain their movements for about twenty-four

hours in sea-water (at 59° F.). They then measured :—head 0-008 ;

tail 0:040-0°048 millim., but generally 0°045 millim. The detection

of this spontaneous emission of the semen is important, as it compels

us to regard the AmpAioxus as an adult and definitive form.

If the extremity of the body of an Amphiozus be cut off, the wound

does not cicatrize; on the contrary, the tissues become gradually

disintegrated, I have seen animals, with only the tail mutilated,

become gradually eaten away up to the middle of the branchial region,

and live thus without intestines, without abdominal walls, and with-

out branchie for several days. In this destruction the disks of the

dorsal cord become detached, and the muscular fibres become dis-

sociated, lose their strize, and disappear: the wound acquires a rosy

colour.

Immersion for two minutes in water at 106° F. kills the Amphiowi ;

but although incapable of spontaneous movements, they are still lo-

cally contractile. Fresh water kills them with convulsions in two or

three minutes ; they then become opaque and rigid, and their muscles

no longer contract, even under the influence of induced currents in-

supportable by the dry fingers. If, then, the animal be again placed

i sea-water, contractility is seen to return in a few hours, and then

sensibility. If the cessation of the movement of the vibratile cilia

has been waited for, it reappears in sea-water, but contractility and

sensibility are finally lost.

The presence in water of a very small quantity of strychnine kills

the Amphioxi with tetanic convulsions; morphine stupefies them

(even when the cephalic extremity has been removed), leaving them,

however, when in small quantity, their sensibility ; lastly, curari

renders them immobile without affecting their contractility, and this

even when their integuments are uninjured.—Comptes Rendus,

August 26, 1867, pp. 364-367.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[THIRD SERIES. ]

No. 119. NOVEMBER 1867.

XXXIX.—On a new form of Mudfish from New Zealand.

By Dr. Atbert Gunrusr, F.R.S.

| Plate VII.]

Tue family of Galaxide was formed by the late Johannes Miller

for a single genus, Galaxias—scaleless freshwater fishes from the

temperate zone of the southern hemisphere, which, with regard

to the development and position of their fins, remind us of the

Pikes of the northern hemisphere, but in other respects (as, for

instance, in their dentition and open ovaria) resemble the Salmo-

noids, to which they have been compared by Miiller. Also the

settlers of at least some parts of New Zealand have dignified the

larger kinds with the name of “trout” or “‘rock-trout.”” However,

they cannot be regarded as the southern representatives of the

Salmonoids, inasmuch as recent researches have shown that this

latter family is represented in the southern hemisphere by

other, much more closely allied genera*. If we look for the

representatives of the Galaxidze in other zones, perhaps the African

Mormyride and the Arctic Esocide are those which may be

mentioned with the greatest propriety.

Up to the present time only twelve species of Galaxias are

known, which I have described in the ‘ Catal. of Fish.’ vol. vi.

pp. 208-213. Their geographical distribution is a point to

which the greatest interest attaches. We find the genus most

developed in New Zealand, where five species occur, and these

are the largest of the whole group. Westwards it extends

to New South Wales, with three, and to Van Diemen’s Land,

with two species. Another is said to be an inhabitant of the

crecks of Queensland; but this is doubtful. Eastwards the

same genus is met with again in the southernmost parts of

America (Falkland Islands, Patagonia, Terra del Fuego), whence

* Haplochiton and Prototroctes: see Giinth. Fish. v. p. 381.

Ann. & Mag. N. Mist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 2]

306 Dr. A. Giinther on a new form of Mudfish.

three species are known; and, finally, a minute form is said to

occur in Chile. The occurrence of the same natural genus of

freshwater fishes in Australia, New Zealand, and South America

would appear to be significant enough, and must be the more

so when we find that even one and the same species (Galaxias

attenuatus) inhabits the fresh waters of countries separated at

present by the South Pacific Ocean. Nor does this fact stand

alone, inasmuch as another family of freshwater fishes, that of

Haplochitonide, offers a very similar instance of geographical

distribution—one of the two genera of which it is composed

being found in Terra del Fuego and the Falkland Islands (Hap-

lochiton), the other in Southern Australia (Prototroctes). These

instances seem to be confirmatory of an observation made in

Proc. Zool. Soc. 1858, p. 890, where the Batrachian fauna of

South America was shown to be most closely allied to that of

Australia.

By the last New Zealand mail I received a highly interesting

example belonging to this family of Galaxide, differmg generi-

cally, however, from Galaxias in being devoid of ventral fins.

It is the type of a new genus, which may be characterized

thus :—

NEOCHANNA.

General characters those of Galaxias. Ventral fins none.

Each jaw with a single series of very small, compressed (incisor-

like) teeth of equal size; palate toothless. A series of hook-like

teeth on each side of the tongue. Pyloric appendage single.

Gill-rakers very short, conical, widely set.

Neochanna apoda. Pi. VII.

Bae. eG, Anda.

Body subcylindrical, compressed behind, rather elongate, its

depth being contained seven times and a half in the total length

(without caudal). Head broad and depressed, its greatest width

being much more than its depth, and at least two-thirds of its

length, which is a little less than one-fifth of the total (without

caudal). Snout broad, obtusely rounded. Lips broad. Cleft

of the mouth of moderate width, the maxillary extending to

below the eye, which is very small. Anterior nostril prolonged

into a minute tube; several wide pores on the upper part of

the head. A rather deep groove runs from the head along

the middle of the back and abdomen. The dorsal and anal

fins are about as high as the tail between them, and both are

continuous at the base with the rudimentary rays of the caudal

Dr. A. Giinther on a new form of Mudfish. 307

fin. Caudal fin rounded, as long as the head (without snout) ;

pectoral somewhat shorter.

Brown, with irregular blackish transverse spots.

Total length 54 inches.

The peculiar circumstances under which the specimen was

obtained are best explained in the following letter, by which it

was accompanied :—

** Geological Survey Office and Colonial Museum,

“Wellington, 27th July, 1867.

“Dear Sir,

** At the request of His Excellency Sir George Grey, I forward a

specimen of a fish which is found under peculiar circumstances near

Hokitika, on the west coast of the province of Canterbury, with a

request that, if it proves to be a subject of interest, you will describe

it and deposit it in the British Museum. I also enclose a pencil-

sketch of the same specimen, which was found at a depth of 4 feet

from the surface, in a stiff clay imbedding roots of trees. The

locality is 37 feet above the level of the Hokitika River, and three

miles from the sea, and has at one time been a backwater of the

river during floods. The gold-fields township of Kaneiri is now built

upon it; but little more than two years ago it was a swamp covered

with dense forest. The surface of stiff clay rests on a deep deposit

of gravel, which has been pierced in all directions by the gold-

miners; so that, during the above period, no surface- or river-water

could have collected, and the original swamp has disappeared.

** Mr. Schaw, the warden of the district, to whom I am indebted

for my information, has examined seven or eight specimens of this

fish, and assures me that they occur enclosed in hollows in the clay ;

and that, although when first extracted they moved freely, if placed

in water they get sluggish and soon die. The specimens seen vary

from 3 to 7 inches in length.

“That a fish should survive when imbedded in clay for months

or even years, is a matter of familiar experience ; and it is not diffi-

cult to conceive bow these fish might, on the desiccation of the

swamps, get into the position in which they are found, by following

crevices among the roots of trees; and I believe that the early

settlers in New Zealand were frequently much astonished by digging

up fish along with the potatoes they had planted in the rich swampy

land—a natural bounty which they were not prepared for.

“Tam sorry I cannot send you specimens of the fish from the

neighbouring waters for comparison; but I believe you will find it

to be only an abnormal form of some commonly recognized species.

“© T remain,

“Yours faithfully,

** Dr. Giinther, F.R.S., “James Hecror.”’

* British Museum.”

The last surmise of Dr. Hector is natural enongh, and would

21%

308 Dr. A. Giinther on a new form of Mudfish.

occur to any one who had not the opportunity of comparing this

fish with the allied forms. I have frequently seen individuals

of carp, Anabas, &e., taken under similar circumstances, the

appearance of which was so much altered that they could not be

readily identified. However, the fish sent by H.E. Sir George Grey

is not merely such an abnormal individual, although it may be

regarded as a degraded form of the more highly developed type

of Galaxias. Even if it did not generically differ by its peculiar

dentition and absence of ventrals, still we should be obliged to

distinguish it specifically on account of the large number of fin-

rays and the small size of its eye. By the latter character Neo-

channa is distinguished in a remarkable manner from the true

Galaxias, which appear to inhabit more open and clear waters

(those from Terra del Fuego are found in “alpine lakes”) and

have the eyes fully developed; while the almost rudimentary

eyes of Neochanna indicate clearly that it lives habitually in mud

or swampy places; and I have no doubt that Dr. Hector is

correct in thinking that it will be found in such localities in the

neighbourhood of Hokitika. It is not surprising that the spe-

cimens obtained were killed by the sudden immersion in clear

water; perhaps they might have survived if the change had

been made in a more gradual manner.

All Galaxias are extremely fat, so that it is impossible to

handle them, even for a very short time, without the fat pene-

trating through the skin, and soiling everything which comes

into contact with them. I was much surprised to find this also

to be the case in our specimen of Neochanna (which I should

have supposed to have undergone a protracted trial of fasting),

—and still more so when the stomach proved to be distended

with food, which appeared to consist of the semidigested remains

of the larvee of a small dipterous insect.

In conclusion I would draw attention to the remarkable fact

that in numerous groups of fishes which live in mud, or are even

enabled to pass a longer or shorter time in soil periodically dried

and hardened during the hot season, forms occur entirely devoid

of or with only rudimentary ventral fins. Thus in the family

of Labyrinthici two genera, Osphromenus and Trichogaster, have

the ventral fins reduced to a thin filament. I have also seen

specimens of Anabas abnormally devoid of ventral fins, though

the pubic bones were present. Among the Ophiocephalide

Channa is entirely destitute of these organs. There are several

ventral-finless Siluroid and Cyprinodont genera ; but, unfortu-

nately, we are acquainted with their habits only in a very general

manner. Gymnarchus is nothing but a Mormyrus without any

of the lower fins. The chief function of these fins is to balance

Mr. C. Collingwood on Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa. 309

the body of the fish whilst swimming; and it is evident that,

in fishes moving during a great part of their life over swampy

ground, or through more or less consistent mud, this function

of the ventral fins ceases, and that nature can readily dispense

with these organs altogether.

XL.— Remarks upon Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa observed at Sea.

By Curuspert Coittrnewoop, M.A., F.L.S. &e.

Tue following observations were made during a prolonged sea-

voyage, extending over a year and a half, and embracing the

Indian Ocean north and south of the Line, the China Seas, and

the North and South Atlantic Oceans. During this voyage, of

course, many interesting observations were made relating to

other animals; but the present paper will be confined to the

oceanic Hydrozoa of the orders Physophoride and Lucernaride.

The appearance of these animals is by no means a constant

occurrence even in calm seas, and seems in fact to be somewhat

capricious and regulated by conditions which are not well ascer-

tained and would require the collation of a lengthened series of

observations for their determination. On some days floating

Hydrozoa occur in vast numbers; but when they do so, they

usually appear to be all of the same species ; nor are such days of

frequent occurrence. The small gymnophthalmatous Medusidee

(naked-eyed Medusz) are so transparent that it is impossible

to see them from the ship, although they may be tolerably

abundant ; and it is only when they are captured in the towing-

net that their presence is detected ; and that must be, of course,

in calm weather, when the ship is not sailing too fast. But the

towing-net is seldom put down without securing various forms

of such transparent Meduse, as well as Beroés and similar

oceanic Actinozoa, also small gelatinous masses usually more or

less torn by contact with the net. The pelagic species of the

order Physophoridz, such as Velella, Physalia, and Porpita,

occur perhaps more frequently than any others, and usually in

company with one another, the two former especially seldom

occurring one without the other, and having the appearance

from a distance of large bubbles of water drifting by, though

their persistence at once attracts the attention of the observant.

Next to them, perhaps, are Porpite, looking like beautiful blue

eun-wads, with delicate radiating markings, and surrounded

with a fringe of deep-blue tentacles. The number of these

Hydrozoa must be enormous, and their range very remarkable.

I have found them extending over 55° of latitude, and I have

no reason to believe this to be the limit.

310 Mr.C. Collingwood on Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa.

It is not to be wondered at that these light bodies, which

present more or less sail to the wind, should be blown ashore in

a gale. Thus I have found a Velel/a on the Lancashire coast ;

and abroad, as, for example, on Bush Island, at the mouth of

Kelung Harbour, Formosa, after windy weather, I have seen

thousands of the first two genera lying high and dry upon the

rocks.

But the most magnificent specimens of these richly coloured

animals (Physaliz) occurred in the Atlantic Ocean, near the

equator. On the 19th of June, in lat. 13! S. and long. 22° W.,

wind §.8.E., therm. 77°, bar. 30°1, the sea was moderately

calm, and from time to time during the day splendid individuals

of Physalia pelagica sailed by, attracting attention, even when

far off, by their large size and brilliant colours. They had the

appearance of beautiful prismatic shells standing upright upon

rich blue cushions, the shell being radiated from the base or

cushion to the circumference, which was fringed with a rich and

bright rose-colour. They were not in great abundance, but one

would float by every five minutes or so.

The largest Physalia which I examined measured as follows :—

Extreme length of bladder ............ 8 inches.

Greatest vertical circumference. ........ LOL. S;

Height of bladder above water .......... 245 4;

But this was considerably reduced from the natural height ; for

the rose-coloured crest had collapsed, which would have added

at least ? inch to it, making a total of 34 inches in height above

the water. I had judged them to be about 8 inches long, before

I captured one, by the expedient of throwing into the water a

piece of wood of ascertained length, which I carefully compared

with the animal as it floated near it. No one on board the ship

had ever seen such magnificent Physalie, although they had

been at sea many years. Some thought at first that they had

seen them as large in the West Indies, but they were fain to

confess at last that the large one I measured exceeded the

largest they had ever seen. I saw these large Physalie@ subse-

quently on more than one occasion, the last beg in lat. 26° N.,

though higher than this somewhat smaller specimens occurred.

The stinging-propensities of these Hydrozoa were not gene-

rally known, but were destined to make themselves evident at

the expense of one unfortunate man. A boat happened to be

lowered early in the day; and one of the crew, seeing a large

Physaha float within reach, took it up with his naked hand.

The threads clung to his hand and arm, penetrating to the

axilla and down the side, causing the man to yell with agony.

He was quickly brought on board, and, as soon as he reached

Mr. C. Collingwood on Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa. 311

the deck, ran about like a frantic maniac, so that it took several

men to catch him, and, when secured and the proper remedies

applied, he rolled about for a considerable time, groaning with

pain. His arm was red, inflamed, and swollen, and remained so

for some hours after the occurrence.

One circumstance in relation to these large Physalie struck

me as being very remarkable. Each one as it floated by had

beneath it what at first I took to be its mass of tentacles and

polypites; but on more close observation I found that the

appearance was due to a shoal of small fishes accompanying the

hydrozoon under protection of its appendages. The fishes were

of various sizes, from 2 to 6 inches long, transversely banded,

and looking in the water precisely like the pilot-fish (Naucrates

ductor). There were perhaps a dozen of these accompanying

fish clustered together beneath the bladder of each Physadia.

Every Physalia had its cluster; but this peculiarity was ob-

servable—viz. that under small Physalie the fishes were small,

while under large specimens they were correspondingly large,

being, in fact, always proportioned to the size of the man-of-war

which they accompanied. Unfortunately I did not discover this

curious fact till late in the day; and when the boat was down

in the morning I was unaware of it, or I should have made a

point of attempting to secure a specimen of so interesting a

fish.

What the relation is which exists between the fish and the

Hydrozoon I cannot say; but this correspondence between the

sizes of the two animals seems to indicate that the fishes do not

capriciously select their protecting Hydrozoon. It is known

that certain fishes harbour in the threads of some of the large

Lucernaride ; but I believe they have not before been noticed

accompanying Physalie.

The presence of these fishes also accounted for a remarkable

thing I had observed earlier in the day. One of the large

albicores made a sudden dash at a Physalia (apparently), but did

not take it; returning, however, presently to the charge, he

made a clean sweep, no trace of the Physalia being left. Doubt-

less it was the small fishes which accompanied it, rather than

the Physalia itself, which stimulated the albicore’s attack.

Before I quit the subject of the Physophorid, | must not

omit to mention a circumstance which occurred only once

during the whole time I was at sea—viz. the remarkable influx

of Stephanomiadz, accompanied by other kinds of animals, into

Kelung Harbour, Formosa, on the 18th of June. The beautiful

organisms I there observed were of the genus Stephanomia, and

closely resembled the S. triangularis of Quoy and Gaimard. They

were wonderfully sculptured and carved masses of solid jelly,

312 Mr.C. Collingwood on Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa.

either perfectly transparent or tinged with pink. They would

bear being taken up carefully in a hand-net and placed in a

basin of sea-water, but, when there, became absolutely invisible

from their transparency and delicacy, and, when touched, would

break asunder into transparent, gelatinous, star-like bodies; so

that I was of despair at getting even a sketch of their compli-

cated forms, for they soon melted away into shapeless masses.

I endeavoured to preserve some in glycerine, but without suc-

cess, for they immediately fell to pieces and dissolved. These

bodies were solid to the touch, about 3 inches long, and appeared

to be formed by the union of gelatinous bodies (swimming-bells)

of very complex form, and dissimilar at different parts of their

length, so that the diameter of one-third was greater than that

of the other two-thirds. I was much disappointed at my un-

successful attempts to keep some record of them; but their

invisibility, their fragility, and the approach of evening ren-

dered all my attempts at that time futile ; and although I might

have succeeded better if I had had another opportunity, I never

saw anything like them again.

But the circumstance to be especially remarked is that during

all the time these curious animals were floating by, it was rain-

ing pretty hard—a condition which, @ priori, “would have been

supposed the most unfavourable for them; for the destructive-

ness of fresh water to delicate marine animals is well known.

Whence, too, could they have come in such profusion? And if

the surface of the sea is their natural habitat, why are they not

more frequently seen ?

With regard to the Hydrozoa of the order Lucernaride (the

covered-eyed Medusze of Forbes), on the comparatively few oc-

casions when they appear upon the surface, they are usually in

great abundance, and not in great variety. Thus in the upper

part of the Red Sea, on the 10th of March, a species of Aurelia

appeared in great numbers; and two days after, we passed

through a shoal of Rhizostomas. Four days later, in the Gulf

of Aden, we again encountered shoals of Aurelia, apparently

identical with those of the Red Sea, the two shoals being sepa-

rated by about 1400 miles. Again, in October we passed, on

the west coast of Borneo, off Cape Santubon, through a number

of magnificent Pulmogrades. The upper part of the umbrella

was pilose, with long papille; the periphery was fringed with

long tentacles, and the pedicels gave rise to magnificent grape-

like masses, the whole being of a delicate white colour, and

fully 18 inches in diameter. In the following month, in the

strait which separates the island of Singapore from the Malay

peninsula, I observed a great number of the same beautiful

Pelagian, and accompanying it some specimens of a small and

Mr. C. Collingwood on Oceanic Forms of Hydrozoa. 313

elegant, brown, turquoise-studded species, similar to one I had

already obtained in Victoria Harbour, Labuan, and of which, it

may be here mentioned, I found a small crab within the um-

brella, beneath which it appeared to reside.

To show the vast numbers of these animals which swim freely

in the ocean, I will mention that, in the Atlantic, in lat. 84° S.

and long. 17° W., we encountered a shoal of these animals, all

of the same species, the individuals of which were among the

most beautiful im form and colouring that I have ever met with.

Just before sunset we passed through them for a space of two

hours, during which time we had traversed ten miles. Sup-

posing that this shoal were at least as broad as long, it was easy

to calculate roughly that there could not be less than thirty

millions of individuals constituting it, an estimate probably far

below the truth. I procured one, and made a careful drawing

of it while still living.

The only exception I met with to the rule I have mentioned

(namely, that when Hydrozoa floated they appeared in consider-

able shoals of one species only) occurred in the great calms

which I encountered in the North Atlantic Ocean, in the first

fortnight of July, and which extended more or less over upwards

of a thousand miles, durig which, on two or three occasions, |

saw several species of Hydrozoa mingled with vast numbers of

compound Ascidians. Some of them were new and strange

forms, such as I have nowhere seen figured, some abundant,

others but few in number, only appearing occasionally, and

therefore very difficult to capture from a moving ship. One of

these I did succeed in taking; but there were at least three or

four species besides the Physalie and Velelle.

It occasionally happened that the observation of a shoal of

Hydrozoa pointed out some curious facts from which interesting

deductions might be made. Thus, while passing through the

Indian Ocean, in lat. 13° N., durig an entire day (March 17),

we ran through shoals of durelia, meeting from time to time

patches in which they were too numerous to be counted, and in

each of which there were many hundreds. A noticeable fact I

remarked with regard to them, viz. that, without any exception

that [ could discover, these Aurelie were, during the whole day,

swimming in the same direction, or with the wind. We were

steaming nearly due east, and a breeze was blowing a little

south of east ; and the umbrellas were all inclined one way, and

pointing m the direction towards which the wind was blowing.

On another occasion, in a dead calm, on a beautiful day, off

the river Min, I observed great numbers of a large white species.

The edges of the umbrella were frilled, and numerous long and

delicate threads stretched out straight and parallel; but what

314 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

struck me as singular was, that these threads did not all float in

the same direction, as though drifted from the animal by wind or

tide, but, although they were several feet long, they formed three

or four distinct bundles, which stretched straight out in different,

and often opposite, directions from the body of the animal, from

which it appeared that they were propelled by a voluntary

effort.

In passing through Banka Strait, owing to the number of

rivers (Palembang and others) which flow out of the island of

Sumatra, the water had only seven-tenths of the saltness of

the ocean; but notwithstanding this comparative freshness, I

observed a number of large white Rhizostomas floating just

below the surface, apparently unaffected by this peculiar con-

dition.

XLI.—List of Coleoptera received from Old Calabar, on the West

Coast of Africa. By ANpREw Murray, F.LS.

[Continued from p. 95.]

Lymexylonide.

Arractocervs, Palis. Beauv.

Atractocerus africanus, Boh. Ins. Caffr. i. 520.

A single specimen.

I have not seen any typical specimen of Boheman’s A. afri-

canus; but mine agrees perfectly with his description, and differs

from the well-known A. necydaloides of Latreille in the parti-

culars which Boheman points out. “ At first sight,” says he,

“very similar to A. necydaloides, but is well distinguished from

it by the head being ovate, the thorax longer, narrower, oblong-

quadrate, and without a reflexed margin behind.”

It would appear to range across Africa, and also into Mada-

gascar; for I have seen specimens (probably A. madagascariensis

of Castelnau) from that country which did not differ from this

Old-Calabar species.

Me.itromMa*, nov. gen. (See fig. 1, p. 316.)

Hyloceto similis, sed magnis oculis sine ocellis et thorace elon-

gato.

Habit and facies similar to those of Hylocetus ; the antennz

imbricated strongly in the male, subserrated in the female ; the

palpi as in Afractocerus ; the head with very large eyes, as in

Atractocerus, covering the whole sides of the head and nearly

* From pedurra, a bee, and dupa, an eye,—bee-eyed.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 315

meeting in front, reminding one of the eyes of a bee, in this

respect differing entirely from the typical Hylocetus, which has

small, black, round eyes placed on the sides of the head and

occupying a very small part of it. There is no ocellus on the

front of the head. The epistome or front of the head differs in

having a projection in the middle and one on each side, above

the insertion of the antenne ; in Hylocwtus the front margm

is quite straight. The back of the head is narrowed into a

neck, which commences immediately behind the eyes. The

thorax is longer than broad, and subparallel, instead of being

broader than long. The first article of the tarsi is longer than

in Hylocetus, being about as long as all the rest. Number of

abdominal segments five; in the male there is a depression in

the middle of the last segment, but none in the female. Coxze

very long, conical, and projecting, those of the anterior legs

being nearly as long as the thighs. It has the head of an

Atractocerus, and the body and elytra of Hylocetus, but appears

to me to have more affinity with the former than with the

latter.

The type of this genus is the Hyloceetus brasiliensis of Cas-

telnau. Lacordaire has already indicated that it must be sepa-

rated from Hylocetus. Speaking of it and of H. cylindricus

of Dejean (Cat. ed. 3. p. 128), he says:—“ Both having the

enormous and strongly granulated eyes of the Atractoceri (they

are contiguous on the front in the males, a little separated in

the females), combined with the elongated thorax of Lymeaylon,

cannot remain among the Hyloceti. They manifestly form a

genus Intermediate between the latter and the <Aéractocert.”

(Lacord. Gen. Col. iv. 503.)

Although the facies is different from Lymexylon, the majority

of the characters are the same. The most important difference

is in the antennee, which in Lymeaylon are filiform, while in the

present genus they are imbricated.

I entirely agree with those who object to the multiplication

of genera, and prefer, wherever it is possible, to make the neces-

sary subdivisions in the form of subgenera, which may serve the

purpose of the student of the particular family without over-

burdening the general nomenclature. In this case, however, it

would lead to a wrong appreciation of affinities were we to do

so. Were we, on the strength of its facies, to make this forin

a subgenus of Hylocetus or Lymexylon, it would imply that it

was nearer them than Aftractocerus, and that the northern type

of the family extended into Africa south of the Sahara, which,

so far as we yet know, it does not; and to make it a subgenus

of Atractocerus would be to treat with too little regard the

abortive elytra of the latter.

316 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

Melittomma castaneum. Fig. 1

Castaneum, elytris dilutioribus, opacum, levis- 1

sime punctatum, sericeo pubescens ; thorace

elongato, fere parallelo, lateribus medio

parum angulatis; elytris 34 thoracis longi-

tudine.

Long. 9 lin., lat. 14 lin.

Very close to Hylocetus brasiliensis of Castelnau, almost the only

distinction being that it is a very little smaller, darker in colour,

and that the posterior lateral margins of the thorax are sinuate,

while in brasiliensis they are straight and form a slightly obtuse

basal angle. It is a good deal like Hyloceetus dermestoides, but

longer and of firmer texture, chestnut-coloured, the elytra paler

than the head and thorax, very finely punctate and: fulvo-sericeo-

pubescent. The eyes are subtriangular in shape; the granu-

lations interspersed with a short, fulvous, silky pubescence.

The thorax is a little longer than broad; the sides are slightly

angled in the middle, where it is widest, and slightly sinuate

both before and behind the middle; the anterior angles obtusely

rounded, posterior angles rectangular; the surface is finely

granulosely and very closely punctate, dull, with sericeous re-

flexion from the pubescence ; there is a slight depression on each

side behind the middle, and before it towards the anterior angles,

and also before the middle on each side of the disk ; the sides

are very finely margined, most so posteriorly ; the anterior

margin 1s nearly straight, slightly emarginate in the middle;

the basal mar gin slightly disinuate. Scutellum nearly oblong

angles of the apex rounded. LElytra more than three times the

length of the thorax, rather more finely granulosely punctate

than the thorax, most so towards the base and shoulders, which

are very slightly shining; there are four slightly raised coste,

besides a slightly raised sutural line and outer margin; the two

innermost coste are united together near the apex, and from the

point of union a single line continues obliquely outwards and

backwards a short distance, when it is united to the next costa ;

this last is very faint, and is least distinct towards the base ;

the outer costa is near the margin, and scarcely visible when

viewed from above. Hach elytron terminates at the apex in a

peak, the termination of which is rounded. There is a slightly

raised sutural line; but the space between it and the innermost

costa falls towards the suture. The underside is sericeous

and granulosely punctate, like the upper. The legs are very

like those of the Heteromerous genera Serropalpus, Phlovotroia,

and the neighbouring groups, as indeed are those of the whole

family of Lymexylonide.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 317

Only a female specimen received. The above description

therefore applies only to the female; but, as it is almost iden-

tical with M. brasiliense, I have taken the characters of the

male specified in the characters of the genus from one of that

species.

This is another example of a Brazilian form occurring at Old

Calabar.

I may take this occasion to say that I think the family to

which this species belongs (the Lymexylonide) is not here in

its right place. Although actually pentamerous, it appears to

me that the species composing it are Heteromera in disguise,

and that their place is next the genera I have above mentioned.

On the same principle that botanists disregard the rules of the

Linnean system when they run counter to natural affinity,

entomologists ought, I think, more frequently than they do,

to disregard the tarsal characters when inconsistent with other

indications of affinity. Westwood (with his admirable flair

entomolvgique, that mstinct for affinity which so rarely errs)

acknowledged this relationship between the Lymexylonide and

Melandryadz in his ‘ Modern Classification of Insects ;’ and

Lacordaire, in alluding to his remarks, also admits the analogy.

Both, too, in placing the family in or near its present position,

admit that it is not placed satisfactorily. It comes awkwardly

in between Ptinus and Clerus (where Lacordaire has placed it),

and not much better between Ptinus and Bostrichus (where

Vestwood has put it). But if it is to come among the Penta-

mera, there is no better place for it. They have bent to that

artificial test; but in doing so they have removed it from a

group of insects like it in facies and habit, of similar structure,

and endowed with some of the exceptional peculiarities which

are to be found in this family. That group is a cluster of

Heteromerous genera belonging to the Melandryade. All

of them have the underside of the body and legs and tarsi

(except in the number of articles) constructed on the same

principle, and that a principle deviating considerably from that

of the Pentamera. Some of them, too, as Serropalpus, have a

similarity in outward appearance tothe Lymexylonide. In spe-

cies of that genus and others of the Heteromera not far distant

from it, “ Nature has played strange antics” with the maxillary

palpi, turning them into curiously serrated organs in Serro-

palpus, into strange long flexible trunks lke the antennz of

Blatta in Nemognatha, and into distorted indescribable masses

in Cerocoma; and in the Lymexylonide an analogous distortion

of these organs into flabellated plates occurs. I do not remem-

ber any similar abnormal vagary appearing in the palpi of any

other group of Coleoptera, except in the Palpicornes and in some

~*~

318 Mr. A. wiurray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. ~~

of the Pselaphide, where it is of another character. Further, in

this same heteromerous group we have a number of species

where the elytra are very much diminished in size, and some

(as Myodites) where they are almost as little developed as in

Atractocerus. Again, in this family the number of abdominal

segments varies in different genera, the number being merely

a subordinate (generic) character; so it is with the Rhipipho-

ride. Now such resemblances or coincidences are to me very

suggestive of affinity. We find constancy and inconstancy

characteristic of whole sections of animals and plants. One

tribe of plants the horticulturalist can bend in every direction

he pleases; another is like cast iron, immoveable. It would

be a phenomenon casting doubt on its affinity to find a plant

apparently belonging to the latter varying lke the former. I

do not think that, in this present case, the existence of the

curious phases of development to which I refer tells us more

than that the Lymexylonidz belong to that part of the Hetero-

merous family in which similar variations are found. Their

nearest allies among the latter must be sought on other grounds,

viz. the ordinary similarity of parts. Such a constitutional cha-

racter is more vague, and, although probably as certain, extends

over a wider field. I therefore think Westwood was wrong in con-

demning the earlier British entomologists who wished to place

Lymexylon with Cantharis (for, before Westwood spoke, others

had already seen the Heteromerous affinity) merely because he

thought it came nearer Helops and Melandrya, and still nearer

the Malacodermata. The character reaches as far as the ab-

normal deviations in question extend.

If the reader asks why I, holding that this is not the proper

place for this family, still place it here, my answer is that I do

so for his convenience; he would not look for it anywhere

else. And as this is not an attempt to amend the classification

of Coleoptera, but simply to record what species are found in

Old Calabar, I sink my own opinions on such theoretical points

and place the species in the order where they will most naturally

be looked for; and that is, in the order followed by Lacordaire.

Where I can follow my own proclivities without inconvenience,

I do so.

Cleride.

STigMATiuM, Gray.

Stigmatium dorsiger, Westw. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1852, p. 37.

I can see no difference between my specimens and Westwood’s

description of this species, except that he says that under a lens

the surface of the elytra is finely punctate. In my specimens

there is some fine granulation, but no punctation.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 319

A number of specimens have been received. They vary a good

deal in intensity of colour and degree of denudation of pubes-

cence.

Erymantuus, Klug.

Erymanthus horridus, Westw. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1832, p. 35.

Erymanthus vesuvioides, Thomson, in Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1856, p. 114.

Var. purpureo-niger.

Three specimens.

Prof. Westwood describes and figures his species as shining

black, with rufo-piceous protuberances. M.Thomson’s speci-

mens of FE. vesuvioides are described and figured as varying in

colour, the ground-colour being ferrugineo-testaceous encroached

upon by brown and black. My specimens are all three of a rich

shining dark tawny claret-colour, almost black, with rufo-piceous

or tawny brown shining through on the tops of the tubercles.

With the exception of the differences in colour, I see no distinc-

tion between my specimens and the descriptions and figures of

these species respectively given by Westwood and Thomson.

They all come from West Africa:—Prof. Westwood’s from Cape

Palmas; M. Thomson’s from Grand Bassam; and mine from

Creek Town, Old Calabar.

THANASIMODES, nov. gen. (See fig. 2, p. 320.)

Elongatus; palparum maxillarium ultimo articulo securiformi.

Prothorace subquadrato, angulis rotundatis ; elytris longis ;

femoribus posterioribus haud apicem elytrorum attingentibus;

ceteris fere ut im Thanasimo.

Elongate, subcylindrical, shining and metallic. Mentum

transverse, narrow. Ligula bilobed, the lobes diverging. Last

article of the labial palpi very large, transversely securiform ;

that of the maxillary palpi also securiform, but not half so broad.

Labrum emarginate. Head declined, ovular. Eyes rather large,

nearly on a level with the rest of the surface of the head in

front, but projecting a good deal behind, the head being nar-

rower behind them; rather strongly emarginate on the under-

side, distinctly but not coarsely granulated. Antenne longer than

the head and thorax, rather slender, of eleven articles, the first

conical and bent, second to eighth flattened subcylindrical, second

moderately long, third longer than the second, fourth about the

length of the second, fourth to eighth gradually but very slightly

increasing respectively in length and thickness; the ninth to

eleventh triangular and a little thicker than the preceding,

forming a loose slender club; the eleventh largest, unequally

ovate, and acuminate. Prothorax subquadrate, convex, with

the sides subparallel and the angles rounded, constricted at the

320 Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

base so as to form a narrow short peduncle. Elytra long,

broader at the base than the thorax, nearly parallel, and

rounded behind. Wings ample. Legs moderate ; the posterior

thighs not reaching nearly to the end of the elytra; the tibie

are grooved, rather large; tarsi with the first article invisible,

except under the lens and when viewed laterally or from below,

when it can be discerned as a small plate below and alongside

the lower and basal part of the first apparent (the second)

article; this second article is rather long, the third is shorter,

and the fourth short; the claws are appendiculate, and not

dentate, but with a slight prommence at the base. The abdo-

men has five segments, besides the anal projection.

Thanasimodes metallicus. Fig. 2. 2

Nitidissimus, sparsim pilosus, supra viridi-

metallicus, subtus viridi-cyaneus; abdo-

mine versus apicem et femoribus lete

rufis; thorace levissime et parce punctato ;

elytris striato-punctatis, striis versus api-

cem evanescentibus.

Long. 11 lin., lat. 33 lin.

Very bright and shining clear metallic green above, and

bearing scattered long fine fulvous hairs ; below blue or greenish

blue, with the anal appendage and last segment of the abdomen

of a bright red, which extends along the external margin of one

or more of the preceding segments; there is also a tinge of red

on the margin of each of the segments and on the metathoracic

parapleure ; the femora, with the exception of the tip and the

base, are of the same red colour, although not so bright. An-

tenn, labrum, maxilla, palpi, and tarsi brown; mandibles

black. Head rounded, very smooth, with a few faint punctures

and fine fulvous hairs on the surface, and a few wrinkles

above the eyes. Thorax convex, very smooth and shining, with

a slight trace of a transverse depression near the front, with a

few faint punctures and fine hairs scattered over the surface ;

the sides subparallel, the angles rounded, the base constricted,

the constriction or peduncle wrinkled. Scutellum impunctate,

subtriangular, with the apex rounded. Elytra three times the

length of the thorax, punctate-striate, the striz deeper towards

the base, and disappearing on the posterior half, or only to be

traced in very faint distant punctures and hairs; shoulders dis-

tinct, sides inflexed and margined. The underside is shining,

finely punctate ; the segments of the abdomen more deeply and

distinctly (but still very sparmgly) punctate. The legs are more

pilose than the body, and the lamellz of the tarsi are fulvous.

One specimen.

Mr. A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar. 321

This is one of the largest and perhaps the finest of the

Cleride.

Malacodermata.

Hepystivs, Erich.

Hedybius ceruleus.

Supra leete ceeruleus, antennis pallidis, articulo primo et articulis

duobus ultimis luridis; subtus et pedibus nigris; nitidus ;

eapite levi, antice utrinque impresso; thorace quam caput

angustiore, subrotundato, levi, versus latera et postice late

marginato, antice leviter transversim impresso, disco modice

convexo; elytris postice quam antice parum latioribus, for-

titer et dense granulatim punctatis.

Long. 22 lin., lat. 3-1 lin. |

Above rich deep crulean blue; the underside and the legs

black ; antenne pallid testaceous, with the first and the last

two articles lurid or piceous. Head smooth, longitudinally bi-

impressed in front. Thorax narrower than the head, rounded

or, rather, octagonal or hexagonal in shape, with all the corners

rounded off, smooth, shining, and impunctate; the disk mode-

rately convex, slightly depressed in front and surrounded on the

sides and base with a broad deep channel. Scutellum distinct.

Elytra broader behind than in front, deeply, coarsely, and

closely granulosely and irregularly punctate, the punctation not

so deep towards the base and in the neighbourhood of the scu-

tellum and shoulders; the space near the scutellum depressed ;

the shoulders prominent; a distinct line near the suture and

along the outer margin; apex rounded; the exsertile vesicles

on the underside of the thorax and abdomen distinct.

Apparently pretty common.

The genus to which this species belongs is the African repre-

sentative of Attalus, which is not found in Africa proper, i. e.

south of the Sahara, being a European genus and only found

in Africa in the Mediterranean district. Erichson describes a

species of Attalus from Tasmania, which, however, I have not

seen.

Of this African genus there are upwards of a dozen species,

which have been described by Erichson, Boheman, &c., all from

the Cape, except one from Abyssinia.

Lampyride.

Lucio.a, Casteln.

(Subgenus Delopyrus, Motsch.)

Luciola bimyzata.

Testaceo-fulva; capite nigro; prothorace testaceo, medio plus

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx.

3822 Mr.A. Murray on Coleoptera from Old Calabar.

minusve nigro; scutello pallido; elytris singulis margine

testaceo circumcinctis ; pedibus pallidis.

Long. 34 lin., lat. 1 hn.

Pale dirty testaceous brown; females pubescent both above

and below; males pubescent below. Head black, punctate.

Eyes in the male very large and prominent, in the female small

and level with the head. Thorax testaceous, with a larger or

smaller black space in the middle and towards the anterior mar-

gin; strongly punctate ; transverse; anterior margin projecting

in the middle; sides parallel and nearly straight; anterior

angles rounded; base bisinuate, posterior angles projecting

and nearly right-angled; the sides slightly reflexed; the base

(except the angles) transversely bisinuately impressed close to

the margin, and with a rounded depression on each side, just

within the projecting angles. Scutellum large, elongate, trun-

cate at the apex, widest at the base, pale. ‘Elytra with a pale

margin running round each from the shoulder to the suture ;

irregularly punctate, and bearing faint traces of two or more

coste. Underside finely punctate; the thorax and margins of

the metathorax pale testaceous. In both sexes the last two

segments of the abdomen are alone phosphorescent, and nearly

white and impunctate; pygidial segment rounded triangular.

Apparently rather rare.

From both sexes having only two segments of the abdomen

phosphorescent, the species should belong to one or other of

Motschoulsky’s subgenera Delopyrus and Delopleurus (both also

from Africa, and each represented hitherto by only one species,

the former from South Africa, the latter from Mozambique), that

being the main character of these sections. M.de Motschoulsky

gives characters for distinguishing them between themselves

founded on the form of the thorax and pygidium. This species

comes between the two as regards the thorax, it being neither

in the form of a crescent nor a transverse square (which are ae

respective characters of that part given by Motschoulsky), 1

being indeed somewhat rounded in front, but eet

behind. In regard to the pygidium it corresponds with Delo-

pyrus. If it must go to either one or the other, that subgenus

seems therefore to have the stronger claim to it.

I have called the species bimyzxata, or “ with two wicks,” in

allusion to there being only two phosphorescent segments of the

abdomen.

Lampyris, Fab.

Lampyris pharos. Fig. 38.

Femina testacea; antennis brevibus; capite occulto infra tho-

Dr. J. EB. Gray’s Synopsis of African Squirrels. 323

racem; prothorace antice rotundato, postice quadrato;

aptera, pedibus compressis.

Mas ignotus.

Female.—Pale testaceous or dirty fawn- SK

coloured, with a velvety down which looks Ze

whitish in different lights. Prothorax a large it

plate rounded in front, quadrate behind,

covering the head, which is small and placed

nearly in the middle of the underside, and fase

from it a raised rib runs obliquely to each of = > a

the anterior angles of the underside, and

another straight backwards to the base, J ~

forming the foundation of the sides of the

thorax, each side of which meets the other >3aqynne Re

side in a ridge at the sternum, like the

ridge of a house inverted. The head is withdrawn into the

triangular tunnel thus formed; the eyes are black, sunken;

the antennz short, thick, eleven-jointed; the palpi also very

short, with the joints like cups within each other. There are

no elytra, but on the middle of the back of the mesothoracic

segment there are faint indications of a suture. The stigmata

are very distinct on the underside; the legs are lamellate, and

the tarsi short and thick.

I have given the above description from two specimens which

I received from the Rev. Mr. Waddell. He mentioned that the

insect gave a strong continuous steady light for hours, which

has suggested the name. The terminal segments show no signs

of having been phosphorescent, being of the same texture as

the rest of the surface.

Mr. Waddell informs me that it is rare at Old Calabar.

XLII.—Synopsis of the African Squirrels (Sciuride) in the

Collection of the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.,

V.P.Z.S., Keeper of the Zoological Department.

THE British Museum contains a large collection of the Squirrels

of various parts of Africa. The series contains the original type

specimens of the species described by Kuhl from the Congo,

Waterhouse from Fernando Po, Ogilby from the Gambia, Riip-

pell from North and Eastern Africa.

There are also three or four specimens purchased from M. du

Chaillu ; but they can scarcely be regarded as the types of the

species described in the ‘Boston Journal of Natural po

under his name*, as only two of them bear any names, viz.

* The American zoologist who misled M. du Chaillu into believing that

824 Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of the African Squirrels

1. Sciurus eborivorus, which is evidently only a bad bleached spe-

cimen of S. Stangeri; and, 2. Sciurus minutus, which is a distinct

species of tree-squirrel. All the specimens in his collection

were in a bad condition, very much bleached, and injured by

dirt; so that it is very difficult to compare them with the de-

scriptions, which were probably taken from the specimens before

they were so damaged by exposure and bad usage. M. du

Chaillu did not seem able to identify them with the names, or

at least he did not do so when requested; so that it was of no

use for the Museum to purchase his specimens. Indeed it is

quite clear that M. du Chaillu is not responsible for the distine-

tion of the species.

I may cite, as an instance of his want of zoological knowledge

to qualify him for the writing of the paper that appears under

his name, that he sent to the British Museum, with the other

animals, at the commencement of his last travels, the skull of a

Bush-Antelope or Bush-Goat (which I described, as discovered

by him, under the name of Cephalophus longiceps, in the ‘ Pro-

ceedings of the Zoological Society ’ as soon as it arrived) ; yet he

does not mention the animal in his narrative, and says, in the

résumé of the zoology of the district, that antelopes are not

found there (!). In the same manner he sent specimens of two

kinds of Manis, viz. M. tetradactyla, with a long tail, and M.

africana with a short one. The occurrence of only one species

is mentioned in the narrative, showing that he did not know

that he had collected and sent home two very distinct species.

The short-tailed species was not discovered by either Dr. Baikie

or M. du Chaillu ; for it is evidently the short-tailed Manis that.

[lliger named Manis gigantea, from Guinea, more than forty

years ago, which had been confused as a synonym with Manis

brachyura of India, and so overlooked.

Temminck, in his ‘Esquisses Zoologiques sur la cdte de

Guinée’ (Leyden, 1853), gives a list of the African Squirrels, and

several descriptions, in his usual general style, of the species

which he regards as new and therefore gives new names. All

the names in the list are marked with an asterisk, which, we

are told, in a former page, indicates the adult specimens in

the Leyden Museum, then under his direction; but when

we turn to the notices of them in the following pages, he states

that he only knows several of the species from the descrip-

tions of the authors quoted. He places Sciurus congicus, Sc.

he had discovered sundry new mammalia, and who wrote the paper that

appeared in the ‘ Journal of the Boston Natural History Society,’ seems

to be ashamed of his work, and leaves the traveller whom he misled to

bear the discredit of his carelessness or ignorance.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 325

getulus, and Sc. flavivittatus (which he misnames S. flavivittis)

with the earless ground-squirrels called Xerus by Ehrenberg,

though they all have well-developed ears, soft fur, and are as

arboreal in their habits as the squirrels of Europe.

Compiling zoologists, who only have the descriptions of other

authors to work from, are apt to make such mistakes and refer a

species to the wrong group, or to combine very different species

as synonyms; but it is surprising that M. Temminck, with the

specimens before him, should have done so.

I believe, as well as I can make out the very general descrip-

tions he gives of the species, that some of those which he has

described as new are the species which were described with more

detail by Dr. Smith and Mr. Ogilby, which he failed to recog-

nize; he has thus encumbered the list with ‘ doubles emplois,”

which he so constantly accuses his contemporaries of doing.

Some of the African Squirrels are distributed over the whole

of Africa. Thus we have Sc. annulatus from the north to the

south and from the west to the east of that continent ; and it is

the same with other species.

The young specimens are coloured like the adult.

The African Squirrels, especially those found in the tropical re-

gions, have the fur much brighter and more vivid at some seasons

of the year than at others, and the fur of the males is generally

brighter than that of the females; but there is little fear of

these being mistaken for specific differences, except by such

zoologists as are in the habit of describing allied species from

single specimens and on very slight characters.

I. Cheek-pouches none; body covered with soft fur consisting of

elongated more or less rigid hairs and a soft under-fur. Ears

ovate, well developed. Arboreal. Tree-Squirrels.

2. SciurRus.

Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867, xx. p. 271.

* Fur one-coloured ; tail annulated.

1, Sciurus minutus, Du Chaillu, Boston Journ. 1860, vi. p. 366;

Travels, p. 453, t.

Size of a small mouse. Fur soft, olive-grey, yellow-washed ;

hairs mouse-coloured, with yellow tips: chin, throat, and under-

side pale yellow-grey: tail like back, but obscurely black-

ringed; hairs yellow, with subterminal black band and yellowish

tip. ars rounded, covered with soft hair forming a tuft and

fringe.

Hab. West Africa (Du Chaillu). Type in B.M.

326 Dr. J.E. Gray’s Synopsis of the African Squirrels

** Back with four black stripes. Fur very soft. Ears covered

with soft hairs.

2. Sciurus Isabella, Gray, P. Z.S. 1862, p. 180, t. 24.

Fur olive-grey, very minutely punctulated; chin, underside,

and inner side of limbs greyish white: tail black, obscurely pale-

ringed, tip black; hairs reddish yellow, with a broad subter-

minal black band and grey tip.

Hab. Camaroon Mountains (Capt. Burton). B.M.

3. Macroxus.

Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867, xx. pp. 271, 275.

A. The cutting-teeth broad. Tail elongate, longer than the body

and head, black-ringed. Underside of body nakedish. Large-

sized.

a. Lateral streak none; sides of neck like back. Nos. 1, 2.

b. Lateral streak white ; sides of neck white. No. 3.

B. Cutting-teeth compressed, narrow. Underside of the body gene-

rally well covered with hair. Middle-sized or small,

a. Body without any pale streaks.

* Tail black, pale-ringed. Nos. 4-8.

** Tail dark, punctulated. No. 9.

*** Til red, one-coloured. No. 10.

b. Body with a pale streak on each side. No. 11.

c. Back with a pale streak on each side. No. 12.

d. Shoulders and fore part of sides with a short pale streak.

No. 13.

e. Back with two pale streaks on each side. No. 14.

A. Cutting-teeth large, broad. The underside of the body nakedish,

the hairs sparse. Tail elongate, much longer than the body

and head, black-ringed ; hairs long. Large-sized.

a. Body without any white marginal streak on each side ; sides of

neck like back.

1. Macroxus Stanger.

Sciurus Stangeri, Waterh. P. Z. S. 1842, p. 127; Fraser, Z. T. t. 25.

Sc. caniceps (winter), Temm. Esq.

Se. eborivorus, Du Chaillu, Boston J. N. H. vi. p. 363; Travels, p. 284,

t. 41.

Olive-grey, varied with the long white tips to some of the

hairs; sides of neck, shoulders, and thighs like back; throat

and underside of body grey or blackish; the hairs of the back

black at the base, with a broad grey and then a broad black

ring and a yellowish tip; tail black, with narrow white rings.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 327

Hab. Fernando Po (Thompson, B.M.; ‘Mr. Waterhouse,

type; Burton, B.M.; Du Chaillu, B.M.). Niger Expedition

(Fraser, B.M.)

Sciurus mutabilis, Peters, Saugeth. 131, t.31, 32. f. 2, Mossam-

bique, is probably a variety of S. Stanger, with white tip to the

tail.

The species is known from M. Wilsonii, which is also nakedish

beneath, by the size of the cutting-teeth.

2. Macrozus shirensis.

Fur whitish grey, closely punctulated with black ; hairs of the

back dull grey at the base, with a broad black subterminal band

and an opaque-white tip ; tail elongate, black, white-ringed, and

with a black tip; hairs of the tail black, with four white rings

and a grey tip.

Hab. Kast Africa, River Shire (Dr. Livingstone).

Smaller and paler than S. Stangeri, the fur shorter and closer ;

the cutting-teeth in one specimen are as wide as those of M.

Stangeri, and in the other rather narrower.

These squirrels vary in the width of the under cutting-teeth ;

in general they are nearly as wide in front as the upper ones,

but in some specimens they are more compressed and narrower.

b. Body with a white marginal streak on each side ; sides of neck

white.

3. Macroxus caniceps.

Sciurus caniceps, Temm. Esq. 127 (summer), 1853.

Se. Nordhoffii, Du Chaillu, Boston Journal, 1860, vii. p. 363.

Dark olive-grey, black-and-yellow-dotted ; crown and temples

black, minutely white-dotted: tail darker, with narrow white

rings; hairs very long, yellow-and-black-ringed, with a grey tip:

feet reddish ; sides of neck, throat, and underside of body white,

very sparsely hairy, except on the throat and near the dark part

of the back.

Hab. West coast of Africa (Verreaux): B.M. Ashantee :

B.M.

The red spot on the back of the ear is not always visible ; it

depends on the position of the hair. This species is at once

known from S, Stangeri by the darker colour, more minute

punctulation of the fur, the white sides of the neck, and streak

along the sides of the body.

Mr. Nordhoff is the reputed writer of M. du Chaillu’s first

book of travels.

328 Dr.J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the African Squirrels

B. Cutting-teeth moderate, narrow ; underside of the body covered

with hair, except in M. Wilsonii. Middle-sized or small

Squirrels.

a. Body without any lateral streak.

* Tail elongate, more or less distinctly pale-ringed.

4. Macroxus Wilsonii.

?Sciurus Wilsoni, Du Chaillu, Boston Journ. N. H. 1860, vii. p. 364.

Fur rather sparse, soft, dark olive, yellow-and-white-punctu-

lated, of the throat and underside of the body very sparse and

soft, pale reddish; the outer side of the fore legs and thighs

redder; feet red : tail very bushy, black, very obscurely pale-ringed

and greyish-washed, greyer at the tips; hairs long, white at the

base, with two broad black and one grey ring, and a grey tip.

Hab. West Africa, Ovenza River (Du Chaillu): type? B.M.

Fernando Po: B.M.

The very bushy tail and naked underside are peculiar. It

differs from the male specimen of the next species, which is

nakedish beneath, in the colour of the hairs of the tail.

5. Macroxus rufobrachiatus.

Sciurus rufobrachiatus, Waterh. P. Z. 8. 1842, p. 128; Fraser, Zool. Ty-

pica, t. 24; Temm. Esq. 136.

Se. rufobrachium, Gray, List Mamm. B. M. 146 (misprint).

2Sc. subalbidus, Du Chaillu.

Fur olive, punctulated with white; chin and underside pale

rufous: tail like the back, with close white rings and a blackish

tip; hairs black, with three or four yellow rings: the hinder

edge of the fore legs and inner side of the thighs bright red.

Hab. Fernando Po (Waterhouse). Type in B.M.

Var. Waterhousii. Darker ; underside red and very spare of

fur; tail nearly black, hairs black, with several narrow bright-

yellow rings.

The upper front cutting-teeth have two very obscure depres-

sions, scarcely to be called grooves, near the inner side, which

are not observed in other Macro.i.

See Sciurus subalbidus, Du Chaillu, /. c. 365, who describes

the under surface as thickly covered with hair.

6. Macroxus punctatus.

Sciurus punctatus, Temm. Esq. Guinée, 138, fide Verreaux.

Blackish grey, variegated with black and white rings; face,

chin, and cheeks rufous ; throat and chest pale rufous grey ;

belly bluish grey. Tail elongate, slender, cylindrical, with close

black and orange rings and a black tip ; “hs orange, with two

black rings and a grey tip.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 329

Var. Face and chest blackish grey like belly.

Hab. West Africa: B.M. Ashantee: B.M. Guinea (Temm.).

Niger Expedition (Fraser, B.M.).

Known from the former species by the bright colour of the tail

and the absence of the red hinder edge of the fore legs.

7. Macrozxus annulatus.

Sciurus annulatus, F. Cuy., Desm. 1820; Temm. Esq. 1837.

Se. gambianus, Ogilby, P. Z.S..1835, p. 103; Temm. Esq. 140.

Se. multicolor, Rupp. Atlas, t. 13.

Xerus multicolor, Temm.

Sc. cepate, A. Smith, Ill. Z. 8. A. t. 55; Peters, Saugeth. 130, t. 32. f. 4

(skull).

Fur pale olive-grey, punctulated with black and yellow;

throat and underside yellowish or white ; face, sides of the throat,

shoulders and thighs, and feet yellower. Small size.

Var. albina, West Africa (Rendal, B.M.).

Hab. West Africa, Gambia (Rendal, Ogilby, type). Central

Africa (Dr. B. Baikie, B.M.). East Africa, Abyssinia (Ruppell,

B.M., type). South Africa (Dr. A. Smith, B.M., type; Sun-

devall, B.M.).

Not distinguished by Temminck.

8. Macrozxus isabellinus.

Fur thick, close, olive-brown, closely punctulated with grey

and black; tail like the back, end very obscurely ringed, tip

dark grey, hairs black-and-yellow-ringed ; throat and underside

of the body greyish white.

Hab. West Africa. B.M.

This species is very like the former; but it is larger, the fur

much thicker, longer, and darker below, and the tail much more

bushy.

The adult and young specimens in the British Museum, ob-

tained from Mr. Warwick, are much alike, and different from

any of the varieties of M. annulatus.

** Tail elongated, punctulated, not or only very obscurely annulated.

Small-sized.

9. Macroxus poensis.

Sciurus poensis, A. Smith, S. A. Zool. Journ.; Temm. Esq. 141.

Dark olive-grey, minutely punctulated with black and yellow;

chin, throat, and beneath rufous grey; hair lead-coloured, with

yellowish tips. Tail elongate, coloured like the back, with a fuller

black tip; hairs yellow, with two black bands and a black tip.

Hab. Fernando Po (Thompson): B.M. Ashantee: B.M.

See Seiurus musculinus, Temm. Esq. 142; Guinea. Body

5 inches, tail 64 inches long. Perhaps same as former. Who

does not recognize S. poensis from Dr. A. Smith’s description ?

*** Tail one-coloured, red. Middle-sized.

10. Macrozus palliatus.

Sciurus palliatus, Peters, Monat. 1852, p.273; Mossam. 184, t. 31. f. 1

(young), t. 32. f. 3 (skull).

Se. ornatus, Gray, P. Z. S. 1864, p. 13, t. 1.

Head, neck, chest, legs and thighs, and under part of the

body red ; tail bright red bay ; back, shoulders, rump, and upper

side of the base of the tail olive-grey, punctulated with white

and black.

Hab. South Africa, Natal (Fosbrooke ; Gray’s type in B.M.).

Mossambique (Peters).

b, Body with a pale stripe on each side, separated from the pale

colour of the under part of the body by a band of the same

colour as the back.

11. Macroxus pyrrhopus.

Sciurus pyrrhopus, F.Cuv. Mamm. Lith. t.; Temm. Esq. 132.

Sc. rubripes, Du Chaillu.

Se. erythropus, F. Cuv. Mamm. Lith.; Waterh. Cat. Mus. Zool. Soc. 46.

Sc. leucostigma, Cuvier, fide Verreaux (not Temm. Esq. 133).

Xerus congicus, Temm. Esq. 125 (not Se. congicus, Kuhl).

Dark brown-grey, dorsal streak yellowish ; sides of the head,

throat, shoulders, sides of the body, outer side of thighs and

legs, and feet red; chin, throat, chest, belly, and inner side of

the legs white: tail black, obscurely pale-ringed, whitish-

washed, with a black tip; hairs grey at the base, with a very

broad black ring and grey tip.

Hab. West Atrica: B.M. Guinea: B.M. Ashantee: B.M.

Fernando Po: type, Waterhouse and A. Smith.

Var. erythrops. Fur darker, brighter brown, of the head

bright red chestnut.

? Se. ebii, Temm. Esq. 129.

Hab. Gaboon (Walker).

c. Back with a pale streak on each side ; cheeks and temples pale-

streaked.

12. Macroxus congicus.

Sciurus congicus, Kuhl, Beitr. 66 (young). Type, B.M.

Sc. flavivittatus, Peters, Mossamb. Saugeth. 128, t. 29 (adult), t. 32. f. 1.

Xerus flavivittis, Temm. Esq. 124; Giebel, 59.

Olive-grey, minutely punctulated with grey and black; back

in the Collection of the British Museum. 331

with a longitudinal white streak along each side; cheeks with

two pale streaks ; chin, sides of neck, throat, underside of body,

and inner side of legs pale grey: tail obscurely annulated ; hairs

yellowish, with a broad subterminal black band.

Hab. Congo (Tuckey ; Kuhl, type, B.M.).

Very like Se. pyrrhopus ; but the dorsal streaks are higher up

the sides, the shoulders and thighs are grey, like the rest of the

fur, the tail much more distinctly ringed, and the face has pale

streaks. The specimen is not half the size of Sc. poensis; and

it has no appearance of youth. A half-grown specimen of the

latter species in the Museum has the shoulders, thighs, and

sides as red as the adult. It is well figured by Peters, but

rather paler than the Museum specimen.

See also Sciurus leucostigma, Temm. Esq. 133, from Guinea.

See Sciurus superciliaris, Wagner, Schreb. Saiugeth. 11. 212.

Giebel refers it to Sc. annulatus !

d. The shoulders and fore part of the sides with a short pale

streak.

13. Macroxus erythrogenys.

Sciurus erythrogenys, Waterh. P. Z.S. 1842, p.129; Fraser, Z.T. t. 26.

Sc. leucogenys, Waterh. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842, p. 203.

Fur blackish, minutely punctulated with white or yellow,

rather paler on the sides; sides of head reddish; chin, throat,

chest, belly, and inner side of the hmbs white: tail black, washed

with grey, end black ; hairs black, yellowish at the base, with a

short grey tip. Young and adult are exactly alike.

Hab. Fernando Po. B.M., Mr. Waterhouse’s type.

e. The back with two pale streaks on each side ; sides brown

beneath the outer stripes.

14. Macroxus getulus.

Sciurus getulus, Linn. 8. N. i. 87; Gervais, Mag. Zool. 1842, p. 4.

2Xerus getulus, Temm.

Barbarian Squirrel, Edw. Birds, iv. t. 195.

L’ Ecureuil barbaresque, Buffon, H. N. x. 141 (copied Schreb. t. 221).

Hab. Mogador, Morocco (M. Delaporte). Mus. Paris.

This is a species that I have not seen in any English collec-

tion. The animal sent by Mr. Drummond-Hay from Morocco

as the Ground-Squirrel is Xerus trivittatus. It is to be observed

that Temminek refers Sc. getulus to the genus Xerus; so that

he probably called X. ¢rivittatus Se. getulus; but M. Gervais,

who described a soft-furred squirrel from Morocco, which is

the one described by Edwards and Buffon as Seciwrus getulus,

also refers it to the genus Xerus !

332 Dr. J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the African Squirrels

Sciurus dimidiatus, Waterh., which he thought might be an

American squirrel, has much the habit of the African tree-

squirrels. It will be noticed among the American Squirrels in

the next Number of the ‘ Annals.’

II. Cheek-pouches none. Body covered with flat channelled spines,

sometimes intermixed with short cylindrical bristles, without

any under-fur. Ears rounded, only slightly raised from the

head. Terrestrial. Ground-Squirrels.

6. XERUS.

Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867, p. 271.

Xerus, Ehrenb., Temm. Esq. 121. Xeros, Peters.

Geosciurus, Lesson, A. Smith.

Tamias, sp., Gervais.

Head moderate; nose rounded. LEars short, nearly naked,

little raised from the head. Cutting-teeth smooth in front.

Fur consisting of flat channelled spines, in some species inter-

mixed with black cylindrical tapering bristles. Front claws

long. Tail depressed, with two rows of elongated, rigid, droop-

ing bristles. Male organ very large.

[“ mostly,” in the generic character at p. 271, should be

“ scarcely.” |

a. Fur consisting only of flat channelled spines ; back grizzled,

without any longitudinal streak. Xerus.

b. Fur consisting of flat channelled spines and black cylindrical

tapering bristles ; back grizzled, with a longitudinal streak

on each side. Geosciurus.

Temminck and Gervais have referred to this genus some

Macroxi. The flattened form of the fur is certainly the best

character, as that agrees with the terrestrial habit of the animal.

a. Back grizzled, without any longitudinal streak ; fur consisting

only of flat channelled spines. Xerus.

1. Xerus rutilans, Gray, L. M. B. M. 144.

Sciurus rutilans, Rupp. Atlas, t. 24.

X. rutilus, Temm. Esq.

Sciurus rutilus, Schinz.

Se. brachyotus, Ehrenb. 8S. P.

Fur reddish grey-brown, punctulated with white ; orbits, nose,

cheeks, and beneath white; tail-hairs reddish brown, with a

darker subterminal band and long white tip.

Hab. Abyssinia, Massana (Riippell’s type in B.M.).

in the Collection of the British Museum. 333

b. Back grizzled, with a white streak along each side from the

shoulder to the upper part of the thigh ; with flat channelled

spines and black cylindrical tapering bristles. Geosciurus.

2. Xerus setosus.

Sciurus dschinschicus, var., Desm.

Se. albavittatus, Fischer.

Sc. setosus, Forster.

Sc. capensis, Thunb.

Macrozus albovittatus, Lesson.

Se. namaquensis, Lecht.

Se. erythropus, Schinz.

Sc. albovittatus, Desm.

Se. leucoumbrinus, Riipp. Atlas.

Geosciurus capensis, A. Smith.

Se. pretextus, Wagner.

Xerus erythropus, Temm. Esq. 124.

Fur grey-brown, yellow-and-black-punctulated ; orbits, nose,

chin, underside of the body, and streak on sides of the body

white; tail white, with two black bands.

Hab. West Africa, Senegal (Rendal): B.M. Last Africa,

Abyssinia (Riippell’s type of Sc. /ewcoumbrinus, B.M.). North

Africa, Egypt. South Africa (Andrew Smith): B.M.

Var. Darker, back punctulated with reddish yellow and black.

Hab. West Africa (Whitfield). B.M.

Prof. Sundevall (in K. Vet. A. Hand. 1842, p. 216) considers

Sciurus leucoumbrinus, Riippell, of North-east Africa and Arabia

distinct from Sc. setosus of South Africa; the latter has the

“ears smaller, scarcely prominent, the hairs longer, thinner, and

with a long very fine tip; the hairs of the tail are black-brown at

the base, then white, with a black band and white tip; the

teeth are white in front. In size and every other particular they

are similar; but he says the skulls are very different, that of

Sc. setosus being the broadest, with the zygomatic arch more

curved, the nose short, blunt, and linear, not conical and sub-

acute.”’

The form of the ear in the stuffed specimens depends greatly

on the animal-preserver, and the length of the tips of the hair

on the state of the specimen.

The two species may be distinct ; but I am inclined to regard

the characters given as only individual peculiarities, though my

idea may prove incorrect when a large series from each country

can be compared ; skulls, however, are as apt to vary as other

parts of the animal, and are only to be depended on when a

series can be examined and compared.

3384 Mr. E. R. Lankester on the Anatomy of the Linpet.

3. Xerus trivittatus, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842,

vol. x. p. 264.

Xerus getulus, Temm. Esq. 124?

Fur dark grey-brown, white-and-black-punctulated ; vertebral

line rather paler; throat, chest, streak on sides of back, and

part of the sides white; belly nakedish, black: tail black-and-

white-varied; hairs white, with three black bands.

Hab. North Africa, Morocco (Drummond-Hay). B.M., type.

The specimen in the Museum, which I described in 1842 as

X. trivittatus, was said by Mr. Leadbeater, from whom it was

obtained, to have come from India; but I have no doubt he was

misled; and we have lately received living specimens direct

from Morocco, some of which are preserved in the Museum.

This species differs from X. setosus in the spines being thinner,

shorter, less rigid, the vertebral line paler, the sides white, and

the belly black. The black hairs are not so abundant, and

they are not to be observed amongst the white spines that form

the streaks.

XLIII.—On some undescribed points in the Anatomy of the

Limpet (Patella vulgata). By E. Ray Lanxesrer, Christ

Church, Oxford.

Ar the late meeting of the British Association I drew attention

to certain structures in connexion with the digestive and urmary

apparatus of the Limpet which had not been previously recorded,

and which have some importance as bearing on the general

morphology of the prosobranchiate Gasteropods. Although I

have not yet completed my drawings or fully worked out my

notes, I am anxious to give here a brief record of their substance.

Since Cuvier’s memoir on Patella, M. Milne-Edwards has

written on the circulatory organs of that mollusk, and MM.

Robin and Lebert have briefly noticed the generative organs,

and other authors have paid attention to the nervous system.

The points which I believe have been overlooked are :—

Ist. The existence of an orifice on each side of the “head,”

in the angle formed by its junction with the muscular foot, and

opening into the blood-smus surrounding the pharyngeal vis-

cera. These orifices I propose to call the capito-pedal orifices.

Qnd. The existence of a pair of very large, orange-coloured

salivary glands opening by four ducts (two on each side) into

the buccal cavity.

3rd. The peculiar laminated “crop,” like that of Chiton, re-

sembling in structure the psalterrum or manyplies of ruammants.

Mr. E. R. Lankester on the Anatomy of the Limpet. 335

4th. The form, size, and structure of the renal organ; its

communications with the exterior and with the pericardium.

5th. The absence of the oviduct described by Cuvier, or of any

such organ. In this matter I can merely confirm MM. Robin

and Lebert.

In working out these matters I have been most kindly aided

by my friend and teacher, Prof. Rolleston. On my showing to

him the capito-pedal orifices, and one or two other points, he

investigated them further with me, and has given much of his

valuable time and many suggestions towards confirming and

elucidating these and other structures.

With regard to the capito-pedal orifices, it seems somewhat

extraordinary that they have not been noticed by those very

careful.observers who confine their studies to the external cha-

racters of Mollusca. They immediately overlie the salivary

glands, and are often coloured with an orange-red secretion, the

origin of which is very obscure. The generative gland is in

direct communication with, or, rather, lies in, the cavity into

which they open; and they may serve as genital pores.

Of the salivary glands and crop I need say no more here.

Cuvier did not find either of them; and probably those who

have dissected Patella since have not directed their attention to

the digestive tract.

The renal organ has never been properly described. It is a

very large sac spreading between the liver and the muscular

tunic or mantle, and im many parts dendroid or branching. It

has two orifices, one on each side of the anus, which opens on

the right-hand side into the open chamber formed by the exten-

sion of the mantle over the “head and neck” of the animal.

Cuvier only recognized one of these orifices; and his error has

not been corrected. ach orifice is placed on a little yellowish

papilla, varying much in size and continuous with the substance

of the large anal papilla. The papillal orifice nearer the median

line is the smaller, and may be called the supraanal orifice ;

whilst that on the right hand is larger, and may be called the

infraanal. These two orifices represent two renal organs, as in

Lamellibranchs. The supraanal organ is very small and abor-

tive; it lies in the superficial curve of the rectum, and is con-

tinuous around that portion of the intestine with the large

infraanal or right kidney-organ. The orifice leads into a small

cavity, with reticulated walls of a compact brownish tissue,

perhaps contractile. The infraanal orifice leads into a great

crescent-like sac which curves round the whole liver-mass, ex-

tending under it on the right side over the muscular foot-disk,

but on the left side skirting the generative gland and termi-

nating at the left anterior corner ; it branches out dendritically

3386 Mr. E. R. Lankester on the Anatomy of the Limpet.

on the upper surface of the liver-mass, but does not completely

enclose it. This sac has a dark greenish-brown pulverulent

tissue, which is to a certain extent laminated ; and from its

orifice quantities of a dark powder can be forced. It is not im-

probable that water distends this sac when the limpet is in a

state of expansion, and that the liquid which oozes from the

animal when touched on its rock, exudes from the infraanal or

supraanal orifice.

By most careful dissection, Dr. Rolleston and myself detected

what appears to be a minute opening from the pericardium into

the supraanal articulated sac, lymg in the curve of the rectum.

The orifice I found first by opening the pericardium, when it

was seen between the bifurcation of the auricle at the right side

of the cavity, and was then traced from both the pericardium

and supraanal sac in other specimens.

Comparing this with Mr. Hancock’s description of the renal

organ of Nudibranchs, it is found that they differ chiefly im that

Patella retains the double character of the organ to a greater

extent than do the Nudibranchs; and this is what might be

expected from the bilateral symmetry exhibited in other parts

of its organization,—e. g. the capito-pedal orifices and the dis-

position of the gills. The small supraanal sac communicating

with the pericardium may be compared to Mr. Hancock’s

“pyriform organ ;” but it differs im having a separate commu-

nication of its own with the exterior, thereby retaining its cha-

racter as the left half of Bojanus’s organ. The infraanal or

right sac and orifice, on the other hand, undoubtedly corre-

sponds to the dendritic glandular sac and orifice of Doris, Bor-

nella, &e. Any comparison of adult structures must, however,

necessarily be very unsatisfactory in animals which have under-

gone such different modifications as Lamellibranchs, Prosobranchs,

and Nudibranchs; and we can only guess at homologies until

the development in each case is fully understood.

As to the absence of oviducts or sperm-ducts, | can most

fully confirm MM. Robin and Lebert, Dr. Rolleston having

most carefully tested my conclusions on this point before we

had seen the paper of the French naturalists.

Reverting again to the capito-pedal orifices, | may just ob-

serve that their opening into a blood-sinus is not a little re-

markable, calling to mind the discoveries of M. Lacaze-Duthiers

as to orifices bringing water from the exterior into the branchial

veins of Tethys, Pleurobranchus, &c. Whether such be their

function, or whether, as seems most probable, they are genital

pores, I cannot say. Chiton, which is allied to Patella very

closely, forms a notable exception to the rule of an asymmetrical

genital pore among Gasteropods, having two bilaterally sym-

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 337

metrical sexual orifices. The orange-coloured matter surround-

ing these orifices in Patella, and their position close to the mass

of the salivary gland, is somewhat inexplicable, unless it should

appear that part of the salivary gland is an accessory generative

gland.

I have been induced to offer this abstract before proceeding

to publish a fuller account, with drawings, as there may be a

delay of some time in this; at the same time an opportunity

may be obtained of correcting or adding to some of these notes.

XLIV.—On the Structure of the Annelida, including a critical

Examination of the most recent Works on this class of Worms.

By E. Craparepe*.

A sosourn of five or six months at Naples, during the winter of

1866-67, enabled me to devote myself persistently to the study

of the Annelida of its bay. The extraordinary richness of this

sea surrounded me with an abundance of materials so great that

IT could not make use of the whole; and from the very first day

I was convinced how erroneous is the opinion of M. Quatrefages +

that volcanic shores are poor i Annelida. The poverty which

has been detected here and there by that naturalist was certainly

due to other causes than vulcanicity.

The Annelida of Naples have been on the whole but little

investigated. They have, however, been more studied than is

generally supposed. Delle Chiaje, with his indefatigable spirit

of investigation, devoted to them many hours of observation.

He has accumulated drawings upon drawings, often without

taking the trouble to append to them any corresponding text.

His publications were made with but little method or continuity.

Moreover Delle Chiaje has been but little understood, and often

misunderstood {. His works are inexhaustible quarries, from

which the roughly squared blocks will only be slowly extracted.

How many times have I thought myself in a position to publish

entirely new facts, only to convince myself, by the careful exa-

* From the ‘ Bibliotheque Universelle, Archives des Sciences,’ Septem-

ber 1867, pp. 1-44. Communicated by the author. Translated by W.S.

Dallas, F.U.S.

This memoir forms part of the introduction to a work on the Annelida

of the Bay of Naples, to be published under the auspices of the Société

de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Genéve. This work, which is

now in the press, will be accompanied by thirty-one plates in 4to.

+ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés, tome i. p. 153.

{ Delle Chiaje himself complains of having been misunderstood by

Carus, Meckel, Wagner, Milne-Edwards, and Grube (Descrizione e Noto-

mia, &c., 1841, tome iii. p. 69), Now-a-days he might still further enlarge

this list.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 28

338 Prof. E. Claparede on the Structure of the Annelida.

mination of the figures of my illustrious predecessor, that these

facts were perfectly familiar to him*. Thus in every page, in

the course of this memoir, I shall have to bring Delle Chiaje out

of the undeserved obscurity in which he has too often remained

immersed, and to show him shinimg in the first rank. I hope

I shall not be accused of partiality in his favour. If I often

leave his errors, which I admit are numerous, in oblivion, it is

because they have no influence on the progress of science.

The circumstances under which I undertook the present

researches were eminently favourable. Science had just been

enriched by two important works relating to the Annelida—one

by M. Ehlers, the other by M. Quatrefages. Both of them pro-

fessed more or less to represent the actual condition of our know-

ledge. Aided by this double compendium, I could advance with

much more certainty upon a road which had been rendered easy.

I do not conceal from myself how much | am indebted to the

authors of these works for trouble avoided, for facilitated inves-

tigation}, for the sapping of errors even before their birth.

Nevertheless, without injustice towards them, I may be allowed

to say that the compendium has not always performed what it

seemed to promise.

The work of M. Ehlers, of which only one part (including the

* At the moment I shall only cite an example taken from beyond the

limits of the subject with which I am at present occupied. A fine Dendro-

cele Turbellarian, Thysanozoon tubereulatum (Planaria tuberculata, Delle

Chiaje, Thysanozoon Diesingii, Grube) is found in abundance in the Bay

of Naples. In studying this animal, I was struck by various anatomical

peculiarities, but especially by the following one :—The male apparatus is

formed of two perfectly distinct halves. There exist two penises opening

outwards, each separately, in the anterior part of the body, in front of the

female pore. Dendroccela were already known with a single sexual orifice,

and others with two; but here was one with three apertures. This excep-

tional fact naturally struck me. But what was my surprise, on turning

over the works of Delle Chiaje, to find a figure, without explanation, with-

out text, without even a name at the bottom of the page, representing

beyond any doubt a portion of the ventral surface of T. tuberculatum, and

indicating very exactly the three sexual pores (see Descr. e Notomia degli

Animali senza Vertebre, tab. 109. fig. 19. The male pores bear the letter

d, and the female pore the letter 7). This figure has slumbered since the

year 1841, unknown to anybody. Delle Chiaje has inscribed at the head

of one of his works the motto ‘‘ Res non verba.’’ He has been faithful to

it, perhaps even too faithful.

+ In connexion with this, however, it is impossible for me not to point

out a defect in the work of M. Quatrefages, which, no doubt, is not to be

ascribed to its author. I mean the number of false citations. The quan-

tity of typographical errors in the indication of volumes, pages, plates, and

figures exceeds anything that could be imagined, and deprives the work of

one of the merits which ought to have led to its most frequent consulta-

tion. Nowhere would exactitude have been more desirable than in this

sort of dictionary of science.

Prof. K, Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 339

order Nereidea) has appeared, has nothing general except its

title. It contains in reality a series of monographs devoted to

certain species found in the Adriatic. These monographs are

combined into a sort of whole by taxonomic considerations.

There is nothing deserving the name of a ‘ Treatise on Annelida ;’

the number of types investigated by the author is tvo small for

this. Nevertheless M. Ehlers’s monographs are models of

exactitude. Whenever I have had the opportunity of repeating

the observations of this anatomist, I have been obliged to admit

their perfect truthfulness, even in details of secondary import-

ance.

The ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés’ of M. de Quatrefages

corresponds better with its title. It is a real treatise on the

Annelida Polycheta. The author has set before him two ob-

Jects :—in the first place, a natural classification founded on ana-

tomy ; and then an enumeration of all names and synonyms, in

order to enable any one to find more easily the numerous me-

moirs and passages relating to Annelida which are now-a-days

disseminated pretty nearly everywhere. The author has devoted

long-continued attention and assiduous and prolonged labour

to this rather dry work, the fruits of which will chiefly be

gathered by others. No doubt this immense compilation pre-

sents some gaps or omissions, several of which will be indicated

in the present memoir ; but it could hardly have been otherwise,

considering the labyrinth through which the author had to find

his way. The clue which the ‘ Histoire des Annelés’ places in our

hands will be henceforward a guide which cannot be disdained.

This guide, indeed, must not be employed without a check.

The author has often consulted plates without taking the trouble

to read the corresponding text. The imperfection of a figure,

or a slip of the graver, has often led him into serious mistakes,

Thus, in his family Nerinea, M. de Quatrefages characterizes the

worms of the genus Pygospio (Clap.) by the sole circumstance

of their having uniramous feet, in opposition to all the rest of

the family, in which the feet are biramous*. It is only neces-

sary to open the volume in which I established the genus Py-

gospio + to see that I indicate the feet as biramous, and that I

describe in detail each ramus and the setee which it bears. M.

de Quatrefages, neglecting to read the text, has, no doubt esta-

blished his false diagnosis from a figure on a small scale which

accompanies my memoir, in which the dorsal ramus covers the

ventral one, and scarcely allows it to be seen. The following is

another perfectly similar example. Under the name of Lumbri-

* Hist. Nat. des Annelés, tome i. p. 437. 4

+ Beobacht. tber Anat. und Entw. wirbelloser Thiere an der Kuste der

Normandie angestellt. Leipzig, 1863, p. 37.

23%

340 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

conereis Edwardsii, | have described * a Eunicean from the shores

of Normandy, which M. de Quatrefages refers to the genus

Notocirrus}, distinguished from Lumbriconereis by the existence

of a dorsal cirrus on each foot. Now the Annelide in question

has the feet of a true Lwmbriconereis ; and I have nowhere de-

scribed or figured a dorsal cirrus. Here, also, the mistake of

M. de Quatrefages arises from his having neglected the text,

and attended only to the plate. In this, by a mistake of the

the engraver, the foot is represented reversed; and the little

terminal ligulet which occurs in all species of Lumbriconereis

must, no doubt, have been taken, in this position, by the French

zoologist for the dorsal cirrus of a Notocirrus. Nevertheless a

little care ought to have led to the recognition of the reversal of

position, especially by M. de Quatrefages, who has not allowed

himself to be led into error by the plates of Audouin and Milne-

Edwards, in which the feet of Lwmbriconereis are also repre-

sented reversed.

I have cited these two examples because they concern myself ;

but I have not been worse treated than many others, and |

shall too frequently have to point out analogous mistakes in the

course of this memoir. Nevertheless I repeat, with a little cir-

cumspection, the ‘ Histoire des Annelés’ might be employed as

a very useful guide.

On the other hand, I cannot admit that the ‘ Histoire des

Annelés’ represents the present state of science from an anato-

mical and physiological point of view. We owe to M. de Qua-

trefages a multitude of important observations upon this subject.

No one has studied the Annelida so persistently as he; no one,

especially, has had under his hands so great a number of types,

or studied them from such varied points of view. Elsewhere I

have already paid, in the most formal manner, my tribute of

admiration to these investigations {. Unfortunately, in the

strength of his own numerous and profound researches, the author

of the ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés’ has too often forgotten

that he had predecessors, and that some of his contemporaries

were exploring with ardour the same field as himself. No doubt,

in a work which is only an epitome of science, history cannot

occupy a great space, and the author is obliged to place himself

in an entirely objective point of view. But thisis not what M.

de Quatrefages has done, whose personality is always put for-

ward, even in the narration of facts known twenty or thirty

years before the first scientific efforts of the author. Hence

* Beobacht. &c. p. 58.

+ Hist. Nat. des Annelés, tome 1. p. 376.

{ See ‘Glanures zootomiques parmi les Annélides de Port Vendres.’

Geneva, 1864.

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 341

results an actual falsification of scientific history, an unconscious

falsification, no doubt, but one which we must nevertheless re-

gret. If, in the course of this memoir, I often refer to the

labours of old observers, this is partly as a protest against the

ostracism with which they are beginning to be treated.

However, if M. de Quatrefages has frequently thought that

he could dispense with the observations of his predecessors and

contemporaries, it is to his own detriment. How many errors

which I shall have to combat would have been avoided if the

author had conscientiously studied the works of Rathke, Delle

Chiaje, Grube, and many others, if he had taken count of the

investigations of histologists such as Kolliker, Leydig, &. He

would not then, as has sometimes occurred to him (with regard

to the structure of the branchiz, for example), have made science

retrograde to the period of Pallas.

This judgment may appear severe, but it will be amply justi-

fied. Nor do I think that the greatness of the work imterdicts

one from indicating its defects; moreover that just pointed

out could not be concealed. There is a second upon which |

cannot keep silence. Why has M. de Quatrefages, whose know-

ledge of the Annelida is so admirable, permitted himself to be

induced to describe so many genera and species from individuals

preserved in spirits in the Paris Museum? He knows better

than any one else that this kind of work is positively useless,

and that the Annelida can only be well studied at the seaside

and by means of living individuals. To describe as he has done

so many alcoholic varieties is to embarrass science with a caput

mortuum which will require many years to get md of *.

I shall follow step by step in these pages the introduction to

the ‘Histoire Naturelle des Annelés,’ but neither to reedit it

nor to criticise it in the style of a Zoilus. But if it is useless to

20 over a multitude of facts which are established in it defini-

tively, I wish, nevertheless, to dwell upon some points in which

I cannot agree with the author. I also wish to recall many old

observations which ought not to be forgotten. In a general

way I adopt the terminology of M. de Quatrefages ; and when I

depart from it, it is not without indicating my reasons.

Regions of the Body and Appendages.

After much discussion as to the equivalence of the external

parts of the body in Annelida, most recent authors have adopted

the nomenclature of M. Grube, who gives the name of “ buccal

segment” to the segment which bears the mouth, and that of

* A very competent judge, Prof. Schjédte, of Copenhagen, said to me

: : ;

only a few days ago, ‘* The museums press heavily upon science “—a phrase

only too true in many cases,

342 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

“cephalic lobe” ( prestomium, Huxley) to everything situated

in advance of it. I adopt this view, which has the advantage of

not attempting to solve the question, still undecided im many

cases (Glycera, Nemodrilus, &c.), of the number of segments

composing the cephalic lobe. Moreover the buccal segment is

often so similar to those which follow it that it is hardly possible

to refer it to a different region. M. de Quatrefages, taking up

an opinion already maintained by Rathke*, regards the cephalic

lobe and buccal segment as together forming the head; but he

does not himself adhere too rigidly to this opinion, since in his

descriptions he most frequently gives the name of head to the

cephalic lobe alone.

M. de Quatrefages has endeavoured to introduce a simplifica-

tion in the nomenclature of the appendages of the cephalic re-

gion, by giving the name of antenne to all the appendages whieh

spring from the cephalic lobe, that of tentacles to all those of

the buccal segment, and that of tentacular cirri to those of the

first feet, when they display characters which distinguish them

in a marked manner from their homologues belonging to the

feet placed further back. This nomenclature, which seems well

chosen at the first glance, nevertheless presents many incon-

veniences, and is often specifically inapplicable. In the first

place, the appendages of the cephalic lobe sometimes differ en-

tirely among themselves both as regards function and structure,

which has led most authors to give them different names. What

a difference there is, in particular, between the palpi (antennes

latérales, Aud. & Edw., Quatref.) and the frontal antenne of the

Lycoridea |—the former fleshy, multiarticulate, partially retrac-

tile, and occupied by the expansion of the largest nerve of the

body; the latter filiform, simple, not retractile, and scantily

provided with nerves. What a distance there is likewise between

the palpi (Kinberg and all recent authors) and the true antennee

in the Aphroditea! So true i his, that M. de Quatrefages has

not been able to remain faitnful to his principle in all cases.

Thus, in the Syliidea, he retains the name of frontal lobes for

organs evidently homologous with the palpi of the Lycoridea,

and which ought, consequently, in his nomenclature to bear the

name of antenne. This homology was demonstrated by Rathke ;

and no one, so far as I know, has yet contested it. It is true

that M. de Quatrefages is not always consistent in his incon-

sistency ; for when in certain Syllidea the palpi become elon-

gated, he restores to them the name of antenne +.

* De Bopyro et Nereide, commentationes anatomico-physiologice due.

Riga et Dorpat, 1837, p. 26.

t He restores it to them even with usury; for in the Polybostrichi he

regards the two palpi bifurcated at the extremity as four antenne.

Prof. FE. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida, 343

A second inconvenience of the nomenclature of M. de Quatre-

fages is that it is inapplicable in all those cases in which the

anterior segments are much condensed, and in which it is no

longer possible to determine to what segment a given pair of

appendages belongs. We shall see, for example, that in the

Phyllodocea and the Hesionea authors are unable to agree upon

this determination, and that M. de Quatrefages allows himself

to be led away by his theory of the appendages to establish

genera which no one will adopt. We also find the learned

Academician, for love of his theory, suppressing by a stroke of

his pen the buccal segment in most of the Sigalionida, or at

least attributing to them “an indistinct buccal segment, desti-

tute of appendages.” But nothing is more distinct than the

buccal segment of these Annelida; only it bears a pair of feet

with sete, which a buccal segment ought never to do, ac-

cording to the theory of M. de Quatrefages. Unfortunately the

author does not suspect that all the Polynoe likewise bear some

setee on the segment which he regards as the buccal ring, and

that it would consequently be necessary to imagine in them an

“indistinct buccal segment without appendages.”

M. de Quatrefages, however, gives us a rule (difficult of appli-

eation indeed, but still a rule) for the determination of the seg-

ments and their appendages. The cephalic lobe and the an-

tenne, he says, receive their nerves from the cerebral ganglion,

the buccal segment and its tentacles from the cesophageal con-

nectives, and the tentacular cirri from the ventral ganglionic

chain, This thesis is not tenable in presence of the modern

progress of embryology. Schaum asserted that in all Arti-

culata a segment is characterized by the presence of a ganglion,

and he started from this principle in denying that the head

in Arthropoda is formed of several segments amalgamated to-

gether. This doctrine was immediately refuted. In fact, the

nervous system is comparatively ~>ry late in being differentiated

in the embryos of Articulata; on the contrary, the appearance

of the segments (the protozonites as they have been called) is in

many cases the result of one of the first modifications of the

blastoderm. These primitive segments unite in groups, and

sometimes become soldered together, long before the differentia-

tion of the nervous system; and when this system is developed,

the number of its ganglia is not necessarily identical with that

of the primitive segments. In the Annelida especially, the

formation of the nervous system certainly sometimes follows

very closely upon that of the segments, as in the embryos of

Capitellus, for example; but most frequently it is much later.

I do not, indeed, dispute that in many Annelida the origin and

distribution of the nerves is in accordance with the rule of M.

344 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

de Quatrefages. However, we shall see that, in certain cases,

not only the buccal segment, but also some of the following

segments receive their nerves from the cesophageal connectives,

as in certain Aphroditea, some Hesionea, &c. According to the

theory of M. de Quatrefages, it would be necessary to regard the

whole of these segments as constituting a multiannular buccal

segment ; and yet each of them bears a pair of feet, and other-

wise presents all the characters of an independent segment.

For my part I employ the name of antenne for all the appen-

dages of the cephalic lobe; but where two of these appendages

originate from the lower part of this lobe, at the same time

acquiring special anatomical and physiological characters, I give

them, like most other authors, the name of palpi. The modified

cirri of the buccal segment and of the following segments are

designated in this memoir as ¢entacular cirri.

Without wishing to enter into details here upon the structure

of the feet in the Annelida, I desire to indicate what are the

relations of the sete to the tissues which surround them.

Some authors regard them as enclosed in a sac which is only an

invagination of the integuments; others think that they are

formed in an internal follicle, and only secondarily arrive at the

surface. This second opinion only is correct. In certain cases

(in Hesione and others, for example) the whole bundle issues in

a compact form through a single pedal aperture; but in others

each seta has its own orifice. This is the case especially with

the flabelliform bundles. The pore from which each seta issues

is not previously formed, but is perforated by the seta itself.

This is easy when the tissues of the worm are soft. But this is

no longer the case when the Annelide is protected by a resistant

unde and when the seta, armed with hooks in various diree-

tions, seems fit to get itself entangled in the tissues and to

produce serious lesions in them. In these cases the extremity

of the young seta is surmounted by a small provisional apparatus

terminated by an extremely sharp plate, destined to cut a free

passage for the seta in the tissues, and to prevent tearing.

The form of this piece varies greatly, like that of the seta and,

especially, that of the hooks, the passage of which is to be effected

without lesion of the neighbouring parts. [have already pointed

out some examples of this singular arrangement, but they have

been passed over without notice. Many others will be found in

the course of this memoir.

Integuments and Muscular Apparatus.

The integuments are composed of two layers :—one internal

* See especially under the head of Aphrodita aculeata, where this sub-

ject is treated in detail.

Prof. E. Clapareéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 345

and cellular (corium, Rathke, derme, Quatref.), corresponding

with the subcuticular or chitinogenous layer of the other Arti-

culata; the other extra-cellular, the cuticle (epidermis, Rathke

& Quatref.), sometimes very delicate, sometimes composed of a

thick layer of chitine. The integuments have hitherto been

studied with care only by M. Kolliker, to whom we are also

indebted for several other excellent works on the histology of

the Annelida, works all of which have unfortunately remained

unknown to the author of the ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés,’

The superficial layer deserves the name which has been given

to it by M. Kolliker. From a histogenetic point of view it falls

perfectly under the category of cuticular formations. The sub-

cuticular layer (hypodermis, Weism.) which secretes it may often

be denominated, as it is by M. Kolliker, an epithelium ; however,

in most cases it is impossible to recognize the limits of its con-

stituent cells. The nuclei seem rather to be scattered in it with

considerable regularity in a continuous granular stratum, as has

been seen by M. Baur in certain Arthropoda. Wherever the

cuticle attains a certain thickness, it presents two systems of

strie at right angles (or more frequently about 70°), which have

been already well observed by M. Kolliker*. The tubular pores

(Porenkaniile of the Germans), when they exist, are distributed

in lines congruent with these strie. M. Kolker has been

struck by the distance which separates these pores from each

other. Frequently, he says, not more than one of them corre-

sponds with each subjacent cell; and he asks whether these

apertures are really the homologues of the tubular pores (Poren-

kanile) of the Arthropoda, or whether they may not rather be

compared with apertures of the cutaneous glands, such as those

discovered by M. Leydig in the Pisczcole, or with the hairs of

Insects and Crustacea. ‘To this question I can reply positively

that the two categories of pores exist in the Annelida. Those

which serve for the discharge of certain secretions seem to exist

in all species. Sometimes, especially in the large species, they

attain a considerable diameter; but usually they are very wide

apart. Sometimes, however, we find them brought together in

groups or islets. The canalicular pores are much smaller and

much closer together, and do not correspond with glands. They

occur only in the species with a thick cuticle, and not even in

all these. I shall describe some examples in detail, especially

among the Hunicea. Wherever these very fine and approximated

* M. de Quatrefages, to whom these striz are not unknown, sees in them

the indication of two systems of fibres—an opinion which may be provi-

sionally admissible in the case of certain worms. Jn any case the learned

Academician with justice attributes to these strie the iridisation of the

surface of the body in many Annelides.

346 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

tubular pores exist, we likewise find the large scattered glandular

pores. This description applies not only to the external cuticle,

but also to that of the pharynx when it attains a great thickness.

The subcuticular layer (the dermis of M. de Quatrefages)

appears almost always to contain glandular follicles in all the

regions, even in the cirri and antenne. These follicles discharge

themselves outwards through the glandular pores that I have

just described. Some of them only secrete a thick liquid ; others

produce bundles of bacilli in their interior (I shall indicate these

under the name of bacilliparous follicles) ; others, again, secrete

granules.

The bibliography relating to the bacillar corpuscles of the

Annelida is already rich. To M. Max Miller belongs the prio-

rity of the discovery of these organs, which he described and

figured from the skin of two larval forms and from that of Che-

topterus. They have since been observed by Dr. Strethill Wright

in Spio, by M. F. Miiller in Cherusea, by M. Danielssen in Sea-

libregma, &c. I have myself devoted particular attention to

them. I have indicated them in the Phyllodocea, in a Tomo-

pteris (in concert with my friend Dr. Carpenter), in a Sphero-

syllis, in Spherodorum, and in the Palmyrida; and I have shown

that, under certain circumstances, the contents of these follicles

are suddenly discharged outwards. M. Kolliker has completely

confirmed these observations. In the Phyllodocea M. Ehlers

has likewise found the bacilliparous follicles, and ascribed to

them the secretion of the mucosity. It is curious that observa-

tions so numerous as these should have entirely escaped the

author of the ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés.’

Certain families have their integuments literally crammed with

bacilliparous follicles, even in the cirri and antennee. This is

the case especially in all the Spiodea and Ariciea and a great

part of the Chetopterea. Their abundance is also remarkable in

a great number of Phyllodocea and in some Hesionea. In the

latter, especially, their grouping and their relation to the excre-

tory pores are very remarkable. The function of these organs,

indeed, is still quite problematical. I formerly compared them

with the cells filled with acicule of the Turbellaria, and with

the urticating organs of the Apneustic Mollusca, the Acalephe,

and Anthozoa; but this is pure hypothesis.

The tubular glands filled with spherical granules were first

indicated by me in several Annelida. They sometimes attain a

very large size, particularly in the Lycoridea; and in this case

the glomerule formed by the interlacing of the glandular tubes

was known even to the older writers, and regarded by them as a

sac. M. de Quatrefages* was acquainted with one of the pas-

* Hist. Nat. des Annelés, tome i. p. 75.

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 347

sages* in which I mentioned these organs, and cited an analo-

gous observation of M. Keferstein; but by a singular mistake

he makes us describe convolutions of blood-vessels, whilst we

speak very positively of glandular coils. Such a confusion is

hardly possible ; for the passage relates to Nereids, in which the

coils in question are colourless, whilst the vessels are of a fine

red colour. M. Kolliker was the first to discover, in Sphero-

dorum peripatus, that each coil of the glomerules contained in

the spherical appendages opens outwards by a separate pore.

This observation has just been repeated by M. R. Greef in

Spherodorum Claparedii +.

Muscular System.

The muscles of the Annelida present extraordinary variations

in their histological structure, as I shall have more than one

occasion to show in the course of this memoir. Sometimes they

are composed of fibres with parallel edges and entirely destitute

of nuclei, sometimes, on the contrary, of fibre-cells furnished

with large nuclei.

The existence in the Annelida of fibre-cells of a muscular

nature has indeed been entirely denied by M. Schneider}. But

although this naturalist may be right in the immense majority

of cases, we shall see that this rule is liable to some exceptions

(pharynx of certain Nereidea, tentacles of various Terebellea, &c.).

Sometimes the muscular fibre separates into two distinct layers

(one axial, the other cortical), as M. Leydig was the first to

remark §. Nowhere is this structure so distinctly shown as in

Nephthys. Lastly, in some Annelida, as M. de Quatrefages very

justly indicates, the muscular system undergoes a remarkable

simplification, in the loss of its fibrillar structure. Sometimes

we find, in place of the muscles, nothing but a contractile proto-

plasm with nuclei dispersed through it. Of this we shall indi-

cate some examples hereafter.

The ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés’ indicates between each

segment a sort of tendinous raphe upon which the muscular

fasciculi are inserted ||. These raphes have no existence. It is

easy to ascertain, from longitudinal sections of Annelida, that

the longitudinal fasciculi are continued without any interruption

throughout the length of the worm. This has already been

seen and described by De Blainville, Delle Chiaje, Rathke,

Meckel, &c.

* Beobacht. &c. p. 52.

t See ‘Annals’ for July, vol. xx. p. 4 et seq.

+ “Ueber die Muskeln der Wiirmer, &c.,” Miiller’s Archiv, 1864, p. 590.

§ * Ueber Phreoryctes Menkeanus, Archiv fiir mikrosk. Anat. Band i.

p. 249.

|| This notion, however, is revived from Cuvier,

348 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

More or less complete muscular floors sometimes divide the

perivisceral cavity into several chambers. M. de Quatrefages

cites, as presenting this arrangement, the genus Polyophthalma

and Terebella conchilega. Many other examples might be cited.

Such are :—the Opheliea, the Polycirrida, many Terebellea, the

Aphroditea, and the great majority of the Annelida Errantia, in

which the perivisceral cavity is divided into three longitudinal

chambers; the Glycerea, in which it is divided into two, &c.

Digestive Organs.

For the different parts of the alimentary tube and, especially,

of the trunk, M. de Quatrefages has endeavoured to establish a

complete nomenclature, the opportuneness of which is at least

contestable so long as the homologies upon which it is supposed

to be founded are by no means demonstrated. Why, for exam-

ple, in the Syllidea, should we give the name of dentary reyion

of the trunk to an organ with glandulous walls, which constitutes

no part of the trunk and contains no teeth*? The names em-

ployed by other authors—such as fleshy portion of the pharynx

(Milne-Edw.), gizzard (Williams), and proventriculus (irsted)—

appear to me to be very preferable. Are there any sufficient

reasons for setting aside the names ventriculus and glands of the

ventriculus, employed originally by Rathke for the Nererdea, and

repeated by his successors? Is it really necessary to replace

them by those of wsophagus and salivary glandst? I do not

think so. Rathke’s names were at least justified by analogy.

One generally regards the salivary glands as more or less con-

nected with the buccal cavity, whilst the glands in question

often occur twenty or thirty segments behind the buccal seg-

ment.

In certain Annelida the posterior region of the intestine, fol-

lowing the biliary region, acquires a peculiar appearance. Its

wall becomes filled with cells secreting curious concretions de-

stined, no doubt, to be eliminated with the feces. I designate

this part of the intestine by the name of the urinary region,

although, chemically, it does not seem to contain any uric acid f.

* M. de Quatrefages, it is true, enumerates a certain number of Syllidea

armed with teeth im this region; but we shall find that in most cases, pro-

bably even in all, there is an error, and that the worms in question belong

to totally different families.

+ This name of salivary glands is indeed borrowed from Rud. Wagner,

who employed it, as well as that of poison-glands, because he assumed that

a canal starting from these glands penetrated to the extremity of the jaws.

This canal does not exist. (See ‘Zur Anatomie von Nereis,” Isis, 1834,

p- 133.)

{ I shall speak of this again in more detail in connexion with certain

Syllidea.

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 349

Perivisceral Cavity and Circulatory System.

We are indebted to M. de Quatrefages and Dr. Williams, but

especially to the former, for a profound investigation of the

perivisceral cavity and of the lymph which it contains. These

naturalists, more than any one else, have pointed out the physio-

logical importance of this liquid, which cannot be too highly

estimated. Some details, only, require a slight rectification

here. The perivisceral cavity is lined by a delicate membrane,

which is not easily demonstrable, except in the larger species—

a membrane the discovery of which M. de Quatrefages ascribes

to himself, and to which he gives the name of peritoneum. Had

he thoroughly explored the works of Delle Chiaje and Rathke,

he would have found in them both the membrane and the name.

The structure of this peritoneum (tunica sierosa, tunica peri-

toneale of Delle Chiaje) is subject to considerable variations, as

I shall show in the course of this memoir. At any rate, the

perivisceral cavity is clothed, in some species, with vibratile cilia

borne by the peritoneum. If I am not mistaken, Dr. Sharpey

was the first to describe these, in Aphrodita; Dr. Williams then

detected them in the branchiz of the Glycere; and I described

them as occurring in the whole of the perivisceral cavity of the

latter worms. They have also been seen in the Tomopteridea.

M. de Quatrefages, who only notices in passing the observation

of Dr. Williams, adds that this ciliary movement was long since

known to him in a great number of Annelida, and that it will

be met with in all the species, if we take the trouble to look for

it. This opinion is not well founded. The immense majority

of the Annelida present no ciliary movement in the perivisceral

cavity, except at the entrance to the segmental organs. For

my own part I am acquainted with the perivisceral ciliary coat

only in the following groups :—in all the Aphroditea, Glycerea,

and Polycirrida, in the Tomopteridea, and in a small and rather

abnormal Terebella (T. vestita). It is a striking circumstance

that all these Annelida, with the exception of the little Terebella

and Aphrodita aculeata, are completely destitute of vessels.

Now, of these two exceptions, one (the Aphrodita) is an animal

with a rudimentary vascular system, helonging to a family which

is otherwise entirely anangian ; the other, the Terebella, belongs

to a family which is generally vascular, but one tribe of which,

that of the Polycirrida, is anangian. Considering these facts,

I must regard the perivisceral ciliary movement as a function

vicarial of the circulation in Annelida deprived of a true circu-

latory system.

The circulation of the Annelida has been most carefully de-

scribed by M. de Quatrefages, who at the same time renders full

350 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

justice to the beautiful investigations of M. Milne-Edwards. It

is to be regretted that he has not shown the same favour to

Rud. Wagner and Rathke. The distinction which he establishes

between the arterial and venous currents appears to me to be

very just in its principal features. The same view has been

entertained by some authors; witness the name of nervarteria

given by Delle Chiaje to the ventral vessel—that is to say, the

aorta in the sense of M. de Quatrefages.

The existence of blood-corpuscles in the vessels of certain

Annelida is now-a-days indubitable. M. de Quatrefages, in his

‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés,’ admits three examples of this

—the Glycere, Phoronis, and the Syilidea. The latter alone is

of any value. Thus in the Glycere the red corpuscles belong

to the liquid of the perivisceral cavity ; and as to Phoronis, that

genus can hardly retain its place among the Annelida. But,

without speaking of an old observation of Rud. Wagner with

regard to a Terebella, which has, moreover, been confirmed by

M. Kolliker, other examples may be cited. In the present

memoir true blood-corpuscles will be found described in the

Opheliee, the Cirratulea, and the Staurocephale.

Respiratory Apparatus.

M. de Quatrefages has made science actually go back as re-

gards the structure of the organs of respiration. This is the

weakest part of his book—weak in the introduction, weak in the

general remarks on each family. The branchiz, in the opinion

of the honourable Academician, have a proper structure, which

enables them to be always distinguished. ‘ These organs,” he

says, “are characterized by a single canal, at and from which

afferent and efferent vessels arrive and depart. ‘This canal, the

proper walls of which are sometimes visible and sometimes in-

distinct, is surrounded by a diaphanous substance which seems

to be produced by the thickening of the dermis. In this sub-

stance are hollowed out ampulliform lacunz more or less deve-

loped, and always destitute of proper walls. The whole is

surrounded by an extremely fine epidermis, which presents no

appreciable structure. Finally, this epidermis is beset with

vibratile cilia...... At the end of a variable time the branchia

contracts, although no muscular fibres can be discovered in it.

The ampulle empty themselves, so as sometimes to disappear

entirely. The blood flows through the central canal of the

branchia, and, on arriving at the base of the organ, passes into

the efferent vessel. In this movement of return it necessarily

meets the venous blood, and cannot but become mixed with a

certain quantity of blood which has not undergone the action of

the air.”

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 351

In contrast to this radically false description, let us see how

the circulation is effected in the normal branchia of an Annelide.

There cannot be in a regular way any mixture of arterial and

venous blood; in fact the artery travels as far as the extremity

of the branchia, where it bends round to return as a vein. The

vein and the artery are exactly parallel to each other. Through

the whole length of the branchia these two vessels are put in

communication by a double series of vascular loops, which pass

into the subcuticular layer, and which are subjected with the

greatest facility to the action of the water charged with oxygen,

through the very thin cuticle. As to the contraction of the

supposed ampull, there is nothing of the kind. Some genera,

such as the Terebelle and the Telethuse, for example, certainly

present rhythmical contractions of the whole branchia, but not

of the vessels themselves. This fact, however, is exceptional.

The family Serpulea alone presents in the structure of its

branchie a distant resemblance to the description of M. de

Quatrefages. In these Annelides the artery is continued directly

into the vein at the base of the branchiz, and from their point

of union starts a single vessel, which penetrates into the

branchia and sends a cecum into each branch of it. But

M. de Quatrefages describes in the secondary branches of the

branchiz of the Serpulea all his apparatus of ampulle, of which

not the least trace exists. The cecal vessel does not present

any ramification ; it is simply cylindrical and contractile, as de-

scribed by MM. Grube and Kolliker*. In these branchiz the

blood exhibits an alternating circulatory movement; but this is

the only exception}; in all the other families the branchial

circulation constantly takes place in the same direction. Czcal

vessels with alternating circulation are met with also in the

tentacles of the Spiodea, Amphictenea, and Pherusea, and in a

part of the so-called branchial filaments of the Cirratulea; but

the latter organs are not respiratory (unless perhaps lymphatic).

How could M. de Quatrefages commit an error so manifest

and so frequently repeated? This is easily explamed. The

branchiz are in general not cylindrical, but slightly compressed.

Now, in the position which they must naturally take under the

microscope, the artery exactly conceals the vein, and one might

* M. Milne-Edwards, ignoring these observations, erroneously attributes

to the Tubicolous Annelida lymphatic branchiz exclusively (Legons sur

PAnat. et la Physiol. tome i. p. 103).

+ I think I have a right to speak thus categorically. Of the twenty-six

families of Annelida admitted by M. de Quatrefages, I have studied twenty-

five anatomically, by the dissection of numerous species or individuals. As

to the twenty-sixth, that of the Hermellea (Sabellaria), it is too nearly re-

lated to the Amphictenea and Terebellea to allow us to suppose that it

differs much from them.

352 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

suppose that there is only one vessel. As to the supposed am-

pullee, these are the projections of the vascular loops. It is only

necessary to turn the branchiz a little, in order to dissipate the

first illusion. M. de Quatrefages has allowed himself to be de-

ceived by the first examination, as Pallas did long since.

But this error is not permissible at the present day. It is

already thirty years since M. Grube settled it. It is thirty

years since, in his anatomy of Pleione carunculata, he in-

dicated the occurrence, in the Terebelle and Arenicole, of this

deceptive appearance, which led Pallas into an error which

M. de Quatrefages has now reproduced. He showed that a less

superficial examination led to the recognition of the artery, the

vein, and the loops which unite them. No microscopist warned

of the danger will go and throw himself upon it. Many modern

observers have described and figured the duplicity of the axial

vessel of the branchia,—amongst these M. Grube and M.

Schmarda in the Cirratulea, M. Schmarda in Nephthys, Dr.

Johnston in the Nerine, M. Keferstein in the Spiodea, and

myself in the Spzodea and Eunicea. At a still earlier period,

Delle Chiaje* described in detail in Eunice and Diopatra the

artery and the vein passing spirally side by side+ in the interior

of the branchia, at the same time emitting numerous vascular

branches {. But all these observations have remained dead

letters to the author of the ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Annelés.’

I have stated that all Annelida present the typical structure

of the branchize, except the Serpulea. I must, however, add

that one family presents a remarkable simplification of this

organization. This is the family Spiodea. Throughout this

family the branchize only contain the two principal vessels, the

artery and the vein ; the lateral loops are wanting.

The lymphatic branchiz will form the subject of a special

investigation, in the Annelida which present them (Sigalionida,

Dasybranchi, Glycere).

* Tstituzioni di Anatomia comparata, 2* ediz. tome il. p. 76. Naples,

1836.

+ This description is very correct, as we shall see hereafter in connexion

with Diopatra neapolitana (Delle Chiaje).

} M. Milne-Edwards, that excellent observer, has likewise recognized

the duplicity of the branchial vessel; but, in his ‘ Lecons sur la Physiol.

et Anat. des Animaux’ (tome i. p. 217), he has modestly put his own

observations into the shade, in order to set off those of M. de Quatrefages

and proclaim the existence of a cecal vessel with ampulliform diverticula.

The observations of M. de Quatrefages upon the branchiz of the Glycere

and Polydore, the only ones that he cites, appeared to him decisive. M.

de Quatrefages has been unfortunate in the selection of his examples :

the Polydore, with their simple branchial loop, cannot produce the illu-

sion of the ampulliform diverticula; and the Glycere have no vessels at all!

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annclida, 358

Reproductive Apparatus.

The reproductive apparatus of the Annelida has hitherto been

very imperfectly known. Numerous works have indeed thrown

fresh light upon the educatory organs, known, since Dr. Williams

wrote upon them, by the name of segmental organs. But as

regards the sexual glands our knowledge has made but little

progress for the last thirty or forty years. ° This memoir will, I

hope, make known these organs in a satisfactory manner in a

great number of species. M. Ehlers limits himself to saying

that the sexual glands may be referred to a single fundamental

type—namely, that of a coherent cellular mass, engendered on

the inner surface of a part of the wall of the body, or on the

dissepiments. This statement is true in many cases. M. Krohn

saw the ovules make their appearance as a sort of epithelium on

the surface of the dissepiments in Alciope ; and I have myself

made perfectly similar observations on Protula Dysteri. This

rule cannot, however, be regarded as general. The sexual glands

often present themselves under perfectly different conditions.

The observations of M. de Quatrefages relate chiefly to the

Nereida and Eunicea. He has seen the sexual elements make

their appearance in these Annelida in a glandular organ extended

beneath the abdominal nervous chain. This description is at

any rate very inaccurate, as will be seen hereafter on reading

the exposition of the singular construction of the sexual glands

in various Lycoridea &c.

The distribution and structure of the sexual glands in the

Annelida is subject to numerous variations, which will be illus-

trated by a multitude of examples in the course of this memoir.

Nevertheless the following form may be regarded as the most

generally diffused among the Annelida :—The sexual glands form

more or less complex racemes or networks of cords, the axes of

which are occupied by sanguiferous branches, which are often

contractile. The sexual elements in course of growth form ruffs

all round the vascular axes, and become developed at the ex-

pense of a layer of nuclei contiguous to the vessel. In the females

the ovules are often in immediate contiguity to each other in the

ovary ; but sometimes (in Owenia, Delle Chiaje, and some species

of Polynoé) each of them is enclosed in a special ovisac. In all

cases the ova, when arrived at maturity, detach themselves from

the ovary, either immediately, or mediately by the rupture of the

ovisac. For the most part the spermatozoids likewise detach them-

selves from the testes to float freely in the perivisceral cavity.

This fundamental form undoubtedly sometimes undergoes

important modifications—for example, to produce the singular

sexual tissue of the Nereidea or the floating testes of the Dasy-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.3. Vol. xx. 24.

354 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

branchi, which will be described in the special portion of the

present memoir. The formation of the ova in the Terebellea

and Serpulea departs from it still more widely; but throughout

we shall find a cellular tissue, either fixed or composed of float-

ing elements, in the midst of which the sexual elements are

developed.

The sexual glands have indeed been known for a long time in

certain Annelida; but these early observations have been in part

forgotten. Thus whilst Pallas* erroneously represented the ova

of Aphrodita as originating in the liquid of the perivisceral

cavity, G. R. Treviranust+ and Delle Chiajet were well acquainted

with the true ovaries at the base of the feet in these worms.

Delle Chiaje- also indicates the ovaries of the Pherusea, Her-

mione, Polyodonta, Parthenopeia, Divpatra, Nephthys, Telamon,

&c. He knew very well that the ova are formed in the ovaries,

but that, when arrived at maturity, they detach themselves

therefrom, and float freely in the perivisceral cavity$. Even

the existence of a blood-vessel in the axis of the sexual glands

was not, unknown to some observers. Thus Delle Chiaje|| indi-

cates the axial vessels of the ovarian racemes in Siphonostomum

and the Stylarioida; M. Stannius {J has made analogous obser-

vations on Amphinome rostrata; M. Grube has seen the ovules

originate round vessels in the Arenicole**; and M. Schmarda++

describes the axial vessel in the ovaries of Huphrosyne. All these

observations appear to have met with little credit, but they are

none the less perfectly correct.

Frequently, it is true, organs have been wrongly regarded as

sexual glands. For example, wherever Rathke believed he saw

testes in the Nereides, Pectinaria, &c. he was mistakenf{. All

authors have been mistaken with regard to the testes of the

Arenicole. The segmental organs of the Terebellea have also

had the fate of being taken for ovaries by nearly everybody from

Cuvier to MM. Milne-Edwards, Grube, Quatrefages, and even

Sars. Dr. Williams, of course, did not remain behind, as this

* Miscellanea Zoologica, p. 91.

+ Zeitschrift fiir Physiol. Bd. iii. p. 165. Darmstadt, 1829.

t Descrizione e Notomia, &c. tom. v. p. 59.

§ Istituzioni di Anat. Comp. ed. 2. tom. 11. p. 158.

|| Descrizione, &c. tom. ii. p. 78.

q Isis, 1831, pp. 989-990.

** Zur Anatomie der Kiemenwiirmer, 1838, p. 16.

++ Neue wirbellose Thiere, Bd. ii. p. 137.

{{ Rathke himself, however, recognized these errors as soon as he

perceived that the Arenicole, the Ammotrypane, &c. had the sexes sepa-

rate. The segmentai organs, which he had previously regarded as testes,

then became to him muciparous glands. (See “‘ Beitrage zur Fauna Nor-

wegens,”’ Nova Acta, &c. 1843, tom. xx. p. 201.)

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 355

was too favourable to his theory. The mistake appears to have

been caused in some cases by the presence of ovules in these

organs, which are probably concerned in oviposition *.

Since the investigations of Dr. Williams, the segmental

organs have given rise to much controversy. Most recently,

M. Ehlers regards them as apparatus destined to conduct out-

ward the mature sexual elements ; and this opinion is certainly

correct. Besides the facts cited in its support by that anatomist,

others will be found in the course of the present memoir. Ne-

vertheless this is not the only function of the segmental organs.

Thus they exist in the anterior segments of many Annelida in

which the ovules and spermatozoids never penetrate into that

region. Their wall is often glandular, and histologically com-

parable with the elements of the kidney in the Gasteropoda

(Amphictenea, Pherusea). Therefore I hardly doubt that these

organs also play an exerementitial part. We know also that in

the Oligochzeta only a small number of these segmental organs

are modified for the purpose of conducting outward the sexual

elements, whilst the rest incontestably fulfil other functions.

In the Polycheta, likewise, it is only a part of the segmental

organs that take the part of an efferent generative apparatus.

The older authors, who were acquainted at least with the

external apertures of the segmental organs, such as Treviranus

(who describes them in Aphrodita) and Delle Chiaje (who as-

sumes their existence in all Annelida, and mentions them in

many species), attributed a very different function to these

organs. They regarded them as serving for the introduction of

water into the perivisceral cavity. This opinion can no longer

be maintained. The direction of the ciliary movement in the

calibre of the tube is opposed to it, as also the circumstance

that the inner orifice of the segmental organ seems to be

wanting in some instances ; at least I believe [ have ascertaimed

this to be the case in some Capitellea.

M. de Quatrefages, who has never been able to see a seg-

mental organ, attributes to M. Ehlers and myself the honour of

having contributed most to the extension of Dr. Williams’s

* It is chiefly to M. de Quatrefages that we owe the recent demonstra-

tion of the dicecious nature of the immense majority of the Annelida. We

must, however, not forget that before him Delle Chiaje maintained this

diceciousness in opposition to all his contemporaries, and that im the most

formal manner. He knew that the generative organs present the same

form in both sexes. According to his observations, the males are less

abundant than the females. (See Descrizione e Notomia, &c., tom. ii,

p- 100). Baster and Pallas, however, appear to have been the first to

ascertain positively the diceciousness of an Annelide, Aphrodita aculeata.

(See Natuurkundige Uitspanningen, &c., Deel ii. p. 68, edit. 1817, and

Miscellanea Zoologica, 1766, p. 90.)

RAK

356 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

discovery. He ought, I think, to have cited in the first place

the name of M. Hering, who is nowhere mentioned in the

‘Histoire Naturelle des Annelés.’ However this may be, the

honourable Academician reproaches us, and especially myself,

with having said a great deal and drawn but little. I do not

think I deserve this reproach, as the segmental organs of

the Annelida, being very simple modifications of a very con-

stant type, may be easily described without having recourse

to the pencil. Moreover, without speaking of the works

of M. Ehlers and myself, M. de Quatrefages might have

found segmental organs described and figured by M. Kefer-

stein, in Cirratulus filiformis (Keferst.), Capitella (Notomastus)

rubicunda (Kef.), Terebella gelatinosa (Kef.), and Syllis oblonga

(Kef.). Nevertheless, in order to satisfy the desire expressed by

M. de Quatrefages, figures relating to the segmental organs of

various Annelida will be found in the plates following this

memoir.

It is, moreover, indubitable that there are Annelida destitute

of segmental organs, or at least in which these organs are re-

duced to simple apertures in the wall of the body.

Nervous System.

It is undoubtedly to M. de Quatrefages and M. Leydig

that we owe the finest investigations upon the nervous system

of the Annelida; the former has occupied himself especially

with the exterior form of this system, and the latter with its

histology. The ‘Histoire Naturelle des Annelés’ omits all

historical details upon this subject; but if we go back to the

earlier works of the author, we shall find a concise and well-

executed summary of the previous researches*. It is more to

be regretted that it takes no notice of the labours of recent

histologists, MM. Leydig, Mettenheimer, &c. On the whole

we find in the portions of this memoir relating to the nervous

system a confirmation of the investigations of M. de Quatrefages.

On some points, however, I must differ from him. Lastly, there

is an important chapter upon which I have hardly a right to pro-

nounce judgment. In nearly all the families M. de Quatrefages

has been fortunate enough to detect a stomato-gastric nervous

* See “Etudes sur les types inférieurs de l’embranchement des

Annelés. Mémoire sur le systeme nerveux des Annélides,’ Ann. Sci.

Nat. tome xiv. p. 332, 1850. No doubt this summary presents some

gaps. We regret especially to see no mention in it of the investigations

of G. R. Treviranus upon the nervous system of Aphrodita; for this

observer was already well acquainted not only with the ventral chain and

the nerves which origmate from it, but also with the ganglia of rein-

forcement at the base of the feet.

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 357

system, similar to that of the Hirudinea. I confess that I have

been unable to discover it ; but I feel that this negative result is

of no great weight in so difficult an investigation. I am, how-

ever, astonished to find that so many other observers have had

no better fortune than myself in perfectly similar endeavours.

M. Leydig has described in the Hirudinea a structure of the

nervous centres which he characterizes as follicular*; and he op-

poses it to that of the Annelida, according to his own researches

on the Oligocheta and those of M. de Quatrefages on the Poly-

cheta. This distinction cannot be made so absolute. Certain

Annelida Polycheta have a follicular nervous system as well as the

Hirudinea. This is the case, for example, in Nereilepas caudata

&c., as I shall show hereafter. Others present nothing of the kind.

The structure of the nervous system varies, however, astonish-

ingly in the series of the Annelida; the distribution of the

nerve-cells especially is subject to a multitude of modifications

which we shall point out in particular cases. In the ventral

chain, the cells belong chiefly to the ventral surface and the

sides, as M. Leydig has already noticed. The existence of large

tubular fibres on the dorsal surface of the nervous chain, so

general in the Oligocheeta, is restricted in the Polycheta to a

small number of families (Capitellea, Ariciea, Spiodea, Syllidea,

Eunicea), and apparently even only to certain representatives of

these families.

The terminations of the nerves in the Annelida have hitherto

been studied only by myself, M. Keferstein, and M. Kolliker. Nu-

merous observations on this subject will be found in the present

memoir. All these terminations seem to be in relation to the

function of touch. The nervous expansion of the organs of

sight and hearing f is in reality still very imperfectly known,

even in Alciope, notwithstanding the investigations of M. Ley-

dig. In connexion with this, I cannot abstain from mention-

ing an opinion of J. Miiller’s, which has fallen into oblivion.

We owe to that great physiologist ¢ an excellent figure of the

central nervous system and of the eyes of the Nereides, a figure

to which his successors have added nothing very positive. In

his opinion, the organ which we now call the crystalline is not

a dioptric medium ; he denies its transparency, and regards it as

a terminal inflation of the optic nerve. Although the trans-

* The observations of M. Baudelot upon Clepsine (Ann. Sci. Nat.

tome iii. 1865, p. 126) are a complete confirmation of this.

+ When M. Victor Carus (Handbuch der Zoologie, p. 430) ascribes

auditory capsules to the majority of the Annelida, he deceives himself very

greatly. The existence of these organs is peculiar to a very restricted

number of species.

+ “Mémoire sur la structure des yeux chez les Mollusques Gastéropodes

1 slques Annélides,” A Sci. N; > xxii. 1831 23

et quelques Annélides,”’ Ann. Sci. Nat. tome xxu. 1831, p. 9.

358 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

parency of the crystalline is incontestable in many cases, Miiller’s

opinion as to the functional value of this organ must not be re-

jected. The eyes of the Nereides and of most of the Annelida

appear to be destitute of any apparatus of accommodation. If

therefore we assume that the perceptive elements are lodged be-

tween the granules of the pigment, only objects placed at a

determinate and perfectly fixed distance can project their images

upon the surface of this choroid pigment. The vision of the

animal would, in this case, necessarily be very restricted. This

difficulty disappears if we seek in the crystalline at once a re-

fractive body and a perceptive organ, nearly as we seem compelled

to admit with regard to the crystalline cones of the Arthropoda.

The image projected at various depths in the crystalline by

objects placed at variable distances would then always be formed

in a sensitive layer.

Regeneration of Mutilated Parts.

The observations of Bonnet upon the regeneration of muti-

lated parts in the Karthworms, confirmed by Lyonnet, Réau-

mur, Dugés, &c., were hesitatingly doubted by Vandelius *

and Bose +, and more recently and positively by Dr. Williams f,

M. Vogt §, and others. We must therefore be thankful to

those who, like Dr. Baird ||, have brought to light certain early

observations, or, like M. de Quatrefages §, have corroborated

and confirmed them by fresh experiments.

The reproduction of mutilated parts in the Annelida is in-

contestable. A great number of these worms, perhaps all, can

even reproduce the anterior region including the head. Among

* “Dominici Vandelii philosophi ac medici dissertationes tres. De

Aponi Thermis, de nonnullis insectis terrestribus, et Zoophytis marinis, et de

Vermium terre reproductione, atque Tenia canis. Padua, 1758,” pp. 98-

147. This work, which seems to have been forgotten, is nevertheless the

production of a good observer. In very careful experiments, repeated for

two successive years, he did not succeed in seeing mutilated Earthworms

reproduce their anterior extremity. He, nevertheless, prudently con-

cludes that these experiments require to be made with extreme care, and

does not accuse Réaumur of having deceived himself. We know that

Duges afterwards hkewise began by obtaining negative results, but that

subsequent experiments succeeded with him completely. The regeneration

of the anterior part takes place, in fact, only when the number of seg-

ments removed is not too great.

t+ Histoire Naturelle des Vers, tome i. pp, 128 & 215.

{ “ Report on the British Annelides,” Report of the British Association,

1851, p. 247.

§ Vorlesungen uber nutzliche und schadliche, verkannte und verlaum-

dete Thiere. Liepzig, 1864, p. 91.

|| Johnston’s Catalogue of British non-parasitical Worms. Appendix.

§| Ann. Sci. Nat. tome i. 1844, p. 100; Hist. Nat. des Anneles, tome 1.

p. 126,

Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida. 359

recent authors, M. de Quatrefages has afresh demonstrated this

fact in Eunice, and Dalyell followed step by step the reproduc-

tion of a head and branchie by the posterior extremity of a

Sabella*. For my own part I have frequently met with marine

Annelida (Hteone, Nephthys, &c.) which had undoubtedly re-

produced their anterior region. The regenerated part is

distinguished by a lighter colour and smaller diameter. The

aspect of these worms recalls that of the Heteronereides; so

much do the two regions strike the observer by their different

appearance. One might think them two sections of different

worms united together. An interesting question presents it-

self in connexion with this: im a worm cut transversely does

the posterior part always reproduce a number of segments equal

to that of the anterior part which has been suppressed in front

of it? This seems probable. At least I have found an Hieone

which had reproduced an anterior section of nearly fifty seg-

ments. The head is no doubt the part first formed; then the

new segments are produced successively at the point of union

of the old and new parts. This, however, requires to be sup-

ported by positive observations.

Geographical distribution of Annelida.

This subject, which is still imperfectly known, has only been

approached in a positive manner by M. de Quatrefages ; but the

‘data which that naturalist had at his disposal were insufficient

to admit of his drawing any very certain conclusions. There

is, however, one point upon which I must contradict him,

namely the extreme localization of the faunas. For example,

M. de Quatrefages does not admit that the Mediterranean and

the Ocean can be inhabited by the same species. It sometimes

happens that he founds specific distinctions solely upon this

circumstance of different habitat, although authors have been

unable to establish any morphological difference between these

supposed species. He insists especially upon the impossibility

of a littoral species supporting conditions of life so different as

those resulting from the presence or absence of tides. At

Naples, however, I kept littoral Annelida for months in cap-

tivity, and found that the best means of making them thrive

is to deprive them of water for several hours every day, so as to

allow the mud to become oxygenated. ‘These new conditions

did not prevent their living very well and depositing their

eggs,

No doubt, in a general way, the fauna of the Mediterranean

* The powers of the Creator displayed in the Creation, &c. vol. 11. 1853,

p. 231.

360 Prof. E. Claparéde on the Structure of the Annelida.

is very distinct from that of the ocean; but several species ap-

pear to be positively common to the two seas. M. de Quatre-

fages, moreover, is perpetually untrue to his own theory; we

find him uniting even very distinct species, one belonging to

the Mediterranean and the other to the Atlantic or even to the

Arctic seas *.

Faunistic works alone will throw any real light upon the

geographical distribution of the Annelida. It is therefore to be

desired that we may witness the multiplication of such investi-

gations as those of M. Malmgren + upon the Annelida Poly-

cheta of Spitzbergen, Greenland, Iceland, and Scandinavia.

It is undoubtedly the best work of its kind that we possess.

It has the advantage, in most cases, of being enriched with bathy-

metrical data. The absence of particulars of this nature is a de-

fect in most memoirs on Annelida. It is especially a gap which

I regret I am unable to fill up in this fauna of the Bay of Naples.

M. Malmgren seems to lead us to hope for the early publica-

tion of a work on the Annelida dredged off the coasts of Spitz-

bergen at a depth of 1400 fathoms (famnar) by M. Carl Chy-

denius. An accurate knowledge of Annelida living under such

conditions would be of great scientific interest.

Classification.

It is gratifying to see that we are every day approaching

more and more towards a natural classification of the An-

nelida. The families now established are for the most part

well founded. The discovery of types so new as to necessitate

the formation of new families becomes rarer every day. For my

part I shall propose no new family name. I know that on this

point there is a difference of opinion among naturalists. MM.

Kinberg and Malmgren have recently considerably increased

the number of families. But this augmentation is only apparent.

Certain very natural families of Savigny’s have been divided into

several by M. Kinberg; but that naturalist has been careful to

preserve Savigny’s sections as divisions of a higher rank, under

the name of orders. This is a slight displacement of the terms

of the taxonomic hierarchy, the importance of which is not very

great. For my own part I take, to a certain extent, the same

view as M. Kinberg; but I regard as tribes what he calls fami-

* Thus he unites Polynoé maculata (Grube) and P. fasciculosa (Gr.) of

the Mediterranean with P. cirrata (Fab.) from Greenland, Amphis tu-

bicola (Gr.) of the Mediterranean with Nereis tubicola (O. F. Muil.) from

the coast of Denmark, Lysidice Valentina (Sav.) of the Mediterranean

with L. rufa (Gosse) of the British coasts, Nereis cultrifera (Gr.) of the

Mediterranean with N, bilineata (Johnst.), &c. &e.

+ ‘“ Nordiske Hafs-Annulater,’” in Gfvers. af K. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl.

1865, Nos. 1, 2 & 5; ‘Annulata Polycheta Spetsbergiz, Greenlandie,

Islandie et Scandinavie hactenus cognite,’ Helsingfors, 1867.

Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee. 361

lies, and I retain for his orders the name of families given to

them by Savigny and his successors. The entire suppression of

the orders in M. Kinberg’s sense, and retention only of greatly

multiplied families, according to M. Malmgren’s practice, is, in

my opinion, to be regretted.

Certain families of recent creation seem to me to be excellent—

for example, that of the Spherodoride (MImgr.). It is also with

pleasure that I find M. Malmgren reverting to the opinion of Oken

and of MM. von Siebold and Max Miiller, and placing the Ster-

naspide among the Annelida. This author is astonished that, in

the year 1865, M. de Quatrefages, in assigning to Sternaspis a

place among the Gephyrea, should still mistake the head of these

animals for the tail, without taking any notice of the beautiful

anatomical investigations of MM. Krohn and Max Miller. I

share in M. Malmeren’s astonishment, especially as neither

Bianchi (Janus Planeus), Ranzani, nor Della Chiaje had fallen

into the error of Oken and Otto, now corroborated by the au-

thority of M. de Quatrefages.

It is less easy to come to an understanding upon the genera

than upon the families in the class of Annelida. Their number

has been increased in very considerable proportions both by

M. Kinberg and by M. Malmgren. Iam far from adopting

the views of those naturalists, whose works have nevertheless

been of great use to me, as will be seen from nearly every page

of the present memoir. ‘The species investigated by them have

been examined with extreme care, if not as to their anatomical

construction, at least in their external zoological characters. I

think, however, that among the characters considered by them

to be generic, many have only a specific value, or may even serve

at most to distinguish the varieties of a single species. This is

the case especially with the denticulations of the seta, as I shall

show by more than one example in the present memoir. I have

nevertheless retained a great part of the generic groups of MM.

Kinberg and Malmgren, but frequently only according them a

subgeneric value. As a matter of course, however, among the

genera established by these authors there are some excellent

ones which every one will accept without hesitation.

XLV.—On the Campoder, a Family of Thysanura.

By Dr. Fr. Meinerr*.

Since J.C. Fabricius first drew the attention of entomologists

to the systematic importance of the organs of the mouth in In-

* Translated from ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,’ ser. 3. vol. iii. p. 400.

Copenhagen 1865. The Danish original is accompanied by a plate, from

which the woodcuts are copied.

362 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campoder,

sects, it has been attempted by several authors to maintain the

subdivision of the whole class (first indicated by him) into

Mandibulata (Masticatores) and Haustellata (Suctores),—the

former division comprising Kleutherata, Ulonata (Synistata), and

Piezata, the latter Glossata, Antliata, and Rhynchota. It may

be objected with truth against this classification that many

so-called Mandibulata or Masticatores have but imperfectly deve-

loped mandibles, untit for mastication, whilst many Haustellata

are without any vestige of an haustellum or sucking-tube. But

its principal defect seems to be that it disregards natural rela-

tionships in separating two orders so nearly allied as Piezata

and Glossata, and associating the latter with animals with whom

they do not agree as regards the structure of the mouth, except

inasmuch as the or gans “of the mouth are generally prolonged—

a circumstance which has no typical but merely a biological sig-

nificance. It is not, however, my intention by these remarks to

derogate from the importance of the organs of the mouth for

the establishment of principal as well as of subordinate divisions

of insects, so clearly demonstrated by the imperishable works of

the great Danish entomologist; nor do I deny that two principal

types are observable in the structure of the mouth in that class.

But I believe that their essential point of difference has been

overlooked, and therefore an erroneous classification adopted.

This essential point of difference is, in my opinicn, to be found

in the position of the first two pairs of appendages of the mouth

with reference to the skull *.

One of these two principal types is characterized by the man-

dibles articulating with the skull by means of a hinge-joint, while

the maxillz are connected with the skull through a less perfect

articulation, sometimes merely sliding on its anterior margin,

which surrounds the mouth. This arrangement leaves the or-

gans of the mouth entirely free outside the mouth ; they can be

moved laterally, and are so far fit for biting; and whilst the .

mandibles are altogether incapable of being protruded in front

of the mouth, the maxille are only in a very limited degree

capable of such a displacement}. The appendages of the mouth

cannot, therefore, be used as stinging-instruments ; and when

* The first indication of this view may be found in a passage of the

important paper by Latreille, “‘De quelques Appendices particuliers du

Thorax de divers Insectes ” (Mém.du Muséum, 1821,t. vii. p. 20, concluding

note, “ La nature me parait avoir formé,” ete.). But he has not carried it

out im practice; otherwise he could not have placed Glossata amongst

Suctores.

t The apparent protrusion of the proboscis in bees, which is formed by

the second and third pair of appendages of the mouth, consists principally

in its being stretched out, whilst ordinarily it is folded up ; but it is always

outside the mouth.

a Family of Thysanura. 363

they are adapted for sucking, this process is carried on either

by means of the lingua, as in 1 bees, or by means of an extension

of the cesophagus, as in Glossata. Where this arrangement of

the mouth is adopted, the skull must possess a certain degree

of firmness in order to afford sufficient support for muscles and

articulations.

In those insects, on the other hand, which belong to the

second type, the mandibles and maxillee are not articulated with

the skull or otherwise connected with it; but their bases are

retracted within the cavity of the skull, surrounded by muscles,

whilst generally only their points project outside the mouth.

In this case the appendages in question can be protruded and

retracted, but not moved laterally agaist each other. They

may be used as pungent-instruménts, but not for biting; and

in this case the skull has generally much less consistency than

where the mandibles articulate with it,

In both divisions the labium (that is, the third pair of appen-

dages of the mouth) plays about the same part, covering as it

does, more or less, the other parts of the mouth from beneath.

In the latter division it is generally prolonged into a tube,

which often serves as a sucking-instrument, whilst the proboscis

of Glossata, which formerly were classed with the insects of this

division, is formed by the maxille, and is entirely analogous to

that of Piezata.

Free mandibles and maxille, of which at least the former

articulate with the skull, are characteristic of Eleutherata,

Ulonata (Synistata), Glossata, and Piezata; whilst, amongst

the larger orders, only Anthata and Rhynchota have retracted

mandibles and maxille, of which neither pair articulates with

the skull.

If next we take into consideration the larve of Insecta with

pertect metamorphosis, we find amongst them two correspond-

ing principal types, one of which is distinguished by the posses-

sion of a well-developed skull, with which the mandibles articu-

late, whilst those of the other type have no skull, properly

speaking, and then the mandibles are retracted into the mouth

without articulation. Generally speaking, the larve and the

imagos of the same insects agree in this respect; nevertheless

exceptions are met with amongst Antliata, not a few Nemocera

possessing in their larval state a well-developed skull and arti-

culating mandibles. In insects which have no true metamor-

phosis the construction of the mouth must necessarily remain

the same in all the stages of development.

But, besides these two principal types, there exists a third,

which as it were connects them. In some insects the man-

dibles and maxille do not articulate properly with the skull,

364 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee,

and are retracted within the cavity of the skull, so that only

their apices are visible outside the mouth; but nevertheless

they are calculated for biting, and capable of being moved late-

rally against each other. The absence of articulation or other

connexion with the skull allows of their being to some extent

pushed out of the mouth when in use, which is neither possible

nor necessary in the case of free biting mandibles and maxille ;

at the same time it is to be observed that, in the case of this

intermediate type, the process of protrusion is effected by a

special contrivance, entirely different from that whereby the

mandibles and maxille of the ordinary retracted type are moved

forwards and backwards.

This intermediate type, which reminds us of the arrangement

of the mouth in Crustacea, is amongst insects only found in

Thysanura, and affords one of the two principal characters of this

order (or suborder), the other being this, that they remain in

the larval stage without undergoing any metamorphosis at all.

Not only are the individuals possessing perfectly developed

sexual organs without even a vestige of wings, but the seg-

mentum mediale forms a complete ring as in larve, and they

are unguligrade*; their eyes, finally, when they do occur, are

single or at the utmost agglomerated. This larval character is

typical for these insects; and we cannot fancy winged species

interspersed amongst them in the same way as apterous species

occasionally occur in the families of typically winged insects.

Thysanura may be regarded as forming two families, Cam-

pode and Podure, of which for the present only the former

will occupy our attention. I do not consider that the Lepisme

properly belong to Thysanura, but class them with Ulonata,

amongst which they occupy the lowest place, being apterous

and unguligrade. In the construction of the labium and the

maxillee Lepisma agrees perfectly with Blatta ; but the mandibles

have this peculiarity—that although their whole external side 1s

free, so that they cannot be called retracted, they are but im-

perfectly articulated with the skull, being destitute of condyh,

and receive the necessary support during mastication from such

an intervening chitinous piece as will be described hereafter in

Campodea. In Machilis both mandibles and maxille are sup-

ported by such an inner piece. I admit that these and other

peculiarities in the anatomy of Machilis and Lepisma render it

difficult to draw the limit between Ulonata and Thysanura ; and

may be they will ultimately have to be united; but at any rate

the two families of Campodez and Podure will always stand

* See, on this term, Prof. Schiddte’s paper on Cerambyces, translated

in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. vol. xv.

a Family of Thysanura. 365

side by side, being far more closely related to one another than

either of them is to Lepisme.

Campodez.

Pedes cursorii, tarsis distinctis, elongatis, biungulatis.

Corpus elongatum, abdomine distincte decemarticulato.

Spiracula perspicua, saltem terna.

Abdominis lamin ventrales septem priores appendiculate.

Cerci duo, e segmento decimo, ultimo, origntes.

Antenne setacez vel filiformes.

This family comprises as yet only two genera (Campodea,

Westw., and Japya, Halid.), and therefore coincides with Japy-

gid, Hal.; but I prefer to name it as I have done in obedience

to the old rule that a family name is always to be derived from

the oldest established genus in the family.

The legs are upon the whole well developed, and allow of

rapid movement ; a special apparatus for this purpose, such as

the springing-apparatus of most Podure, is therefore superfluous.

The tarsus consists only of one joint, but is otherwise well

developed and of considerable length; whilst the Podure are

without a distinct foot. In point of fact, I am most inclined to

regard the part which carries the claw in Podure simply as

an empodium, which sometimes may be almost evanescent, at

other times sufficiently distinct, with or without an onychium,

but with only one claw, whilst Campodez always have two true

claws. Many Podure are certainly described as having two

claws; but the supposed second claw is merely a claw-formed

onychium, as may be seen from its place of insertion on the

empodium, and its position relatively to the only real claw. It

will be remembered that an analogous difference has been

pointed out by Professor Schiddte in his paper “ De Metamor-

phosi Eleutheratorum Observationes” (Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,

ser. 3. vol. 1. pp. 207, 209; i. pp. 150, 153, 194), between the

larvee of Carabi, Dytisci, and Gyrini on one side, and those of

all other families of Eleutherata on the other side.

The body is upon the whole rather flat and elongated; the

several rings are distinctly separated, particularly those of the

thorax, in each of which separate preetergum, posttergum, pre-

sternum and poststernum, are often observable, besides the ordi-

nary dorsal and ventral shields. The spiracles are easily dis-

tinguished, and at least three in number on each side—namely,

one for each of the thoracic rings. This latter peculiarity 1s

unique among insects ; for in other cases where three pairs are

to be seen on the thorax, the hindermost pair belongs really to

the segmentum mediale or to the metathorax and segmentum

366 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee,

mediale in common, as in Forficula (vide my ‘Anatomia Forficu-

larum,’ p. 51); but in this family the third pair of spiracles

belongs unquestionably to the metathorax alone; and when the

abdomen is furnished with spiracles (in Japyx), the segmentum

mediale has, like the other abdominal rings, its own pair, inde-

pendently of the one belonging to the metathorax. As yet, no

spiracles have been discovered in Poduree ; but, according to my

observations, their organs of respiration consist merely of an

open canal along the underside of the head and the thorax, and

it is in the fore end of this canal under the head that the tra-

cheal system opens, whenever it exists, as in some of the larger

Smynthuri*.

The abdomen presents three divisions, of which the segmentum

mediale forms the first, the three following rings the second,

whilst the remaining six rings form the third division ; in Japyx

the separation between the first and second division is Jess con-

spicuous than in Campodea. The number of abdominal rings is

unquestionably ten, all furnished with muscles for independent

motion, and all complete, having both ventral and dorsal shields.

It seems, therefore, that every doubt as to ten really being the

typical number of rings in the abdomen of insects must now

disappear; and I believe a careful comparison between the

structure of the abdomen in these animals and in Forficula will

give to my interpretation of the structure met with in the latter

genus any additional support that it may still lack f.

The first seven ventral shields of the abdomen carry in each

of their hind corners a short appendage articulating with the

abdomen, such as is also found in Machilis, but not in any of

the true Podure. They possess two cerci, which, as in Ulonata,

belong to the last ring of the abdomen, whilst the cerci of Po-

* T look upon the statements of Nicolet (Rech. p. s. a l’ Hist. des Podu-

relles, p. 47, pl. 4. f. 3, 4) and of Von Olfers (Annot. ad Anatom. Podura-

rum, p. 11, f.) as entirely erroneous; and so far I agree with Lubbock

(Trans. Linn. Soe. xxii. p. 441).

+ [It may be remembered by some that this question has been the

subject of a prolonged controversy between the late Dr. Schaum and Dr.

Memert, the former having, in a paper “On the Composition of the

Head, &c.” in Ann. Nat. Hist. vol. xi. 1863, maimtained that the typical

number of abdominal segments in insects was nine, whilst Dr. Meinert, in

his ‘ Anatomia Forficularum,’ which appeared shortly after, maintained that

the proper number wasten. The discussion was continued by Dr. Schaum

in two papers in ‘ Archiv f. Naturgeschichte’ (vols. xxix. & xxx.) and by

Dr. Meinert in ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,’ vols. ii. & ii. It turned mainly

on the correctness of Dr. Meinert’s interpretation of the structure of the

abdomen in Forficula, and this is strongly borne out by a comparison

with Japyx and Campodea; but the former of them was then not yet de-

scribed, and the latter Dr. Schaum does not seem to have known or taken

into account.—TRANSLATOR’S note. |

a Family of Thysanura. 367

durz never belong to the last ring, but take their rise from the

ventral shield of one of the preceding rings, both when they

preserve their original plain form and when they are transformed

into a springing-apparatus.

Neither in Japyx nor in any species of Campodea have I been

able to discover eyes, though both Guérin and Nicolet assert

that they have found eyes in the species of Campodea examined

by them.

Japyx, Hal.

Cerci breves, inarticulati, cornei, forcipis instar.

Segmentum ultimum maximum, pznultimum breve, secuto

ventrali fisso.

Mandibule paululum compressz, serrate.

Mala interior maxille lobis quinque laciniatis instructa.

Palpi maxillares biarticulati.

Labium verrucis (palpariis?) duabus anticis permagnis in-

structum.

Palpi labiales conici, setis simplicibus muniti.

Antenne setacez, articulo ultimo parvo, minore quam pzn-

ultimo, conico.

Oculi null.

Unguiculi simplices, inequales, onychio unguliformi.

Spiracula dena.

The following description of the mouth in this genus applies

in all essential respects to the whole order of Thysanura gene-

rally :—

Phe mandibles (fig. 1 a) are elongated, flat, and their basal part

attenuated into a point without any vestige of condyles. The

proportion of their breadth to their length is as | to 6 or 7,

and they are therefore comparatively much more robust than

those of Antliata and Rhynchota, which are setiform or subuli-

form. But the principal peculiarity of the mandibles in Japyx

and other Thysanura is that they are hollow, and that their great

flexors (c) penetrate into their interior through a longitudinal slit

or fissure along their inward edge, and fix themselves inside the

-mandible on the wall of the cavity opposite the fissure ; whilst

in other insects the mandibles are solid, and the muscles are all

fixed to their outside by tendons. The opposite ends of the

flexors of the mandibles, as well as of their tensors, in Japya

are attached to a chitinous plate (fig. 1 b) situated between the

mandibles, and steadied by a double set of muscles (fig. 1 g h).

Thus the mandibles can be approached to one another; but, in

order to give this movement sufficient precision and strength,

the mandibles must turn round some firm centre of movement ;

and as they do not articulate with the skull as free biting

368 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee,

mandibles do, but are almost entirely retracted into the head,

this centre of motion is supplied by a pair of conical protube-

rances (fig. 1 &) on the inner surface of the skull near the back

Fig. 1.

aa, mandibles ; 8, chitinous plate;

ce, principal flexor of mandible;

d, tensor of mandible; e, muscles

which keep the mandibles in place ;

J, second pair of flexors of mandi-

bles; g A, muscles steadying, pro-

trudmg, and retracting chitinous

plate; 7, labrum; 4, protuberances

serving as pivots for mandibles.

a 6 c, principal parts of inner

framework on one side; d, inner

lobe of maxilla (the lamelle omit-

ted); e, outer lobe of maxilla;

f, palpus; g, palpiger; h, lingua;

i, paraglosse ; k, stipes of maxilla;

I, cardo maxille; m n, retracting

and protruding muscles of frame-

work,

of the head, against which the pointed basal ends of the mandi-

bles are pressed when the flexors contract, and which then serve

them as pivots. The drawing will explain this arrangement

more clearly ; only it is to be observed that the mandibles have

been brought out of their ordinary position and slipped away

from the protuberances just mentioned.

The maxille are connected with the lingua, and, together

with the latter and the paraglosse, supported by a peculiar in-

ternal framework (fig. 2 ac) of thin chitinous pieces, of which

the construction will appear more fully from figure 3. The

most prominent part of the maxilla is the inner lobe (fig. 2 d),

which is more strongly chitinized than the other parts, hooked

or sickle-shaped, and carries on its concave inward edge five

curved, deeply subdivided smaller lobes or lamelle. The inner

maxillary lobe is supported by the stipes (fig. 2 4), which is to-

lerably firm, elongated, and flat. From the basal extremity of

the stipes a thin chitinous piece can be traced (fig. 2 /), con-

necting it with the outer branch of the framework just men-

a Family of Thysanura. 369

tioned; and this I look upon as representing the cardo or hinge

of the maxilla. The outer lobe (fig. 2 e) is membranaceous, and

has near its anterior margin a small conical protuberance.

There is a distinct palpiger (fig. 2 g) carrying a biarticulate

palpus (fig. 2 f). The lingua (fig. 2 2) is in this genus propor-

tionally very small, linguiform, and armed with short sete. The

paraglossve (fig. 2 77), on the contrary, are very large and bi-

lobate. Of the muscles moving all these parts some are fixed

to the inner surface of the skull, others to the oft-mentioned

framework, which, in its turn, with all that is connected with

it, can be pushed forward and drawn back by special sets of

muscles, as shown in figure 2.

The labium reminds one somewhat of the same organ in Ulo-

nata, and consists of a deeply bifid plate covering the mouth

from beneath. Its most striking feature is the existence of two

large retractile warts, clear as water, which I suppose to corre-

spond to the inflations discovered by Latreille on the labium of

Machilis (Nouv. Ann. du Muséum, 1832,1. p. 171). But for this

analogy, one might be tempted to look upon them as a kind of

palparia which these blind animals might well need, but which

are wanting in both pairs of palpi. I regret that my scanty

material did not permit a proper examination of their histological

structure. On each side of the fissure in the middle of the

labium two component pieces (centres of chitinization) may be

distinguished, one behind the other, which perhaps correspond

to the lobes observable on the third pair of appendages of the

mouth in Ulonata. Further behind, a third pair of plates is

observed, one on each side, which perhaps represent the stipites

of the third pair of mouth-appendages ; and in an emargination

on each of these plates, the short, conical, sparsely haired, and

strongly chitinized palpus is inserted.

There is no mentum. The hypostoma forms a rather large

obversely cordate plate, placed near the posterior border of the

underside of the head, between the inflected margins of the

occiput.

The antenne consist of many short joints furnished with

verticillate setze; the individual joints are inversely conical or

almost spindle-shaped, so that the general outline of the antennz

becomes filiform or slightly moniliform. The last joimt is

smaller than the others and slightly conical. The antennz are

placed on a protuberance which is separated from the skull by

a fine suture, but does not constitute a basal joint, as it is im-

moveable, the muscles of the antenne inserting themselves only

on the base of the following moveable division.

There is no vestige of eyes.

The skull is supported by a thin chitinous piece, which is

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 29

370 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee,

placed under the suture in the middle, and bifurcates near the

centre of the head, the two branches approaching the lateral

margin of the head.

The three thorax-rings are well separated by double folds ;

and as some of these are chitinized both on the dorsal and the

ventral surface, we observe in the prothorax a presternum and

poststernum, in the mesothorax a preetergum as well as prester-

num and poststernum, and in the metathorax both preetergum

and preesternum.

The legs are slender, with small conical cox ; they are rather

abundantly furnished with stiff hairs, particularly the feet, which

articulate with the tibie by means of regular condyles, and

which in length stand between the femora and the tibie. The

claws are large, foliaceous, but of unequal length. The em-

podium is well developed and supported by a thin curved chi-

tinous piece; between the claws there is a small cultelliform

onychium, which might be described as a third claw, if such a

thing was at all possible or reconcileable with the symmetry of

the insect body*. The proportionate lengths of the two claws

and the onychium are as 3 to 2 to 1, or, more correctly, as

15 to 10 to 4.

The moveable appendages on the underside of the first seven

abdominal rings are in this genus (or, at any rate, in the only

species as yet discovered) reduced to very short conical bristles,

each bearing a fine hair on its side, and articulated with the

ventral shield near its posterior corners. The first of these

rings, the segmentum mediale, is, besides, distinguished by a

small protruding wart, with five or six rows of impressed points

bearing setze peeping out from behind the middle of the poste-

rior margin of its ventral shield; on each side of this wart there

is a smaller flat protuberance furnished with rather longer bristles.

The ventral and dorsal shields of all these seven rings cover

almost the whole of their upper and under surface, whilst the

sides only in part are covered by small pleural plates.

The three following rings are more closely united and more

completely chitinized than any other part of the animal; but

they are without the appendages described in the preceding

rings.

The sexual orifice rests on the posterior margin of the ventral

shield of the eighth ring, and the deeply bifid vagina of the

female can be protruded from behind the latter. The next ring

(ninth) is very short, and its ventral shield is divided into two

perfectly separate triangular plates. The last ring is longer and

* Nor have the very young larve of Meloé been correctly described

as possessing three claws (whence the name Triwngulinus); they have in

reality but one deeply trifid claw.

a Family of Thysanura. 371

of greater consistency than any of the others; the colour is a

dark yellowish brown, even in young individuals, where the rest

of the body, or at any rate the greater part of it, is milk-white.

The general shape is prismatic, and the section tolerably rect-

angular, the sides being formed by the perpendicular pleural

shields, so that the skin connecting them with the ventral and

dorsal shields does not appear in view. Connected with the

dorsal shield of this segment, in the middle of its posterior

margin, we observe the small, short and broad anal plate, under

which the anus is situated. With regard to the term anal plate

(lamina analis), I refer to my paper on Forficula*: it is the

same as L. Duthiers’s endecato tergite; but I see no reason for

interpreting it as the remains of an eleventh ring; and it has,

of course, nothing to do with the entirely superfluous term

lamina supra-analis, which is sometimes applied to the tenth

dorsal shield in Ulonata.

Comparing the structure of the posterior part of the abdomen

in Campodea and Forficula, the matter stands thus :—In Cam-

podea all ten abdomen-rings are perfectly and equally developed;

in Japyx the requirements of the forceps cause a dispropor-

tionate development of the tenth ring, whilst the ninth is some-

what reduced and its ventral shield divided into two triangular

plates. In both these genera the anus opens at the extremity

of the abdomen. In Forficula there are also ten distinct abdo-

men-rings, of which the first (segmentum mediale), as in most

insects, 1s closely connected with the thorax ; here, too, the last

or tenth ring is disproportionately large; but whilst in Japyxr

the dorsal and ventral shields are about equally developed, the

dorsal shield preponderates very much in Forficula, the anal

plate is proportionally larger, the ventral shield divided into

two triangular plates, and the anus is drawn back from the ex-

tremity of the body, and opens at the root of the tenth ring,

instead of at its apex, between the two halves of the tenth ventral

shield. Besides, the eighth and ninth rings are almost rudi-

mentary in the female Forficula.

The short but powerful hooked branches of the forceps of

Japyx possess regular condyles and corresponding sockets both

in the ventral and in the dorsal shield, just as in Forficula; but

Iam unable to say with certainty whether the forceps present

sexual differences, as is the case in Forficula, as I have not been

able to sacrifice a sufficient number of individuals for dissection,

but I do not consider it probable. The spiracles are situated in

the side folds of the first ten rings.

* The ganglia of the nervous system are large and round ; each

* Nat. Tidsskrift, 3 ser. vol. ii. p. 446. [Comp. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

ser. 3. vol. xv. p. 484.—TRANSLATOR’S note. |

372 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee,

of the rings of the thorax and the first eight abdomen-rings

(including the segmentum mediale) have one “each, so that there

are eleven in all.

The digestive tube, of which the duodenum occupies the

greater part, is quite straight. I have failed to discover Mal-

pighian vessels, nor do I think they exist either in Japya or in

other Thysanura.

The ovaries consist of a pair of wide tubes, opening at the

back of the eighth ventral shield. The eggs were, in the in-

dividual I examined, few, but very large (9 inillims. long), the

germinative cell large and easily distinguished from its neigh-

bours.

Japy« solifugus, Hal.

Testaceus, abdominis segmentis ultimis atque forcipe preesertim

obscurioribus.

Antenne # longitudinis corporis breviores, 18—31-articulate.

Forceps robustus, longitudine scuti dorsalis segmenti ultimi ;

lateribus interigribus dente instructis.

Long. 8°5 mitim.

I am indebted for the specimens which I have been enabled

to examine to the courtesy of Dr. V. Bergsée, who collected

most of them at Genezzano, in the Sabine Mountains, and at

Mount Casino, near St. Germano, in the year 1862. It seemed

to be a mountain species, as he had never seen it in the Cam-

pagna: his specimens were found singly, under large stones or

dry moss on the rocks in dry places ; they tried to escape by

running actively about, and resembled a Lithobius in the cha-

racter of their movements.

The present paper was ready for publication when Mr, Hali-

day’s description of Japyz, in the ‘ Transactions of the Linnean

Society,’ vol. xxiv. p. 441, came to my hands; and I have there-

fore scarcely been able to refer to it, except so far, that I have

substituted the name proposed by Mr. Haliday for the one I

had myself intended for this remarkable animal. With regard

to Mr. Haliday’s figures, I would observe that the principal figure

seems to have been made after a dried specimen, while mine

had fortunately been preserved in spirit and thus retained their

natural elegance of form. TI also differ from Mr. Haliday in the

interpretation of the organs of the mouth. What he considers

to be labial palpi, I believe to be maxillary palpi; what he de-

scribes as labium (fig. 2) are, In my opinion, the maxille (with-

out the inner lobes) together with the paraglosse (but without

the lingua). Mr. Haliday’s maxille are, in my opinion, merely

the interior maxillary lobes ; and fig. ¢ I suppose to be a part of

a Family of Vhysanura. 373

the remarkable framework for the support of the organs of the

mouth, which he has probably not observed, as he does not

mention it. I have distinctly observed the appendages on the

underside of the abdomen, corresponding to those of the Lepis-

mz, which Mr. Haliday failed to discover on his specimens ;

and I interpret the two chitinized plates on the underside of the

tenth abdomen-ring as the separated halves of the ventral shield

—not, with Mr. Haliday, as the inflected margins of the dorsal

shield. Several minor points of divergence will appear from

the above description.

CampopEa, Westw.

Cerci longi, multiarticulati, filiformes.

Segmentum penultimum longitudine segmenti ultimi, scuto

ventrali integro.

Mandibule apice compressee, dentate, appendice lamelliformi

instructee.

Mala interior maxillz in dentes octo incisa.

Palpi maxillares inarticulati.

Palpi labiales breves, fere membranacei, setiferi, duas longas

setas ensiformes apice gerentes.

Verruce due setiferze pone labium.

Antenne filiformes vel submoniliformes.

Oculi nulli (vel seni,congregati,evanidi ?).

Unguiculi curvati, ad basin processibus binis longis ,tenuibus,

curvatis instructif.

Spiracula terna.

The mandibles are shorter and more powerful than in Japyz;

their apex is more compressed, almost cuneiform, with the ante-

rior edge oblique, dentate, and a sort of grinding-surface along

the inner edge of the apex. At the base of this grinding-surface

a small, thin, triangular lobe, with deeply incised fore margin,

articulates with the mandible. The muscles of the mandibles

are also upon the whole more powerful than in Japyx, and they

are disposed as in that genus.

The maxille are somewhat less complicated than in Japyz ;

the inner lobe is less elegant ; the subsidiary lobes are more in

number, but not themselves subdivided, the two outer ones

being the most powerful, the others with thin foliaceous apices.

The outer maxillary lobe is, as in Japyz, foliaceous, with a conical

protuberance on the upperside. The palpus is inarticulate,

and in a great measure united with the maxilla without distinct

*palpiger.

‘The lingua is large, oval; the paraglosse large and flat ; they

cover the lingua almost entirely from above, and surround also

374 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campode,

its sides; when seen from beneath, they appear only as two

small bodies at the sides of the lingua. The framework sup-

porting the maxille and lingua is very complete (see the annexed

figure), and in all essential points like that of Japyz.

aa, bb, ce, principal parts of

inner framework supporting the

maxille and lingua; d, inner

lobe of right maxilla; e, outer

lobe, and f, palpus, of /eft max-

illa; h, lingua; 7, paraglosse ;

k, stipes, and /, cardo, of right

maxilla; za, pieces of frame-

work supporting lingua; y 6, si-

milar pieces supporting outer

lobe of maxilla; z, @, pieces

connected with the last, and

supporting paraglosse.

The labium covers the organs of the mouth almost entirely,

_ so that ordinarily only their points are visible in front of it ;

but, as stated before, they are capable of protrusion to some

extent, about so much that the lingua becomes visible. The

labium is deeply bifid, and each half is divided into two pieces

by a transverse groove (though less markedly than in Japyz) ;

from the hindmost divisions rise the short conical, hairy, labial

palpi, which near their apices each carry two long subuliform

sete. The palpus is much less chitinized than in Japyz, and it

does not articulate properly with the labium.

Behind the labium appear two oval, transversely placed pro-

tuberances like warts, on which from six to eight rows of rather

large depressions with small sete are observed—probably an

organ of sense affording a substitute for the absence of palpa-

rium on the labial and maxillary palpi.

There is no mentum. The hypostoma varies in size, but is

generally only a small triangular plate near the posterior margin

of the head.

The antennz consist of numerous rather long joints bearing

one or two circles of large sete, besides many smaller scattered

ones. In the Danish species I have counted from twelve to

twenty-six joints, often different numbers in the antenne of the

same individual. The joints are cylindrical, or slightly fusiform ;

the last but one is always the smallest, and the last the longest,

though the length of it varies so much that, in some individuals

of the Danish species, it is less than that of the two preceding

ones together, whilst in others it almost equals that of the four

preceding ones.

a Family of Thysanura. 375

In spite of careful search, I have failed to discover the least

trace of eyes, though Nicolet describes his species as possessing

six very small eyes on each side of the head, placed in two rows.

Neither Westwood nor Gervais seem to have observed eyes on

their specimens, which, however, probably were specifically dif-

ferent from those of Nicolet.

The occiput is along the middle divided by a fine, closely

and minutely dentate suture, which is observed also along the

dorsal shields of the thorax-rings. In the centre of the head

the seam bifureates ; and the branches form the boundary be-

tween the occiput and the forehead, with the points of insertion

of the antenne.

The prothorax is considerably smaller than either the meso-

thorax or metathorax, which latter are of about equal size.

The transverse folds which separate the dorsal shields are not

chitinized in Campodea as in Japyx ; and when the animal con-

tracts itself, the dorsal shields are closely approximated to each

other.

The legs are slender, calculated for running; the tarsus long,

inarticulate, ending in two long, hooked and sharp-pointed

claws, of which each carries on the outside a long, thin, curved

appendage. This appendage looks like a seta, but is not placed

in any depression ; the concavity of its curvature is opposite to

that of the claw, so that the points approach ; and its apex is a

little flattened.

The first abdomen-ring (segmentum mediale), when viewed

from beneath, exhibits on each side a peculiar appendage, like a

pocket, taking rise from the pleure, and furnished near its apex

with two close rows of sete. <A row of stiff short sete is also

observed along the whole posterior margin of the ventral shield.

The following six rings have no such appendage; but in the

posterior corners of their ventral shields a conical or subulate

appendage articulating with the body is observed, and inside

this, on each side, a little sac, which is capable of being retracted

inside the edge of the ventral shield, and thus hidden from

observation. These sacs, which for this reason have hitherto

escaped notice, consist of a thin membrane; and when pushed

out, they present at their apex a glandular mass, and a retracting

muscle is seen, which is fixed to their inside. They correspond

probably to the sacs discovered by Guérin in Machilis, and in-

terpreted by him as branchial sacs, analogous to those of the

Crustacea, for which reason, amongst others, he would incorpo-

rate Machilis with Crustacea (Amn. d. Se. Nat. 1836, sér. 2.

tome v. p. 374, and Compt. Rend. 1836, tom. 11. p. 595). Sepa-

rate pleural plates are not observable on any of these abdomen-

rings ; but the dorsal shields cover, as in Forficula, the whole of

376 Dr. F. Meinert on the Campodee,

the back and sides, touching or even lapping over the lateral

margin of the corresponding ventral shields. The last three

rings are destitute both of these appendages and of the sacs.

The sexual orifice is behind the eighth ventral shield, in a conical

protuberance, which is simple in the male, but in the female

almost bifid. The ninth and tenth rings are closely united, but

have, as already stated, each its own independent set of mus-

cles, the tenth ring accommodating besides the tensors and

flexors of the long cerci. Behind the posterior margin of the

tenth dorsal shield a triangular pointed appendage is seen pro-

truding, which is the anal plate mentioned above in the deserip-

tion of Japya#, and which here, too, is too small to prevent the

anus from opening through the extremity of the tenth ring.

Below the anus two similar, but shorter, appendages are ob-

served.

The whole animal, particularly the upper side, has numerous

setae, some of which are large, subdivided and disposed in rows

round the body; each ring has one such row, and the last rmg

has two of them. On the fore part of the animal the laciniated

setee lie tolerably close to the body; but those on the last six

rings stand out from the body almost perpendicularly.

The long many-jointed filiform cerci, which rise from the last

abdomen-ring, possess round each joint, or at any rate round

those nearest the base, a row of a few such laciniated sete.

The cerci break off very easily, wholly or in part, and the joints

are not always very distinctly separated from each other ; it is

therefore difficult to indicate the number of joints and relative

length of the cerci; in those of the Danish specimens, however,

I have usually counted from eleven to fourteen joints.

Spiracles are only found on the thorax-rings ; the largest are

those of the prothorax, which are situated on the underside far

behind, almost on the sides in the extreme margin of the pro-

sternum. The two other pairs of spiracles are smaller, circular,

and situated on the upperside behind the dorsal shields of the

second and third thorax-ring.

The three ganglia of the thorax are proportionally narrow ;

but I have not had an opportunity of examining the rest of the

nervous system sufficiently.

The digestive tube is straight; and the duodenum reaches

from the second or the third thorax-ring to the middle of the

eighth abdomen-ring. There are no Malpighian vessels ; but

the lower end of the duodenum is, in Campodea, surrounded by

a circle of about sixteen rather large glandular cells.

The ovaries and testicles consist of two undivided, long and

wide tubes, opening, as already stated, behind the eighth ventral

shield.

a Family of Thysanura. 377

Campodea fragilis, n. sp.

Nivea (vel lutea), densius pilosa.

Caput ceque longum ac latum.

Antenne longitudinem corporis dimidiam paululum superantes,

seepissime 18—20-articulate, articulo peenultimo brevi, ultimo

longo, seepissime articulos duos vel tres penultimos longitu-

dine aequante.

Cerci fere longitudine abdominis, 11—14-articulati.

Long. 5°5 mellera

As in the case of Japyx solifugus, the specific characters are

chosen almost at random; for although several species of Cam-

podea have been described, they have not yet been properly

compared with each other. The synonymy is consequently

altogether vaciilating. If the descriptions and figures given by

the different authors are correct, our species must be new.

From C. staphylinus, Westw. (Trans. Entom. Soe. vol. i. p. 231,

pl. 8) ours would differ by much longer and slenderer cerci and

antenne, and by the different ratio of the lengths of the last

the penultimate joints of the antenne. Besides, Westwood de-

scribes the tarsus as articulated ; but that the abdomen is figured

with only nine rings is, of course, a mere oversight. Gervais’s

C. staphylinus (mm Walckenaer, Hist. Nat. des Apteéres, i. p. 455,

pl. 51) differs from our species by having the last abdomen-ring

only one-third the size of the preceding one (whilst in our spe-

cies they are of equal size), by having much longer and more

attenuated cerci with many more joints, and by a proportionally

narrower and more pointed forehead.

Nicolet’s Campodea staphylinus is, like Westwood’s, described

as having biarticulate tarsi; it is stated, moreover, to possess

eyes, and a peculiar rudimentary appendage on the back of the

ninth rmg—all of which, if really correct, of course would dis-

tinguish it specifically from C. fragilis, which, besides, has much

slenderer and less robust body and appendages. Nicolet’s C.

succinea seems so little different from his C. staphylinus that it

also cannot be identical with our species.

O. F. Miiller’s Lepisma aptera flava (Zool. Danicee Prodrom.

p- 183. n. 2160) may be the same as our Campodea; but as it

may as well be some other apterous species, | have not thought

fit to revive his specific name ; and, for the same reason, I think

it unsafe to attempt to carry our synonymy back to such old

publications. Haliday has referred to Podura ambulans, L. ;

but this cannot have been a Campodea: if Linnzus had known

the Campodea, he would have classed it with Lepisma or Myria-

poda, but he would certainly not, as he does with regard to his

Podura ambulans, first have placed it amongst Pediculi and then

378 Bibliographical Notices.

amongst Podure. The Linnean species is, no donbt, a true

Podura, probably an Anura, which also agrees with the habits

of life which he ascribes to his species. Schrank’s “ Gehender

Springschwanz” may be a Campodea, though now it would be

impossible to say which; but in adducing as a synonymous

name Podura ambulans, L., Schrank committed a mistake, which,

of course, ought not to be imitated.

Campodea fragilis is frequent in the neighbourhood of Copen-

hagen, in moist black earth; under stones it is often seen in

troops, which quickly disperse when the light is let m upon

them. It lives, at least partly, on dead insects, as I have often

found in its stomach scales of butterflies and other remains of

insects which it could not have attacked or overcome alive.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

British Conchology. Vol. IV. Marine Shells, in continuation of

the Gastropoda as far as the Bulla Family. By Joun Gwyn

JEFFREYS, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c. Van Voorst, 1867.

Tus is by far the most valuable volume of Mr. Jeffreys’s work yet

published. It contains descriptions of the most interesting and at

the same time the most difficult families of Marine Gastropoda, in-

cluding certain genera which the author has made peculiarly his own,

and on which he is more competent than any other conchologist to

treat; and there is not wanting evidence in this and in preceding

volumes of the great advantage which the possession of immense

series of specimens collected from all parts of the coast, for ex-

amination and comparison, gives him in the preparation of his work.

Our first impulse was to turn to the genus Odostomia, in the hope

of finding that the extreme and wholly insurmountable difficulty

which every student of Forbes and Hanley has found in the diseri-

mination of the members of that genus might be in some degree

removed by a wholesome reduction in the number of so-called specific

forms. It is satisfactory to find that this is the case. Warrenii is

united with obliqua; alba, dubia, nitida, and glabrata take their

place as varieties of rissoides ; rufescens is joined with scalaris ;

fulvocincta with rufa ; formosa is expunged altogether, as not being

British ; and affnis is regarded as a variety of acicula, as is also the

form described a few years ago in the ‘ Annals’ by the author under

the name Lulimella obeliscus. With one exception, on which some

doubt may be entertained, we fully concur in the justice of these eli-

sions, and believe, moreover, that future observation will result in the

process being carried yet a little further. It will be observed that

Chemnitzie and Eulimelle have here been spoken of as Odostomie,

the fact being that Mr. Jeffreys has discarded the former genera and

grouped the species in Odostomia. Now it is true that there are

certain osculant forms which create difficulties in the definition of

Bibliographical Notices. 379

the genera ; vet at page 114 we find a division (a far more satisfactory

division, to our mind, than that of Forbes and Hanley) of the species

into three sections, for which the generic names might have been

advantageously retained. The name Odostomia is altogether inap-

propriate to the toothless forms of Chemnitzia and Lulimella.

The volume contains descriptions of one hundred and eighty-two

species ; whereas Forbes and Hanley, in the same families, give only

one hundred and sixty-nine; but, inasmuch as sixteen of the forms

described by the latter are here struck out of our fauna, we find that

an addition has been made to this section of our Mollusca of no less

than twenty-nine species since the publication of the ‘ History of the

British Mollusca.’ The sixteen expunged forms are :—Ianthina

exigua, Bruguicre, and pallida, Harvey, as not having been found

alive upon our coasts ; Scalaria granlandica, fossil; Natica Kingit,

Forbes, as an exotic freshwater species erroneously recorded; La-

mellaria tentaculata, Montagu, as being the male of L. perspicua,

Linn. ; Cylichna conulus, 8. Wood, and strigella, Lovén, as synony-

mous with C. strigella; together with the nine Odostomie, Chem-

nitzie, and Hulimelle already referred to.

The following are the twenty-nine species which are here described

as inhabitants of the British seas, but which have no place in the

work of Forbes and Hanley :—

Rissoa Jeffreysii, Waller. Shetland.

R. albella, Lovén. This is the R. inconspicua, var. tenuis, of

Forbes and Hanley. It has been found at Southampton and on

various parts of the western coast, and at Shetland.

Aclis Walleri, Jeffreys. Deep sea, Shetland.

Odostomia minima, Jeffreys. Guernsey, Falmouth, Hebrides, and

Shetland.

Odostomia Lukisi, Jeffreys.

O. albella, Lovén. Each of these species has been

O. diaphana, Jeffreys. found in several localities.

O. umbilicaris, Malm.

Eulima intermedia, Cantraine. Widely distributed.

E. stenostoma, Jeffreys. The Haaf, Shetland.

Torellia vestita, Jeffreys. A single dead specimen on east coast

of Shetland.

Cerithiopsis Barleei, Jeffreys. Plymouth, Falmouth, Cork, and

Galway.

C. pulchella, Jeffreys. Guernsey, Devon, Cornwall, and Antrim.

C. costulata, Moller. Deep water, Shetland.

Triton nodifer, Lamarck, and 7. cutaceus, Linn. Guernsey.

Two very fine Mediterranean forms.

Fusus Islandicus, Chemnitz. Two specimens from the Shetland

Haaf and one from Wexford. This is the typical Is/andicus, a much

finer species than that described by Forbes and Hanley under that

name, which in Mr. Jeffreys’s work is called F. gracilis, Da Costa.

Fusus buccinatus, Lamarck. Allied to I’. propinquus, with which

it has hitherto been confounded. It is a much larger and coarser form,

380 Bibliographical Notices.

and has a more southern range. It may be questioned whether the

two are distinct. Is not this a case of exception to our author’s

favourite theory that our Mollusca attain larger development in

northern latitudes ?

Nassa nitida, Jeffreys. The Harwich Nassa, which has hitherto

been regarded (and, we think, rightly) as a variety of N. reticulata.

Columbella halieeti, Jeffreys. An interesting species from the

Shetland Haaf.

Defrancia reticulata, Renier. Rare, but ranging from the Channel

Islands to Shetland. A white variety of this species is the Mangelia

purpurea, var. asperrima, of F. & H.; one of the loveliest of British

shells.

Pleurotoma rugulosa, Philippi. Cornwall. Perhaps scarcely

sufficiently distinct from P. costata.

P. levigata, Philippi. Of southern and south-western range.

Regarded by Forbes and Hanley as a variety of P. nebula.

P. nivalis, Lovén. <A very fine Norwegian species, of which a

few examples have been dredged on the Shetland Haaf.

Cylichna alba, Brown. A fine addition to our fauna from Shet-

land.

Utriculus ventrosus, Jeffreys. Only one specimen known, dredged

by Mr. Barlee in the Sound of Skye.

U. expansus, Jeffreys. Another Shetland treasure; and the

‘Annals’ of last month records a third addition to this genus, also

from Shetland, Utriculus globosus, Lovén, which has been discovered

by the Shetland Dredging Committee, during the past summer, in

St. Magnus Bay.

Philine angulata, Jeffreys. Antrim, Hebrides, Shetland, and

Aberdeenshire.

P. nitida, Jeffreys. Skye and Haroldswick Bay, Shetland.

These are not inconsiderable additions to have been made to our

fauna in this best-worked-up department of marine zoology during

the few years which have elapsed since the publication of Forbes

and Hanley’s ‘ History.’

The observations which follow the descriptions of the species are

always of value, and often very full and interesting. We are fre-

quently astonished at the mass of information here briefly condensed.

It has been Mr. Jeffreys’s aim to popularize his subject and to make

a readable book. In the former volumes there were to be found

frequent digressions from the direct history of the species on which

he was writing, and the pages were thickly strewn with poetical

quotations. In the present volume such quotations and digressions,

which were tiresome to the scientific reader, are much less frequent ;

and, the space thus gained being filled with yet larger stores of

scientific information, the result is an increase, not a diminution, of

interest. Such bibliographical and biological notes as we find, for

example, on Lanthina, Purpura, or Buccinum require no extraneous

accretions to set them off; they are replete with instruction and in-

terest in themselves.

Bibliographical Notices. 381

The following closing words of volume iv. are well worth quoting,

since the issue of plates to illustrate the work was alone required to

make it take its place as the standard authority on the British Mol-

lusca. We trust that no pains will be spared in the execution of

these drawings. The generic illustrations which have been published

in the earlier volumes have in many instances fallen short of what

they might have been; and even in the present volume, some of the

engravings (for example, the figures of plate 7) are hardly worthy of

that accurate artist, Mr. G. B. Sowerby :-—

** And now, good reader, I should be sorry if you have complained

of my being too voluminous. I never professed to make this a

manual; nor have I yet quite done. Let me remind you of the

advice given by Seneca (De Ira, lib. iii. c. 31. § 3), ‘Age potius

gratias pro his que accepisti: reliqua expecta, et nondum plenum

te esse gaude. Inter voluptates est, superesse quod speres.’

“The next volume will complete the work, and contain an account

of the few remaining Pleurobranchiata, the Nudibranchs (by Mr.

Alder), the marine Pulmonobranchs, the Pteropods, and the Cephalo-

pods, a Supplement to the volumes already published, and other

useful matter, besides plates (plain and coloured) by Mr. Sowerby,

to represent all the species and remarkable varieties of British shells.

Most of these plates are engraved, and the colouring is in progress.”

Mind in Nature; or, the Origin of Life and the Mode of Develop-

ment of Animals. By Henry James-Crark, A.B., B.S., Ad-

junct Professor of Zoology in Harvard University, Cambridge,

Mass., &c. Illustrated; pp. v-315. D. Appleton & Co., New

York. 1865.

Tuis work has scarcely met with the attention, in this country,

which it seems to deserve. It contains much interesting information

respecting the lower animals, which is expressed in a clear and

pleasing style.

The Origin of Life is considered in the first five chapters, in the

course of which the author adduces some experiments in defence of

the hypothesis of spontaneous generation, and propounds his theory

of the egg,—viz. that it is a ‘bipolar animal,” .... “a globular

accretion of two kinds of fluids, albumen and oil, which are always

situated at opposite sides or poles,’ and separated more or less dis-

tinctly from each other. Amongst the most remarkable modes by

which an individual existence arises cited, is the derivation of vibrio-

form bodies from the fibres of decomposing muscular and tendinous

tissue. His assertion, at page 101, that “human digestion makes

human flesh out of the decomposed meat of many different kinds of

animals,” requires some qualification, since the word decomposition

is employed in the same paragraph somewhat in the sense of putres-

cence. The meaning of the word is wrested for the defence of

spontaneous generation.

The speciality of the second part is his treatment of the Protozoa.

“The type of this division,’ he writes, ‘is found in its relation to

382 Miscellaneous.

a spiral; it is the oblique or spiral type.... What characterize

them all are not only the oblique relations of right and left, but

also the presence of one or more peculiar contractile bodies, the so-

called contractile vesicles, and a diffuse digestive system.’ He

describes, in the ninth chapter, how the sinuses of the digestive

cavity in certain Infusoria came to be described by Ehrenberg as

saccules or pouches. In treating of the Mollusca, he agrees with

Oken in regarding as the rudiment of a left valve, homologous with

that of a Lamellibranch, the operculum of the operculated Gastero-

pods. At the same time he makes no allusion to the absence of

correspondence between these two organs in respect of the relative

periods of their formation. The Articulata are briefly touched upon

in the twelfth chapter. He there shows some good reason for the

promotion of the Sipunculoids to the Worms. The Diptera are

placed by him at the top of the branch, on account of the extreme

concentration of their bodies and the versatility of their heads. it

is questionable, however, whether this is their true position, not-

withstanding these points in their organization, because the typical

form of the Insecta proper seems upon the whole to be four-winged,

from which the abortion of the posterior pair constitutes a marked

deviation ; and it would be quite an exceptional circumstance were

an abnormal group to constitute the highest of its class, to say no-

thing of a branch. The division of the body into three groups of

segments, and the versatility of the head, obtain to an equal extent

in the Hymenoptera. Professor Agassiz’s arguments in favour of

the supremacy of the Lepidoptera are not yet shown to be fallacious ;

and though in some particulars their organization may seem to be

inferior, in others (e. g. antennze) it is of a grade decidedly superior

to that of the Diptera.

The third part is devoted to the embryology of the five branches

of the animal kmgdom.

Many other details are worthy of notice; and, ‘excepting some

obtrusive claims to originality, and some personalities, the book is

pleasantly written and well worth reading.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Organization of Cryptoprocta ferox. By MM. A. MiLne-

Epwarps and A. GRANDIDIER.

CrYPTOPROCTA FEROX was completely unknown when in 1833 the

English zoologist Bennett received a specimen of it, to which he

called the attention of naturalists ; but this unique specimen was so

young that it was impossible to ascertain its precise zoological affini-

ties, the dental system having not yet acquired its definitive form.

Bennett thought the species should be placed in the family Viverride,

close to the Paradozuri, although he indicated some points of re-

semblance to the Felide.

Blainville obtained a drawing of the skull of this young individual,

Miscellaneous. 383

which he figured in his ‘Ostéographie.’ He had the same opinion

as Bennett with regard to its affinities.

M. A. Grandidier, in his travels in the south-east of Madagascar,

obtained the skin and two skeletons of the animal; and the study of

the adult dental system shows that Cryptoprocta cannot remain in

the place assigned to it by Bennett. The Viverride are character-

ized by the existence of two tubercular posterior molars in the upper

jaw, and one in the lower jaw. In Cryptoprocta the upper jaw has

only one of these teeth, and the lower jaw has none.

The incisors are six in each j jaw ; in the upper jaw the outer ones

are very strong, not so large as in the hyenas, but equal in pro-

portion to those of the genus Felis. In the lower jaw the space

occupied by the incisors is very narrow ; and these teeth are arranged

in two rows, the second clearly behind the others, as in the weasels

and martens. This double row of incisors occurs also in some

species of Felidee ; but in these the second row is in front of the

others.

The canines are large, pointed, very firmly implanted in the

maxillary bones, and both in form and direction resemble those of

the Felide rather than those of the Viverridze.

There are ineach jaw five molars, placed as follows :—

premolars 3, flesh-tooth 41, tubercular $

This dental formula differs from that of the cats only in the presence

of one additional premolar in the upper jaw and of two in the lower

jaw. But it is to be remarked that this difference tends to be effaced

by the advance of age, as the first premolar in both jaws falls out

soon after its appearance, and, its alveolus being obliterated, there is

no trace of it in old individuals.

The flesh-teeth are trenchant and compressed so as to act like the

blades of scissors, and thus have a perfectly feline aspect; the

constant sharpness of their prehensile margin shows that they are

employed only in cutting flesh. The upper flesh-tooth has a tubercle

at its anterior inner part, much weaker and less marked than in the

hyenas. The lower flesh-tooth has a lobe behind, analogous to but

much smaller than that of the hyzenas ; nor does it present any trace

of the inner tubercle which gives sucha peculiar aspect to this tooth

in the hyzenas.

The characters of the remainder of the skeleton are in accordance

with those of the dental system, and enable the position of the genus

Cryptoprocta to be determined from the consideration of the

whole. Its dentition separates it clearly from all the Viverridee, and

indicates an animal with more ferocious habits ; with one premolar

less in the lower jaw (leaving out of consideration the deciduous

teeth), the cranium would differ in nothing from that of the cats.

But Cryptoprocta ferow is a perfectly plantigrade carnivore; and

it must, therefore, be separated from the cats, notwithstanding the

analogy of its dentition. The group of the Felide is one of the

most natural in the animal kingdom, and constitutes rather one

great genus than a family ; and we should deprive it of its natural

384: Miscellaneous.

character and violate its limits, if we introduced into it an animal

with so singular a structure as Cryptoprocta.

This animal must, therefore, form a peculiar group approaching

most nearly to the cats ; and in order to represent exactly the re-

lations which it has to the genus Felis, it would seem necessary to

unite it with those animals in a tribe which would then be subdivided

into two families, one including the digitigrade, and the other the

plantigrade Felinee.—Comptes Rendus, August 5, 1867, pp. 232-—

235 : abstract.

A way to determine Trichopterous Pupe.

By A. E. Eaton, Trin. Coll. Cam.

Having been asked in what way the pupa-skin described in the

last June Number of this Magazine was ascertained to be that of

Brachycentrus subnubilus, Curt., without rearing the insect, I will

briefly indicate it, with a view to the removal of any doubt that may

be entertained respecting the correctness of the determination.

Ist, by observing what species is, or are, most abundant in a

certain locality at a given time; 2ndly, by collecting from patches

of weeds the sloughs of pupze, and putting together those which

correspond in size; 3rdly, by making a comparison between the leg-

spurs, the neuration of the wings, and the palpi of the slough and

those of the adult state of the most probable species, it is not

difficult to refer a pupa-skin to the proper insect. This done, by

dredging up occupied caddis-cases, the living pupa (and thus the

case also) of the species can be discovered.

On the Spontaneous Movements of the Leaves of Colocasia esculenta

(Schott), and on the Ejection of Water from them in a continuous

jet. By M. Musser.

M. Lecoq has published *, in the ‘Comptes Rendus’ of the 22nd of

last April, some very interesting observations on the spontaneous

movements of the leaves of Colocasia esculenta (Schott).

** Several times he had the opportunity of witnessing violent fits of

shaking, among others on the 20th of January and 2nd of March.

On the latter day, in the morning, although the temperature of the

stove was lowered to 7°C. (=45°'6 F.), the agitation was consider-

able in all the leaves, both old and new, without exception : it is an

actual febrile movement, a very violent shivering.”

These facts, except as regards intensity, are identical with those

that I have sometimes witnessed, in observing the ejection of water

by the leaves in vernation of Colocasia esculentat. ‘This was some-

times a sort of vibration impressed upon the convoluted and erected

leaf, sometimes a waving of the expanded leaf, sometimes a rustling

in the interior of the mass, which was composed of a hundred leaves

of every dimension, from 0°1 to 1:10 metre in length.

* See Annals, ser. 3. vol. xix. p. 439.

T See ‘ Comptes Rendus,’ tome Ixi. p. 682, October 23, 1865, and my

memoir in ‘ Ann. de |’Acad. des Sciences de Toulouse,’ 1866.

Miscellaneous. 385

These movements and these noises have often distracted me from

my other observations, but without striking my mind, which was

absorbed by the study of the ejection of water. I ascribed them,

without accounting for them, either to the agitation of the atmo-

sphere, to some of my own movements, to the hasty flight of some

bird concealed in that impenetrable mass of foliage, or to an error of

the eye produced by the fatigue which always follows too prolonged

tension of the sight, &c. &e.

The observations of M. Lecoq are therefore to me a plain and

genuine explanation of a very curious phenomenon which he has the

merit of being the first to discover and to study with the sagacity

which is habitual to him ; my only aim is to confirm a new fact, and

one which may appear extraordinary.

M. Lecogq says in his note that he had never been able to observe

the fine drops that I have seen so often shoot from the vulvoid

region situated underneath the apex. He himself gives the cause of

it when he states that the membrane which covers that region is, in

the leaves of his plant of Colocasia, imperforate. This imperfora-

tion (or, rather, this absence of large stomata, orifices of ejection)

is extremely rare in the leaves of the species of Colocasia that I cul-

tivate in the open ground; I have only detected it in the propor-

tion approximately of 1 to 80. I am surprised that all the leaves ob-

served by that learned naturalist should have presented this anomaly

of the imperforation of the hymenoid membrane. Does this depend

on the mode of culture, or on a difference of species? Eleven

leaves of two plants of Colocasia, cultivated in a hot stove, have

likewise never presented the least trace of gaping stomata. Be

this as it may, M. Lecoq would perhaps see a certain relation of

cause to effect between the spontaneous movements of the leaves and

their imperforation. My own observations are not favourable to

this hypothesis.

I take advantage of this opportunity to say that this year the

leaves in vernation have furnished me with still more remarkable

results than those referred to in my memoir. My observations

date from the Ist of May to the 15th of November. Now it is in

tbe month of June, at the period when vegetation is in all its vigour,

that the ejection of the water is also most vigorous. I have seen

some convoluted leaves which, during cool evenings, emitted a con-

tinuous jet. Careful watchings certainly betrayed a slight inter-

mittence ; but it was absolutely impossible to count the drops, the

number of which constantly exceeded 200 per minute.—Comptes

Rendus, May 13, 1867, pp. 979-980.

On two new forms of Plants parasitic on Man (Aspergillus flavescens

and A. nigricans). By Ropert WReEDEN.

From the 25th November, 1864, to the 25th May, 1867, I had

the opportunity of observing the development of two new forms of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 26

386 Miscellaneous.

Fungi (of the genus Aspergillus) upon the tympanic membrane of

ten persons, four of whom were attacked on both sides. Having

been able several times to watch and study the development of these

parasites from their first appearance to their final extinction, I can

assert that this parasitic vegetation existed independently of any

other disease, and constituted a peculiar and very obstinate affection

of the ear, accompanied with great derangement of functions and

much suffering.

The two species of auricular fungi found by me presented all the

principal botanical characters of Aspergillus glaucus (Link), but

differed therefrom in the coloration of their organs of fructification,

which leads me to name one of them A. flavescens and the other

A. nigricans.

We may ascertain, not only with the microscope, but even with the

naked eye, the existence of a parasitic pseudomembrane in the ear,

and decide beforehand whether it is produced by a vegetation of

A. flavescens or of A. nigricans. In both cases the parasitic mem-

brane, when extracted entire, bears the very recognizable impression

of the tympanic membrane, and consists of an interlaced, lardaceous,

white and shining tissue, easily torn and dispersed, covered in several

parts with brownish-yellow (4. flavescens) or perfectly black (4.

nigricans) spots (spores). These agglomerations of spores often

form upon the white surface applied to the tympanic membrane an

annular black space of 1-2 millims. in breadth, corresponding to the

periphery of the tympanum. In general the arrangement of the

layers in each parasitic pseudomembrane proves that the parasite

grows from without inwards ; that is to say, it tends to bury itself in

the tissue of the tympanic membrane.

A. nigricans, of which the organs of fructification have exactly the

same black colour as those of A. nigrescens, discovered by C. Robin,

on the 19th February 1848, in the aériferous sacs of a pheasant, must

not be confounded with that species, because the receptacular fila-

ments of A. nigrescens are formed by long cells articulated end to

end, and presenting at their point of contact a distinct constriction :

moreover the circlet of basal cells round the capitula is not complete

as in A. nigricans.

A. flavescens closely approaches the fungus of the lungs, dis-

covered by Virchow, and described by Fresenius from specimens re-

ceived from Virchow as a distinct species, which he names 4.

Jumigatus, and identifies with the fungus found by him in the

bronchi of an Otis tarda in the Frankfort Zoological Garden.

But the descriptions and drawings of Fresenius and Virchow, and

especially the microscopic preparation which had been sent to Fre-

senius and declared by him to be 4. fumigatus, shown to me by

Professor Schenk at Wurzburg, make me perfectly sure that my

A, flavescens is clearly distinguished from 4. fumigatus, which,

moreover, has greenish-brown spores.

To ascertain positively whether 4. flavescens and nigricans are

really new species of Aspergillus, or whether they only represent new

Miscellaneous. 387

varieties, produced by the difference of the medium in which they

grow, I undertook a series of experiments in cultivating my auricular

fungi in different media. The lemon and the sweet orange proved

to be especially favourable for these experiments. The result of

these experiments, which were frequently repeated and modified,

was very distinct and constant. Every time that I transplanted

A, flavescens or nigricans from their animal soil to a vegetable one

(a slice of lemon or orange), they infallibly returned to the same

form of vegetable mould, namely 4. glaucus (Link). Every dis-

tinctive character between 4. flavescens and A. nigricans disappeared

in consequence of their transmutation into 4. glaucus, of which they

are consequently only varieties, caused by the difference of the

medium (animal or vegetable) in which they grow. Whena slice of

lemon or orange is sown with A. flavescens or A. nigricans .... .

in 48 hours the surface of the slice is already covered with a

layer of sterile filaments of mycelium, which are fine and white and

like those of a spider’s web. In three days this white layer of

mycelium is covered with an innumerable quantity of spores. We

may then detect, by means of the microscope, the presence of spe-

cimens of an Aspergillus the sporanges and free spores of which are

distinctly of a brownish-green colour (4. glaucus, Link).

(After some remarks on the treatment of these fungi when

growing in the human ear, from which it appears that the best

agents for their destruction are hypochlorite of lime and arsenite

of potash even in very dilute solutions, the author proceeds as

follows :—)

The Aspergillus when vegetating in the ear of the human subject

produces a very characteristic disease, which I have named Myco-

myringitis or Myringomycosis aspergillina. It presents two forms,

according as it is occasioned by A. flavescens or A. nigricans. The

latter produces more serious morbid phenomena than the former.

I should state that hitherto I have never seen A. flavescens and A.

nigricans vegetating simultaneously in the same ear, nor could [

discover the least trace of a mixture of Penicillium glaucum (Link)

with the Aspergillus, although this mixture occurs ordinarily in the

moulds which cover vegetable substances. Having learnt that

Troeltsch of Wiirzburg had recently found in the auditory meatus of

a patient a mould formed by an Aspergillus penicellatus, I went to

the spot to examine the microscopic preparations of the parasite,

and found that they only presented a mixture of <Ascophora

elegans and A. mucedo.

I have had an opportunity of ascertaining as a matter of fact how

injurious the moulds growing in rooms are to man. In a case

studied by me, I was astonished at the unusual obstinacy with which

the vegetations of A. nigricans were renewed for three months in the

patient, notwithstanding the employment of the best parasiticides.

Being unable to explain this extraordinary circumstance except by

continual infection, I went to the hospital where the woman was a

superintendent. I found that in three rooms, in which thirty-four

388 Miscellaneous.

old women remained day and night, all the ceilings and windows,

which were white-washed, were entirely covered with a green mouldy

coat of Penicillium glaucum, whilst all the walls, which were

painted in oil, were completely lined with a black and white mould,

which presented the same 4. nigricans as the patient’s ear, only under

the form of Achorion (according to Hallier). But a single cultiva-

tion in glycerine or on lemon sufficed to change it into a plant with

well-developed sporanges. ...... Washing the walls and ceilings

with a solution of hypochlorite of lime, which was also employed in

the ear, and the establishment of good ventilation, speedily put an

end to the sufferings of the patient, upon whom all my therapeutical

resources had previously failed.—Comptes Rendus, August 26,

1867, pp. 368-371.

The Theory of the Skeleton.

To the.Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—Absence from town has prevented me from seeing

the ‘ Annals of Natural History’ since July.

I have but a few words to say in reply to Mr. Seeley’s letter in

your August Number.

Any one who chooses to be at the trouble of reading the two

pages in the ‘ Medico-Chirurgical Review,’ from which Mr. Seeley

extracts seven lines, will find as definite an outline of the theory of

mechanical genesis of vertebrae as could be put in the short space

available.

If he is at the further trouble of referring to the ‘ Principles of

Biology,’ §§ 254-258, he will find what Mr. Seeley chooses to call

“vague hypothesis.” Where Mr. Seeley ‘did not notice that

these ‘incident forces’ (producing vertebral structure) were de-

fined,” he will see specified and illustrated by diagrams the par-

ticular incident forces which produce differentiation of the vertebrate

axis from surrounding tissues, the particular incident forces which

cause segmentation of it, and the particular incident forces which

cause ossification to commence at the places where it does com-

mence.

If, once more, he turns to §301 (which I suppose Mr. Seeley

overlooked), he will find definitely specified the particular physio-

logical actions through which pressures and tensions cause the

formation of bone.

Here, so far as I am concerned, the controversy must end.

I remain, Gentlemen,

Yours, &e.,

HERBERT SPENCER.

TH EB ae N ACLS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[THIRD SERIES. ]

No. 120. DECEMBER 1867.

XLVI.— Observations on the Aériferous Vesicles of the Utricu-

larie. By S. B. Scunetzier*.

Tue genus Utricularia consists of aquatic plants which we find

in the stagnant waters of ditches, marshes, &c. The leaves are

submerged, and divided into fine laciniz furnished with vesicles

or utricles (asc?). The following is the function ascribed by

De Candolle to these organs.

These utricles are rounded and furnished with a sort of move-

able operculum. During the youth of the plant they are filled

with a mucilage which is heavier than water; and the plant,

held down by this ballast, remains at the bottom. Towards the

period of flowering, the leaves secrete a gas which makes its way

into the utricles, and drives out the mucilage by raising the

operculum ; the plant, then furnished with a multitude of air-

bladders, rises slowly, and at last floats at the surface. The

flowering takes place in the open air; and as soon as it is com-

pleted the leaves resume the secretion of mucilage, which re-

places the air in the utricles; the plant again becomes heavier,

and descends to the bottom of the water, in order to ripen the

seeds in the very place where they have to be sownf.

Notwithstanding the investigations of Gdppert{, Benjamin §,

Schleiden ||, Schacht Y, Reinsch **, &c., botanists have not yet

arrived at a complete agreement as to the origin and morpho-

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘ Bibliotheque Univer-

selle, tome xxix. August 25, 1867, pp. 296-311.

+ De Candolle, ‘ Physiologie végétale,’ tome il. p. 87.

{ Botanische Zeitung, 1347, p.721. I have not seen this work.

§ Ibid. 1848, p. 17.

|| Grundziige der wissenschaftlichen Botanik, 4th edit. p. 533.

4 Beitrage zur Anatoinie und Physiologie, 1854, p. 28. ;

** Denkschriften der kon. Bayer. bot. Gesellsch. 1859, Bd. iv. p. 193

(I have not been able to procure this memoir); Reinsch, Das Mikroscop,

1867.

Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 27

390 M.S. B. Schnetzler on the Aériferous

logical signification of the aériferous vesicles of the Utricularia.

Before the researches just referred to, most botanists regarded

them as a modification of the parenchyma of the ‘leaves, fol-

lowing the numerous ramifications of the veins in the form of

a narrow band, dilating from time to time, and thus producing

the utricles*.

Schleiden, who studied the development of these little organs,

saw them make their appearance at the angle of the divisions of

the leaves, in the form of small bodies which were supported by

short pedicels and looked like little horns. The inferior side of the

horn and the lower margin of its aperture, which itself scarcely

increases in size, become much more developed than the rest, in

such a manner that the perfect utricle forms a little rounded

body, compressed laterally, prolonged on its upper surface on

one side into the pedicel, and presenting on the other an aper-

ture in the form of a funnel projecting into the interior of the

utricle. The outer aperture of this funnel is closed by a garni-

ture of hairs, which form a beard attached to the superior mar-

gin. The inner portion of the surface of the funnel is furnished

with hairs of various and elegant forms, arranged in a perfectly

regular manner. The whole inner surface of the utricle likewise

bears hairs, composed of two cells, each of which is produced

into two appendages of unequal length (Schleiden, Joc. cit.).

Benjamin explains the formation of the utricles by assuming

an arrest of development in some segments of the leaf. Instead

of elongating, they extend in breadth; a constriction in the

form of a narrow neck is produced at their base, and they then

present the form of small globular bodies attached to the nervure

of the leaf by a short pedicel. According to Benjamin, we may

trace the different phases of the formation of the utricles upon

a single leaf from the base towards the apex. The utricle, at

first filled with cytoblastema (protoplasm), becomes, by the rapid

absorption of that liquid, a true air-reservoir. By afterwards

extending itself in all directions, the utricle by degrees acquires

its definitive form, which nearly resembles that of a stomach,

the pedicel being placed at the pylorus and the aperture at the

cardia; the two laterally compressed walls unite, as in a suture,

at the curvatura major. The aperture of the complete utricle is,

according to Benjamin, provided with a valve directed inwards.

This valve makes its appearance, even in the earliest phases of

the utricle, as a dark transverse band (Schacht, Beitrige, p. 28).

Schacht (/ec. cit.) shows that neither Schleiden nor Benjamin

observed the first histogenetic phase of the utricles. The organs

of the Utricularie called leaves by most botanists are regarded

* G,W. Bischoff, Lehrbuch der Botanik, 1834, Bd. i. p. 167.

Vesicles of the Utricularie. 391

by Schacht as foliaceous branchlets, which, when young, are

rolled in, like a crozier, towards their apex, like the fronds of

ferns; below this apex new leaves are successively formed, at

the axils.of which a little conical body is soon seen to make its

appearance, composed of small cells, like the commencement of

a bud. This little body soon presents, towards its rounded ex-

tremity, a small excavation produced by an arrest of development

of the cells of the apex; the edge thus formed rises more and

more, and the little cellular body, which was at first sessile,

soon afterwards shows at its base a prolongation in the form of

a pedicel.

The side walls of the young utricle become more and more

developed, the aériferous cavity which they enclose becomes

constantly larger, the edges of the side walls become inclined

towards each other and fold inwards, and the cavity, which was

originally open, is closed. The old aperture, indeed, presents a

valve formed by a fold of the margin of the opening. The

beard which, according to Schleiden, closes this aperture is

formed subsequently, upon its outer surface.

After this description of the formation of the utricles, accom-

panied by the beautiful figures to which one is accustomed in

Schacht’s works, this author mentions the changes of colour

which are observed in these organs—a fact previously observed

by Goppert. He likewise describes the singular hairs which

occur on the inner utricular surface. ‘These hairs consist of five

cells, of which one forms the base, two spread out almost hori-

zontally, whilst the other two project into the interior of the

utricle. The basal cell of these hairs, as well as those which it

supports, results from the division of a small cell, which, in the

youth of the utricle, makes its appearance like a little stopper

in the intercellular canals.

From what precedes, Schacht concludes that the utricles of

Utricularia are a modification of the ramifications of the axis,

and not of the leaves.

In the month of April 1867, I investigated the formation of

the utricles in Utricularia minor collected in the marshes of

Jogny above Vevey. Schacht, who studied the formation of the

utricles in Utricularia vulgaris, assumes as the rule their forma-

tion in the axille of the leaves, and deduces therefrom their

analogy with buds. We see, in fact, little bodies composed of

cells make their appearance between the ramifications of the

leaves; these present a conical form, with their free extremity

slightly rounded. These little bodies, which are at first com-

pletely sessile, are soon raised upon a small pedicel, the cells of

which are afterwards differentiated into an outer layer corre-

sponding to the layer of parenchyma which Le veins of

392 M.S. B. Schnetzler on the Aériferous

the laciniated leaf, whilst the interior cells of the pedicel place

themselves in communication with the tissue forming the veins,

of which they subsequently appear to be acontinuation, As

the pedicel thus becomes a prolongation of a segment of the

leaf, the little globular body which it supports appears to us to

be a portion of the parenchyma of the same leaf. The walls of

the little cellular body, of which the extremity first hollows into

a cup, become developed, whilst the bottom remains stationary ;

these walls finally unite, and thus form a closed cavity. In the

utricles thus formed in Utricularia minor we see towards the so-

called mouth pinnatifid prolongations or appendages, similar to

the capillary segments of the true leaves, in such a manner that

the perfect utricle appears to be an expansion of the parenchyma

of the leaf, supported upon a vein which is prolonged and rami-

tied beyond the utricle. The extremity, which is at first open,

becomes closed at length by two unequal folds of the walls.

There is thus formed a sort of funnel, clothed with hairs, at the

bottom of which the folds appear as two dark bands bearing

linear hairs, whilst those which occur at the entrance are usually

capitulate.

Although the utricles, at the commencement of their forma-

tion, make their appearance at the angles of the leaf-segments,

this position is by no means constant when we examine them in

more advanced phases, when the leaf itself is modified.

The pedicellate globules of Benjamin often occur far enough

from the angle of the segments: in Utricularia minor we even

see them sometimes at the extremity of the divisions of the leaf.

We therefore cannot mfer from their position their analogy to

buds. It will be easily understood, from what precedes, that

the pedicellate globules of Benjamin and the little horn-hke

bodies of Schleiden are nothing but intermediate phases between

the first commencement of the utricle and its definitive form.

The anatomical examination of the perfect utricle further

confirms us in this view. The walls of the utricle consist of two

layers of angular cells, at first of a very bright green colour. In

the intercellular canals we see at the earliest periods some small

conical cells, which terminate within and without in a small

rounded cell; the interior cell afterwards forms the base of the

quadrifid hairs, the formation of which we have already described

according to Schacht.

This author does not mention the exterior cells, which are

always seen in great numbers, even on the young utricles of

Utricularia minor, in the form of little flattened globules, often

subsequently divided into two; these globules likewise occur on

the other parts of the segmented leaf, where they appear in the

form of little mushrooms, of which the stipes buries itself

Vesicles of the Utriculariz. 393

among the cells of the parenchyma. The exterior globule after-

wards becomes filled with a brown matter. Schleiden (Grund-

zuge, 4th edit. p. 397) observed the flattened cells on the out-

side of the utricles, but does not mention them on the leaves ;

and yet their presence on the leaf properly so called seems to

me to be precisely an additional proof that the utricle is only

an expansion and modification of the parenchyma. The quadri-

fid hairs which line the interior of the utricles present a certain

resemblance to the stellate hairs which occur on the inner sur-

face of the aériferous canals of the petioles of the Nympheacee.

The intercellular passages of the leaves of Utricularia contain

much gas, which causes them to appear black under the micro-

scope; this black band is prolonged through the pedicel into

the utricle. In plants exposed to light I have often observed a

strong disengagement of gas (oxygen), the bubbles of which

rose in the water for a long time, forming a nearly continuous

gaseous thread; these bubbles of gas started from the angle of

two segments of the leaf not far from a utricle. Similar bub-

bles are likewise evolved at the extremity of the capillary seg-

ments of the leaves.

As regards the mushroom-like cells, in which the pileiform

part is shghtly constricted in the middle, and often divided into

two, these seem to me to occupy the place of the stomata, and

to play the part of glands ; in fact they present a great analogy

to the glands which occur at the surface of the base of the vis-

cous leaves of Pinguicula vulgaris. These glands likewise ter-

minate superiorly in a little brown inflated hood, similar to that

of a small mushroom, whilst the stem is colourless as in the

corresponding organs of the Utricularie. The mucilage which

covers the surface of the leaves of Panguieula would correspond

in its turn to that which fills the cavity of the young utricles.

We have already seen that the utricles at first present an

extremely pale-green colour; subsequently the green colour

becomes more strongly marked. Utricularie collected in the

marshes of Jogny on the 18th of October, 1866, still presented

a small number of green utricles; but most of them were of a

violet or very dark blue colour.

In these coloured utricles the angular (usually hexagonal)

cells of the imner layer contain a coloured liquid passing from

lilac rose-colour to blue violet ; these cells then resemble stained

glasses surrounded by a slender thread of silver. ‘The ceils

which close the intercellular canals were either red or dark blue ;

round them there extended, between the angular cells, a reddish

tint. At this same period (October 1866) I found in the seg-

ments of the leaves, side by side with the green cells containing

chlorophyll-granules, cells the contents of which were pale red.

394 M.S. B. Schnetzler on the Aériferous

The cells of the outer layer of the utricles contained chlorophyll-

granules grouped towards the wall, whilst the interior was colour-

less. The mushroom-like cells had their pileus already coloured

brown.

This change of colour which takes place in the cells of the

utricular walls, in which we see the green passing to rose, lilac,

violet, and blue, evidently depends upon a chemical action in

relation to the contents and function of the utricles. We must,

in the first place, remark that the coloration of the interior cells

is due to a liquid, whilst the granules of chlorophyll have dis-

appeared or do not exist. These granules appear to have under-

gone at the same time the action ‘of a solvent and of a chemical

agent which has changed their colour*.

The red colour of the cell-liquids is generally ascribed to the

presence of a free acid, and their blue colour to the existence of

an alkali. In the utricles of Utricularia minor all the transitions

between bright red and deep blue may be observed.

At first the cavity of the utricles contains a mucilaginous

liquid, of neutral reaction ; it is in this liquid that we afterwards

witness the appearance of alittle bubble of gas, which gradually

increases in volume, whilst the liquid diminishes. The presence

of this mucilaginous liquid may be very easily ascertained by

changing the position of the utricle; the bubble of gas always

tends to gain the most elevated part, by making its way through

a viscous liquid which opposes to it a certain amount of resist-

ance. In June and July the vesicles are almost all filled with

air. The plant then rises to the surface of the water; and the

peduncle, which, in Utricularia minor, bears from two to five

flowers of a pale-yellow colour, rises into the air, where the two

unilocular anthers spread their pollen upon the stigma of the

pistil, free from the contact of the water. The ascensional force

thus produced is very considerable. Reinsch (Mikroscop) as-

sumes that, on the average, the capacity of one utricle (in U.

vulgaris) 1s equal to 2°57 cubic millims., and the weight of a

utricle to 0°6 milligramme ; the ascensional force of a single

utricle would thus be equal to 1964 milligr. About 597 utri-

eles may be counted upon one main branch, the ascensional

force of which amounts to 0°778 gramme; and taking an entire

plant, Reinsch obtains a total force of 4°44 grammes: counting

four branches, we obtain 3'112 grammes. Now the weight of

a tuft of flowers which rises above the level of the water is

* M. Micheli, in an interesting work on the colouring-matter of chloro-

phyll, shows that acids destroy “the colour of chlorophyll and render it

yellow; sulphuric and hy drochlorie acids, in lar ger quantity, reconvert this

yellow into blue or green; and baryta acts in an analogous manner

(Archives des Sci. Nat. May 1867).

Vesicles of the Utricularie. 395

0295 gramme ; consequently there is a very considerable excess

of force, capable of maintaining the flowers out of the water

through the whole time of fecundation. After this act, the

utricles gradually become filled with liquid, the specific gravity

of the plant increases, and it descends again slowly with its

ripening fruits below the level of the water. The seeds, escaping

from their unilocular capsule, fall into the mud, where they

germinate*,

We find among authors a difference of opinion as to the po-

sition of the Utricularie in the water before flowering. Some

regard them as attached to the bottom by slight roots ; others

(as, for example, Reinsch) regard them as floating plants. The

Utricularie are really at first attached to the bottom; but

the aériferous vesicles which are developed upon their leaves

gently draw them out of the mud in which their filamentous

roots bury themselves; and it is in this that I find the true

utility of the utricles—namely, that they pull up the plant

from the bottom; for the plant alone, without utricles, floats

very well in the water, and rises towards the surface +.

The Utricularia, however, are not the only plants in which

we see such movements produced by an evolution of gas. In

the Hottonie, Aldrovande, and Trapa natans we may discern, at

the epoch of flowering, slow movements of displacement of the

entire plant; whilst in other aquatic plants (Nymphea, Vallis-

neria, Ranunculus aquatilis, &c.) only certain parts become elon-

gated. In the Utricularie and Aldrovande it is by aériferous

vesicles that the specific gravity of the plant is diminished and

it is caused to rise by being drawn out of the soil. In the

Hottonie we find, in the leaflets, cells filled with air. In the

petioles of Trapa natans aériferous cavities are formed before

the flowering (Reinsch, oc. cit.).

Sometimes the plant cannot perfectly detach itself from the

bottom ; the pollen-grains are then preserved in another man-

ner from contact with the water. The following is a striking

example, which shows us, as in the preceding cases, that at the

approach of the flowering-seascn there is an evolution of gas,

which, instead of producing a movement, plays a more direct

part in fecundation.

* The seeds are usually sterile; but there are large reproductive buds

which descend to the bottom of the water during the winter (A. de Candolle,

Géographie Botanique, tome ii. p. 1003).

t I placed in a large glass vessel a tuft of Utricularia furnished with

vesicles which were still green; the plants floated at the surface of the

water. Some Lymnce contained in the same vessel gnawed the plants,

and especially devoured the utricles; the Utricularia, thus deprived of

their vesicles, still maintained themselyes at the surface.

396 M.S. B. Schnetzler on the Aériferous

In the lake of Escoubous, situated upon the summit of the

Hautes-Pyrénées, at 2052 metres above the level of the ocean,

there lives a very remarkable variety of Ranunculus aquatilis.

It forms a sort of very extended turf, moored to the bottom of

the water by the radicles which shoot out even at the extremity

of its stems—side by side with broad carpets of a blackish-green

colour, formed by Tremelloid Ulve. Tere, in opposition to the

laws which causé aquatic plants to seek the open air in order to

flower and accomplish the act of reproduction, it remains con-

stantly immersed, far from the margins, where the severity of

the frosts might destroy it, and far from the great depths, where

it would no longer find the light necessary for its vegetation*;

here it expands its finely divided leaves and its white corollas

with their golden bottoms, and here it is fecundated and repro-

duces itself without ever attempting to reach the surface. The

possibility of fecundation is shown by a bubble of air produced

during the work of vegetation and retained between the petals

before their full expansion, in which the anthers project their

pollen (Guérin, Dict. d’Hist. Nat. tome vii. p. 465).

The evolution of gas in closed cavities, which we observe in a

certain number of aquatic plants before the expansicn of the

flower, is evidently in relation to what it has been agreed to call

vegetable respiration, During this operation the plant not only

takes carbonic acid from the air or water, but it also absorbs,

through all its parts, oxygen, which combines with the carbon

of certain vegetable matters to form carbonic acid. The chemical

action of the solar light induces the decomposition of the car-

bonic acid absorbed, as well as of that formed in the plant. The

carbon is fixed in the plant by combining with the elements of

water, nitrogenous matters, &e. The oxygen is evolved. The

stomata appear to play an important part in respiration ; never-

theless, according to the investigations of Duchartre, there 1s no

definite relation between the number and size of the stomata

and the quantities of gas evolved by plants when exposed to the

sun. In certain trees which have a dry and leathery texture

there is an inverse ratio between the considerable number of the

stomata and the weakness of the evolution of gas. Moreover

what proves that the gases exhaled by plants are not evolved

solely through the stomata is, that we see them issue from the

cells of the epidermis of the upper surface of leaves in plants in

which this surface has no stomata, when the leaves are immersed

in water. We have already demonstrated a similar evolution

from the immersed leaves of Utricularia. In entirely submerged

aquatic plants the leaves are destitute of stomata, and absorption

* The plant in question does not occur either at the margin or at great

depths, beeause it cannot exist in either of these positions.

Vesicles of the Utriculariz. 397

and exhalation take place through the whole surface of the epi-

blema. Experiments made by MM. Cloéz and Gratiolet have

demonstrated that the decomposition of carbonic acid by the

ereen parts of submerged plants is only effected under the in-

fluence of light. In the dark no carbonic acid is produced, con-

trary to what occurs in aérial plants. A certaim temperature is

necessary for the production of the phenomenon. When the

temperature is rising, it does not commence below 15°C,

(=59° F.) ; when the temperature is descending, 1t may con-

tmue at 10°C. (=50° F.). Besides oxygen, the gas produced

by the plant contains a certain quan of nitrogen.

If we apply the preceding facts to the leaves of the Utricu-

larie, we find them immersed in a water which is usually very

rich in carbonic acid; this gas is absorbed by the leaves, and,

under the influence of light, oxygen and a little nitrogen are

evolved. In the segments of the leaves the gases occur in the

aériferous canals which traverse those segments; they are set

free at different points in the form of little bubbles. We have

not seen these bubbles issuing through the walls of the utricles,

which appear to oppose a certain amount of resistance to their

escape, and this may probably exert some action upon their own

expansion. The utricles floating frecly in the water become the

seat of phenomena of endosmose and of chemical actions. This

work goes on especially when the circumambient water presents

a temperature of 10°-15° C. (=50°-59° F.). At first the utri-

cles contain a mucilaginous liquid ; soon a bubble of gas is seen

to make its appearance in this liquid, and to increase in volume:

this is oxygen, evolved under the influence of light and heat

which have penetrated through the water to the utricles. The

plant escapes from the mud and rises towards the surface; the

secretion of gas becomes more abundant, and the flower-stalk is

supported above the level of the water. The oxygen secreted in

the utricles seems to exert a chemical action, in virtue of which

the contents of the cells of the walls undergo a transformation

and a change of colour, becoming rose, lilac, and blue. The

envelope thus coloured reacts in its turn upon the interior work

of the utricles. We know that, in fact, in organs coloured

otherwise than green (for example, in the petals of the corolla),

there is no longer any evolution of oxygen, but, on the contrary,

absorption of oxygen and evolution of carbonic acid; the latter

does not escape from the utricle, but is probably assimilated ;

the utricle becomes filled again either with a mucilaginous mat-

ter or with water absorbed by endosmose, and the plant i increases

in weight and descends again to the bettom of the water*.

* In the dark, for example in the utricles which are of a black-blue

colour, carbonic acid is no longer formed.

398 On the Aériferous Vesicles of the Utriculariz.

We thus sce the utricles play the part at once of organs of

respiration and cf a hydrostatic apparatus. These organs there-

fore do not appear at a given moment and for a particular pur-

pose, but as a natural consequence of the anatomical structure

of the plant and the action of the surrounding medium. I

shall take the liberty of adding here a passage from a work by

Schleiden, already cited (Grundziige &c.), which relates to the

idea that I have just expressed :—

“What is most interesting in the life of the plant,’ says

Schleiden, “is its dependence upon the life diffused over the

earth in general. It must be admitted that im the forces upon

which depend meteorological phenomena and the formation of

organs and of organisms (Bildungstrieb, &c.) we have already, as

given in a necessary manner, the cause which makes a certain

insect be produced during the flowering of a certain plant—an

insect the life of which depends in its turn upon its nutrition

by the nectar secreted by this plant; then, in absorbing this

liquid, the insect transfers the pollen to the stigma, and thus

assures the continuance of the vegetable species which furnishes

it with its nourishment. When we consider the coincidence of

phenomena for an isolated plant, it often appears to us to de-

pend upon pure chance; for example, the coincidence of wind

with the flowering of the Abietineze, of the fall of rain with that

of Ambrosinia Bassiv*, of the movement of the water with the

expansion of the flowers of Valisneria; but these coincidences

are only necessary consequences of the same primitive forces

which manifested themselves in the evolution of our planet.”

The totality of the forms in which life manifests itself upon

the earth during a given epoch appears to us thus like a magni-

ficent mosaic, of which the different pieces brought together

mutually determine their nature.

* The spathe of Ambrosinia Bassii presents the form of a trough, and

thus swims on the surface of the water. The spadix, which rises in this

spathe, divides it into two parts by meaus of a membranous wing which

surrounds the spadix and is attached to the spathe; the lower compart-

ment contains the anthers, and the upper one a single ovary : between the

two compartments there is a little aperture in the separating partition.

Fecundation cannot take place unless at the period of flowering rain falls

into the spathe. The water then fills the lower compartment, and its level

gradually rises up to the ovary in the upper compartment; the pollen,

which floats on the surface of the water, thus comes in contact with the

organ which it has to fecundate,

Mr. A. G. Butler on Asiatic Lepidoptera. 399

XLVII.—Descriptions of new or little-known Species of Asiatic

Lepidoptera. By Antuur G. Butier, F.Z.S.

[Plates VIII. & IX. figs. 1-10.]

Tur following species of Butterflies are chiefly from the collec-

tion of Lieut. H. Roberts, who has kindly lent them to me for

description.

Genus Prerts, Boisduval.

Pieris figulina, n. sp. Pl. VIII. fig. 1.

Alee supra plumbagineo-rufe ; marginibus externis, apice anticarum

maculam quadripartitam rufam includente, lunula apud angulum

analem et plerumque venis fuscis; areola basali, costa anticarum

et margine interno posticarum crisescentibus ; costa posticarum

recente: : corpus nigro- fcc abdomine pallidiore, pilis virl-

descentibus vestitum ; ‘antennis nigris partim albo punctatis.

Al subtus pallidiores: anticee aurantiace, ad basin costamque ful-

vescentes ; area apicali fuscescente, extus fulvescente ; macula sub-

apicali magna velut supra, a venis autem vix divisa, roseo-albida ;

macula (quee supra a fundo discali vix separata est) subovali, lunu-

laque velut supra, submarginalibus aurantiacis ; margine interno

luteo: postice roseo- albidee ; marginibus externo et interno ful-

vescentibus ; fascia pone aelura irregulari, extus bisinuata, fusces-

cente; nebula submarginali cinerea undata colorem marginis li-

mitante: corpus fulvam, abdomine albicante.

; ae O13

Exp. alar. unc. 243.

Hab. Singapore, 3, Coll. Roberts. Borneo, ? , Coll. Hewit-

son.

This beautiful and very distinct species is evidently allied to

the blue Celestina of Boisduval: it may belong to the Nelo

group; but the front wings differ considerably in car I have

recently seen a specimen of the female from Borneo.

Genus Trrtnos, Doubleday.

Terinos Robertsia, n. sp. Pl. VIII. figs. 2, 3, 4.

Alw forma et magnitudine Terpandri (Hewits.).

¢. Alw anticze supra nigerrime, dimidio costali purpureo, hujus

margine profunde hastato : posticee purpureze nitidissimee, apice

quadrate nigerrimo, margine interno olivaceo-fuseescente ; lunulis

duabus unaque valde indistincta niveis roseo tinctis submarginali-

bus; margine tenui nigro, ciliis flavis.

Ale subtus velut in Verpandro.

Exp. alar. unc. 27.

@. Ale supra fuser ; area basali, maculis sex anticis discalibus in-

eequalibus inter venas positis plagaque posticis discali purpureis

nitidis ; anticee fasciis duabus obscurioribus equidistantibus fus-

400 Mr. A. G. Butler on new or little-known

cis transversalibus : posticee maculis albis yelut in mari, lunulisque

alteris contiguis marginalibus albidis.

Ale subtus velut in Terpandro.

Exp. alar. une. 214.

Hab. Malacca (Ayerpanas). Coll. Roberts.

This beautiful and very distinct species is most nearly allied

to T. Terpander of Hewitson (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1862, p. 90),

which I consider to be the insect figured inadvertently in the

‘Genera of Diurnal Lepidoptera’ (pl. 21. fig. 3) as the Cla-

rissa of Boisduval, the latter being a much larger species, with

more strongly falcated fore wings. My species only differs from

Terpander, on the underside, in the narrower and darker yellow

discal band and smaller white spots of the hind wings.

Genus Nepris, Fabricius.

Neptis Charon, n.sp. Pl. IX. fig. 1.

Alee supra nigerrimee : anticze stria triangulari discoidali, macula con-

tigua cuneata, maculis tribus subapicalibus ineequalibus, tribus sub-

analibus oblique positis punctisque octo submarginalibus niveis ;

punctis octo marginalibus striaque valde indistincta irregulari dis-

cali subcinereis : posticze fascia subbasali et altera septemmaculari

discali niveis; stria submarginali maculari subcinerea, fascia media

fuscescente indistincta : corpus nigrum, virescens ; antennis nigris,

flavo acuminatis.

Alee subtus pallidiores, striis discali anticarum et media posticarum

violaceis, stria submarginali canescente; stria marginali cinerea ;

costa basali posticarum nivea; aliter velut supra: corpus ceeruleo-

albidum ; pedibus ochreis ; antennis ferrugineis.

Exp. alar. unc. 2;*.

Hab. Singapore. Coll. Roberts.

Near to Duryodana of Moore, but quite distinct.

Genus Craraxeés, Ochsenheimer.

Charaxes Echo, n. sp. Pl. VIII. figs. 5, 6.

Ale supra nigro-fuscze, ad basin paulum viridescentes: antice serie

macularum septem decrescentium fulvarum discali; maculis dua-

bus pone cellam oblique positis punctisque tribus marginalibus

analibus fulvis : posticee. fascia tenui media, punctis septem ovali-

bus submarginalibus undecimque angularibus marginalibus fulvis;

margine interno fusco-grisescente: corpus thorace nigro-fusco,

abdomine fusco: antennis nigris.

Alee subtus roseo-albicantes, extus paulum fuscescentes: anticze

lineis tribus discoideis duabusque infra cellam nigris; maculis

discalibus velut supra, intus autem nigro limitatis; macula su-

perna pone cellam extensa fasciolam formante ; maculis submar-

ginalibus serie positis (apud angulum ani solum distinctis), omni-

Species of Asiatic Lepidoptera. 401

bus flavis; maculis duabus tribusve, cum iis subanalibus junctis,

ovalibus, nigris, anali geminata: posticee areola basali et fascia

media albidis nigro limitatis, hac quoque argenteo intus marginata ;

maculis septem Tunulatis ferr ugineis, tribus inferioribus majoribus

magis rufescentibus, omnibus intus cyaneo-albo cinctis et nigro

limitatis ; linea subanali nigra; maculis septem marginalibus ceeru-

leis nigro lineatis extus fulvo et intus albo limitatis: corpus

ochraceum, thoracis medio palpisque albicantibus ; antennis nigris.

Exp. alar. unc. 213.

Hab. Singapore. Coll. Roberts.

Alhed to Lampedo, Hiibner (Samml. exot. Schmett. Band 2.

taf. 52. figs. 3, 4), but smaller, the fore wings more angular, the

hind wings with short obliquely placed tails, the bands narrower

and differently placed.

Genus CLEROME, Westwood.

Clerome gracilis, n. sp. Pl. VIII. fig. 7.

3. Ale supra ferrugineo-ochracee, colore fere Menadonis: antics

costa subrecta, magis productee.

Ale subtus paulum pallidiores et subolivaceee, lineis duabus me-

diis nigris irregularibus unaque submarginali angulis alternis un-

data (anticis indistincta) pallidiore : anticee punctis quatuor ochreo-

albis serie recta digestis ocelloque parvo, nigro, fulvo cincto, fusco

marginato, albo pupillato submarginalibus : posticee ocellis quin-

que, primo et quinto magnis distinctis, aliis intermediis puncti-

formibus albidis: corpus ochraceum.

Exp. alar. unc. 2.

Hab. Malacca. Coll. Roberts.

The smallest Clerome I have yet seen.

Genus Mycauusts, Hiibner.

Mycalesis cinerea, n. sp. Pl. VIII. fig. 9.

¢. Alee supra cinereze obscuree, omnino sed preecipue anticee sericeo-

canescente marmoratze ; fascia ejusdem coloris valde indistiucta

obliqua media: corpus cinereum.

Alce subtus coloribus fere Hesiones; sed cinereo-fuscee, fascia alba

abbreviata, linea marginali cinerea nec albida, fascia marginali

latiore ad angulum ani posticarum dilatata, linea submarginali

magis albicante; ocellis minoribus, iride brunnescente tenuiore,

cincturis omnibus magis conspicuis partim niveis.

Exp. alar. unc. 142.

Hab. Singapore. Coll. Roberts.

Nearly allied to Hesione, but grey, not brown, and with paler

marblings above, and different marginal lines below; the ocellus-

zones also brighter and varied with white.

402 Mr. A. G. Butler on new or little-known

Mycalesis Polydecta. Pl. IX. figs, 5, 6.

Papilio Polydecta, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. exliv. figs. E, F.

Ale supra fuscze, marginibus minime pallidioribus: antice ocello

magno: posticee duobus minoribus interno majore.

Alze subtus pallidiores fascia media albida, area apicali ocellos ferente,

anticarum quinque, posticarum septem ; margine externo pallido,

nigro lineato.

> . 1

Exp. alar. unc. 23.

Hab. Borneo (Butler). Celebes; var., Sumatra. B.M.

Cramer gives the locality of this species as Tranquebar; but

I have a specimen, exactly agreeing with his figure, from Bor-

neo. In the National Collection we have it from Celebes, and

a variety, without ocelli on the upperside of the hind wings,

from Sumatra.

Mycalesis Cepheus, n. sp. PI. IX. figs. 3, 4.

Alze supra fuse, margine externo, stria media et iride ocelli anti-

carum pallidioribus: anticze ocello discali obscure fusco cco ;

linea ejusdem coloris marginali; margine ipso nigro: corpus

fuseum,

Alee subtus fere velut in Mineo Linn., fascia autem media tenuiore

et obscuriore ; serie ocellorum posticis magis arcuata.

Exp. alar. unc. 14

Hab. Penang. Coll. Roberts.

Closely allied to Mineus, but paler on the upperside, with a

brown blind ocellus in the front wings; below with a narrower

and straighter central band, and the row of hind-wing ocelli

much more arched; the marginal lines also pale ochreous.

Mycalesis nautilus, n. sp. PI. IX. fig. 7.

Alee supra dilute fuscee: anticze ocellis tribus nigrescentibus vix iri-

datis, albo pupillatis, horum duobus subapicalibus parvis, tertio

diseali: posticee lineis duabus marginalibus undatis fuscis ; ocello

parvo subanali subnigro, fulvo iridato: corpus cinereo-fuscum.

Ale subtus pallidiores, marginibus velut in Mineo Linn. ; fascia

media argentea, intus fusco limitata, extus diffusa; linea sub-

basali subintegra fusca: anticee ocellis quinque distinctis, quinto

multo majore, serie directa: posticee ccellis septem, primo et

quarto majoribus, quinto maximo, septimo minimo, serie arcuata

positis: corpus ochreo-fuscum,

Exp. alar. unc. cire. 14-23.

Hab. Malacca, India. ¢ ?, Coll. Roberts.

Closely allied to, 32. Janardana of Moore, but differing in

many essential characters. The sexes differ only im size.

Species of Asiatic Lepidoptera. 403

Genus Letun, Hiibner,

Lethe Whitelyi, n. sp. Pl. IX. fig. 8.

Ala supra fusca: antice fasciola discali pallidiore pone cellam po-

sita; ocello subapicali valde indistincto, fusco, flavo cineto: posticae

ocello subanali nigrescente, brunneo cincto, indistincto: corpus -

olivaceo-fuscum.

Ale subtus fere velut in Z. Diana Butl.: anticee autem fascia magis

angulari, ocellis tantum duobus, superiore multo majore : postice

areola discocellulari latiore, partim violaceo micante; ocellis ma-

joribus: corpus cinereo-fuscum.

Exp. alar. unc. 2,5.

Hab. Nagasaki (North Japan). B.M.

This is probably the Nagasaki representative of the Hakodadi

species Diana; it differs in its much greater size, broader and

less angular wings with regularly convex costal margins, larger

and less regular ocelli, &c.

Lethe manthara, Pl. IX. fig. 9.

Debis manthara, Felder, Reise der Fregatte Novara, part 3 (1867).

Ale supra olivaceo-fuscze : posticee maculis quinque ccellaribus nigris

ochreo cinctis.

Alz subtus fere velut in mekara Moore, sed pallidiores minus flavido

variegate ; linea discali multo rectiore, ocellis omnibus pallidis,

distinctis, cincturis nigris tenuibus, striola submedia albida, obso-

leta.

Exp. alar. unc. 214.

Hab. Java. O, BM.

This is of course the Javan representative of the North Indian

mekara; it is a smaller and more elegantly formed insect, is of

an olive-brown colour, with coppery reflexions, and has five in-

stead of four ocellate spots on the upperside of the hind wings ;

on the underside the discal band. is straighter, the ocelli paler

and delicately margined.

Genus Caiires, Westwood.

Celites humilis, n.sp. Pl. VII. fig. 8, & Pl. IX. fig. 2.

@. Ale supra fuscee, area externa anticarum paulum obscuriore,

posticarum dilutiore; linea marginali obscura: postice ocello

subanali valde indistinecto cco, pallide ochreo cincto; margine

interno dilutiore: corpus fuscum, antennis ferrugineis.

Al subtus pallidiores, ochraceze, fascia media et altera submarginali

ocellos ferente diffusis violaceis; fascia discali nebulosa fusca ;

lineis duabus marginalibus irregularibus distinctis fuscis : antice

ocello parvo subapicali: posticxe quinque, tertio et quarto parvis,

404: Mr. A. G. Butler on a new American Satyride.

quinto maximo, omnibus nigris, fulvo cinctis, fuseo circumeinctis et

minute albo pupillatis : corpus ochraceum.

Exp. alar. unc. 3,4.

Hab. Malacca (Ayerpanas). Coll. Roberts.

A local form of the Bornean C. euptychioides of Felder.

Genus Etymntas, Hubner.

Elymnias lutescens, n. sp. Pl. IX. fig. 10.

@. Ale supra fuscee obscuree : anticee fascia lata indistincta obscu-

riore, disco partim rufescente, angulo anali albicante: posticze

disco albicante ochraceo, fusco liturato; ocellis sex distinctis,

extus nigris, intus fuscis, albido pupillatis: corpus fuscum, abdo-

minis medio albido.

Ale subtus area basali obscuriore, area discali magis albicante ; ocellis

tribus parvis anticis, ocellisque posticarum multo majoribus; aliter

velut in dusara Horsf.

Exp. alar. unc. 213-3.

Hab. Borneo (Lowe); Malacca, Singapore, and Penang.

Coll. Roberts.

I have figured this species from a large and very imperfect

specimen, with the assistance of a fresh and good example, from

which I take my description: it 1s closely allied to dusara of

Horsfield.

All the species from Malacca were taken close to the Govern-

ment bungalow at Aycrpanas, about sixteen miles from the town

of Malacca.

XLVILUI.—Description of a new Genus and Species of American

Satyride from the Collection of Mr. H.W. Bates. . By A. G.

Butter, F.Z.8.

[Plate IX. fig. 11.]

Tue species upon which I found the present genus was taken

by Mr. Bates on the River Amazons; and I am much indebted

to him for the pleasure of describing it.

This genus is most nearly allied to Taygetis, which it closely

resembles in neuration; in general aspect it more nearly ap-

proximates the genera Dedalma and Oveoschistus, whilst on the

underside it somewhat reminds one of Corades.

Genus AMpuriprcta (apudls, dnxTos), gen. nov.

Ale mediocres: antice forma omnino Dedalme (Hew.) : postice

margine costali subrecto ; apice oblique abscisso ; margine externo

quadrisinuato ; angulo anali obliquo; margine interno apud an-

On the Laws of the Distribution of Life and of Rocks. 405

gulum ani distincte excavato, aliter directo ; venis omnibus fere

velut in Taygetide. Caput oculis nudis; palpis elongatis, extror-

sum paulum porrectis ; antennis tenuissimis, vix clavatis.

Amphidecta piynerator, sp.nov. Pl. IX. fig. 11.

Alee supra fuscze, area apicali anticarum et margine apicali postica-

rum obscurioribus ; costa anticarum et angulo anali posticarum

roseo-rubris: anticee costa basali nigro liturata; maculis tribus

discalibus albidis triangulum formantibus: corpus fuscum.

Ale subtus pailidiores ; anticee minime violaceo tinct ; apice fusces-

cente; area apicali et costa nigro lituratis ; maculis velut supra,

quartaque intermedia cuneata submarginali, albidis, plaga pur-

pureo-fusca inclusis: posticee albide roseo tinctze, omnino fusco

striate; apice niveo; angulo anali ferruginoso ; lineis duabus

mediis male definitis irregularibus ; margine externo fuscescente ;

punctis sex discalibus albis nigro punctatis, serie undata positis :

corpus ochreo-cinereum.

Exp. alar. unc. 2,%,.

Hab. Ega. Coll. Bates.

Taken in the depths of the forest. Flight low and weak.

Only a single specimen found. (Bates’s MS.)

XLIX.—The Method of Geology ; being an Account of the intro-

ductory part of a paper on “ The Laws which have determined

the Distribution of Life and of Rocks,” read before the Cam-

bridge Philosophical Society, Nov. 12, 1866. By Harry G.

See ey, F.G.S., of the Woodwardian Museum in the Univer-

sity of Cambridge.

In their distribution over the world, the materials of rocks

which are- accumulated under water, and the materials of

organized bodies, obey the laws of physics. The forces that

these laws relate to, in this subject, are:—ain the first place, those

inherent in the earth itself, such as gravity and attraction, on

the one hand, and motion in the earth’s crust; and, secondly,

those acting on the earth from without, such as the heat received

from the sun, and attractive forces which determine the earth’s

relations to the solar system. That is, everything is kept in its

place by gravity, out of which it is moved by heat and the forms

of energy into which heat is changed ; while the area over which

these forces operate in a given way is changed by movements in

the earth’s crust producing changes of land and water.

2. The motion of matter visible on the land is for the most

part due to the sun’s heat—hence being derived those distri-

buting powers the winds and rain and rivers, in their various

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 28

406 Mr. H.G. Seeley on the Laws which have determined

forms, discharging rock-matter into the sea; while the settling-

down of these materials upon the sea-bottom is the work deter-

mined by gravity. The motion of matter around the land is

for the most part due to the tide-generating power of the sun

and moon; but the arrangement of this matter on the sea-

bottom is due to gravity.

3. The motion of living things on land is due primarily to

the sun’s heat distributing the individual species in zones of

uniform temperature, modified by movements in the earth’s

crust producing distribution irrespective of temperature. The

distribution of living things in water is due primarily to move-

ments in the earth’s crust, modified subsequently by the form

of coasts, the abundance of life, and by temperature.

4. On the hypothesis of the earth having cooled from a fiery

state, the surface-rocks would be uncrystalline granitoid sub-

stances, the denudation of which would furnish clays. But, as

a matter of fact, everywhere beneath stratified formations some

rock of a granitic character is found. Therefore, assuming all

stratified rocks to be derived from the denudation of plutonic

rocks, it is necessary to consider what stratified deposits such

denudation can result in.

5. If the plutonic rock is erystallie, a granite may be taken

as the type. It consists of quartz, felspar, and mica—speaking

roughly, in the proportions of 25 per cent. of quartz, 55 per

cent. of felspar, and 20 per cent. of mica. The quartz is heavy,

and washes out in grains, which, left behind, form a deposit of

sand. Hence, if granite were the only source of water-formed

rocks, and only denuded by the sea, one-quarter of all known

stratified rocks would be sands and sandstones. And therefore

the quartz-grains (the sandstone to be, or that is) will form a

belt near to and around the shore, and will always be indubit-

able evidence of near vicinity to land. And supposing the mica

not to be decomposed, from its fine flaky character it will,

according to circumstances of slope of sea-bottom, currents, &c.,

be carried either to the limit of the sand, and go to form a

micaceous sandstone, or go beyond the limit of the sand, and

form a micaceous clay (slate).

The felspar readily decomposes into a clay, setting free in

addition a quantity of silica and potash or soda; and, from the

extreme fineness of its particles, this clay is carried out to sea

further than the sand, and surrounds the land as an outer belt,

at least twice as broad as the sand-belt.

But if the denudation takes place on the land-surface by the

agency of rain and running water, the major part of the sand

will be left behind; and the detritus poured into the sea by the

the Distribution of Life and of Rocks. 407

river will be chiefly the mud (i. e. the felspathic detritus) of the

watershed.

If both forms of denudation go on together (as is often the

case), the visible result is that the clay-band, as it approaches

the river-mouth, extends out in a fan-shaped form, thinning off

the further it is removed from the land; the great difference

between the two sets of clays being that, whereas the coast-clay

has its greatest extent in the line of the coast, the river-clay has

its greatest extent in the line of the river, 7. e. in a line at right

augles to the coast.

Since all plutonic rocks are not granites, it may be that, in

place of mica, there will be a more easily decomposed horn-

blende. Many forms of amphibole, like some kinds of mica,

contain much iron. There can be no doubt that many ter-

ruginous sandstones owe their iron to the decomposition of

mica after deposition, just as it seems probable that many clay-

ironstones were formed partly from the decomposition of horn-

blende at the time of deposition. ‘Two other important consti-

tuents are lime and magnesia; and I know of no origin for these

substances in nature except the plutonic rocks. Lime is to a

great extent soluble in water, under sea-shore conditions, and is

not precipitated by evaporation in an appreciable form where

there are other deposits forming; hence it is that we usually

find limestones near to shores where there is no denudation,

and far out at sea beyond the limits of sedimentary deposits.

6. If, therefore, we find a magnesian limestone, it will be a

reasonable inference that, if it could be followed over the old

sea-bottom, it would merge into a clay on approaching land,

that the clay would probably pass into a clay-ironstone, and

this latter into a sandstone, beyond which must be an area

without any deposit synchronous with these, which, however,

would coexist in the same geological time, though of such dif-

ferent mineral characters, and these retained only under such

limiting circumstances.

7. If beds have been already arranged in this order, which

may be called the necessary sequence of rocks, and a cliff of them

comes to be denuded, they are once more resolved into their

elementary substances, and spread out as before. The recon-

struction, however, may be generally detected by the pebbles

and, it may be, extraneous fossils that it will contain.

8. Under ordinary circumstances the river-clay is distinguished

from the shore-clay by its immense thickness ; for, concentrating

to a point the clay of a large area, it accumulates more rapidly

than that resulting from tidal denudation ; moreover it is more

likely than any other kind of deposit to be continuous in the

same area through several geological periods. The river-sand

28%

408 Mr. H.G. Seeley on the Laws which have determined

is usually finer than shore-sand, and extends over a more limited

area.

9. Sand, clay, and lime forming the sequence of rocks im

horizontal order (i. e. in space), it must also follow that there

will be a similar sequence in vertical order (i.e. in time). Thus,

therefore, it follows that if (y) a syenitic coast is denuded, and

the result is (s) sands, (c) clays, and (/) limestones, and the land

(g) is depressed so that high-water mark stands at 2, then, the

_UA, Pp Depressed level of land (x).

Present sea-level.

point from which the deposited materials are derived being car-

ried further inland (p), they will not be carried so far out to sea;

hence a sand will be deposited near shore and continuous with

the old sand (s) ; a new clay will be deposited on top of the old

sand (s), and a new limestone on the old clay (c). But if the

land were to rise again, the place of origin for the deposited

matter would go further out to sea, the new deposits nearest

shore would be denuded, and sand be spread over the clay. If,

then, there is a sequence of rocks like the Secondary series, it

becomes extremely easy to determine all the changes in physical

geography that took place while they were accumulating, while

it is no less easy to predict what must be the representative of

a formation in a district where the mineral characters have

changed.

10. Of course, organic causes and evaporation may accumu-

late limestones without their having any relation to sands and

clays, just as denudation of quartzites and sandstones may form

sands which are not succeeded by clays, and as the denudation

of voleanic rocks may form clays quite unconnected with sands

and limestones.

11. The thickness of deposits in relation to time is to a large

extent dependent on climate. In tropical regions where evapo-

ration and the resulting rain are great, deposits of immense

extent are formed. In cold countries, though of small extent,

the deposits are liable, from the nature of the seasons, to a

similar alternation of characters with those of tropical countries.

12. Every great fault changes the form and area of the sea-

bottom, and therefore modifies the sequence of deposits within

the disturbed area, producing unconformability if the fault is

formed rapidly. There is every reason to believe that faults

were as numerous in old geological times as in more recent pe-

the Distribution of Life and of Rocks. 409

riods; and therefore it is necessary to fix the ages of the faults

to interpret accurately the sequence of rocks, and to discover

therefrom the old physical geography.

13. From these considerations it follows that no deposit can

be traced over a large area. And when the mineral character

changes in a succeeding deposit, it follows that, at one end or

the other, there will be no change of mineral character. Hence

deposits cannot be identified or correlated over wide areas by

this means. But this limitation of kinds of rock-material is

evidence of change in physical conditions ; and if uniformity of

physical conditions can be determined, then it follows that there

is a wider means than mineral character at command for co-

ordinating water-formed rocks. Hence strata can be identified

and correlated by discovering the physical conditions which limited,

determined, and changed their mineral characters, and changed the

distribution of the fauna and flora of the given geographical area

that they occupy.

14, Nothing can be known of climatal conditions of the earth

in past time, except from physical evidence. Such 1s the exist-

ence of coal; for, judging from the analogy of peat, there is

strong reason for inferring that coal was formed under con-

ditions of temperature not warmer than our English climate.

15. The most important physical phenomena for the elucida-

tion of past physical geography are the thickness of the deposit

over a wide area, the number of beds of which it consists, the

relative sizes and characters of the constituent particles at dif-

ferent depths and in different districts, the amount and direc-

tion of the false bedding &c., the exact vertical and geogra-

phical position of fossils, &c. &e.

16. Just as the phenomena of water-formed rocks all owe their

existence directly or indirectly chiefly to the sun’s energy, so also

do the phenomena interwoven with life. This has long been re-

cognized by various eminent British and foreign physicists ; and,

in 1854, Prof. Huxley, in his memoir on the method of palzeon-

tology, asserted that organisms were but manifestations of ap-

plied physics and applied chemistry. Prof. Tyndall puts the

generalizations of physicists in a few words: when speaking of

the sun, it is remarked, “He rears....the whole vegetable

world, and through it the animal; the lilies of the field are his

workmanship, the verdure of the meadows, and the cattle upon

a thousand hills. He forms the muscle, he urges the blood, he

builds the brain. His fleetness is in the lion’s foot ; he springs

in the panther, he soars in the eagle, he slides in the snake.

He builds the forest and hews it down, the power which raised

the tree and that which wields the axe being one and the same.”

410 Mr. H.G. Seeley on the Laws which have determined

Translated into other language, this means that since the sun

is the chief appreciable source of energy on the earth, without

which little or no motion would be manifested, it follows that

organisms are storehouses in which the sun’s energy has been

accumulated in the form of work, and therefore that what are

called grades of organization in classification are only ways of

expressing the different degrees of energy that organic struc-

tures have stored up.

17. The manifestation of life on the earth is im every way

most abundant in the tropics, plentiful in the temperate zone,

and poor in genera and poor in species near the frigid poles of

the earth. The exuberance of life, whether in indaanls or

species, over the whole earth, or upon one district in different

seasons, coincides with the preponderance of heat. Heat acts

indirectly for the most part; for when applied to an egg, it is

partly converted into motion, causing the particles of the egg

to move, and it enables them to enter into new chemical com-

Dana cione: differentiating parts until the entire organism is

formed. The energy which differentiates the individual ege is

greatest at the tropics, where the differentiation of life is ereatest.

18. Every organism is subject to two series of modifying

agents :—Ist, the external changes produced by the stimulus of

the circumstances of ex istence ; 2ndly, the chemical changes

set up by contact of food with the viscera. Both of these

sources contribute energy. When a mammal, for instance,

moves, its work in part takes the form of motion; but the suc-

cession of falls which constitute walking or running convert a

part of that motion into heat ; this heat induces an expansion of

the structures, enabling the nutritive fluid to permeate and cir-

culate more rapidly, nourishing most the structures most used.

Hence the development of parts with use. The development of

the skeleton is chiefly due to differentiation of external fune-

tions; the development of the viscera is chiefly due to different

functions imposed by food.

The viscera, therefore, are more liable to vary than the mus-

cles; but their variation depends on the power of muscle and

nerve in obtaining food. Therefore external changes are accom-

panied by internal changes. And since changes are inherited,

they accumulate.

19. The individual being only lable to motion over so limited

an area as to be practically fixed, yet experiences some results

of enormous migrations from the change of seasons.

20. Since the heat of the earth may be assumed to be distri-

buted approximately in zoned gradations of latitude, it will fol-

low, from the preceding considerations, that if species were left

to themselves for ever, the most’ highly organized would be at

the Distribution of Life and of Rocks. 41]

the equator, the least organized at the poles. And since species

diffuse themselves in the direction of least resistance, it will be

along lines where the heat is uniform; so that homozoic belts

(but for disturbing causes) will correspond with parallels to the

equator.

- The present distribution of land and water, and the geological

evidences of its mutations, show that species are compelled to

migrate north and south (as well as east and west), and so be-

come subject permanently to different degrees of the sun’s

energy (and its product food), which, as was seen, cannot but

produce permanent changes in their organization. Hence it fol-

Jows that the same set of causes which introduce new rocks is

also an instrument in introducing new species and new types,

by changing the area of life.

21. When a portion of the sea-bottom is elevated so as to be-

come land, the life which covered that area is displaced ; that

is to say, the group of life, from being continuous over an area,

comes to surround a space which, so far as marine life is con-

cerned, is a desert. The method by which this is accomplished

is, that mountain ridges make divisions in the life-province; and

then, just as the waters drain down the valleys of the land con-

verging to an estuary, so also do the organisms drain off and

converge with the separation of the waters: hence, but for dis-

turbing causes, life will always be most abundant in species

around the seaward terminations of the great areas of drainage.

But, by the division of a group of life in this way, it happens (if

the elevation is carried to a great extent) that each part of the

old life-group becomes mixed with the new group on which it

is compelled to encroach. If land already existing is still fur-

ther upheaved, it can only happen that the life will migrate

further away; so that the fauna which in one age occupied a

given sea-bottom comes in a succeeding age to occupy an adja-

cent area.

22. Ifa portion of the sea-bottom is depressed, the life that

covered it migrates away, following the shore as it recedes.

And also if a portion of land is depressed so as to become sea-

bottom, the life that covered the adjacent area migrates over it,

and life of the present age becomes diffused in the succeeding

age over an adjacent area without admixture with any new

forms, except such as may be produced by the changed condi-

tions.

23. If elevation occurs so that a land-surface is enlarged,

then the species already upon it migrate over the newly added

area and down the mountain-sides, always diffusing most rapidly

in the direction of least resistance.

412 Mr.H.G. Seeley on the Laws which have determined

24. If depression of a land-surface is going on, then the spe-

cies are converging in space and becoming numerous relatively

to their area, while they also ascend the mountains. If while

the land sinks to the north it rises to the south, the fauna and

flora come to occupy a more southern area*.

25. There being much reason for thinking that the deep

waters of the ocean have a comparatively uniform temperature,

it follows that the distribution of life in those regions will be less

dependent on temperature than it 1s at the surface of the earth.

Therefore the life of deep-sea limestones will have a wide range.

26. No elevation of land can take place without (as was seen in

§ 9) the deposits that were forming being continued over each

other out at sea. Thus s is the sand formed near to the shore, and

ec the clay further out at sea; by elevation s' is formed over s

and c, and c! is formed over c and 7. By further elevation, s?

is formed over s! and over c!, and of course a c? would be formed

over c! and /', so that the s, s!, s*, s3, &e. would appear to the

observer of sections to form one deposit (for the divisions here

marked would not exist in nature) extending uniformly over

another deposit, c, cl, c?, which would therefore appear tobe

an older one; and as this deposit would extend over the /

series, it would be inferred to be newer than that group. But,

although that inference is correct in regard to the vertical

section, obviously the s is older than the c!, and much older

than the c?, though it appears to rest on the top of those

deposits. And since by elevation the sea-area is changed, the

fauna and flora continue to move in the direction of least resist-

ance, which in this case being determined by uniformity of con-

ditions, it happens that the fauna of s will migrate into s’,

and similarly will afterwards move into s?; so that it will be

impossible to identify the ages of these beds by fossils in the

usual rough-and-ready way, or by superposition. Here identi-

fication of the strata can only be accomplished by the method

given in § 13.

Often by elevation a fauna is compelled to migrate ; and then

the extension of a group of life assists greatly in connecting

deposits in an adjacent area with those formed under other

physical conditions, when we have discovered where the group

came from.

* The migratory habits of birds are probably due to old changes in

physical geography of this kind.

the Distribution of Life and of Rocks. 413

27. Under certain circumstances, when a group of life is driven

to a new locality by elevation, it happens that the conditions of

least resistance determine its course either over or under the

group which previously occupied the ground; so that a grada-

tion of life in zones of depth comes to result from the distribu-

tion of life in provinces.

28. No depression of land can take place without the deposit

which was forming furthest out at sea appearing to be newer

than the others. Thus here, s, c, 7 represent the typical sand-

stone, clay, and limestone. By depression s! is formed nearer to

shore, and c! is deposited over s and c; and so the succession

is continued, if the depression goes on, till the stratum s°, s?,

s', sis formed under the c series, the c series in its turn being

under the / series. Yet this apparent superposition gives a

very erroneous idea of the age of the beds; and since the life

follows the receding shore, it happens that the fauna of s is also

found in s°.

Hence it follows that neither in the rocks produced by eleva-

tion nor depression can the age of the beds be determined by

superposition or by fossils.

29. Whenever a sandstone is superimposed on a clay, in

some portion of the area the older stratified rocks will be de-

nuded, if they were ever deposited there. Hence if such a

sandstone contains extraneous fossils, they came from rocks

which existed beyond the sandstone area, and on which the

sandstone was not then being accumulated.

If the sea-shore is stationary, the majority of the fossils, ac-

cumulated from the life of the time, will be much worn.

30. The fauna and flora of the British Isles is not the only

known fauna and flora. From the phenomena of elevation and

depression, it follows that no fauna or flora can cover more than

a fraction of the earth’s surface at the same period of time ;

though it is quite possible for a fauna to migrate during a long

period of time over a far larger area. And this is usually the

significance of the correspondence between distribution of life

in time and in space; and by a worldwide fauna is usually un-

derstood a fauna that has been split up by physical changes, so

that at a few widely divided points a less or greater proportion

of fossils (usually few) are found like those of the typical loca-

lity, but almost invariably mixed with others unlike those pre-

414 On the Laws of the Distribution of Life and of Rocks.

viously known (see $21). There is no evidence that any fauna

or flora ever was universal; physieal considerations such as

those detailed show that such a thing is impossible.

31. The life on the earth is conveniently divided into a num-

ber of groups called provinces, which have been produced by

changes in physical geography modifying the natural distribu-

tion in zones of varying organization. They are the evidence of

these physical changes and the means by which they may be

discovered. Every life-province, whether on land or in the sea,

is only a geological fauna or flora which has not become fos-

silized. Species have not been rooted to the area where found

since their creation. Every geological fauna is only a life-pro-

vince of the old sea in which the rock-material accumulated. If

there is a change of life between two deposits, it indicates that

a new life-province has migrated over the old one, and not ne-

cessarily that there has been any denudation or any break in

time.

32. Since no life-province extends over a large area of the

earth, it is impossible to identify distant geological formations

by the similarity of their fossils.

33. Since much disturbance may occur in an area adjacent to

that where deposition is going on, it may happen that two or

three groups of life succeed one another in one place, while, near

by, the first group of the three remains stationary. This is one

of the many difficulties that render it impossible to get any

definite results from percentages in fixing the age of beds.

Nothing is known of the duration in time of either recent or

extinct species; and for the percentage method to give accu-

rate results, it must be assumed that every species has exactly

the same duration in time, stopping at a given point ; whereas

it seems, from the case of some species sent to the antipodes for

instance, that under changed conditions they may flourish better

than ever. It is probable, too, that the distinctions at present

in use between species add to these difficulties. And it is worth

note that many genera survive from old palozoic times; so

that those periods, in a truer sense than that usually given to

the term, might be called Eocene.

34. Palzontology is the zoology of past times. But strati-

graphical geology is, as it seems to me, the only means by which

either the past or the present distribution of life can be under-

stood. Both these powers for research need to be used to dis-

cover the past mutations of the earth’s physical geography, by

coordinating which changes it is possible to correlate strata

over wide areas, and to obtain materials for their classification.

35. No satisfactory classification of rocks can ever be made

by fossils, for the reasons whieh have been given. Nor can a

Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of American Squirrels. 415

classification true for any large area be made on mineral cha-

racter.

But since the mutations in physical geography determine

both the rock-material and the distribution of life, there is in

them a philosophical basis for classification, which indicates the

value alike of mineral character and of fossils. Yet classifica-

tions, though made on the most fundamental considerations,

can never be carried from a typical locality all over the world,

because the world has neither life, nor mineral character, nor

stability of physical geography in common with the typical

locality.

The proof, extension, and practical application of the cosmo-

geny here sketched will be given in the first volume of the

‘ Principles of Paleontology,’ which is devoted to the dynamical

geology cf Britain.

L.—Synopsis of the Species of American Squirrels in the Col-

lection of the British Museum. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.,

Vel ZS.;. &e:

Tue species of American Squirrels are more difficult to define

distinctly than those of Asia or Africa, arising from the various

colours which the same species presents, even in individuals of the

same family ; thus Bachmann states, “ Nothing is more common

than to find the same litter composed of grey, black, and fox-

coloured young.”

Dr. Spencer Baird, in his well-studied essay on the Squirrels

of North America, has shown that some species of the larger

North-American Squirrels (as Sc. vulpinus) have a tendency to

run into ferruginous varieties,.and to have red bones, while

other species (as Se. carolinensis), of a yellow-grey colour, are

very commonly affected with melanism, and have more or less

black fur.

Both Se. vulpinus and Sc. carolinensis vary, on the under

surface of the body, from pure white to rufous or black.

Dr. Spencer Baird observes, as a general rule, that, where a

squirrel exhibits any annulations of the hair on the fur of the

throat or belly, it is a variety of some species which, in its

normal! form, has the under part either of a uniform white or

reddish colour to the base, or only plumbeous at the roots.

The hairiness of the soles of the feet varies, especially in the

species which inhabit the northern region of America, or which

have an extensive geographical range there. Dr. Spencer Baird

describes specimens of Sciurus vulpinus “with (1) the soles

naked, (2) the soles hairy between the pads nearly to the end

416 Dr. J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the American Squirrels

of the metatarsus, (3) with a small patch of hair only in the

centre of the sole.” (Mamm. N. A. 247.)

It has been observed that in the species which have an exten-

sive geographical range there is a difference in the average

size of the species, agreeing with the latitudes which it inha-

bits. Thus several of the North-American Squirrels become

smaller as they extend southward, until, on the sea-coast of

Georgia, Florida, and the Gulf, they reach the minimum size.

There are some species and some local varieties that appear

constant, and present very little variation in outer appearance ;

and I have no doubt the difficulties which we experience in

studying the specimens in museums would immediately vanish

if we could study the animals in their native haunts.

The colour of the back is very liable to vary, especially in the

larger species. In Sc. vulpinus it varies from pale iron-grey to

nearly black, and, on the other side, to fulvous brown grey.

Sc. carolinensis varies from pale iron-grey to fulvous; and a

melanic variety of a nearly uniform black colour is common.

The colour of the underside is quite as variable in some spe-

cies. Sc. vulpinus and Se. carolinensis, which have the under-

side normally of a pure white colour, sometimes have it deep

black, and at others reddish or reddish white. Several species,

especially of the smaller kind, which have the underside of a

reddish colour, have it sometimes much paler, and at others

white with a yellow tinge, or nearly white.

Many species have a tuft of soft hair at the base of the ears:

this is usually white or yellow, according to the species ; but I

have seen it white on one side and yellow on the other in the

same specimen.

The colour of the tail is generally characteristic of the spe-

cies; but in some kinds it is variable, though the variations are

confined within certain limits in each species. The size of the

dark band on the hairs of the tail and the general colour of the

hairs constitute a pretty permanent specitic character; but it

sometimes varies: the base-colour changes from grey to deep

yellow or white ; and the black band is sometimes diffused so as

to make the tail almost, and sometimes entirely black, or black

with a minute pale tip.

It is almost impossible to give a definite character for the

species in a few words ; each individual requires to be described.

2. ScIuRUS.

Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867, xx. pp. 271, 272, 325.

Kars tufted. Head broad; muzzle short. Feet hairy at the

heels. Front upper molar small or often wanting.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 417

Some of the North-American squirrels which have tufted

ears in winter are said to have smooth ears in summer; but [

have not seen any specimens showing this peculiarity. Many

species, indeed most, have a tuft of soft hairs at the outer base

of the ears, and the ears themselves are covered with short

close-pressed hairs; and this tuft may be more distinct at cer-

tain seasons.

I. Large-sized, grey.

* Lateral streak black, dorsal streak red. No.1. Sc. Alberti.

** Lateral or dorsal streak none. No. 2. Sc. cinereus.

Il. Middle-sized ; fur soft.

* Lateral streak distinct, lead-coloured; beneath white. Nos.3,4.

** Lateral streak distinct, black; beneath red. No. 5.

*** Lateral streak none; beneath red, No.6.

I. Large-sized, grey.

* Lateral streak distinct, dorsal streak red.

1. Sciurus Alberti.

Sciurus dorsalis, Wood, Proc. A. N.S. Philad. 1852, vi. 110 (not Gray).

Sc. Alberti, Woodhouse, Proc. A. N. 8. Philad. 1852, v. 220; Selgrave’s

Zool. Exped. 1853, p. 53, t.6; Audub. & Bach. Quad. N. Am. 1854,

i. t. 153. f. 1; S. Baird, M.-N.-A. 267.

Fur finely grizzled black-grey and black ; beneath and feet

white ; a dark line on each side of the belly; back with a pure

chestnut streak; tail black and white mixed, beneath white;

ears tufted.

Hab. New Mexico, San Francisco Mountains (Dr. Wood-

house). Mus. Smithsonian Institution.

See also Sc. castanonotus; Baird, M. N. A. 266, t. 65. f. 81,

82. C. (castanotus). Similar, but with the ears without tufts.

Perhaps a Macrozus.

** Lateral or dorsal streak none.

2. Sciurus cinereus.

Sciurus cinereus, Linn., Aud. & Bach. Q. N. A.i. 145, t.17; Baird, M.N.

A. 248, t. 48. f. 2.

Sc. vulpinus, Schreb. iv. t. 215 B.

Se. virginianus, Kerr.

2Se. hyemalis, Ord.

Fur light grey above, beneath white; head broad, muzzle

short ; ears grey, short, scarcely longer than the adjacent fur,

never white, covered with hair and fringed with longer hairs.

Hab. North America, Pennsylvania. B.M.

418 Dr.J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the American Squirrels

Var. 1. Blackish, very minutely punctulated with white ; hairs

lead-coloured at the base, brown above, with a narrow black

subterminal band and white tip; crown blacker; underside

reddish grey, slightly grizzled; tail black (or brown), hairs

black or brown, with slender white tips to some. North America.

B.M.

Var. 2. Hairs black, with a very small narrow subterminal grey

ring. B.M.

Var. 3. Hairs black, shining, uniform. B.M.

II. Middle-sized ; fur soft.

* Lateral streak lead-coloured ; tail narrow, shorter than the body.

3. Sciurus hudsonius.

Sciurus hudsonius, Pallas, Baird, M. N. A. 269, t. 46. f. 2.

Sc. carolinus, Ord.

Sc. rubrolineatus, Desm.

Tamias rubrolineatus, Schinz.

Tamia hudsonia, Lesson.

Fur black and greyish rusty ; back often washed with ferru-

ginous; tail beneath and towards the tip uniform ferruginous,

with roots of the hairs not annulated.

Carlton House (male, large) : B.M. Fort Simpson, Mackenzie

River (Ross): B.M.

See Sciurus Fremontii, Aud. & Bach. Q. N. A. ui. 237, t. 149.

f.1. ‘Fur above black and greyish rusty yellow, without any

tinge of ferruginous; tail black or greyish white, without any

ferruginous visible externally, glossy black near the tip.” (S.

Baird, M. N. A. 246, 272.) Rocky Mountains, Sawach Pass.

Mus. Smithsonian Institution.

4. Sciurus Richardsonit.

Sciurus Richardsonii, Aud. & Bach. Q.N. A. t.5; Baird, M. N. A. 273.

2Se. lanuginosus, Aud. & Bach. Q. N. A. t. 25 (immature).

Sc. hudsonius (part.), J. K. Lord, Report.

“ Fur reddish brown and black finely mixed ; back not washed

with ferruginous, beneath white; tail dark reddish brown to-

ward the base of the hairs, the exterior portion of the sides and

entire tip glossy black.”

Hab. Vancouver Island (J. K. Lord) : B.M. Cascade Moun-

tains (J. K. Lord): B.M. West Slope, Rocky Mountains (J. K.

Lord) : B.M.

** Lateral streak black ; underside rusty or reddish.

5. Seiurus Douglasi.

Sciurus Douglasii, Gray, P. Z.S. 1836, p. 88; Aud. & Bach.Q. N.A. i. t. 48;

Baird, M.N. A. 275, t. 20. f. 1, t. 45. ff. 2.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 419

Sc. Townsendii, Bach.

Se. Belcheri, Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1842, x. p. 264; Zool. Sulph.

t. 12. Var., S. Suckleyi, Baird, M. N. A. t. 7.

Sc. mollipilosus, Aud. & Bach. Q.N. A. t. 19.

2Sc. Fremontii, Aud. & Bach.Q. N A. t. 149. f. 1; Baird, M. N. A. 272, t. 6,

Fur rusty and black mixed, beneath clear bright buff; tail

dull chestnut centrally, darker above, then black and margined

all round with rusty white; hairs of the tail black, except at

their extremities.

Hab. California (Douglas, Gray, type in B.M.). Vancouver

Island, ? , dark brown (November, J. K. Lord, B.M.). Cascade

Mountains (J. K. Lord, B.M.). British Columbia, edge of the

Prairie (J. K. Lord, B.M., young).

Var. Fremontii. Paler, beneath reddish white; feet reddish

brown, rather larger.

?Sciurus Fremontii, Aud. & Bach. Q. N. A.t. 149. f.1; S. Baird, M. N.

ING PATS is (8

Hab. Scott Mountains, Trinity Country, 500 or 600 feet

above the sea-level (Brydges). B.M. Called Pine-Squirred.

**E Lateral streak none; belly red.

6. Sciurus hyporrhodus.

Sciurus estuans, Gray, List. Mamm. B. M.

Fur very soft, abundant and long, above reddish olive, mi-

nutely punctulated with bay and black; hairs lead-coloured,

with short yellow ends and a narrow subterminal black band;

side of nose, cheeks, chin, throat, underside of the body, and

inner side of the limbs red bay; hair black at the base, with

red ends: tail black, indistinctly yellow-ringed, reddish-washed ;

hairs yellow, with three black bands, the upper broadest, and a

reddish tip.

Hab. Santa Fé de Bogota.

Known from all the other South-American squirrels by the

softness and length of the hair and hairy ears.

3. Macroxus.

Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867, xx. pp. 271, 275.

Ears generally have a small tuft of short woolly hairs at the

outer hinder part of the base. This is not to be observed in M.

@stuans. Soles of the feet generally bald; but some of the

northern species have the soles covered with short hair, except

on the long pad on the inner edge, and near and on the pads at

the bases of the toes.

The species may be divided geographically as those found

north or south of the Gulf of Panama: the northern species

420 Dr. J. E. Gray’s Synopsis of the American Squirrels

are generally iron-grey and of larger size; and the southern are

olive, more or less punctulated with yellow, of middle size or

small. There are one or two of the olive species found in the

north as well as the south part of the isthmus.

I. Fur thick, soft, iron-grey, white- or yellow-washed, rarely entirely

black ; of a large or middle size. Inhabiting North America

to Panama.

A. The fur iron-grey, or grey yellow-washed, or black ; hairs black,

often with white tips; tail blackish, grey-edged.

a. Belly white. Nos. 1, 2, 3.

b. Belly red or reddish white. Nos. 4, 5.

c. Belly black. Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.

B. The fur pale grey; hairs grey, black-ringed : or black, the hairs

being entirely black.

a. Belly white. Nos. 11, 12, 13.

b. Belly yellow. Nos. 14, 15.

c. Belly red. No. 16.

ll. Fur short, soft, olive-brown, black- and yellow-punctulated,

rarely red-washed ; hairs black- and yellow-ringed. Moderate-

sized or small. Inhabit South or Tropical America to Panama.

A. Tail black; fur very short, belly nakedish. Middle-sized.

No. 17.

B. Tail black, red-washed ; fur moderately soft.

a. Belly red; cheeks red. Nos. 18, 19, 20, 21.

b. Belly red or reddish; cheeks grey. No. 22.

c. Belly white; cheeks grey. No. 23.

C. Tail blackish or grizzled, grey-washed, or more or less annu-

lated.

* Middle-sized. Belly white. No. 24.

** Middle-sized. Belly reddish. No. 25.

*** Middle-sized. Belly dark grey. Nos. 26, 27.

*kK* Middle-sized. Belly yellow. Nos. 28, 29, 30.

**4*%% Very small. Belly grey or lead-coloured. Nos. 31, 32.

Ill. Fur rather harsh, short; sides with a narrow reddish streak.

No. 33.

I. Northern species, of «@ large or middle size. Fur soft, tron-grey,

white- or yellow-washed, sometimes entirely black.

A. The fur iron-grey or black ; hairs black, often with a white

tip; tail blackish, grey-edged.

1. Macrozus vulpinus.

Sciurus vulpinus, Gmelin, S. Baird, M. N. A. 246.

Se. niger, Linn.

Se. capestratus, Bosc.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 421

Var., Sc. texianus, Bach. B.M.

Se. rufigaster, Mac Murtrie. B.M.

Fur coarse and harsh, iron-grey, black, or rusty-coloured

black-varied ; ears and nose white.

Hab. North America, Southern States, Florida, Georgia,

Louisiana: B.M. Texas: B.M.

Var. 1. Pale iron-grey; crown of head and cheeks black ;

beneath white; hairs of tail white, with a very broad subter-

minal black band and grey tip.

Var. 2. Blackish iron-grey; head, neck, shoulders, thighs,

legs, and feet black ; tail blackish, beneath white, lateral streak

between the two colours black ; hairs of tail dark grey, with a

very broad black end.

Var. 3. Like var. 2, dark iron-grey ; head, throat, underside,

and body and limbs black; nose and ears white; feet white-

varied ; hair of tail white, with a subterminal black band.

Hab. Northern States.

Var. 4. Yellow, iron-grey-grizzled ; crown blackish; sides of

throat yellowish; belly white-yellow; hairs of tail yellow or

reddish yellow, with a black subterminal band.

Hab. Texas: B.M. ‘Louisiana: B.M.

2. Macrozxus Colliei.

Sciurus Colliai, Richardson, Zool. Blossom, 1839, p.

Quad. N. A. 1853, ii. 21, t. 104; S. Baird, M.N.

Sc. variegatoides, Ovilby, P.Z.S. 1839, p- 117; S. Bain rd, M.N. A. 283.

Se. griseocaudatus, Gray, Zool. Sulph, 1834, t. 13.f. 2, t. 18. f. 7-12 (skull);

S. Baird, M.N. A. 283.

Fur harsh, rather rigid, nearly uniform grey, more or less

varied with black from the derangement of the hairs; hairs

black, with a subterminal white band; cheeks and chin grey;

tuft behind ears yellow, often very large ; chest and belly white

or deep yellow: tail black, washed with white; hairs yellow,

with a black subterminal band and a white tip.

Hab. Central America.

Var. 1. Under surface yellow; ear-tuft red; feet reddish.

Sciurus variegatoides, Ogilby, P. Z. 8. 1839, p. 117.

Sc. griseocaudatus, Gray, Zool. Sulphur, t. 12. f. 2.

Hab. West coast of America (Belcher, Ogilby, type in B.M. ;

Gray, type in B.M.).

Var. 2. Sides of the body and neck and outer and inner sides

of limbs bright rufous; throat, chest, and the middle of the

belly white.

Sciurus intermedius, Verreaux.

Hab. Guatemala (Verreaux). B.M., type.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 3. Vol. xx. 29

; Aud. & Bach.

422 Dr.J.E. Gray’s Synopsis of the American Squirrels

Var. 3. Under surface white; ear-tuft white or yellow; feet

grey, black- and white-punctulated.

Sciurus Colliei, Richardson, J. c.

Hab. California (Richardson, type in B.M.). Guatemala, West

Coast (O. Salvin): B.M. Mexico: B.M.

Var. 4. Under surface pure white; ear-tuft large, red; feet

black (not punctulated).

Hab. Mexico, province of “ Amoa” (Amoea ?).

3. Macrozxus dorsalis.

Sciurus dorsalis, Gray, P. Z. S. 1848, p. 138, t. 7.

Black ; crown, sides of neck, and body and limbs white ; ear-

spot large, white ; chin, throat, sides of neck, underside of body,

and inner side of limbs white, yellow-white, or reddish brown ;

hair black ; fur white- or yellow-varied, with a white tip.

Hab. Costa Rica.

Var. 1. Sides and underside pure white.

Hab. North America, Nicaragua.

Var. 2. Underside yellowish white; chin and throat white,

sides white, black-varied.

Hab. Santa Fé, Veragua (O. Salvin). B.M.

Var. 3. Underside and chin, cheeks, sides of body, and limbs

pale yellow.

Var. 4. Back more or less brown-varied, especially behind ;

outer sides of legs reddish-washed ; cheek, throat, and sides of

the body white-varied ; chest, belly, and inner sides of limbs

rufous.

Hab. Costa Rica, Nicoya (O. Salvin), B.M.

Var. 5. Like var. 3; but the lower part of the sides of the

body with a broad, reddish, black-and-white-dotted streak (like

the outer sides of the limbs) under the white on the sides of the

body ; chest with a short white central streak, and the cireum-

ference of the teats grey.

Hab. Costa Rica, Nicoya (O. Salvin). B.M.

Var. 6. Head, sides, limbs, feet, and beneath uniform rufous;

middle of the back black; tail black, with white tips to the

hairs. :

Hab. Nicoya? (QO. Salvin). B.M.

There is a young specimen in the British Museum, said to

come from Honduras, which is like the adult; but the fur is

black by the length of the black tips to the hairs; the tail is

black, white-washed, with long white tips to the hairs.

in the Collection of the British Museum. 423

4. Macroxus nicoyana.

Fur rather thick and abundant, yellowish iron-grey ; hairs

black, with a broad subterminal white band; shoulders, thighs,

legs, and sides of the body rufous-washed; tail black, very shghtly

punctulated ; head white iron-grey ; cheeks and chin pale grey;

ear-tuft large, white; throat, underside, and inner sides of the

legs bright red brown, varied with large white subsymmetrical

blotches: tail black, white-washed, hairs black (those of the

underside of the tail more or less brown at the base), with a

long white tip. Head and body 12 inches long.

Hab. Costa Rica, Nicoya (O. Salvin). B.M.

The white on the underside is perhaps an individual pecu-

liarity.

5. Macroxus aureogaster.

Sciurus aureogaster, F. Cuv. Mamm. Lithog. Ixx. t.; Geoff. Voy. Venus,

Zool. 1855, p. 136, t. 10, 11.

Se. leucogaster, F.Cuv.; Sp. Baird, M. N. A. 282.

Dark iron-grey ; crown of head, nose, and feet blacker ; sides

of the body, throat, chest, belly, inner sides and edges of the

limbs red brown; hairs black, mixed with grey or red tips: tail

bushy, black, white-washed ; hairs red yellow at the base, then

black, with long grey tips.

Hab. Columbia.

Var. 1. Red, darker chestnut on the shoulders and front

part of the back ; hairs of tail black at the base, with a yellowish

ring, and then black, with grey tips.

Var. 2. Fur with a redder tinge ; hair lead-coloured, then ru-

fous, with black rings and grey tips; nape, shoulders, rump, and

outer sides of thighs reddish; tail-hairs red at the base, then

black, with grey tips.

Sciurus aureogaster, 1. Geoff. Voy. Venus, t. 11, 2.

Hab. “Mexico” (F. Cuvier). South America (Verreaux) :

B.M. Columbia (Parzudaki): B.M.

These squirrels were received from Parzudaki and Verreaux

as the S. aureogaster of F. Cuvier. The last variety is somewhat

like I. Geoffroy’s figure of the female in the Voy. of the Venus,

teste

I have not seen any specimens like those figured as varieties

of the same species in tab. 10 of that work, which appear to be

nearly white, with reddish nape and rump, the colour of the

underside not being shown.

29*

424 Dr. J.E.Gray’s Synopsis of the American Squirrels